JP7654306B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pinball gaming machines (pachinko machines), reel gaming machines (slot machines), enclosed gaming machines, or medal-less slot machines.

Conventionally, slot machines and pachinko machines are known as examples of gaming machines. Slot machines use a predetermined number of gaming media, and when a start lever is operated, a lottery is held to determine an internal winning combination from among multiple combinations. They also spin multiple reels, stop the reels based on the determined internal winning combination and the result of operating the stop button, and award a profit according to the combination determined to be a winning combination based on the state of the stopped reels (for example, Patent Document 1).

Pachinko machines also typically have obstacles in the playing area of the game board that change the direction in which the game ball falls, as well as prize holes, starting holes, variable prize holes, and other holes into which the game ball can enter. When a game ball enters these holes, the player is given a special privilege, such as the payment of a prize ball.

Some of these gaming machines have lighting effects.

JP 2005-296354 A

However, there is room for improvement in the lighting effects of conventional gaming machines.

In view of the above circumstances, the present invention has an object to provide a gaming machine having distinctive lighting effects.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
A first cover portion including at least a permeable portion having permeability;
A first reflecting portion including at least a reflecting portion capable of reflecting light;
A second reflecting portion including at least a reflecting portion capable of reflecting light;
A light emitting means covered by the first cover portion;
A gaming machine equipped with
The light from the light emitting means is directed toward at least a player by the first cover portion,
The light from the light emitting means is directed toward at least the first reflecting portion by the first cover portion,
The first cover portion has a lens cut portion,
At least a first portion of the lens cut portion is configured to be reflected by the first reflecting portion,
At least a second portion of the lens cut portion is configured to be reflected by the second reflecting portion.
It is characterized by:

The present invention makes it possible to provide a gaming machine with distinctive lighting effects.

1 is an external perspective view of a slot machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a pay line of the slot machine 100. 2 shows a circuit block diagram of a control unit. This is a diagram showing the arrangement of the symbols on each reel (left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112) laid out in a flat plane. 13 is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations, the names of the condition devices, the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, the payout amounts, and remarks. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing of a main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process. (a) A flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. (b) A flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. (c) A flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. (a) A flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. (b) A flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. (c) A flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. (d) A flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500. 1 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the speaker unit 600. 1A is a side view of the rear cover 620. FIG. 1B is a top view of the rear cover 620. FIG. 1C is a side view of the speaker 610. FIG. 1D is a top view of the speaker 610. 1A is a top view of the speaker unit 600. FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view of the speaker unit 600 shown in FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a correct mounting method for the speaker unit 600. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of an incorrect mounting method for the speaker unit 600. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing another example of an incorrect installation method of the speaker unit 600. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of a speaker unit 700 according to a first modified example. 1A is a side view of the rear cover 720. FIG. 1B is a top view of the rear cover 720. FIG. 1C is a side view of the speaker 710. FIG. 1D is a top view of the speaker 710. 1A is a top view of the speaker unit 700. FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view of the speaker unit 700 shown in FIG. 10A to 10C are diagrams showing an example of a method for mounting the speaker unit 700 in chronological order. 10A is an exploded perspective view of a speaker unit 800 according to Modification 2. FIG. 10B is an external perspective view showing a state in which two speaker units 800 are attached to the rear surface of the front door 102. 1A is a side view of the rear cover 820. FIG. 1B is a top view of the rear cover 820. FIG. 1C is a side view of the speaker 810. FIG. 1D is a top view of the speaker 810. 8 is a plan view of the speaker 810 housed in the inner space of the rear cover 820, seen from the underside of the speaker 810. FIG. 10A to 10C are diagrams showing an example of a mounting method for the speaker unit 800 in chronological order. 10A is an exploded perspective view of a speaker unit 850 according to Modification 3. FIG. 10B is an external perspective view showing a state in which two speaker units 850 are attached to the lower rear surface of the front door 102. 13A is a side view of the rear cover 870. FIG. 13B is a top view of the rear cover 870. FIG. 13C is a side view of the speaker 860. FIG. 13D is a top view of the speaker 860. 13 is a rear view of the state in which the speaker 860 and the rear cover 870 have been positioned relative to the front door 102, as viewed from the rear of the front door 102. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the state after the speaker 860 and the rear cover 870 are attached to the front door 102 with screws, as seen from the rear of the front door 102. FIG. 1A is a side view of the speaker unit 850 attached to the left speaker base 880L, as viewed from the left side when viewed from the rear; and FIG. 1B is a side view of the speaker unit 850 attached to the left speaker base 880L, as viewed from the right side when viewed from the rear. 13 is a rear view of the state after the speaker 860 and the rear cover 870 are attached to the front door 102 with screws, as seen from the rear of the front door 102. FIG. 1A is a plan view showing a state in which the reel relay board unit 700 is attached to the power supply relay board unit 600. FIG. 1B is a side view showing a state in which the reel relay board unit 700 is attached to the power supply relay board unit 600. FIG. 1C is a side view showing a state in which the reel relay board unit 700 is removed from the power supply relay board unit 600. 1A is a front view of the power supply relay board unit 600, and FIG. 1B is a rear view of the power supply relay board unit 600. 1 is an exploded front view of the components constituting the power supply relay board unit 600. FIG. 1 is an exploded view of the components constituting the power supply relay board unit 600, as viewed from the rear. 1 is a partially enlarged view showing a main-side substrate accommodating portion 612 of the substrate support 610. FIG. (a) is a front view of a main-side board housing portion 631 according to a modified example, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line Z-Z in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to (b), showing a state in which a main-side power supply relay board 640 is housed in the main-side board housing portion 631. (a) is a front view showing a state in which the main-side power supply relay board 640 is accommodated in the main-side board accommodation section 612 of the board support 610. (b) is a plan view showing a state in which the main-side power supply relay board 640 has been moved leftward as viewed from the front in the main board accommodation section 612. (c) is a plan view showing a state in which the main-side power supply relay board 640 has been moved downward as viewed from the front in the main board accommodation section 612. 1A is a front view showing a state in which the main-side power supply relay board 640 is accommodated in the main-side board accommodation portion 612 of the board support 610 and a mounting screw 646 is attached. 1B is a view seen from the direction of the symbol A in 1A, and is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the mounting screw 646. 36A is a partially enlarged view showing a state before a mounting screw 647 according to a modified example is attached to a board loose-fit boss 625. (b) is a partially enlarged view showing a state after a mounting screw 647 according to a modified example is attached to a board loose-fit boss 625, and corresponds to FIG. 1A is a front view of the reel relay board unit 700 as viewed from the front side, FIG. 1B is a side view of the reel relay board unit 700 as viewed from the right side, and FIG. 1C is an exploded side view of the components constituting the reel relay board unit 700 as viewed from the right side. (a) is a front view of the main reel relay board 742 as viewed from the front side, (b) is a plan view of the main reel relay board 742 as viewed from above, and (c) is a bottom view of the main reel relay board 742 as viewed from the bottom side. 1A is a front view of the main-side housing 744, (b) a plan view of the main-side housing 744 from above, and (c) a front perspective view of the main-side housing 744, (a) as viewed from the front side, (b) a plan view of the main-side housing 744 from above, and (c) a front perspective view of the main-side housing 744, ...b) a plan view of the main-side housing 744 from above, (c) a front perspective view of the main-side housing 744, (c) 1A is a front view of the main-side lid 746 as viewed from the front side, FIG. 1B is a plan view of the main-side lid 746 as viewed from above, and FIG. 1C is a front perspective view of the main-side lid 746 as viewed from diagonally above the front. 1A is a front view of the sheet metal member 710 as viewed from the front side, FIG. 1B is a plan view of the sheet metal member 710 as viewed from above, and FIG. 1C is a rear view of the sheet metal member 710 as viewed from the rear side. 1A is a front view of the main housing 744 fitted into the sheet metal member 710, as viewed from the front side; FIG. 1B is a rear view of the main housing 744 fitted into the sheet metal member 710, as viewed from the rear side; and FIG. 1C is a side view showing how the main housing 744 is attached to the sheet metal member 710. 13A is a side view showing a procedure for attaching a main-side housing 744 and a main-side reel-side relay board 742 to a sheet metal member 710. (b) is a side view showing a procedure for attaching a main-side cover 746 to the sheet metal member 710 to which the main-side housing 744 and the main-side reel-side relay board 742 have been attached. This is a plan view showing the main side reel relay board 742 and the sub side reel relay board 772 side by side. 1 is a front view showing the inside of the main body 101, illustrating the connection relationship between the reel relay board unit 700 and the reels 110 to 112. FIG. (a-1) is a front view of the power supply main board 640 and the power supply sub-board 670 as viewed from the front side. (a-2) is a bottom view of the power supply main board 640 and the power supply sub-board 670 as viewed from the direction indicated by the symbol D (lower side) in the front view of (a-1). (b-1) is a front view of the reel main board 742 and the reel sub-board 772 as viewed from the front side. (b-2) is a plan view of the reel main board 742 and the reel sub-board 772 as viewed from the direction indicated by the symbol U (upper side) in the front view of (b-1). 1A is a side view showing a state before the reel relay board unit 700 is attached to the power supply relay board unit 600. FIG. 1B is a side view showing a state after the reel relay board unit 700 is attached to the power supply relay board unit 600. 9A is a side view of a speaker 910. FIG. 9B is a side view of a speaker unit 900, showing an example in which a screw 930 is held by a yoke 914c of the speaker 910. FIG. 9C is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which a screw 931 is held by a yoke 914c of the speaker 910 through a speaker cover 920. 9A is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which a sheet metal member 710 is held by a yoke 914c of a speaker 910. FIG. 9B is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which a screw 935 and a washer 936 are held by the yoke 914c of the speaker 910. 9A is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which a screw 937 having a setting key 938 hooked thereon is held by a yoke 914c of a speaker 910. FIG. 9B is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing a plurality of examples in which screws 940-942 having setting keys 938 hooked thereon are held by a yoke 914c of a speaker 910. FIG. 13 is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which the screws of the substrate are held by the yoke 914c of the speaker 910. FIG. 9 is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which two boards connected by a connector are held by a yoke 914c of a speaker 910 with screws. FIG. 13 is a side view of the speaker unit 900, illustrating an example in which a screw 944 that falls out of position is held by a yoke 914c of a speaker 910. 9A is a plan view of a speaker unit 950. FIG.9B is a side view of the speaker unit 950, showing an example in which the screws 945 to 948 are held by a yoke 914c of a speaker 910. 1A is a diagram showing a state in which the power supply main board 640 is placed horizontally on the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a state in which the reel main board 742 is placed vertically on the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101. 13A is a diagram showing a state in which the power supply main board 640 is placed at an angle on the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101. FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a state in which the reel main board 742 is placed at an angle on the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101. 13 is a diagram showing a state in which a power supply main board 640 and a reel main board 742 connected by board-to-board connection are placed obliquely on a bottom plate 264 of a main body 101. 1A is a cross-sectional view showing a part of a cross section of a substrate according to an embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 1A is a cross-sectional view showing a part of a cross section of a substrate according to an embodiment of the present invention, and is a schematic diagram showing a state in which light from a light source with a first light intensity is transmitted through the substrate, and FIG. 1A is a cross-sectional view showing a part of a cross section of a substrate according to an embodiment of the present invention, and is a schematic diagram showing a state in which light from a light source with a second light amount is transmitted through the substrate, and FIG. 1A is a cross-sectional view showing a part of a cross section of a substrate according to an embodiment of the present invention, and is a schematic diagram showing a state in which dust adheres to the substrate when there is no light source, and FIG. 1A is a cross-sectional view showing a part of a cross section of a substrate according to an embodiment of the present invention, which is a schematic diagram showing a state in which dust adheres to the substrate when a light source with a first light intensity is present, and FIG. 1A is a cross-sectional view showing a part of a cross section of a substrate according to an embodiment of the present invention, and is a schematic diagram showing a state in which dust adheres to the substrate when a light source with a second light intensity is used. 1A is a cross-sectional view showing a part of a cross section of a substrate according to an embodiment of the present invention, which is a schematic diagram showing a state of a scratched substrate when a light source with a first light amount is present, and FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the slot machine 10 as seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the top lamp unit 11 as viewed obliquely from above. 2A and 2B are schematic diagrams illustrating the structure of a lamp unit. 13A and 13B are schematic diagrams illustrating the structure of a modified example of the lamp unit. 67, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of a light-emitting unit in which a lens cut surface is reflected in multiple reflecting portions, similar to FIG. 67, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a portion of a light-emitting unit in which a lens cut surface is reflected in reflecting portions arranged on both sides, similar to FIG. 67. (a) is a schematic diagram similar to Figure 67 showing a part of an emitting unit reflected in a reflecting portion with a single lens cut surface arranged on both sides, and (b) is a diagram showing a planar inner lens α132 that can be used in place of the inner lens α132 shown in (a). This is a schematic diagram similar to Figure 67 showing two light-emitting units arranged at positions shifted in the front-to-rear direction. This is a schematic diagram similar to Figure 67 showing a light-emitting unit composed of two reflective parts shifted in the front-to-rear direction and a common light-emitting substrate. (a) is a schematic diagram similar to Figure 67 showing an light-emitting unit in which two light-emitting sections and reflecting sections corresponding to each of the light-emitting sections are integrally formed, and (b) is a schematic diagram similar to Figure 67 showing an light-emitting unit in which the light-emitting section is divided into two light-emitting sections but has a common light-emitting substrate and reflecting sections corresponding to each of the light-emitting sections are integrally formed. A diagram showing the entire first movable performance body 161 and second movable performance body 162 shown in Figure 65. 69 from below, and FIG. 70B is a view of the second sheet member 1620 shown in FIG. 69 from below. A diagram showing an example of a combination of performance actions of the first movable performance body 161 on the left and the second movable performance body 162 on the right. 2 is a perspective view showing the rear side of the performance device 16. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship between sensor units SU1, SU2 and light blocking pieces C1, C2. FIG. A right side view of the performance device 16. 73 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of sensor unit SU1 in FIG. 72 (the area surrounded by a dotted circle). FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a sensor unit SU1 and a rib RB. FIG. This is an external oblique view of a pachinko machine as seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear side. FIG. 2 is a simplified front view of the game board. 2 shows a circuit block diagram of a control unit. 1 shows a block diagram of a gaming machine. (a) An example of the special stop pattern. (b) An example of the decorative stop pattern. (c) An example of the normal stop display pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing of a main control unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process. 1A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU of the first sub-controller, FIG. 1B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-controller, and FIG. 1C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-controller. 1A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU of the second sub-control unit, FIG. 1B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit, and FIG. 1C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit. 1A is a flow chart of a main process executed by a CPU of a liquid crystal control unit, FIG. 1B is a flow chart of a command reception interrupt process of the liquid crystal control unit, FIG. 1C is a flow chart of a timer interrupt process of the liquid crystal control unit, and FIG. 1D is a flow chart of a VDP image control process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of the position of a lighting unit having a lighting board. This is a cross-sectional view of Figure 88 taken along line aa. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a wiring example. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a wiring structure. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a wiring structure. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a wiring structure. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a wiring structure. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a wiring structure. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a wiring structure. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a wiring structure. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a wiring structure. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a wiring structure. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a wiring structure. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a liquid crystal control board. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of a liquid crystal control board. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a confirmation prompting structure. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a confirmation prompting structure. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a confirmation prompting structure. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a confirmation prompting structure. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a confirmation prompting structure. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a confirmation prompting structure. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a confirmation prompting structure. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a confirmation prompting structure. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a confirmation prompting structure. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a confirmation prompting structure. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of an example of a confirmation prompting structure. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine according to an embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front view of the slot machine of the embodiment with the front door open. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of a control unit of the slot machine according to the embodiment. 1A is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel laid out in a flat plane, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the types of winning roles (including activated roles), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning role, and the activation or payout of each winning role. 4 is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing of a main control unit. 11 is a flowchart showing the flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process. 1A is a flowchart of the main processing of the first sub-control unit; FIG. 1B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit; and FIG. 1C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit. (a) is a flowchart of the main processing of the second sub-control unit, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit, (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit, and (d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-control unit. 1A is a plan view of the circuit board, FIG. 1B is a bottom view of the circuit board, and FIG. 1A and 1B are side views of a circuit board. 4A and 4B are diagrams illustrating the function of a circuit board. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of use of a circuit board. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of use of a circuit board. 1A and 1B are diagrams illustrating examples of solder on a circuit board. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of use of a modified circuit board. 1A is a plan view of another circuit board, FIG. 1B is a bottom view of another circuit board, and FIG. 1C is a side view of another circuit board. FIG. 13 is a side view of another circuit board. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of use of another circuit board. 1A is a plan view of yet another circuit board, FIG. 1B is a bottom view of yet another circuit board, and FIG. 1C is a side view of yet another circuit board. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of use of yet another circuit board. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention; 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing by a main control unit of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of a main control unit timer interrupt process of the slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing the flow of the first sub-control unit main processing, first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing of a slot machine of one embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing the flow of the second sub-control unit main processing, second sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and second sub-control unit image control processing of a slot machine of one embodiment of the present invention. 1A is a circuit block diagram of the main control unit of a slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, FIG. 1B is a table showing the contents of the start lever operation of a slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 1C is an external view of a group of monitor LEDs of a slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. 1A and 1B are diagrams showing the relationship between game operations of a slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention and the lighting state of related lamps. 1A and 1B are diagrams showing the relationship between game operations of a slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention and the lighting state of related lamps. 1A and 1B are diagrams showing the relationship between game operations of a slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention and the lighting state of related lamps. 1A and 1B are diagrams showing the relationship between game operations of a slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention and the lighting state of related lamps. 1A and 1B are diagrams showing the relationship between game operations of a slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention and the lighting state of related lamps. 1 is a diagram showing the relationship between game operations of a slot machine according to one embodiment of the present invention and the lighting state of related lamps. FIG.

<<Embodiment 1>>
Hereinafter, a gaming machine (slot machine) according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 1. Fig. 1 is a perspective view of the appearance of the slot machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and comprises a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed relative to the main body 101. Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of patterns arranged on the outer periphery are housed inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are configured to rotate inside the slot machine 100. These reels 110 to 112 are rotated by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, each symbol is printed at equal intervals on a strip-shaped member in appropriate numbers, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 110-112 (see Figure 4). When viewed by the player, the symbols on the reels 110-112 are displayed vertically in roughly threes through symbol display windows 113 provided in front of each reel 110-112, making a total of nine symbols visible.

By spinning each of the reels 110-112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110-112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of multiple types of symbols. Note that, in addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal display devices can also be used as such display devices. In this embodiment, three reels are provided inside and at the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and their installation positions are not limited to this.

A backlight 264 (see FIG. 18) is provided on the back of each of the reels 110 to 112 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 (details will be described later). Inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (also called an index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112, and a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor. Based on the detection results of this sensor, the position of the symbols on the reel in the rotational direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The notification lamp 123 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning role (specifically, special role 1 or special role 2) has been internally won in an internal lottery described below, or that a bonus game is in progress (special role 1 and 2 game state). The medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp that notifies the player that a medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if a replay, which is one of the winning roles, was won in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

The bet buttons (first operating means) 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one medal is inserted up to a maximum of three medals, when the bet button 131 is pressed, two medals are inserted, and when the bet button 132 is pressed, three medals are inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as the MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up the number of lamps corresponding to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 121 lights up to indicate that the game can be started.

The effect button 156 is an operating means that can be operated by the player. In this embodiment, it is configured as a button that can be pressed by the player, and is used for various effects. The operating means used for such effects is not limited to a button, and may be configured as, for example, a lever or a touch panel, or multiple operating means may be provided.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot through which the player inserts medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) through the medal insertion slot 141; the term "insertion" includes both.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (e.g., the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical form. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning some kind of winning combination, and is also used as an instruction monitor for performing push order presentations. In this example, the stored number display 125, game information display 126, and payout number display 127 are seven-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever (second operating means) 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. The operation of the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons (stop buttons) 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have begun to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each of the reels 110 to 112. Note that light-emitting elements may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light-emitting elements can be lit to notify the player.

Hereinafter, the operations performed on the stop buttons 137 to 139 are referred to as stop operations, with the first stop operation being referred to as the first stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as the "first stop" or "first stop"), the next stop operation being referred to as the second stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as the "second stop" or "second stop"), and the final stop operation being referred to as the third stop operation (hereinafter also referred to as the "third stop" or "third stop").

The reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are called the first stop reel, the second stop reel, and the third stop reel, respectively. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the reels 110 to 112 that are spinning is called the operation order (or push order).

If the left stop button 137 is represented as "left or R", the middle stop button 138 as "middle or C", and the right stop button 139 as "right or R", there are six types of operation sequences (pressing order): (1) left → middle → right operation sequence (left middle right or LCR), (2) left → right → middle operation sequence (left right middle or LRC), (3) middle → left → right operation sequence (middle left right or CLR), (4) middle → right → left operation sequence (middle right left or CRL), (5) right → left → middle operation sequence (right left middle or RLC), and (6) right → middle → left operation sequence (right middle left or RCL).

The medal return button 133 is a button that can be pressed to remove medals that have been inserted and become stuck. The settlement button 134 is a button that can be used to settle medals that have been electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals that have been bet, and to dispense them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key can be inserted to unlock the front door 102 of the slot machine 100.

A title panel 162 is provided below the stop button unit 136 to display the model name and to attach various certificate stamps. A medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162. A sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to liven up the game. A performance device 160 is provided above the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided above the performance device 160.

This presentation device 160 is equipped with a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two shutters, a right shutter 163a and a left shutter 163b, which can be opened and closed horizontally, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (presentation image display device) disposed on the rear side of this shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 appears on the front (player side) of the slot machine 100.

Note that the display device does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, but may be any display device capable of displaying various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. The display screen is rectangular and configured so that the player can view the entire screen. In this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may also be square. Also, decorations (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decorations, making the display screen appear irregular. In this embodiment, the display screen is flat, but it may also be curved.

Inside the main body 101, there are provided a setting key that can be turned on and off by rotating it, and a setting switch that can be pressed down to change settings (change settings) or check settings. The setting key is an operating means for starting to change settings (settings 1 to 6 in this example) or check settings, and the setting switch is one of the setting means that can set one of multiple settings.

<Winning line>
Next, the pay lines will be described with reference to Fig. 2. Fig. 2 is a diagram showing an example of the pay lines of the slot machine 100.

As explained using Figure 1, when viewed by a player, the symbols on the reels 110-112 are displayed vertically in roughly three windows 113 provided in front of each reel 110-112, making a total of nine symbols visible.

Specifically, the symbol displayed on the top of the left reel 110 (position 1 in the figure; also called symbol position 1) is called the left reel top symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle of the left reel 110 (position 2 in the figure; also called symbol position 2) is called the left reel middle symbol, and the symbol displayed on the bottom of the left reel 110 (position 3 in the figure; also called symbol position 3) is called the left reel bottom symbol.

The symbol displayed on the top row of middle reel 111 (position 4 in the figure; also called symbol position 4) is called the middle reel top pattern, the symbol displayed on the middle row of middle reel 111 (position 5 in the figure; also called symbol position 5) is called the middle reel middle pattern, and the symbol displayed on the bottom row of middle reel 111 (position 6 in the figure; also called symbol position 6) is called the middle reel bottom pattern.

The symbol displayed on the top row of the right reel 112 (position 7 in the figure; also called symbol position 7) is called the right reel top row symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 8 in the figure; also called symbol position 8) is called the right reel middle row symbol, and the symbol displayed on the bottom row of the right reel 112 (position 9 in the figure; also called symbol position 9) is called the right reel bottom row symbol.

In this embodiment, the only winning line provided is the middle winning line L1 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "winning line L1"), which is composed of the middle pattern on the left reel (pattern position 2), the middle pattern on the middle reel (pattern position 5), and the middle pattern on the right reel (pattern position 8).

The winning line here is a line set at the stopping position of the symbols visible through the symbol display window 113, and is the line that determines whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination described with reference to FIG. 5 is displayed (whether or not it is aligned). The winning line that is active (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as the "active line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as gaming media.

The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a three-coin bet-only machine, and when fewer than three medals are inserted, no winning lines are active. When three medals are bet, winning line L1 is active. When the winning lines are active, the player can start playing by operating the start lever 135.

Hereinafter, in the symbol display window 113, symbol positions 2, 5, and 8 on the winning line L1 may be referred to as "winning positions," and the other symbol positions, i.e., symbol positions 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, and 9, may be referred to as "non-winning positions." In other words, a winning position is a position on the winning line where a symbol that constitutes a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination stops.

The number of winning lines is not limited to one. For example, in addition to winning line L1, an upper winning line consisting of the upper symbols on the left reel, the upper symbols on the middle reel, and the upper symbols on the right reel, and a lower winning line consisting of the lower symbols on the left reel, the lower symbols on the middle reel, and the lower symbols on the right reel, for a total of three lines, may be set as valid winning lines, or a number of winning lines according to the number of medals bet may be set as valid winning lines.

<Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to Figure 3. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control section of the slot machine 100 is broadly composed of a main control section 300 (first control means) which mainly controls the game, a first sub-control section 400 (second control means) which mainly controls the presentation in response to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control section 300, and a second sub-control section 500 (second control means) which controls various devices based on the commands sent by the first sub-control section 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control program data, lottery data used during internal lottery of winning combinations, and reel stop positions, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later.

The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time for interrupts is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a random number generation circuit 316 (which has two random number generation circuits built in) that derives a number in the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start-up signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When a start-up signal is input from this start-up signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (starts the main control unit main processing described below).

The random number generation circuit 316 generates random numbers to be used in the basic circuit 302. There are two main methods for generating random numbers in the random number generation circuit 316: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a number that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is obtained and the number is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode uses a seed of a random number to perform a calculation using a predetermined function (e.g., a modulus function) and derives the result of this calculation as a random number. The second method reads a number from a random number table in which numbers in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read number as a random number. The random number generation circuit 316 obtains irregular values by using white noise superimposed on the signals input from the various sensors 318 to the sensor circuit 320. The random number generation circuit 316 uses the value thus obtained as the initial value for a counter that counts up (down) in counter mode, as a seed for a random number, or when determining the start position for reading the random number table.

The main control unit 300 also includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 monitors the status of various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal acceptance sensor for medals inserted from medal insertion slot 141, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, optical sensor of reel 110, optical sensor of reel 111, optical sensor of reel 112, etc.) at each interrupt time.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 receives this signal, latches the value at that timing, and stores it in a register that stores random numbers to be used in the lottery.

Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion port 141, and detect whether a medal has passed through. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect the start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, and stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, and bet button 132 sensor are provided on each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and detect the insertion operation when medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the medals electronically stored are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact sensor or a contact sensor.

The optical sensors of reel 110, reel 111, and reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of each of reels 110 to 112, and go to L level every time a light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes by. When CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 that selects inserted medals, a drive circuit 326 that drives the motor provided in the medal payout device 180, and a drive circuit 328 that drives various lamps 336 (winning line indicator lamp 120, notification lamp 123, medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, number of stored medals indicator 125, game information indicator 126, payout number indicator 127).

In addition, an information output circuit 334 (external centralized terminal board 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (e.g., game status) of the slot machine 100 to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from a power supply management unit (not shown), and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power supply is below a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400, enabling communication with the first sub-control unit 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control section>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands sent by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control commands. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, data for controlling the backlight lighting pattern and various displays, etc.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sound source IC 418, which is connected to speakers 272, 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272, 277 in response to commands from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and sound data acquired from this ROM is amplified by the amplifier and output from the speakers 272, 277.

The first sub-controller 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, to which various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.) are connected via an input/output interface.

The first sub-controller 400 also includes a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is connected to the shutter 163 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sensor circuit 426, which is connected via an input interface to a shutter sensor 428 capable of detecting the position of the shutter 163 and an effect button sensor 430 capable of detecting the pressing operation of the effect button 156. The CPU 404 monitors the status of the shutter sensor 428 and the effect button sensor 430 at each interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the performance device 160, including display control of the performance image display device 157 (hereinafter also referred to as the "liquid crystal display device 157"). Note that the second sub-control unit 500 may be configured with multiple control units, such as a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 157 and a control unit that controls various performance drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163).

The second sub-control unit 500 has a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on these control commands. This basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling the input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 is also provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), which is connected to a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the performance image display device 157.

<Pattern arrangement>
Next, the arrangement of symbols on each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each of the reels (left reel 110, center reel 111, right reel 112) in a two-dimensional manner.

On each of the reels 110 to 112, a predetermined number of frames (20 frames numbered 0 to 19) of multiple types of symbols (9 types in this embodiment) are arranged as shown on the right side of the figure. The numbers 0 to 19 shown on the left side of the figure indicate the arrangement position of the symbols on each of the reels 110 to 112. For example, in this embodiment, the "watermelon symbol" is arranged on the number 0 frame of the left reel 110, the "bell symbol" is arranged on the number 1 frame of the middle reel 111, and the "replay symbol" is arranged on the number 0 frame of the right reel 112.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 5. Fig. 5 is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations, the names of the condition devices, the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, the payout amounts, and remarks.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include special combinations (special combination 1, special combination 2) and general combinations (replay combinations 1-3, minor combinations 1-5). Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations and can be selected arbitrarily. Some winning combinations are not shown in FIG. 5.

<Types of winning roles/special roles>
Among the winning combinations in this embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations that transition to a special game state in which a predetermined benefit is given to the player. The replay combination is a combination that allows replay without inserting a new medal (a combination that gives replay). These winning combinations are sometimes called "operation combinations".

In addition, in this embodiment, "winning" also includes the case where a symbol combination of an operating role that does not involve a medal payout (does not involve the payment of medals) is displayed on the winning line, and includes, for example, winning special role 1, special role 2, and replay role.

Special role 1 and special role 2 are winning roles in which the game state transitions to the special role 1/2 internal winning state (RT3) upon internal winning, and the game state transitions to the special role 1/2 game state (RT4) upon winning. Note that if more than a specified number of medals (e.g. 200 medals) are paid out in the special role 1/2 game state (RT4), the game state transitions to the low replay probability state (RT1). Note that each game state (RT1 to RT4) will be described later.

The symbol combinations that correspond to special role 1 (BB) are "Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1 symbol" or "Seven 2 symbol-Seven 2 symbol-Seven 2 symbol," and the symbol combination that corresponds to special role 2 (RB) is "BAR symbol-BAR symbol-BAR symbol."

When special role 1 or special role 2 is internally won, the special role internal win flag corresponding to this internally won role is set to ON (stored in a specified area of RAM 308 of main control unit 300). This flag remains ON until the internally won role is won, making it easier to win that internally won role in subsequent games. In other words, in a game in which special role 1 or special role 2 is internally won, even if the special role is not won, the special role will be internally won in the next or subsequent games, making it easier to win the symbol combination corresponding to the special role.

<Types of winning roles/replay roles>
The replay combinations 1 to 3 are winning combinations (operating combinations) that allow the player to play the next game without inserting medals (game media), and no medals are paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are as shown in FIG.

The replay role may be any role that allows the player to play the next game without inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, when a replay role is won, medals may be automatically inserted in the next game (the number of medals inserted is reset in the medal insertion number storage area), or the medals inserted in the game in which the replay role was won may be carried over and used in the next game. The special replay, which will be described later, is also one type of replay role.

<Types of winning roles/small roles>
Small prize 1 to small prize 5 are winning prizes in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out (there is a payout number).

Minor win 1 (watermelon) is a winning combination in which the symbol combination "watermelon - watermelon - watermelon" is displayed statically on the winning line L1, and five medals are paid out.

Minor win 2 (Cherry) is a winning combination in which the symbol combination "Cherry symbol-ANY-ANY" is displayed statically on the winning line L1, and two medals are paid out. Note that for the symbol combination "Cherry symbol-ANY-ANY", the symbol on the left reel 110 needs to be the "Cherry symbol", and the symbols on the center reel 111 and right reel 112 can be any symbol.

Hereafter, these minor prizes 1 (watermelon) and 2 (cherry) may be collectively referred to as "rare prizes", but rare prizes are not limited to these winning prizes, and may be either one of the winning prizes, or may include other winning prizes.

When a rare combination is won in the AT state, which will be described later, a lottery is held to add to the number of games or the number of sets (making it easier to win the lottery). On the other hand, when a rare combination is won in the ED state, a lottery is not held to add to the number of games or the number of sets.

Small prize 3 (push order bell) is made up of six types of winning prizes, small prize 3a to small prize 3f. In this example, a lottery is drawn to select one of the winning prizes, small prize 3a to small prize 3f, with a predetermined probability (approximately 1/6 in this example, common to all settings), and if the operation sequence (push order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 to stop the play matches the winning prize that has been internally selected, the player wins and 12 medals are paid out. In other words, small prize 3 (push order bell) is an operation mode result (winning prize) whose degree of advantage varies depending on the operation mode of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

Minor win 4 (common bell) is a winning combination in which the symbol combination "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" is displayed on the winning line L1 regardless of the order (press order) or timing of the stop operations using the stop buttons 137-139, and 12 medals are paid out.

Minor win 5 (1 coin win) is a winning combination in which the symbol combination "Replay symbol - Replay symbol - Blank 1 symbol" is displayed on the winning line L1 and 1 coin is paid out, regardless of the order (press order) or timing of the stop operations using the stop buttons 137 to 139.

<Types of RT game states>
Next, the types and transitions of the RT game states in the slot machine 100 will be described.

<Low probability of replay (RT1)>
The low replay probability state (RT1) is the default RT-type gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as the "normal gaming state") that is initially set immediately after the slot machine 100 is turned on, and is a gaming state that is relatively more disadvantageous to the player than other gaming states.

In this example, in this low replay probability state (RT1), if replay role 2 (promotion replay 1) or replay role 3 (promotion replay 2) is won, the state transitions to a high replay probability state (RT2) described below. Also, in this low replay probability state (RT1), if special role 1 or special role 2 is internally won, the state transitions to a special role 1/2 internal win state (RT3) described below.

<High replay probability state (RT2)>
The high replay probability state is a game state in which the internal winning probability of replay is higher than that of the low replay probability state (RT1).

In this example, if special role 1 or special role 2 is internally won in this high replay probability state (RT2), the game will transition to the special role 1/2 internal win state (RT3), which will be described later.

<Special Role 1 & 2 Internal Winning State (RT3)>
The special role 1/2 internal winning state (RT3) is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to special role 1 or special role 2 is set to ON, and the player can perform a stop operation at a specified timing to display the symbol combination corresponding to the special role corresponding to this flag.

In this example, if special role 1 or special role 2 is won in this special role 1/2 internal winning state (RT3), the game will transition to the special game state (RT4) described below.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special gaming state (RT4) is the most advantageous gaming state for the player among all gaming states. In this example, when a specified number of coins (e.g., 200 coins) is paid out in the special gaming state (RT4), the state transitions to the low replay probability state (RT1).

In this example, the conditions for ending the special game state (RT4) are not particularly limited, and may be, for example, when a predetermined combination is internally won, when a predetermined number of wins (e.g., eight wins) have been made, or when a predetermined number of games have been played (e.g., six games).

<AT game state transition>
Next, the gaming state of the AT system will be described.

The game states of the AT system are broadly divided into low navigation states and high navigation states. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is low, and is also called the normal mode, non-advantageous zone, or normal zone. The high navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is higher than in the low navigation state, and is also called the AT mode or advantageous zone.

Here, the operation navigation refers to a presentation that notifies the user of the stop operation mode of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (for example, the correct operation sequence or the timing of the stop operation) in order to acquire medals or maintain an advantageous gaming state. For example, this includes a presentation that notifies the user of the correct operation sequence for a push order role (for example, minor role 3 (push order bell LCR)) (for example, a presentation that displays the characters "left → center → right").

When a player performs a stop operation according to the operation content of the operation navigation, the player will achieve a favorable result, so the high navigation state is a more favorable gaming state for the player than the low navigation state. Here, favorable specifically means that the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets on the gaming machine when playing for a specified period of time, the so-called payout rate (ball payout rate), is favorable.

In this example, the low navigation state is a state in which the probability of executing the operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is a state in which the probability of executing the operation navigation is higher than in the low navigation state, but the low navigation state may be a state in which the operation navigation is not executed, and the high navigation state may be a state in which the operation navigation is executed.

Each game state of the AT system is subdivided and managed, and these are called presentation states. In detail, the presentation state of the low navigation state is the normal game state, and the presentation state of the high navigation state includes the normal state, the confirmation notification state, the judgement state, the pullback state, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the ED (ending) state. In principle, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the ED state are states in which the number of balls released increases.

In this embodiment, if a certain condition is met in the normal game state in the low navigation state (for example, if a winning combination other than a miss is won), the game transitions to the normal state in the high navigation state. After that, the game transitions in the order of, for example, confirmation notification state → AT1 state → judge state, and from this judge state, there is a route to transition via a pullback state to the normal game state or AT2 state, or a route to transition directly from the judge state to the AT2 state.

The AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state) is a state in which AT play is possible a specified number of times (for example, 30 games per set), and is a more advantageous state for the player than the normal play state in a low navigation state or the normal state in a high navigation state.

In this AT game, at the start of the AT game, a set continuation lottery (for example, a lottery with a 1/4 winning probability) is held to determine whether or not to continue the AT game, and if this set continuation lottery is won, a predetermined number of AT games (in this example, one set of 30 games) are awarded and the AT state is extended. Also, if the conditions for transitioning to the normal game state are met in the AT state (in this example, when all games in the AT state have been played), the game will transition to the normal game state from the next game.

In addition, when the number of games remaining in the high navigation state falls below a predetermined number (e.g., 20 games), the game transitions to an ED state, in which an ED (ending) performance is executed to indicate the end of the high navigation state.

The condition for transitioning to the ED state is not limited to the number of remaining games in the high navigation state being a predetermined number of games (e.g., 20 games) or less; for example, the predetermined number of games may be more or less than 20 games, or "number of coins won + expected difference in number of coins won > 2000".

<Main processing of main control unit>
First, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 6. Note that Fig. 6 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit main process.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start-up signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when power is applied. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that receives this start-up signal is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 according to the control program previously stored in the ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are made in step S101. These initial settings include setting the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting interrupt prohibition, initial settings of the I/O 310, initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308, and setting operation permission and initial values for the WDT 314.

In step S102, the bet number setting/start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, it is checked whether medals have been inserted, and preparations are made to send an insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted. If a replay role was won in the previous game, a process is performed to insert the same number of medals as the number inserted in the previous game, eliminating the need for the player to insert medals. It also checks whether the start lever 135 has been operated, and if so, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, the number of inserted medals is determined, and a winning line determination process is performed to determine the valid winning lines.

In step S104, the random number generated by the random number generating circuit 316 is obtained, and a winning role internal lottery process is performed. In the winning role internal lottery process, the winning role lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current game state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the obtained random number value, and preparations are made to send an internal lottery command indicating the result of this internal lottery to the first sub-control unit 400. If any winning role (including an activated role) is internally won as a result of the internal lottery, the flag for that winning role is turned on.

In step S105, a reel stop data selection process is performed to select reel stop data based on the internal lottery results of the winning combination internal lottery process. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In addition, in step S105, preparations are made to send a reel stop data command including information about the selected reel stop data to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S106, a presentation state control process is executed based on the start lever operation to control the game state of the AT system described above. In step S107, a presentation process is executed. In this presentation process, various presentations are controlled, etc.

In step S108, the reel rotation start process is executed, and all reels 110 to 112 start rotating.

In step S109, a reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any of the stop buttons is pressed, a stop table of the reel stop data is referenced to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button, and one of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop table. When all of the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S110. In step S109, for each stop operation, preparations are made to send to the first sub-control unit 400 a stop button acceptance command related to the stop button 137-139 that was operated to stop (more specifically, for the first stop operation, a stop button acceptance 1 command, for the second stop operation, a stop button acceptance 2 command, and for the third stop operation, a stop button acceptance 3 command), and for each reel stop, preparations are made to send to the first sub-control unit 400 a reel stop command related to the reel stop position (more specifically, for the first stopped reel, a reel stop 1 command, for the second stop operation, a reel stop 2 command, and for the third stop operation, a reel stop 3 command).

In step S110, a winning determination process is performed to determine whether a winning combination has been achieved. In this winning determination process, if a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been achieved. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is lined up on the activated winning line, it is determined that minor combination 3 (Bell) has been achieved. In addition, in this step S110, preparations are made to send a winning determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, a medal awarding process is performed. In the medal awarding process, if a winning combination that has a payout is achieved, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S112, a game state control process is performed. In the game state control process, processing related to the transition of each game state of the RT system is performed, and the game state is transitioned when the start condition or end condition is met. In addition, preparations are made to send a game state command that includes information indicating the current game state of the RT system.

In step S113, the presentation state control process is executed to control the game state of the AT system described above. In step S114, the high-navigation state termination process is executed to terminate the high-navigation state.

This completes one game. After this, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-mentioned process. Note that the various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting and transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 7) of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 7. The figure is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger to start main control unit timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle.

In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. This timer interrupt start process includes processes such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to a stack area.

In step S202, WDT314 is periodically restarted (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt) so that the count value of WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that a processing abnormality is not detected).

In step S203, an input port status update process is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input ports of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the presence or absence of the detection signals is stored in signal status storage areas partitioned for each of the various sensors 318 in the RAM 308.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed. In step S2005, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S206, a command setting and transmission process is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type contained in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine presentation control in response to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and it becomes possible to determine the content of presentation control based on the command data information contained in the output schedule information.

In step S207, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to an information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring processing, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area in step S203 are first read out to monitor for errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc., and if an error is detected (not shown), error processing is executed. Furthermore, depending on the current game state, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various seven-segment (SEG) displays are set.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is ON or not. If the low voltage signal is ON (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low voltage signal is OFF (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes are performed to end the timer interrupt end process. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S2001 are set back to the original registers. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 7.

On the other hand, in step S211, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power outage when power is restored are saved as recovery data in a specified area of RAM 308, power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed, and then the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG. 7.

<Processing of first sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using Figure 8. Note that Figure 8 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. Figure 8 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. Figure 8 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 8(a).

When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. This initialization process involves initial settings of the input/output ports and initialization of the memory area in RAM 408. In this process, an area for storing internal win information, which is information that indicates the result of an internal win, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information that indicates the game status, are provided in RAM 408.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S303, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S304, command processing is executed, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300.

In step S305, a performance control process is performed. Here, the performance is prepared according to the performance reservation information in the performance reservation area provided in RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, processing such as reading the performance data from ROM 406, and updating the performance data if it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if the performance data read out in step S305 contains a command for the sound source IC 418, this command is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if the performance data read out in step S305 contains a command for the various lamps 420, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if the performance data read out in step S305 contains a command for the shutter 163, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. In step S309, information output processing is performed to set up sending a command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if the performance data read out in step S305 contains a command to send to the second sub-control unit 500, this control command is set up to be output, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 8(b). This command reception interrupt processing is processing that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, using FIG. 8(c), the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and executes the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period in response to this timer interrupt.

In step S501, the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in Figure 8 (a) is incremented by 1 and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10). In step S502, the command set in step S309 is sent to the second sub-control unit 500, and the random number value for performance is updated, etc.

<Processing of the second sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using Figure 9. Figure 9(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 9(b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 9(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 9(d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S601 in FIG. 9(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S601. In this initialization process, the input/output port initial settings, the memory area in the RAM 508, the memory area in the VRAM 536, etc. are initialized.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S603. In step S4003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S605, performance control processing is performed. Specifically, if a new command is received in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, processing is executed to read performance data for image control related to the background image from ROM 506. In addition, processing is executed to read other performance data from ROM 506, and if the performance data needs to be updated, processing to update the performance data is executed.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail below) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if the performance data read in step S605 contains an image control command, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control related to the display image (notification image, background image) is executed. When this image control processing is completed, the process returns to step S602.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 9(b). This command reception interrupt processing is processing that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in RAM 508.

Next, using FIG. 9(c), we will explain the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and executes the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period in response to this timer interrupt.

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 9(a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10). In step S802, processing such as updating the random number value for presentation is performed.

Next, the image control processing of step S606 in the main processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 9(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of display area A and display area B of the VRAM 536. As a result, one frame of image stored in a display area not designated as a drawing area is displayed on the performance image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the destination address of the VRAM 536), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 534 based on the position information table, and then sets a command to start transferring image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536. The VDP 534 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on the command set in the attribute register. The VDP 534 then outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S902, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from VDP534. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S903; if not, the process waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S903, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table and attribute data, etc. Here, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 on information about the image data that constitutes the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 536, image size, VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) in order to form a display image in display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S901. The VDP 534 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the command stored in the attribute register.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing the image in the frame buffer in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 504.

In step S905, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal has been input from VDP 534 based on the end of image drawing. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S906; if not, the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S906, the scene display counter, which is set in a specified area of RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Speaker mounting structure>
Next, the speaker mounting structure in the slot machine 100 will be described.

Figure 10 is a front view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open. The main body 101 is a box body surrounded by a top panel 261, a left side panel 260, a right side panel 260, a bottom panel 264, and a back panel 242, and opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores a main control board therein is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the back panel 242, and three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below this main control board storage case 210. To the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, i.e., on the left side panel 260 as viewed from the front, a sub-control board storage case 220 that stores a sub-control board therein is arranged. Additionally, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached to the side panel 260 on the right side, which is connected to the main control board and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device.

Then, the medal payout device 180 (a device that pays out medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the lower panel 264, and above this medal payout device 180, i.e., below the reels 110 to 112, a power supply device 252 having a power board is disposed, and a power switch 244 is disposed on the front side of the power supply device 252. The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and each device, such as the main control unit 300, sub control units 400, 500, which will be described later. Furthermore, it is equipped with a storage circuit (e.g. a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (e.g. the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g. 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off.

The medal auxiliary storage 240 is provided to the right of the medal payout device 180, with an overflow terminal provided behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connector for connecting a power cord 264, which is connected to the power cord 264 and extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back panel 242 of the main body 101.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side panel 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the pattern display window 113 are provided the performance device 160, a performance control board (not shown) that controls this performance device 160, and an upper speaker 272. Below the pattern display window 113 are provided the medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, and a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals, etc. into the medal tray 161. Furthermore, a speaker unit 600 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 181.

<Speaker mounting structure/speaker unit configuration>
Next, the configuration of the speaker unit 600 will be described with reference to Fig. 11. Fig. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the speaker unit 600.

The speaker unit 600 is screwed to the lower left side of the rear surface of the front door 102 as described with reference to FIG. 10, and as shown in FIG. 11, it is composed of a low-frequency output speaker 610 (first component) with a large diaphragm and a rear cover 620 (second component) that covers the rear side of the speaker 610, and is attached to a speaker pedestal 630 (base) formed on the rear surface of the front door 102.

<Speaker mounting structure/speaker base>
The speaker base 630 (base) comprises an outer frame 631 formed to match the approximately rectangular outer shape of the flange 614 of the speaker 610, mounting sleeves 632 formed at each of the four inner corners of the outer frame 631 for screwing the speaker 610 and rear cover 620 to the front door 102, and a circular inner frame 633 against which the front peripheral edge of the frame 612 of the speaker 610 abuts.

A sound hole 161 consisting of multiple holes is formed inside the inner frame portion 633 of the speaker base 630, and the low-pitched sound output from the speaker 610 is output to the outside of the slot machine 100 through this sound hole 161.

<Speaker installation structure/speaker, rear cover>
Next, the speaker 610 and the rear cover 620 that constitute the speaker unit 600 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

Fig. 12(a) is a side view of the rear cover 620, and Fig. 12(b) is a top view of the rear cover 620. Fig. 12(c) is a side view of the speaker 610, and Fig. 12(d) is a top view of the speaker 610. Fig. 13(a) is a top view of the speaker unit 600, and Fig. 13(b) is a cross-sectional view along line A-A of the speaker unit 600 shown in Fig. 13(a).

<Speaker mounting structure/speaker>
Speaker 610 (first member) is a cone-type dynamic speaker, and as shown in Figures 12(c) and 13(b), is roughly composed of an electromagnetic circuit 611 consisting of a voice coil and a magnet, and vibrating a diaphragm 613 (described later) in response to an electric signal, a frame 612 that supports the electromagnetic circuit 611, the diaphragm 613 that vibrates to generate sound, and a flange 614 to which this diaphragm 613 is fixed so that it can vibrate.

The frame 612 is a cylindrical metal ring frame that widens slightly toward the front, and has multiple openings 615 (see FIG. 11) formed in the circumferential direction on the side to allow air around the diaphragm 613 to escape. That is, multiple openings 615 are formed in the circumferential direction on the side of the frame 612, and supports 612a are formed in the front-to-rear direction between the openings 615. The diaphragm 613 is formed in a cone shape that opens toward the front, using a flexible material such as paper.

As shown in FIG. 12(d), dedicated screw holes 616a (first through holes) for screwing the speaker 610 to the front door 102 are formed in the upper left and lower right corners of the flange 614. In addition, shared screw holes 616b (second through holes) for screwing the speaker 610 and rear cover 620 to the front door 102 are formed in the lower left and upper right corners of the flange 614.

In this example, two dedicated screw holes 616a (first through holes) are arranged diagonally (at the vertices of the ends of the diagonal) at the upper left and lower right corners on the outer edge of the flange 614, and two shared screw holes 616b (second through holes) are arranged diagonally (at the vertices of the ends of the diagonal) at the lower left and upper right corners on the outer edge of the flange 614. As a result, the dedicated screw holes 616a (first through holes) and the shared screw holes 616b (second through holes) are arranged alternately at a predetermined interval around the outer periphery of the flange 614.

According to this example, when the speaker 610 (first member) is fixed to the front door 102 (base) using the dedicated screw hole 616a (first through hole) for positioning, or when only the rear cover 620 (second member) is removed from the front door 102 (base), the speaker 610 (first member) can be stably fixed, thereby improving safety and workability.

The positions and numbers of the "first through hole" and "second through hole" according to the present invention are not limited to this example. For example, one dedicated screw hole 616a (first through hole) may be arranged only in either the upper left corner or the lower right corner on the outer edge of the flange 614, and one common screw hole 616b (second through hole) may be arranged only in either the lower left corner or the upper right corner on the outer edge of the flange 614. In addition, three or more dedicated screw holes 616a (first through hole) may be arranged on the outer edge of the flange 614, and three or more common screw holes 616b (second through hole) may be arranged on the outer edge of the flange 614, and the number of dedicated screw holes 616a (first through hole) and common screw holes 616b (second through hole) may not be the same.

The flange 614 also functions as a member that supports the diaphragm 613 so that it can vibrate, and the outer edge 613a (see FIG. 13(b)) of the diaphragm 613, which passes through the opening of the flange 614 and appears on the rear side of the flange 614, is fixed to the rear side of the flange 614. The thickness of the flange 614 is designed to be greater than the maximum vibration amplitude of the diaphragm 613 so as not to impede the vibration of the diaphragm 613.

In this example, the rear cover 620 is placed on the rear of the speaker 610, but when the rear cover 620 is fixed to the speaker base 630 of the front door 102, the minimum distance between the rear cover 620 and the front door 102 is designed to be longer than the thickness of the flange 614 so as not to impede the vibration of the diaphragm 613.

<Speaker mounting structure/rear cover>
Rear cover 620 (second member) is a resin member that houses most of speaker 610 inside. In detail, rear cover 620 has a circular opening 621 formed on the rear side that exposes the rear end of speaker 610 (part of electromagnetic circuit 611), and is provided with a stepped cylindrical side wall portion 622 that widens slightly toward the front.

As shown in FIG. 12(b), the rear cover 620 has two protruding pieces 623a and two protruding pieces 623b with screw holes that protrude circumferentially outward from one front end of the side wall portion 622. The protruding pieces 623b with screw holes, which are located diagonally at the lower left corner and upper right corner (the vertices at the ends of the diagonal line), each have a screw hole 624 (third through hole) formed therein for screwing the speaker 610 and rear cover 620 together to the front door 102.

With this configuration, the shared screw hole 616b (second through hole) in the flange 614 of the speaker 610 and the screw hole 624 (third through hole) in the screw hole protruding piece 623b of the rear cover 620 are aligned with the holes in the mounting sleeve 632 of the speaker pedestal 630 (base) and fastened with a screw (fixing means), so that the speaker unit 600 is integrated and fixed to the rear surface of the front door 102. The method of mounting the speaker unit 600 will be described later.

In addition, the protruding pieces 623a, which are located diagonally between the upper left and lower right corners of the rear cover 620 (the vertices at the ends of the diagonal line), are thicker than the protruding piece 623b with a screw hole, as shown in the side view of FIG. 12(a), and inside of them, a screw head storage space 623a1 is formed that can store the head (screw head) of a screw (fixing means).

With this configuration, the dedicated screw hole 616a (first through hole) in the flange 614 of the speaker 610 is aligned with the hole in the mounting sleeve 632 of the speaker pedestal portion 630 (base) and fastened with a screw (fixing means). Even if the rear cover 620 is positioned relative to the rear surface of the speaker 610 after only the speaker 610 is fixed to the rear surface of the front door 102, the protruding piece 623a of the rear cover 620 does not interfere with the screw (fixing means) attached to the dedicated screw hole 616a of the speaker 610, and the rear cover 620 can be attached to the rear surface of the speaker 610.

In addition, the rear cover 620 (second member) has a point-symmetric shape and can be attached to the speaker base 630 (base) even when rotated 180 degrees, which makes it easier to attach the rear cover 620 (second member).

A box-shaped space 622S is formed protruding from part of the side wall 622 to house the lead wires connected to the electromagnetic circuit 611 and lead the lead wires to the outside of the speaker unit 600. In addition, the side wall 622 is formed with a plurality of ventilation holes 625, which are openings for allowing air around the diaphragm 613 to escape, at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction.

<Speaker installation structure/correct installation method>
Next, a correct method for mounting the speaker unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 14(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the correct installation method for the speaker unit 600.

When attaching the speaker unit 600 to the speaker base 630 (base), first attach the speaker 610 (first member) to the speaker base 630 (base) as shown in FIG. 14 (a-1), and then attach the rear cover 620 (second member) to the speaker base 630 (base) as shown in FIG. 14 (a-2).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14(a-1), the two dedicated screw holes 616a (first through holes) in the flange 614 of the speaker 610 are aligned with the holes in the mounting sleeve 632 of the speaker base 630 (base) and fastened with screws 634 (fixing means), thereby attaching only the speaker 610 to the speaker base 630 (base).

Next, the rear cover 620 is positioned relative to the speaker base 630 (base) so that it covers the rear of the speaker 610. However, the protruding piece 623a of the rear cover 620 has a screw head accommodating space 623a1 formed therein, and the rear cover 620 does not interfere with the screw 634 (fixing means) attached to the dedicated screw hole 616a (first through hole) of the speaker 610. As shown in FIG. 14(a-2), the rear cover 620 can be reliably positioned on the rear of the speaker 610.

Finally, with the rear cover 620 positioned on the rear of the speaker 610, the screw hole 624 (third through hole) in the screw hole protruding piece 623b of the rear cover 620 is aligned with the two shared screw holes 616b (second through hole) in the flange 614 of the speaker 610 and the hole in the mounting sleeve 632 of the speaker base part 630 (base), and the rear cover 620 is attached to the speaker base part 630 (base) by fastening with the screw 634 (fixing means). This makes the speaker unit 600 integrated and fixed to the rear surface of the front door 102.

According to this example, when the speaker 610 (first member) and the rear cover 620 (second member) are fixed to the speaker base 630 (base) with a screw (fixing means), they can be fixed at once with one screw 634 (fixing means) through the common screw hole 616b (second through hole) of the speaker 610 (first member) and the screw hole 624 (third through hole) of the rear cover 620 (second member), so that the installation work of the members can be simplified compared to the conventional method. In addition, the speaker 610 (first member) can be fixed to the base using the dedicated screw hole 616a (first through hole) and positioned, and then the rear cover 620 (second member) can be fixed to the speaker base 630 (base), so there is no need to position the two members at the same time, and work efficiency can be improved.

In addition, when the speaker unit 600 is correctly attached, as shown in FIG. 14(a-2), the protruding piece 623a of the rear cover 620 (second member) covers the dedicated screw hole 616a (first through hole) in the speaker 610 (first member), so it can be visually confirmed that there is no need to use the dedicated screw hole 616a (first through hole) when fixing the rear cover 620 (second member), and the attachment work of the member can be performed reliably.

The rear cover 620 (second member) has a point-symmetric shape and can be attached to the speaker base 630 (base) even when rotated 180 degrees, which makes it easier to attach the rear cover 620 (second member).

<Speaker installation structure/incorrect installation method>
Next, an incorrect installation method of the speaker unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 14(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of an incorrect installation method for the speaker unit 600.

The example shown in FIG. 14(b-1) shows an example in which the speaker 610 is attached to the speaker base 630 (base) by mistakenly aligning the two shared screw holes 616b (second through holes) in the flange 614 of the speaker 610 with the holes in the mounting sleeve 632 of the speaker base 630 (base) and fastening them with screws 634 (fixing means).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 14(b-2), when rear cover 620 is positioned relative to speaker base 630 (base) so as to cover the rear of speaker 610, the bottom of protruding piece 623b with screw hole of rear cover 620 interferes with screw 634 (fixing means) that has been mistakenly attached to shared screw hole 616b (second through hole) of speaker 610, so rear cover 620 cannot be positioned on the rear of speaker 610 and rear cover 620 cannot be attached.

According to this example, it is easy to recognize that the speaker 610 (first component) is installed in an incorrect manner, and work errors can be prevented in advance.

Figures 15(a) and 15(b) are schematic diagrams showing another example of an incorrect installation method for the speaker unit 600.

The example shown in FIG. 15(a) is an example in which the speaker 610 (first member) and the rear cover 620 (second member) are attached in the wrong order, with the rear cover 620 (second member) being attached to the speaker base 630 (base) first.

The speaker 610 (first component) cannot be accommodated in the rear cover 620 (second component) when it is attached to the speaker base 630 (base), so it is easy to recognize that the speaker 610 (first component) has been attached in an incorrect manner, and work errors can be prevented.

The example shown in FIG. 15(b) is an example in which the rear cover 620 (second member) is mistakenly rotated 90 degrees to attempt to position it relative to the speaker base 630 (base).

The rear cover 620 (second member) has a point-symmetric shape and can be attached to the speaker base 630 (base) even when rotated 180 degrees, but since it does not have an axisymmetric shape, it cannot be positioned relative to the speaker base 630 (base) when rotated 90 degrees.

In addition, the position of the box-shaped space 622S of the rear cover 620 is shifted by 90 degrees, so the speaker 610 cannot be accommodated in the rear cover 620. Therefore, it is easy to recognize that the method of attaching the rear cover 620 (second member) is incorrect, and work errors can be prevented in advance.

<Speaker installation structure/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 ) is a gaming machine including a first member (e.g., the speaker 610 shown in FIG. 11 or 14 ) that can be fixed to a base (e.g., the speaker base portion 630 of the front door 102 shown in FIG. 11 ) and a second member (e.g., the rear cover 620 shown in FIG. 11 or 14 ) that can cover at least a part of the first member, and the first member includes a plurality of through holes for fixing the first member to the base, and the plurality of through holes include one or a plurality of first through holes (e.g., 12(d)) and one or more second through holes different from the first through hole (for example, shared screw hole 616b shown in FIG. 12(d)), the second member has one or more through holes (hereinafter referred to as a "third through hole"; for example, screw hole 624 shown in FIG. 11 or 14) for fixing the second member to the base, the first member is fixed to the base using the first through hole, and the second member is fixed to the base using the third through hole and the second through hole.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base with a fixing means, they can be fixed at once with one fixing means via the second through hole of the first member and the third through hole of the second member, which simplifies the work of attaching the members compared to conventional methods. In addition, since it is possible to fix the second member to the base while the first member is fixed and positioned on the base using the first through hole, there is no need to position the two members at the same time, which improves work efficiency.

The "first member" and "second member" according to the present invention are not limited to a speaker and a back cover, but may be, for example, a board and a board case, a connector and a connector cover, a movable body and a movable body cover, etc. In other words, the "first member" according to the present invention may be any member that can be fixed to a base, and the "second member" according to the present invention may be any member that can cover at least a portion of the first member.

In addition, when the first member is fixed to the base using the first through hole, and then the second member is fixed to the base using the third through hole and the second through hole, the first through hole in the first member may be covered by the second member.

With this configuration, it is possible to visually confirm that there is no need to use the first through hole when fixing the second member, and the member installation work can be performed reliably.

The first member may also have a plurality of the first through holes and the second through holes, and the plurality of first through holes and the plurality of second through holes may be arranged alternately in the circumferential direction of the first member.

With this configuration, when the first member is fixed to the base using the first through hole for positioning, or when the second member is removed from the base, the first member can be stably fixed, improving safety and workability.

The plurality of first through holes and the plurality of second through holes may be arranged alternately in the circumferential direction of the first member, and the plurality of first through holes may be located at diagonal positions on the first member, and the plurality of second through holes may be located at diagonal positions on the first member.

In addition, when the first member is fixed to the base by a fixing means (e.g., a screw 634 shown in FIG. 14(b)) via the second through hole, and then the second member is positioned to be fixed to the base, the third through hole of the second member may interfere with the fixing means.

With this configuration, it is easy to recognize if the first component is attached in an incorrect way, and work errors can be prevented.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine including a first member (e.g., the speaker 610 shown in FIG. 11 or 14) that can be fixed to a base (e.g., the speaker base portion 630 of the front door 102 shown in FIG. 11) and a second member (e.g., the rear cover 620 shown in FIG. 11 or 14) that can cover at least a part of the first member, the first member including a plurality of first through holes and a plurality of second through holes different from the first through holes, the second member including a plurality of third through holes, the first through hole being a through hole used when fixing the first member of the first member and the second member to the base, the second through hole and the third through hole being through holes used when fixing both the first member and the second member to the base, and the first through holes and the second through holes being alternately arranged on the outer periphery of the first member.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine including a first member (e.g., speaker 610 shown in FIG. 11 or 14) that can be fixed to a base (e.g., speaker base portion 630 of front door 102 shown in FIG. 11) and a second member (e.g., rear cover 620 shown in FIG. 11 or 14) that can cover at least a portion of the first member, the first member including a plurality of first through holes and a plurality of second through holes different from the first through holes, the second member including a plurality of third through holes, and the first through holes being formed by a plurality of through holes of the first member and the second member. The first through hole is a through hole used when fixing the first member to the base, and the second through hole and the third through hole are through holes used when fixing both the first member and the second member to the base, the first through holes and the second through holes are arranged alternately on the outer periphery of the first member, the first through holes and the second through holes adjacent to the first through holes are connected by straight lines to form a quadrangle, and the first through holes are arranged on the diagonals of the quadrangle (the vertices at the ends of the diagonals).

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine that includes a first member (e.g., the speaker 610 shown in FIG. 11 or 14) that can be fixed to a base (e.g., the speaker base portion 630 of the front door 102 shown in FIG. 11) and a second member (e.g., the rear cover 620 shown in FIG. 11 or 14) that can cover at least a portion of the first member, and the first member includes a plurality of first through holes and a plurality of second through holes different from the first through holes, and the second member includes a plurality of third through holes. The gaming table has through holes, the first through hole being a through hole used when fixing the first member of the first and second members to the base, the second through hole and the third through hole being through holes used when fixing both the first member and the second member to the base, the first through holes and the second through holes being alternately arranged on the outer periphery of the first member, and the base having a frame portion formed to match the outer shape of the first member.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base with a fixing means, they can be fixed at once with one fixing means via the second through hole of the first member and the third through hole of the second member, which simplifies the work of attaching the members compared to conventional methods. In addition, since it is possible to fix the second member to the base while the first member is fixed and positioned on the base using the first through hole, there is no need to position the two members at the same time, which improves work efficiency.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 1)/speaker unit configuration>
Next, the configuration of a speaker unit 700 according to the first modification will be described with reference to Fig. 16. Fig. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the speaker unit 700 according to the first modification.

As shown in FIG. 16, the speaker unit 700 of the first modification is composed of a low-pitched sound output speaker 710 (first member) having a large diaphragm and a rear cover 720 (second member) that covers the rear side of the speaker 710, and is attached to a speaker pedestal 730 (base) formed on the rear surface of the front door 102 of the slot machine.

<Speaker mounting structure/speaker base>
The speaker pedestal 730 (base) is configured to include an annular frame support 731 that supports the frame 714 of the speaker 710, a cylindrical cover support 735 that supports the bottom of the rear cover 720, four mounting sleeves 732 for screwing the speaker 710 and the rear cover 720 to the front door 102, and a disk-shaped sound hole plate 734 that is attached to the inside of the frame support 731. The detailed configuration of the speaker pedestal 730 (base) will be described later with reference to FIG. 19.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 1)/speaker, rear cover>
Next, the speaker 710 and the rear cover 720 constituting the speaker unit 700 according to the first modification will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

Fig. 17(a) is a side view of the rear cover 720, and Fig. 17(b) is a top view of the rear cover 720. Fig. 17(c) is a side view of the speaker 710, and Fig. 17(d) is a top view of the speaker 710. Fig. 18(a) is a top view of the speaker unit 700, and Fig. 18(b) is a cross-sectional view along line B-B of the speaker unit 700 shown in Fig. 18(a).

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 1)/speaker>
The speaker 710 (first member) is a cone-type dynamic speaker, and as shown in Figures 17(c) and 18(b), is generally composed of an electromagnetic circuit 711 (electrical component) consisting of a voice coil and a magnet and vibrating a diaphragm 713 (described later) in response to an electric signal, a frame 712 supporting the electromagnetic circuit 711, the diaphragm 713 that vibrates to generate sound, a flange 714 to which the diaphragm 713 is fixed so that it can vibrate, a pair of lead terminals 716 disposed on the right and left sides, respectively, of the flange 714 when viewed from above, and lead wires (wiring) 717 detachably connected to the lead terminals 716.

Frame 712 is a cylindrical metal ring frame that widens slightly toward the front, and has multiple openings 715 (see FIG. 16) formed in the circumferential direction on the side to allow air around diaphragm 713 to escape. That is, multiple openings 715 are formed in the circumferential direction on the side of frame 712, and supports 712a (see FIG. 16) are formed in the front-rear direction between openings 715. Diaphragm 713 is formed in a cone shape that opens toward the front, using a flexible material such as paper.

As shown in FIG. 17(d), dedicated screw holes 716a (first through holes) for screwing the speaker 710 to the speaker base 730 (base) are formed in the upper left and lower right corners of the outer end of the flange 714. Also, shared screw holes 716b (second through holes) for screwing the speaker 710 and rear cover 720 to the speaker base 730 (base) are formed in the lower left and upper right corners of the outer end of the flange 714.

In this example, two dedicated screw holes 716a (first through holes) are arranged diagonally at the upper left and lower right corners of the outer edge of the flange 714 (vertices of the ends of the diagonal), and two shared screw holes 716b (second through holes) are arranged diagonally at the lower left and upper right corners of the outer edge of the flange 714 (vertices of the ends of the diagonal). As a result, the dedicated screw holes 716a (first through holes) and the shared screw holes 716b (second through holes) are arranged alternately at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction along the outer edge of the flange 714.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 17(d), when a plurality of dedicated screw holes 716a (first through holes) and the common screw holes 716b (second through holes) adjacent to these plurality of dedicated screw holes 716a (first through holes) are connected by a virtual straight line VL, a virtual rectangle VQ is formed, and the plurality of dedicated screw holes 716a (first through holes) are arranged on the diagonal of the virtual rectangle VQ (the vertices at the ends of the diagonal), and the plurality of common screw holes 716b (second through holes) are arranged on the diagonal of the virtual rectangle VQ (the vertices at the ends of the diagonal).

Furthermore, when focusing on the distance between the dedicated screw hole 716a (first through hole) and the shared screw hole 716b (second through hole), as shown in FIG. 17(d), the shortest distance L1 from the dedicated screw hole 716a (first through hole) located in the upper left corner to one of the shared screw holes 716b (second through hole) (e.g., the shared screw hole 716b located in the upper right corner) is almost the same as the shortest distance L2 from the dedicated screw hole 716a (first through hole) located in the upper left corner to another through hole (e.g., the shared screw hole 716b located in the lower left corner) of the second through holes of the shared screw holes 716b (second through hole).

According to this example, when the speaker 710 (first member) is fixed to the speaker base 730 (base) of the front door 102 using the dedicated screw hole 716a (first through hole) for positioning, or when only the rear cover 720 (second member) is removed from the speaker base 730 (base), the speaker 710 (first member) can be stably fixed, improving safety and workability.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 1)/rear cover>
Next, the rear cover 720 (second member) will be described in detail.

The rear cover 720 (second member) is a colored, transparent resin member capable of housing the speaker 710 (first member) inside, and is made of a material that allows the speaker 710 (first member) to be seen from the outside when the speaker 710 (first member) is housed inside.

In this example, at least a portion of the speaker 710 (first member) can be seen through the rear cover 720 (second member), so the fixed position of the speaker 710 (first member) relative to the speaker base 730 (base) and the relative positions of the speaker 710 (first member) and the rear cover 720 (second member) can be visually confirmed, improving the convenience of the work of installing the members.

The rear cover 720 (second member) may be any member having transparency, and its material is not limited to colored transparent resin, but may be, for example, colorless transparent (or translucent) plastic, acrylic, polycarbonate, polyvinyl chloride, glass, metal, etc.

As shown in Figures 17(a) and (b), the rear cover 720 has a circular cover portion 721 formed on the rear side that covers the rear end of the speaker 710, and a cylindrical side wall portion 722 that widens slightly toward the rear from this cover portion 721 as its base end.

The cover portion 721 has a plurality of rectangular ventilation holes 725 formed therein, which are openings for allowing air around the electromagnetic circuit 711 of the speaker 710 to escape, and has a predetermined marking 726 (in this example, a part number and material) on the upper side when viewed from above. The display form of the predetermined marking 726 is not particularly limited, but in this example, a part number marking indicating the part number of the rear cover 720 (in this example, a character string "SPxxxx") and a material marking indicating the material of the rear cover 720 (in this example, a character string "PC") are engraved on the surface of the cover portion 721.

In this example, the rear cover 720 is provided with a specific marking 726, so that the correct orientation (attachment direction) of the rear cover 720 can be easily identified by the orientation of this specific marking 726, improving convenience when attaching the rear cover 720, etc.

As shown in FIG. 17(b), the rear cover 720 has two protruding pieces 723a and two protruding pieces 723b with screw holes that protrude outward from the outer edge of the side wall portion 722.

In this example, two protruding pieces 723a are arranged diagonally (at the vertices of the ends of the diagonal) at the upper left and lower right corners on the outer edge of the side wall portion 722, and two protruding pieces 723b with screw holes are arranged diagonally (at the vertices of the ends of the diagonal) at the lower left and upper right corners on the outer edge of the side wall portion 722. As a result, the protruding pieces 723a and the protruding pieces 723b with screw holes are arranged alternately at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction along the outer edge of the side wall portion 722.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 17(b), when the vertices of the multiple protrusions 723a and the protrusions with screw holes 723b adjacent to the multiple protrusions 723a are connected by an imaginary straight line VL2, an imaginary rectangle VQ2 is formed, and the multiple protrusions 723a are arranged on the diagonals of the imaginary rectangle VQ2 (the vertices at the ends of the diagonals), and the multiple protrusions with screw holes 723b are arranged on the diagonals of the imaginary rectangle VQ2 (the vertices at the ends of the diagonals).

Screw holes 724 (third through holes) for integrating the speaker 710 and rear cover 720 and screwing them to the speaker base 730 (base) are formed in the protruding pieces 723b with screw holes, which are located diagonally between the lower left and upper right corners (the vertices at the ends of the diagonal lines), at positions slightly off-center toward the cover 721 (toward the center of the rear cover 720) rather than the center of the protruding pieces 723b with screw holes.

With this configuration, the speaker unit 700 is integrated and fixed to the speaker base 730 (base) by fastening the shared screw hole 716b (second through hole) of the speaker 710 and the screw hole 724 (third through hole) of the rear cover 720 to the speaker base 730 (base) with a screw 740 (fixing means; see FIG. 16). The method of mounting the speaker unit 700 will be described later.

A thin screw hole identification recess 724a is formed around the screw hole 724 (third through hole) in the screw hole protruding piece 723b, which is an annular recess having an outer diameter larger than that of the screw hole 724. Due to the screw hole identification recess 724a formed around the screw hole 724, the thickness around the screw hole 724 (third through hole) of the rear cover 720 is made thinner than the thickness of other parts of the rear cover 720.

According to this example, when the rear cover 720 (second member) is positioned, the presence of the protruding piece 723b with the screw hole makes it easy to recognize the fixed position (screw hole 724 (third through hole)) of the rear cover 720 (second member), and the protruding piece 723b with the screw hole can also function as reinforcement for the part (screw hole identification recess 724a) around the screw hole 724 (third through hole) where the thickness is thin.

In addition, the side wall portion 722 is formed with a screw hole identification groove 722a, which is a linear groove that communicates with the screw hole identification recess 724a and extends from the bottom to the top of the side wall portion 722.

In other words, in this example, a screw hole identification recess 724a and a screw hole identification groove 722a are formed around the screw hole 724 (third through hole), making it possible to identify the screw hole 724 (third through hole).

According to this example, at least one of the dedicated screw hole 716a (first through hole), the shared screw hole 716b (second through hole), and the screw hole 724 (third through hole) (in this example, the screw hole 724 (third through hole)) is configured to be identifiable, so it is easy to determine whether each through hole is a through hole used when fixing only the first member to the base, or a through hole used when fixing both the first member and the second member to the base, which can improve the efficiency of the member installation work. In addition, the correct orientation (installation direction) of the rear cover 720 can be easily identified using the through hole type as a clue, which can improve convenience when installing the rear cover 720, etc.

In this example, as a configuration for making the screw hole 724 (third through hole) identifiable, a screw hole identification recess 724a and a screw hole identification groove 722a are formed near the screw hole 724 (third through hole), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only one of the screw hole identification recess 724a and the screw hole identification groove 722a may be formed, or a sticker or the like that can identify the screw hole 724 (third through hole) may be attached near the screw hole 724 (third through hole), or a marking, printing, engraving, etc. that can identify the screw hole 724 (third through hole) may be applied.

In addition, a part that allows the screw hole 724 (third through hole) to be identified may be formed on a member (for example, the speaker base 730 (base) or the speaker 710 (first member)) other than the rear cover 720 (second member), a sticker that allows the screw hole 724 (third through hole) to be identified, or a marking, printing, engraving, etc. that allows the screw hole 724 (third through hole) to be identified may be applied.

In addition, a configuration that makes it possible to identify the screw hole 724 (third through hole) of the rear cover 720 has been exemplified, but instead of (or in addition to) this, a configuration that makes it possible to identify the dedicated screw hole 716a (first through hole) and/or the shared screw hole 716b (second through hole) of the speaker 710 (first member) may be adopted.

Therefore, for example, a portion where at least one of the dedicated screw hole 716 a (first through hole), the shared screw hole 716 b (second through hole), and the screw hole 724 (third through hole) can be formed on the mounting sleeve 732 of the speaker base portion 730 (base), a sticker or the like where at least one of the through holes can be identifiable can be attached, or at least one of the through holes can be marked, printed, engraved, or the like so that it can be identified; a portion where the dedicated screw hole 716 a (first through hole) and/or the shared screw hole 716 b (second through hole) can be identifiable can be formed on the flange 714 of the speaker 710 (first member), a sticker or the like where at least one of the through holes can be identifiable can be attached, or the dedicated screw hole 716 a (first through hole) and/or the shared screw hole 716 b (second through hole) can be marked, printed, engraved, or the like so that it can be identified.

In addition, by making the shape of the screw hole protruding piece 723b of the rear cover 720 different from the shape of the protruding piece 723a, it is possible to make it possible to identify that the through hole formed in the screw hole protruding piece 723b is a through hole used when fixing both the speaker 710 (first member) and the rear cover 720 (second member) to the speaker base part 730 (base), or conversely, by making the shape of the screw hole protruding piece 723a of the rear cover 720 different from the shape of the screw hole protruding piece 723b, it is possible to make it possible to identify that the through hole of the speaker 710 covered by the protruding piece 723a is a through hole used when fixing only the speaker 710 (first member) to the speaker base part 730 (base).

This configuration makes it possible to visually identify the function of the through-holes based on the shape of the protruding piece on the rear cover 720, thereby improving work efficiency.

The protruding pieces 723a, which are located diagonally between the upper left and lower right corners of the rear cover 720 (the vertices at the ends of the diagonal), are thick, two-stepped sections that are taller from the bottom surface of the rear cover 720 than the protruding piece 723b with a screw hole, as shown in the side view of FIG. 17(a). Inside the protruding piece 723a, a screw accommodating space 723a1 large enough to accommodate a portion (head) of the screw 740 is formed.

With this configuration, even if the rear cover 720 is positioned relative to the rear of the speaker 710 after the speaker 710 alone is fixed to the speaker base 730 by fastening the dedicated screw hole 716a (first through hole) of the speaker 710 to the speaker base 730 (base) with a screw 740, the head of the screw 740 attached to the dedicated screw hole 716a of the speaker 710 is accommodated in the screw accommodating space 723a1, so the screw 740 does not interfere with the rear cover 720 and the rear cover 720 can be securely attached to the rear of the speaker 710.

In addition, the rear cover 720 (second member) has a point-symmetric shape and can be attached to the speaker base 730 (base) even when rotated 180 degrees, which makes it easier to attach the rear cover 720 (second member).

As described above, the rear cover 720 has a specific marking 726, so when attaching the rear cover 720 to the speaker base 730, it is preferable to attach it in the correct orientation so that the side with the specific marking 726 is facing up and the specific marking 726 is easily visible. However, even if the rear cover 720 is rotated 180 degrees from the correct orientation, the specific marking 726 will be upside down, but it can still be attached to the speaker base 730 (base).

As shown in FIG. 17(b), the outer edges of the right and left sides of the rear cover 720 when viewed from above each have a protruding box-shaped space 722S (space portion) for housing a pair of lead terminals 716 and leading the lead wires 717 to the outside of the speaker unit 700.

As shown in Figures 17(a) and (b), this box-shaped space 722S (space) is composed of a first space 722S1 in the shape of a vertically elongated rectangular parallelepiped that extends from the upper part of the side wall part 722 to near the lower part of the side wall part 722, and a second space 722S2 in the shape of a horizontally elongated rectangular parallelepiped that is connected to the first space 722S1 and has a width slightly larger than that of the first space 722S1. The first space 722S1 and the second space 722S2 are located radially outward of the rear cover 720 (second member) than the screw hole 724 (third through hole).

With this configuration, when the speaker 710 (first member) and the rear cover 720 (second member) are fixed to the speaker base 730 (base), a space is formed between the speaker 710 (first member) and the rear cover 720 (second member), and as shown in FIG. 18(b), the lead wire 717 (wiring) of the speaker 710 can be pulled out to the outside of the speaker 710 (first member) and the rear cover 720 (second member) through this space.

According to this example, even if a portion of the speaker 710 (first component) is covered by the rear cover 720 (second component), the lead wire 717 (wiring) of the speaker 710 (first component) can be pulled out to the outside, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in design.

In addition, when fixing the rear cover 720 (second member) to the speaker base 730 (base), the area other than the contact point (around the through hole) between the speaker base 730 (base) and the rear cover 720 (second member) can be made wider, which makes it possible to prevent wiring from getting pinched between the speaker base 730 (base) and the rear cover 720 (second member).

The second space 722S2, which is a horizontally elongated rectangular parallelepiped, provides a wide area for pulling out the wiring from between the rear cover 720 (second member) and the speaker base 730 (base), and the first space 722S1, which is a vertically elongated rectangular parallelepiped, partially restricts the area for guiding the wiring, allowing the wiring of the speaker 710 to be smoothly guided to the second space 722S2, and prevents the wiring from gathering near the through-hole when the rear cover 720 (second member) is fixed, which would otherwise get in the way of the installation work.

In this example, two box-shaped spaces (spaces) 722S are formed in the rear cover 720, but the number of box-shaped spaces (spaces) 722S is not limited to this example. If the speaker 710 has only one lead terminal, only one box-shaped space (space) 722S capable of accommodating this lead terminal may be formed. In addition, a notched recess or the like may be formed below the box-shaped space (space) 722S to guide the lead wire to the outside.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 1)/speaker base>
Next, the speaker pedestal 730 (base) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

Figures 19(a) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of a method for installing the speaker unit 700 in chronological order, with figure (a) showing the speaker base 730 with the sound hole plate 734 removed.

As explained using FIG. 16, the speaker base 730 (base) is composed of an annular frame support 731 that supports the frame 714 of the speaker 710, a cylindrical cover support 735 that supports the bottom of the rear cover 720, four mounting sleeves 732 (732a, 732b) for screwing the speaker 710 and rear cover 720 to the front door 102, and a circular sound hole plate 734 that is attached to the inside of the frame support 731.

As shown in FIG. 19(a), the sound hole plate 734 has multiple circular sound holes 734a for outputting the sound of the speaker 710, and four locking portions 734b that can be locked to the sound hole plate locking portion 736 of the frame support portion 731 are formed at a predetermined interval along the circumferential direction on the outer edge of the sound hole plate 734.

On the other hand, four sound hole plate locking portions 736 that can lock the locking portions 734b of the sound hole plate 734 are formed at predetermined intervals along the inner circumference of the frame support portion 731 on the inside of the frame support portion 731. In addition, the height of the frame support portion 731 (height from the rear surface of the front door 102) is designed to be higher than the maximum vibration amplitude of the diaphragm 713 of the speaker 710 so as not to inhibit the vibration of the diaphragm 713.

The sound hole plate 734 has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the frame support part 731, and after being fitted inside the frame support part 731, the four locking parts 734b are respectively locked to the four sound hole plate locking parts 736, so that the sound hole plate 734 is fixed to the inside of the frame support part 731, as shown in FIG. 19(b).

Of the four mounting sleeves 732, the first mounting sleeves 732a, which are located at the upper left and lower right corners when viewed from above, are the mounting sleeves to which the dedicated screw holes 716a (first through holes) of the speaker 710 are fastened by screws 740, as shown in FIG. 19(c).

On the other hand, of the four mounting sleeves 732, the second mounting sleeves 732b, which are located at the lower left corner and upper right corner when viewed from above, are mounting sleeves in which the shared screw hole 716b (second through hole) of the speaker 710 and the screw hole 724 (third through hole) of the rear cover 720 are fastened by a screw 740, as shown in FIG. 19(d).

A first rectangular boss 737a is erected on the outside of the frame support 731 so as to surround the periphery of the first mounting sleeve 732a, and a second rectangular boss 737b is erected so as to surround the periphery of the second mounting sleeve 732b. In addition, arc-shaped through-hole identification bosses 738 are erected near the first mounting sleeve 732a, which are located at the upper left corner and lower right corner when viewed from above.

The through hole identification boss 738 is a boss that is erected to identify that the two first mounting sleeves 732a out of the four mounting sleeves 732 are mounting sleeves that are to be fastened to the dedicated screw hole 716a (first through hole) of the speaker 710, and is a boss that is not formed near the second mounting sleeve 732b.

In this example, a through-hole identification boss 738 is provided near the first two mounting sleeves 732a of the four mounting sleeves 732. Using this through-hole identification boss 738 as a guide, the speaker 710 and rear cover 720 can be attached to the speaker base 730 in the correct orientation, preventing work errors and improving work efficiency.

In addition, arc-shaped mounting direction identification bosses 739 are provided between the first rectangular boss 737a located in the upper left corner when viewed from above and the second rectangular boss 737b located in the lower left corner when viewed from above, and between the second rectangular boss 737b located in the upper right corner when viewed from above and the first rectangular boss 737a located in the lower right corner when viewed from above.

This mounting direction identification boss 739 is a boss that is erected to enable identification of the mounting direction of the speaker 710 and the rear cover 720, and is a boss that is not formed between the first rectangular boss 737a located in the upper left corner when viewed from above and the second rectangular boss 737b located in the upper right corner when viewed from above, and between the second rectangular boss 737b located in the lower left corner when viewed from above and the first rectangular boss 737a located in the lower right corner when viewed from above.

According to this example, the mounting direction identification boss 739 that can identify the mounting direction of the speaker 710 and the rear cover 720 is provided. When attaching the speaker 710 to the speaker base part 730, the speaker 710 can be attached to the speaker base part 730 in the correct orientation by aligning the position of the lead terminal 716 of the speaker 710 with the mounting direction identification boss 739. When attaching the rear cover 720 to the speaker base part 730, the rear cover 720 can be attached to the speaker base part 730 in the correct orientation by aligning the box-shaped space 722S of the rear cover 720 with the mounting direction identification boss 739. This prevents mistakes when attaching the speaker 710 and the rear cover 720 and improves work efficiency.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 1)/mounting method>
Next, a method for mounting the speaker unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG.

When attaching the speaker unit 700 to the speaker base 730, first attach the speaker 710 to the speaker base 730 as shown in Figures 19(b) and (c), and then attach the rear cover 720 to the speaker base 730 as shown in Figures 19(c) and (d).

More specifically, when attaching the speaker 710 to the speaker base 730, the dedicated screw hole 716a of the speaker 710 is aligned with the first mounting sleeve 732a using the through-hole identification boss 738 and the first rectangular boss 737a of the speaker base 730 as markers, and the position of the lead terminal 716 of the speaker 710 is aligned with the mounting direction identification boss 739, thereby positioning the speaker 710 relative to the speaker base 730.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19(c), the two dedicated screw holes 716a of the speaker 710 are aligned with the holes in the mounting sleeve 732a of the speaker base 730, and the speaker 710 is attached to the speaker base 730 by fastening with screws 740.

The speaker 710 has a shape that is almost point-symmetrical, and can be attached to the speaker base 730 even when rotated 180 degrees, which makes it easy to install the speaker 710.

In addition, since the lead terminal 716 and the lead wire 717 of the speaker 710 are configured to be detachable, even if the wiring of the lead wire 717 to the speaker base part 730 is completed, the speaker 710 can be rotated 180 degrees and attached to the speaker base part 730, and the lead terminal 716 and the lead wire 717 can be connected later. Even if the speaker 710 is attached to the speaker base part 730, the wiring of the lead wire 717 can be changed and the lead terminal 716 and the lead wire 717 can be connected later.

Next, when attaching the rear cover 720 to the speaker base 730, the screw holes 724 of the rear cover 720 are identified using the screw hole identification recesses 724a and screw hole identification grooves 722a as markers, and then aligned with the second mounting sleeve 732b using the second rectangular boss 737b of the speaker base 730 as a marker. The position of the box-shaped space 722S of the rear cover 720 is aligned with the mounting direction identification boss 739 while covering the rear of the speaker 710 with the rear cover 720, thereby positioning the rear cover 720 relative to the speaker base 730.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19(d), the screw holes 724 of the rear cover 720 are aligned with the shared screw holes 716b of the speaker 710 and the holes of the mounting sleeve 732b of the speaker base 730, and the rear cover 720 is attached to the speaker base 730 by fastening with screws 740. This allows the speaker unit 700 to be integrated and fixed to the rear surface of the front door 102.

According to this example, when the speaker 710 and the rear cover 720 are fixed to the speaker base 730 with the screw 740, they can be fixed at once with one screw 740 via the shared screw hole 716b of the speaker 710 and the screw hole 724 of the rear cover 720, which simplifies the work of attaching the components compared to the conventional method. In addition, the speaker 710 can be fixed to the base and positioned using the dedicated screw hole 716a before the rear cover 720 is fixed to the speaker base 730, which eliminates the need to position the two components at the same time and improves work efficiency.

The rear cover 720 has a shape that is almost point-symmetrical, and even if rotated 180 degrees, it can be attached to the speaker base 730 with the lead terminals 716 and lead wires 717 of the speaker 710 housed in the box-shaped space 722S, making it easy to attach the rear cover 720.

In addition, when the speaker unit 700 is correctly attached and the speaker 710 (first member) is covered with the rear cover 720 (second member), as shown in FIG. 19(d), the dedicated screw hole 716a (first through hole) in the speaker 710 (first member) is configured to be covered by the protruding piece 723a (a certain portion) of the rear cover 720 (second member). This makes it possible to visually confirm that it is not necessary to use the dedicated screw hole 716a when fixing the rear cover 720, and also makes it easy to position the rear cover 720 (second member) relative to the speaker 710 (first member), ensuring reliable installation of the second member.

Furthermore, a screw accommodating space 723a1 (accommodating space) having a predetermined space is formed in the protruding piece 723a (certain portion) of the rear cover 720 (second member), so even when the rear cover 720 is positioned relative to the rear surface of the speaker 710, the head of the screw 740 (fixing means) attached to the dedicated screw hole 716a (first through hole) of the speaker 710 (first member) is accommodated in the screw accommodating space 723a1 (space portion), so the screw 740 (fixing means) does not interfere with the rear cover 720 (second member), and the rear cover 720 (second member) can be securely attached to the rear surface of the speaker 710 (first member).

In particular, when screws are used as the fixing means, if the screws are not tightly fastened when fixing the speaker 710 (first member) to the speaker base 730 (base), there is a possibility that the screw head may protrude more than necessary from the dedicated screw hole 716a (first through hole). However, because the rear cover 720 (second member) has a screw accommodating space 723a1 (accommodating space) capable of accommodating at least a portion of the screw 740 (fixing means), the risk of interference between the rear cover 720 (second member) and the screw head can be avoided.

In addition, since the thickness around the screw hole 724 of the rear cover 720 is formed thinner than the thickness of other parts of the rear cover 720, the stroke amount of the screw 740 (fixing means) that fastens both the common screw hole 716b (second through hole) of the speaker 710 (first member) and the screw hole 724 (third through hole) of the rear cover 720 (second member) can be reduced, improving work efficiency, and since a part of the head of the screw 740 (fixing means) can be accommodated in the screw hole identification recess 724a formed around the third through hole, the screw 740 (fixing means) is less likely to come off, and the speaker 710 (first member) and the rear cover 720 (second member) can be stably fixed to the speaker base part 730 (base). In addition, the screw hole identification recess 724a (around the third through hole) also functions as a positioning when attaching the screw 740 (fixing means).

Furthermore, when attaching the speaker 710 and the rear cover 720, a common screw 740 (a screw of the same length and thickness) can be used, eliminating the need to use multiple types of screws, improving convenience and eliminating screw installation errors, allowing the components to be attached reliably.

In order to use a common screw 740 when attaching the speaker 710 and rear cover 720, the length of the screw 740 must be at least as long as the thickness of the screw hole 724 in the rear cover 720 plus the thickness of the common screw hole 716b in the speaker 710.

For this reason, if a common screw 740 is used to fasten the dedicated screw hole 716a of the speaker 710, the length of the screw will be excessive by the thickness of the rear cover 720. However, in this example, the screw 740 attached to the dedicated screw hole 716a of the speaker 710 is configured to be accommodated in the screw accommodating space 723a1, so the screw 740 does not interfere with the rear cover 720, and by covering the screw 740 with the screw accommodating space 723a1, deterioration of the screw 740 and tampering with the screw 740 can be prevented.

As shown in FIG. 19(d), when the rear cover 720 is attached to the speaker base 730, the bottom of the rear cover 720 is supported by the four mounting sleeves 732 as well as the cylindrical cover support 735 located on the right side when viewed from above. That is, when the speaker 710 (first member) and the rear cover 720 (second member) are fixed to the speaker base 730 (base), a part of the rear cover 720 (second member) abuts against the mounting sleeves 732 and cover support 735 of the speaker base 730 (base), and a space is formed between the speaker base 730 (base) and the rear cover 720 (second member).

Also, as explained using FIG. 18(b), even when the speaker 710 (first member) is covered with the rear cover 720 (second member), a space is formed between the speaker 710 (first member) and the rear cover 720 (second member).

This configuration forms spaces between the speaker base 730 (base) and the rear cover 720 (second member), and between the speaker 710 (first member) and the rear cover 720 (second member), allowing the lead wires 717 (wiring) of the speaker 710 to be pulled out to the outside of the speaker 710 (first member) and the rear cover 720 (second member) through these spaces.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 1)/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine including a first member (for example, the speaker 710 shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17(c) and (d)) that can be fixed to a base (for example, the speaker base part 730 shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 19) and a second member (for example, the back cover 620 shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17(a) and (b)) that can cover at least a part of the first member, the first member including a first through hole (for example, the dedicated screw hole 716a shown in FIG. 17(d)) and a plurality of second through holes (for example, the shared screw hole 716b shown in FIG. 17(d)) different from the first through hole, the second member including a plurality of third through holes (for example, the screw hole 724 shown in FIG. 17(b)), and the second member including a plurality of third through holes (for example, the screw hole 724 shown in FIG. 17(b)). a first through hole being a through hole used when fixing the first member of the first and second members to the base, the second through hole and the third through hole being through holes used when fixing both the first member and the second member to the base, the first through hole and the plurality of second through holes being arranged on the outer periphery of the first member in the order of the second through hole, the first through hole, and the second through hole, a convex portion (e.g., a protruding piece 723b with a screw hole shown in FIG. 17(b)) is formed near the third through hole in the second member, and a concave portion (e.g., a screw hole identification groove 722a shown in FIG. 17(b)) is formed in the convex portion near the third through hole.

According to the game machine of this embodiment, when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base, they can be fixed at once through the second through hole of the first member and the third through hole of the second member, so that the installation work of the members can be simplified compared to the conventional method, and the two first members and the second members can be stably fixed. In addition, since the second member can be fixed to the base while the first member is fixed and positioned to the base using the first through hole, it is not necessary to position the two members at the same time, and the work efficiency can be improved. In addition, since the first through hole and the multiple second through holes are arranged on the outer periphery of the first member in the order of the second through hole, the first through hole, and the second through hole, the two first members and the second members can be stably fixed by the second through holes arranged on both sides of the first through hole. In addition, a convex portion is formed near the third through hole in the second member, and a concave portion is formed in the convex portion near the third through hole (i.e., the third through hole has an identifiable identification means), so that it is easy to determine whether each through hole is a through hole used when fixing to the base, or a through hole used when fixing both the first member and the second member to the base, thereby improving the efficiency of the member attachment work.

Additionally, each of the second through holes may be provided at an outer end of the second member.

With this configuration, the second member can be stably fixed to the base.

The base may also be formed with a portion that allows the first member to be positioned (for example, the first mounting sleeve 732a, the second mounting sleeve 732b, and the frame support portion 731 shown in FIG. 19(b)).

With this configuration, even if the second member is removed from the base, the first member can be stably fixed to the base.

In addition, the shortest distance from the first through hole to one of the plurality of second through holes (e.g., the shortest distance L1 shown in FIG. 17(d)) and the shortest distance from the first through hole to another through hole of the plurality of second through holes (e.g., the shortest distance L2 shown in FIG. 17(d)) may be substantially the same.

This configuration allows the first member to be stably fixed to the base, improving safety and workability.

In this case, "almost the same" does not mean that the shortest distance from the first through hole to one of the plurality of second through holes and the shortest distance from the first through hole to another of the plurality of second through holes are "the same," but also means that the two shortest distances are "substantially the same" (for example, when the ratio of the shortest distances is 4:6 or 6:4, and the first through hole is located approximately in the center between the second through holes located on both sides of it, etc.).

The shortest distance between the first and second through holes may be different depending on the shape and weight of the first member. For example, the first through hole may be located between the second through holes on both sides of the first member, near the center of gravity of the first member. If the first member is polygonal, the second through hole may be located diagonally on the first member (at the apex of the end of the diagonal), or may be located at a position not on the diagonal of the first member, near the apex, along a side, or at a position other than the outer edge.

The first member may be a member including an electrical component (e.g., electromagnetic circuit 711 shown in FIG. 19(b)) to which wiring (e.g., lead wire 717 shown in FIG. 19(b)) is connected, and may be configured such that a space is formed between the first member and the second member when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base, and such that the wiring can be drawn out to the outside of the first member and the second member through the space.

With this configuration, even if part of the first component is covered by the second component, the wiring of the first component can be pulled out to the outside, allowing for greater design freedom.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine including a first member (e.g., speaker 710 shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17(c) and (d)) that can be fixed to a base (e.g., speaker base portion 730 shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 19) and a second member (e.g., rear cover 620 shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17(a) and (b)) that can cover at least a portion of the first member, and the first member includes a first through hole (e.g., dedicated screw hole 716a shown in FIG. 17(d)) and a plurality of second through holes different from the first through hole (e.g., shared screw hole 716b shown in FIG. 17(d)), and the second member includes a plurality of third through holes (e.g., screw hole 724 shown in FIG. 17(b)). ), the first through hole is a through hole used when fixing the first member of the first and second members to the base, the second through hole and the third through hole are through holes used when fixing both the first member and the second member to the base, the first through hole and the multiple second through holes are alternately arranged on the outer periphery of the first member, a convex portion (e.g., a screw hole protruding piece 723b shown in FIG. 17(b)) is formed near the third through hole in the second member, and the convex portion has a concave portion (e.g., a screw hole identification groove 722a shown in FIG. 17(b)) formed near the third through hole.

According to the game machine of this embodiment, when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base, they can be fixed at once through the second through hole of the first member and the third through hole of the second member, so that the installation work of the members can be simplified compared to the conventional method, and the two first members and the second members can be stably fixed. In addition, since the second member can be fixed to the base while the first member is fixed and positioned to the base using the first through hole, it is not necessary to position the two members at the same time, and the work efficiency can be improved. In addition, since the first through hole and the multiple second through holes are arranged on the outer periphery of the first member in the order of the second through hole, the first through hole, and the second through hole, the two first members and the second members can be stably fixed by the second through holes arranged on both sides of the first through hole. In addition, a convex portion is formed near the third through hole in the second member, and a concave portion is formed in the convex portion near the third through hole (i.e., the third through hole has an identifiable identification means), so it is easy to distinguish whether the through hole is used when fixing to the base, or whether the through hole is used when fixing both the first member and the second member to the base, which increases the efficiency of the member attachment work.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine including a first member (e.g., speaker 710 shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17(c) and (d)) that can be fixed to a base (e.g., speaker base portion 730 shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 19) and a second member (e.g., rear cover 620 shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17(a) and (b)) that can cover at least a portion of the first member, the first member including a first through hole (e.g., dedicated screw hole 716a shown in FIG. 17(d)) and a plurality of second through holes different from the first through hole (e.g., shared screw hole 716b shown in FIG. 17(d)), the second member including a plurality of third through holes (e.g., screw hole 724 shown in FIG. 17(b)), and the first member including a second through hole (e.g., rear cover 620 shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17(a) and (b)). The through hole is a through hole used when fixing the first member of the first and second members to the base, the second through hole and the third through hole are through holes used when fixing both the first member and the second member to the base, the first through hole and the multiple second through holes are arranged on the outer periphery of the first member in the order of the second through hole, the first through hole, and the second through hole, and the first through hole of the first member is covered by a certain portion of the second member (for example, the protruding piece 723a of the rear cover 720 shown in FIG. 19(d)) when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base.

According to the game machine of this embodiment, when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base, they can be fixed at once through the second through hole of the first member and the third through hole of the second member, so that the installation work of the members can be simplified compared to the conventional method, and the two first members and the second members can be stably fixed. In addition, since the second member can be fixed to the base while the first member is fixed and positioned to the base using the first through hole, it is not necessary to position the two members at the same time, and the work efficiency can be improved. In addition, since the first through hole and the multiple second through holes are arranged on the outer periphery of the first member in the order of the second through hole, the first through hole, and the second through hole, the two first members and the second members can be stably fixed by the second through holes arranged on both sides of the first through hole. In addition, when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base, the first through-hole of the first member is configured to be covered by a certain portion of the second member, so that it is possible to visually confirm that it is not necessary to use the first through-hole when fixing the second member, and the second member can be easily positioned relative to the first member, ensuring reliable installation of the second member.

The first member and the second member are configured to be fixed (or to be fixed) to the base by a fixing means (e.g., the screw 740 shown in FIG. 16 or FIG. 19), and the certain portion may be formed with an accommodation space (e.g., the screw accommodation space 723a1 shown in FIG. 17(a)) capable of accommodating at least a portion of the fixing means.

With this configuration, a portion of the fixing means attached to the first through hole of the first member is accommodated in the accommodation space, so the fixing means does not interfere with the second member, and the second member can be reliably attached to the back surface of the first member. In particular, when a screw is used as the fixing means, if the screw is not tightly fastened when the first member is fixed to the base, there is a possibility that the screw head will protrude more than necessary from the first through hole. However, since the second member has an accommodation space capable of accommodating at least a portion of the fixing means, the risk of interference between the second member and the screw head can be avoided.

In addition, after the first through hole of the first member is fixed to the base by the fixing means, the third through hole of the second member may be positioned relative to the second through hole of the first member, and the second through hole of the first member and the third through hole of the second member may be configured to be fixable (or fixed) to the base by the fixing means.

With this configuration, for example, if a screw is used as the fixing means, if the screw is not tightly fastened when the first member is fixed to the base, the screw head may protrude more than necessary from the first through hole. However, because the second member has a storage space capable of storing at least a portion of the fixing means, the risk of interference between the second member and the screw head can be avoided.

The second member may be made of a material that allows the first member to be visible from the outside when the first member is housed inside.

With this configuration, the first member can be seen through the second member, making it possible to check the fixed position of the first member relative to the base and the relative positions of the first and second members, improving convenience when attaching the members.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine including a first member (e.g., speaker 710 shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17(c) and (d)) that can be fixed to a base (e.g., speaker base portion 730 shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 19) and a second member (e.g., rear cover 620 shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17(a) and (b)) that can cover at least a portion of the first member, and the first member includes a first through hole (e.g., dedicated screw hole 716a shown in FIG. 17(d)) and a plurality of second through holes different from the first through hole (e.g., shared screw hole 716b shown in FIG. 17(d)), and the second member includes a plurality of third through holes (e.g., screw hole 724), the first through hole is a through hole used when fixing the first member of the first and second members to the base, the second through hole and the third through hole are through holes used when fixing both the first member and the second member to the base, the first through hole and the multiple second through holes are alternately arranged on the outer periphery of the first member, and the first through hole of the first member is configured to be covered by a certain portion of the second member (for example, the protruding piece 723a of the back cover 720 shown in FIG. 19(d)) when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base.

According to the game machine of this embodiment, when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base, they can be fixed at once through the second through hole of the first member and the third through hole of the second member, so that the installation work of the members can be simplified compared to the conventional method, and the two first members and the second members can be stably fixed. In addition, since the second member can be fixed to the base while the first member is fixed and positioned to the base using the first through hole, it is not necessary to position the two members at the same time, and the work efficiency can be improved. In addition, since the first through hole and the multiple second through holes are alternately arranged on the outer periphery of the first member, the two first members and the second members can be stably fixed by the second through holes arranged on both sides of the first through hole. In addition, when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base, the first through-hole of the first member is configured to be covered by a certain portion of the second member, so that it is possible to visually confirm that it is not necessary to use the first through-hole when fixing the second member, and the second member can be easily positioned relative to the first member, ensuring reliable installation of the second member.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine including a first member (e.g., speaker 710 shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17(c) and (d)) that can be fixed to a base (e.g., speaker base portion 730 shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 19) and a second member (e.g., rear cover 620 shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17(a) and (b)) that can cover at least a portion of the first member, the first member including a first through hole (e.g., dedicated screw hole 716a shown in FIG. 17(d)) and a plurality of second through holes different from the first through hole (e.g., shared screw hole 716b shown in FIG. 17(d)), and the second member including a plurality of third through holes (e.g., dedicated screw hole 716b shown in FIG. 17(b)). The game table has a screw hole 724 shown in FIG. 17A, the first through hole is a through hole used when fixing the first member of the first and second members to the base, the second through hole and the third through hole are through holes used when fixing both the first and second members to the base, the first through hole and the multiple second through holes are arranged on the outer periphery of the first member in the order of the second through hole, the first through hole, and the second through hole, and the area where the third through hole is formed is configured as a thin-walled area that is thinner than the surrounding area (for example, the screw hole identification recess 724a shown in FIG. 17A and FIG. 17B).

According to the game machine of this embodiment, when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base, they can be fixed at once through the second through hole of the first member and the third through hole of the second member, so that the installation work of the members can be simplified compared to the conventional method, and the two first members and the second members can be stably fixed. In addition, since the second member can be fixed to the base while the first member is fixed and positioned to the base using the first through hole, it is not necessary to position the two members at the same time, and the work efficiency can be improved. In addition, since the first through hole and the multiple second through holes are arranged on the outer periphery of the first member in the order of the second through hole, the first through hole, and the second through hole, the two first members and the second members can be stably fixed by the second through holes arranged on both sides of the first through hole. In addition, since the area where the third through hole is formed is a thin-walled area that is thinner than the surrounding area, the stroke amount of the fixing means (e.g., a screw) that fastens both the second through hole of the first member and the third through hole of the second member can be reduced, improving work efficiency. In addition, since a part of the head of the fixing means can be accommodated in the thin-walled area around the third through hole, the fixing means is less likely to come off, and the first and second members can be stably fixed to the base. In addition, the thin-walled area formed around the third through hole also functions as a positioning device when attaching the fixing means.

The second member may also have a protruding piece that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the third through hole (for example, the protruding piece 723b with a screw hole shown in FIG. 17(b)).

With this configuration, when the second member is positioned, the fixed position of the second member (third through hole) can be easily recognized due to the presence of the protruding piece, and it can also function as reinforcement for the thin-walled portion around the third through hole.

In addition, when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base, the first through-hole of the first member may be configured to be covered by a certain portion of the second member (for example, the protruding piece 723a of the rear cover 720 shown in FIG. 19(d)).

With this configuration, it is possible to visually confirm that it is not necessary to use the first through hole when fixing the second member, and it is also possible to easily position the second member relative to the first member, ensuring reliable installation of the second member.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine including a first member (e.g., speaker 710 shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17(c) and (d)) that can be fixed to a base (e.g., speaker base portion 730 shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 19) and a second member (e.g., rear cover 620 shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17(a) and (b)) that can cover at least a portion of the first member, and the first member includes a first through hole (e.g., dedicated screw hole 716a shown in FIG. 17(d)) and a plurality of second through holes different from the first through hole (e.g., shared screw hole 716b shown in FIG. 17(d)), and the second member includes a plurality of third through holes. (e.g., screw hole 724 shown in FIG. 17(b)), the first through hole is a through hole used when fixing the first member of the first and second members to the base, the second through hole and the third through hole are through holes used when fixing both the first and second members to the base, the first through hole and the multiple second through holes are alternately arranged on the outer periphery of the first member, and the area where the third through hole is formed is configured as a thin-walled area that is thinner than the surrounding area (e.g., screw hole identification recess 724a shown in FIG. 17(a) and (b)).

According to the game machine of this embodiment, when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base, they can be fixed at once through the second through hole of the first member and the third through hole of the second member, so that the installation work of the members can be simplified compared to the conventional method, and the two first members and the second members can be stably fixed. In addition, since the second member can be fixed to the base while the first member is fixed and positioned to the base using the first through hole, it is not necessary to position the two members at the same time, and the work efficiency can be improved. In addition, since the first through hole and the multiple second through holes are alternately arranged on the outer periphery of the first member, the two first members and the second members can be stably fixed by the second through holes arranged on both sides of the first through hole. In addition, since the area where the third through hole is formed is a thin-walled area that is thinner than the surrounding area, the stroke amount of the fixing means (e.g., a screw) that fastens both the second through hole of the first member and the third through hole of the second member can be reduced, improving work efficiency. In addition, since a part of the head of the fixing means can be accommodated in the thin-walled area around the third through hole, the fixing means is less likely to come off, and the first and second members can be stably fixed to the base. In addition, the thin-walled area formed around the third through hole also functions as a positioning device when attaching the fixing means.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine including a first member (e.g., speaker 710 shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17(c) and (d)) that can be fixed to a base (e.g., speaker base portion 730 shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 19) and a second member (e.g., rear cover 720 shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17(a) and (b)) that can cover at least a portion of the first member, wherein the first member includes a first through hole (e.g., dedicated screw hole 716a shown in FIG. 17(d)) and a plurality of second through holes different from the first through hole (e.g., shared screw hole 716b shown in FIG. 17(d)), the second member includes a plurality of third through holes (e.g., screw hole 724 shown in FIG. 17(b)), and the first through hole is a The first through hole is a through hole used when fixing the first member of the first and second members to the base, the second through hole and the third through hole are through holes used when fixing both the first member and the second member to the base, the first through hole and the multiple second through holes are arranged on the outer periphery of the first member in the order of the second through hole, the first through hole, and the second through hole, and when the first and second members are fixed to the base, a part of the second member abuts on a support provided on the base, forming a space between the second member and the base (for example, a box-shaped space 722S shown in Figures 17(a) and (b)).

According to the game machine of this embodiment, when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base, they can be fixed at once through the second through hole of the first member and the third through hole of the second member, so that the installation work of the members can be simplified compared to the conventional method, and the two first members and the second members can be stably fixed. In addition, since the second member can be fixed to the base while the first member is fixed and positioned to the base using the first through hole, it is not necessary to position the two members at the same time, and the work efficiency can be improved. In addition, since the first through hole and the multiple second through holes are arranged on the outer periphery of the first member in the order of the second through hole, the first through hole, and the second through hole, the two first members and the second members can be stably fixed by the second through holes arranged on both sides of the first through hole. In addition, when the first and second members are fixed to the base, a portion of the second member abuts against a support portion provided on the base, forming a space between the second member and the base. Therefore, even if the first and second members are fixed to the base and a portion of the first member is covered by the second member, for example, the wiring of the first member can be pulled out to the outside, increasing the degree of freedom in design.

The first member may also be a member including an electrical component (e.g., electromagnetic circuit 711 shown in FIG. 19(b)) to which wiring (e.g., lead wire 717 shown in FIG. 19(b)) is connected, and may be configured so that the wiring can be drawn out to the outside of the first member and the second member through the space.

With this configuration, even if part of the first component is covered by the second component, the wiring of the first component can be pulled out to the outside, allowing for greater design freedom.

The second member may have a space portion having a predetermined space (e.g., a box-shaped space 722S shown in Figs. 17(a) and (b)), the space portion is configured to be able to accommodate at least a part of the wiring, and the space portion may have a first space portion having a vertically elongated rectangular parallelepiped shape (e.g., a first space portion 722S1 shown in Figs. 17(a) and (b)) and a second space portion having a horizontally elongated rectangular parallelepiped shape (e.g., a second space portion 722S2 shown in Figs. 17(a) and (b)). When the first member is covered with the second member, the space portion of the second member may be disposed between the first through hole and the second through hole of the first member.

With this configuration, when the second member is fixed to the base, a large area can be secured other than the area where the base and the second member come into contact (around the through hole), which can prevent the wiring from becoming pinched between the base and the second member.

The first space and the second space may be disposed outside the third through hole in the second member (radially outside the second member).

With this configuration, the second space portion in the shape of a horizontally elongated rectangular parallelepiped can provide a large area for pulling out the wiring from between the second member and the base, and the first space portion in the shape of a vertically elongated rectangular parallelepiped can partially restrict the area for guiding the wiring, thereby preventing the wiring from gathering near the through hole when the second member is fixed and interfering with the installation work.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine having a first member (e.g., speaker 710 shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17(c) and (d)) that can be fixed to a base (e.g., speaker base portion 730 shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 19) and a second member (e.g., rear cover 620 shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17(a) and (b)) that can cover at least a portion of the first member, wherein the first member has a first through hole (e.g., dedicated screw hole 716a shown in FIG. 17(d)) and a plurality of second through holes different from the first through hole (e.g., shared screw hole 716b shown in FIG. 17(d)), and the second member has a plurality of third through holes (e.g., screw hole 724 shown in FIG. 17(b)), The first through hole is a through hole used when fixing the first member of the first and second members to the base, the second through hole and the third through hole are through holes used when fixing both the first member and the second member to the base, the first through hole and the multiple second through holes are arranged alternately on the outer periphery of the first member, and when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base, a part of the second member abuts on a support provided on the base to form a space between the second member and the base (for example, a box-shaped space 722S shown in Figures 17(a) and (b)).

According to the game machine of this embodiment, when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base, they can be fixed at once through the second through hole of the first member and the third through hole of the second member, so that the installation work of the members can be simplified compared to the conventional method, and the two first members and the second members can be stably fixed. In addition, since the second member can be fixed to the base while the first member is fixed and positioned to the base using the first through hole, it is not necessary to position the two members at the same time, and the work efficiency can be improved. In addition, since the first through hole and the multiple second through holes are alternately arranged on the outer periphery of the first member, the two first members and the second members can be stably fixed by the second through holes arranged on both sides of the first through hole. In addition, when the first and second members are fixed to the base, a portion of the second member abuts against a support portion provided on the base, forming a space between the second member and the base. Therefore, even if the first and second members are fixed to the base and a portion of the first member is covered by the second member, for example, the wiring of the first member can be pulled out to the outside, increasing the degree of freedom in design.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 2)/speaker unit configuration>
Next, the configuration of a speaker unit 800 according to Modification 2 will be described with reference to Fig. 20. Fig. 20(a) is an exploded perspective view of the speaker unit 800 according to Modification 2.

As shown in FIG. 20(a), the speaker unit 800 of the second modification is composed of a low-pitched sound output speaker 810 (first member) having a large diaphragm and a rear cover 820 (second member) that covers the rear side of the speaker 810, and is attached to a speaker pedestal 830 (base) formed on the lower rear surface of the front door 102 of the slot machine.

In the slot machine (game machine) of this example, two speaker bases 830 are arranged horizontally at a predetermined distance from each other on the back side of the front door 102, and each speaker base 830 is configured to allow a speaker unit 800 to be attached.

Figure 20(b) is an external perspective view showing two speaker units 800 attached to the back side of the front door 102.

As shown in FIG. 20(b), the lead wires 817 of the two left and right speakers 810 pass through the inner space of the box-shaped space 822S of the rear cover 820, are pulled out from the space formed between the rear cover 820 and the speaker base 830, are wired along the rear surface of the front door 102, and are electrically connected to a sound output control means (e.g., the sound source IC 418 of the first sub-controller 400 described using FIG. 3, or the second sub-controller 500) disposed above the front door 102.

In this example, two speaker units 800 are arranged horizontally on the back surface of the front door 102, but three or more speaker units 800 may be arranged, or the speaker units 800 may be arranged vertically or diagonally on the back surface of the front door 102.

The speaker unit 800 can be oriented in a direction in which the box-shaped space 822S of the rear cover 820 and the lead terminal 816 of the speaker 810 face upward and the lead wire 817 of the speaker 810 is pulled out from above (the direction shown in FIG. 20(b) hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the "upward direction"), as well as in a direction in which the box-shaped space 822S of the rear cover 820 and the lead terminal 816 of the speaker 810 face rightward and the lead wire 817 of the speaker 810 is pulled out from the right side (the direction shown in FIG. 20(b) hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the "rightward direction"). ), the box-shaped space 822S of the rear cover 820 and the lead terminal 816 of the speaker 810 face downwards, and the lead wire 817 of the speaker 810 is pulled out from the bottom (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the "downward direction"), or the box-shaped space 822S of the rear cover 820 and the lead terminal 816 of the speaker 810 face leftwards, and the lead wire 817 of the speaker 810 is pulled out from the left side (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as the "leftward direction").

In this example, the speaker unit 800 can be arranged facing upward, right, downward, or left with respect to the speaker base 830, which increases the degree of freedom in mounting the speaker unit 800.

For example, in the mounting mode of the speaker unit 800 shown in FIG. 20(b), since both speaker units 800 are mounted facing upward, the lead wires 817 of the two speakers 810 can be pulled out from above and then bundled together above the speaker unit 800, improving the efficiency and maintainability of the wiring work. This is particularly suitable for gaming machines where space can be secured above the speaker unit 800 (for example, medal-less slot machines that do not have a hopper or medal selector above the speaker unit 800, or enclosed gaming machines that do not have a lower tray above the speaker unit 800).

On the other hand, when applied to a gaming machine where it is difficult to secure space above the speaker unit 800 (for example, a slot machine in which a hopper or medal selector is arranged above the speaker unit 800, or a pachinko machine in which a tray is arranged above the speaker unit 800), if the two speaker units 800 are attached facing downward, to the right, or to the left instead of facing upward, the lead wire 817 of the speaker 810 can be routed around other devices arranged above the speaker unit 800, which not only increases the efficiency of the wiring work but also makes effective use of the limited space behind the front door 102.

In addition, by differing the orientation of the two speaker units 800, the direction in which the lead wires 817 of the speaker 810 are pulled out may be different. For example, the speaker unit 800 disposed on the left side of the front door 102 when viewed from the rear can be installed facing right, while the speaker unit 800 disposed on the right side of the front door 102 when viewed from the rear can be installed facing left. This allows the lead wires 817 of the speaker 810 to be pulled out from the two speaker units 800 toward the center of the rear of the front door 102, improving the efficiency and maintainability of the wiring work.

The length of the lead wire 817 of the speaker 810 is not particularly limited, and it is sufficient that the speaker 810 has a length that allows electrical connection from the speaker 810 to a sound output control means (for example, the sound source IC 418 of the first sub-controller 400 described using FIG. 3, or the second sub-controller 500). However, for example, if the length is set to the minimum required when the speaker unit 800 is mounted in an upward direction, and the lead wire 817 is configured so that the length is insufficient to connect to the sound output control means when the speaker unit 800 is mounted in a direction other than upward, the mounting direction of the speaker unit 800 can be intentionally restricted, and the mounting direction of the speaker unit 800 on the gaming machine can be unified.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 2)/speaker base>
20(a), the speaker base 830 (base) is configured to include an annular diaphragm support 831 that supports an outer edge 813a (see FIG. 22; a portion that supports the outer edge of the cone of the diaphragm 813) of the diaphragm 813 of the speaker 810, four cylindrical mounting sleeves 832 for screwing the speaker 810 and the rear cover 820 to the front door 102, and a horizontally elongated sound hole plate 834 that is fitted inside the diaphragm support 831. The detailed configuration of the speaker base 830 (base) will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.

In addition, one of a number of cylindrical bosses 835 for fixing the title panel 162 (see FIG. 1) attached to the lower front surface of the front door 102 is disposed in the space formed by the diaphragm support portion 831 and the rear surface of the front door 102.

In this example, other components that are not related to the speaker unit 800 or the speaker base portion 830 (in this example, the boss 835 for fixing the title panel 162) can be accommodated within the space formed by the diaphragm support portion 831 and the back surface of the front door 102, so that the limited space behind the front door 102 can be effectively utilized and space saving can be achieved behind the front door 102.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 2)/speaker, rear cover>
Next, the speaker 810 and the rear cover 820 constituting the speaker unit 800 according to the second modification will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG.

21(a) is a side view of the rear cover 820, and (b) is a top view of the rear cover 820. Also, (c) is a side view of the speaker 810, and (d) is a top view of the speaker 810. Also, FIG. 22 is a plan view of the speaker 810 housed in the inner space of the rear cover 820, as viewed from the underside of the speaker 810.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 2)/speaker>
The speaker 810 (first member) is a cone-type dynamic speaker, and as shown in FIG. 21( c ), is roughly composed of an electromagnetic circuit 811 (electrical component) consisting of a voice coil and a magnet and vibrating a diaphragm 813 (described later) in response to an electric signal, a frame 812 supporting the electromagnetic circuit 811, the diaphragm 813 that vibrates to generate sound, a flat flange 814 to which the diaphragm 813 is fixed so that it can vibrate, a lead terminal 816 arranged on the upper side of the flange 814 when viewed from above, and a lead wire 817 (wiring) detachably connected to the lead terminal 816.

The frame 812 is a cylindrical metal ring frame that widens slightly toward the front, and has multiple openings 815 (see FIG. 20) formed along the circumferential direction on the side to allow air around the diaphragm 813 to escape. That is, multiple openings 815 are formed along the circumferential direction on the side of the frame 812, and supports 812a (see FIG. 20) are formed along the front-rear direction between the openings 815. The diaphragm 813 is formed into a cone shape that opens toward the front, using a flexible material such as paper.

As shown in FIG. 21(d), elliptical dedicated screw holes 816a (first through holes) for screwing the speaker 810 to the speaker base 830 are formed in the upper left and lower right corners of the outer end of the flange 814. Also, elliptical shared screw holes 816b (second through holes) for screwing the speaker 810 and rear cover 820 to the speaker base 830 are formed in the lower left and upper right corners of the outer end of the flange 814.

The size and shape of the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through hole) and the shared screw hole 816b (second through hole) are not particularly limited, but in this example, as shown in FIG. 22, the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through hole) and the shared screw hole 816b (second through hole) are larger than the circular screw hole 824 (third through hole) of the rear cover 820, and smaller than the circular through hole 825 (fourth through hole) of the rear cover 820.

In this example, two dedicated screw holes 816a (first through holes) are arranged diagonally (at the vertices of the ends of the diagonal) at the upper left and lower right corners on the outer edge of the flange 814, and two shared screw holes 816b (second through holes) are arranged diagonally (at the vertices of the ends of the diagonal) at the lower left and upper right corners on the outer edge of the flange 814. As a result, the dedicated screw holes 816a (first through holes) and the shared screw holes 816b (second through holes) are arranged alternately at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction along the outer edge of the flange 818.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 21(d), when a plurality of dedicated screw holes 816a (first through holes) and the common screw holes 816b (second through holes) on both sides of the plurality of dedicated screw holes 816a (first through holes) are connected by a virtual straight line VL, a virtual rectangle VQ is formed, and the plurality of dedicated screw holes 816a (first through holes) are arranged on a (first) diagonal line (vertices at the ends of the diagonal line) of the virtual rectangle VQ, and the plurality of common screw holes 816b (second through holes) are arranged on a (second) diagonal line different from the first diagonal line (vertices at the ends of the diagonal line) of the virtual rectangle VQ.

Furthermore, when focusing on the distance between the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through hole) and the shared screw hole 816b (second through hole), as shown in FIG. 21(d), the shortest distance L3 from the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through hole) located in the upper left corner to one of the two shared screw holes 816b (second through hole) (e.g., the shared screw hole 816b located in the upper right corner) is almost the same as the shortest distance L4 from the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through hole) located in the upper left corner to another through hole (e.g., the shared screw hole 816b located in the lower left corner) of the two shared screw holes 816b (second through hole).

According to this example, when the speaker 810 (first member) is fixed to the speaker pedestal 830 (base) using the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through hole) for positioning, or when only the rear cover 820 (second member) is removed from the speaker pedestal 830 (base), the speaker 810 (first member) can be stably fixed, improving safety and workability.

As described above, the speaker unit 800 can be arranged facing upward, right, downward, or left with respect to the speaker base 830, and the lead terminal 816 of the speaker 810 can be arranged facing upward, right, downward, or left, which increases the degree of freedom in mounting the speaker 810.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 2)/rear cover>
Next, the rear cover 820 (second member) will be described.

The rear cover 820 (second member) is a colored, transparent resin member capable of housing the speaker 810 inside, and is made of a material that allows the speaker 810 (first member) to be seen from the outside when the speaker 810 (first member) is housed inside.

In this example, at least a portion of the speaker 810 (first member) can be seen through the rear cover 820 (second member), so the fixed position of the speaker 810 (first member) relative to the speaker base 830 (base) and the relative positions of the speaker 810 (first member) and the rear cover 820 (second member) can be confirmed, improving the convenience of the work of installing the members.

In addition, the rear cover 820 may be any transparent material, and its material is not limited to colored transparent resin, but may be, for example, colorless transparent (or translucent) plastic, acrylic, polycarbonate, polyvinyl chloride, glass, metal, etc.

As shown in Figures 21(a) and (b), the rear cover 820 has a circular ring-shaped cover portion 821 formed on the rear side that covers part of the rear end of the speaker 810, and has a cylindrical side wall portion 822 that is slightly flared toward the rear and has this cover portion 821 as its base end.

A predetermined marking 826 (in this example, a part number and material) is provided on the upper side of the cover portion 821 when viewed from above. The display form of the predetermined marking 826 is not particularly limited, but in this example, a part number marking (in this example, a character string "SPxxxx") indicating the part number of the rear cover 820 is engraved on the surface of the cover portion 821 to the left of the portion where the lead terminal 816 of the speaker 810 is visible when the rear cover 820 is covered, and a material marking (in this example, a character string "PC") indicating the material of the rear cover 820 is engraved on the right of the portion where the lead terminal 816 of the speaker 810 is visible when the rear cover 820 is covered.

That is, when the speaker 810 is viewed through the rear cover 820, the part number display (in this example, the character string "SPxxxx") is visible to the left of the lead terminal 816 of the speaker 810, and the material display (in this example, the character string "PC") is visible to the right of the lead terminal 816 of the speaker 810.

In this example, in addition to the specified markings 826 being applied to the rear cover 820, when the speaker 810 is viewed through the rear cover 820, the lead terminals 816 of the speaker 810 are visible. Therefore, the correct orientation (installation direction) of the rear cover 820 can be easily identified depending on the orientation of the specified markings 826 and whether the lead terminals 816 of the speaker 810 are visible in the center of the specified markings 826, thereby improving convenience when installing the rear cover 820, etc.

As shown in FIG. 21(b), the rear cover 820 has two protruding pieces 823a and two protruding pieces 823b with screw holes that protrude outward from the outer edge of the side wall portion 822.

In this example, two protruding pieces 823a are arranged diagonally (at the vertices of the ends of the diagonal) at the upper left and lower right corners on the outer edge of the side wall portion 822, and two protruding pieces 823b with screw holes are arranged diagonally (at the vertices of the ends of the diagonal) at the lower left and upper right corners on the outer edge of the side wall portion 822. As a result, the protruding pieces 823a and the protruding pieces 823b with screw holes are arranged alternately at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction along the outer edge of the side wall portion 822.

In other words, as shown in FIG. 21(b), when the vertices of the multiple protrusions 823a and the protrusions 823b with screw holes on both sides of the multiple protrusions 823a are connected by an imaginary straight line VL2, an imaginary rectangle VQ2 is formed, and the multiple protrusions 823a are arranged on a (first) diagonal line (the vertices at the ends of the diagonal line) of the imaginary rectangle VQ2, and the multiple protrusions 823b with screw holes are arranged on a (second) diagonal line (different from the first diagonal line) of the imaginary rectangle VQ2 (the vertices at the ends of the diagonal line).

The screw-hole protrusions 823b, which are located diagonally between the lower left and upper right corners (the vertices at the ends of the diagonal), have circular screw holes 824 (third through holes) formed therein for screwing the speaker 810 and rear cover 820 together to the speaker base 730.

With this configuration, the speaker unit 800 is integrated and fixed to the speaker base 730 by fastening the shared screw hole 816b (second through hole) of the speaker 810 and the screw hole 824 (third through hole) of the rear cover 820 to the speaker base 830 (base) with a screw 840 (fixing means; see FIG. 20). The method of mounting the speaker unit 800 will be described later.

In addition, a screw hole identification groove 822a consisting of a linear groove extending from the bottom to the top of the side wall portion 822 is formed near the screw hole 824 in the side wall portion 822. That is, in this example, the screw hole identification groove 822a is formed near the screw hole 824, so that the screw hole 824 can be identified.

According to this example, at least one of the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through hole), the shared screw hole 816b (second through hole), and the screw hole 824 (third through hole) (in this example, the screw hole 824 (third through hole)) is configured to be identifiable, so that it is easy to determine whether each through hole is a through hole used when fixing only the speaker 810 (first member) to the speaker base part 830 (base) or a through hole used when fixing both the speaker 810 (first member) and the rear cover 820 (second member) to the speaker base part 830 (base), which can improve the efficiency of the installation work of the members. In addition, the correct orientation (installation direction) of the rear cover 820 can be easily identified using the screw hole identification groove 822a as a clue, which can improve convenience when installing the rear cover 820, etc.

In this example, a screw hole identification groove 822a is formed near the screw hole 824 (third through hole) as a configuration for making the screw hole 824 (third through hole) identifiable, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a part for making the screw hole 824 (third through hole) identifiable may be formed in a member (for example, the speaker base 830 (base) or the speaker 810 (first member)) other than the rear cover 820 (second member), a sticker or the like for making the screw hole 824 (third through hole) identifiable may be affixed, or a marking, printing, engraving, or the like for making the screw hole 824 (third through hole) identifiable may be applied.

In addition, a configuration that makes it possible to identify the screw hole 824 (third through hole) of the rear cover 820 has been exemplified, but instead of (or in addition to) this, a configuration that makes it possible to identify the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through hole) and/or the shared screw hole 816b (second through hole) of the speaker 810 (first member) may be adopted.

Therefore, for example, a portion where at least one of the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through hole), the shared screw hole 816b (second through hole), and the screw hole 84 (third through hole) is identifiable may be formed on the mounting sleeve 832 of the speaker base portion 830 (base), a sticker or the like where at least one of the through holes is affixed, or a marking, printing, engraving, etc. where at least one of the through holes is identifiable may be applied; a portion where the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through hole) and/or the shared screw hole 816b (second through hole) is identifiable may be formed on the flange 814 of the speaker 810 (first member), a sticker or the like where at least one of the through holes is identifiable may be affixed, or a marking, printing, engraving, etc. where at least one of the through holes is identifiable may be applied.

Also, by making the shape of the screw hole protruding piece 823b of the rear cover 820 different from the shape of the protruding piece 823a, it is possible to make it identifiable that the through hole formed in the screw hole protruding piece 823b is a through hole used when fixing both the speaker 810 (first member) and the rear cover 820 (second member) to the speaker base part 830 (base), or conversely, by making the shape of the screw hole protruding piece 823a of the rear cover 820 different from the shape of the screw hole protruding piece 823b, it is possible to make it identifiable that the through hole of the speaker 810 corresponding to the protruding piece 823a is a through hole used when fixing only the speaker 810 (first member) to the speaker base part 830 (base).

This configuration makes it possible to visually identify the function of the through-hole based on the shape of the protruding piece of the rear cover 820, thereby improving work efficiency.

As shown in FIG. 21(b), the protruding pieces 823a arranged diagonally at the upper left and lower right corners of the rear cover 820 have through holes 825 (fourth through holes) formed therein, the through holes having an inner diameter larger than the inner diameter of the screw holes 824 (third through holes).

As shown in FIG. 22, this through hole 825 (fourth through hole) has a larger inner diameter than the elliptical shared screw hole 816b (second through hole) of the speaker 810, and as shown in FIG. 23(d), it has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the head of the screw 840.

With this configuration, by fastening the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through hole) of the speaker 810 to the speaker base part 830 (base) with a screw 840, even if only the speaker 810 is fixed to the back surface of the front door 102 and then the rear cover 820 is positioned relative to the rear surface of the speaker 810, the screw 840 attached to the dedicated screw hole 816a of the speaker 810 can be accommodated without contacting the through hole 825, and the screw 840 does not interfere with the rear cover 820. Therefore, it is possible to easily visually check that the rear cover 820 is attached in the correct position relative to the speaker 810 based on the positional relationship between the through hole 825 (fourth through hole) and the screw 840, and the rear cover 820 can be accurately positioned relative to the speaker 810.

In addition, when the rear cover 820 is accurately positioned relative to the speaker 810, the screw 840 is housed inside the through hole 825, and the horizontal movement of the rear cover 820 is restricted by the screw 840, so that the rear cover 820 can be prevented from shifting or rattling when it is attached. In addition, the through hole 825 (fourth through hole) has a larger inner diameter than the elliptical shared screw hole 816b (second through hole) of the speaker 810, so that an assembly error (shift of the rear cover 820) of the rear cover 820 relative to the speaker 810 can be absorbed, and the installation work can be simplified.

In this example, a through hole is formed in the protruding piece 823a of the rear cover 820, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of a through hole, a recess or a notch may be formed in the protruding piece 823a so that the screw 840 does not interfere, or the protruding piece 823a itself may be removed from the rear cover 820. In other words, when the speaker 810 is fixed to the rear surface of the front door 102 with the screw 840, it is sufficient to configure the screw 840 attached to the dedicated screw hole 816a of the speaker 810 so that it does not interfere with the rear cover 820.

As shown in FIG. 21(b), a box-shaped space 822S (space portion) is formed protruding from the outer edge of the upper side of the rear cover 820 when viewed from above, for storing the lead terminals 816 of the speaker 810 and leading the lead wires 817 to the outside of the speaker unit 800.

With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 22, when the speaker 810 (first member) is housed inside the rear cover 820 (second member), a space SP is formed between the speaker 810 (first member) and the rear cover 820 (second member), and the lead wire 817 (wiring) of the speaker 810 can be pulled out to the outside of the speaker 810 (first member) and the rear cover 820 (second member) through the space SP.

According to this example, even if a portion of the speaker 810 (first component) is covered by the rear cover 820 (second component), the lead wire 817 (wiring) of the speaker 810 (first component) can be pulled out to the outside, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in design.

As shown in FIG. 22, four protruding ribs 827 are formed on the inside bottom surface of the rear cover 820, which can come into contact with the four flange corners 814a of the flange 814 of the speaker 810, and the shape of the lower edge 820a of the rear cover 820 is molded into a curved shape that is approximately the same as the outer edge of one side of the flange 814 of the speaker 810.

According to this example, the four ribs 827 of the rear cover 820 are abutted against any of the four flange corners 814a of the flange 814 of the speaker 810, and the lower edge 820a of the rear cover 820 is abutted against the outer edge of one side of the flange 814 of the speaker 810, so that the speaker 810 can be easily and reliably positioned relative to the rear cover 820, and the speaker 810 and the rear cover 820 can be integrated together. Therefore, by using the installation method 2 described below, the speaker 810 and the rear cover 820 can be attached to the speaker base 830 in an integrated state, simplifying the installation work of the speaker unit 800.

As described above, the speaker unit 800 can be arranged facing upward, right, downward, or left with respect to the speaker base 830, and the box-shaped space 822S of the rear cover 820 can be arranged facing upward, right, downward, or left, which increases the degree of freedom in terms of attachment of the rear cover 820.

As described above, the rear cover 820 has a designated marking 826, and therefore when attaching the rear cover 820 to the speaker base 830, it is preferable to attach the rear cover 820 facing upward so that the side with the designated marking 826 is on top and the designated marking 826 is easily visible. However, even if the rear cover 820 is attached facing right, downward, or left, the designated marking 826 will be upside down, but it can still be attached to the speaker base 830.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 2)/speaker base>
Next, the speaker pedestal portion 830 (base) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

Figures 23(a) to (d) are diagrams showing an example of a method for mounting the speaker unit 800 in chronological order, with figure (a) showing the speaker base 830 with the sound hole plate 834 removed.

As explained with reference to FIG. 20(a), the speaker base 830 (base) is composed of a circular diaphragm support 831 that supports the outer edge 813a (see FIG. 22; the portion that supports the outer edge of the cone of the diaphragm 813) of the speaker 810, four mounting sleeves 832 (832a, 832b) for screwing the speaker 810 and rear cover 820 to the front door 102, and a horizontally elongated sound hole plate 834 that fits inside the diaphragm support 831.

The height of the frame support part 831 (height from the rear surface of the front door 102) is designed to be higher than the maximum vibration amplitude of the diaphragm 813 of the speaker 810 so as not to inhibit the vibration of the diaphragm 813, and a sound hole plate 834 is fitted inside it as shown in FIG. 23(b).

As shown in FIG. 23(c), when the speaker 810 is attached to the speaker base 830, the outer edge 813a of the diaphragm 813 of the speaker 810 abuts against the frame support 831, and an enclosed space is formed by the speaker base 830 and the diaphragm 813 of the speaker 810.

In this example, the periphery of the diaphragm 813 of the speaker 810 can be supported by the frame support portion 831, and an enclosed space can be formed by the speaker base portion 830 and the diaphragm 813 of the speaker 810, so that the sound output from the diaphragm 813 of the speaker 810 can be efficiently output through the sound hole plate 834 toward the front of the front door 102, improving the acoustic effect.

Of the four mounting sleeves 832, the first mounting sleeves 832a, which are located at the upper left and lower right corners when viewed from above, are mounting sleeves to which the dedicated screw holes 816a (first through holes) of the speaker 810 are fastened by screws 840, as shown in FIG. 23(c).

On the other hand, of the four mounting sleeves 832, the second mounting sleeves 832b, which are located at the lower left corner and upper right corner when viewed from above, are mounting sleeves in which the shared screw hole 816b (second through hole) of the speaker 810 and the screw hole 824 (third through hole) of the rear cover 820 are fastened by a screw 840, as shown in FIG. 23(d).

In addition, two cylindrical ribs 838 are formed at a predetermined distance from each other on the outer periphery of each of the four mounting sleeves 832 (832a, 832b), on which the four flange corners 814a (see FIG. 22) of the flange 814 of the speaker 810 can be placed.

According to this example, when attaching the speaker 810 to the speaker base 830, the flange corner 814a of the flange 814 of the speaker 810 is placed on the rib 838 of the mounting sleeve 832, so that the positioning of the speaker 810 can be easily and reliably performed, and the speaker 810 can be prevented from shifting or rattling when attached.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 2)/mounting method 1>
Next, a first mounting method of the speaker unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG.

When attaching the speaker unit 800 to the speaker base 830, first attach the speaker 810 to the speaker base 830 as shown in Figures 23(b) and (c), and then attach the rear cover 820 to the speaker base 830 as shown in Figures 23(c) and (d).

More specifically, when attaching the speaker 810 to the speaker base 830, the lead terminals 816 of the speaker 810 are positioned upward, and the flange corners 814a of the flange 814 are placed on the ribs 838 of the mounting sleeve 832, aligning the dedicated screw holes 816a of the speaker 810 with the first mounting sleeve 832a, while the outer edge 813a of the diaphragm 813 of the speaker 810 is abutted against the frame support 831, thereby positioning the speaker 810 relative to the speaker base 830.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23(c), the dedicated screw hole 816a of the speaker 810 is aligned with the hole of the first mounting sleeve 832a of the speaker base 830, and the speaker 810 is attached to the speaker base 830 by fastening with the screw 840.

The lead terminal 816 and lead wire 817 of the speaker 810 are configured to be detachable, so even if the wiring of the lead wire 817 to the speaker base 830 is complete, the speaker 810 can be rotated 90 degrees, 180 degrees, or 270 degrees and attached to the speaker base 830, and the lead terminal 816 and lead wire 817 can be connected later. Even if the speaker 810 is attached to the speaker base 830, the wiring of the lead wire 817 can be changed and the lead terminal 816 and lead wire 817 can be connected later.

Next, when attaching the rear cover 820 to the speaker base 830, the position of the box-shaped space 822S of the rear cover 820 is aligned with the lead terminal 816 of the speaker 810, and while facing upward, the screw hole 824 of the rear cover 820 is aligned with the second mounting sleeve 832b, and the rear cover 820 is positioned relative to the speaker base 830 by covering the speaker 810 with the rear cover 820.

Next, as shown in FIG. 23(d), the screw holes 824 of the rear cover 820 are aligned with the shared screw holes 816b of the speaker 810 and the holes of the second mounting sleeve 832b of the speaker base 830, and the rear cover 820 is attached to the speaker base 830 by fastening with screws 840. This allows the speaker unit 800 to be integrated and fixed to the rear surface of the front door 102.

According to this example, when the speaker 810 and the rear cover 820 are fixed to the speaker base 830 with the screw 840, they can be fixed at once with one screw 840 via the shared screw hole 816b of the speaker 810 and the screw hole 824 of the rear cover 820, which simplifies the work of attaching the components compared to the conventional method. In addition, the speaker 810 can be fixed to the base and positioned using the dedicated screw hole 816a before the rear cover 820 is fixed to the speaker base 830, which eliminates the need to position the two components at the same time and improves work efficiency.

In addition, when the speaker unit 800 is correctly attached and the speaker 810 (first member) is covered with the rear cover 820 (second member), as shown in FIG. 23(d), the screw 840 attached to the dedicated screw hole 816a of the speaker 810 can be accommodated without contacting the inside of the through hole 825 (fourth through hole), and the screw 840 does not interfere with the rear cover 820. Therefore, depending on the positional relationship between the through hole 825 (fourth through hole) and the screw 840, the rear cover 820 can be inserted into the speaker 810. It is easy to visually check that the rear cover 820 is attached in the correct position relative to the speaker 810, and the rear cover 820 can be accurately positioned relative to the speaker 810. When the rear cover 820 is accurately positioned relative to the speaker 810, the screws 840 are housed inside the through holes 825, and the horizontal movement of the rear cover 820 is restricted by the screws 840, preventing the rear cover 820 from shifting or rattling when the rear cover 820 is attached.

In particular, when screws are used as a fixing means, if the screws are not tightly fastened when fixing the speaker 810 (first member) to the speaker base 830 (base), there is a possibility that the screw head may protrude more than necessary from the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through hole). However, because the rear cover 820 has a through hole 825 (fourth through hole), the risk of interference between the rear cover 820 (second member) and the screw head can be avoided.

In other words, when the speaker unit 800 is correctly attached and the speaker 810 (first member) is covered with the rear cover 820 (second member), the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through hole) of the speaker 810 (first member) is configured not to be covered by the rear cover 820 (second member) and the screw 840 is configured to contact only the speaker 810 (first member). Therefore, even when the rear cover 820 (second member) is positioned relative to the speaker base 830 (base), the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through hole) of the speaker 810 (first member) is not covered by the rear cover 820 (second member). a (first through hole) is not obscured by the rear cover 820 (second member), and the installation work can be performed efficiently. In addition, even if the speaker 810 (first member) and rear cover 820 (second member) are first fixed to the speaker base 830 (base) using the shared screw hole 816b (second through hole) of the speaker 810 and the screw hole 824 (third through hole) of the rear cover 820, it is possible to fix the speaker 810 (first member) using the dedicated screw hole 816a (first through hole), thereby making the installation work more convenient.

Furthermore, when attaching the speaker 810 and the rear cover 820, a common screw 840 (screws of the same length and thickness) can be used, eliminating the need to use multiple types of screws, improving convenience and eliminating screw installation errors, allowing the components to be attached reliably.

In order to use a common screw 840 when attaching the speaker 810 and rear cover 820, the length of the screw 840 must be at least as long as the thickness of the screw hole 824 in the rear cover 820 plus the thickness of the common screw hole 816b in the speaker 810.

For this reason, if a common screw 840 is used to fasten the dedicated screw hole 816a of the speaker 810, the length of the screw will be excessive by the thickness of the rear cover 820. However, in this example, the screw 840 attached to the dedicated screw hole 816a of the speaker 810 can be accommodated inside the through hole 825 (fourth through hole), so the screw 840 does not interfere with the rear cover 820.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 23(d), when the speaker 810 and rear cover 820 are attached to the speaker base 830, the four attached screws 840 are visible. Even if a fraudster were to try to remove the speaker unit 800, this would make the fraudster think that it would take a long time to remove the speaker unit, thereby preventing fraudulent acts.

In addition, when the speaker 810 and the rear cover 820 are attached to the speaker base 830, the speaker 810 and the rear cover 820 are supported by the four mounting sleeves 832 of the speaker base 830, so that a predetermined space is formed between the speaker 810 and the rear cover 820 and the speaker base 830.

In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 22, when the speaker 810 is covered with the rear cover 820, a space SP is also formed between the speaker 810 and the rear cover 820.

This configuration forms spaces between the speaker base 830 (base) and the rear cover 820 (second member), and between the speaker 810 (first member) and the rear cover 820 (second member), allowing the lead wires 817 (wiring) of the speaker 810 to be pulled out to the outside of the speaker 810 (first member) and the rear cover 820 (second member) through these spaces.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 2)/mounting method 2>
Next, a second mounting method for the speaker unit 800 will be described.

In the speaker unit 800, even if the speaker 810 and the rear cover 820 are first attached to the speaker base 830 using the shared screw hole 816b of the speaker 810 and the screw hole 824 of the rear cover 820, the dedicated screw hole 816a of the speaker 810 can be fastened with a screw 840 later.

More specifically, when first assembling the speaker 810 and the rear cover 820 and attaching them to the speaker base 830, the speaker 810 is covered and integrated with the rear cover 820 while aligning the position of the lead terminal 816 of the speaker 810 with the position of the box-shaped space 822S of the rear cover 820, and the speaker 810 and the rear cover 820 are positioned relative to the speaker base 830 by aligning the shared screw hole 816b of the speaker 810 with the screw hole 824 of the rear cover 820 with the second mounting sleeve 832b.

Next, the shared screw hole 816b of the speaker 810 and the screw hole 824 of the rear cover 820 are aligned with the holes of the second mounting sleeve 832b and fastened with the screw 840 to attach the speaker 810 and rear cover 820 together to the speaker base 830.

When the speaker 810 is to be completely attached to the speaker base 830, the dedicated screw hole 816a of the speaker 810 is aligned with the first mounting sleeve 832a to position the speaker 810 relative to the speaker base 830.

Then, the dedicated screw hole 816a of the speaker 810 is aligned with the hole of the first mounting sleeve 832a of the speaker base 830 and fastened with a screw 840 to attach only the speaker 810 to the speaker base 830. This allows the speaker unit 800 to be integrated and fixed to the back surface of the front door 102.

According to this example, the worker can select the appropriate installation method from among multiple installation methods (installation methods 1 and 2) depending on the worker's skill, thereby improving work efficiency.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 2)/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 ) is a gaming machine including a first member (for example, the speaker 810 shown in FIG. 20 or FIG. 21(c) or (d)) that can be fixed to a base (for example, the speaker base part 830 shown in FIG. 20 or FIG. 23 ) and a second member (for example, the back cover 820 shown in FIG. 20 or FIG. 21(a) or (b)) that can cover at least a part of the first member, the first member including a plurality of first through holes (for example, the dedicated screw hole 816a shown in FIG. 21(d) ) and a plurality of second through holes different from the first through holes (for example, the shared screw hole 816b shown in FIG. 21(d) ), the second member including a plurality of third through holes (for example, the screw hole 824 shown in FIG. 21(b) ), and the first through holes are provided to the first member and the second member. the first through hole is a through hole used when fixing the first member to the base, the second through hole and the third through hole are through holes used when fixing both the first member and the second member to the base, a virtual rectangle (e.g., a rectangle VQ shown in FIG. 21(d)) is formed when the plurality of first through holes and the second through holes on both sides of the plurality of first through holes are connected with virtual straight lines (e.g., a straight line VL shown in FIG. 21(d)), the plurality of first through holes are configured to be positioned at vertices of ends of the virtual rectangle, and the base has a frame portion (e.g., a diaphragm support portion 831 shown in FIG. 20 or FIG. 23(a)) formed to match the shape of the first member (e.g., an outer edge portion 813a of a diaphragm 813 of a speaker 810).

According to the game machine of this embodiment, when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base, they can be fixed at once through the second through hole of the first member and the third through hole of the second member, so that the installation work of the members can be simplified compared to the conventional method, and the two first members and the second members can be stably fixed. In addition, since the second member can be fixed to the base while the first member is fixed and positioned on the base using the first through hole, it is not necessary to position the two members at the same time, and the work efficiency can be improved. In addition, the first through hole is arranged between the multiple second through holes, and is configured so that a virtual rectangle is formed when the multiple first through holes and the second through holes on both sides of the multiple first through holes are connected by virtual straight lines, and the multiple first through holes are configured to be arranged at the vertices of the ends of the virtual rectangle, so that the two first members and the second members can be stably fixed by the second through holes arranged on both sides of the first through hole. In addition, because the base has a frame portion formed to match the shape of the first member, the first member can be attached while being reliably positioned relative to the base, allowing the attachment work to be performed efficiently and the frame portion allows the first member to be stably fixed to the base.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine including a first member (e.g., speaker 810 shown in FIG. 20 or FIG. 21(c) or (d)) that can be fixed to a base (e.g., speaker base portion 830 shown in FIG. 20 or FIG. 23) and a second member (e.g., rear cover 820 shown in FIG. 20 or FIG. 21(a) or (b)) that can cover at least a portion of the first member, the first member including a plurality of first through holes (e.g., dedicated screw hole 816a shown in FIG. 21(d)) and a plurality of second through holes different from the first through holes (e.g., shared screw hole 816b shown in FIG. 21(d)), the second member including a plurality of third through holes (e.g., screw hole 824 shown in FIG. 21(b)), the first through holes being configured to connect the first member of the first member and the second member to the second member. The second through hole and the third through hole are through holes used when fixing the first member and the second member to the base, and are configured so that when the first through holes and the second through holes adjacent to the first through holes are connected with imaginary straight lines (e.g., straight line VL shown in FIG. 21(d)), an imaginary rectangle (e.g., rectangle VQ shown in FIG. 21(d)) is formed, and the first through holes are configured to be positioned at the vertices of the diagonal ends of the imaginary rectangle, and when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base, a part of the second member abuts against a support provided on the base, forming a space between the second member and the base.

According to the game machine of this embodiment, when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base, they can be fixed at once through the second through hole of the first member and the third through hole of the second member, so that the installation work of the members can be simplified compared to the conventional method, and the two first members and the second members can be stably fixed. In addition, since the second member can be fixed to the base while the first member is fixed and positioned on the base using the first through hole, it is not necessary to position the two members at the same time, and the work efficiency can be improved. In addition, the first through hole is arranged between the multiple second through holes, and is configured so that a virtual rectangle is formed when the multiple first through holes and the second through holes on both sides of the multiple first through holes are connected by virtual straight lines, and the multiple first through holes are configured to be arranged at the vertices of the diagonal ends of the virtual rectangle, so that the two first members and the second members can be stably fixed by the second through holes arranged on both sides of the first through hole. In addition, when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base, a portion of the second member abuts against a support portion provided on the base, forming a space between the second member and the base. Therefore, even if the first member has wiring or the like, the wiring or the like can be pulled out to the outside through the space, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in design.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine that includes a first member (e.g., the speaker 810 shown in FIG. 20 or FIG. 21(c) or (d)) that can be fixed to a base (e.g., the speaker base portion 830 shown in FIG. 20 or FIG. 23) and a second member (e.g., the back cover 820 shown in FIG. 20 or FIG. 21(a) or (b)) that can cover at least a portion of the first member, and the first member has a plurality of first through holes (e.g., For example, the second member has a dedicated screw hole 816a shown in FIG. 21(d) and a plurality of second through holes different from the first through hole (for example, a shared screw hole 816b shown in FIG. 21(d)), the second member has a plurality of third through holes (for example, a screw hole 824 shown in FIG. 21(b)), the first through hole is a through hole used when fixing the first member of the first member and the second member to the base, and the second through hole and the third through hole are The through holes are used when fixing both the first member and the second member to the base, and are configured so that when the first through holes and the second through holes on both sides of the first through holes are connected by imaginary straight lines (e.g., straight line VL shown in FIG. 21(d)), a virtual rectangle (e.g., rectangle VQ shown in FIG. 21(d)) is formed, and the first through holes are configured to be arranged at the vertices of the diagonal ends of the virtual rectangle, and the base is configured to have a frame portion (e.g., diaphragm support portion 831 shown in FIG. 20 or FIG. 23(a)) formed to match the shape of the first member (e.g., outer edge portion 813a of diaphragm 813 of speaker 810), and when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base, a part of the second member abuts against a support portion provided on the base, forming a space between the second member and the base.

According to the game machine of this embodiment, when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base, they can be fixed at once through the second through hole of the first member and the third through hole of the second member, so that the installation work of the members can be simplified compared to the conventional method, and the two first members and the second members can be stably fixed. In addition, since the second member can be fixed to the base while the first member is fixed and positioned on the base using the first through hole, it is not necessary to position the two members at the same time, and the work efficiency can be improved. In addition, the first through hole is arranged between the multiple second through holes, and is configured so that a virtual rectangle is formed when the multiple first through holes and the second through holes on both sides of the multiple first through holes are connected by virtual straight lines, and the multiple first through holes are configured to be arranged at the vertices of the diagonal ends of the virtual rectangle, so that the two first members and the second members can be stably fixed by the second through holes arranged on both sides of the first through hole. In addition, since the base has a frame portion formed to match the shape of the first member, the first member can be attached with the first member reliably positioned relative to the base, and the attachment work can be performed efficiently, and the frame portion allows the first member to be stably fixed to the base. In addition, when the first member and the second member are fixed to the base, a part of the second member abuts against a support portion provided on the base, forming a space between the second member and the base. Therefore, even if the first member has wiring, the wiring can be pulled out to the outside through the space, and the degree of freedom in design can be increased.

The first member may be configured to be fixed to the base by a first fixing means (e.g., the screw 840 shown in FIG. 20(a) or FIG. 23(d)) and a second fixing means (e.g., the screw 840 shown in FIG. 20(a) or FIG. 23(d)), the second member may be configured to be fixed to the base by the second fixing means, and in a state in which the first member and the second member are fixed to the base (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the first through hole of the first member is configured not to be covered by the second member, and in the first state, the first fixing means may be configured to contact only the first member of the first member and the second member.

With this configuration, even when the second member is positioned relative to the base, the first through hole of the first member is not obscured by the second member, and the installation work can be performed efficiently. In addition, even if the first member and the second member are first fixed to the base using the second and third through holes, it is possible to fix the first member thereafter using the first through hole, thereby improving the convenience of the installation work.

The second member may also have a plurality of fourth through holes (e.g., through hole 825 shown in FIG. 21(b) or FIG. 23(d)), the third through hole being a through hole that is arranged at a position corresponding to the second through hole of the first member in the first state, the fourth through hole being a through hole that is arranged at a position corresponding to the first through hole of the first member in the first state, the size of the fourth through hole being larger than the size of the third through hole, and the second fixing means may be configured to be visible through the fourth through hole in the first state.

With this configuration, when the first member or the second member is correctly attached to the base and the first member is covered with the second member, the fixing means attached to the first through hole of the first member can be accommodated inside the fourth through hole, and the fixing means does not interfere with the second member. Therefore, it is possible to easily visually confirm that the second member is attached in the correct position relative to the first member by the positional relationship between the fourth through hole and the fixing means. In addition, when the second member is accurately positioned relative to the first member, the fixing means is accommodated inside the fourth through hole, and the movement of the second member is restricted by the fixing means. Therefore, when the second member is attached, the second member can be prevented from shifting or rattling. In addition, since the fixing means can be seen through the third through hole and the fourth through hole, even if a fraudster tries to remove the first member or the second member, it is possible to make the fraudster think that it will take a long time to remove the first member or the second member, and fraudulent acts can be prevented in advance.

In addition, the first through hole of the first member may be fixed to the base by the first fixing means, and then the third through hole of the second member may be positioned relative to the second through hole of the first member, and the second through hole of the first member and the third through hole of the second member may be fixed to the base by the second fixing means. In a state where the third through hole of the second member is positioned relative to the second through hole of the first member, the second through hole of the first member and the third through hole of the second member may be fixed to the base by the second fixing means, and then the first through hole of the first member may be fixed to the base by the first fixing means.

With this configuration, the worker can select the appropriate installation method from among multiple installation methods depending on their skill, improving work efficiency.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 3)/speaker unit configuration>
Next, the configuration of a speaker unit 850 according to Modification 3 will be described with reference to Fig. 24. Fig. 24(a) is an exploded perspective view of the speaker unit 850 according to Modification 3, and Fig. 24(b) is an external perspective view showing the state in which two speaker units 850 are attached to the lower back surface of the front door 102.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the speaker unit 850 of the third modification is composed of a low-pitched sound output speaker 860 (first member) having a large diaphragm and a rear cover 870 (second member) that covers the rear side of the speaker 860, and is attached to speaker bases 880 (left speaker base 880L, right speaker base 880R) arranged on the lower rear surface of the front door 102 (base) of the slot machine.

A left speaker base 880L and a right speaker base 880R are arranged horizontally at a predetermined distance below the rear surface of the front door 102, and a speaker unit 850 can be attached to each of the left speaker base 880L and the right speaker base 880R.

Specifically, the speaker unit 850 is attached to the left speaker base portion 880L (first area) located on the left side of the front door 102 in rear view, with the box-shaped space 872S of the rear cover 870 and the lead terminal 866 of the speaker 860 facing rightward in rear view, and the lead wire 867 of the speaker 860 being pulled out from the right side (first orientation, hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "rightward direction").

On the other hand, the speaker unit 850 is attached to the right speaker base portion 880R (second area) located on the right side of the front door 102 when viewed from behind, with the box-shaped space 872S of the rear cover 870 and the lead terminal 866 of the speaker 860 facing left when viewed from behind, and the lead wire 867 of the speaker 860 being pulled out from the left side (second orientation, hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "left-facing direction").

That is, in this example, the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) can be attached to the base (front door 102) in either a first orientation (rightward) or a second orientation (leftward) in which the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) are rotated 180 degrees circumferentially relative to the first orientation, and the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) can be attached to the first area (left speaker base 880L) in the first orientation (rightward) and can be attached to the second area (right speaker base 880R) in the second orientation (leftward).

In this example, the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) can be attached to the base (front door 102) in at least two orientations, which increases the degree of freedom in attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870), allowing them to be attached in accordance with the structure and specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this example, the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) in the first orientation (right-facing) can be attached to the first area (left speaker base 880L) but cannot be attached to the second area (right speaker base 880R), and the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) in the second orientation can be attached to the second area (right speaker base 880R) but cannot be attached to the first area (left speaker base 880L).

This example allows for greater freedom in mounting the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870), allowing them to be mounted according to the structure and specifications of the gaming machine, while also preventing installation errors.

As shown in FIG. 24(b), the lead wires 867 of the two left and right speakers 860 pass through the inner space of the box-shaped space 872S of the rear cover 870, are pulled out from an opening formed in the front of the box-shaped space 872S, are wired along the rear surface of the front door 102, and are electrically connected to a sound output control means (e.g., the sound source IC 418 of the first sub-controller 400 described using FIG. 3, or the second sub-controller 500) disposed above the front door 102.

In this example, the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) attached to the first area (left speaker base 880L) are disposed opposite the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) attached to the second area (right speaker base 880R) (one speaker unit 850 is attached facing right, while the other speaker unit 850 is attached facing left so as to face the one speaker unit 850), so that, as shown in FIG. 24(b), the lead wires 867 of each first member (speaker 860) can be pulled out toward the center of the rear of the base (front door 102), which makes it easy to route the wiring and improves the efficiency of the wiring work, and also allows the wiring to be organized and stored, improving maintainability.

The manner in which the lead wire 867 of the speaker 860 is drawn out is not limited to this example. For example, the lead wire 867 may pass through the inner space of the box-shaped space 872S of the rear cover 870, be drawn out from the space formed between the rear cover 870 and the front door 102, be wired along the rear surface of the front door 102, and be electrically connected to a sound output control means disposed above the front door 102.

In addition, for example, when applied to a gaming machine where it is difficult to secure space above the speaker unit 850 (for example, a slot machine in which a hopper, medal selector, etc. are arranged above the speaker unit 850, or a pachinko machine in which a tray, etc. are arranged above the speaker unit 850), the lead wire 867 of the speaker 860 can be routed around other devices arranged above the speaker unit 850, which not only increases the efficiency of wiring work but also makes effective use of the limited space behind the front door 102.

In this example, two speaker units 850 are arranged horizontally on the back surface of the front door 102, but three or more speaker units 850 may be arranged, or the speaker units 850 may be arranged vertically or diagonally on the back surface of the front door 102.

The length of the lead wire 867 of the speaker 860 is not particularly limited, and it is sufficient that the speaker 860 has a length that allows electrical connection from the speaker 860 to a sound output control means (for example, the sound source IC 418 of the first sub-controller 400 described using FIG. 3 or the second sub-controller 500). However, for example, the length is set to the minimum required when the speaker unit 850 is installed facing left or right, and if the speaker unit 850 is installed facing downward (in a direction in which the box-shaped space 872S of the rear cover 870 or the lead terminal 866 of the speaker 860 faces downward when viewed from the rear), the length of the lead wire 867 is insufficient to connect to the sound output control means. This allows the installation direction of the speaker unit 850 to be intentionally restricted, and prevents installation errors of the speaker unit 850 on the gaming machine.

The "first orientation" according to the present invention is not limited to the rightward direction, and may be, for example, a downward direction (the box-shaped space 872S of the rear cover 870 and the lead terminal 866 of the speaker 860 face downward in rear view, and the lead wire 867 of the speaker 860 is drawn from the lower side), an upward direction (the box-shaped space 872S of the rear cover 870 and the lead terminal 866 of the speaker 860 face upward in rear view, and the lead wire 867 of the speaker 860 is drawn from the upper side), or another direction. The "second orientation" according to the present invention is not limited to the leftward direction, and may be the downward direction or upward direction described above, or another direction.

The orientation (first orientation, second orientation) of the speaker 860 and the rear cover 870 may be changed according to the direction in which the lead wire 867 of the speaker 860 is pulled out. The positions of the mounting sleeves 882 of the left speaker base part 880L and the right speaker base part 880R described below may be changed as appropriate according to the orientation (first orientation, second orientation) of the speaker 860 and the rear cover 870 and the positions of the holes provided in each.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 3)/speaker base>
As shown in Figure 24(a), the left speaker base portion 880L and the right speaker base portion 880R are composed of a circular diaphragm support portion 881 that supports the outer edge (the portion that supports the outer edge of the cone of the diaphragm 863) of the diaphragm 863 of the speaker 860 (see Figure 25(c) etc.), a cylindrical mounting sleeve 882 for screwing the speaker 860 and rear cover 870 to the front door 102, and a circular sound hole plate 884 that fits inside the diaphragm support portion 881.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 3)/metal plate>
A rectangular parallelepiped metal plate 885 (third member) is erected between the left speaker base 880L and the right speaker base 880R on the rear surface of the front door 102. This metal plate 885 is a member that functions as a frame ground because it is disposed on the front door 102 (metallic frame). For convenience of explanation, part of the metal plate 885 is shown in a see-through manner in Fig. 24(a) and is omitted in Fig. 24(b).

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the metal plate 885 has an eighth through hole 885a8 (eighth hole) and a tenth through hole 885a10 (tenth hole) that are circular.

The eighth through hole 885a8 (eighth hole) is a through hole for fixing the first member (speaker 860) in the first orientation (rightward) to the metal plate 885, and the tenth through hole 885a10 (tenth hole) is a through hole for fixing the first member (speaker 860) in the second orientation (leftward) to the metal plate 885 (details will be described later using Figures 25 to 28).

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 3)/speaker, rear cover>
Next, a speaker 860 and a rear cover 870 constituting a speaker unit 850 according to the third modification will be described in detail with reference to FIGS.

25(a) is a side view of the rear cover 870, and (b) is a top view of the rear cover 870. Also, (c) is a side view of the speaker 860, and (d) is a top view of the speaker 860.

Figure 26 is a rear view of the front door 102 from the rear side, showing the state after the speaker 860 and rear cover 870 have been positioned relative to the front door 102, and Figure 27 is a rear view of the front door 102 from the rear side, showing the state after the speaker 860 and rear cover 870 have been attached to the front door 102 with screws.

Figure 28(a) is a side view of the speaker unit 850 attached to the left speaker base 880L, seen from the left side when viewed from the rear, and Figure 28(b) is a side view of the speaker unit 850 attached to the left speaker base 880L, seen from the right side when viewed from the rear.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 3)/speaker>
Next, the speaker 860 (first member) will be described.

The speaker 860 (first member) is a cone-type dynamic speaker, and as shown in FIG. 25(c), is generally composed of an electromagnetic circuit 861 consisting of a voice coil and a magnet, which vibrates a diaphragm 863 (described later) in response to an electrical signal, a frame 862 supporting the electromagnetic circuit 861, the diaphragm 863 which vibrates to generate sound, a flat flange 864 to which the diaphragm 863 is fixed so that it can vibrate, a lead terminal 866 disposed on the flange 864, and a lead wire 867 detachably connected to the lead terminal 866.

The frame 862 is a cylindrical metal ring frame that widens slightly toward the front, and has multiple openings 865 (see FIG. 24) formed along the circumferential direction on the side to allow air around the diaphragm 863 to escape. That is, multiple openings 855 are formed along the circumferential direction on the side of the frame 862, and supports 862a (see FIG. 24) are formed along the front-rear direction between the openings 865. The diaphragm 863 is formed into a cone shape that opens toward the front, using a flexible material such as paper.

The electromagnetic circuit 861 is provided with a predetermined marking 876 (in this example, a part number and material). The display form of the predetermined marking 876 is not particularly limited, but in this example, a part number marking indicating the part number of the speaker 860 (in this example, a character string "SPxxxx") and a material marking indicating the material of the speaker 860 (in this example, a character string "AL") are engraved on the surface of the electromagnetic circuit 861.

In this example, the speaker 860 is provided with a specific marking 876, so that the orientation of the speaker 860 (the first orientation or the second orientation described above) can be easily identified by the orientation of this specific marking 876, improving convenience when installing the speaker 860, etc.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 3)/speaker/first and fourth through holes>
As shown in FIG. 25( d ), a first through-hole 864 a 1 (first hole) having an elliptical shape is formed in the lower left corner of the outer end portion of the flange 864 of the speaker 860 .

This first through hole 864a1 (first hole) is a hole used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (left speaker base 880L of the front door 102) in a first orientation (rightward), as shown in FIG. 27, and is not used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (right speaker base 880R of the front door 102) in a second orientation (leftward).

In other words, the first through hole 864a1 (first hole) is a hole that may or may not be used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (front door 102).

In this example, the first through hole 864a1 (first hole) may not be used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (front door 102), which may simplify the installation work of the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) and may improve work efficiency.

The first through hole 864a1 (first hole) may be provided with an identifier (for example, by printing letters or symbols near the first hole, forming a protrusion or other portion near the first hole, attaching a sticker near the first hole, etc.) that can identify whether it is a hole used when attaching the first member and/or the second member to the base or an unused hole, and the member on which the identifier is provided may be any of the first member, second member, third member, and base, or may be another member. The same applies to the through holes described below.

In this example, an identifier is provided that can determine whether a certain through hole is a hole to be used when attaching a first member and/or a second member to a base, which can prevent installation errors when attaching the first member and/or the second member to a base and can improve work efficiency.

A fourth elliptical through hole 864a4 (fourth hole) is formed in the upper left corner of the outer end of the flange 864 of the speaker 860.

As shown in FIG. 27, this fourth through hole 864a4 (fourth hole) is a hole that is not used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (left speaker base 880L of the front door 102) in the first orientation (rightward), and is a hole that is used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (right speaker base 880R of the front door 102) in the second orientation (leftward).

In other words, the fourth through hole 864a4 (fourth hole) is a hole that may or may not be used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (front door 102).

In this example, the fourth through hole 864a4 (fourth hole) may not be used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (front door 102), which may simplify the installation work of the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) and may improve work efficiency.

In this example, the first hole (first through hole 864a1) and the fourth hole (fourth through hole 864a4) of the first member (speaker 860) are positioned at positions that are almost linearly symmetrical with respect to the imaginary line VL3 (see FIG. 25(d)) that passes through the center of the first member (speaker 860) (positions that are almost the same shortest distance from the imaginary line VL3).

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 3)/Speaker/7th and 9th through holes>
A seventh through hole 864a7 (seventh hole) having an elliptical shape is formed in the lower right corner of the outer end portion of the flange 864 of the speaker 860.

This seventh through hole 864a7 (seventh hole) is a hole used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) to the third member (metal plate 885) in the first orientation (rightward) as shown in FIG. 27, and is not used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) to the base (right speaker base portion 880R of front door 102) or the third member (metal plate 885) in the second orientation (leftward).

In other words, the seventh through hole 864a7 (seventh hole) is a hole that may or may not be used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) to the base (front door 102) or the third member (metal plate 885), and unlike the first through hole 864a1 and the fourth through hole 864a4, it is a hole that is not used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870).

The seventh through hole 864a7 (seventh hole) may be a hole used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) to the base (left speaker base portion 880L of the front door 102) in the first orientation (rightward).

A ninth through hole 864a9 (ninth hole) having an elliptical shape is formed in the upper right corner of the outer end of the flange 864 of the speaker 860.

As shown in FIG. 27, this ninth through hole 864a9 (ninth hole) is a hole that is not used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) to the base (left speaker base 880L of the front door 102) or the third member (metal plate 885) in the first orientation (rightward), and is a hole that is used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) to the third member (metal plate 885) in the second orientation (leftward). Unlike the first through hole 864a1 and the fourth through hole 864a4, this hole is not used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870).

In other words, the ninth through hole 864a9 (ninth hole) is a hole that may or may not be used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) to the base (front door 102) or the third member (metal plate 885).

The ninth through hole 864a9 (ninth hole) may be a hole used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) to the base (right speaker base portion 880R of the front door 102) in the second orientation (leftward).

In this example, the seventh hole (seventh through hole 864a7) and the ninth hole (ninth through hole 864a9) of the first member (speaker 860) are positioned at positions that are almost linearly symmetrical with respect to the imaginary line VL3 (see FIG. 25(d)) that passes through the center of the first member (speaker 860) (positions that are almost the same shortest distance from the imaginary line VL3).

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 3)/Speaker/First, fourth, seventh, and ninth through holes>
As shown in FIG. 25(d), when the four through holes, the first through hole 864a1, the fourth through hole 864a4, the seventh through hole 864a7, and the ninth through hole 864a9, are connected by a virtual straight line VL4, a virtual rectangle VQ4 is formed, and the first through hole 864a1 and the ninth through hole 864a9 are arranged on the (first) diagonal (the vertices at the ends of the diagonal) of the virtual rectangle VQ, and the fourth through hole 864a4 and the seventh through hole 864a7 are arranged on the second diagonal (different from the first diagonal) of the virtual rectangle VQ4 (the vertices at the ends of the diagonal).

The size and shape of the four through holes, the first through hole 864a1, the fourth through hole 864a4, the seventh through hole 864a7, and the ninth through hole 864a9, are not particularly limited, but in this example, as shown in FIG. 26, the four through holes, the first through hole 864a1, the fourth through hole 864a4, the seventh through hole 864a7, and the ninth through hole 864a9, are configured as elliptical holes with larger outer diameters than the circular second through hole 872a2 and the fifth through hole 872a5 of the rear cover 870.

In this example, the four through holes, the first through hole 864a1, the fourth through hole 864a4, the seventh through hole 864a7, and the ninth through hole 864a9, are elliptical holes with a larger outer diameter than the circular second through hole 872a2 and the fifth through hole 872a5 of the rear cover 870. This makes it possible to absorb any assembly error (misalignment of the rear cover 870) of the rear cover 870 relative to the speaker 860, simplifying the installation work.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 3)/rear cover>
Next, the rear cover 870 (second member) will be described.

The rear cover 870 (second member) is a colored, transparent resin member capable of housing the speaker 860 inside, and is made of a material that allows the speaker 860 to be seen from the outside when the speaker 860 is housed inside.

In this example, at least a portion of the speaker 860 can be seen through the rear cover 870, so that when installing the speaker unit 850, the installation can be performed while checking the relative positions of the speaker 860 and the rear cover 870, improving the convenience of the installation work.

The rear cover 870 may be made of any material that has transparency, and the material is not limited to colored transparent resin, but may be, for example, colorless transparent (or translucent) plastic, acrylic, polycarbonate, polyvinyl chloride, glass, metal, etc.

The shape of the rear cover 870 is not particularly limited, but at least a portion may be formed with a shape (e.g., a lattice shape or a maze shape) that can prevent foreign matter such as dust and dirt from entering or adhering to the speaker 860. The rear cover 870 may also be formed with a guide portion (hook, etc.) for guiding the lead wire 867 (wiring) of the speaker 860 and the earth wire connecting the speaker 860 and the metal plate 885 (frame ground) to a predetermined position, or the guide portion may be configured to be retrofittable to the rear cover 870.

As shown in Figures 25(a) and (b), the rear cover 870 has a circular ring-shaped cover portion 871 formed on the rear side that covers part of the rear end of the speaker 860, and has a cylindrical side wall portion 872 that is slightly flared toward the rear and has this cover portion 871 as its base end.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 3)/rear cover/second and fifth through holes>
A circular second through-hole 872a2 (second hole) is formed in the lower left corner of the outer edge of the side wall portion 872 of the rear cover 870.

This second through hole 872a2 (second hole) is a hole used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (left speaker base 880L of the front door 102) in the first orientation (rightward), as shown in FIG. 27, and is not used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (right speaker base 880R of the front door 102) in the second orientation (leftward).

In other words, the second through hole 872a2 (second hole) is a hole that may or may not be used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (front door 102).

In this example, the second through hole 872a2 (second hole) may not be used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (front door 102), which may simplify the installation work of the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) and may improve work efficiency.

A circular fifth through hole 872a5 (fifth hole) is formed in the upper left corner of the outer end of the side wall portion 872 of the rear cover 870.

As shown in FIG. 27, this fifth through hole 872a5 (fifth hole) is a hole that is not used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (left speaker base 880L of the front door 102) in the first orientation (rightward), and is a hole that is used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (right speaker base 880R of the front door 102) in the second orientation (leftward).

In other words, the fifth through hole 872a5 (fifth hole) is a hole that may or may not be used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (front door 102).

In this example, the fifth through hole 872a5 (fifth hole) may not be used when attaching the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (front door 102), which may simplify the installation work of the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) and may improve work efficiency.

In this example, the second hole (second through hole 872a2) and the fifth hole (fifth through hole 872a5) of the second member (rear cover 870) are positioned at positions that are almost linearly symmetrical with respect to the imaginary line VL5 (see FIG. 25(b)) that passes through the center of the second member (rear cover 870) (positions that are almost the same shortest distance from the imaginary line VL5).

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 3)/rear cover/third and sixth through holes>
As shown in FIG. 25(b), the rear cover 870 has a left protruding piece 873 that protrudes outward to the left from the outer edge of the side wall portion 872, and a right protruding piece 874 that protrudes outward to the right from the outer edge of the side wall portion 872.

A circular third through hole 873a3 (third hole) is formed above the left protruding piece 873 and the right protruding piece 874 of the rear cover 870.

This third through hole 873a3 (third hole) is a hole used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (left speaker base portion 880L of the front door 102) in the first orientation (rightward), as shown in FIG. 27, and is not used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (right speaker base portion 880R of the front door 102) in the second orientation (leftward).

In other words, the third through hole 873a3 (third hole) is a hole that may or may not be used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (front door 102).

In this example, the third through hole 873a3 (third hole) may not be used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (right speaker base portion 880R of front door 102), which may simplify the attachment work of the second member (rear cover 870) and improve work efficiency.

In addition, one of the two third through holes 873a3 (third holes) may be used when attaching to the third member (metal plate 885).

A sixth circular through hole 873a6 (sixth hole) is formed below each of the left protruding piece 873 and the right protruding piece 874 of the rear cover 870.

This sixth through hole 873a6 (sixth hole) is a hole that is not used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (left speaker base portion 880L of the front door 102) in the first orientation (rightward), as shown in FIG. 27, and is a hole that is used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (right speaker base portion 880R of the front door 102) in the second orientation (leftward).

In other words, the sixth through hole 873a6 (sixth hole) is a hole that may or may not be used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (front door 102).

In this example, the sixth through hole 873a6 (sixth hole) may not be used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (right speaker base portion 880R of the front door 102), which may simplify the attachment work of the second member (rear cover 870) and improve work efficiency.

In addition, one of the two sixth through holes 873a6 (sixth holes) may be used as a hole for attachment to the third member (metal plate 885).

In this example, the third hole (third through hole 873a3) and the sixth hole (sixth through hole 873a6) of the second member (rear cover 870) are positioned at positions that are almost linearly symmetrical with respect to the imaginary line VL5 (see FIG. 25(b)) that passes through the center of the second member (rear cover 870) (positions that are almost the same shortest distance from the imaginary line VL5).

The cover portion 871 of the rear cover 870 has a predetermined marking 877 (in this example, a part number and material). The display form of the predetermined marking 877 is not particularly limited, but in this example, a part number marking indicating the part number of the rear cover 870 (in this example, the character string "CVxxxx") and a material marking indicating the material of the rear cover 870 (in this example, the character string "PC") are engraved on the surface of the cover portion 871.

In this example, the rear cover 870 is provided with a specific marking 877, so that the orientation of the rear cover 870 (the first orientation or the second orientation described above) can be easily identified by the orientation of this specific marking 877, which can improve convenience when attaching the rear cover 870, etc.

In particular, the specified markings 877 are provided in an area of the cover portion 871 that is closer to the third through-hole 873a3 (third hole) than the sixth through-hole 873a6 (sixth hole) (an area above the imaginary line VL5 passing through the center of the rear cover 870). This makes it possible to recognize, using the specified markings 877 as a clue, that the third through-hole 873a3 (third hole) is the hole used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (left speaker base portion 880L of the front door 102) or the third member (metal plate 885) in the first orientation (rightward), thereby further improving convenience when attaching the rear cover 870, etc.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 3)/rear cover/box-shaped space>
As shown in Figure 25 (b), a box-shaped space 872S (space portion) is formed protrudingly on the outer edge of the right side of the rear cover 870 when viewed from above, for accommodating the lead terminal 866 of the speaker 860 and leading the lead wire 867 to the outside of the speaker unit 850.

With this configuration, when the speaker 860 is housed inside the rear cover 870, a space is formed between the speaker 860 and the rear cover 870, and as shown in Figures 26 and 27, the lead wire 867 (wiring) of the speaker 860 can be pulled out to the outside of the speaker 860 and the rear cover 870 through this space.

In this example, even if a portion of the speaker 860 is covered by the rear cover 870, the lead wire 867 (wiring) of the speaker 860 can be pulled out to the outside, allowing for greater design freedom.

In this example, the lead wire 867 passes through the inner space of the box-shaped space 872S of the rear cover 870 and is pulled out from an opening formed on the front side of the box-shaped space 872S to the outside. However, for example, a space may be formed between the speaker 860 and the front door 102, and the lead wire 867 may be pulled out from the front side of the speaker 860 to the front door 102 side through the space. In this case, the box-shaped space 872S does not need to be formed in the rear cover 870.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 3)/mounting method>
Next, a method for mounting the speaker unit 850 will be described.

As shown in Figures 27 and 28(a), the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) in the first orientation (rightward) are attached to the base (mounting sleeve 882 of the left speaker base portion 880L of the front door 102) by a fixing means (screw 890) that passes through the first hole (first through hole 864a1) of the first member (speaker 860) and the second hole (second through hole 872a2) of the second member (rear cover 870).

According to this example, it is possible to fix the first hole (first through hole 864a1) of the first member (speaker 860) and the second hole (second through hole 872a2) of the second member (rear cover 870) in one step, which simplifies the work of attaching the members compared to conventional methods and allows the two first members (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) to be stably fixed.

The second member (rear cover 870) in the first orientation (rightward) is attached to the base (the mounting sleeve 882 of the left speaker base portion 880L of the front door 102) by a fixing means (screw 890) that passes through the third hole (third through hole 873a3) of the second member (rear cover 870).

The first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) in the first orientation (rightward) are attached vertically along the base (front door 102), and the first hole (first through hole 864a1) of the first member (speaker 860) and the second hole (second through hole 872a2) of the second member (rear cover 870) are positioned below the imaginary line VL6 (see FIG. 27) passing through the center of the first member (speaker 860) or the second member (rear cover 870) in the vertical direction of the base (front door 102).

In this example, the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) can be fixed vertically downward to the base (left speaker base portion 880L of the front door 102), so that the two first members (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) can be stably fixed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 28(b), the second member (rear cover 870) in the first orientation (rightward) is attached to the base (the mounting sleeve 882 of the left speaker base 880L of the front door 102) by a fixing means (screw 890) that penetrates the third hole (third through hole 873a3) of the second member (rear cover 870), and the first member (speaker 860) in the first orientation (rightward) is attached to the eighth through hole 885a8 (eighth hole) of the third member (metal plate 885) by a fixing means (screw 890) that penetrates the seventh hole (seventh through hole 864a7) of the first member (speaker 860). As a result, the first member (speaker 860) in the first orientation (rightward) is grounded (earthed).

When the right-facing speaker 860 and rear cover 870 are attached to the left speaker base 880L of the front door 102, most of the speaker 860 is housed within the inner space of the rear cover 870, and the flange 864 of the speaker 860 and the inner wall of the side wall portion 872 of the rear cover 872 (at least a part of the speaker 860 and rear cover 870) are configured to abut (or be close to) each other.

In this example, when the second member (rear cover 870) is attached to the base (left speaker base portion 880L of front door 102), at least a portion of the second member (rear cover 870) abuts (or is close to) the first member (speaker 860) and is fixed so as to cover at least a portion of the first member (speaker 860), so that the two first members (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) can be stably fixed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27, the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) in the second orientation (left) are attached to the base (mounting sleeve 882 of the right speaker base portion 880R of the front door 102) by a fixing means (screw 890) that passes through the fourth hole (fourth through hole 864a4) of the first member (speaker 860) and the fifth hole (fifth through hole 872a5) of the second member (rear cover 870).

The second member (rear cover 870) in the second orientation (facing left) is attached to the base (the mounting sleeve 882 of the right speaker base portion 880R of the front door 102) by a fixing means (screw 890) that passes through a sixth hole (sixth through hole 873a6) of the second member (rear cover 870).

The first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) in the second orientation (facing left) are attached vertically along the base (front door 102), and the fourth hole (fourth through hole 864a4) of the first member (speaker 860) and the fifth hole (fifth through hole 872a5) of the second member (rear cover 870) are positioned below the imaginary line VL6 (see FIG. 27) passing through the center of the first member (speaker 860) or the second member (rear cover 870) in the vertical direction of the base (front door 102).

In this example, the first member (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) can be fixed vertically downward to the base (right speaker base portion 880R of front door 102), so that the two first members (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) can be stably fixed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 27, the second member (rear cover 870) in the second orientation (leftward) is attached to the base (mounting sleeve 882 of the right speaker base 880R of the front door 102) by a fixing means (screw 890) that penetrates the sixth hole (sixth through hole 873a6) of the second member (rear cover 870), and the first member (speaker 860) in the second orientation (leftward) is attached to the tenth through hole 885a10 (tenth hole) of the third member (metal plate 885) by a fixing means (screw 890) that penetrates the ninth hole (ninth through hole 864a9) of the first member (speaker 860). As a result, the first member (speaker 860) in the second orientation (leftward) is grounded (earthed).

When the left-facing speaker 860 and rear cover 870 are attached to the right speaker base 880R of the front door 102, most of the speaker 860 is housed within the inner space of the rear cover 870, and the flange 864 of the speaker 860 and the inner wall of the side wall portion 872 of the rear cover 872 (at least a part of the speaker 860 and rear cover 870) are configured to abut (or be close to) each other.

In this example, when the second member (rear cover 870) is attached to the base (right speaker base portion 880R of front door 102), at least a portion of the second member (rear cover 870) abuts (or is close to) the first member (speaker 860) and is fixed so as to cover at least a portion of the first member (speaker 860), so that the two first members (speaker 860) and the second member (rear cover 870) can be stably fixed.

In this example, both the speaker 860 and the rear cover 870 are fixed to the front door 102 with screws, but the speaker 860 and the rear cover 870 may be attached to the front door 102 using all of the through holes (or some of the through holes) of the rear cover 870 without fixing the speaker 860 to the front door 102 (without using the through holes of the speaker 860) and with the speaker 860 housed in the inner space of the rear cover 870.

In this example, since there is no need to fix the speaker 860 to the front door 102, the installation work of the speaker unit 850 can be simplified, and by using all the through holes in the rear cover 870, the speaker unit 850 can be more firmly attached to the front door 102.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 3)/variation of metal plate>
Next, a metal plate 915 according to a modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 29. Fig. 29 is a rear view of the state after the speaker 860 and the rear cover 870 are attached to the front door 102 with screws, as viewed from the rear of the front door 102.

In this example, a metal plate 915 (third member) smaller than the metal plate 885 described with reference to Figures 25 to 28 is erected between the left speaker base portion 880L and the right speaker base portion 880R on the back surface of the front door 102.

Therefore, in this example, the rear cover 870 (second member) in the first orientation (rightward) is attached to the base (left speaker base portion 880L of the front door 102) by a fixing means (screw 890) that penetrates the third hole (third through hole 873a3) of the second member (rear cover 870), and is also attached to the third member (metal plate 915) by a fixing means (screw 890) that penetrates the sixth hole (sixth through hole 873a6) of the second member (rear cover 870).

The rear cover 870 (second member) in the second orientation (leftward) is attached to the base (right speaker base portion 880R of the front door 102) by a fixing means (screw 890) that penetrates the sixth hole (sixth through hole 873a6) of the second member (rear cover 870), and is also attached to the third member (metal plate 915) by a fixing means (screw 890) that penetrates the third hole (third through hole 873a3) of the second member (rear cover 870).

That is, the third through hole 873a3 (third hole) is a hole used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (left speaker base portion 880L of the front door 102) in the first orientation (rightward), as shown in FIG. 29, or when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the third member (metal plate 915) in the second orientation (leftward).

The sixth through hole 873a6 (sixth hole) is a hole used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the third member (metal plate 915) in the first orientation (rightward), as shown in FIG. 29, and is a hole used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (right speaker base portion 880R of front door 102) in the second orientation (leftward).

In other words, the third through hole 873a3 (third hole) and the sixth through hole 873a6 (sixth hole) are holes that are always used when attaching the second member (rear cover 870) to the base (front door 102) or the third member (metal plate 885).

In this example, the third through-hole 873a3 (third hole) and the sixth through-hole 873a6 (sixth hole) of the rear cover 870 can be effectively utilized, which increases the variety of installation procedures for the speaker unit 850 and can accommodate third members (metal plates 915) of various sizes and shapes, improving convenience.

The "third member" according to the present invention is not limited to the metal plate 885 described with reference to Figs. 25 to 28 or the metal plate 915 described with reference to Fig. 29, but may be a member formed integrally with the front door 102, or may be a member separate from the front door 102. In addition, the left and right speaker base portions 880L and 880R are shaped line-symmetrically with respect to an imaginary line passing vertically (up and down), but the shape does not have to be line-symmetrical.

In addition, an example has been shown in which a metal plate 885 (or metal plate 915) is disposed on the rear side of the front door 102, a speaker 860 is disposed on the rear side of this metal plate 885 (or metal plate 915), and the through hole of the speaker 860 is positioned above the through hole of the metal plate 885 (or metal plate 915), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a speaker 860 may be disposed on the rear side of the front door 102, a metal plate 885 (or metal plate 915) is disposed on the rear side of this speaker 860, and the through hole of the metal plate 885 (or metal plate 915) may be positioned above the through hole of the speaker 860.

The "third member" according to the present invention does not have to function as a frame ground, but may be a member that is directly connected to the earth, or a member that is in contact with another member that is connected to the earth and is indirectly connected to the earth.

In addition, the "third member" of the present invention may not be present, in which case the "third member" may be read as the "base", and for example, the hole used when attaching the "third member" may be used as the hole used when attaching the "base" (for example, the left speaker base portion 880L or the right speaker base portion 880R of the front door 102), or the speaker 860 may be directly connected to earth.

<Speaker mounting structure (variation 3)/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine including a first member (for example, the speaker 860 shown in FIG. 28) that can be attached to a base, and a second member (for example, the back cover 870 shown in FIG. 28) that can be attached to the base, the first member includes a first hole (for example, the first through hole 864a1 shown in FIG. 28) through which a fixing means (for example, the screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) can penetrate, the second member includes a third hole (for example, the third through hole 872a3 shown in FIG. 28) through which the fixing means can penetrate, the fixing means that penetrates the third hole does not penetrate the first hole, the second member is fixed by the fixing means that penetrates the third hole, and abuts against (or is close to) at least a part of the first member to fix the first member.

In the game machine according to this embodiment, when the second member is attached to the base, at least a portion of the second member abuts (or is close to) the first member and is fixed so as to cover at least a portion of the first member, so that the two first and second members can be stably fixed together.

The second member may have a second hole (e.g., second through hole 872a2 shown in FIG. 28) through which the fixing means can pass, and the base may have a first mounting portion (e.g., any of the multiple mounting sleeves 882 shown in FIG. 24, a metal plate shown in FIG. 28) and a second mounting portion (e.g., any of the multiple mounting sleeves 882 shown in FIG. 24, a metal plate shown in FIG. 28), and may be attached to the first mounting portion by a fixing means that passes through the first hole of the first member and the second hole of the second member, and may be attached to the second mounting portion by a fixing means that passes through the third hole of the second member.

This configuration makes it possible to fix the first hole of the first member and the second hole of the second member in one go, simplifying the work of attaching the members compared to conventional methods and enabling the two first and second members to be stably fixed together.

The first member and the second member may be configured to be attached vertically along the base, and the first hole of the first member and the second hole of the second member may be disposed below a virtual line (e.g., virtual line VL6 shown in FIG. 28) passing through the center of the first member or the second member in the vertical direction.

With this configuration, the first member and the second member can be fixed to the base vertically downward, so that the two first members and the second member can be stably fixed.

The first member may also have a fourth hole (e.g., the fourth through hole 864a4 shown in FIG. 28), which may be a hole that may not be used when attaching the first member to the base.

This configuration simplifies the installation process for the first component and improves work efficiency.

The second member has a fifth hole (e.g., the fifth through hole 872a5 shown in FIG. 28), the first hole and the fourth hole of the first member are arranged at positions that are linearly symmetrical with respect to a virtual line (e.g., the virtual line VL3 shown in FIG. 25(d)) passing through the center of the first member, the second hole and the fifth hole of the second member are arranged at positions that are linearly symmetrical with respect to a virtual line (e.g., the virtual line VL5 shown in FIG. 25(b)) passing through the center of the second member, and the first member and the second member are arranged at positions that are linearly symmetrical with respect to a virtual line (e.g., the virtual line VL5 shown in FIG. 25(b)) passing through the center of the second member. The speaker 860 can be attached to the base in either of the following orientations: a lead terminal 866 of the speaker 860 faces the left side in rear view, and a lead wire 867 of the speaker 860 is pulled out from the left side; the second orientation is an orientation in which the first member and the second member are rotated 180 degrees in the circumferential direction with respect to the first orientation; the first member and the second member in the first orientation are attached to the base by a fixing means (e.g., a screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that penetrates the first hole of the first member and the second hole of the second member; and the first member and the second member in the second orientation may be attached to the base by a fixing means (e.g., a screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that penetrates the fourth hole of the first member and the fifth hole of the second member.

With this configuration, it is possible to attach the first member and the second member to the base in at least two orientations, which increases the degree of freedom in attaching the first member and the second member, and allows them to be attached in accordance with the structure and specifications of the gaming machine.

The second member may also have a sixth hole (e.g., sixth through hole 873a6 shown in FIG. 28), the third hole and the sixth hole of the second member may be arranged at positions that are linearly symmetrical with respect to a virtual line (e.g., virtual line VL5 shown in FIG. 25(b)) that passes through the center of the second member, and the second member in the second orientation may be attached to the base by a fixing means (e.g., screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that passes through the sixth hole of the second member.

This configuration allows for greater freedom in attaching the first and second members, allowing them to be attached in accordance with the structure and specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine that includes a first member that can be attached to a base (e.g., the speaker 860 shown in FIG. 28) and a second member that can be attached to the base (e.g., the back cover 870 shown in FIG. 28), and the second member is a member that covers at least a portion of the first member when attached to the base, and the base is a first attachment portion (e.g., any one of the multiple attachment sleeves 882 shown in FIG. 24, the back cover 870 shown in FIG. 28). 24 ) and a second mounting portion (e.g., any one of the multiple mounting sleeves 882 shown in FIG. 24 , the metal plate shown in FIG. 28 ), the first member has a first hole (e.g., first through hole 864a1 shown in FIG. 28 ) through which a fixing means (e.g., screw 890 shown in FIG. 28 ) can pass, the second member has a second hole (e.g., second through hole 872a2 shown in FIG. 28 ) and a third hole (e.g., third through hole 872a3 shown in FIG. 28 ) through which the fixing means can pass, and the fixing means passing through the third hole is The first member is attached to the first mounting portion by a fastening means (e.g., a screw 890 shown in FIG. 28 ) that passes through the first hole of the first member and the second hole of the second member without penetrating the first hole, the second member is fixed to the second mounting portion by the fastening means that passes through the third hole, and abuts (or is close to) at least a portion of the first member to fix the first member, and the first member is in a first orientation (e.g., a box-shaped space 872S of the rear cover 870 or a spine 872S of the rear cover 870). The gaming machine can be attached to the base in either a first orientation (wherein the lead terminal 866 of the speaker 860 faces to the right in rear view, and the lead wire 867 of the speaker 860 is drawn from the right side) or a second orientation (wherein, for example, the box-shaped space 872S of the rear cover 870 or the lead terminal 866 of the speaker 860 faces to the left in rear view, and the lead wire 867 of the speaker 860 is drawn from the left side), and the second orientation is an orientation in which the first member is rotated 180 degrees in the circumferential direction with respect to the first orientation.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, the first member can be attached to the base in at least two orientations, which increases the degree of freedom in attaching the first member and allows it to be attached in accordance with the structure and specifications of the gaming machine.

The first member may have a fourth hole (e.g., the fourth through hole 864a4 shown in FIG. 28), the second member may have a fifth hole (e.g., the fifth through hole 872a5 shown in FIG. 28), the fourth hole of the first member and the fifth hole of the second member may be holes that are not used when attaching the first member and the second member to the base in the first orientation, the first member and the second member in the second orientation may be attached to the base by a fixing means (e.g., the screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that passes through the fourth hole of the first member and the fifth hole of the second member, and the first hole of the first member and the second hole of the second member may be holes that are not used when attaching the first member and the second member to the first attachment part in the second orientation.

With this configuration, there are holes that are not used when attaching the first and second members to the base, which can simplify the work of attaching the first and second members and potentially improve work efficiency.

The first member and the second member may be configured to be attached vertically along the base, and when the first member and the second member are attached to the base in the first orientation, the first hole of the first member and the second hole of the second member may be located lower than the third hole of the second member in the vertical direction, and the first hole and the fourth hole of the first member may be located in positions that are linearly symmetrical with respect to a virtual line (e.g., virtual line VL3 shown in FIG. 25(d)) that passes through the center of the first member.

With this configuration, the first member and the second member can be fixed to the base vertically downward, so that the two first members and the second member can be stably fixed.

The second member may also have a sixth hole (e.g., sixth through hole 873a6 shown in FIG. 28), the sixth hole being a hole that is not used when attaching the second member to the base in the first orientation, the second member in the second orientation being attached to the second mounting portion by a fixing means (e.g., screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that passes through the sixth hole of the second member, and the third hole may also be a hole that is not used when attaching the second member to the base in the second orientation.

With this configuration, there are holes that are not used when attaching the second member to the base, which can simplify the work of attaching the second member and potentially improve work efficiency.

The third hole and the sixth hole of the second member may be arranged at positions that are symmetrical with respect to a virtual line passing through the center of the second member (e.g., virtual line VL5 shown in FIG. 25(b)).

This configuration allows for greater freedom in attaching the second component, allowing it to be attached in accordance with the structure and specifications of the gaming machine.

The base may have a first region (e.g., the left speaker base portion 880L shown in FIG. 28) and a second region (e.g., the right speaker base portion 880R shown in FIG. 28) as regions to which the first member and the second member can be attached, and the first member and the second member in the first orientation may be attachable to the first region but not attachable to the second region, and the first member and the second member in the second orientation may be attachable to the second region but not attachable to the first region.

This configuration allows for greater freedom in attaching the first and second members, allowing them to be attached in accordance with the structure and specifications of the gaming machine, while also preventing installation errors.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine including a first member (e.g., speaker 860 shown in FIG. 28) that can be attached to a base, and a second member (e.g., rear cover 870 shown in FIG. 28) that can be attached to the base, and the second member is a member that covers at least a portion of the first member when attached to the base, and the base includes a first attachment portion (e.g., any one of a plurality of attachment sleeves 882 shown in FIG. 24, a metal plate shown in FIG. 28) and a second attachment portion (e.g., any one of a plurality of attachment sleeves 882 shown in FIG. 24, a metal plate shown in FIG. 28), and the first member includes a first hole (e.g., first through hole 864a1 shown in FIG. 28) through which a fixing means (e.g., screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) can pass, and the second member includes a second through hole (e.g., first through hole 864a1 shown in FIG. 28) through which the fixing means can pass. The game machine has a second hole (e.g., second through hole 872a2 shown in FIG. 28) and a third hole (e.g., third through hole 872a3 shown in FIG. 28), the fixing means passing through the third hole does not pass through the first hole, the first member is attached to the first mounting part by a fixing means (e.g., screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that passes through the first hole of the first member and the second hole of the second member, the second member is fixed to the second mounting part by the fixing means that passes through the third hole, and abuts (or is close to) at least a part of the first member to fix the first member, the second member can be attached to the base in either a first orientation or a second orientation, and the second orientation is an orientation in which the second member is rotated 180 degrees circumferentially with respect to the first orientation.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, the second member can be attached to the base in at least two orientations, which increases the degree of freedom in attaching the second member and allows it to be attached in accordance with the structure and specifications of the gaming machine.

The second member may also have a sixth hole (e.g., sixth through hole 873a6 shown in FIG. 28), the sixth hole being a hole that is not used when attaching the second member to the base in the first orientation, the second member in the second orientation being attached to the base by a fixing means (e.g., screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that passes through the sixth hole of the second member, and the third hole may also be a hole that is not used when attaching the second member to the base in the second orientation.

With this configuration, there are holes that are not used when attaching the second member to the base, which can simplify the work of attaching the second member and potentially improve work efficiency.

The third hole and the sixth hole of the second member may be arranged at positions that are symmetrical with respect to a virtual line passing through the center of the second member (e.g., virtual line VL5 shown in FIG. 25(b)).

This configuration allows for greater freedom in attaching the second component, allowing it to be attached in accordance with the structure and specifications of the gaming machine.

The first member may have a fourth hole (e.g., the fourth through hole 864a4 shown in FIG. 28), the second member may have a fifth hole (e.g., the fifth through hole 872a5 shown in FIG. 28), the fourth hole of the first member and the fifth hole of the second member may be holes that are not used when attaching the first member and the second member to the base in the first orientation, the first member and the second member in the second orientation may be attached to the base by a fixing means (e.g., the screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that passes through the fourth hole of the first member and the fifth hole of the second member, and the first hole of the first member and the second hole of the second member may be holes that are not used when attaching the first member and the second member to the base in the second orientation.

With this configuration, there are holes that are not used when attaching the first and second members to the base, which can simplify the work of attaching the first and second members and potentially improve work efficiency.

The first member and the second member may be attached vertically along the base, and when the first member and the second member are attached to the base in the first orientation, the first hole of the first member and the second hole of the second member may be located lower than the third hole of the second member in the vertical direction, and the first hole and the fourth hole of the first member may be arranged in positions that are linearly symmetrical with respect to a virtual line (e.g., virtual line VL3 shown in FIG. 25(d)) that passes through the center of the first member.

With this configuration, the first member and the second member can be fixed to the base vertically downward, so that the two first members and the second member can be stably fixed.

The base may have a first region (e.g., the left speaker base portion 880L shown in FIG. 28) and a second region (e.g., the right speaker base portion 880R shown in FIG. 28) as regions to which the first member and the second member can be attached, and the first member and the second member in the first orientation may be attachable to the first region but not attachable to the second region, and the first member and the second member in the second orientation may be attachable to the second region but not attachable to the first region.

This configuration allows for greater freedom in attaching the first and second members, allowing them to be attached in accordance with the structure and specifications of the gaming machine, while also preventing installation errors.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine including a first member (e.g., the speaker 860 shown in FIG. 28) that can be attached to a base, a second member (e.g., the back cover 870 shown in FIG. 28) that can be attached to the base, and a third member (e.g., the metal plate 885 shown in FIG. 28) that is provided on the base, and the second member is a member that covers at least a portion of the first member when attached to the base, and the base includes a first attachment portion (e.g., any one of the multiple attachment sleeves 882 shown in FIG. 24, the metal plate shown in FIG. 28) and a second attachment portion (e.g., any one of the multiple attachment sleeves 882 shown in FIG. 24, the metal plate shown in FIG. 28), and the first member includes a first hole (e.g., the first through hole 864a1 shown in FIG. 28) and a seventh hole (e.g., the seventh through hole 864a7 shown in FIG. 28), and the second ... second hole (e.g., the first through hole 864a1 shown in FIG. 28) and a second hole (e.g., the second through hole 864a7 shown in FIG. 28). The first member has a second hole (e.g., a second through hole 872a2 shown in FIG. 28) and a third hole (e.g., a third through hole 872a3 shown in FIG. 28), the third member has an eighth hole (e.g., an eighth through hole 885a8 shown in FIG. 24(a) and FIG. 26), the first member is attached to the first mounting portion by a fixing means (e.g., a screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that passes through the first hole of the first member and the second hole of the second member, The first member is attached to the first mounting portion by a fixing means (e.g., screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that passes through the seventh hole of the first member and the eighth hole of the third member, and the second member is fixed to the second mounting portion by a fixing means (e.g., screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that passes through the third hole, and abuts (or is adjacent to) at least a portion of the first member to fix the first member.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the second member is attached to the base, at least a portion of the second member abuts (or is close to) the first member and is fixed so as to cover at least a portion of the first member, so that the two first members and the second member can be stably fixed. In addition, the first member is attached to the base by a fixing means that penetrates the seventh hole of the first member and the eighth hole of the third member, so that the two first members and the second member can be more firmly fixed to the base.

The first member and the second member may be configured to be attached vertically along the base, the third member may be a member integrally provided on the base, and when the first member and the second member are attached to the base, the first hole and the seventh hole of the first member, the second hole of the second member, and the eighth hole of the third member may be located lower in the vertical direction than the third hole of the second member.

With this configuration, the first member and the second member can be fixed to the base vertically downward, so that the two first members and the second member can be stably fixed.

The first member may also have a fourth hole (e.g., the fourth through hole 864a4 shown in FIG. 28) and a ninth hole (e.g., the ninth through hole 864a9 shown in FIG. 28), and the first member and the second member may be attached to the base in either a first orientation or a second orientation, and the fourth hole and the ninth hole may be holes that may not be used when attaching the first member and the second member to the base.

With this configuration, there are holes that are not used when attaching the first and second members to the base, which can simplify the work of attaching the first and second members and potentially improve work efficiency.

In addition, the second member has a fifth hole (e.g., the fifth through hole 872a5 shown in FIG. 28), the third member has a tenth hole (e.g., the tenth through hole 885a10 shown in FIG. 24(a) and FIG. 26), the second orientation is an orientation in which the first member and the second member are rotated 180 degrees in the circumferential direction with respect to the first orientation, the first hole and the fourth hole of the first member are arranged in positions that are linearly symmetrical with respect to a virtual line (e.g., the virtual line VL3 shown in FIG. 25(d)) that passes through the center of the first member, and the second hole and the fifth hole of the second member are arranged in positions that are linearly symmetrical with respect to the center of the second member. The first and second members in the second orientation may be attached to the first mounting portion by a fastening means (e.g., a screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that penetrates the fourth hole of the first member and the fifth hole of the second member, and the first and second members in the second orientation may be attached to the first mounting portion by a fastening means (e.g., a screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that penetrates the ninth hole of the first member and the tenth hole of the third member.

With this configuration, it is possible to attach the first member and the second member to the base in at least two orientations, which increases the degree of freedom in attaching the first member and the second member, and allows them to be attached in accordance with the structure and specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine including a first member (e.g., speaker 860 shown in FIG. 28) that can be attached to a base, and a second member (e.g., rear cover 870 shown in FIG. 28) that can be attached to the base, and the base has a first region (e.g., left speaker base portion 880L shown in FIG. 28) and a second region (e.g., right speaker base portion 880R shown in FIG. 28) as regions to which the first member and the second member can be attached, and the first member and the second member are oriented in a first direction (e.g., a box-shaped space 872S of rear cover 870 and a lead terminal 866 of speaker 860 face to the right side in rear view). The game machine can be attached to the base in either a first orientation (for example, a direction in which the speaker 860's lead wire 867 is pulled out from the right side) or a second orientation (for example, a direction in which the box-shaped space 872S of the rear cover 870 and the lead terminal 866 of the speaker 860 face left in rear view, and the speaker 860's lead wire 867 is pulled out from the left side), the second orientation is an orientation in which the first member and the second member are rotated 180 degrees in the circumferential direction with respect to the first orientation, the first member and the second member can be attached to the first area in the first orientation, and the first member and the second member can be attached to the second area in the second orientation.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, the first member and the second member can be attached to the base in at least two orientations, which increases the degree of freedom in attaching the first member and the second member, and allows them to be attached in accordance with the structure and specifications of the gaming machine.

The first member may have a plurality of holes (e.g., the first through hole 864a1, the fourth through hole 864a4, the seventh through hole 864a7, and the ninth through hole 864a9 shown in FIG. 28), and some of the plurality of holes of the first member (e.g., the first through hole 864a1 and the seventh through hole 864a7 shown in FIG. 28) are holes used when attaching the first member to the base in the first orientation, and some of the holes of the first member other than the some of the holes (e.g., the fourth through hole 864a4 and the ninth through hole 864a9 shown in FIG. 28) are holes that are not used when attaching the first member to the base in the first orientation, and the other of the plurality of holes of the first member (e.g., the fourth through hole 864a4 and the ninth through hole 864a9 shown in FIG. 28) may be holes used when attaching the first member to the base in the second orientation.

In other words, the first member has a plurality of holes (e.g., the first through hole 864a1, the fourth through hole 864a4, the seventh through hole 864a7, and the ninth through hole 864a9 shown in FIG. 28), some of the plurality of holes of the first member (e.g., the first through hole 864a1 and the seventh through hole 864a7 shown in FIG. 28) are holes used when attaching the first member to the base in the first orientation, and the other holes of the plurality of holes of the first member excluding the some of the holes (e.g., the fourth through hole 864a4 and the ninth through hole 864a9 shown in FIG. 28) are holes used when attaching the first member to the base in the first orientation. Some of the holes of the first member (e.g., the fourth through hole 864a4 and the ninth through hole 864a9 shown in FIG. 28) are holes that are not used when attaching the first member to the base in the second orientation, and some of the holes of the first member excluding the some of the holes (e.g., the first through hole 864a1 and the seventh through hole 864a7 shown in FIG. 28) may be holes that are not used when attaching the first member to the base in the second orientation.

With this configuration, there are holes that are not used when attaching the first member to the base, which can simplify the work of attaching the first member and improve work efficiency.

The second member may have a plurality of holes (e.g., the second through hole 872a2, the third through hole 873a3, the fifth through hole 872a5, and the sixth through hole 873a6 shown in FIG. 28), and some of the plurality of holes of the second member (e.g., the second through hole 872a2 and the third through hole 873a3 shown in FIG. 28) may be holes used when attaching the second member to the base in the first orientation, and other holes of the plurality of holes of the second member excluding the some of the holes (e.g., the fifth through hole 872a5 and the sixth through hole 873a6 shown in FIG. 28) may be holes used when attaching the second member to the base in the first orientation, and the other holes of the plurality of holes of the second member (e.g., the fifth through hole 872a5 and the sixth through hole 873a6 shown in FIG. 28) may be holes used when attaching the second member to the base in the second orientation.

In other words, the second member has a plurality of holes (e.g., the second through hole 872a2, the third through hole 873a3, the fifth through hole 872a5, and the sixth through hole 873a6 shown in FIG. 28), some of the plurality of holes of the second member (e.g., the second through hole 872a2 and the third through hole 873a3 shown in FIG. 28) are holes used when attaching the second member to the base in the first orientation, and the other holes of the plurality of holes of the second member excluding the some of the holes (e.g., the fifth through hole 872a5 and the sixth through hole 873a6 shown in FIG. 28) are holes used when attaching the second member to the base in the first orientation. Some of the holes of the second member (e.g., the fifth through hole 872a5 and the sixth through hole 873a6 shown in FIG. 28) are holes that are not used when the second member is attached to the base in the first orientation, and some of the holes of the second member excluding the some of the holes of the second member (e.g., the second through hole 872a2 and the third through hole 873a3 shown in FIG. 28) may be holes that are not used when the second member is attached to the base in the second orientation.

With this configuration, there are holes that are not used when attaching the second member to the base, which can simplify the work of attaching the second member and potentially improve work efficiency.

In addition, some of the holes of the first member (e.g., the seventh through hole 864a7 and the ninth through hole 864a9 shown in FIG. 28) may be holes used when attaching only the first member to the base, and the remaining holes of the first member excluding the some of the holes (e.g., the first through hole 864a1 and the fourth through hole 864a4 shown in FIG. 28) may be holes used when attaching both the first member and the second member to the base.

This configuration makes it possible to fasten both the first and second members at the same time using some of the holes, simplifying the work of attaching the members compared to conventional methods and enabling the two first and second members to be stably fastened together.

The first member has a first hole (e.g., the first through hole 864a1 shown in FIG. 28), the second member has a second hole (e.g., the second through hole 872a2 shown in FIG. 28) and a third hole (e.g., the third through hole 872a3 shown in FIG. 28), the first member is attached to the base by a fixing means (e.g., the screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that penetrates the first hole of the first member and the second hole of the second member, and the second member is attached to the base by a fixing means (e.g., the screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that penetrates the third hole of the second member. The first member and the second member may be attached vertically along the base, and when the first member and the second member are attached to the base in the first orientation, the first hole of the first member and the second hole of the second member may be located below the third hole of the second member in the vertical direction, and when the first member and the second member are attached to the base in the second orientation, the first hole of the first member and the second hole of the second member may be located above the third hole of the second member in the vertical direction.

With this configuration, the first member and the second member can be fixed to the base vertically downward, so that the two first members and the second member can be stably fixed.

In addition, the first member has a fourth hole (e.g., the fourth through hole 864a4 shown in FIG. 28), the second member has a fifth hole (e.g., the fifth through hole 872a5 shown in FIG. 28) and a sixth hole (e.g., the sixth through hole 873a6 shown in FIG. 28), the first member is attached to the base by a fixing means (e.g., the screw 890 shown in FIG. 28) that penetrates the fourth hole of the first member and the fifth hole of the second member, the second member is attached to the base by a fixing means that penetrates the sixth hole of the second member, and the first member and The second member may be attached vertically along the base, and when the first member and the second member are attached to the base in the first orientation, the fourth hole of the first member and the fifth hole of the second member may be located above the sixth hole of the second member in the vertical direction, and when the first member and the second member are attached to the base in the second orientation, the fourth hole of the first member and the fifth hole of the second member may be located below the sixth hole of the second member in the vertical direction.

With this configuration, the first member and the second member can be fixed to the base vertically downward, so that the two first members and the second member can be stably fixed.

The "hole" according to the present invention is not limited to a through hole, but may be a notch or the like. In other words, it may be a portion that can be fixed (e.g., fastened) by a fixing means (e.g., a screw), and the shape is not limited to a circle or an ellipse.

<Power relay board unit and reel relay board unit>
Next, the power supply relay board unit 600 and the reel relay board unit 700 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

Figure 30 (a) is a plan view showing the reel relay board unit 700 attached to the power relay board unit 600, (b) is a side view showing the reel relay board unit 700 attached to the power relay board unit 600, and (c) is a side view showing the reel relay board unit 700 removed from the power relay board unit 600.

As explained using FIG. 2, the power relay board unit 600 is fixed with screws above the three reels 110-112 on the back panel 242 of the main body 101. Details will be described later, but the power relay board unit 600 has a main side power relay board first connector MVC1 (first connector), which is a male connector, and a sub side power relay board first connector SVC1 (first connector), which is a male connector.

On the other hand, the reel relay board unit 700 includes a female main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 (second connector) having a complementary shape to the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 (first connector), and a female sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 (second connector) having a complementary shape to the sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 (first connector).

The main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 of the reel relay board unit 700 can be directly attached and detached to the main side power relay board first connector MVC1 of the power relay board unit 600, and the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 of the reel relay board unit 700 can be directly attached and detached to the sub side power relay board first connector SVC1 of the power relay board unit 600.

As described with reference to FIG. 2, in this example, the reel relay board unit 700 is attached to a predetermined position inside the main body 101 (for example, the right end of the sheet metal member 710 of the reel relay board unit 700 is attached to the mounting portion 101a of the main body 101), so that the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 and the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 of the reel relay board unit 700 are connected to the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 and the sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 of the power supply relay board unit 600.

In this example, the connector of the reel relay board unit 700 is manually connected to the connector of the power relay board unit 600, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one of the power relay board unit 600 and the reel relay board unit 700 may be fixed to a first member (e.g., the main body 101), and the other of the power relay board unit 600 and the reel relay board unit 700 may be fixed to a second member (e.g., the front door 102). When the second member (front door 102) is opened relative to the first member (main body 101), the power relay board unit 600 and the reel relay board unit 700 are not connected, and when the second member (front door 102) is closed relative to the first member (main body 101), the power relay board unit 600 and the reel relay board unit 700 are connected.

In addition, the gaming machine is not limited to a slot machine. For example, in a pachinko machine having a gaming frame and an inner frame, a power relay board unit may be fixed to one of the gaming frame and the inner frame, and the connector of the reel relay board unit may be manually connected to this power relay board unit connector. Also, the power relay board unit may be fixed to one of the gaming frame and the inner frame, and the reel relay board unit may be fixed to the other of the gaming frame and the inner frame, and when the gaming frame is attached to the inner frame, the connector of the reel relay board unit may be automatically connected to the connector of the power relay board unit.

The power relay board unit 600 may include only one of the main power relay board first connector MVC1 (first connector) and the sub power relay board first connector SVC1 (first connector), and the reel relay board unit 700 may include only a connector having a complementary shape to one connector included in the power relay board unit 600. In other words, the number of "connectors" according to the present invention and "boards" on which the "connectors" are arranged is not limited to two.

<Power relay board unit>
Next, the power supply relay board unit 600 will be described in detail.

Figure 31(a) is a front view of the power relay board unit 600, and Figure 31(b) is a rear view of the power relay board unit 600. Also, Figure 32 is an exploded view of the components constituting the power relay board unit 600 as seen from the front, and Figure 33 is an exploded view of the components constituting the power relay board unit 600 as seen from the rear.

The power supply relay board unit 600 is composed of a plate-shaped board support 610 (mounting portion), a main side power supply relay board 640 housed in the area on the right side of the board support 610 when viewed from the front, and a sub side power supply relay board 670 housed in the area on the left side of the board support 610 when viewed from the front.

<Power relay board unit/board support>
Next, the substrate support 610 will be described.

The board support 610 is a plate-like member made of translucent resin in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape, and is composed of a main-side board accommodating section 612 consisting of a rectangular area located on the right side when viewed from the front, a sub-side board accommodating section 614 consisting of a rectangular area located on the left side when viewed from the front, a connecting section 615 connecting the main-side board accommodating section 612 and the sub-side board accommodating section 614, a main-side cable support section 616 arranged below the main-side board accommodating section 612, and a sub-side cable support section 618 arranged below the sub-side board accommodating section 616.

The sub-side board accommodating section 614 has a shape that is nearly linearly symmetrical to the main-side board accommodating section 612 with respect to a virtual center line that passes vertically through the center of the connecting section 615, so its description will be omitted below and only the main-side board accommodating section 612 will be described. Also, the sub-side cable support section 618 has nearly the same shape as the main-side cable support section 616, so its description will be omitted.

<Power relay board unit/board support/main board housing section>
Next, the main side substrate accommodating portion 612 of the substrate support 610 will be described with further reference to Fig. 34. Fig. 34 is a partially enlarged view showing the main side substrate accommodating portion 612 of the substrate support 610 on an enlarged scale.

The main side board accommodation section 612 is configured to have a bottom surface 620 made of a rectangular plate-like body, an outer wall 622 erected along the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom surface 620, three board loose-fit bosses 624 erected at the upper left corner, the center left side, and the lower right corner of the bottom surface 620 when viewed from the front, five board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) erected on the bottom surface 620 inward from the board loose-fit bosses 624, restricting pieces 628 (628a, 628b) that restrict movement of the main side power supply relay board 640 in the thickness direction, and pressing parts 630 (630a to 630d) that press the main side power supply relay board 640 in a predetermined direction while allowing the main side power supply relay board 640 to move a predetermined amount.

<Power supply relay board unit/board support/bottom surface, outer wall>
The longitudinal and lateral lengths of the bottom surface 620 are designed to be longer than the longitudinal and lateral lengths of the main-side power supply relay board 640, and the main-side power supply relay board 640 is configured to be movable (slidable) left and right in the longitudinal direction and up and down in the lateral direction within the space (board accommodating space) formed by the bottom surface 620 and the outer wall 622 (details will be described later).

<Power relay board unit/Board support/Board loose-fit boss>
The board loose-fit boss 624 is a portion that is loosely fitted (fitted with some play) into a through hole 642c (see Figures 32, 35, etc.; details will be described later) formed in the main side power supply relay board 640, and in this example is composed of a cylindrical member with a screw hole 624a (see Figures 34, 36(b), etc.) formed in the center.

The board loose-fit boss 624 has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 642c of the main power supply relay board 640, and the through hole 642c of the main power supply relay board 640 is provided with a predetermined "play" with respect to the board loose-fit boss 624.

With this configuration, the main-side power supply relay board 640 is accommodated in the board accommodation space (the space formed by the bottom surface 620 and the outer wall 622) of the main board accommodation section 612, and even when loosely fitted into the board loose-fit boss 624, it is configured to be able to move (slide) left and right in the longitudinal direction and up and down in the lateral direction by the amount of play (gap) formed between the through hole 642c of the main-side power supply relay board 640 and the board loose-fit boss 624.

As shown in FIG. 36(b), a mounting screw 646 having a head (flange) 646a can be attached to the screw hole 624a of the board loose-fit boss 624. The outer diameter of the head (flange) 646a of the mounting screw 646 is larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 642c of the main power supply relay board 640.

In other words, in this example, since the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) is provided with a restricting portion (board loose fit boss 624 + mounting screw 646) that restricts at least a portion of the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) from moving out of the accommodation space of the mounting portion (main board accommodation portion 612), it is possible to prevent the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) from coming off the mounting portion (main board accommodation portion 612).

The number and positions of the board loose-fit bosses 624 are not limited to those in this example, and may be, for example, one, two, or four or more, and may be erected in a location other than the example location, such as the lower left corner or upper right corner of the bottom surface 620.

<Power relay board unit/Board support/Board support boss>
The board support boss 626 (626a, 626b) is a member that comes into contact with the back surface of the main-side power supply relay board 640 and supports the main-side power supply relay board 640 from below, and in this example is composed of a cylindrical member with a through hole formed in the center.

When the main-side power supply relay board 640 is accommodated in the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612, the back surface of the main-side power supply relay board 640 is supported by five board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) and a plurality of outer wall bosses 622a (see FIG. 32(b)) formed at predetermined intervals along the outer wall 622. When the main-side power supply relay board 640 is moved within the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612, the main-side power supply relay board 640 is configured to be able to slide (slide) on the board support bosses 626 and the outer wall bosses 622a.

According to this example, the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612) has a second protrusion (board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b), outer wall boss 622a) that protrudes from the bottom surface of the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612), and the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) is configured to be movable while in contact with the second protrusion (board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b), outer wall boss 622a). This reduces the contact area between the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) and the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612), reduces friction when the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) moves, and allows the second board to move smoothly.

In addition, because the board support boss 626 is a cylindrical member with a through hole formed in the center, the contact area between the main power supply relay board 640 and the main board accommodating portion 612 of the board support 610 can be further reduced, allowing the main power supply relay board 640 to move smoothly relative to the board support 610.

In other words, since the second protrusion (board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b)) has a portion that does not contact the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640), the contact area between the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) and the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612) can be reduced, and the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) can be moved smoothly relative to the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612).

In addition, the board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) can hold the main power relay board 640 at a position higher than the bottom surface 620 of the main board housing section 612, and a space can be formed between the back surface 642b of the main power relay board 640 and the bottom surface 620 of the main board housing section 612, so that components such as the connector screw 644 (see Figure 33, etc.; details will be described later) attached to the back surface 642a of the main power relay board 640 can be prevented from interfering with the bottom surface 620 of the main board housing section 612.

In other words, a portion of the fixing means (screw for connector 644) is configured to be accommodated in the space formed between one side (back surface 642b) of the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) and the bottom surface (bottom surface 620) of the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612), so that even when the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) is moved relative to the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612), contact between the fixing means (screw for connector 644) and the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612) can be avoided.

The board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) can be divided into four first board support bosses 626a arranged at approximately equal intervals on the left side of the bottom surface 620 of the main board housing section 612 in a planar view, and one second board support boss 626b arranged on the right side of the bottom surface 620 of the main board housing section 612 in a planar view.

As shown in the rear view of FIG. 31(b), the second board support boss 626b is disposed in a position where it can come into contact with the connector screw 644 of the main power supply relay board 640, and also functions as a member that restricts the movement of the main power supply relay board 640.

Therefore, when the main-side power supply relay board 640 is moved to the right as viewed from the front within the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612, the connector screw 644 of the main-side power supply relay board 640 comes into contact with the second board support boss 626b, thereby restricting (preventing) the main-side power supply relay board 640 from moving further to the right.

In other words, the fixing means (screw for connector 644) is configured to be able to come into contact with the second protrusion (board support boss 626b) when the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) moves relative to the mounting portion (main side board accommodating portion 612). Therefore, even if a force greater than expected is applied to the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) due to the forceful positioning of the connectors of the power supply relay board unit 600 and the reel relay board unit 700, causing the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) to move significantly relative to the mounting portion (main side board accommodating portion 612), the fixing means (screw for connector 644) of the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) comes into contact with the second protrusion (board support boss 626b) to restrict the movement of the second board (main side power supply relay board 640), and the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) can be protected.

The number and positions of the substrate support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) are not limited to those in this example, and may be, for example, 1 to 4, or 6 or more, and may be erected at a location other than the illustrated location, such as the center of the bottom surface 620.

<Power relay board unit/board support/regulating piece>
The restricting pieces 628 (628a, 628b) are parts that restrict (prevent) the main side power supply relay board 640 from moving outside the board accommodating space (from falling out of the board accommodating space) when the main side power supply relay board 640 is moved within the board accommodating space of the main board accommodating section 612.

In this example, a first restricting piece 628a is formed at a position slightly to the right of the center of the upper outer wall 622 in a plan view, protruding inward from the bottom surface 620 with the outer wall 622 as its base end (protruding along the short direction of the main power supply relay board 640 (up and down direction when viewed from the front)), and a second restricting piece 628b is formed at the lower end of the outer wall 622 on the left side in a plan view, protruding inward from the bottom surface 620 with the outer wall 622 as its base end (protruding along the long direction of the main power supply relay board 640 (left and right direction when viewed from the front)).

When the main power supply relay board 640 is accommodated in the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612, the outer edge of the main power supply relay board 640 is attached so as to be sandwiched under the restricting pieces 628 (628a, 628b) (details will be described later).

The protrusion amount of the first restricting piece 628a (the length of the protrusion with the outer wall 622 as its base end) is designed to be longer than the maximum vertical movement amount (maximum vertical movement distance) of the main-side power supply relay board 640 within the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612. Therefore, even if the main-side power supply relay board 640 is moved vertically within the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612, the first restricting piece 628a can restrict (prevent) the main-side power supply relay board 640 from moving outside the board accommodation space (from falling out of the board accommodation space).

In addition, the protrusion amount of the second restricting piece 628b (the length of the protruding portion with the outer wall 622 as its base end) is designed to be longer than the maximum left-right movement amount (maximum distance that can be moved in the left-right direction) of the main-side power supply relay board 640 within the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612. Therefore, even if the main-side power supply relay board 640 is moved left-right within the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612, the second restricting piece 628b can restrict (prevent) the main-side power supply relay board 640 from moving outside the board accommodation space (from falling out of the board accommodation space).

In this example, the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) is provided with a restricting portion (restricting pieces 628 (628a, 628b)) that restricts at least a portion of the second board from moving out of the accommodation space of the mounting portion (main board accommodation portion 612), so that the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) can be prevented from coming off the mounting portion (main board accommodation portion 612).

In addition, the restricting portion (restricting piece 628 (628a, 628b)) is a restricting piece that protrudes toward the storage space, and the protruding length of the restricting piece is longer than the distance that the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) can move in the storage space. Therefore, no matter where the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) is moved to, it is possible to reliably prevent the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) from coming off the mounting portion.

<Power relay board unit/board support/pressure section>
The pressing portions 630 (630a to 630d) are portions that constitute part of the outer wall 620, and are elastically deformable portions (elastic portions) that press (urge) the main-side power supply relay board 640 in a predetermined direction while allowing the main-side power supply relay board 640 to move a predetermined amount.

In this example, the pressing portion 630 (630a to 630d) is configured as a cantilever beam with one end fixed to the outer wall 622 and the other end being a free end, and is a tongue piece (a part shaped like a tongue) that is longer in the longitudinal direction than the first restricting piece 628a and the second restricting piece 628b.

In this example, the longitudinal length of the restricting piece (restricting piece 628 (628a, 628b)) is shorter than the longitudinal length of the elastic portion (pressing portion 630 (630a-630d)), so the restricting piece (restricting piece 628 (628a, 628b)) is not too long, while the elastic portion (pressing portion 630 (630a-630d)) has an appropriate length, making it easier to accommodate the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) in the accommodation space, and after accommodation, the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) can be securely held in the accommodation space by the restricting piece (restricting piece 628 (628a, 628b)) and the elastic portion (pressing portion 630 (630a-630d)).

In this example, a first pressing portion 630a and a second pressing portion 630b are formed near the right end and the left end of the outer wall 622 on the lower side in a plan view, respectively, and have one end fixed to the outer wall 622 and the other end free. A third pressing portion 630c and a fourth pressing portion 630d are formed in the center of the outer wall 622 on the right side in a plan view and the outer wall 622 on the left side in a plan view, respectively. They have one end fixed to the outer wall 622 and the other end free.

In this example, the elastic portion (pressing portion 630 (630a-630d)) constitutes part of the outer wall (outer wall 622) that forms the storage space. Therefore, even if a force greater than expected is applied to the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) due to forceful positioning of the connectors of the power supply relay board unit 600 and the reel relay board unit 700, causing the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) to move significantly relative to the mounting portion (main board storage portion 612), part of the storage space will elastically deform, and the impact applied to the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) can be mitigated.

The first pressing portion 630a and the second pressing portion 630b are parts that can swing (elastically deform) in the vertical direction when viewed from above. Therefore, even if the main-side power supply relay board 640 is moved in the vertical direction when viewed from the front within the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612, the first pressing portion 630a and the second pressing portion 630b can press (urge) the main-side power supply relay board 640 in the upward direction when viewed from the front, while allowing the main-side power supply relay board 640 to move a predetermined amount in the downward direction when viewed from the front.

The third pressing portion 630c is a portion that can swing (elastically deform) left and right when viewed from above. Therefore, even if the main-side power supply relay board 640 is moved to the left when viewed from the front within the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612, the third pressing portion 630c can press (urge) the main-side power supply relay board 640 to the right when viewed from the front, while allowing the main-side power supply relay board 640 to move a certain amount to the left when viewed from the front.

The fourth pressing portion 630d is a portion that can swing (elastically deform) left and right when viewed from above. Therefore, even if the main-side power supply relay board 640 is moved to the right when viewed from the front within the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612, the fourth pressing portion 630d can press (urge) the main-side power supply relay board 640 to the left when viewed from the front, while allowing the main-side power supply relay board 640 to move a predetermined amount to the right when viewed from the front.

<Power supply relay board unit/Main side power supply relay board>
Next, the main power supply relay board 640 will be described with reference to FIGS.

The main power supply relay board 640 is composed of a base material 642 made of a rectangular plate-like body, and a main power supply relay board first connector MVC1 (first connector), a main power supply relay board second connector MVC2, and a main power supply relay board third connector MVC3 arranged on one side 642a (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "front surface" or "component surface") of the base material 642.

The main side power supply relay board 640 is electrically connected to the connector of the power supply board of the power supply device 252 described using FIG. 2 via the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 to main side power supply relay board third connector MVC3 and a harness (wiring) not shown, and is a board that relays between the main control board 210a and the power supply board.

Three through holes 642c are formed in the upper left corner, the center left corner, and the lower right corner of the base material 642 when viewed from the front, at positions corresponding to the three board loose-fit bosses 624 erected on the bottom surface 620 of the main side board housing section 612.

On the surface 642a of the substrate 642, the main power relay board first connector MVC1 to main power relay board third connector MVC3 are arranged, and also a resist layer, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conductive parts (vias, through holes), silk printing, etc. are formed, and in this example, a rectangular solid ground pattern 641 is formed around the through hole 642c.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33, no electronic components are mounted on the other surface 642b of the substrate 642 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "back surface" or "solder surface"), and two connector screws 644 are attached to secure the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 from the back surface 642b side.

According to this example, the second connector (main side power relay board first connector MVC1) is fixed to one side (back surface 642b) of the second board (main side power relay board 640) using a fixing means (connector screw 644). Therefore, even if the connectors of the power relay board unit 600 and the reel relay board unit 700 are repeatedly attached and detached, the second connector (main side power relay board first connector MVC1) is unlikely to come off the second board (main side power relay board 640). In addition, when the first connector (main side reel relay board first connector MRC1) is connected to the second connector (main side power relay board first connector MVC1), the force applied from the first connector (main side reel relay board first connector MRC1) to the second connector (main side power relay board first connector MVC1) can be received by the fixing means (connector screw 644), and the connectors can be reliably connected to each other.

In addition, multiple circular solid ground patterns 643 are formed on the back surface 642b of the substrate 642 at positions corresponding to the five board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) formed on the main side board housing section 612.

The area of each of the ground patterns 643 is wider than the area where the back surface 642b of the main power relay board 640 and the board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) can come into contact.

In this example, the area of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) that comes into contact with the mounting portion (board support 610) can be made into a ground pattern, making it possible to effectively utilize the limited area of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) and preventing damage to wiring patterns other than the ground pattern of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640).

In particular, the second protrusion (board support boss 626 (626a, 626b)) is a cylindrical portion, and the ground pattern 643 is circular, making it possible to effectively utilize the limited area of the second board (main side power supply relay board 640).

<Power supply relay board unit/Sub-side power supply relay board>
Next, the sub-side power supply relay board 670 will be described with reference to FIGS.

The sub-side power supply relay board 670 is composed of a base material 672 made of a rectangular plate-like body, and a sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 (first connector) arranged on one side 672a (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "front side" or "component side") of the base material 672, a sub-side power supply relay board second connector SVC2, a sub-side power supply relay board third connector SVC3, and a sub-side power supply relay board fourth connector SVC4.

The sub-side power supply relay board 670 is electrically connected to the connector of the power supply board of the power supply device 252 described using FIG. 2 via the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 to the sub-side power supply relay board fourth connector SVC4 and a harness (wiring) not shown, and is a board that relays between the sub-control board 220a and the power supply board.

Three through holes 672c are formed in the upper right corner, the center right side, and the lower left corner of the base material 672 at positions corresponding to the three board loose-fit bosses 674 (see Figure 32) erected on the bottom surface 620 of the sub-side board accommodation section 614.

On the surface 672a of the base material 672, the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 to the sub-side power supply relay board fourth connector SVC4 are arranged, and a resist layer, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conductive parts (vias, through holes), silk printing, etc. are formed, and in this example, a rectangular solid ground pattern 671 is formed around the through hole 672c.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33, no electronic components are mounted on the other surface 672b of the substrate 672 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "back surface" or "solder surface"), and two screws 674 are attached to secure the sub-side power relay board first connector SVC1 from the back surface 672b side.

In addition, multiple solid circular ground patterns 673 are formed on the back surface 672b of the substrate 672 at positions corresponding to the five board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b) formed on the sub-side board housing portion 614.

The area of each of the ground patterns 673 is wider than the area in which the back surface 672b of the sub-side power relay board 670 and the board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b) can come into contact.

In this example, the area of the second board (sub-side power supply relay board 670) that comes into contact with the mounting portion (board support 610) can be made into a ground pattern, making it possible to effectively utilize the limited area of the second board (sub-side power supply relay board 670) and preventing damage to the wiring pattern, etc. of the second board (sub-side power supply relay board 670).

In particular, the second protrusion (board support boss 676 (676a, 676b)) is a cylindrical portion, and the ground pattern 673 is circular, making it possible to effectively utilize the limited area of the second board (sub-side power relay board 670).

<Main side board housing section (modified example)>
Next, a modified example of the main-side board accommodating section 612 described using Fig. 34 etc. will be described with reference to Fig. 34-2. Fig. 34-2(a) is a front view of the main-side board accommodating section 631 according to the modified example, Fig. 34-2(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line Z-Z in Fig. 34-2(a), and Fig. 34-2(c) is a cross-sectional view corresponding to Fig. 34-2(b) showing a state in which the main-side power supply relay board 640 is accommodated in the main-side board accommodating section 631.

The main side board storage section 631 of the modified example differs in that it has four board support parts 633 instead of the five board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) provided in the main side board storage section 612 described using Figure 34 etc.

In the following, to avoid repetitive explanations, the same or similar configurations as the main side board accommodation section 612 are given the same reference numerals in the figures, and their explanations are omitted. Also, here, the main side board accommodation section that accommodates the main side power supply relay board 640 is described, but the same or similar configuration can also be adopted for the sub side board accommodation section that accommodates the sub side power supply relay board 670.

The maximum length in each of the longitudinal and lateral directions of the bottom surface 620 of the main side board accommodation section 631 is designed to be longer than the maximum length in each of the longitudinal and lateral directions of the main side power supply relay board 640 that can be accommodated in the main side board accommodation section 631.

For this reason, the main-side power supply relay board 640 can move (slide) in the in-plane direction of the main-side power supply relay board 640 (direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the main-side power supply relay board 640; the X direction shown in Figures 34-2(a) and (c), and the Y direction shown in Figure 34-2(a)) within the rectangular tray-shaped space (board accommodation space) formed by the bottom surface 620 of the main-side board accommodation section 631 and the outer walls 622 on all four sides.

<Main side board housing section (modified example)/board support section>
34-2(c), when the main-side power supply relay board 640 is accommodated in the board accommodation space of the main-side board accommodation portion 631, the board support portion 633 is a portion that comes into contact with the back surface 642b of the main-side power supply relay board 640 and is capable of supporting the main-side power supply relay board 640 from below. The board support portion 633 in this example is composed of a plate-like member that is rectangular in front view and is molded to protrude from the bottom surface 620 of the main-side board accommodation portion 631 toward one side in the thickness direction of the bottom surface 620, with the bottom surface 620 as the base end.

When the main power relay board 640 is accommodated in the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 631, the back surface 642b of the main power relay board 640 is supported by the four board support parts 633 and the four outer wall bosses 622a. When the main power relay board 640 is moved in the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 631, the main power relay board 640 is configured to be able to slide (slide and move) on the board support parts 633 and the outer wall bosses 622a. In other words, the board support parts 633 and the outer wall bosses 622a (support parts) are configured to be able to support the main power relay board 640 (second board) even if the main power relay board 640 (second board) moves within a predetermined range in the main board accommodation section 631 (mounting part).

In this example, the main board accommodating section 631 (mounting section) has a board support section 633 (support section) and an outer wall boss 622 (support section) that can support the main power supply relay board 640 (second board), so that the contact area between the main power supply relay board 640 and the main board accommodating section 631 can be reduced, reducing friction when the main power supply relay board 640 moves, allowing the main power supply relay board 640 to move smoothly.

In addition, the board support portion 633 and the outer wall boss 622 can hold the main power supply relay board 640 at a position higher than the bottom surface 620 of the main side board accommodating portion 631, and a space can be formed between the back surface 642b of the main side power supply relay board 640 and the bottom surface 620 of the main side board accommodating portion 631, so that components such as the connector screw 644 (see Figure 33, etc.; details will be described later) attached to the back surface 642b of the main side power supply relay board 640 can be prevented from interfering with the bottom surface 620 of the main side board accommodating portion 631.

In other words, a portion of the connector screw 644 is configured to be accommodated in the space formed between one side (back surface 642b) of the main-side power supply relay board 640 (second board) and the bottom surface 620 of the main board accommodating section 631 (mounting section), so that contact between the connector screw 644 and the main board accommodating section 631 can be avoided even when the main-side power supply relay board 640 is moved relative to the main board accommodating section 631.

The number, location, shape, etc. of the board support parts 633 and the outer wall bosses 622 are not limited to those in this example, and may be, for example, 1 to 3, or 5 or more, or may be erected in a location other than the illustrated location, such as the center of the bottom surface 620. Also, only one of the board support parts 633 and the outer wall bosses 622 may be provided.

<How to install the power relay board unit/power relay board>
35(a) and 36, a method for attaching the main-side power supply relay board 640 to the board support 610 will be described. Note that the method for attaching the sub-side power supply relay board 670 to the board support 610 is almost the same as the method for attaching the main-side power supply relay board 640, so a description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 35(a) is a front view showing the state in which the main power supply relay board 640 is accommodated in the main board accommodation section 612 of the board support 610, Figure 36(a) is a front view showing the state in which the main power supply relay board 640 is accommodated in the main board accommodation section 612 of the board support 610 and the mounting screw 646 is attached, and Figure 36(b) is a view from the direction of the symbol A in Figure 36(a) and is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the mounting screw 646.

First, as shown in FIG. 35(a), the main-side power supply relay board 640 is positioned relative to the board support 610 so that the three board loose-fit bosses 624 of the board support 610 are loosely fitted into the through-holes 642c at the upper left corner, the center left side, and the lower right corner of the main-side power supply relay board 640 when viewed from the front, respectively. Then, the upper outer edge of the main-side power supply relay board 640 when viewed from the front is inserted below the first restricting piece 628a of the board support 610, and the edge of the lower left corner of the main-side power supply relay board 640 when viewed from the front is inserted below the second restricting piece 628b of the board support 610.

Next, the outer edge of the main power supply relay board 640 on the left side as seen from the front is pressed against the third pressing portion 630c on the left side as seen from the front of the board support 610, the main power supply relay board 640 is moved slightly to the left as seen from the front, and the outer edge of the main power supply relay board 640 on the right side as seen from the front is fitted inside the fourth pressing portion 630d on the right side as seen from the front of the board support 610.

Then, the main-side power supply relay board 640 is moved slightly upward when viewed from the front, and the outer edge of the main-side power supply relay board 640 on the lower side when viewed from the front is fitted inside the first pressing portion 630a and the second pressing portion 630b on the lower side when viewed from the front of the board support 610, thereby accommodating the main-side power supply relay board 640 in the board accommodation space (the space formed by the bottom surface 620 and the outer wall 622) of the main-side board accommodation portion 612 of the board support 610.

That is, in this example, one end of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) is engaged with the restricting piece (restricting piece 628 (628a, 628b)), and the other end of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) elastically deforms the elastic portion (pressing portion 630 (630a-630d)), thereby accommodating the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) in the accommodation space.

In this example, the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) can be easily accommodated in the accommodation space, and once accommodated, the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) can be securely held in the accommodation space by the restricting pieces (restricting pieces 628 (628a, 628b)) and the elastic parts (pressing parts 630 (630a-630d)).

Finally, as shown in Figures 36(a) and (b), the mounting screws 646 are fastened to the screw holes 624a of the three board loose-fit bosses 624 of the board support 610, and the main-side power supply relay board 640 is attached in a state in which it can move up, down, left, and right in the board storage space of the board support 610.

As shown enlarged in FIG. 36(b), when the main power supply relay board 640 is accommodated in the main board accommodation section 612 of the board support 610, the tip of the board loose-fit boss 624 protrudes slightly above the surface 642a of the main power supply relay board 640. Therefore, even when the mounting screw 646 is fastened to the board loose-fit boss 624, the main power supply relay board 640 can be prevented from coming into contact with the mounting screw 646, and the movement of the main power supply relay board 640 is not hindered.

That is, in this example, when the opening (through hole 642c) of the second board (main side power relay board 640) is penetrated by the protruding part (board loose-fit boss 624) of the mounting part (board support 610) and a screw (mounting screw 646) is attached to the protruding part (board loose-fit boss 624), a part of the protruding part (board loose-fit boss 624) and the head (head (flange) 646a) of the screw (mounting screw 646) are positioned above one side surface (surface 642a) of the second board (main side power relay board 640), and the head (head (flange) 646a) of the screw (mounting screw 646) is positioned above one side surface (surface 642a) of the second board (main side power relay board 640) regardless of the position of the second board (main side power relay board 640) inside the storage space of the mounting part (board support 610).

According to this example, even if the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) is moved relative to the mounting portion (board support 610), contact between the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) and the head of the screw (head (flange) 646a of the mounting screw 646) can be avoided, and deterioration and wear of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) can be prevented, while the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) can be moved smoothly.

In addition, the outer diameter of the head (flange) 646a of the mounting screw 646 is larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 642c of the main power supply relay board 640, so that the main power supply relay board 640 can be reliably prevented from falling off (disengaging) from the board support 610 after mounting.

In addition, when the opening (through hole 642c) of the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) is inserted through the protruding portion (board loose-fit boss 624) of the mounting portion (board support 610) and a screw (mounting screw 646) is attached to the protruding portion (board loose-fit boss 624), the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) is configured to be able to come into contact with the head (head (flange) 646a) of the screw when the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) is moved relative to the mounting portion (board support 610), and a solid mark is provided in the area of the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) that can come into contact with the head (head (flange) 646a). Since the ground pattern 641 (see Figures 32, 36(a), etc.) is formed, it is possible to prevent the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) from coming off the mounting part (board support 610) while allowing the second board to move, and even if the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) is moved with the head of the screw (head (flange) 646a of the mounting screw 646) in contact with the second board (main side power supply relay board 640), it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern formed on the second board (main side power supply relay board 640) from being damaged.

<Board loose-fit boss and mounting screw (modified version)>
Next, a modified example of the board loose-fit boss 624 and the mounting screw 646 described with reference to FIG. 36 etc. will be described with reference to FIG. 36-2.

Figure 36-2 (a) is a partially enlarged view showing the state before the mounting screw 647 according to the modified example is attached to the board loose-fit boss 625, and (b) is a partially enlarged view showing the state after the mounting screw 647 according to the modified example has been attached to the board loose-fit boss 625, and is a drawing corresponding to Figure 36 (b).

The main side board housing section 635 of the modified example differs in that it is provided with a board loose-fit boss 625 and an attachment screw 647 instead of the board loose-fit boss 624 and attachment screw 646 provided in the main side board housing section 612 described using Figure 36 etc.

In the following, to avoid repetitive explanations, the same or similar configurations as the main side board accommodation section 612 are given the same reference numerals in the figures, and their explanations are omitted. Also, here, the main side board accommodation section that accommodates the main side power supply relay board 640 is described, but the same or similar configuration can also be adopted for the sub side board accommodation section that accommodates the sub side power supply relay board 670.

<Board Loose-Fit Boss and Mounting Screw (Modified Example)/Board Loose-Fit Boss>
The board loose-fit boss 625 of the main side board accommodating portion 635 is a portion provided corresponding to the through hole 642c formed in the main side power supply relay board 640, and has a screw hole 625a into which the screw portion 647c of the mounting screw 647 can be screwed.

The board loose-fit boss 625 in this example is a member that protrudes toward one side in the thickness direction of the bottom surface 635a of the main side board housing portion 635, with the bottom surface 635a as its base end, and is composed of a cylindrical member with a screw hole 625a formed in the center. The board loose-fit boss 625 is designed to be long enough not to reach (not to come into contact with) the back surface 642b of the main side power supply relay board 640 when the main side power supply relay board 640 is housed in the board housing space of the main side board housing portion 635.

<Board loose-fit boss and mounting screw (variation example)/mounting screw>
The mounting screw 647 is composed of a head (flange) 647a, a cylindrical main body portion 647b that protrudes to one side from the head 647a as a base end, and a cylindrical screw portion 647c that is slightly thinner than the main body portion 647b and that protrudes to one side from the main body portion 647b as a base end.

The head 647a has an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the through hole 642c of the main power supply relay board 640, and cannot be inserted into the through hole 642c of the main power supply relay board 640 (it cannot pass through the through hole 642c).

On the other hand, the main body 647b has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 642c of the main power supply relay board 640, and can be inserted into (pass through) the through hole 642c of the main power supply relay board 640. The inner diameter of the through hole 642c of the main power supply relay board 640 has a certain "play (gap)" with respect to the outer diameter of the main body 647b.

With this configuration, the main-side power supply relay board 640 is accommodated in the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 635, and even when the mounting screw 647 is attached to the board loose-fit boss 625, it is configured to be able to move (slide) in the in-plane direction (longitudinally left and right and lateral vertically) by the amount of play (gap) formed between the through hole 642c of the main-side power supply relay board 640 and the body part 647b of the mounting screw 647.

The screw portion 647c also has an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the through hole 642c of the main power supply relay board 640, and can be inserted into the through hole 642c of the main power supply relay board 640 (can pass through the through hole 642c). A screw groove that can be screwed into the screw hole 625a of the board loose-fit boss 625 is formed on the outer periphery of the screw portion 647c, and the mounting screw 647 is configured to be able to be attached to the board loose-fit boss 625 through the through hole 642c of the main power supply relay board 640.

As shown in FIG. 36-2(b), the threaded portion 647c and part of the body portion 647b of the mounting screw 647 are inserted into the through hole 642c of the main power supply relay board 640, and then the threaded portion 647c of the mounting screw 647 is fastened to the screw hole 625a of the board loose-fit boss 625, thereby fixing the mounting screw 647 to the board loose-fit boss 625.

In this example, the main-side power supply relay board 640 is provided with a restricting portion (mounting screw 647) that restricts at least a portion of the main-side power supply relay board 640 from moving out of the board accommodation space of the main-side board accommodation portion 635, so that the main-side power supply relay board 640 can be prevented from coming off the main-side board accommodation portion 635.

The number and location of the board loose-fit bosses 625 are not limited to this example, and may be, for example, one, two, or four or more, and may be erected in a location other than the example location, such as the lower left corner or upper right corner of the bottom surface 635a of the main board housing section 635.

<How to move the power relay board unit/power relay board>
35(a) to 35(c) will be used to explain a method of moving the main-side power supply relay board 640 in the main-side board accommodation portion 612 of the board support body 610. Note that the method of moving the sub-side power supply relay board 670 in the sub-side board accommodation portion 614 of the board support body 610 is substantially the same as that for the main-side power supply relay board 640, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 35(b) is a plan view showing the state in which the main-side power supply relay board 640 has been moved to the left in the main board housing section 612 as viewed from the front, and Figure 35(c) is a plan view showing the state in which the main-side power supply relay board 640 has been moved to the bottom in the main board housing section 612 as viewed from the front. For ease of explanation, Figures 35(b) and 35(c) show the state before the mounting screws 646 are attached to the main-side power supply relay board 640.

For example, as shown in FIG. 35(b), when the main-side power supply relay board 640 is moved to the left as viewed from the front against the pressing direction (biasing direction) of the third pressing part 630c on the left side as viewed from the front of the board support 610, the third pressing part 630c can be moved (slid) to the left as viewed from the front within the movable (elastically deformable) range. Then, when the movement to the left as viewed from the front is continued, finally, as shown in FIG. 35(b), the through hole 642c formed in the upper left corner and the center of the left side as viewed from the front of the main-side power supply relay board 640 abuts against the inner edge on the right side as viewed from the front of the board loose-fit boss 624 of the board support 610, and the movement of the main-side power supply relay board 640 to the left as viewed from the front is restricted. That is, the main-side power supply relay board 640 can move to the left as viewed from the front within the range that is not restricted by the board loose-fit boss 624 of the board support 610.

Although not shown in the figure, when the main-side power supply relay board 640 is moved to the right as viewed from the front against the pressing direction (biasing direction) of the fourth pressing part 630d on the right side as viewed from the front of the board support 610, it can be moved (slid) to the right as viewed from the front within the range in which the fourth pressing part 630d can move (elastically deform). Then, when the movement to the right as viewed from the front continues, eventually, the through hole 642c formed in the upper left corner and center left side as viewed from the front of the main-side power supply relay board 640 abuts against the inner edge on the left side as viewed from the front of the board loose-fit boss 624 of the board support 610, restricting the movement of the main-side power supply relay board 640 to the right as viewed from the front.

As explained with reference to FIG. 31(b), when the main power supply relay board 640 is moved to the right as viewed from the front, the connector screw 644 on the back surface of the main power supply relay board 640 abuts against the second board support boss 626b, restricting the movement of the main power supply relay board 640 to the right as viewed from the front. In other words, the main power supply relay board 640 can move to the right as viewed from the front within a range that is not restricted by the board loose-fit boss 624 of the board support body 610 or the second board support boss 626b.

As shown in FIG. 35(c), when the main side power supply relay board 640 is moved in the downward direction as viewed from the front against the pressing direction (biasing direction) of the first pressing part 630a and the second pressing part 630b on the lower side as viewed from the front of the board support 610, the first pressing part 630a and the second pressing part 630b can be moved (slid) in the downward direction as viewed from the front within the movable (elastically deformable) range. Then, when the movement in the downward direction as viewed from the front is continued, the through hole 642c formed in the lower right corner of the main side power supply relay board 640 finally abuts against the inner edge of the lower side as viewed from the front of the board loose-fit boss 624 of the board support 610, and the movement of the main side power supply relay board 640 in the downward direction as viewed from the front is restricted. In other words, the main side power supply relay board 640 can move in the downward direction as viewed from the front within the range that is not restricted by the board loose-fit boss 624 of the board support 610.

Since a predetermined gap is provided between the outer wall 622 on the upper side as viewed from the front of the board support 610 and the outer edge of the upper side as viewed from the front of the main power supply relay board 640, the main power supply relay board 640 can be moved (slid) in the upward direction as viewed from the front. Then, when the movement in the upward direction as viewed from the front continues, eventually, the outer edge on the upper side as viewed from the front of the main power supply relay board 640 abuts against the outer wall 622 on the upper side as viewed from the front of the board support 610, and the movement of the main power supply relay board 640 in the upward direction as viewed from the front is restricted. In other words, the main power supply relay board 640 can move in the upward direction as viewed from the front within a range that is not restricted by the outer wall 622 of the board support 610.

Conventionally, connectors that are movable themselves have been mainstream, and there have been problems with the connector wearing out as the number of times it is inserted and removed increases. However, with this example, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector (main reel relay board first connector MRC1) of the first board (main reel relay board 742) and the second connector (main power relay board first connector MVC1) of the second board (main power supply relay board 640), the position can be adjusted by moving the second board (main power supply relay board 640), and it is possible to prevent the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins.

In addition, the second connector (main-side power relay board first connector MVC1) that is connected board-to-board on the second board (main-side power relay board 640) tends to have a large number of pins, and the connector becomes larger accordingly. Therefore, if only the large connector moves, there is a high risk of damaging the board or causing poor contact, but by moving the entire second board (main-side power relay board 640), a stable connection can be achieved.

In addition, the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) can be moved freely within a range in which the opening (through hole 642c) of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) can move relative to the protruding portion (board loose-fit boss 624) of the mounting portion (main-side board accommodating portion 612), allowing the connectors to be connected smoothly.

In particular, the opening (through hole 642c) is a circular part, the protrusion (board loose-fit boss 624) is made of a cylindrical member, and the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) is configured to be movable up, down, left, and right relative to the mounting part (main-side board accommodating part 612). This allows the size of the opening formed in the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640) to be kept to a minimum, making effective use of the limited mounting surface of the second board (main-side power supply relay board 640).

<Power relay board unit/cable support part>
The main side cable support portion 616 has a harness insertion hole 616a through which a harness (wiring) can be inserted that connects the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 to main side power supply relay board third connector MVC3 of the main side power supply relay board 640 and the connector of the power supply board of the power supply device 252 described using Figure 2.

The sub-side cable support portion 618 has a harness insertion hole 618a through which the harness (wiring) can be inserted to connect the sub-side power relay board first connector SVC1 to the sub-side power relay board fourth connector SVC4 to the connector of the power board of the power supply device 252 described with reference to FIG. 2.

<Reel relay board unit>
Next, the reel relay board unit 700 will be described in detail.

Figure 37(a) is a front view of the reel relay board unit 700 as viewed from the front side, (b) is a side view of the reel relay board unit 700 as viewed from the right side, and (c) is an exploded side view of the components that make up the reel relay board unit 700 as viewed from the right side.

The reel relay board unit 700 is composed of a plate-shaped sheet metal member 710, a main reel relay board unit 740 arranged on the right side of the sheet metal member 710 when viewed from the front, and a sub reel relay board unit 770 arranged on the left side of the sheet metal member 710 when viewed from the front.

The main reel relay board unit 740 and the sub reel relay board unit 770 are arranged at a predetermined distance on the sheet metal member 710, and a space 790 is formed between the main reel relay board unit 740 and the sub reel relay board unit 770.

<Reel relay board unit/Main reel relay board unit>
Next, the main reel relay board unit 740 will be described.

The main side reel side relay board unit 740 is composed of a main side reel relay board 742, a main side housing body 744 that is L-shaped in a side view and can house a part of the main side reel side relay board 742, and a main side cover body 746 that is arranged to cover the surface of the main side reel relay board 742.

<Reel relay board unit/Main side reel relay board unit relay board>
Next, the main side reel relay board 742 will be described with reference to Figure 38. Figure 38(a) is a front view of the main side reel relay board 742 as viewed from the front side, Figure 38(b) is a plan view of the main side reel relay board 742 as viewed from above, and Figure 38(c) is a bottom view of the main side reel relay board 742 as viewed from the bottom side.

The main side reel relay board 742 is composed of a base material 748 made of a rectangular plate-like body, and a main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 to a main side reel relay board seventh connector MRC7 arranged on one side surface 748a (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "front surface" or "component surface") of this base material 748.

Main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 to main side reel relay board seventh connector MRC7 are arranged on the surface 748a of the base material 748, and although not shown, various ICs, resist layers, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conductive parts (vias, through holes), silk printing, etc. are also formed.

On the other hand, no components are mounted on the other surface 748b of the base material 748 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "back surface" or "solder surface"), on which a solid ground pattern is formed, and two screws 750 are attached to secure the main reel relay board first connector MRC1 from the back surface 748b side.

The main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 (second connector) is a female connector having a complementary shape to the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 (first connector; see FIG. 30, etc.) of the main side power supply relay board 640, which is a male connector, and can be directly attached to and detached from the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1. Note that the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 is not limited to a female connector, and may be a male connector or another type of connector.

As shown in FIG. 38(a), at both the left and right ends of the main reel relay board first connector MRC1, screw holes 750 are formed into which screws 754 can be inserted to fix the main reel relay board 742 to the sheet metal member 710.

The main side reel relay board second connector MRC2 is a connector to which the harness connected to the left reel 110 is connected, the main side reel relay board third connector MRC3 is a connector to which the harness connected to the middle reel 111 is connected, and the main side reel relay board fourth connector MRC4 is a connector to which the harness connected to the right reel 112 is connected.

In this example, the main side reel relay board second connector MRC2, main side reel relay board third connector MRC3, and main side reel relay board fourth connector MRC4 are arranged at a predetermined interval on the surface 748a of the substrate 748 along the longitudinal direction of the substrate 748. The distance indicated by the symbol L1 in FIG. 38(b) indicates the shortest distance from the main side reel relay board second connector MRC2, main side reel relay board third connector MRC3, and main side reel relay board fourth connector MRC4 to the outer edge 748c on one side of the short side of the substrate 748.

<Reel relay board unit/Main side reel relay board unit/Main side housing body>
Next, the main container 744 and the main cover 746 will be described with reference to FIGS.

Figure 39 (a) is a front view of the main side housing 744 as viewed from the front side, (b) is a plan view of the main side housing 744 as viewed from above, and (c) is a front perspective view of the main side housing 744 as viewed diagonally from above the front.

The main side housing 744 is a member arranged to cover the back surface 748b of the main side reel relay board 742 and a portion of the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1. In this example, it is configured with a connector housing section 744a consisting of a box-shaped body capable of housing a portion of the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1, and a board housing section 744b consisting of a dish-shaped body that protrudes from the lower end of the connector housing section 744a in a direction perpendicular to the connector housing section 744a.

On the front surface of the connector housing 744a, there are formed, on each of the left and right sides as viewed from the front, a protrusion 744c made of a rod-shaped body that can be inserted into the housing through-hole 716b (see FIG. 41(a)) formed in the plate-shaped member 710, a screw hole 744d into which a screw 754 (see FIG. 37(a) etc.) can be inserted for fixing the main-side reel-side relay board 742 to the plate-shaped member 710, and an attachment protrusion 744e made of a rod-shaped body to which the main-side cover 746 is attached.

The board storage section 744b has a plate-shaped protruding piece 744f that protrudes downward from the bottom surface, and two lid engagement pieces 744g that protrude from the front surface of the board storage section 744b at a predetermined distance.

Figure 40 (a) is a front view of the main side cover 746 as viewed from the front side, (b) is a plan view of the main side cover 746 as viewed from above, and (c) is a front perspective view of the main side cover 746 as viewed from diagonally above the front.

The main side cover 746 is a member arranged to cover the surface 748a of the main side reel relay board 742, and in this example, is composed of a base portion 746a made of a plate-like body, a housing attachment portion 746b formed to protrude upward on both longitudinal sides of the base portion 746a, two housing engagement claws 746c formed to protrude downward from one short side of the base portion 746a as a base end, and a harness holding portion 746d formed to protrude outward in the longitudinal direction from one longitudinal end of the base portion 746a as a base end.

The base portion 746a is formed with multiple connector openings 746e that allow the main side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to the main side reel relay board seventh connector MRC7 to be exposed to the outside when the surface 748a of the main side reel relay board 742 is covered by the main side cover 746.

The container attachment portion 746b is a box-shaped body having a space capable of accommodating the attachment protrusion 744e of the main container 744, and a screw hole 746f is formed on the front surface thereof through which a screw 756 (see Figures 37(a), 43(b), etc.) can be inserted for attaching the main lid 746 to the main container 744. The container engagement claw 746c is a portion that can engage with the lid engagement piece 744g of the main container 744.

The lid engagement piece 744g of the main side accommodating body 744 is engaged with this accommodating body engagement claw 746c, and the mounting protrusion 744e of the main side accommodating body 744 is accommodated in the accommodating body mounting portion 746b. The accommodating body mounting portion 746b and the mounting protrusion 744e are fastened together with screws 756 (see Figures 37(a) and 43(b)), thereby fixing the main side lid 746 to the main side accommodating body 744.

<Reel relay board unit/sheet metal parts>
Next, the sheet metal member 710 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

Figure 41 (a) is a front view of the sheet metal member 710 as viewed from the front side, (b) is a plan view of the sheet metal member 710 as viewed from above, and (c) is a rear view of the sheet metal member 710 as viewed from the rear side.

The sheet metal member 710 is composed of a base portion 712 made of a rectangular plate-like body, and an outer wall 714 erected on one side in the thickness direction of the base portion 712 (the back side) with the outer edges of the four sides of the base portion 712 as base ends.

On the right side of the base portion 712 when viewed from the front, there is provided a main unit attachment portion 716 to which the main reel relay board unit 740 can be attached, and on the left side of the base portion 712 when viewed from the front, there is provided a sub unit attachment portion 718 to which the sub reel relay board unit 770 can be attached. Note that since the sub unit attachment portion 718 has almost the same shape as the main unit attachment portion 716, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The main unit attachment portion 716 is configured with an opening 716a through which the main reel relay board 742 of the main reel relay board unit 740 and a part of the main housing 744 can be inserted, a housing through hole 716b through which a protrusion 744c (see FIG. 39(a) etc.) formed on the front surface of the main housing 744 can pass, a screw hole 716c through which a screw 754 (see FIG. 37(a) etc.) for fixing the main reel relay board 742 to the sheet metal member 710 can be inserted, and a protruding piece 716d formed to protrude forward from the lower edge of the opening 716a as a base end.

<Positioning of reel relay board unit/main side housing body>
Next, a method of positioning the main housing 744 relative to the sheet metal member 710 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 42 (a) is a front view of the main-side housing 744 fitted into the sheet metal member 710, as seen from the front side, (b) is a rear view of the main-side housing 744 fitted into the sheet metal member 710, as seen from the rear side, and (c) is a side view showing how the main-side housing 744 is attached to the sheet metal member 710.

First, insert the board accommodation portion 744b of the main-side accommodation body 744 from the rear side to the front side of the opening 716a of the main-side unit mounting portion 716 so as to slide over the upper surface of the protruding piece 716d of the main-side unit mounting portion 716 of the sheet metal member 710.

According to this example, a protrusion (protruding piece 716d) is formed at the mounting position (main side unit mounting portion 716) of the mounting member (sheet metal member 710) which protrudes in at least one direction (from the back side to the front side of sheet metal member 710) of the first direction (from the back side to the front side of sheet metal member 710) and the second direction (from the front side to the back side of sheet metal member 710) with a part of the mounting member as a base end. This makes it possible to facilitate positioning of the board case (main side housing 744) relative to the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), and also makes it possible to support the board case (main side housing 744) by the protrusion (protruding piece 716d), thereby improving work efficiency when mounting the board case (main side housing 744) to the mounting member (sheet metal member 710). In addition, the board case (main-side housing 744) can be smoothly guided to the mounting position (main-side unit mounting portion 716), improving work efficiency when mounting the board case (main-side housing 744) to the mounting member (sheet metal member 710).

Then, the protrusions 744c formed on both the left and right sides of the front surface of the main-side housing 744 are inserted through the housing through-holes 716b formed in the plate-shaped member 710 from the rear surface side of the plate-shaped member 710, and the front surface of the board housing portion 744b of the main-side housing 744 is brought into contact (surface contact) with the upper rear surface 716a1, the right rear surface 716a2, and the left rear surface 716a3 of the opening 716a of the sheet metal member 710 as viewed from the front, and the front surface of the protruding piece 744f of the main-side housing 744 is brought into contact (surface contact) with the lower rear surface 716a4 of the opening 716a of the sheet metal member 710 as viewed from the front, so that the main-side housing 744 is positioned relative to the sheet metal member 710.

That is, the through hole 716b for the container in the plate-shaped member 710 and the outer edge of the opening 716a in the plate-shaped member 710 (the back surface 716a1 on the upper side when viewed from the front, the back surface 716a2 on the right side when viewed from the front, the back surface 716a3 on the left side when viewed from the front, and the back surface 716a4 on the lower side when viewed from the front) function as parts for positioning the main side container 744 relative to the sheet metal member 710.

In this example, when the convex portion (projection portion 744c) of the first member (main side housing 744) is fitted into the hole (housing through hole 716b) of the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), the first member (main side housing 744) is positioned relative to the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), so that the positioning of the first member can be performed quickly and reliably, and work efficiency can be improved.

In addition, when the first member (main side housing 744) is positioned at the mounting position (main side unit mounting portion 716) of the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), the protrusion (protrusion piece 744f) of the first member is configured to contact the mounting member to restrict movement of the first member. Therefore, the protrusion (protrusion piece 744f) contacting the mounting member (sheet metal member 710) makes it easier to position the first member (main side housing 744) relative to the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), and the board case (main side housing 744) can be stably attached to the mounting member.

In addition, when the first member (main side housing 744) is positioned at the mounting position (main side unit mounting portion 716) of the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), at least a portion of the first member is in surface contact with the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), thereby restricting the movement of the first member in the first direction (from the back side to the front side of the sheet metal member 710). Therefore, when the first member (main side housing 744) is attached to the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), the movement of the first member (main side housing 744) is restricted, which makes it easier to attach the first member (main side housing 744) to the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), and the board case (main side housing 744) can be stably attached to the mounting member (sheet metal member 710).

When the main side container 744 is positioned relative to the sheet metal member 710, the main side container 744 is supported by the container through hole 716b of the plate-shaped member 710 and held at a position higher than the protruding piece 716d of the sheet metal member 710, so that the main side container 744 and the protruding piece 716d of the sheet metal member 710 are not in contact with each other.

According to this example, when the board case (main side housing 744) is positioned at the mounting position (main side unit mounting portion 716) of the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), the board case is configured not to come into contact with a part of the mounting member (the lower edge of the opening 716a of the main side unit mounting portion 716) and the protruding portion (protruding piece 716d). This makes it possible to reduce the contact area between the board case (main side housing 744) and the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), and to prevent the board case (main side housing 744) and the mounting member (sheet metal member 710) from being scratched or damaged.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the main side housing 744 may be configured so that when the main side housing 744 is attached to the sheet metal member 710, the main side housing 744 and the protruding piece 716d of the sheet metal member 710 are not in contact with each other.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 42(b), the width w1 in the left-right direction in plan view of the board accommodation portion 744b of the main side accommodation body 744 is shorter than the width w2 in the left-right direction in plan view of the lower side of the opening 716a of the sheet metal member 710, so that when the main side accommodation body 744 is positioned relative to the sheet metal member 710, the outer edge in the left-right direction in plan view of the main side accommodation body 744 and the opening 716a of the sheet metal member 710 are not in contact. This makes it possible to prevent the main side accommodation body 744 from being scratched or damaged due to contact with the sheet metal member 710, etc.

When the main side housing 744 is positioned relative to the sheet metal member 710, the screw holes 744d formed on both the left and right sides of the front of the main side housing 744 match the positions of the screw holes 716c formed in the sheet metal member 710, and the screws 754 for fixing the main side reel side relay board 742 to the sheet metal member 710 can be inserted through both the sheet metal member 710 and the main side housing 744.

Also, as shown in FIG. 42(c), when the main side housing 744 is positioned relative to the sheet metal member 710, the tip side portion of the board housing portion 744b of the main side housing 744 is located on the front side of the opening 716a of the sheet metal member 710, and the mounting protrusions 744e formed on both the left and right sides of the front side of the connector housing portion 744a are located further forward than the opening 716a of the sheet metal member 710 and protrude (exposed) on the front side of the opening 716a.

On the other hand, the rear end portion of the board accommodating portion 744b and the connector accommodating portion 744a cannot pass through the opening 716a of the sheet metal member 710, and are therefore positioned on the rear side of the sheet metal member 710.

In other words, in this example, when the board case (main-side housing 744) is positioned at the mounting position (main-side unit mounting portion 716) of the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), the first member (main-side housing 744) is configured to be restricted from moving in a first direction (from the rear side to the front side of the sheet metal member 710) by the mounting member (sheet metal member 710).

<How to install the reel relay board unit/main side reel relay board>
Next, a method of attaching the main reel relay board 742 to the sheet metal member 710 will be described with reference to Figure 43 (a).

Figure 43 (a) is a side view showing the procedure for attaching the main side housing 744 and the main side reel side relay board 742 to the sheet metal member 710.

When the main side housing 744 is positioned relative to the sheet metal member 710, and the main side reel relay board 742 is housed in the main side housing 744 (or when the main side housing 744 is positioned relative to the sheet metal member 710 with the main side reel relay board 742 housed in the main side housing 744), both the main side housing 744 and the main side reel relay board 742 are positioned relative to the sheet metal member 710.

When the main side housing 744 and the main side reel relay board 742 are positioned relative to the sheet metal member 710, the screw holes 750 formed on both the left and right sides of the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 match the positions of both the screw holes 744d of the main side housing 744 and the screw holes 716c of the sheet metal member 710, allowing the screws 754 for fixing the main side reel side relay board 742 to the sheet metal member 710 to be inserted through all of the sheet metal member 710, the main side housing 744, and the main side reel relay board 742.

With the main side housing 744 and the main side reel relay board 742 positioned relative to the sheet metal member 710, the screws 754 are inserted and fastened from the rear side of the sheet metal member 710 through the screw holes 750 of the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 of the main side reel relay board 742, the screw holes 744d of the main side housing 744, and the screw holes 716c of the sheet metal member 710, in that order, thereby fixing the main side housing 744 and the main side reel relay board 742 to the sheet metal member 710, as shown in Figures 43(a) and 37(a).

When the main side container 744 and the main side reel relay board 742 are attached to the sheet metal member 710, as shown in FIG. 43(b), the main side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to the main side reel relay board seventh connector MRC7 of the main side reel relay board 742 are located on the front side of the opening 716a of the sheet metal member 710, while the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 of the main side reel relay board 742 is located on the back side of the sheet metal member 710.

In this example, by fixing the first connector (main side reel relay board first connector MRC1) to the mounting member (sheet metal member 710) with screws 754, it is possible to prevent the first connector (main side reel relay board first connector MRC1) from coming loose when attaching or detaching the first connector and the second connector (main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1), and it is possible to stably maintain the connection between the first connector and the second connector.

In addition, in this example, when the board case (main-side housing 744, main-side cover 746) housing the first board (main-side reel-side relay board 742) is positioned at the mounting position (main-side unit mounting portion 716) of the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), the first connector (main-side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to main-side reel relay board seventh connector MRC7) is disposed at the portion of the first board exposed on the other side of the mounting member (front side of sheet metal member 7100), so that harnesses and the like can be easily attached and detached to the first connectors, improving convenience for the worker.

In addition, in this example, when the board case (main-side housing 744, main-side cover 746) housing the first board (main-side reel-side relay board 742) is positioned at the mounting position (main-side unit mounting portion 716) of the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), a second connector (main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1) is disposed at a portion of the first board located on one side of the mounting member (back side of sheet metal member 710), and the second connector is configured to be directly connectable to a third connector (main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1) provided on another board (main-side reel relay board 742) different from the first board when the mounting member is mounted at a predetermined position on the gaming machine. Therefore, by attaching and detaching the mounting member to a predetermined position on the gaming machine, Since the first connector (main reel relay board first connector MRC1) and the third connector (main power relay board first connector MVC1) can be attached and detached, the second connector (main reel relay board first connector MRC1) and the third connector (main power relay board first connector MVC1) can be easily attached and detached, improving the convenience of the worker, and by fixing the mounting member, the connection between the second connector (main reel relay board first connector MRC1) and the third connector (main power relay board first connector MVC1) can be prevented from coming loose, and the connection between the second connector (main reel relay board first connector MRC1) and the third connector (main power relay board first connector MVC1) can be stably maintained.

<Installation of reel relay board unit/main side cover>
Next, a method of attaching the main side cover 746 to the main side container 744 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 43 (b) is a side view showing the procedure for attaching the main side cover 746 to the sheet metal member 710 to which the main side housing 744 and the main side reel side relay board 742 are attached.

When the main side housing 744 and the main side reel relay board 742 are positioned relative to the sheet metal member 710 (or when the main side housing 744 and the main side reel relay board 742 are fixed to the sheet metal member 710 with the screws 754), the housing engagement claw 746c of the main side lid 746 is engaged with the lid engagement piece 744g of the main side housing 744, and the mounting protrusion 744e of the main side housing 744 is accommodated in the housing mounting portion 746b of the main side lid 746, and these housing mounting portions 746b and mounting protrusions 744e are fastened with the screws 756, thereby fixing the main side lid 746 to the main side housing 744.

In other words, the main side lid body 746 is not fixed directly to the sheet metal member 710, but is configured to be fixed to the main side container 744 which is fixed to the sheet metal member 710, and the main side lid body 746 is held by the main side container 744 (the movement of the main side lid body 746 is restricted by the main side container 744).

In other words, in this example, when the board case (main-side container 744, main-side lid 746) is positioned at the mounting position of the mounting member (sheet metal member 710), the second member (main-side lid 746) is configured to be restricted from moving in the second direction (from the front side to the back side of the sheet metal member 710) by the mounting member (sheet metal member 710).

Conventional board cases are made up of multiple components, and because the multiple components are fixed together using screws or the like, if the screws or the like come loose, this affects all of the components, causing the entire board case to come loose. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is possible to restrict the first component of the board case from moving in a first direction, and it is also possible to restrict the second component of the board case from moving in a second direction opposite to the first direction. Therefore, even if a malfunction occurs in one of the components that make up the board case, it is possible to prevent this from affecting all of the components that make up the board case, and the board housed in the board case can be reliably protected.

In this example, the container engagement claw 746c of the main side lid 746 is engaged with the container engagement piece 744g of the main side container 744, and the container attachment portion 746b of the main side lid 746 is accommodated in the attachment protrusion 744e of the main side container 744, so that the main side lid 746 is engaged with the main side container 744. This makes it possible to prevent the main side lid 746 from coming off the main side container 744, even if the container attachment portion 746b and the attachment protrusion 744e are not fastened with the screw 756, thereby improving convenience.

<Reel relay board unit/Sub-reel relay board unit>
Next, the sub-reel relay board unit 770 will be described with reference to Figure 37.

The sub-side reel relay board unit 770 is composed of a sub-side reel relay board 772, a sub-side housing body 774 that is L-shaped in a side view and can house a portion of the main-side reel relay board 772, and a sub-side cover body 776 that is arranged to cover the surface of the sub-side reel relay board 772.

The main structures of the sub-side container 774 and the sub-side cover 776 are almost the same as those of the main-side container 744 and the main-side cover 746, respectively, so a detailed description of them will be omitted and only the sub-side reel relay board 772 will be described below.

<Reel relay board unit/sub-side reel relay board unit relay board>
Next, the sub-reel relay board 772 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 44 is a plan view showing the main reel relay board 742 and the sub reel relay board 772 side by side. Note that the description of the same configuration as the main reel relay board 742 described using Figure 38 will be omitted.

The sub-side reel relay board 772 is composed of a base material 778 made of a rectangular plate-like body, and a sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 to a sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7 arranged on one side 778a (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "front side" or "component side") of this base material 778.

On the surface 778a of the substrate 778, the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 to the sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7 are arranged, and various ICs, resist layers, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conductive parts (vias, through holes), silk printing, etc. are also formed.

On the other hand, no components are mounted on the other surface of the substrate 778 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "back surface" or "solder surface"), a solid ground pattern is formed, and two screws (not shown) are attached to secure the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 from the back surface side.

The sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 (second connector) is a female connector having a complementary shape to the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 (see FIG. 30, etc.) of the sub-side power supply relay board 670, which is a male connector, and can be directly attached to and detached from the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1. Note that the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 is not limited to a female connector, and may be a male connector or another type of connector.

The sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2 is a connector to which the harness connected to the left reel 110 is connected, the sub-side reel relay board third connector SRC3 is a connector to which the harness connected to the middle reel 111 is connected, and the sub-side reel relay board fourth connector SRC4 is a connector to which the harness connected to the right reel 112 is connected.

In this example, the sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2, the sub-side reel relay board third connector SRC3, and the sub-side reel relay board fourth connector SRC4 are arranged at a predetermined interval on the surface 778a of the substrate 778 along the longitudinal direction of the substrate 778. The distance indicated by the symbol L2 in FIG. 44 indicates the shortest distance from the sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2, the sub-side reel relay board third connector SRC3, and the sub-side reel relay board fourth connector SRC4 to the outer edge 778c on one side of the shorter side of the substrate 778.

In this example, the shortest distance L2 from the sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2, the sub-side reel relay board third connector SRC3, and the sub-side reel relay board fourth connector SRC4 to the outer edge 778c on one side of the short side of the substrate 778 is shorter than the shortest distance L1 from the main-side reel relay board second connector MRC2, the main-side reel relay board third connector MRC3, and the main-side reel relay board fourth connector MRC4 to the outer edge 748c on one side of the short side of the substrate 748 (L1>L2).

In other words, in this example, the first connector (main side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to main side reel relay board fourth connector MRC4) and the second connector (sub side reel relay board second connector SRC2 to sub side reel relay board fourth connector SRC4) are arranged offset from their respective longitudinal extensions. Therefore, even if the first wiring connected to the first connector and the second wiring connected to the second connector are guided to the same space (for example, space 790 shown in FIG. 45), the first wiring and the second wiring are prevented from overlapping in the space, and the first wiring and the second wiring can be concentrated in the space, allowing the state of the first wiring and the second wiring to be easily and reliably visually confirmed.

<Reel relay board unit/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine including a first board (for example, the main-side reel relay board 742 and the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a board case capable of accommodating the first board (for example, the main-side housing 744 and the main-side lid 746 shown in FIG. 41). The board case is configured to have at least a first member (for example, the main-side housing 744 shown in FIG. 39) and a second member (for example, the main-side lid 746 shown in FIG. 40), and includes an attachment member to which the board case can be attached (for example, the sheet metal part shown in FIG. 41). a mounting member 710) configured so that, when the board case is positioned at the mounting position of the mounting member (e.g., main unit mounting portion 716 of sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41(a)), movement of the first member in a first direction (e.g., from the back side to the front side of sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41) can be restricted by the mounting member, and the second member is configured so that it can be attached to the first member from a second direction (e.g., from the front side to the back side of sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), and the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions.

Conventional board cases are made up of multiple components, and because the multiple components are fixed together using screws or the like, if the screws or the like come loose, this affects all of the components, causing the entire board case to come loose. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is possible to restrict the first component of the board case from moving in a first direction, and it is also possible to restrict the second component of the board case from moving in a second direction opposite to the first direction. Therefore, even if a malfunction occurs in one of the components that make up the board case, it is possible to prevent this from affecting all of the components that make up the board case, and the board housed in the board case can be reliably protected.

Also, the game machine may be configured to include a second board (e.g., the main side power supply relay board 640 or the sub side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), the first board having a first connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), and the second board having a second connector (e.g., the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32), and to allow the first connector and the second connector to be attached and detached when the mounting member is attached and detached to and from a predetermined position on the game machine with the board case attached to the mounting member.

With this configuration, the first connector and the second connector can be attached and detached by attaching and detaching the attachment member to a predetermined position on the gaming machine, making it easier to attach and detach the first connector and the second connector and increasing convenience for the worker. In addition, by fixing the attachment member, it is possible to prevent the first connector and the second connector from coming loose, and the connection between the first connector and the second connector can be stably maintained.

The first connector may also be fixed to the mounting member using a fixing means (e.g., the screw 754 shown in Figure 37 or Figure 43 (a)).

With this configuration, by fixing the first connector to the mounting member, it is possible to prevent the first connector and the second connector from coming loose when the first connector and the second connector are attached or detached, and the connection between the first connector and the second connector can be stably maintained.

The first member may be attached to the mounting member from one side thereof (e.g., the back side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), and the second member may be attached to the first member on the other side thereof (e.g., the front side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), the first direction being the direction from the one side of the mounting member to the other side, and the second direction being the direction from the other side of the mounting member to the one side, and the first connector and the second connector may be connected by attaching the mounting member to the specified position.

With this configuration, even if the fixation between the first member and the second member becomes loose, the fixation between the mounting member and the first member is not affected, so the fixation between the mounting member and the first member can be stably maintained and the substrate can be reliably protected.

The first member may have a convex portion (e.g., protrusion 744c shown in FIG. 42(a) or a notch portion not shown), and the mounting member may have a hole into which the convex portion of the first member can fit (e.g., through hole 716b for a container shown in FIG. 42(a)), and when the convex portion of the first member is fitted into the hole of the mounting member, the first member may be positioned relative to the mounting member.

This configuration allows the first member to be positioned quickly and reliably, improving work efficiency.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (for example, the main side reel relay board 742 and the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a board case capable of accommodating the first board (for example, the main side container 744 and the main side cover 746 shown in FIG. 37), and the board case is configured to have at least a first member (for example, the main side container 744 shown in FIG. 39) and a second member (for example, the main side cover 746 shown in FIG. 40), and an attachment member to which the board case can be attached (for example, the board shown in FIG. 41) The gaming machine has a first member that covers at least a portion of one side of the first board (e.g., the back surface 748b of the main side reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44), and the first member has a protrusion (e.g., the protruding piece 744f shown in FIG. 39). When the first member is positioned at the mounting position of the mounting member (e.g., the main side unit mounting portion 716 of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), the protrusion of the first member comes into contact with the mounting member, thereby restricting the movement of the first member.

In the game machine according to this embodiment, the protrusion that contacts the mounting member makes it easy to position the first member relative to the mounting member, and the circuit board case can be stably attached to the mounting member.

In addition, in a state where the board case is positioned at the mounting position of the mounting member (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the mounting member is configured to be able to restrict movement of the first member in a first direction (e.g., from the rear side to the front side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), and in the first state, the second member is configured to be able to be attached to the first member from a second direction (e.g., from the front side to the rear side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), and the first direction and the second direction may be opposite directions.

Conventional board cases are made up of multiple components, and because the multiple components are fixed together using screws or the like, if the screws or the like come loose, this affects all of the components, causing the entire board case to come loose. However, with this configuration, it is possible to restrict the first component of the board case from moving in a first direction, and it is also possible to restrict the second component of the board case from moving in a second direction opposite to the first direction. Therefore, even if a malfunction occurs in one of the components that make up the board case, it is possible to prevent this from affecting all of the components that make up the board case, and the boards housed in the board case can be reliably protected.

In addition, in the first state, the protruding portion of the first member (e.g., protruding piece 744f shown in FIG. 39) may be configured to be able to come into surface contact with the mounting member.

With this configuration, the protrusion that comes into surface contact with the mounting member makes it easier to position the first member relative to the mounting member, and the board case can be stably attached to the mounting member.

Furthermore, in the first state, the first member may be configured not to come into contact with a part of the mounting member.

This configuration reduces the contact area between the board case and the mounting member, preventing the board case and mounting member from being scratched or damaged.

In addition, in the first state, at least a portion of the first member may be in surface contact with the mounting member (for example, the outer edge of the opening 716a of the plate-like member 710 shown in FIG. 42(a) (the back surface 716a1 on the upper side when viewed from the front, the back surface 716a2 on the right side when viewed from the front, the back surface 716a3 on the left side when viewed from the front, and the back surface 716a4 on the lower side when viewed from the front)), thereby restricting the movement of the first member in the first direction.

With this configuration, movement of the first member is restricted when the first member is attached to the mounting member, making it easier to attach the first member to the mounting member and allowing the board case to be stably attached to the mounting member.

In addition, a second board (for example, the main side power supply relay board 640 or the sub side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32) is provided, the first board is provided with a first connector (for example, the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), the second board is provided with a second connector (for example, the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32), and the first member is provided on one side of the mounting member (for example, the The second member is attached to the mounting member from the other side of the mounting member (for example, the front side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), the first direction is the direction from the one side of the mounting member to the other side, and the second direction is the direction from the other side of the mounting member to the one side, and the first connector and the second connector may be configured to be connected by attaching the mounting member to a predetermined position.

With this configuration, even if the fixation between the first member and the second member becomes loose, the fixation between the mounting member and the first member is not affected, so the fixation between the mounting member and the first member can be stably maintained and the substrate can be reliably protected.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (e.g., the main side reel relay board 742 and the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a board case capable of accommodating the first board (e.g., the main side container 744 and the main side lid body 746 shown in FIG. 37), and the board case is configured to have at least a first member (e.g., the main side container 744 shown in FIG. 39) and a second member (e.g., the main side lid body 746 shown in FIG. 40), and is equipped with an attachment member to which the board case can be attached (e.g., the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), and the board case is attached to the attachment position of the attachment member (e.g., the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41). In a state where the first member is positioned on the main unit mounting portion 716 of the sheet metal member 710 (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the first member is configured to be restricted from moving in a first direction (for example, from the back side to the front side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41) by the mounting member, the second member is configured to be mountable to the first member from a second direction (for example, from the front side to the back side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), the first direction and the second direction are opposite directions, and the mounting member has a protrusion (for example, the protruding piece 716d shown in FIG. 41(a)) that can guide the circuit board case.

Conventional board cases are made up of multiple components, and because the multiple components are fixed together using screws or the like, if the screws or the like become loose, all of the components are affected, causing the entire board case to become loose. However, with the game machine according to this embodiment, it is possible to restrict the first component of the board case from moving in a first direction, and it is possible to restrict the second component of the board case from moving in a second direction opposite to the first direction. Therefore, even if a malfunction occurs in one of the components that make up the board case, it is possible to avoid affecting all of the components that make up the board case, and it is possible to reliably protect the board housed in the board case. In addition, a protrusion is formed at the mounting position of the mounting member, protruding in at least one of the first and second directions from a part of the mounting member as a base end, so that it is possible to easily position the board case relative to the mounting member, and it is possible to support the board case by the protrusion, which improves the work efficiency when mounting the board case to the mounting member.

The protrusion is a portion that protrudes in the first direction (for example, from the rear side to the front side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41) with a portion of the mounting member as a base end, and the first state may be a state in which the board case is positioned at the mounting position by moving the board case in the first direction toward the mounting position of the mounting member.

This configuration allows the board case to be smoothly guided to the mounting position, improving work efficiency when attaching the board case to the mounting member.

In addition, when the board case is attached to the mounting position of the mounting member, the board case may be configured so that it does not come into contact with a part of the mounting member (for example, a part of the opening 716a of the main unit mounting portion 716 shown in FIG. 41) and the protrusion.

This configuration reduces the contact area between the board case and the mounting member, preventing the board case and mounting member from being scratched or damaged.

Also, a second board (for example, the main side power supply relay board 640 or the sub side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32) is provided, the first board is provided with a first connector (for example, the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), the second board is provided with a second connector (for example, the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32), and the first member is provided with one side of the mounting member (for example, the The second member is attached to the mounting member from the rear side of the mounting member (e.g., the front side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), and the second member is attached to the first member on the other side of the mounting member (e.g., the front side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), the first direction is the direction from the one side of the mounting member to the other side, and the second direction is the direction from the other side of the mounting member to the one side, and the first connector and the second connector may be connected by attaching the mounting member to the specified position.

With this configuration, even if the fixation between the first member and the second member becomes loose, the fixation between the mounting member and the first member is not affected, so the fixation between the mounting member and the first member can be stably maintained and the substrate can be reliably protected.

The first member may have a protrusion (e.g., protrusion 744c shown in FIG. 42(a)), and the mounting member may have a hole (e.g., container through hole 716b shown in FIG. 42(a)) into which the protrusion of the first member can fit, and when the protrusion of the first member is fitted into the hole of the mounting member, the first member may be positioned relative to the mounting member.

This configuration allows the first member to be positioned quickly and reliably, improving work efficiency.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (e.g., the main side reel relay board 742 and the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44), a second board (e.g., the main side power supply relay board 640 and the sub side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), and a board case capable of accommodating the first board (e.g., the main side container 744 and the main side cover 746 shown in FIG. 37), and the first board is connected to a first connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 and the sub side reel relay board first connector MRC2 shown in FIG. 44). SRC1), the second board has a second connector (for example, the main power relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub power relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32), and has an attachment member (for example, the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41) to which the board case can be attached, the attachment member is a member that is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming table, and is configured so that when the attachment member is removed from the predetermined position with the board case attached to the attachment member, the first connector and the second connector are removed.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, the first connector and the second connector can be attached and detached by attaching and detaching the attachment member to a predetermined position on the gaming machine, which makes it easier to attach and detach the first connector and the second connector and increases convenience for the worker. In addition, by fixing the attachment member, it is possible to prevent the connection between the first connector and the second connector from coming loose, and the connection between the first connector and the second connector can be stably maintained.

The board case is configured to have at least a first member (e.g., the main side container 744 shown in FIG. 39) and a second member (e.g., the main side cover 746 shown in FIG. 40). In a state where the board case is positioned at the mounting position (e.g., the main side unit mounting portion 716 of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41) of the mounting member (e.g., the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41) (hereinafter referred to as the "first state"), the first member is configured to be restricted from moving in a first direction (e.g., from the back side to the front side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41) by the mounting member. In the first state, the second member is configured to be mountable to the first member from a second direction (e.g., from the front side to the back side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), and the first direction and the second direction may be opposite directions.

Conventional board cases are made up of multiple components, and because the multiple components are fixed together using screws or the like, if the screws or the like come loose, this affects all of the components, causing the entire board case to come loose. However, with this configuration, it is possible to restrict the first component of the board case from moving in a first direction, and it is also possible to restrict the second component of the board case from moving in a second direction opposite to the first direction. Therefore, even if a malfunction occurs in one of the components that make up the board case, it is possible to prevent this from affecting all of the components that make up the board case, and the boards housed in the board case can be reliably protected.

The second board may be movably attached to an attachment portion (e.g., the main board accommodating portion 612 or the sub-side board accommodating portion 614 of the board support 610 shown in FIG. 32), and the second board may be configured to be movable relative to the attachment portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board.

Conventionally, connectors that are movable themselves have been mainstream, and there have been problems with the connector wearing out as the number of times it is inserted and removed increases. However, with this configuration, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board, and it is possible to prevent the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins.

The first member may be attached to the mounting member from one side thereof (e.g., the back side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), and the second member may be attached to the first member on the other side thereof (e.g., the front side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), the first direction being the direction from the one side of the mounting member to the other side, and the second direction being the direction from the other side of the mounting member to the one side, and the first connector and the second connector may be connected by attaching the mounting member to the specified position.

With this configuration, even if the fixation between the first member and the second member becomes loose, the fixation between the mounting member and the first member is not affected, so the fixation between the mounting member and the first member can be stably maintained and the substrate can be reliably protected.

The first member may have a protrusion (e.g., protrusion 744c shown in FIG. 42(a)), and the mounting member may have a hole into which the protrusion of the first member can fit (e.g., through hole 716b for a container shown in FIG. 42(a)), and when the protrusion of the first member is fitted into the hole of the mounting member, the first member may be positioned relative to the mounting member.

This configuration allows the first member to be positioned quickly and reliably, improving work efficiency.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine that includes a first board (e.g., the main-side reel relay board 742 and the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a board case that can accommodate the first board (e.g., the main-side container 744 and the main-side cover 746 shown in FIG. 37), and includes an attachment member (e.g., the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41) to which the board case can be attached. The gaming machine is in a state where the board case is positioned at the attachment position of the attachment member (hereinafter, the "first state"). In this "state", at least a portion of the board case (e.g., the main housing 744 shown in FIG. 39) is in surface contact with the outer edge of the opening 716a of the plate-like member 710 shown in FIG. 42(a) (the back surface 716a1 on the upper side as viewed from the front, the back surface 716a2 on the right side as viewed from the front, the back surface 716a3 on the left side as viewed from the front, and the back surface 716a4 on the lower side as viewed from the front)), and is configured to be restricted from moving in a certain direction (e.g., from the front side to the back side of the plate-like member 710 shown in FIG. 41).

The gaming machine according to this embodiment makes it possible to easily position the board case relative to the mounting member, and to stably attach the board case to the mounting member. In addition, because at least a portion of the board case is in surface contact with the mounting member, it makes it possible to easily position the board case relative to the mounting member, and to stably attach the board case to the mounting member.

The board case may be configured to have at least a first member (e.g., the main side housing 744 shown in FIG. 39) and a second member (e.g., the main side cover 746 shown in FIG. 40), the first member being a member that covers at least a portion of one side of the first board (e.g., the back surface 748b of the main side reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44), the second member being a member that covers at least a portion of the other side of the first board (e.g., the front surface 748a of the main side reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44), and being a member that can be attached to the first member, and in the first state, at least a portion of the first member may be in surface contact with the attachment member, thereby restricting the movement of the first member in the certain direction.

With this configuration, the movement of the first member is restricted, making it easier to position the board case relative to the mounting member and allowing the board case to be stably attached to the mounting member.

The first member is configured to have a first portion (e.g., connector accommodating portion 744a shown in FIG. 39) that covers at least a portion of the surface on one side of the first board, and a second portion (e.g., board accommodating portion 744b shown in FIG. 39) that extends vertically from the first portion as a base end, and in a state in which the board case in which the first board is accommodated is positioned at the mounting position of the mounting member (hereinafter referred to as the "second state"), at least a portion of the second portion is in surface contact with the surface on one side of the mounting member (e.g., the surface on the back side of sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), and at least a portion of the first portion and at least a portion of the first board are exposed on the other side of the mounting member (e.g., the front side of sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), and the second member may be attached to the first portion of the first member on the other side of the mounting member.

This configuration allows the second member to be easily attached to and detached from the first member, improving operational efficiency.

In addition, a first connector (for example, the main side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to the main side reel relay board seventh connector MRC7 shown in FIG. 44) may be provided in a portion of the first board exposed on the other side of the mounting member (for example, the front side of the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41) in the second state.

This configuration allows the harness and other components to be easily attached and detached from the first connector, improving convenience for the worker.

In addition, a second connector (e.g., main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 shown in FIG. 44) is provided at a portion of the first board located on one side of the mounting member in the second state (e.g., the back side of sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 41), and the second connector may be configured to be directly connectable to a third connector (e.g., main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 shown in FIG. 32) provided on another board different from the first board when the mounting member is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine.

With this configuration, the second connector and the third connector can be attached and detached by attaching and detaching the attachment member to a specified position on the gaming machine, making it easier to attach and detach the second connector and the third connector and increasing convenience for the worker. In addition, by fixing the attachment member, it is possible to prevent the connection between the second connector and the third connector from coming loose, and the connection between the second connector and the third connector can be stably maintained.

<Summary of power relay board unit and reel relay board unit>
As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine including a first board (for example, the main side reel relay board 742 and the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (for example, the main side power supply relay board 640 and the sub side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), and the first board includes a first connector (for example, the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 and the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44). and a second connector (e.g., main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32) that can be connected to the connector of the first board, the second board being movably attached to an attachment portion (e.g., main board accommodating portion 612 or sub side board accommodating portion 614 of the board support 610 shown in FIG. 32), and the second board being configured to be movable relative to the attachment portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board.

Conventionally, connectors that are movable themselves have been mainstream, and there was a problem that the connector would wear out if it was inserted and removed frequently. However, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector on the first board and the second connector on the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board, and it is possible to prevent the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins.

In addition, the second connector that is connected board-to-board on the second board tends to have a large number of pins, which makes the connector larger. Therefore, if only the large connector moves, there is a high risk of damaging the board or causing poor contact, but by moving the entire second board, a stable connection can be achieved.

The mounting portion may have a storage space capable of storing the second substrate (e.g., a space formed by a bottom surface 620 and an outer wall 622 as shown in FIG. 34), and the second substrate may be configured to be movable relative to the mounting portion in the storage space of the mounting portion.

With this configuration, the second board can be moved freely within the mounting portion's storage space, allowing the connectors to be connected smoothly.

The second substrate may have an opening (e.g., through hole 642c shown in FIG. 32), and the mounting portion may have a protrusion (e.g., board loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32) that can pass through the opening of the second substrate, and the outer diameter of the protrusion is smaller than the inner diameter of the opening of the second substrate, so that the opening of the second substrate does not come into contact with the protrusion within a range in which the second substrate can move relative to the mounting portion (e.g., a range in which the second substrate can move due to a gap formed between outer wall 622 shown in FIG. 34 and the second substrate, in other words, a range in which the second substrate can move without being elastically deformed by the pressing portion 630 (630a to 630d) shown in FIG. 32 being pressed by the second substrate).

With this configuration, the second board can be moved freely within the range in which the protrusion of the second board can move in the opening of the mounting part, allowing the connectors to be connected smoothly.

The second substrate may be configured so that the protruding portion of the second substrate does not come into contact with the opening of the mounting portion even when the second substrate is moved relative to the mounting portion.

With this configuration, even if the second board is moved repeatedly, wear and damage to the opening of the second board and the protruding part of the mounting part can be prevented.

The opening may be a circular portion, the protrusion may be made of a cylindrical member, and the second substrate may be configured to be movable up, down, left, and right relative to the mounting portion.

With this configuration, the size of the opening formed in the second substrate can be minimized, and the limited mounting surface of the second substrate can be effectively utilized.

The protrusion has a screw hole (e.g., mounting screw 646 shown in FIG. 36(b)) into which a screw can be attached, and is configured so that when the opening of the second board is passed through the protrusion of the mounting part and the screw is attached to the protrusion, and the second board is moved relative to the mounting part, the second board can come into contact with the head of the screw (e.g., head (flange) 646a shown in FIG. 36(a)), and a solid ground pattern can be formed in the area of the second board that can come into contact with the head.

This configuration allows the second board to move while preventing it from coming off the mounting portion, and also prevents the wiring pattern formed on the second board from being damaged even if the second board is moved with the head of the screw in contact with the second board.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (e.g., the main side reel relay board 742 and the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (e.g., the main side power supply relay board 640 and the sub side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), and the first board has a first connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 and the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), and the second board has a second connector that can be connected to the first connector (e.g., the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 and the sub side power supply relay board first connector SRC2 shown in FIG. 32). The game machine has a main board SVC1, the second board is movably attached to an attachment portion (for example, the main board housing portion 612 or the sub-side board housing portion 614 of the board support 610 shown in FIG. 32), the second board is configured to be movable relative to the attachment portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the attachment portion has a restricting portion (for example, the restricting piece 628 (628a, 628b) or the board loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32), and the restricting portion is configured to be able to restrict movement different from the movement when the second board is attached after the second board is attached.

Conventionally, connectors that are movable themselves have been mainstream, and there has been a problem in that the connector wears out as the number of times the connector is inserted and removed increases. However, with the gaming machine according to this embodiment, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board, and it is possible to prevent the connectors from being connected while their positions are misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. In addition, since it is provided with a restricting portion that can restrict movement different from the movement when the second board is attached after the second board is attached, it is possible to prevent the second board from coming off the attachment portion.

The mounting portion may have a protrusion (e.g., board loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32) that can pass through the opening of the second board, and the protrusion may have a screw hole (e.g., mounting screw 646 shown in FIG. 36(b)) into which a screw can be attached, and when the opening of the second board is passed through the protrusion of the mounting portion and the screw is attached to the protrusion, a part of the protrusion and the head of the screw may be located above one side of the second board.

With this configuration, even if the second board is moved relative to the mounting portion, contact between the second board and the head of the screw can be avoided, preventing deterioration and wear of the second board and allowing the second board to be moved smoothly.

The head of the screw may be configured to be positioned above the one surface of the second substrate regardless of the position the second substrate moves to inside the mounting portion's storage space (e.g., the space formed by the bottom surface 620 and the outer wall 622 shown in FIG. 34).

With this configuration, no matter where the second substrate is moved to, contact between the second substrate and the head of the screw can be avoided, preventing deterioration and wear of the second substrate and allowing the second substrate to be moved smoothly.

The outer diameter of the protrusion may be smaller than the inner diameter of the opening of the second substrate, and the opening of the second substrate may be configured not to come into contact with the protrusion within a range in which the second substrate can move relative to the mounting portion.

With this configuration, the second board can be moved freely within the range in which the protrusion of the second board can move in the opening of the mounting part, allowing the connectors to be connected smoothly.

The opening may be a circular portion, the protrusion may be made of a cylindrical member, and the second substrate may be configured to be movable up, down, left, and right relative to the mounting portion.

With this configuration, the size of the opening formed in the second substrate can be minimized, and the limited mounting surface of the second substrate can be effectively utilized.

In addition, when the opening of the second substrate is inserted through the protrusion of the mounting part and the screw is attached to the protrusion, the second substrate is configured to be able to come into contact with the head of the screw (e.g., head (flange) 646a shown in FIG. 36(b)) when the second substrate is moved relative to the mounting part, and a solid ground pattern may be formed in the area of the second substrate that can come into contact with the head.

This configuration allows the second board to move while preventing it from coming off the mounting portion, and also prevents the wiring pattern formed on the second board from being damaged even if the second board is moved with the head of the screw in contact with the second board.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine having a first board (e.g., the main side reel relay board 742 or the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (e.g., the main side power supply relay board 640 or the sub side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), the first board having a first connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), the second board having a second connector connectable to the first connector (e.g., the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32), and the second board has an attachment portion (e.g., the board support 61 shown in FIG. 32). The second board is movably attached to the mounting portion (main board housing portion 612 and sub-side board housing portion 614 of FIG. 30), and when the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board are connected, the second board is configured to be movable relative to the mounting portion, and the mounting portion has a restricting portion (for example, restricting pieces 628 (628a, 628b) and board loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32), and the restricting portion is configured to restrict movement different from the movement when the second board is attached after the second board is attached, and the restricting portion is a restricting piece that protrudes toward the storage space, and the protruding length of the restricting piece is longer than the distance the second board can move in the storage space in the protruding direction of the restricting piece.

Conventionally, connectors that are movable themselves have been mainstream, and there was a problem that the connector would wear out if the number of times the connector was inserted and removed increased. However, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board, and it is possible to prevent the connectors from being connected while their positions are misaligned, and it is possible to avoid wear of the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. In addition, since it is provided with a restricting portion that restricts at least a part of the second board from moving out of the storage space of the mounting portion, it is possible to prevent the second board from coming off the mounting portion. In particular, the restricting portion is a restricting piece that protrudes toward the storage space, and the protruding length of the restricting piece is longer than the distance that the second board can move in the storage space, it is possible to reliably prevent the second board from coming off the mounting portion no matter where the second board is moved to.

The mounting portion may have a storage space capable of storing the second substrate (e.g., a space formed by a bottom surface 620 and an outer wall 622 as shown in FIG. 34), and the second substrate may be configured to be movable relative to the mounting portion in the storage space of the mounting portion.

With this configuration, the second board can be moved freely within the mounting portion's storage space, allowing the connectors to be connected smoothly.

The mounting portion may have an elastic portion that can be elastically deformed (for example, pressing portion 630 (630a to 630d) shown in FIG. 32), the mounting portion may have a first side and a second side opposite the first side, the restricting piece may be formed on the first side, the elastic portion may be formed on the second side, and one end of the second substrate may be engaged with the restricting piece, and the elastic portion may be elastically deformed at the other end of the second substrate to accommodate the second substrate in the accommodation space.

This configuration makes it easier to accommodate the second substrate in the accommodation space, and once accommodated, the second substrate can be held in the accommodation space by the restricting piece and the elastic portion.

The longitudinal length of the restricting piece may be shorter than the longitudinal length of the elastic portion.

With this configuration, the restricting piece is not too long, while the elastic portion has an appropriate length, making it easier to accommodate the second substrate in the accommodation space, and once accommodated, the restricting piece and the elastic portion can hold the second substrate in the accommodation space.

The elastic portion may also constitute part of an outer wall (e.g., wall portion 622 shown in FIG. 34) that forms the storage space.

With this configuration, even if a greater force than expected is applied to the second board due to forceful positioning of the first and second connectors, causing the second board to move significantly relative to the mounting portion, part of the housing space will elastically deform, making it possible to mitigate the impact on the second board.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine that includes a first board (e.g., the main side reel relay board 742 and the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (e.g., the main side power supply relay board 640 and the sub side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), and the first board includes a first connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 and the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), and the second board includes a second connector that can be connected to the first connector (e.g., the main side power supply relay board 640 and the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC2 shown in FIG. 32). The game machine is equipped with a relay board first connector MVC1 and a sub-side power relay board first connector SVC1, the second board is movably attached to an attachment portion (for example, the main board housing portion 612 and the sub-side board housing portion 614 of the board support 610 shown in FIG. 326), the second board is configured to be movable relative to the attachment portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, and the second connector is fixed from one side of the second board using a fixing means (for example, the connector screw 644 shown in FIG. 33).

Conventionally, connectors that are movable themselves have been mainstream, and there has been a problem in that the connector wears out as the number of times the connector is inserted and removed increases. However, with the gaming machine according to this embodiment, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board, and it is possible to prevent the connectors from being connected while their positions are misaligned, and it is possible to avoid wear of the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. In addition, since the second connector is fixed from one side of the second board using a fixing means, even if the first connector and the second connector are repeatedly connected and removed, it is possible to make the second connector less likely to come off the second board, and when the first connector is connected to the second connector, the force applied from the first connector to the second connector can be received by the fixing means, and the connectors can be reliably connected to each other.

The mounting portion may have a storage space capable of storing the second substrate (e.g., a space formed by a bottom surface 620 and an outer wall 622 as shown in FIG. 34), and the second substrate may be configured to be movable relative to the mounting portion in the storage space of the mounting portion.

With this configuration, the second board can be moved freely within the mounting portion's storage space, allowing the connectors to be connected smoothly.

The mounting portion may also have a second protrusion (e.g., board support boss 626 (626a, 626b) shown in FIG. 34) protruding from the bottom surface of the mounting portion, the second board is configured to be movable while in contact with the second protrusion, and a portion of the fixing means may be configured to be accommodated in a space formed between one side surface of the second board and the bottom surface of the mounting portion.

This configuration can reduce the contact area between the second substrate and the mounting portion, reducing friction when the second substrate moves, allowing the second substrate to move smoothly, and can also avoid contact between the fixing means and the mounting portion even when the second substrate is moved relative to the mounting portion.

The fixing means may also be configured to be capable of contacting the second protrusion when the second substrate moves relative to the mounting portion.

With this configuration, even if a greater force than expected is applied to the second board due to forcible positioning of the first and second connectors, causing the second board to move significantly relative to the mounting portion, the fixing means of the second board contacts the second protrusion and restricts the movement of the second board, thereby protecting the second board.

The second substrate may have an opening (e.g., through hole 642c shown in FIG. 32), and the mounting portion may have a protrusion (e.g., substrate loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32) that can pass through the opening of the second substrate, and the outer diameter of the protrusion may be smaller than the inner diameter of the opening of the second substrate, so that the opening of the second substrate does not come into contact with the protrusion within a range in which the second substrate can move relative to the mounting portion.

With this configuration, the second board can be moved freely within the range in which the protrusion of the second board can move in the opening of the mounting part, allowing the connectors to be connected smoothly.

The opening may be a circular portion, the protrusion may be made of a cylindrical member, and the second substrate may be configured to be movable up, down, left, and right relative to the mounting portion.

With this configuration, the size of the opening formed in the second substrate can be minimized, and the limited mounting surface of the second substrate can be effectively utilized.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine having a first board (e.g., the main side reel relay board 742 or the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (e.g., the main side power supply relay board 640 or the sub side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), and the first board has a first connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), and the second board has a second connector (e.g., the main side power supply relay board 640 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC2 shown in FIG. 32) that can be connected to the first connector. The gaming table is characterized in that the second board is movably attached to an attachment portion (for example, the main board housing portion 612 or the sub-side board housing portion 614 of the board support 610 shown in FIG. 32), the second board is configured to be movable relative to the attachment portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the attachment portion has a second protrusion protruding from the bottom surface of the attachment portion, and the second board is configured to be movable while in contact with the second protrusion.

Conventionally, connectors that are movable themselves have been mainstream, and there was a problem that the connector would wear out if the number of times the connector was inserted and removed increased. However, with the gaming machine according to this embodiment, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board, and it is possible to prevent the connectors from being connected while being misaligned, thereby avoiding wear of the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. In addition, the mounting part has a second protruding part that protrudes from the bottom surface of the mounting part, and the second board is configured to be movable while in contact with the second protruding part, so that the contact area between the second board and the mounting part can be reduced, reducing friction when the second board moves, and allowing the second board to move smoothly.

The second protrusion may also have a portion that does not contact the second substrate.

This configuration reduces the contact area between the second substrate and the mounting portion, allowing the second substrate to move smoothly relative to the mounting portion.

In addition, a solid ground pattern may be formed on one side of the second substrate at a position corresponding to the second protrusion, and the area of the ground pattern may be larger than the area in which the second substrate and the second protrusion can contact each other.

With this configuration, the area of the second board that comes into contact with the mounting portion can be used as a ground pattern, making effective use of the limited area of the second board and preventing damage to the wiring pattern, etc., of the second board.

The second protrusion may be a cylindrical portion, and the ground pattern may be circular.

This configuration allows for effective use of the limited area of the second substrate.

The second substrate may have an opening (e.g., through hole 642c shown in FIG. 32), and the mounting portion may have a first protrusion (e.g., substrate loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32) that can pass through the opening of the second substrate, and the outer diameter of the first protrusion is smaller than the inner diameter of the opening of the second substrate, so that the opening of the second substrate does not come into contact with the protrusion within a range in which the second substrate can move relative to the mounting portion.

With this configuration, the second board can be moved freely within the range in which the protrusion of the second board can move in the opening of the mounting part, allowing the connectors to be connected smoothly.

The opening may be a circular portion, the first protrusion may be made of a cylindrical member, and the second substrate may be configured to be movable up, down, left, and right relative to the mounting portion.

With this configuration, the size of the opening formed in the second substrate can be minimized, and the limited mounting surface of the second substrate can be effectively utilized.

The "second board" according to the present invention may include a third connector that can be connected to a connector provided on a third board different from the "first board" according to the present invention. Also, there may be only one "second connector" that can be connected to the "second board" according to the present invention. With this configuration, aligning one connector on the second board may result in misalignment of the second and subsequent connectors, so by connecting only one connector board-to-board, it is possible to easily connect the connectors to each other.

(1) In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (e.g., the main side reel relay board 742 and the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (e.g., the main side power supply relay board 640 and the sub side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), and the first board has a first connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 and the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), and the second board has a second connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC2 and the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC3 shown in FIG. 44) that can be connected to the first connector. 32 ) and the second board is movably attached to an attachment portion (for example, a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-side board accommodating portion 614 of a board support 610 shown in FIG. 32 ), and the second board is configured to be movable relative to the attachment portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, and the second board has an opening (for example, a through hole 642c shown in FIG. 32 ), and the attachment portion is configured to be movable relative to the opening of the second board. The second board has a protrusion (e.g., board loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32 or FIG. 36(b)) corresponding to the second board, and the protrusion has a screw hole (e.g., screw hole 624a shown in FIG. 36(b)) into which a screw (e.g., mounting screw 646 shown in FIG. 36(b)) can be attached, and when the screw is inserted through the opening and attached to the screw hole, the second board has an area in which at least a part of the head of the screw (e.g., head 646a shown in FIG. 36(b)) can come into contact, and an area in which no wiring pattern is formed is formed, and the attachment portion is formed on the second board. This gaming table has a board support portion (e.g., board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) that can contact a plate, and when the second board is attached to the attachment portion, a predetermined space is formed between the second board and the attachment portion by the board support portion, and a second region (e.g., ground pattern 643 shown in FIG. 33) in which no wiring pattern is formed is formed in a position corresponding to the board support portion on the second board, and the range of the second region is wider than the range of the area in which the board support portion and the second board can contact each other corresponding to the second region.

Conventionally, connectors that are movable themselves have been mainstream, and there was a problem that the connector would wear out if the number of times the connector was inserted and removed increased. However, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board, and it is possible to prevent the connectors from being connected while their positions are misaligned, and it is possible to avoid wear of the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. In addition, the second connector that is connected board-to-board on the second board tends to have a large number of pins, and the connector is also large accordingly. Therefore, if only the large connector moves, there is a high risk of damaging the board or causing poor contact, but by moving the entire second board, a stable connection can be achieved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the second board from coming off the mounting part while allowing the second board to move, and it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern formed on the second board from being damaged even if the second board is moved with the head of the screw in contact with the second board. In addition, the contact area between the second board and the mounting portion can be reduced, reducing friction when the second board moves, allowing the second board to move smoothly and preventing damage to the wiring pattern, etc., of the second board.

(2) In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (e.g., the main side reel relay board 742 or the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (e.g., the main side power supply relay board 640 or the sub side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), the first board having a first connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), and the second board having a second connector (e.g., 32 ) and the second board is movably attached to an attachment portion (e.g., a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-side board accommodating portion 614 of a board support 610 shown in FIG. 32 ), and the second board is configured to be movable relative to the attachment portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, and the second board has an opening (e.g., a through hole 642c shown in FIG. 32 ), and the attachment portion has a protrusion corresponding to the opening of the second board. The second board has a protruding portion (e.g., board loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32 or FIG. 36(b)), the protruding portion has a screw hole (e.g., screw hole 624a shown in FIG. 36(b)) into which a screw (e.g., mounting screw 646 shown in FIG. 36(b)) can be attached, and when the screw is inserted through the opening and attached to the screw hole, the second board has an area in which at least a part of the head of the screw (e.g., head 646a shown in FIG. 36(b)) can come into contact, and an area in which no wiring pattern is formed is formed, and the attachment portion is oriented in a first direction (e.g., This gaming machine has a restricting piece (e.g., first restricting piece 628a and second restricting piece 628b shown in FIG. 32) that protrudes from the outer wall 622 as a base end in a direction away from the outer wall 622, or in a direction from the outside to the inside of the main board housing section 612 or the sub board housing section 614, and the restricting piece protrudes in the first direction to restrict the second board from coming off, and the protruding length of the restricting piece (e.g., the length of the part that protrudes from the outer wall 622 with the outer wall 622 as a base end) is longer than the distance that the second board can move in the first direction relative to the attachment section.

Conventionally, connectors that are movable themselves have been mainstream, and there was a problem that the connector would wear out if the number of times the connector was inserted and removed increased. However, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board, and it is possible to prevent the connectors from being connected while their positions are misaligned, and it is possible to avoid wear of the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. In addition, the second connector that is connected board-to-board on the second board tends to have a large number of pins, and the connector is also large accordingly. Therefore, if only the large connector moves, there is a high risk of damaging the board or causing poor contact, but by moving the entire second board, a stable connection can be achieved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the second board from coming off the mounting part while allowing the second board to move, and it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern formed on the second board from being damaged even if the second board is moved with the head of the screw in contact with the second board. Furthermore, no matter where the second board is moved to, it is possible to reliably prevent the second board from coming off the mounting part, and the second board can be moved freely within the storage space of the mounting part, allowing the connectors to be connected smoothly.

(3) In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine having a first board (e.g., the main side reel relay board 742 or the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (e.g., the main side power supply relay board 640 or the sub side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), the first board having a first connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), the second board having a second connector connectable to the first connector (e.g., the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32), and the second board has an attachment portion (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32). a first connector of the first board and a second connector of the second board, the first connector being movably mounted in a first board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-side board accommodating portion 614, the second board being configured to be movable relative to the mounting portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the second board having an opening (e.g., a through hole 642c shown in FIG. 32), the mounting portion having a protrusion (e.g., a board loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32 or FIG. 36(b)) corresponding to the opening of the second board, the protrusion having a screw hole (e.g., a screw hole 624a shown in FIG. 36(b)) into which a screw (e.g., a mounting screw 646 shown in FIG. 36(b)) can be attached, and when the screw is passed through the opening and the screw is attached to the screw hole, the second board has a head of the screw (e.g., a through hole 642c shown in FIG. 32) and a protrusion (e.g., a board loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32) corresponding to the opening of the second board. a head 646a shown in FIG. 32 ) that can come into contact with the second board, and a region where no wiring pattern is formed is formed in the region; the mounting portion has a restricting piece (e.g., a first restricting piece 628a or a second restricting piece 628b shown in FIG. 32 ) that protrudes in a first direction (e.g., a direction away from the outer wall 622 shown in FIG. 32 as a base end, or a direction from the outside of the main board accommodating portion 612 or the sub-board accommodating portion 614 toward the inside), and the restricting piece protrudes in the first direction, thereby restricting the second board from being removed, and a protruding length of the restricting piece (e.g., a length of a portion that protrudes from the outer wall 622 with the outer wall 622 as a base end) is longer than a distance that the second board can move in the first direction relative to the mounting portion; The second board is fixed from one side of the second board using a screw (e.g., connector screw 644 shown in FIG. 33), the mounting portion has a board support portion (e.g., board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) that can contact the second board, and when the second board is attached to the mounting portion, a predetermined space is formed between the second board and the mounting portion by the board support portion, and a part of the screw is configured to be able to be accommodated in the predetermined space, and the second board has a second region (e.g., ground pattern 643 shown in FIG. 33) in which no wiring pattern is formed at a position corresponding to the board support portion, and the range of the second region is wider than the range of the area where the board support portion corresponding to the second region and the second board can contact each other.

Conventionally, connectors that are movable themselves have been mainstream, and there was a problem that the connector would wear out if the number of times the connector was inserted and removed increased. However, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board, and it is possible to prevent the connectors from being connected while their positions are misaligned, and it is possible to avoid wear of the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. In addition, the second connector that is connected board-to-board on the second board tends to have a large number of pins, and the connector is also large accordingly. Therefore, if only the large connector moves, there is a high risk of damaging the board or causing poor contact, but by moving the entire second board, a stable connection can be achieved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the second board from coming off the mounting part while allowing the second board to move, and it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern formed on the second board from being damaged even if the second board is moved with the head of the screw in contact with the second board. In addition, no matter where the second board is moved to, it is possible to reliably prevent the second board from coming off the mounting portion, and the second board can be moved freely within the accommodation space of the mounting portion, allowing smooth connection between the connectors. In addition, the contact area between the second board and the mounting portion can be reduced, reducing friction when the second board moves, allowing the second board to move smoothly, and even when the second board is moved relative to the mounting portion, contact between the screw and the mounting portion can be avoided. In addition, the contact area between the second board and the mounting portion can be reduced, reducing friction when the second board moves, allowing the second board to move smoothly, and preventing damage to the wiring pattern, etc. of the second board.

(4) In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (e.g., the main side reel relay board 742 or the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (e.g., the main side power supply relay board 640 or the sub side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), the first board having a first connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), and the second board having a second connector that can be connected to the first connector (e.g., the main side power supply relay board first connector MRC2 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC3 shown in FIG. 32). The second board has a mounting portion (e.g., a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-side board accommodating portion 614 of a board support 610 shown in FIG. 32) that is movably attached to the mounting portion, and the second board is configured to be movable relative to the mounting portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the second board has an opening (e.g., a through hole 642c shown in FIG. 32), and the mounting portion has a protrusion portion (e.g., a board loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32 or FIG. 36(b)) that corresponds to the opening of the second board, and the protrusion The protruding portion has a screw hole (e.g., screw hole 624a shown in FIG. 36(b)) into which a screw (e.g., mounting screw 646 shown in FIG. 36(b)) can be attached, and when the screw is passed through the opening and attached to the screw hole, the second board has an area with which at least a part of the head of the screw (e.g., head 646a shown in FIG. 36(b)) can come into contact, and an area in which a wiring pattern is not formed is formed, and the second connector is fixed from one side of the second board using a screw (e.g., connector screw 644 shown in FIG. 33), and the attachment portion is capable of contacting the second board. a board support portion (e.g., board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2), a predetermined space is formed between the second board and the mounting portion by the board support portion when the second board is attached to the mounting portion, a part of the screw is configured to be able to be accommodated in the predetermined space, a second region (e.g., ground pattern 643 shown in FIG. 33) in which no wiring pattern is formed is formed in a position corresponding to the board support portion on the second board, and the range of the second region is wider than the range of the area in which the board support portion corresponding to the second region and the second board can come into contact.

Conventionally, connectors that are movable themselves have been mainstream, and there was a problem that the connector would wear out if the number of times the connector was inserted and removed increased. However, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board, and it is possible to prevent the connectors from being connected while their positions are misaligned, and it is possible to avoid wear of the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. In addition, the second connector that is connected board-to-board on the second board tends to have a large number of pins, and the connector is also large accordingly. Therefore, if only the large connector moves, there is a high risk of damaging the board or causing poor contact, but by moving the entire second board, a stable connection can be achieved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the second board from coming off the mounting part while allowing the second board to move, and it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern formed on the second board from being damaged even if the second board is moved with the head of the screw in contact with the second board. In addition, the contact area between the second board and the mounting portion can be reduced, friction during movement of the second board can be reduced, and the second board can be moved smoothly. In addition, even if the second board is moved relative to the mounting portion, contact between the screw and the mounting portion can be avoided. In addition, the contact area between the second board and the mounting portion can be reduced, friction during movement of the second board can be reduced, and the second board can be moved smoothly. In addition, damage to the wiring pattern of the second board can be prevented.

(5) In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (e.g., the main side reel relay board 742 or the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (e.g., the main side power supply relay board 640 or the sub side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), the first board having a first connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), the second board having a second connector that can be connected to the first connector (e.g., the main side power supply relay board 640 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 32). The second board has a first power relay board connector MVC1 or a sub-side power relay board first connector SVC1, and the second board is movably attached to an attachment portion (e.g., a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-side board accommodating portion 614 of a board support 610 shown in FIG. 32 ), and when the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board are connected, the second board is configured to be movable relative to the attachment portion, and the attachment portion is configured to move in a first direction (e.g., a direction away from an outer wall 622 shown in FIG. 32 as a base end, or a direction from the outside of the main board accommodating portion 612 or the sub-side board accommodating portion 614 toward the inside the second board has a restricting piece (e.g., a first restricting piece 628a or a second restricting piece 628b shown in FIG. 32 ) protruding in a first direction, the restricting piece restricts the second board from being removed by protruding in the first direction, a protruding length of the restricting piece (e.g., a length of a portion protruding from the outer wall 622 with the outer wall 622 as a base end) is longer than a distance by which the second board can move in the first direction relative to the attachment portion, the second connector is fixed from one surface of the second board using a screw (e.g., a connector screw 644 shown in FIG. 33 ), and the attachment portion has a board support portion ( For example, the gaming machine has a board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2, and when the second board is attached to the attachment portion, a predetermined space is formed between the second board and the attachment portion by the board support portion, and a part of the screw is configured to be able to be accommodated in the predetermined space, and a second area (for example, ground pattern 643 shown in FIG. 33) in which no wiring pattern is formed is formed in a position corresponding to the board support portion on the second board, and the range of the second area is wider than the range of the area in which the board support portion and the second board can come into contact with each other, which corresponds to the second area.

Conventionally, connectors that are movable themselves have been mainstream, and there was a problem that the connector would wear out if the number of times the connector was inserted and removed increased. However, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the positions of the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the positions can be adjusted by moving the second board, and it is possible to prevent the connectors from being connected while their positions are misaligned, and it is possible to avoid wear of the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. In addition, the second connector that is connected board-to-board on the second board tends to have a large number of pins, and the connector is also large accordingly. Therefore, if only the large connector moves, there is a high risk of damaging the board or causing poor contact, but by moving the entire second board, a stable connection can be achieved. In addition, no matter where the second board is moved to, it is possible to reliably prevent the second board from coming off the mounting part, and the second board can be freely moved within the storage space of the mounting part, and the connectors can be smoothly connected to each other. In addition, the contact area between the second board and the mounting portion can be reduced, friction during movement of the second board can be reduced, and the second board can be moved smoothly. In addition, even if the second board is moved relative to the mounting portion, contact between the screw and the mounting portion can be avoided. In addition, the contact area between the second board and the mounting portion can be reduced, friction during movement of the second board can be reduced, and the second board can be moved smoothly. In addition, damage to the wiring pattern of the second board can be prevented.

(6) In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine including a first board (e.g., the main side reel relay board 742 or the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (e.g., the main side power supply relay board 640 or the sub side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), the first board has a first connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), the second board has a second connector that can be connected to the first connector (e.g., the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32), the second board is movably attached to an attachment portion (e.g., the main board accommodating portion 612 or the sub side board accommodating portion 614 of the board support 610 shown in FIG. 32), and the first connector of the first board and The second board is configured to be movable relative to the mounting portion when the second connector of the second board is connected, the second connector is fixed from one side of the second board using a screw (e.g., connector screw 644 shown in FIG. 33), the mounting portion has a board support portion (e.g., board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) that can contact the second board, and when the second board is attached to the mounting portion, a predetermined space is formed between the second board and the mounting portion by the board support portion, and a part of the screw is configured to be able to be accommodated in the predetermined space, and a second region (e.g., ground pattern 643 shown in FIG. 33) in which no wiring pattern is formed is formed at a position corresponding to the board support portion on the second board, and the range of the second region is wider than the range of the area in which the board support portion corresponding to the second region and the second board can contact each other.

Conventionally, connectors that are movable themselves have been mainstream, and there was a problem that the connector would wear out if the number of times the connector was inserted and removed increased. However, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board, and it is possible to prevent the connectors from being connected while their positions are misaligned, and it is possible to avoid wear of the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. In addition, the second connector that is connected board-to-board on the second board tends to have a large number of pins, and the connector is also large accordingly. Therefore, if only the large connector moves, there is a high risk of damaging the board or causing poor contact, but by moving the entire second board, a stable connection can be achieved. In addition, the contact area between the second board and the mounting part can be reduced, reducing friction when the second board moves, allowing the second board to move smoothly, and even if the second board is moved relative to the mounting part, it is possible to avoid contact between the screw and the mounting part. In addition, the contact area between the second board and the mounting portion can be reduced, reducing friction when the second board moves, allowing the second board to move smoothly, and preventing damage to the wiring pattern, etc., of the second board.

(7) In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (e.g., the main side reel relay board 742 and the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (e.g., the main side power supply relay board 640 and the sub side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), and the first board has a first connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 and the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), and the second board has a first connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 and the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44). The second board has a second connector (e.g., a main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or a sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32) that can be connected to a first connector of the first board, the second board is movably attached to an attachment portion (e.g., a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-side board accommodating portion 614 of a board support 610 shown in FIG. 32), and the second board is configured to be movable with respect to the attachment portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, and the attachment portion is configured to be movable in a first direction (e.g., a first direction 32 ) protruding in a direction away from the outer wall 622 shown in FIG. 32 (a direction from the outside of the main board accommodating section 612 or the sub board accommodating section 614 toward the inside), the restricting piece protruding in the first direction restricts the second board from being removed, and the protruding length of the restricting piece (for example, the length of the part protruding from the outer wall 622 with the outer wall 622 as the base end) is set to a value that is larger than the length of the second board when the second board is movable in the first direction relative to the mounting section. The second connector is fixed from one side of the second board using a screw (e.g., connector screw 644 shown in FIG. 33), the mounting part has a board support part (e.g., board support part 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) that can contact the second board, and when the second board is attached to the mounting part, a predetermined space is formed between the second board and the mounting part by the board support part, and a part of the screw is configured to be able to be accommodated in the predetermined space.

Conventionally, connectors that are movable themselves have been mainstream, and there was a problem that the connector would wear out if the number of times the connector was inserted and removed increased. However, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the positions of the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the positions can be adjusted by moving the second board, and it is possible to prevent the connectors from being connected while their positions are misaligned, and it is possible to avoid wear of the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. In addition, the second connector that is connected board-to-board on the second board tends to have a large number of pins, and the connector is also large accordingly. Therefore, if only the large connector moves, there is a high risk of damaging the board or causing poor contact, but by moving the entire second board, a stable connection can be achieved. In addition, no matter where the second board is moved to, it is possible to reliably prevent the second board from coming off the mounting part, and the second board can be freely moved within the storage space of the mounting part, and the connectors can be smoothly connected to each other. In addition, the contact area between the second substrate and the mounting portion can be reduced, reducing friction when the second substrate moves, allowing the second substrate to move smoothly, and even when the second substrate is moved relative to the mounting portion, contact between the screw and the mounting portion can be avoided.

(8) In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (e.g., the main side reel relay board 742 or the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (e.g., the main side power supply relay board 640 or the sub side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), and the first board has a first connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), and the second board is connectable to the first connector. The second board has a second connector (e.g., a main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or a sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32), the second board is movably attached to an attachment portion (e.g., a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-side board accommodating portion 614 of a board support 610 shown in FIG. 32), and the second board is configured to be movable relative to the attachment portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, and the second board has an opening (e.g., a through hole 642c shown in FIG. 32). The mounting portion has a protrusion (e.g., board loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32 or FIG. 36(b)) corresponding to the opening of the second board, and the protrusion has a screw hole (e.g., screw hole 624a shown in FIG. 36(b)) into which a screw (e.g., mounting screw 646 shown in FIG. 36(b)) can be attached, and when the screw is inserted through the opening and attached to the screw hole, the second board has an area where at least a part of the head of the screw (e.g., head 646a shown in FIG. 36(b)) can come into contact, and a wiring pattern is formed in the area. an area where the second connector is not formed is formed, the second connector is fixed from one side of the second board using a screw (e.g., connector screw 644 shown in FIG. 33), the mounting part has a board support part (e.g., board support part 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) that can contact the second board, and when the second board is attached to the mounting part, a predetermined space is formed between the second board and the mounting part by the board support part, and a part of the screw is configured to be able to be accommodated in the predetermined space.

Conventionally, connectors that are movable themselves have been mainstream, and there was a problem that the connector would wear out if the number of times the connector was inserted and removed increased. However, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board, and it is possible to prevent the connectors from being connected while their positions are misaligned, and it is possible to avoid wear of the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. In addition, the second connector that is connected board-to-board on the second board tends to have a large number of pins, and the connector is also large accordingly. Therefore, if only the large connector moves, there is a high risk of damaging the board or causing poor contact, but by moving the entire second board, a stable connection can be achieved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the second board from coming off the mounting part while allowing the second board to move, and it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern formed on the second board from being damaged even if the second board is moved with the head of the screw in contact with the second board. In addition, the contact area between the second substrate and the mounting portion can be reduced, reducing friction when the second substrate moves, allowing the second substrate to move smoothly, and even when the second substrate is moved relative to the mounting portion, contact between the screw and the mounting portion can be avoided.

(9) In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine having a first board (e.g., the main side reel relay board 742 or the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (e.g., the main side power supply relay board 640 or the sub side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), the first board having a first connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), the second board having a second connector that can be connected to the first connector (e.g., the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32), and the second board is a mounting board. a second board that is movable relative to the mounting portion (e.g., a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-side board accommodating portion 614 of a board support 610 shown in FIG. 32 ), and the second board is configured to be movable relative to the mounting portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the second board has an opening (e.g., a through hole 642c shown in FIG. 32 ), the mounting portion has a protrusion (e.g., a board loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32 or FIG. 36(b) ) corresponding to the opening of the second board, and the protrusion has a screw hole (e.g., a screw hole 624a shown in FIG. 36(b) ) into which a screw (e.g., a mounting screw 646 shown in FIG. 36(b) ) can be attached, and the screw is passed through the opening and into the screw hole. When the screw is attached, the second board has an area where at least a part of the head of the screw (e.g., head 646a shown in FIG. 36(b)) can come into contact, and an area where a wiring pattern is not formed is formed in the area, the attachment portion has a restricting piece (e.g., first restricting piece 628a or second restricting piece 628b shown in FIG. 32) protruding in a first direction (e.g., a direction away from outer wall 622 with outer wall 622 as a base end, a direction from the outside of main board accommodating portion 612 or sub board accommodating portion 614 toward the inside), and the restricting piece protrudes in the first direction, thereby restricting the second board from being removed, and the protruding length of the restricting piece (e.g., a direction away from outer wall 622 with outer wall 622 as a base end) is set to 100 mm. the length of the portion protruding from the mounting portion is longer than the distance the second board can move in the first direction relative to the mounting portion, the mounting portion has a board support portion (e.g., board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) that can contact the second board, and when the second board is attached to the mounting portion, a predetermined space is formed between the second board and the mounting portion by the board support portion, a second region (e.g., ground pattern 643 shown in FIG. 33) in which no wiring pattern is formed is formed in a position corresponding to the board support portion on the second board, and the range of the second region is wider than the range of the region in which the board support portion corresponding to the second region can contact the second board.

Conventionally, connectors that are movable themselves have been mainstream, and there was a problem that the connector would wear out if the number of times the connector was inserted and removed increased. However, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board, and it is possible to prevent the connectors from being connected while their positions are misaligned, and it is possible to avoid wear of the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. In addition, the second connector that is connected board-to-board on the second board tends to have a large number of pins, and the connector is also large accordingly. Therefore, if only the large connector moves, there is a high risk of damaging the board or causing poor contact, but by moving the entire second board, a stable connection can be achieved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the second board from coming off the mounting part while allowing the second board to move, and it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern formed on the second board from being damaged even if the second board is moved with the head of the screw in contact with the second board. Furthermore, no matter where the second board is moved to, it is possible to reliably prevent the second board from coming off the mounting portion, and the second board can be moved freely within the accommodation space of the mounting portion, allowing smooth connection between the connectors. In addition, it is possible to reduce the contact area between the second board and the mounting portion, reducing friction when the second board moves, allowing the second board to move smoothly, and preventing damage to the wiring pattern, etc., of the second board.

(10) In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (e.g., the main side reel relay board 742 or the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (e.g., the main side power supply relay board 640 or the sub side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), the first board having a first connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), the second board having a third connector that can be connected to the first connector. The second board has a second connector (e.g., a main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or a sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32 ), the second board is movably attached to an attachment portion (e.g., a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-side board accommodating portion 614 of a board support 610 shown in FIG. 32 ), and the second board is configured to be movable relative to the attachment portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, and the attachment portion is configured to be movable in a first direction (e.g., an outer wall 622 shown in FIG. 32 as a base end and a second connector of the second board as a base end). 22, and in a direction from the outside of main board accommodating portion 612 or sub board accommodating portion 614 toward the inside. The restricting piece restricts the second board from being removed by protruding in the first direction. The protruding length of the restricting piece (for example, the length of a portion protruding from outer wall 622 with outer wall 622 as a base end) is longer than a distance that the second board can move in the first direction relative to the mounting portion. The mounting portion is configured to contact the second board. This gaming table has a board support portion (e.g., board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2), and when the second board is attached to the attachment portion, a predetermined space is formed between the second board and the attachment portion by the board support portion, and a second region (e.g., ground pattern 643 shown in FIG. 33) in which no wiring pattern is formed is formed in a position corresponding to the board support portion on the second board, and the range of the second region is wider than the range of the area in which the board support portion and the second board can come into contact with each other, which corresponds to the second region.

Conventionally, connectors that are movable themselves have been mainstream, and there was a problem that the connector would wear out if the number of times the connector was inserted and removed increased. However, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the positions of the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the positions can be adjusted by moving the second board, and it is possible to prevent the connectors from being connected while their positions are misaligned, and it is possible to avoid wear of the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. In addition, the second connector that is connected board-to-board on the second board tends to have a large number of pins, and the connector is also large accordingly. Therefore, if only the large connector moves, there is a high risk of damaging the board or causing poor contact, but by moving the entire second board, a stable connection can be achieved. In addition, no matter where the second board is moved to, it is possible to reliably prevent the second board from coming off the mounting part, and the second board can be freely moved within the storage space of the mounting part, and the connectors can be smoothly connected to each other. In addition, the contact area between the second board and the mounting portion can be reduced, reducing friction when the second board moves, allowing the second board to move smoothly, and preventing damage to the wiring pattern, etc., of the second board.

(11) In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine having a first board (e.g., the main side reel relay board 742 or the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) and a second board (e.g., the main side power supply relay board 640 or the sub side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 32), the first board having a first connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 44), the second board having a second connector connectable to the first connector (e.g., the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 32), The second board is movably attached to an attachment portion (e.g., a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-side board accommodating portion 614 of a board support 610 shown in FIG. 32 ), and is configured to be movable relative to the attachment portion when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the second board has an opening (e.g., a through hole 642c shown in FIG. 32 ), the attachment portion has a protrusion (e.g., a board loose-fit boss 624 shown in FIG. 32 or FIG. 36(b) ) corresponding to the opening of the second board, and the protrusion has a screw hole (e.g., a screw hole 624a shown in FIG. 36(b) ) into which a screw (e.g., a mounting screw 646 shown in FIG. 36(b) ) can be attached, and when the screw is inserted through the opening and attached to the screw hole, the second board has an area where at least a portion of the head of the screw (e.g., head 646a shown in FIG. 36(b)) can come into contact, and an area where a wiring pattern is not formed is formed in the area, and the attachment portion has a restricting piece (e.g., first restricting piece 628a or second restricting piece 628b shown in FIG. 32) protruding in a first direction (e.g., a direction away from outer wall 622 shown in FIG. 32 as a base end, or a direction from the outside to the inside of main board accommodating portion 612 or sub board accommodating portion 614), and the restricting piece protruding in the first direction restricts the second board from being removed, The protruding length of the regulating piece (e.g., the length of the portion protruding from the outer wall 622 with the outer wall 622 as the base end) is longer than the distance the second board can move in the first direction relative to the mounting part, the second connector is fixed from one side of the second board using a screw (e.g., connector screw 644 shown in FIG. 33), the mounting part has a board support part (e.g., board support part 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) that can contact the second board, and when the second board is attached to the mounting part, a predetermined space is formed between the second board and the mounting part by the board support part, and a part of the screw is configured to be able to be accommodated in the predetermined space.

Conventionally, connectors that are movable themselves have been mainstream, and there was a problem that the connector would wear out if the number of times the connector was inserted and removed increased. However, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board, and it is possible to prevent the connectors from being connected while their positions are misaligned, and it is possible to avoid wear of the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. In addition, the second connector that is connected board-to-board on the second board tends to have a large number of pins, and the connector is also large accordingly. Therefore, if only the large connector moves, there is a high risk of damaging the board or causing poor contact, but by moving the entire second board, a stable connection can be achieved. In addition, it is possible to prevent the second board from coming off the mounting part while allowing the second board to move, and it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern formed on the second board from being damaged even if the second board is moved with the head of the screw in contact with the second board. Furthermore, no matter where the second board is moved to, it is possible to reliably prevent the second board from coming off the mounting portion, and the second board can be moved freely within the accommodation space of the mounting portion, allowing the connectors to be connected smoothly. In addition, the contact area between the second board and the mounting portion can be reduced, reducing friction when the second board moves, allowing the second board to move smoothly, and even if the second board is moved relative to the mounting portion, contact between the screw and the mounting portion can be avoided.

In addition, in the gaming machines described in (1) to (11) above, the second board may be configured to be movable in an in-plane direction when attached to the mounting portion.

With this configuration, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the second board can be moved in the in-plane direction, making it possible to fine-tune the connectors' positions and preventing the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connectors themselves and damage to the connector pins.

In addition, in the gaming machines described in (1) to (11) above, the second board may have multiple types of components in addition to the second connector (for example, the sub-side power supply relay board second connector SVC2, the sub-side power supply relay board third connector SVC3, the sub-side power supply relay board fourth connector SVC4, the main-side power supply relay board second connector MVC2, and the main-side power supply relay board third connector MVC3 shown in FIG. 32), and the second connector may be taller (having a higher maximum height from the component mounting surface of the board) than the multiple types of components.

With this configuration, when the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board are inserted or removed, it is possible to prevent other components mounted on the second board from coming into contact with the first board, etc., and to prevent damage to the other components mounted on the second board.

<Reel relay board unit/Various harnesses, bundling parts>
Next, various harnesses connected to the reel relay board unit and the bundling section for bundling the harnesses will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 45 is a front view showing the inside of the main body 101, illustrating the connection relationship between the reel relay board unit 700 and the reels 110 to 112.

As explained using FIG. 2, the reel relay board unit 700 is connected to the power relay board unit 600 above the reels 110-112 arranged inside the main body 101. In other words, the three reels 110-112 are located on the back side (below) of the main reel relay board 742 (first board) and the sub reel relay board 772 (second board) of the reel relay board unit 700.

In addition, in this example, the imaginary center line L3 passing through the horizontal center of the reels 110-112 (the center of the middle reel 110) is configured not to coincide with the imaginary center line L4 passing through the horizontal center of the space 790 formed between the main reel relay board 742 (first board) and the sub-side reel relay board 772 (second board) (a position equidistant from the main reel relay board 742 and the sub-side reel relay board 772).

In other words, the positions of the main reel relay board 742 (first board) and the sub reel relay board 772 (second board) are configured to be shifted slightly to the left in the direction in which the reels 110 to 112 are arranged (horizontal direction).

In this example, compared to when the imaginary center line L3 of the reels 110-112 and the imaginary center line L4 of the space 790 are aligned, the position of the harness holding portion 746d (regulating portion) formed on the main side cover 746 of the main side reel relay board unit 740 can be brought closer to the imaginary center line L3 passing through the horizontal center of the reels 110-112 (the center of the middle reel 110). This makes it easier to handle the harnesses connecting the main side reel relay board 742 (first board) and the sub side reel relay board 772 (second board) to the reels 110-112, allows the harnesses to be concentrated in the space, and prevents the harnesses from becoming disjointed in length, resulting in lower costs.

A first binding part 781 and a second binding part 782 capable of holding multiple harnesses are arranged on the top of the left reel housing 110a in which the left reel 110 is rotatably housed, and a third binding part 783 and a fourth binding part 784 capable of holding multiple harnesses are arranged on the top of the middle reel housing 111a in which the middle reel 111 is rotatably housed. It goes without saying that the number and arrangement of binding parts capable of holding harnesses are not limited to this example.

The first binding part 781 and the second binding part 782 are made of an expandable cable tie, and both ends are fixed to the upper surface of the left reel housing 110a. The harness can be held by pulling the center part upward and passing the harness through the gap formed below. In this example, the first binding part 781 is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is aligned with the front-to-rear direction of the front door 102, while the second binding part 782 is arranged so that its longitudinal direction is aligned with the left-to-right direction of the front door 102.

The third binding part 783 and the fourth binding part 784 are made of an expandable cable tie, both ends of which are fixed to the upper surface of the middle reel housing 111a, and the harness can be held by pulling the center part upward and passing the harness through the gap formed below. In this example, the third binding part 783 is disposed so that its longitudinal direction is aligned with the front-to-rear direction of the front door 102, while the fourth binding part 784 is disposed so that its longitudinal direction is aligned with the left-to-right direction of the front door 102.

The main side first harness MHN1 is a harness for connecting the main side reel relay board second connector MRC2 of the main side reel relay board 742 (first board) to the motor, index, etc. of the left reel 110. This main side first harness MHN1 is guided downwards of the main side reel relay board unit 740 through the harness holding section 746d (regulating section) formed on the main side cover 746 of the main side reel relay board unit 740, with the main side reel relay board second connector MRC2 as its base end, and then connected to the connector (not shown) of the left reel 110 through the left reel harness guide port 110b while being held by the fourth bundling section 784 above the middle reel 111 and the first bundling section 781 above the left reel 110.

The main side second harness MHN1 is a harness for connecting the main side reel relay board third connector MRC3 of the main side reel relay board 742 (first board) to the motor, index, etc. of the middle reel 111. This main side second harness MHN2 is guided from the main side reel relay board third connector MRC3 to the bottom of the main side reel relay board unit 740 through the harness holding portion 746d (regulating portion) of the main side cover body 746, and then connected to the connector (not shown) of the middle reel 111 through the middle reel harness guide port 111b while being held by the fourth bundling portion 784 above the middle reel 111.

The main side third harness MHN3 is a harness for connecting the main side reel relay board fourth connector MRC4 of the main side reel relay board 742 (first board) to the motor, index, etc. of the right reel 112. This main side third harness MHN3 is guided downwards of the main side reel relay board unit 740, passing through the harness holding portion 746d (regulating portion) of the main side cover body 746, with the main side reel relay board fourth connector MRC4 as its base end, and then connected to the connector (not shown) of the right reel 112 through the right reel harness guide port 112b while being held by the fourth bundling portion 784 above the middle reel 111.

The sub-side first harness SHN1 is a harness for connecting the sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2 of the sub-side reel relay board 772 (second board) to the motor, index, etc. of the left reel 110. This sub-side first harness SHN1 is guided from the sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2 to the bottom of the main-side reel relay board unit 740 through the harness holding portion 746d (regulating portion) of the main-side cover 746, and then connected to the left reel 110 (not shown) through the left reel harness guide port 110b while being held by the second bundling portion 782 above the left reel 110.

The sub-side second harness SHN1 is a harness for connecting the sub-side reel relay board third connector MRC3 of the sub-side reel relay board 772 (second board) to the motor, index, etc. of the middle reel 111. This sub-side second harness SHN2 is guided from the sub-side reel relay board third connector SRC3 to the bottom of the main-side reel relay board unit 740 through the harness holding portion 746d (regulating portion) of the main-side cover 746, and then connected to the middle reel 111 (not shown) through the middle reel harness guide port 111b while being held by the second bundling portion 782 above the left reel 110.

The sub-side third harness SHN3 is a harness for connecting the sub-side reel relay board fourth connector SRC4 of the sub-side reel relay board 772 (second board) to the motor, index, etc. of the right reel 112. This sub-side third harness SHN3 is guided downwards to the main-side reel relay board unit 740, passing through the harness holding section 746d (regulating section) of the main-side cover 746, with the sub-side reel relay board fourth connector SRC4 as its base end, and then connected to the right reel 112 (not shown) through the right reel harness guide port 112b while being held by the second bundling section 782 above the left reel 110 and the third bundling section 783 above the middle reel 111.

As mentioned above, in this example, the positions of the main reel relay board 742 (first board) and the sub reel relay board 772 (second board) are configured to be slightly shifted to the left in the direction in which the reels 110 to 112 are arranged (horizontal direction), so the left reel harness guide port 110b, middle reel harness guide port 111b, and right reel harness guide port 112b are also slightly shifted to the left relative to the positions of the main reel relay board 742 (first board) and the sub reel relay board 772 (second board).

In this example, compared to when the virtual center line L3 of the reels 110-112 and the virtual center line L4 of the space 790 are aligned, the route of the harness connecting the main reel relay board 742 (first board) and the sub reel relay board 772 (second board) to the reels 110-112 can be changed, which may make it easier to handle the harness.

In addition, in this example, the maximum width of the gap formed between the harness holding portion 746d (regulating portion) of the main side cover body 746 and the sub side cover body 776 is made shorter than the longitudinal length of the smallest connector among the connectors of the main side reel relay board 742 (first board) and the sub side reel relay board 772 (second board).

According to this example, even if the harness becomes unintentionally detached from the connector, it may be possible to prevent the harness connector from falling downward through the gap formed between the harness holding portion 746d (restraint portion) and the sub-side cover body 776, thereby preventing problems associated with the harness becoming detached.

The fourth main side harness MHN4 is a harness for connecting the fifth main side reel relay board connector SRC5 of the main side reel relay board 742 (first board) to the main control board 210a (see Figure 2).

The sub-side fourth harness SHN4 to the sub-side sixth harness SHN6 are harnesses for connecting the sub-side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 to the sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7 of the sub-side reel relay board 772 (second board) to the sub-control board 220a (see Figure 2), respectively.

According to this example, the other side (the back side of the main side reel relay board 742 or the sub side reel relay board 772) of the first board (main side reel relay board 742) and the second board (sub side reel relay board 772) is provided with portions (first bundling portion 781 to fourth bundling portion 784) for bundling the first wiring (main side first harness MHN1 to main side third harness MHN3) and the second wiring (sub side first harness SHN1 to sub side third harness SHN3). The first wiring and the second wiring that are guided to the other side (the back side of the main reel relay board 742 or the sub reel relay board 772) of the first board (main reel relay board 742) and the second board (sub reel relay board 772) can be bundled downstream (near the reels 110 to 112 to which they are connected), which prevents the first wiring and the second wiring from becoming disorganized and allows the state of the first wiring and the second wiring to be reliably visually confirmed.

In addition, since the first wiring (main side first harness MHN1 to main side third harness MHN3) and the second wiring (sub side first harness SHN1 to sub side third harness SHN3) are provided with a restricting portion (harness holding portion 746d) capable of restricting the positioning of the first wiring (main side reel relay board 742) and the second board (sub side reel relay board 772) in an area other than the space portion formed between the first board (main side reel relay board 742) and the second board (sub side reel relay board 772), the first wiring and the second wiring can be concentrated in the space portion 790 (the space formed between the main side reel relay board 742 and the sub side reel relay board 772), and the state of the first wiring and the second wiring can be easily and reliably visually confirmed. In addition, the amount of wiring protruding to one side of the first board and the second board can be minimized, and space for other wiring can be created, and in addition, it is possible to prevent a movable body such as a door from contacting the first wiring or the second wiring, and it is possible to prevent unnecessary burden from being placed on the first wiring or the second wiring.

In addition, because the restricting portion (harness holding portion 746d) is provided in the board case (main side lid body 746), the restricting portion can be positioned close to the first wiring and the second wiring, minimizing the amount of wiring protruding to one side of the first board and the second board, and creating space for other wiring, etc.

In addition, the restricting portion (harness holding portion 746d) is provided on the board case (main side lid body 746) and is a portion that protrudes toward the space portion (space portion 790). Therefore, even if the restricting portion is provided, the board case does not become larger than necessary, which allows for space saving. In addition, the restricting portion can be positioned near the first wiring and the second wiring, which minimizes the amount of wiring that protrudes to one side of the first board and the second board, creating space for other wiring, etc.

In addition, the first wiring (main side first harness MHN1 to main side third harness MHN3) and the second wiring (sub side first harness SHN1 to sub side third harness SHN3) are connected to electronic components (motors and indexes of reels 110 to 112) on the other side (the back side of main side reel relay board 742 and sub side reel relay board 772) of the first board (main side reel relay board 742) and the second board (sub side reel relay board 772). This allows the first wiring and the second wiring to be connected to electronic components arranged on the other side of the first board and the second board, and allows the first wiring and the second wiring to be connected to electronic components via the shortest route, minimizing the length of the first wiring and the second wiring.

In addition, the first reel wiring (main side first harness MHN1 to main side third harness MHN3) connected to each of the multiple reels is connected as a first wiring to one side of the first board (front surface 748a of the main side reel relay board 742), and the second reel wiring (sub side first harness SHN1 to sub side third harness SHN3) connected to each of the multiple reels is connected as a second wiring to one side of the second board (front surface 778a of the sub side reel relay board 772), and the first reel wiring and the second reel wiring pass through the space to the first board. Since the first wiring and second wiring are guided to the other side (the back side of the main reel relay board 742 or the sub reel relay board 772) of the first board and the second board (the main reel relay board 742 or the sub reel relay board 772), the first wiring and the second wiring can be connected to the reels arranged on the other side of the first board and the second board, and the first wiring and the second wiring can be connected to the reels, which are often arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, via the shortest route, minimizing the length of the reel wiring and allowing the connection status of the wiring to each reel to be easily confirmed, improving convenience for the worker.

In addition, the first board (main side reel relay board 742) is connected to the first control unit (main control board 210a) via a connector (main side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5) arranged on one end side of the first board, and is connected to the first wiring (main side first harness MHN1 to main side third harness MHN3) via a connector (main side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to main side reel relay board fourth connector MRC4) arranged on the other end side of the first board, and the second board (sub side reel relay board 772) is connected to the first control unit (main control board 210a) via a connector (main side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 to sub side The reel is connected to the second control unit (sub-control board 220a) via the seventh reel relay board connector SRC7) and to the second wiring (first sub-side harness SHN1 to third sub-side harness SHN3) via connectors (second sub-side reel relay board connector SRC2 to fourth sub-side reel relay board connector SRC4) located on the other end of the second board, making it easier to distinguish between the wiring to the control unit and the wiring to the reels, improving convenience for the worker, and allowing the reels, which are often located on the front side of the gaming machine, to be connected to the first wiring and second wiring via the shortest route, minimizing the length of the wiring for the reels.

<Reel relay board unit/Various harnesses, bundling parts/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first board (for example, the main reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44 or 45), a second board (for example, the sub-reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44 or 45), and a board case (for example, the main side housing body 744 and the main side cover body 746 shown in FIG. 37(a), or the sub side housing body 774 and the sub side cover body 776 shown in FIG. 37(a)). In the gaming machine having the above-mentioned, at least first wiring (main side first harness MHN1 to main side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected to one side surface of the first board (for example, surface 748a on the front side of the main side reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44), and second wiring (sub side first harness MHN1 to main side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected to one side surface of the above-mentioned second board (for example, surface 778a on the front side of the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44). a sub-side third harness SHN3) are connected to the first board and the second board, the first wiring is guided through the space to the opposite side of the face of the first board to which the first wiring is connected (for example, the back side of the main-side reel relay board 742), the second wiring is guided through the space to the opposite side of the face of the second board to which the second wiring is connected (for example, the back side of the sub-side reel relay board 772), and is guided through the space to the other side of the first board and the second board, and the gaming machine is provided with a restriction portion (for example, the harness holding portion 746d shown in FIG. 40 or FIG. 45) that can restrict the first wiring and the second wiring guided to the space from being positioned in an area other than the space.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment is provided with a restricting portion that can restrict the first wiring and the second wiring from being positioned in an area other than the space portion formed between the first board and the second board, so that the first wiring and the second wiring can be concentrated in the space portion, and the state of the first wiring and the second wiring can be easily and reliably visually confirmed. In addition, the amount of wiring protruding to one side of the first board and the second board can be minimized, creating space for other wiring, etc., and preventing movable objects such as doors from coming into contact with the first wiring and the second wiring, thereby preventing unnecessary strain on the first wiring and the second wiring.

The restricting portion may also be provided on the substrate case.

With this configuration, the restricting portion can be positioned close to the first wiring and the second wiring, minimizing the amount of wiring protruding to one side of the first board and the second board, creating space for other wiring, etc.

The first wiring and the second wiring may also be connected to electronic components (e.g., motors and indexes of reels 110 to 112 shown in Figures 2 and 45) on the opposite sides of the first board and the second board.

With this configuration, the first wiring and the second wiring can be connected to electronic components arranged on the other side of the first board and the second board, and the first wiring and the second wiring can be connected to the electronic components via the shortest route, minimizing the length of the first wiring and the second wiring.

Also, the device may include a plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110-112 shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 45), and a first reel wiring (main side first harness MHN1 to main side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) connected to each of the plurality of reels as the first wiring is connected to one side of the first board, and a second reel wiring (sub side first harness SHN1 to sub side third harness SHN3 shown in FIG. 45) connected to each of the plurality of reels as the second wiring is connected to one side of the second board, and the first reel wiring and the second reel wiring guided to the space may be guided through the space to the opposite side of the first board and the second board.

With this configuration, the first wiring and the second wiring can be connected to the reels arranged on the other side of the first board and the second board, and the reels, which are often arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, can be connected to the first wiring and the second wiring via the shortest route. This minimizes the length of the reel wiring and makes it easy to check the connection status of the wiring to each reel, improving convenience for the worker.

It also includes a first control unit (for example, the main control board 210a shown in FIG. 2) and a second control unit (for example, the sub-control board 220a shown in FIG. 2), and the first board and the second board are arranged horizontally above the reel, and the first board is connected to the first control unit via a connector arranged on one end side of the first board (for example, the main side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 shown in FIG. 44 and FIG. 45), and is connected to a connector arranged on the other end side of the first board (for example, the main side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to the main side connector MRC3 shown in FIG. 44 and FIG. 45). The second board may be connected to the first wiring via a connector arranged on one end of the second board (for example, the sub-side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 to the sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7 shown in Figures 44 and 45), and may be connected to the second control unit via a connector arranged on the other end of the second board (for example, the sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2 to the sub-side reel relay board fourth connector SRC4 shown in Figures 44 and 45).

This configuration makes it easier to distinguish between the wiring to the control unit and the wiring to the reels, improving convenience for the worker, and also allows the reels, which are often placed on the front side of the gaming machine, to be connected to the first and second wiring via the shortest route, minimizing the length of the wiring for the reels.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine that includes a first board (e.g., the main reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44 or FIG. 45), a second board (e.g., the sub-reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44 or FIG. 45), and a board case (e.g., the main side container 744 and the main side cover 746 shown in FIG. 37(a), or the sub-side container 774 and the sub-side cover 776 shown in FIG. 37(a)), and one side of the first board (e.g., the main side reel center board shown in FIG. 44) At least a first wiring (main side first harness MHN1 to main side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected to a surface (748a) on the front side of the relay board 742) via a first connector (for example, the main side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to the main side reel relay board fourth connector MRC4 shown in FIG. 44 or 45), and a second connector (for example, the sub side reel intermediate connector MRC1 shown in FIG. 44 or 45) is connected to a surface (778a) on one side of the second board) on the front side of the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. At least the second wiring (the sub-side first harness SHN1 to the sub-side third harness SHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected via the sub-side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 to the sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7, the first board and the second board are arranged with a space (for example, the space 790 shown in FIG. 37(a) and FIG. 45) between them, the first wiring is guided through the space to the opposite side of the surface of the first board to which the first wiring is connected (for example, the back side of the main-side reel relay board 742), and the second wiring A portion of the wire passes through the space and is guided to the opposite side of the surface of the second board to which the second wiring is connected (for example, the back side of the sub-reel relay board 772), the outer shape of the first connector is rectangular, the outer shape of the second connector is rectangular, and the position on the extension line of the long side of the first connector and the position on the extension line of the long side of the second connector are offset from each other (the first connector and the second connector are arranged offset from each other's positions on the longitudinal extension lines).

In the gaming machine according to this embodiment, the first connector and the second connector are arranged offset from each other's longitudinal extensions. Therefore, even if the first wiring and the second wiring are guided to the same space, the first wiring and the second wiring are prevented from overlapping in the space, and the first wiring and the second wiring can be concentrated in the space, allowing the state of the first wiring and the second wiring to be easily and reliably visually confirmed.

The longitudinal direction of the first connector may be a direction from the connection position of the first connector toward the space, and the longitudinal direction of the second connector may be a direction from the connection position of the second connector toward the space.

With this configuration, even if the first wiring and the second wiring are guided to the same space, the first wiring and the second wiring can be prevented from overlapping in the space, the first wiring and the second wiring can be concentrated in the space, and the state of the first wiring and the second wiring can be easily and reliably visually confirmed.

The device may also be provided with a restricting portion (e.g., harness holding portion 746d shown in Figures 40 and 45) that can restrict the first wiring and the second wiring guided into the space from being positioned in an area other than the space.

With this configuration, since the first wiring and the second wiring are provided with a restricting portion capable of restricting the positioning of the first wiring and the second wiring in an area other than the space portion formed between the first board and the second board, the first wiring and the second wiring can be concentrated in the space portion, and the state of the first wiring and the second wiring can be easily and reliably visually confirmed. In addition, the amount of wiring protruding to one side of the first board and the second board can be minimized, creating space for other wiring, etc., and it is possible to prevent a movable body such as a door from coming into contact with the first wiring or the second wiring, and to prevent unnecessary strain on the first wiring or the second wiring.

The restricting portion may also be provided on the substrate case.

With this configuration, the restricting portion can be positioned close to the first wiring and the second wiring, minimizing the amount of wiring protruding to one side of the first board and the second board, creating space for other wiring, etc.

The first wiring and the second wiring may also be connected to electronic components (e.g., the motors and indexes of reels 110 to 112 shown in Figures 2 and 45) on the opposite sides of the first and second substrates.

With this configuration, the first wiring and the second wiring can be connected to electronic components arranged on the other side of the first board and the second board, and the first wiring and the second wiring can be connected to the electronic components via the shortest route, minimizing the length of the first wiring and the second wiring.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (e.g., the main side reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44 and FIG. 45) and a board case capable of accommodating the first board (e.g., the main side container 744 and the main side cover 746 shown in FIG. 37), and at least a plurality of first wirings (main side first harness MHN1 to main side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) are connected to one side surface of the first board (e.g., the front surface 748a of the main side reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44), and the first The wiring passes over a certain side of the first board and is guided to the opposite side of the face of the first board to which the first wiring is connected (for example, the back side of the main reel relay board 742), and is provided with a restricting portion (for example, the harness holding portion 746d shown in FIG. 40 or FIG. 45) that can restrict the movement of the first wiring that is guided over the certain side of the first board, and is provided with a portion (for example, the first bundling portion 781 and the fourth bundling portion 784 shown in FIG. 45) that can bundle the first wiring at a predetermined position on the opposite side of the face of the first board.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, since it is equipped with a restricting portion capable of restricting the first wiring from being positioned outside both ends of a certain side of the first board, the first wiring can be concentrated near a certain side of the first board, and the state of the first wiring can be easily and reliably visually confirmed. In addition, the amount of wiring protruding on one side of the first board can be minimized, which can create space for other wiring, and it is possible to prevent a movable body such as a door from contacting the first wiring, and it is possible to prevent unnecessary strain on the first wiring. In addition, since a portion for bundling the first wiring is provided on the other side of the first board, the first wiring guided to the other side of the first board can be bundled downstream, which can prevent the first wiring from becoming messy, and the state of the first wiring can be reliably visually confirmed.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine that includes a first board (e.g., the main-side reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44 or FIG. 45), a second board (e.g., the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44 or FIG. 45), and a board case (e.g., the main-side container 744 and the main-side cover 746 shown in FIG. 37(a), and the sub-side container 774 and the sub-side cover 776 shown in FIG. 37(a)). At least first wiring (main-side first harness MHN1 to main-side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected to a surface on one side of the second board (for example, surface 748a on the front side of the main-side reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44), and at least second wiring (sub-side first harness SHN1 to sub-side third harness SHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected to a surface on one side of the second board (for example, surface 778a on the front side of the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44), The first board and the second board are arranged with a space (for example, the space 790 shown in FIG. 37(a) or FIG. 45) between them, the first wiring is guided through the space to the opposite side of the surface of the first board to which the first wiring is connected (for example, the back side of the main reel relay board 742), the second wiring is guided through the space to the opposite side of the surface of the second board to which the second wiring is connected (for example, the back side of the sub-reel relay board 772), the first wiring and the second wiring guided to the space are provided with a restricting portion (for example, the harness holding portion 746d shown in FIG. 40 or FIG. 45) that can restrict the positioning of the first wiring and the second wiring in an area other than the space, and a portion (for example, the first bundling portion 781 to the fourth bundling portion 784 shown in FIG. 45) that can bundle the first wiring and the second wiring is provided at a predetermined position on the opposite side of the surface of the first board and the second board.

According to the game machine of this embodiment, since the first wiring and the second wiring are provided with a restricting portion capable of restricting the positioning of the first wiring and the second wiring in an area other than the space portion formed between the first board and the second board, the first wiring and the second wiring can be concentrated in the space portion, and the state of the first wiring and the second wiring can be easily and reliably visually confirmed. In addition, the amount of wiring protruding on one side of the first board and the second board can be minimized, and space for other wiring can be created, and it is possible to prevent a movable body such as a door from contacting the first wiring and the second wiring, and it is possible to prevent unnecessary strain on the first wiring and the second wiring. In addition, since a portion for bundling the first wiring and the second wiring is provided on the other side of the first board and the second board, the first wiring and the second wiring guided to the other side of the first board and the second board can be bundled on the downstream side, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the first wiring and the second wiring become messy, and the state of the first wiring and the second wiring can be reliably visually confirmed.

The restricting portion may also be provided on the substrate case.

With this configuration, the restricting portion can be positioned close to the first wiring and the second wiring, minimizing the amount of wiring protruding to one side of the first board and the second board, creating space for other wiring, etc.

In addition, a space (for example, a gap formed between the harness holding portion 746d of the main side cover 746 and the sub side cover 776 as shown in FIG. 45) that does not restrict the first wiring and the second wiring guided to the space portion from being positioned in an area other than the space portion may be provided.

With this configuration, even if the first wiring or the second wiring extends into an area other than the space, the first wiring or the second wiring can be accommodated in the space without having to be reconnected.

Also, the device may include a plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110-112 shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 45), and a first reel wiring (main side first harness MHN1 to main side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) connected to each of the plurality of reels as the first wiring is connected to one side of the first board, and a second reel wiring (sub side first harness SHN1 to sub side third harness SHN3 shown in FIG. 45) connected to each of the plurality of reels as the second wiring is connected to one side of the second board, and the first reel wiring and the second reel wiring guided to the space may be guided through the space to the opposite side of the first board and the second board.

With this configuration, the first wiring and the second wiring can be connected to the reels arranged on the other side of the first board and the second board, and the reels, which are often arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, can be connected to the first wiring and the second wiring via the shortest route. This minimizes the length of the reel wiring and makes it easy to check the connection status of the wiring to each reel, improving convenience for the worker.

It also includes a first control unit (for example, the main control board 210a shown in FIG. 2) and a second control unit (for example, the sub-control board 220a shown in FIG. 2), and the first board and the second board are arranged horizontally above the reel, and the first board is connected to the first control unit via a connector arranged on one end side of the first board (for example, the main side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 shown in FIG. 44 and FIG. 45), and is connected to a connector arranged on the other end side of the first board (for example, the main side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to the main side connector MRC3 shown in FIG. 44 and FIG. 45). The second board may be connected to the first wiring via a connector arranged on one end of the second board (for example, the sub-side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 to the sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7 shown in Figures 44 and 45), and may be connected to the second control unit via a connector arranged on the other end of the second board (for example, the sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2 to the sub-side reel relay board fourth connector SRC4 shown in Figures 44 and 45).

This configuration makes it easier to distinguish between the wiring to the control unit and the wiring to the reels, improving convenience for the worker, and also allows the reels, which are often placed on the front side of the gaming machine, to be connected to the first and second wiring via the shortest route, minimizing the length of the wiring for the reels.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (for example, the main reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44 or FIG. 451), a second board (for example, the sub-reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44 or FIG. 45), and a board case (for example, the main side container 744 and the main side cover 746 shown in FIG. 37(a), and the sub side container 774 and the sub side cover 776 shown in FIG. 37(a)). At least first wiring (main-side first harness MHN1 to main-side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected to one surface of the first board (for example, surface 748a on the front side of the main-side reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44), and second wiring (sub-side first harness SHN1 to sub-side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected to one surface of the second board (for example, surface 778a on the front side of the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44). A third harness SHN3) is at least connected to the first board, the first board and the second board are arranged with a space (for example, the space 790 shown in FIG. 37(a) or FIG. 45) between them, a part of the first wiring is guided through the space to the opposite side of the face of the first board to which the first wiring is connected (for example, the back side of the main reel relay board 742), and a part of the second wiring is guided through the space to the opposite side of the face of the second board to which the second wiring is connected (for example, the back side of the sub-reel relay board 772), and the first wiring and the second wiring guided to the space are provided with a restricting portion (for example, the harness holding portion 746d shown in FIG. 40 or FIG. 45) that can restrict the positioning of the first wiring and the second wiring guided to the space in an area other than the space, and the restricting portion is provided in the board case and is a portion that protrudes toward the space.

According to the game machine of this embodiment, since the game machine is provided with a restricting portion capable of restricting the first wiring and the second wiring from being positioned in an area other than the space portion formed between the first board and the second board, the first wiring and the second wiring can be concentrated in the space portion, and the state of the first wiring and the second wiring can be easily and reliably visually confirmed. In addition, the amount of wiring protruding to one side of the first board and the second board can be minimized, and space for other wiring, etc. can be created, and it is possible to prevent a movable body such as a door from contacting the first wiring or the second wiring, and it is possible to prevent unnecessary burden on the first wiring or the second wiring. In addition, since the restricting portion is provided on the board case and is a portion that protrudes toward the space portion, even if the restricting portion is provided, the board case does not become larger than necessary, and space can be saved, and the restricting portion can be arranged near the first wiring or the second wiring, and the amount of wiring protruding to one side of the first board and the second board can be minimized, and space for other wiring, etc. can be created.

In addition, at least a first wiring (main side first harness MHN1 to main side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected to one side surface of the first board (for example, the surface 748a on the front side of the main side reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44) via a first connector (for example, the main side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to the main side reel relay board fourth connector MRC4 shown in FIG. 44 and FIG. 45), and a second wiring (main side first harness MHN1 to main side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected to one side surface of the second board (for example, the surface 778a on the front side of the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 45) via a second connector (for example, the sub side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 to the sub side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7 shown in FIG. 44 and FIG. 45). At least the wires (sub-side first harness SHN1 to sub-side third harness SHN3 shown in FIG. 45) are connected, the outer shape of the first connector is rectangular, the outer shape of the second connector is rectangular, the position on the extension line of the long side of the first connector and the position on the extension line of the long side of the second connector are offset from each other, the shortest distance from the second connector to the outer edge of the second board on the extension line of the short side of the second connector (for example, the shortest distance L2 shown in FIG. 44) is shorter than the shortest distance from the first connector to the outer edge of the first board on the extension line of the short side of the first connector (for example, the shortest distance L1 shown in FIG. 44), and the restricting portion may be provided on the first board.

With this configuration, even if the first wiring and the second wiring are guided to the same space, the first wiring and the second wiring can be prevented from overlapping in the space, the first wiring and the second wiring can be concentrated in the space, and the state of the first wiring and the second wiring can be easily and reliably visually confirmed.

The longitudinal direction of the first connector may be a direction from the connection position of the first connector toward the space, and the longitudinal direction of the second connector may be a direction from the connection position of the second connector toward the space.

With this configuration, even if the first wiring and the second wiring are guided to the same space, the first wiring and the second wiring can be prevented from overlapping in the space, the first wiring and the second wiring can be concentrated in the space, and the state of the first wiring and the second wiring can be easily and reliably visually confirmed.

In addition, a space may be provided that does not restrict the first wiring and the second wiring guided into the space from being positioned in an area other than the space.

With this configuration, even if the first wiring or the second wiring extends into an area other than the space, the first wiring or the second wiring can be accommodated in the space without having to be reconnected.

Also, the device may include a plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110-112 shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 45), and a first reel wiring (main side first harness MHN1 to main side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) connected to each of the plurality of reels as the first wiring is connected to one side of the first board, and a second reel wiring (sub side first harness SHN1 to sub side third harness SHN3 shown in FIG. 45) connected to each of the plurality of reels as the second wiring is connected to one side of the second board, and the first reel wiring and the second reel wiring guided to the space may be guided through the space to the opposite side of the first board and the second board.

With this configuration, the first wiring and the second wiring can be connected to the reels arranged on the other side of the first board and the second board, and the reels, which are often arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, can be connected to the first wiring and the second wiring via the shortest route. This minimizes the length of the reel wiring and makes it easy to check the connection status of the wiring to each reel, improving convenience for the worker.

It also includes a first control unit (for example, the main control board 210a shown in FIG. 2) and a second control unit (for example, the sub-control board 220a shown in FIG. 2), and the first board and the second board are arranged horizontally above the reel, and the first board is connected to the first control unit via a connector arranged on one end side of the first board (for example, the main side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 shown in FIG. 44 and FIG. 45), and is connected to a connector arranged on the other end side of the first board (for example, the main side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to the main side connector MRC3 shown in FIG. 44 and FIG. 45). The second board may be connected to the first wiring via a connector arranged on one end of the second board (for example, the sub-side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 to the sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7 shown in Figures 44 and 45), and may be connected to the second control unit via a connector arranged on the other end of the second board (for example, the sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2 to the sub-side reel relay board fourth connector SRC4 shown in Figures 44 and 45).

This configuration makes it easier to distinguish between the wiring to the control unit and the wiring to the reels, improving convenience for the worker, and also allows the reels, which are often placed on the front side of the gaming machine, to be connected to the first and second wiring via the shortest route, minimizing the length of the wiring for the reels.

In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine that includes a first board (e.g., the main side reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44 or 45), a second board (e.g., the sub-side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44 or 45), and a board case (e.g., the main side container 744 and the main side cover 746 shown in FIG. 37(a), and the sub side container 774 and the sub side cover 776 shown in FIG. 37(a)). At least the first wiring (the main side first harness MHN1 to the main side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected to one side of the board (for example, the surface 748a on the front side of the main side reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44), and the second wiring (the sub side first harness SHN1 to the sub side third harness SHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected to one side of the second board (for example, the surface 778a on the front side of the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44). The gaming machine is characterized in that the first and second boards are at least connected, the first and second boards are arranged with a space (for example, the space 790 shown in FIG. 37(a) or FIG. 45) between them, at least a part of the first wiring is guided through the space to the opposite side of the surface of the first board to which the first wiring is connected (for example, the back side of the main reel relay board 742), and at least a part of the second wiring is guided through the space to the opposite side of the surface of the second board to which the second wiring is connected (for example, the back side of the sub-reel relay board 772), and the gaming machine is provided with a restricting portion (for example, the harness holding portion 746d shown in FIG. 40 or FIG. 45) that can restrict the first wiring and the second wiring guided to the space from being positioned in an area other than the space, and is configured so that the first wiring and the second wiring can be pulled out of the space next to the restricting portion when the restricting portion is located.

According to the game machine of this embodiment, since the game machine is provided with a restricting portion capable of restricting the first wiring and the second wiring from being positioned in an area other than the space portion formed between the first board and the second board, the first wiring and the second wiring can be concentrated in the space portion, and the state of the first wiring and the second wiring can be easily and reliably visually confirmed. In addition, the amount of wiring protruding to one side of the first board and the second board can be minimized, and space for other wiring can be created, and it is possible to prevent a movable body such as a door from contacting the first wiring or the second wiring, and it is possible to prevent unnecessary burden on the first wiring or the second wiring. In addition, since a space through which the wiring can pass is provided next to the restricting portion at the position where the restricting portion is located, even if the first wiring or the second wiring protrudes into an area other than the space portion, the first wiring or the second wiring can be accommodated in the space portion without reconnecting it.

In addition, at least a first wiring (main side first harness MHN1 to main side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected to one side surface of the first board (for example, the surface 748a on the front side of the main side reel relay board 742 shown in FIG. 44) via a first connector (for example, the main side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to the main side reel relay board fourth connector MRC4 shown in FIG. 44 and FIG. 45), and a second wiring (main side first harness MHN1 to main side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) is connected to one side surface of the second board (for example, the surface 778a on the front side of the sub side reel relay board 772 shown in FIG. 44) via a second connector (for example, the sub side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 to the sub side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7 shown in FIG. 44 and FIG. 45). At least the wires (sub-side first harness SHN1 to sub-side third harness SHN3 shown in FIG. 45) are connected, the outer shape of the first connector is rectangular, the outer shape of the second connector is rectangular, the position on the extension line of the long side of the first connector and the position on the extension line of the long side of the second connector are offset from each other, the shortest distance from the second connector to the outer edge of the second board on the extension line of the short side of the second connector (for example, the shortest distance L2 shown in FIG. 44) is shorter than the shortest distance from the first connector to the outer edge of the first board on the extension line of the short side of the first connector (for example, the shortest distance L1 shown in FIG. 44), and the restricting portion may be provided on the first board.

With this configuration, even if the first wiring and the second wiring are guided to the same space, the first wiring and the second wiring can be prevented from overlapping in the space, the first wiring and the second wiring can be concentrated in the space, and the state of the first wiring and the second wiring can be easily and reliably visually confirmed.

In addition, a portion capable of bundling the first wiring and the second wiring (for example, first bundling portion 781 to fourth bundling portion 784 shown in FIG. 45) may be provided at a predetermined position on the opposite side of the surface of the first substrate and the second substrate.

With this configuration, the first wiring and the second wiring that are guided to the other side of the first board and the second board can be bundled downstream, preventing the first wiring and the second wiring from becoming disorganized and allowing the state of the first wiring and the second wiring to be reliably visually confirmed.

The longitudinal direction of the first connector may be the direction from the connection position of the first connector toward the space, and the longitudinal direction of the second connector may be the direction from the connection position of the second connector toward the space.

With this configuration, even if the first wiring and the second wiring are guided to the same space, the first wiring and the second wiring can be prevented from overlapping in the space, the first wiring and the second wiring can be concentrated in the space, and the state of the first wiring and the second wiring can be easily and reliably visually confirmed.

Also, the device may include a plurality of reels (e.g., reels 110-112 shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 45), and a first reel wiring (main side first harness MHN1 to main side third harness MHN3 shown in FIG. 45) connected to each of the plurality of reels as the first wiring is connected to one side of the first board, and a second reel wiring (sub side first harness SHN1 to sub side third harness SHN3 shown in FIG. 45) connected to each of the plurality of reels as the second wiring is connected to one side of the second board, and the first reel wiring and the second reel wiring guided to the space may be guided through the space to the opposite side of the first board and the second board.

With this configuration, the first wiring and the second wiring can be connected to the reels arranged on the other side of the first board and the second board, and the reels, which are often arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, can be connected to the first wiring and the second wiring via the shortest route. This minimizes the length of the reel wiring and makes it easy to check the connection status of the wiring to each reel, improving convenience for the worker.

It also includes a first control unit (for example, the main control board 210a shown in FIG. 2) and a second control unit (for example, the sub-control board 220a shown in FIG. 2), and the first board and the second board are arranged horizontally above the reel, and the first board is connected to the first control unit via a connector arranged on one end side of the first board (for example, the main side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 shown in FIG. 44 and FIG. 45), and is connected to a connector arranged on the other end side of the first board (for example, the main side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to the main side connector MRC3 shown in FIG. 44 and FIG. 45). The second board may be connected to the first wiring via a connector arranged on one end of the second board (for example, the sub-side reel relay board fifth connector SRC5 to the sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7 shown in Figures 44 and 45), and may be connected to the second control unit via a connector arranged on the other end of the second board (for example, the sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2 to the sub-side reel relay board fourth connector SRC4 shown in Figures 44 and 45).

This configuration makes it easier to distinguish between the wiring to the control unit and the wiring to the reels, improving convenience for the worker, and also allows the reels, which are often placed on the front side of the gaming machine, to be connected to the first and second wiring via the shortest route, minimizing the length of the wiring for the reels.

The "first board" and "second board" of the present invention may be boards provided on the door side (e.g., the back side of the front door 102) or on the cabinet side (e.g., the inside of the main body 101). The "first board" and "second board" of the present invention may be arranged in a direction perpendicular to the gaming table (vertical up and down), or may be arranged overlapping in the front-to-back direction of the gaming table, or may be configured so that both boards are electrically connected to each other by a connector and wiring.

The "first substrate" and "second substrate" according to the present invention may each be housed in a separate substrate case, or both substrates may be housed in a single substrate case, with a recess formed between the two substrates in the substrate case, and this recess serving as the "space" according to the present invention. In other words, the "space" according to the present invention may be any space formed between the "first substrate" and the "second substrate".

The "regulating portion" according to the present invention may be formed by a boss or hook that can be hooked onto a base or the like that faces between the board cases. In other words, there are no limitations on the shape, etc., as long as it can come into contact with the wiring and has the function of restricting the movement of the wiring, and the movement of the wiring is more easily restricted than if there was no restricting portion.

In the above embodiment, the "regulating portion" according to the present invention is formed on the side of one of the substrate cases, but they may be arranged alternately on the sides of both substrate cases, or may be arranged at the same position in the front-to-back direction of the substrate cases. Also, the number of regulating portions formed on the side of each substrate case may be one or more, and the number of regulating portions may be the same or different.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the longitudinal direction of the connector is oriented along the wiring guided from the connector into the space, but the lateral direction of the connector may be oriented along the wiring guided from the connector into the space. In this case, by increasing the amount of misalignment between the longitudinal extensions of the first connector and the second connector, it is possible to avoid the thickness of the wiring in the longitudinal direction and prevent the wiring from becoming too concentrated (too concentrated in one place).

The wiring of each connector may be bundled around the "regulating portion" of the present invention. In this case, the wiring can be gathered without shifting the position of the connector of the "first board" of the present invention, which may prevent the wiring of multiple connectors from clumping together in the space (gathering too much in one place). Even if the short side of the connector is oriented along the wiring guided from the connector into the space, it may not be necessary to make much difference in the positional relationship of the connectors.

The "board case" of the present invention also includes cases that can accommodate the entire board, as well as cases that only have a base on which the back of the board rests, and cases that can accommodate only part of the board.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example regarding the wiring of the reel unit is shown, but the wiring may be guided from an appropriate position relative to the guide port on the reel side for the three reels (left, center, and right). For example, part of the wiring connected to the "first board" and "second board" of the present invention may be guided to the reel without passing through the space. In other words, wiring other than the "first wiring" and "second wiring" of the present invention may be provided.

Although a door has been given as an example of a movable body that can come into contact with the wiring, this is not intended to be limiting. Even if there is no movable body, it is possible to prevent the wiring from getting in the way during maintenance, etc.

<Connection state of power supply board and reel board>
Next, the connection state of the power supply board (second board) and the reel board (first board) will be described with reference to Figures 46 and 47.

Here, "power supply board (second board)" is a collective term for the main-side power supply relay board 640 and the sub-side power supply relay board 670 of the power supply relay board unit 600 described using Figure 32 etc., and in this specification, the main-side power supply relay board 640 and the sub-side power supply relay board 670 may be abbreviated to "power supply main board 640" and "power supply sub board 670", respectively.

Figure 46 (a-1) is a front view of the power supply main board 640 and the power supply sub-board 670 as viewed from the front side, and (a-2) is a bottom view of the power supply main board 640 and the power supply sub-board 670 as viewed from the direction indicated by the symbol D (lower side) in the front view of (a-1) of the same figure.

<Connection state of power relay board and reel relay board/power main board>
Next, the power supply main board 640 (second board) will be described with reference to FIGS.

The power supply main board 640 (second board) is composed of a base material 642 made of a rectangular plate-like body, and a main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 (second connector) made of resin, a main side power supply relay board second connector MVC2, and a main side power supply relay board third connector MVC3 mounted (disposed) on the component surface (surface) 642a of this base material 642.

The power supply main board 640 is electrically connected to the connector of the power supply board of the power supply device 252 described using FIG. 2 via the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 to main side power supply relay board third connector MVC3 and a harness (wiring) not shown, and is a board that relays between the main control board 210a and the power supply board.

On both the left and right ends of the main power relay board first connector MVC1, screw holes 648 are formed into which connector screws 644 and nuts 645 can be inserted to secure the main power relay board first connector MVC1 to the substrate 642. Note that connectors other than the main power relay board first connector MVC1 are soldered to the substrate 642, and the only part secured to the substrate 642 using screws is the main power relay board first connector MVC1.

In addition, two rod-shaped fixing pins 649 (resin members) that protrude upward from the bottom surface of the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 are formed on the left and right sides of the bottom surface of the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1, located inward (inner) than the two screw holes 648. These fixing pins 649 are used when positioning the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 relative to the power supply main board 640 when fixing the main-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 to the power supply main board 640 with the connector screws 644 and nuts 645.

The fixing pin 649 can penetrate the base material 642 through a through hole formed in the base material 642, and when the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 is fixed to the power supply main board 640, a part 649a (hereinafter also referred to as the "protrusion") of the fixing pin 649 protrudes from the surface (solder surface 642b) opposite to the surface (component surface 642a) on which the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 is mounted. The length of the protrusion 649a of the fixing pin 649 in this example (the maximum length of the part of the fixing pin 649 that protrudes outward from the solder surface 642b) is L21.

As shown in FIG. 46 (a-1), three through holes 642c are formed in the upper left corner, the center left corner, and the lower right corner of the base material 642 when viewed from the front, at positions corresponding to the three board loose-fit bosses 624 (protrusions) (see FIG. 32) erected on the bottom surface 620 of the main-side board housing section 612 (mounting section).

The component surface 642a of the substrate 642 is provided with the main power relay board first connector MVC1 to main power relay board third connector MVC3, as well as with a resist layer, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conduction parts (vias, through holes), silk printing, etc. In this example, a rectangular solid ground pattern 641 is formed around the through hole 642c.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 46 (a-2) and Figure 33, no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface (back surface) 642b of the substrate 642, but a resist layer, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conductive parts (vias, through holes), silk printing, etc. are formed, and the tips of the lead terminals MVLD of the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 to main side power supply relay board third connector MVC3 mounted on the component surface 642a protrude, and solder (not shown) is formed to electrically connect the tips of the lead terminals MVLD to the wiring patterns, etc. on the solder surface 642b.

In addition, two connector screws 644 (second screws) are attached to the solder surface 642b to secure the main power relay board first connector MVC1 from the solder surface 642b side.

The connector screw 644 is inserted from the solder surface 642b side of the base material 642 through the screw hole 648 toward the component surface 642a side, with the tip exposed on the component surface 642a side, and the nut 645 is fastened to the exposed tip. In this way, the main side power relay board first connector MVC1 (second connector) is fixed to the base material 642 of the power supply main board 640 by two sets of connector screws 644 (second screws) and nuts 645.

According to this example, the second connector (main side power relay board first connector MVC1) is fixed to one side (solder surface 642b) of the second board (power main board 640) using fixing means (connector screw 644 or nut 645). Therefore, even if the connectors of the power relay board unit 600 and the reel relay board unit 700 are repeatedly attached and detached, the second connector (main side power relay board first connector MVC1) is unlikely to come off the second board (power main board 640). In addition, when the first connector (main side reel relay board first connector MRC1) is connected to the second connector (main side power relay board first connector MVC1), the force applied from the first connector (main side reel relay board first connector MRC1) to the second connector (main side power relay board first connector MVC1) can be received by the fixing means (connector screw 644 or nut 645), and the connectors can be reliably connected to each other.

As shown in FIG. 46(a-2), on the solder surface 642b of the power supply main board 640, the lead terminal MVLD of the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 is located approximately in the center, with fixing pins 649 located on both outside sides of the lead terminal MVLD and connector screws 644 located on both outside sides of the fixing pins 649.

In this example, the connector screw 644 is positioned on the outside of the fixing pin 649 on the power supply main board 640, so the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 can be securely fixed to the power supply main board 640, and even if the connectors of the power supply relay board unit 600 and the reel relay board unit 700 are repeatedly attached and detached, the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 is less likely to come off from the power supply main board 640.

Also, as shown in FIG. 33, multiple circular solid ground patterns 643 (areas without wiring patterns) are formed on the solder surface 642b of the substrate 642 at positions corresponding to the five board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) formed on the main side board housing section 612.

Each area of the ground pattern 643 includes the area where the board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) can contact, and is wider than the area where the solder surface 642b of the power supply main board 640 and the board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) can contact.

In this example, the area of the second board (power supply main board 640) that comes into contact with the mounting portion (board support 610) can be made into a ground pattern (area without wiring patterns), making it possible to effectively utilize the limited area of the second board (power supply main board 640) and preventing damage to wiring patterns, etc. other than the ground pattern of the second board (power supply main board 640).

In particular, the convex portion (board support boss 626 (626a, 626b)) is a cylindrical portion, and the ground pattern 643 is circular, so that the limited area of the second board (power supply main board 640) can be effectively utilized.

As described above, when the power supply main board 640 is accommodated in the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612, the solder surface 642b of the power supply main board 640 is supported by the five board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) and the multiple outer wall bosses 622a formed at predetermined intervals along the outer wall 622. When the power supply main board 640 is moved within the board accommodation space of the main board accommodation section 612, the power supply main board 640 is configured to be able to slide (slide) on the board support bosses 626 and the outer wall bosses 622a.

According to this example, the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612) has a convex portion (board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b), outer wall boss 622a) protruding from the bottom surface of the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612), and the second board (power supply main board 640) is configured to be movable while in contact with the convex portion (board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b), outer wall boss 622a). This reduces the contact area between the second board (power supply main board 640) and the mounting portion (main board accommodating portion 612), reduces friction when the second board (power supply main board 640) moves, and allows the second board (power supply main board 640) to move smoothly.

In addition, because the board support boss 626 is a cylindrical member with a through hole formed in the center, the contact area between the power supply main board 640 and the main side board accommodating portion 612 of the board support 610 can be further reduced, allowing the power supply main board 640 to move smoothly relative to the board support 610.

In other words, since the convex portion (board support boss 626 (626a, 626b)) has a portion that does not come into contact with the second board (power supply main board 640), the contact area between the second board (power supply main board 640) and the mounting portion (main board housing portion 612) can be reduced, and the second board (power supply main board 640) can be moved smoothly relative to the mounting portion (main board housing portion 612).

In addition, the board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) can hold the power supply main board 640 at a position higher than the bottom surface 620 of the main side board housing section 612, and a space can be formed between the solder surface 642b of the power supply main board 640 and the bottom surface 620 of the main side board housing section 612, so that components such as the connector screw 644 attached to the solder surface 642a of the power supply main board 640 can be prevented from interfering with the bottom surface 620 of the main side board housing section 612.

In other words, a portion of the fixing means (screw 644 for connector) is configured to be accommodated in the space formed between one surface (solder surface 642b) of the second board (main power board 640) and the bottom surface (bottom surface 620) of the mounting portion (main board housing portion 612), so that even when the second board (main power board 640) is moved relative to the mounting portion (main board housing portion 612), contact between the fixing means (screw 644 for connector and nut 645) and the mounting portion (main board housing portion 612) can be avoided.

<Connection state of power relay board and reel relay board/power sub board>
Next, the power supply sub-board 670 (second board) will be described with reference to Figures 46 (a-1) and (a-2).

The power supply sub-board 670 (second board) is composed of a base material 672 made of a rectangular plate-like body, and a resin sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 (second connector), a sub-side power supply relay board second connector SVC2, a sub-side power supply relay board third connector SVC3, and a sub-side power supply relay board fourth connector SVC4, which are mounted (disposed) on the component surface 672a of the base material 672.

The sub-side power supply relay board 670 is electrically connected to the connector of the power supply board of the power supply device 252 described using FIG. 2 via the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 to the sub-side power supply relay board fourth connector SVC4 and a harness (wiring) not shown, and is a board that relays between the sub-control board 220a and the power supply board.

On both the left and right ends of the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1, screw holes 678 are formed into which connector screws 674 and nuts 675 can be inserted to secure the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 to the substrate 672. Note that connectors other than the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 are soldered to the substrate 672, and the only part secured to the substrate 672 using screws is the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1.

In addition, two rod-shaped fixing pins 679 (resin members) that protrude upward from the bottom surface of the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 are formed on the left and right sides of the bottom surface of the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1, located inward (inner) than the two screw holes 678. These fixing pins 679 are used when positioning the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 relative to the power supply sub-board 670 when fixing the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 to the power supply sub-board 670 with connector screws 674 and nuts 675.

The fixing pin 679 can penetrate the substrate 672 through a through hole formed in the substrate 672, and when the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 is fixed to the power supply sub-board 670, a part 679a (hereinafter also referred to as the "protrusion") of the fixing pin 679 protrudes from the surface (solder surface 672b) opposite to the surface (component surface 672a) on which the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 is mounted. The length of the protrusion 679a of the fixing pin 679 in this example (the maximum length of the portion of the fixing pin 679 that protrudes outward from the solder surface 672b) is L21.

As shown in FIG. 46 (a-1), three through holes 672c are formed in the upper right corner, the center right side, and the lower left corner of the base material 672 when viewed from the front, at positions corresponding to the three board loose-fit bosses 674 (protrusions) (see FIG. 32) erected on the bottom surface 620 of the sub-side board accommodation section 614 (mounting section).

The component surface 672a of the substrate 672 is provided with the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 to sub-side power supply relay board fourth connector SVC4, as well as a resist layer, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conduction parts (vias, through holes), silk printing, etc. In this example, a rectangular solid ground pattern 671 is formed around the through hole 672c.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 46(a-2) and 33, no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface 672b of the substrate 672, but a resist layer, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conductive parts (vias, through holes), silk printing, etc. are formed, and the tips of the lead terminals SVLD of the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 to the sub-side power supply relay board fourth connector SVC4 mounted on the component surface 672a protrude, and solder (not shown) is formed to electrically connect the tips of the lead terminals SVLD to the wiring patterns, etc. on the solder surface 672b.

In addition, two connector screws 674 (second screws) are attached to the solder surface 672b to secure the sub-side power relay board first connector SVC1 from the solder surface 672b side.

The connector screw 674 is inserted from the solder surface 672b side of the power supply sub-board 670 through the screw hole 678 toward the component surface 672a side, with the tip exposed on the component surface 672a side, and the nut 675 is fastened to the exposed tip. In this way, the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 (second connector) is fixed to the base material 672 of the power supply sub-board 670 by two sets of connector screws 674 (second screws) and nuts 675.

As shown in FIG. 46(a-2), the lead terminal SVLD of the sub-side power relay board first connector SVC1 is located approximately in the center of the solder surface 672b of the power supply sub-board 670, with fixing pins 679 located on both outside sides of the lead terminal SVLD and connector screws 674 located on both outside sides of the fixing pins 679.

In this example, the connector screw 674 is positioned on the outside of the fixing pin 679 on the power supply sub-board 670, so the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 can be securely fixed to the power supply sub-board 670, and even if the connectors of the power supply relay board unit 600 and the reel relay board unit 700 are repeatedly attached and detached, the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 is less likely to come off from the power supply sub-board 670.

Also, as shown in FIG. 33, multiple circular solid ground patterns 673 (areas without wiring patterns) are formed on the solder surface 672b of the substrate 672 at positions corresponding to the five board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b) formed on the sub-side board accommodating portion 614.

Each area of the ground pattern 673 includes the area where the board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b) can come into contact, and is wider than the area where the solder surface 672b of the power supply sub-board 670 can come into contact with the board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b).

In this example, the area of the second board (power supply sub-board 670) that comes into contact with the mounting portion (board support 610) can be made into a ground pattern (area without wiring patterns), making it possible to effectively utilize the limited area of the second board (power supply sub-board 670) and preventing damage to the wiring patterns, etc., of the second board (power supply sub-board 670).

In particular, the convex portion (board support boss 676 (676a, 676b)) is a cylindrical portion, and the ground pattern 673 is circular, making it possible to effectively utilize the limited area of the second board (power supply sub-board 670).

The relationship between the power supply sub-board 670 and the sub-side board housing section 614 is approximately the same as the relationship between the power supply main board 640 and the main board housing section 612, and when the power supply sub-board 670 is moved within the board housing space of the sub-board housing section 614, the power supply sub-board 670 is configured to be able to slide (move by sliding) on the board support bosses and outer wall bosses. Since the two have the same or similar structures, a description of this will be omitted.

<Connection state of power relay board and reel relay board/reel board>
Next, the reel board (first board) will be described.

Here, "reel board (first board)" is a collective term for the main side reel relay board 742 and the sub side reel relay board 772 of the reel relay board unit 700 described using Figure 37 etc., and in this specification, the main side reel relay board 742 and the sub side reel relay board 772 may be abbreviated to "reel main board 742" and "reel sub board 772", respectively.

Figure 46 (b-1) is a front view of the reel main board 742 and the reel sub board 772 as viewed from the front side, and (b-2) is a plan view of the reel main board 742 and the reel sub board 772 as viewed from the direction indicated by the symbol U (upper side) in the front view of (b-1)

<Connection state of power relay board and reel relay board/reel main board>
Next, the reel main board 742 (first board) will be described with reference to Figures 46 (b-1) and (b-2).

The reel main board 742 is composed of a base material 748 made of a rectangular plate-like body, and a main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 to a main side reel relay board seventh connector MRC7 arranged on the component surface 748a of the base material 748.

The main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 to main side reel relay board seventh connector MRC7 are arranged on the component surface 748a of the base material 748, and also various ICs, resist layers, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conductive parts (vias, through holes), silk printing, etc. are formed, although not shown.

On the other hand, no components are mounted on the solder surface 748b of the base material 748, and a solid ground pattern is formed. In addition, the tips of the lead terminals MRLD of the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 to the main side reel relay board seventh connector MRC7 mounted on the component surface 748a protrude, and solder (not shown) is formed to electrically connect the tips of the lead terminals MRLD to the wiring pattern, etc., of the solder surface 748b.

The solder surface 748b is also provided with screw holes 749 into which screws 750 (third screws) and nuts 755 can be inserted to secure the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 to the substrate 748 (first substrate) from the solder surface 748b side of the substrate 748. Note that connectors other than the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 are soldered to the substrate 748, and the only component secured to the substrate 748 using screws is the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1.

The main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 (first connector) is a male connector having a complementary shape to the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 (second connector) of the power supply main board 640, which is a female connector, and can be directly attached to and detached from the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1. Note that the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 is not limited to a male connector, and may be a female connector or another type of connector.

As shown in FIG. 46(b-1), at both the left and right ends of the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1, there are formed screw holes 751 into which screws 754 (first screws; see FIG. 37, FIG. 43(a), (b), etc.) can be inserted to fix the reel main board 742 to the sheet metal member 710 (first mounting portion; see FIG. 37, etc.).

In addition, two rod-shaped fixing pins 753 (resin members) that protrude upward from the bottom surface of the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 are formed on the bottom surface of the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 at a position outboard (outside) of the two screw holes 749. These fixing pins 753 are used when positioning the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 relative to the reel main board 742 when fixing the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 to the reel main board 742 with screws 750 and nuts 755.

The fixing pin 753 can penetrate the substrate 748 through a through hole formed in the substrate 748, and when the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 is fixed to the reel main board 742, a portion 753a (hereinafter also referred to as the "protrusion") of the fixing pin 753 protrudes from the surface (solder surface 748b) opposite the surface (component surface 748a) on which the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 is mounted.

In this example, a part of the resin material of the first connector (reel main board 742) (protrusion 753a of fixing pin 753) protrudes from the surface (solder surface 748b) opposite to the surface (component surface 748a) on which the first connector (main side reel relay board first connector MRC1) of the first board (reel main board 742) is mounted, improving the ease of assembly of the board and connector and preventing the connector from falling off even if there is deterioration over time or poor soldering.

The length of the protrusion 753a of the fixing pin 753 in this example (the maximum length of the portion of the fixing pin 753 that protrudes outward from the solder surface 748b) is L22, which is shorter than the length L21 of the protrusion 649a of the fixing pin 649 of the power supply main board 640 and the length L21 of the protrusion 679a of the fixing pin 679 of the power supply sub-board 670 (L22<L21).

In this example, for the power supply main board 640 and the power supply sub-board 670 (second board), the length of the protrusion (plastic member) on the fixing pin is relatively long, so the connector can be firmly fixed to the board, and for the reel main board 742 (first board), the length of the protrusion (plastic member) on the fixing pin is relatively short, so the protrusion can be prevented from coming into contact with other members and causing an impact to the connector.

In addition, the length L22 of the part (protrusion 753a of the fixed pin 753, protrusion 783a of the fixed pin 783) of the resin member of the first connector (main side reel relay board first connector MRC1, sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1) is different from the length L21 of the part (protrusion 649a of the fixed pin 649, protrusion 679a of the fixed pin 679) of the second connector (main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1, sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1). This improves the ease of assembly of the board and connector, prevents the connector from falling off even if there is deterioration over time or soldering failure, and makes it easier to distinguish between boards having the first connector and boards having the second connector, improving maintainability.

The length of the protrusion 753a of the fixed pin 753 of the reel main board 742 (the maximum length of the portion of the fixed pin 753 that protrudes outward from the solder surface 748b) may be the same length L21 as the length L21 of the protrusion 649a of the fixed pin 649 of the power supply main board 640 or the length L21 of the protrusion 679a of the fixed pin 679 of the power supply sub-board 670.

As shown in Figure 46 (b-1), on the solder surface 748b of the reel main board 742, the lead terminals MRLD of the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 are located approximately in the center, with screws 750 located on both outside sides of the lead terminals MRLD and fixing pins 753 located on both outside sides of the lead terminals MRLD.

In this example, the screw 750 is located on the inside of the fixing pin 753 on the reel main board 742, so the limited area of the reel main board 742 can be used effectively.

The main side reel relay board second connector MRC2 is a connector to which the harness connected to the left reel 110 is connected, the main side reel relay board third connector MRC3 is a connector to which the harness connected to the middle reel 111 is connected, and the main side reel relay board fourth connector MRC4 is a connector to which the harness connected to the right reel 112 is connected.

In this example, the main side reel relay board second connector MRC2, the main side reel relay board third connector MRC3, and the main side reel relay board fourth connector MRC4 are arranged at a predetermined interval along the longitudinal direction of the base material 748 on the component surface 748a of the base material 748.

<Connection state of power relay board and reel relay board/reel sub-board>
Next, the reel sub-substrate 772 (first substrate) will be described with reference to Figures 46 (b-1) and (b-2).

The reel sub-board 772 is composed of a base material 778 made of a rectangular plate-like body, and the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 to the sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7 arranged on the component surface 778a of this base material 778.

The component surface 778a of the substrate 778 is provided with the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 to the sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7, as well as various ICs, resist layers, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conductive parts (vias, through holes), silk printing, etc.

On the other hand, no components are mounted on the solder surface 778b of the base material 778, and a solid ground pattern is formed. In addition, the tips of the lead terminals SRLD of the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 to the sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7 mounted on the component surface 778a protrude, and solder (not shown) is formed to electrically connect the tips of the lead terminals SRLD to the wiring pattern, etc., on the solder surface 778b.

Furthermore, the solder surface 778b is formed with screw holes 779 into which screws 780 (third screws) and nuts 785 can be inserted to secure the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 to the substrate 778 (first substrate) from the solder surface 778b side of the substrate 778. Note that connectors other than the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 are soldered to the substrate 778, and the only component secured to the substrate 778 with screws is the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1.

The sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 (first connector) is a male connector having a complementary shape to the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 (second connector) of the power supply sub-board 670, which is a female connector, and can be directly attached to and detached from the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1. Note that the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 is not limited to a male connector, and may be a female connector or another type of connector.

As shown in FIG. 46 (b-1), at both the left and right ends of the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1, screw holes 787 are formed into which screws 754 (first screws; see FIG. 37, FIG. 43 (a), (b), etc.) can be inserted to fix the reel sub-board 772 to the sheet metal member 710 (first mounting portion; see FIG. 37, etc.).

In addition, two rod-shaped fixing pins 783 (resin members) that protrude upward from the bottom surface of the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 are formed on the bottom surface of the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 at a position outboard (outside) of the two screw holes 779. These fixing pins 783 are used when positioning the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 relative to the reel sub board 772 when fixing the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 to the reel sub board 772 with screws 780 and nuts 785.

The fixing pin 783 can penetrate the substrate 778 through a through hole formed in the substrate 778, and when the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 is fixed to the reel sub-board 772, a portion 783a (hereinafter also referred to as the "protrusion") of the fixing pin 783 protrudes toward the surface (solder surface 778b) opposite the surface (component surface 778a) on which the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 is mounted.

In this example, a part of the resin material of the first connector (reel sub-board 772) (protrusion 783a of the fixing pin 783) protrudes from the surface (solder surface 778b) opposite to the surface (component surface 778a) on which the first connector (sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1) of the first board (reel sub-board 772) is mounted, improving the ease of assembly of the board and connector and preventing the connector from falling off even if there is deterioration over time or poor soldering.

In this example, the length of the protrusion 783a of the fixing pin 783 (the maximum length of the portion of the fixing pin 753 that protrudes outward from the solder surface 778b) is L22, which is shorter than the length L21 of the protrusion 649a of the fixing pin 649 of the power supply main board 640 and the length L21 of the protrusion 679a of the fixing pin 679 of the power supply sub-board 670 (L22<L21).

In this example, for the power supply main board 640 and the power supply sub-board 670 (second board), the length of the protrusion (plastic member) on the fixing pin is relatively long, so the connector can be firmly fixed to the board, and for the reel sub-board 772 (first board), the length of the protrusion (plastic member) on the fixing pin is relatively short, so the protrusion can be prevented from coming into contact with other members and causing an impact to the connector.

The length of the protrusion 783a of the fixed pin 783 of the reel sub-board 772 (the maximum length of the portion of the fixed pin 783 that protrudes outward from the solder surface 788b) may be the same length L21 as the length L21 of the protrusion 649a of the fixed pin 649 of the power supply main board 640 or the length L21 of the protrusion 679a of the fixed pin 679 of the power supply sub-board 670.

As shown in Figure 46 (b-1), on the solder surface 778b of the reel sub-board 772, the lead terminal MRLD of the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 is located approximately in the center, with screws 780 located on both outside sides of the lead terminal MRLD and fixing pins 783 located on both outside sides of the lead terminal MRLD.

In this example, the screw 780 is located on the inside of the fixing pin 783 on the reel sub-board 772, so the limited area of the reel sub-board 772 can be used effectively.

The sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2 is a connector to which the harness connected to the left reel 110 is connected, the sub-side reel relay board third connector SRC3 is a connector to which the harness connected to the middle reel 111 is connected, and the sub-side reel relay board fourth connector SRC4 is a connector to which the harness connected to the right reel 112 is connected.

In this example, the sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2, the sub-side reel relay board third connector SRC3, and the sub-side reel relay board fourth connector SRC4 are arranged at a predetermined interval along the longitudinal direction of the base material 778 on the component surface 778a of the base material 778.

<Connection status/screws between power relay board and reel relay board>
Next, the screws used in the reel relay board unit 700 and the power supply relay board unit 600 will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 47 (a) is a side view showing the state before the reel relay board unit 700 is attached to the power relay board unit 600, and (b) is a side view showing the state after the reel relay board unit 700 is attached to the power relay board unit 600.

As described with reference to Figures 46(a-1) and 46(a-2), the connector screw 644 (second screw) of the power supply main board 640 of the power supply relay board unit 600 is a screw for fixing the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 (second connector) to the base material 642 of the power supply main board 640 (second board). Also, the connector screw 674 (second screw) of the power supply sub board 670 of the power supply relay board unit 600 is a screw for fixing the sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 (second connector) to the base material 672 of the power supply sub board 670 (second board). As shown in Figure 47(b), the length of the connector screw 644 and the connector screw 674 in this example is L2.

On the other hand, as explained using Figures 46 (b-1) and (b-2), the screw 750 (third screw) of the reel main board 742 of the reel relay board unit 700 is a screw for fixing the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 (first connector) to the base material 748 of the reel main board 742 (first board). Also, the screw 780 (third screw) of the reel sub board 772 of the reel relay board unit 700 is a screw for fixing the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 (first connector) to the base material 778 of the reel sub board 772 (first board). As shown in Figure 47 (b), the length of the screw 750 and the screw 780 in this example is L2, which is the same as the length L2 of the connector screw 644 and the connector screw 674 of the power relay board unit 600.

As explained with reference to Figures 43, 46 (b-1) and (b-2), the screw 754 (first screw) of the reel main board 742 of the reel relay board unit 700 is a screw for fixing the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 (first connector) of the reel main board 742 (first board) to the sheet metal member 710 (first mounting portion), or for fixing the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 (first connector) of the reel sub board 772 (first board) of the reel relay board unit 700 to the sheet metal member 710 (first mounting portion).

In this example, the first connector (main side reel relay board first connector MRC1, sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1) is fixed to the first mounting portion (sheet metal member 710) using the first screw (screw 754), so that no load is applied to the board when the connector is inserted or removed, preventing damage to the board.

As shown in FIG. 47(b), the length of the screw 754 in this example is L1, which is longer than the length L2 of the connector screws 644 and 674 of the power relay board unit 600 and the length L2 of the screws 750 and 780 of the reel relay board unit 700 (L1>L2).

In addition, according to this example, the first connector (main side reel relay board first connector MRC1, sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1) is fixed to the first board (reel main board 742, reel sub board 772) using third screws (screws 750, screws 780), and since the length L1 of the first screw and the length L2 of the third screw are different, no load is applied to the board when the connector is inserted or removed, preventing damage to the board. In addition, it is easy to notice if the screws are installed incorrectly when installing the board after it has been removed for maintenance or cleaning, improving maintainability.

The length of the screw 754 may be the same length L2 as the length L2 of the connector screws 644 and 674 of the power relay board unit 600 and the length L2 of the screws 750 and 780 of the reel relay board unit 700, or it may be longer than the length L2 of the connector screws 644 and 674 of the power relay board unit 600 and the length L2 of the screws 750 and 780 of the reel relay board unit 700.

As shown in FIG. 47(b), the screw 754 (first screw) of the reel relay board unit 700 and the connector screw 644 (second screw) or the connector screw 674 (second screw) of the power relay board unit 600 are arranged approximately coaxially along the imaginary axis A1, and the shortest distance from the screw 754 (first screw) to the connector screw 644 (or the connector screw 674) is L3, which is shorter than the length L1 of the screw 754 (L3<L1).

For this reason, even if the screw 754 (first screw) of the reel relay board unit 700 becomes loose due to repeated connection and disconnection of the connectors of the power relay board unit 600 and the reel relay board unit 700, the screw 754 can move to the position indicated by the symbol 754' in the figure, that is, to the position (maximum movement position) where the head of the screw 754 abuts against the connector screw 644 (or the connector screw 674) or its surrounding members, but is configured to be unable to move to the position indicated by the symbol 754'' in the figure, that is, to the position where the screw 754 falls out (falls out) of the screw hole 751 (or screw hole 787) of the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 (or sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1).

According to this example, when the first connector (main side reel relay board first connector MRC1, sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1) and the second connector (main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1, sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1) are connected, the length L3 from the part facing the head of the first screw (screw 754) to the head is shorter than the length L1 of the first screw (screw 754). Therefore, no load is applied to the board when the connector is inserted or removed, and damage to the board can be prevented. In addition, even if the screw of the first connector (main side reel relay board first connector MRC1, sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1) becomes loose due to vibration caused by transportation of the gaming machine or operation by the player, it will not fall off, and loss of the screw may be prevented.

<Summary of connection between power supply relay board and reel relay board>
As described above, (1) the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first board (for example, the reel main board 742 or the reel sub board 772 shown in FIG. 46(b-1) or (b-2)) having a first connector (for example, the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 46(b-1) or (b-2)), and a second connector (for example, the main side power supply relay board A second board (for example, the power supply main board 640 and the power supply sub-board 670 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and (a-2)) having a first connector MVC1 and a sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1, and a second mounting portion (for example, the main board accommodating portion 612 and the sub-board accommodating portion shown in FIG. 32) having a board support portion (for example, the board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) and the board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b) shown in FIG. 32, the board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) that can come into contact with the second board. a first connector that can be connected to the second connector, the second board that is movably attached to the second mounting portion, the second board that is configured to be movable relative to the second mounting portion when the first connector and the second connector are connected, a space is formed between the second board and the second mounting portion by the board support portion when the second board is attached to the second mounting portion, the second connector is fixed from a surface of the second board that faces the space using a second screw (e.g., a connector screw 644 or a connector screw 674 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and (a-2)), a part of the second screw is configured to be accommodated in the space, and the first connector is fixed to a first mounting portion (e.g., a sheet metal member 710 shown in FIGS. 47(a) and (b)) using a first screw (e.g., a screw 754 shown in FIGS. 47(a) and (b)).

Conventionally, connectors that are movable themselves have been mainstream, and there was a problem that the connector would wear out if the number of times the connector was inserted and removed increased. However, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board, and the connectors can be prevented from being connected while being misaligned, and wear of the connector itself and damage to the connector pins can be avoided. In addition, since the second connector is fixed from one side of the second board using the second screw, even if the first connector and the second connector are repeatedly attached and detached, the second connector is less likely to come off the second board, and when the first connector is connected to the second connector, the force applied from the first connector to the second connector can be received by the second screw, and the connectors can be reliably connected. In addition, the contact area between the second board and the mounting part can be reduced, friction during the movement of the second board is reduced, the second board can be moved smoothly, and even if the second board is moved relative to the mounting part, contact between the second screw and the mounting part can be avoided. In addition, because the first connector is fixed to the first mounting portion using the first screw, no load is applied to the board when the connector is inserted or removed, preventing damage to the board.

(2) In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first board (e.g., the reel main board 742 or the reel sub board 772 shown in FIG. 46(b-1) or (b-2)) having a first connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 46(b-1) or (b-2)), and a second connector (e.g., the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply relay board first connector SRC2 shown in FIG. 46(a-1) or (a-2)). VC1) and a second mounting portion (for example, the main board 612 or the sub-board 614 shown in FIG. 32) having a board support portion (for example, the board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) or the board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b) shown in FIG. 32, the board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) that can contact the second board, and the first connector is connectable to the second connector. The second board is movably attached to the second mounting portion, and is configured to be movable relative to the second mounting portion when connecting the first connector and the second connector. When the second board is attached to the second mounting portion, a space is formed between the second board and the second mounting portion by the board support portion, and the second connector is inserted into the second board by inserting a second screw (for example, a connector screw 644 or a connector screw 645 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and (a-2)) from a surface of the second board facing the space. The first connector is fixed to the first board using a first screw (e.g., screw 674 for connector), a portion of the second screw is configured to be accommodated in the space, the first connector is fixed to the first mounting portion (e.g., sheet metal member 710 shown in Figs. 47(a) and (b)) using a first screw (e.g., screw 754 shown in Figs. 47(a) and (b)), the first connector is fixed to the first board using a third screw (e.g., screw 750 and screw 780 shown in Figs. 47(a) and (b)), and the length of the first screw and the length of the third screw are different.

Conventionally, connectors that are movable themselves have been mainstream, and there was a problem that the connector would wear out if the number of times the connector was inserted and removed increased. However, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board, and the connectors can be prevented from being connected while being misaligned, and wear of the connector itself and damage to the connector pins can be avoided. In addition, since the second connector is fixed from one side of the second board using the second screw, even if the first connector and the second connector are repeatedly attached and detached, the second connector is less likely to come off the second board, and when the first connector is connected to the second connector, the force applied from the first connector to the second connector can be received by the second screw, and the connectors can be reliably connected. In addition, the contact area between the second board and the mounting part can be reduced, friction during the movement of the second board is reduced, the second board can be moved smoothly, and even if the second board is moved relative to the mounting part, contact between the second screw and the mounting part can be avoided. In addition, the first connector is fixed to the first mounting portion using a first screw, and the first connector is fixed to the first board using a third screw, and the lengths of the first and third screws are different, so that no load is applied to the board when the connector is inserted or removed, preventing damage to the board, and also making it easier to notice if the screws are installed incorrectly when installing the board after it has been removed for maintenance or cleaning, improving maintainability.

(3) In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first board (e.g., the reel main board 742 or the reel sub board 772 shown in FIG. 46 (b-1) or (b-2)) having a first connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 46 (b-1) or (b-2)), and a second board (e.g., the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 46 (a-1) or (a-2)). A game machine including a second board (for example, a power supply main board 640 or a power supply sub-board 670 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and 46(a-2)) and a second mounting portion (for example, a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-board accommodating portion 614 shown in FIG. 32) having a board support portion capable of contacting the second board (for example, a board support boss 626 (626a, 626b) or a board support boss 676 (676a, 676b) shown in FIG. 32, a board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2), wherein the first connector is connectable to the second connector, and the second board is connected to the second connector. a second board that is movably attached to the second mounting portion, the second board is configured to be movable relative to the second mounting portion when the first connector and the second connector are connected, a space is formed between the second board and the second mounting portion by the board support portion in a state in which the second board is attached to the second mounting portion, the second connector is fixed from a surface of the second board facing the space by using a second screw (for example, a connector screw 644 or a connector screw 674 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and 46(a-2)), and the second screw A portion of the resin member of the first connector (for example, the fixing pin 753 and the fixing pin 783 shown in Fig. 46(b-1) and (b-2)) is configured to be able to be accommodated in the space, and a portion of the resin member of the first connector (for example, the fixing pin 753 and the fixing pin 783 shown in Fig. 46(b-1) and (b-2)) protrudes from the surface (for example, the component surface 748a and the component surface 778a shown in Fig. 46(b-1) and (b-2)) opposite the surface on which the first connector of the first board is mounted (for example, the component surface 748a and the component surface 778a shown in Fig. 46(b-1) and (b-2)).

Conventionally, connectors that are movable themselves have been mainstream, and there was a problem that the connector would wear out if the number of times the connector was inserted and removed increased. However, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board, and the connectors can be prevented from being connected while being misaligned, and wear of the connector itself and damage to the connector pins can be avoided. In addition, since the second connector is fixed from one side of the second board using the second screw, even if the first connector and the second connector are repeatedly attached and detached, the second connector is less likely to come off the second board, and when the first connector is connected to the second connector, the force applied from the first connector to the second connector can be received by the second screw, and the connectors can be reliably connected. In addition, the contact area between the second board and the mounting part can be reduced, friction during the movement of the second board is reduced, the second board can be moved smoothly, and even if the second board is moved relative to the mounting part, contact between the second screw and the mounting part can be avoided. In addition, a portion of the resin material of the first connector protrudes from the surface of the first board opposite the surface where the first connector is inserted and mounted, improving the ease of assembly between the board and the connector and preventing the connector from falling off even if there is deterioration over time or soldering failure.

(4) In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first board (e.g., the reel main board 742 or the reel sub board 772 shown in FIG. 46(b-1) or (b-2)) having a first connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 46(b-1) or (b-2)), a second board (e.g., the power supply main board 640 or the power supply sub board 670 shown in FIG. 46(a-1) or (a-2)) having a second connector (e.g., the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 46(a-1) or (a-2)), and a board that can contact the second board. and a second mounting portion (e.g., a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub board accommodating portion 614 shown in FIG. 32) having a board support portion (e.g., board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) and board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b) shown in FIG. 32, and a board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2), wherein the first connector is connectable to the second connector, the second board is movably attached to the second mounting portion, the second board is configured to be movable relative to the second mounting portion when connecting the first connector and the second connector, and when the second board is attached to the second mounting portion, there is a gap between the second board and the second mounting portion. A space is formed by the board support portion, the second connector is fixed using a second screw (e.g., connector screw 644 and connector screw 674 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and (a-2)) from a surface of the second board facing the space, a part of the second screw is configured to be able to be accommodated in the space, and a part (e.g., fixing pin 753 and fixing pin 783 shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and (b-2)) of the resin member of the first connector (e.g., fixing pin 753 and fixing pin 783 shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and (b-2)) is fixed to a surface (e.g., solder surface 748b and solder surface 778b shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and (b-2)) opposite to a surface of the first board on which the first connector is mounted (e.g., component surface 748a and component surface 778a shown in FIGS. 46(b-1) and (b-2)). For example, protrusion 753a and protrusion 783a shown in FIG. 46(b-1) protrude, and a part of the resin member of the second connector (for example, fixing pin 649 and fixing pin 679 shown in FIG. 46(a-1) and (a-2)) protrudes on the surface (for example, solder surface 642b and solder surface 672b shown in FIG. 46(a-1) and (a-2)) opposite to the surface on which the second connector of the second board is mounted (for example, component surface 642a and component surface 672a shown in FIG. 46(a-1) and (a-2)), and the length of a part of the resin member of the first connector (for example, protrusion 649a and protrusion 679a shown in FIG. 46(a-2)) is different from the length of a part of the resin member of the second connector.

Conventionally, connectors that are movable themselves have been mainstream, and there was a problem that the connector would wear out if the number of times the connector was inserted and removed increased. However, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board, and the connectors can be prevented from being connected while being misaligned, and wear of the connector itself and damage to the connector pins can be avoided. In addition, since the second connector is fixed from one side of the second board using the second screw, even if the first connector and the second connector are repeatedly attached and detached, the second connector is less likely to come off the second board, and when the first connector is connected to the second connector, the force applied from the first connector to the second connector can be received by the second screw, and the connectors can be reliably connected. In addition, the contact area between the second board and the mounting part can be reduced, friction during the movement of the second board is reduced, the second board can be moved smoothly, and even if the second board is moved relative to the mounting part, contact between the second screw and the mounting part can be avoided. In addition, a portion of the resin member of the first connector protrudes from the surface of the first board opposite the surface where the first connector is inserted and mounted, and a portion of the resin member of the second connector protrudes from the surface of the second board opposite the surface where the second connector is inserted and mounted. Since the length of the portion of the resin member of the first connector and the length of the portion of the resin member of the second connector are different, the ease of assembly of the board and the connector can be improved, the connector can be prevented from falling off even if there is deterioration over time or soldering failure, and it is easy to distinguish between the board having the first connector and the board having the second connector, improving maintainability.

(5) In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first board (e.g., the reel main board 742 or the reel sub board 772 shown in FIG. 46(b-1) or (b-2)) having a first connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 46(b-1) or (b-2)) and a second connector (e.g., the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 46(a-1) or (a-2)). a second board (for example, a power supply main board 640 or a power supply sub-board 670 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and (a-2)) that is connected to the first connector and the second connector; and a second mounting portion (for example, a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-board accommodating portion 614 shown in FIG. 32) having a board support portion that can contact the second board (for example, a board support boss 626 (626a, 626b) or a board support boss 676 (676a, 676b) shown in FIG. 32, or a board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2), wherein the first connector is connectable to the second connector, and the second board is connected to a front connector. The second board is movably attached to the second mounting portion, and is configured to be movable relative to the second mounting portion when the first connector and the second connector are connected, and in a state in which the second board is attached to the second mounting portion, a space is formed between the second board and the second mounting portion by the board support portion, and the second connector is fixed from a surface of the second board facing the space using a second screw (for example, a connector screw 644 or a connector screw 674 shown in FIGS. 46(a-1) and 46(a-2)), A portion of the second screw is configured to be accommodated in the space, the first connector is fixed to a first mounting portion (e.g., sheet metal member 710 shown in Figs. 47(a) and (b)) using a first screw (e.g., screw 754 shown in Figs. 47(a) and (b)), and the length from the portion facing the head of the first screw to the head when the first connector and the second connector are connected (e.g., length L3 shown in Fig. 47(b)) is shorter than the length of the first screw (e.g., length L1 shown in Fig. 47(b)).

Conventionally, connectors that are movable themselves have been mainstream, and there was a problem that the connector would wear out if the number of times the connector was inserted and removed increased. However, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board, and the connectors can be prevented from being connected while being misaligned, and wear of the connector itself and damage to the connector pins can be avoided. In addition, since the second connector is fixed from one side of the second board using the second screw, even if the first connector and the second connector are repeatedly attached and detached, the second connector is less likely to come off the second board, and when the first connector is connected to the second connector, the force applied from the first connector to the second connector can be received by the second screw, and the connectors can be reliably connected. In addition, the contact area between the second board and the mounting part can be reduced, friction during the movement of the second board is reduced, the second board can be moved smoothly, and even if the second board is moved relative to the mounting part, contact between the second screw and the mounting part can be avoided. In addition, the first connector is fixed to the first mounting portion using a first screw, and the length from the part facing the head of the first screw to the head when the first connector and the second connector are connected is shorter than the length of the first screw, so no load is applied to the board when the connector is inserted or removed, preventing damage to the board. In addition, even if the screw of the first connector becomes loose due to vibrations caused by transportation of the gaming machine or operation by the player, it will not fall off, and loss of the screw may be prevented.

In addition, (6) the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first board (e.g., the reel main board 742 or the reel sub board 772 shown in FIG. 46(b-1) or (b-2)) having a first connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 46(b-1) or (b-2)), and a second connector (e.g., the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply intermediate connector SRC2 shown in FIG. 46(a-1) or (a-2)). A game machine including a second board (for example, a power supply main board 640 or a power supply sub-board 670 shown in FIG. 46(a-1) or (a-2)) having a connecting board first connector SVC1, and a second mounting portion (for example, a main board housing portion 612 or a sub-board housing portion 614 shown in FIG. 32) having a board support portion (for example, a board support boss 626 (626a, 626b) or a board support boss 676 (676a, 676b) shown in FIG. 32, a board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) that can contact the second board, The second board is connectable to the second connector, the second board is movably attached to the second attachment portion, and the second board is configured to be movable relative to the second attachment portion when the first connector and the second connector are connected, and in a state in which the second board is attached to the second attachment portion, a space is formed between the second board and the second attachment portion by the board support portion, and a surface of the second board facing the space (for example, a solder surface 642b or a solder surface 642c shown in FIG. 33) is formed between the second board and the second attachment portion. 672b) has an area without a wiring pattern (for example, ground pattern 643 or ground pattern 673 shown in FIG. 33), the area includes an area where the board support part can contact, the area is wider than the area where the board support part can contact, and the first connector is fixed to a first mounting part (for example, sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 47(a) and (b)) using a first screw (for example, screw 754 shown in FIG. 47(a) and (b)).

Conventionally, the connector itself was mainly movable, and there was a problem that the connector would wear out if the number of times the connector was inserted and removed increased. However, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board, and it is possible to prevent the connectors from being connected while their positions are misaligned, and it is possible to avoid wear of the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. In addition, the surface of the second board facing the space has a certain area without a wiring pattern, and this certain area is wider than the area where the protrusion can contact, so that the area in contact with the mounting part on the second board can be an area without a wiring pattern, making it possible to effectively utilize the limited area of the second board and to prevent damage to the wiring pattern of the second board. In addition, since the first connector is fixed to the first mounting part using the first screw, no load is applied to the board when the connector is inserted and removed, and damage to the board can be prevented.

(7) In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first board (e.g., the reel main board 742 or the reel sub board 772 shown in FIG. 46(b-1) or (b-2)) having a first connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 46(b-1) or (b-2)), and a second board (e.g., the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 46(a-1) or (a-2)). a second mounting portion (e.g., the main board accommodating portion 612 or the sub-board accommodating portion 614 shown in FIG. 32) having a board support portion (e.g., the board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) or the board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b) shown in FIG. 32, the board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) capable of contacting the second board, wherein the first connector is connectable to the second connector, and the second board is moved to the second mounting portion. a second board that is movably attached to the second mounting portion when the first connector and the second connector are connected, the second board is configured to be movable relative to the second mounting portion when the first connector and the second connector are connected, a space is formed between the second board and the second mounting portion by the board support portion when the second board is attached to the second mounting portion, a surface of the second board facing the space (e.g., solder surface 642b and solder surface 672b shown in FIG. 33) has a certain area without a wiring pattern (e.g., ground pattern 643 and ground pattern 673 shown in FIG. 33), and the certain area is an area including an area where the board support part can contact, the certain area is an area wider than the area where the board support part can contact, the first connector is fixed to a first mounting part (e.g., sheet metal member 710 shown in Fig. 47(a) and (b)) using a first screw (e.g., screw 754 shown in Fig. 47(a) and (b)), the first connector is fixed to the first board using a third screw (e.g., screw 750 or screw 780 shown in Fig. 47(a) and (b)), and the length of the first screw is different from the length of the third screw.

Conventionally, the connector itself was mainly movable, and there was a problem that the connector would wear out if the number of times the connector was inserted and removed increased. However, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board, and it is possible to prevent the connectors from being connected while being misaligned, and it is possible to avoid wear of the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. In addition, the surface of the second board facing the space has a certain area without a wiring pattern, and this certain area is wider than the area where the protrusion can contact, so that the area of the second board that contacts the mounting part can be made an area without a wiring pattern, making it possible to effectively utilize the limited area of the second board and prevent the wiring pattern of the second board from being damaged. In addition, the first connector is fixed to the first mounting portion using a first screw, and the first connector is fixed to the first board using a third screw, and the lengths of the first and third screws are different, so that no load is applied to the board when the connector is inserted or removed, preventing damage to the board, and also making it easier to notice if the screws are installed incorrectly when installing the board after it has been removed for maintenance or cleaning, improving maintainability.

(8) In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first board (e.g., the reel main board 742 or the reel sub board 772 shown in FIG. 46 (b-1) or (b-2)) having a first connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 46 (b-1) or (b-2)), and a second board (e.g., the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 46 (a-1) or (a-2)). 34-2)) and a second mounting portion (e.g., a main board accommodating portion 612 or a sub-board accommodating portion 614 shown in FIG. 32) having a board support portion (e.g., a board support boss 626 (626a, 626b) or a board support boss 676 (676a, 676b) shown in FIG. 32, a board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) that can contact the second board, wherein the first connector is connectable to the second connector, the second board is movably attached to the second mounting portion, and the second board is configured to be movable relative to the second mounting portion when connecting one connector and the second connector, and when the second board is attached to the second mounting portion, a space is formed between the second board and the second mounting portion by the board support portion, and a surface of the second board facing the space (e.g., solder surface 642b and solder surface 672b shown in FIG. 33) has a certain area without a wiring pattern (e.g., ground pattern 643 and ground pattern 673 shown in FIG. 33), and the certain area is an area including an area that can be contacted by the board support portion, The certain area is an area larger than the area that the board support portion can contact, and a part (e.g., protrusion 753a and protrusion 783a shown in FIG. 46(b-2)) of the resin member of the first connector (e.g., fixing pin 753 and fixing pin 783 shown in FIG. 46(b-1) and (b-2)) protrudes on the surface (e.g., solder surface 748b and solder surface 778b shown in FIG. 46(b-1) and (b-2)) opposite to the surface on which the first connector of the first board is mounted (e.g., component surface 748a and component surface 778a shown in FIG. 46(b-1) and (b-2)).

Conventionally, the connector itself was mainly movable, and there was a problem that the connector would wear out if the number of times the connector was inserted and removed increased. However, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board, and the connectors can be prevented from being connected while being misaligned, and wear of the connector itself and damage to the connector pins can be avoided. In addition, the surface of the second board facing the space has a certain area without a wiring pattern, and this certain area is wider than the area where the protrusion can contact, so the area in the second board that contacts the mounting part can be made an area without a wiring pattern, making it possible to effectively utilize the limited area of the second board and to prevent the wiring pattern of the second board from being damaged. In addition, since a part of the resin member of the first connector protrudes on the surface opposite to the surface where the first connector of the first board is inserted and mounted, the assembly of the board and the connector can be improved, and the connector can be prevented from falling off even if there is deterioration over time or soldering failure.

(9) In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first board (e.g., the reel main board 742 or the reel sub board 772 shown in FIG. 46(b-1) or (b-2)) having a first connector (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 46(b-1) or (b-2)), a second board (e.g., the power supply main board 640 or the power supply sub board 670 shown in FIG. 46(a-1) or (a-2)) having a second connector (e.g., the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 46(a-1) or (a-2)), and a board support portion (e.g., the power supply main board 640 or the power supply sub board 670 shown in FIG. 46(a-1) or (a-2)) that can come into contact with the second board (e.g., the power supply main board 640 or the power supply sub board 670 shown in FIG. 46(a-1) or (a-2)). 32) having board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) and board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b) shown in FIG. 32 and a board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2, and the first connector is connectable to the second connector, the second board is movably attached to the second mounting portion, the second board is configured to be movable relative to the second mounting portion when connecting the first connector and the second connector, a space is formed between the second board and the second mounting portion by the board support portion when the second board is attached to the second mounting portion, and the second board is configured to be movable relative to the second mounting portion when connecting the first connector and the second connector, and the second board is configured to be movable relative to the second mounting ... a surface of the board facing the space (for example, solder surface 642b and solder surface 672b shown in FIG. 33) has a certain region without a wiring pattern (for example, ground pattern 643 and ground pattern 673 shown in FIG. 33), the certain region is a region including a region with which the board support portion can come into contact, the certain region is a region wider than the region with which the board support portion can come into contact, and a resin member of the first connector (for example, fixing pin 753 and fixing pin 760 shown in FIG. 46(b-1) and (b-2)) is provided on a surface (for example, solder surface 748b and solder surface 778b shown in FIG. 46(b-1) and (b-2)) opposite to a surface of the first board on which the first connector is mounted (for example, component surface 748a and component surface 778a shown in FIG. 46(b-1) and (b-2)). A part of the resin member of the second connector (for example, the fixing pin 649 or the fixing pin 679 shown in FIG. 46(a-1) or (a-2)) protrudes from the surface of the second board on which the second connector is mounted (for example, the component surface 642a or the component surface 672a shown in FIG. 46(a-1) or (a-2)). The length of the part of the resin member of the first connector (for example, the protrusion 649a or the protrusion 679a shown in FIG. 46(a-2)) is different from the length of the part of the resin member of the second connector.

Conventionally, the connector itself was mainly movable, and there was a problem that the connector would wear out if the number of times the connector was inserted and removed increased. However, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board, and it is possible to prevent the connectors from being connected while being misaligned, and it is possible to avoid wear of the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. In addition, the surface of the second board facing the space has a certain area without a wiring pattern, and this certain area is wider than the area where the protrusion can contact, so that the area of the second board that contacts the mounting part can be made an area without a wiring pattern, making it possible to effectively utilize the limited area of the second board and prevent the wiring pattern of the second board from being damaged. In addition, a portion of the resin member of the first connector protrudes from the surface of the first board opposite the surface where the first connector is inserted and mounted, and a portion of the resin member of the second connector protrudes from the surface of the second board opposite the surface where the second connector is inserted and mounted. Since the length of the portion of the resin member of the first connector and the length of the portion of the resin member of the second connector are different, the ease of assembly of the board and the connector can be improved, the connector can be prevented from falling off even if there is deterioration over time or soldering failure, and it is easy to distinguish between the board having the first connector and the board having the second connector, improving maintainability.

(10) In addition, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) includes a first board (for example, the reel main board 742 or the reel sub board 772 shown in FIG. 46(b-1) or (b-2)) having a first connector (for example, the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 or the sub side reel relay board first connector SRC1 shown in FIG. 46(b-1) or (b-2)), and a second board (for example, the power supply main board 64 shown in FIG. 46(a-1) or (a-2)) having a second connector (for example, the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 or the sub side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 shown in FIG. 46(a-1) or (a-2)). 32) having a board support portion (for example, board support bosses 626 (626a, 626b) and board support bosses 676 (676a, 676b) shown in FIG. 32, board support portion 633 shown in FIG. 34-2) capable of contacting the second board, wherein the first connector is connectable to the second connector, the second board is movably attached to the second attachment portion, and the second board is configured to be movable relative to the second attachment portion when the first connector and the second connector are connected. In a state in which the second board is attached to the second attachment portion, a space is formed between the second board and the second attachment portion by the board support portion, a surface of the second board facing the space (e.g., solder surface 642b and solder surface 672b shown in FIG. 33 ) has a certain area without a wiring pattern (e.g., ground pattern 643 and ground pattern 673 shown in FIG. 33 ), the certain area is an area including an area with which the board support portion can come into contact, the certain area is an area wider than the area with which the board support portion can come into contact, and the first connector is connected to a first attachment portion (e.g., sheet metal member 7 shown in FIGS. 47( a) and 47 (b) ). 10) using a first screw (e.g., screw 754 shown in Figs. 47(a) and (b)), and the length from the portion facing the head of the first screw (e.g., connector screw 644 or connector screw 674 of power relay board unit 600 shown in Fig. 47(b), main side power relay board first connector MVC1 or sub side power relay board first connector SVC1 of power relay board unit 600 shown in Fig. 47(b)) to the head when the first connector and the second connector are connected (e.g., length L3 shown in Fig. 47(b)) is shorter than the length of the first screw (e.g., length L1 shown in Fig. 47(b)).

Conventionally, the connector itself was mainly movable, and there was a problem that the connector would wear out if the number of times the connector was inserted and removed increased. However, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the position can be adjusted by moving the second board, and it is possible to prevent the connectors from being connected while being misaligned, and it is possible to avoid wear of the connector itself and damage to the connector pins. In addition, the surface of the second board facing the space has a certain area without a wiring pattern, and this certain area is wider than the area where the protrusion can contact, so that the area of the second board that contacts the mounting part can be made an area without a wiring pattern, making it possible to effectively utilize the limited area of the second board and prevent the wiring pattern of the second board from being damaged. In addition, the first connector is fixed to the first mounting portion using a first screw, and the length from the part facing the head of the first screw to the head when the first connector and the second connector are connected is shorter than the length of the first screw, so no load is applied to the board when the connector is inserted or removed, preventing damage to the board. In addition, even if the screw of the first connector becomes loose due to vibrations caused by transportation of the gaming machine or operation by the player, it will not fall off, and loss of the screw may be prevented.

In addition, in the gaming machine described in (1) to (10) above, the second board may be configured to be movable in an in-plane direction when attached to the attachment portion.

With this configuration, even if the connectors are misaligned when connecting the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board, the second board can be moved in the in-plane direction, making it possible to fine-tune the connectors' positions and preventing the connectors from being connected while still misaligned, thereby avoiding wear on the connectors themselves and damage to the connector pins.

In addition, in the gaming machines described in (1) to (10) above, the second board may have multiple types of components in addition to the second connector (for example, the sub-side power supply relay board second connector SVC2, the sub-side power supply relay board third connector SVC3, the sub-side power supply relay board fourth connector SVC4, the main-side power supply relay board second connector MVC2, and the main-side power supply relay board third connector MVC3 shown in FIG. 32), and the second connector may be taller (having a higher maximum height from the component mounting surface of the board) than the multiple types of components.

With this configuration, when the first connector of the first board and the second connector of the second board are inserted or removed, other components mounted on the second board can be prevented from coming into contact with the first board, etc., and damage to the other components mounted on the second board can be prevented.

<Component retention by speakers>
Next, the holding of members by the speaker will be described, but prior to this description, the speaker unit 900 of this example will be described with reference to Figures 48(a) and (b). In order to avoid redundant explanations, only the configuration different from the speaker unit 600 according to the above embodiment will be described below.

<Holding components by speakers/speaker unit>
48A is a side view of a speaker 910, and FIG. 48B is a side view of a speaker unit 900, showing an example in which a screw 930 is held by a yoke 914c of the speaker 910. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 48(b), the speaker unit 900 is composed of a speaker 910 (a certain speaker) and a speaker cover (rear cover) 920 (a resin member) that covers the rear side of the speaker 910, and is attached with screws to a speaker base portion 630 (see FIG. 11) formed on the inside of the front door 102 (door body) with the speaker 910 housed in the inner space of the speaker cover 920.

The location of the "certain speaker" according to the present invention is not limited to the lower left side on the inside (back) of the front door 102, but may be, for example, the lower right side or center on the inside (back) of the front door 102, or either the upper right or upper left side on the inside (back) of the front door 102 where the upper speaker 272 described using FIG. 10 is located, or it may be located on the outside (front) of the front door 102, or it may be located on the main body 101.

The speaker 910 is a cone-type dynamic speaker, and as shown in FIG. 48(a), it is composed of a diaphragm (cone paper) 911 that vibrates to generate sound, a flange 912 to which the diaphragm 911 is fixed so that it can vibrate, a frame 913 that supports the flange 912, and an electromagnetic circuit 914 (914a to 914c) that vibrates the diaphragm 911. It has almost the same structure as the speaker 610 described using FIGS. 12(c) and (d).

The diaphragm 911 is made of a flexible material such as paper and is formed into a cone shape that opens toward the front. The frame 913 is a cylindrical metal ring frame that opens slightly toward the front, and has multiple openings formed along the circumferential direction on the side to allow air around the diaphragm 911 to escape.

The electromagnetic circuit 914 is composed of a magnet 914a, a voice coil 914b that is driven by the magnet 914a to vibrate the diaphragm 911, and a yoke 914c that serves as the base of the electromagnetic circuit 914 and transmits the magnetic force of the magnet 914a to the voice coil 914b.

The yoke 914c is disposed in contact with the magnet 914a, and is a member through which the magnetic flux of the magnetic force of the magnet 912a passes and which is magnetized by the magnet 914a. The material of the yoke 914c is not particularly limited, but a material with high magnetic permeability (e.g., pure iron or low carbon steel) is preferable.

The location of the "magnet" according to the present invention is not limited to the speaker, and may be, for example, a single magnet alone on the inside (back) of the front door 102, or on a member or device other than the speaker that is arranged on the inside (back) of the front door 102, or on the outside (front) of the front door 102, or on the main body 101.

The speaker cover 920 is a resin member that houses most of the speaker 910 inside, and as shown in FIG. 48(b), it has a circular opening 920a on the rear side that exposes the rear end of the speaker 910 (part of the yoke 914c), and a stepped cylindrical side wall 920b that widens slightly toward the front, and has almost the same structure as the rear cover 620 described using FIGS. 12(a) and (b).

<Holding of a component by a speaker/Example 1>
Next, the holding of a member by a speaker (Example 1) will be described with reference to FIG.

The yoke 914c of the speaker 910 is magnetized by the magnet 914a, and a portion of the yoke 914c (the bottom surface and a portion of the side surface connected to the bottom surface) is exposed to the outside through the opening 920a of the speaker cover 920, so that the magnetic force of the magnet 914a can attract and hold a magnetic material in the yoke 914c.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 48(b), an iron screw 930 (a certain screw) that has been removed from a slot machine 100 (a gaming table) is adsorbed and held by the yoke 914c.

The screw 930 is one of four screws used to attach the speaker cover 920 to the front door 102, and is composed of a screw portion 930a with a threaded groove, a head portion 930b with a screw hole formed at one end of the screw portion 930a, and a tip portion 930c which is the end of the screw portion 930a opposite the head portion 930b.

In this example, of the parts that make up the screw 930, only the head 930b is in contact with the yoke 914c, the tip 930c faces in the opposite direction to the yoke 914c, and the screw 930 is held by the yoke 914c in an upright position on the bottom surface of the yoke 914c.

In this example, the screws removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet, making the screws easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintainability and increasing convenience for gaming store staff, etc.

Here, maintenance of the gaming machine includes checking whether any fraudulent activity has been committed while shining an LED light on it, cleaning each part, replacing each part, and checking the operation of each part. During the maintenance process, screws, circuit boards, sheet metal parts, and plastic parts may be removed or temporarily placed.

The material of the "certain screw" according to the present invention is not limited to iron, but may be, for example, a ferromagnetic material such as cobalt or nickel, or a paramagnetic material such as stainless steel containing iron.

The use of the "certain screw" according to the present invention is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a screw for attaching the speaker 910 to the front door 102, a screw for fixing the main control board (board constituting the main control unit 300) described with reference to FIG. 10 to the main control board storage case 210, a screw for fixing the sub-control board (board constituting the sub-control unit 400) to the sub-control board storage case 220, a screw for fixing the power supply board to the power supply unit 252, or a screw for fixing the performance control board (board constituting the second sub-control unit 500) to the front door 102.

It may also be a screw for fixing the main side power supply relay board 640 or the sub side power supply relay board 670 described using FIG. 33 to the board support 610, or a screw for fixing the lid and housing of various board cases (main control board storage case 210, sub control board storage case 220, etc.), or a screw 646 for attaching the main side power supply relay board 640 to the board support 610 shown in FIG. 36 (a) and (b), or a screw 754 for fixing the main side reel side relay board 742 to the sheet metal member 710 shown in FIG. 43 (a) and (b), or a screw for fixing a connector to the board. In other words, the "certain screw" according to the present invention may be used for at least any of fixing a board, fixing a board case, fixing a resin member, or fixing a sheet metal member.

The type of "certain screw" according to the present invention is not particularly limited, and may be a male screw (bolt, screw), a female screw (nut), a pan head screw, a countersunk screw, a binding screw, a tapping screw, etc.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a screw (e.g., screw 930 shown in FIG. 48(b)) and a magnet (e.g., magnet 914a shown in FIG. 48(b)), and is characterized in that it is configured to be able to hold the screw that has been removed from the gaming machine by the magnetic force of the magnet.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, screws removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of a magnet, making the screws easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintainability and increasing convenience for gaming store staff, etc.

The device may also be configured to be capable of holding the screw that falls from a predetermined position away from the magnet by the magnetic force of the magnet.

This configuration can prevent screws from being lost by holding the screws that have slipped out of your hand during maintenance.

The magnet may also be provided on the inside of the door body (e.g., the front door 102 shown in FIG. 10).

With this configuration, the screws can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet when the door is open, improving maintainability.

The device may also include a speaker (e.g., speaker 910 shown in FIG. 48(b)), which may have the magnet.

With this configuration, the speaker can hold the screw, eliminating the need for a separate magnet and increasing convenience.

<Holding of a component by a speaker/Example 2>
Next, holding of a member by a speaker (Example 2) will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 48 (c) is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which the screw 931 is held by the yoke 914c of the speaker 910 through the speaker cover 920.

The yoke 914c of the speaker 910 is magnetized by the magnet 914a, and the magnetic flux of the magnet 914a and the yoke 914c flows to the outside through the speaker cover 920, so that the magnetic force of the magnet 914a can attract and hold a magnetic material through the speaker cover 920.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 48(c), an iron screw 931 (a certain screw) removed from a slot machine 100 (game machine) is attracted to and held by the side wall portion 920b of the speaker cover 920 without coming into contact with the magnet 914a or yoke 914c of the speaker 910.

The screw 931 is used to attach the speaker cover 920 to the front door 102. In this example, of the parts constituting the screw 931, only the head 931b is in contact with the side wall portion 920b of the speaker cover 920, and the tip 931c faces in the opposite direction to the side wall portion 920b, so that the screw 931 is held in the side wall portion 920b in an upright state.

According to this example, screws removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet, making the screws easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintainability and increasing convenience for gaming store staff. Also, the magnetic force can be weakened compared to when the speaker cover 920 (plastic member) is not present (when attached by magnet 914a or yoke 914c), allowing the screws to be removed with less force and improving workability.

In the example described using FIG. 48(b), only the head 930b of the screw 930 contacts the yoke 914c, the tip 930c faces the opposite direction to the yoke 914c, and the screw 930 is held by the yoke 914c in an upright state on the bottom surface of the yoke 914c. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple screws may be held by the yoke 914c.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 48(c), when multiple screws 932-934 are held by a yoke 914c, among the parts constituting the screw 932, only the tip 932c may be in contact with the yoke 914c, the head 932b may be facing in the opposite direction to the yoke 914c, and the screw 932 may be held by the yoke 914c in an upright state on the bottom surface of the yoke 914c.

In addition, when multiple screws 932 to 934 are held by the yoke 914c, among the parts constituting the screw 933, only the head 933b may be in contact with the yoke 914c, the tip 933c may be oriented in a direction opposite to the yoke 914c, and the screw 933 may be held by the yoke 914c in an upright state on the bottom surface of the yoke 914c.

In addition, when multiple screws 932 to 934 are held by the yoke 914c, the head 934b and tip 934c of the screw 934 may be in contact with the yoke 914c, and the screw 934 may be held by the yoke 914c in a state where it is lying sideways on the bottom surface of the yoke 914c.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a certain screw (e.g., screw 931 shown in FIG. 48(c)) and a magnet (e.g., magnet 914a shown in FIG. 48(c)), and is configured to be able to hold the certain screw that has been removed from the gaming machine by the magnetic force of the magnet, and is configured to be able to hold the certain screw through a plastic member (e.g., speaker cover 920 shown in FIG. 48(c)) by the magnetic force of the magnet.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, screws removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet, making the screws easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintainability and increasing convenience for gaming store staff, etc. Also, compared to when there is no plastic component (when directly attracted by a magnet), the magnetic force can be weakened, allowing the screws to be removed with less force, improving workability.

The device may also be configured to be capable of holding the screw that falls from a predetermined position away from the magnet by the magnetic force of the magnet.

This configuration can prevent screws from being lost by holding the screws that have slipped out of your hand during maintenance.

The magnet may also be provided on the inside of the door body (e.g., the front door 102 shown in FIG. 10).

With this configuration, the screws can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet when the door is open, improving maintainability.

The device may also include a speaker (e.g., speaker 910 shown in FIG. 48(c)), which may have the magnet.

With this configuration, the speaker can hold the screw, eliminating the need for a separate magnet and increasing convenience.

<Holding of a component by a speaker/Example 3>
Next, the holding of a member by a speaker (Example 3) will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 49 (a) is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which the sheet metal member 710 is held by the yoke 914c of the speaker 910.

The yoke 914c of the speaker 910 is magnetized by the magnet 914a, and a portion of the yoke 914c (the bottom surface and a portion of the side surface connected to the bottom surface) is exposed to the outside through the opening 920a of the speaker cover 920, so that the magnetic force of the magnet 914a can attract and hold a magnetic material in the yoke 914c.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 49(a), an iron sheet metal member 710 (a certain sheet metal) that has been removed from a slot machine 100 (a gaming table) is adsorbed and held by the yoke 914c.

As explained using Figures 37 and 41, the sheet metal member 710 is a member for mounting the main reel relay board unit 740 and the sub reel relay board unit 770, and is composed of a base portion 712 made of a rectangular plate-like body, and an outer wall 714 erected on one side in the thickness direction of the base portion 712 (the back side) with the outer edges of the four sides of the base portion 712 as base ends.

In this example, the sheet metal member 710 is directly held by the magnetic force of the yoke 914c, but the sheet metal member 710 may be indirectly held by the magnetic force of a screw attracted to the yoke 914c. Also, both the screw and the sheet metal member 710 may be held separately by the magnetic force of the yoke 914c.

In this example, screws and metal sheets removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet, making the screws and metal sheets easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintainability and increasing convenience for gaming store staff, etc.

The longitudinal length of the sheet metal member 710 is longer than the maximum width of the magnet 914a and the yoke 914c, and the sheet metal member 710 is held by the yoke 914c with one longitudinal side extending downward beyond the bottom plate 102a of the front door 102 and the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101 (see FIG. 10).

In this example, a portion of the sheet metal member 710 held by the yoke 914c is exposed to the outside beyond the lower edges of the main body 101 and the front door 102, so that the sheet metal member 710 can restrict the closure of the front door 102 and the sheet metal member 710 functions as a door stopper, which can improve the convenience of the worker when performing maintenance with the front door 102 open.

The material of the "certain metal plate" according to the present invention is not limited to iron, but may be, for example, a ferromagnetic material such as cobalt or nickel, or a paramagnetic material such as stainless steel containing iron.

The use of the "certain metal sheet" according to the present invention is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a metal sheet on which a board unit other than the main reel relay board unit 740 or the sub reel relay board unit 770 is arranged, or the metal sheet is arranged on the front door 102 (for example, an iron frame supporting the performance image display device 157, etc.), or the metal sheet is arranged on the main body 101 (for example, an iron reel frame supporting the reels 110-112, etc.).

The "certain screw" of the present invention may be held by a certain metal plate magnetized by a magnet, and the "certain metal plate" of the present invention may be held by a certain screw magnetized by a magnet, or by a certain member magnetized by a magnet, or may be held by a non-magnetic material (e.g., a resin member) between the certain member magnetized by a magnet.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a screw (e.g., screw 930 shown in FIG. 48(b)) and a magnet (e.g., magnet 914a shown in FIG. 49(a)), and is configured to be capable of holding the screw that has been removed from the gaming machine by the magnetic force of the magnet, and is configured to be capable of holding a piece of metal sheet (e.g., metal sheet member 710 shown in FIG. 49(a)) by the magnetic force of the magnet.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, screws and metal sheets removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of a magnet, making the screws and metal sheets easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintainability and increasing convenience for gaming store staff, etc.

The device may also be configured to be capable of holding the screw that falls from a predetermined position away from the magnet by the magnetic force of the magnet.

This configuration can prevent screws from being lost by holding the screws that have slipped out of your hand during maintenance.

The magnet may also be provided on the inside of the door body (e.g., the front door 102 shown in FIG. 10).

With this configuration, the screws can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet when the door is open, improving maintainability.

The device may also include a speaker (e.g., speaker 910 shown in FIG. 49(a)), which may have the magnet.

With this configuration, the speaker can hold the screw, eliminating the need for a separate magnet and increasing convenience.

<Holding of a component by a speaker/Example 4>
Next, the holding of a member by a speaker (Example 4) will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 49(b) is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which the screw 935 and washer 936 are held by the yoke 914c of the speaker 910.

The yoke 914c of the speaker 910 is magnetized by the magnet 914a, and a portion of the yoke 914c (the bottom surface and a portion of the side surface connected to the bottom surface) is exposed to the outside through the opening 920a of the speaker cover 920, so that the magnetic force of the magnet 914a can attract and hold a magnetic material in the yoke 914c.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 49(b), an iron screw 935 (a certain screw) and an iron washer 936 (a certain metal plate) that have been removed from a slot machine 100 (a gaming table) are adsorbed and held by the yoke 914c.

In this example, of the parts that make up the screw 935, only the head 935b is in contact with the yoke 914c, the tip 935c faces the opposite direction to the yoke 914c, and the screw 935 is held by the yoke 914c in an upright state on the bottom surface of the yoke 914c. In addition, the annular washer 936 is inserted into the threaded portion 935a of the screw 935 and is held by the yoke 914c via the head 935b of the magnetized screw 935.

In this example, screws and metal sheets removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet, making the screws and metal sheets easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintainability and increasing convenience for gaming store staff, etc.

The "certain metal plate" according to the present invention is not limited to a flat washer, but may be a spring washer, etc.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a screw (e.g., screw 935 shown in FIG. 49(b)) and a magnet (e.g., magnet 914a shown in FIG. 49(b)), and is configured to be able to hold the screw that has been removed from the gaming machine by the magnetic force of the magnet, and is configured to be able to hold a metal plate (e.g., washer 936 shown in FIG. 49(b)) by the magnetic force of the magnet.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, screws and metal sheets removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of a magnet, making the screws and metal sheets easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintainability and increasing convenience for gaming store staff, etc.

<Holding of components by speakers/Example 5>
Next, the holding of a member by a speaker (Example 5) will be described with reference to FIG. 50(a).

Figure 50 (a) is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which the screw 937 on which the setting key 938 is hooked is held by the yoke 914c of the speaker 910.

The yoke 914c of the speaker 910 is magnetized by the magnet 914a, and a portion of the yoke 914c (the bottom surface and a portion of the side surface connected to the bottom surface) is exposed to the outside through the opening 920a of the speaker cover 920, so that the magnetic force of the magnet 914a can attract and hold a magnetic material in the yoke 914c.

On the other hand, the setting key 938 and the door key (not shown) (which is inserted into the door key 140 described with reference to FIG. 1 to unlock the front door 102) are made of a non-magnetic material and are configured so as not to be attracted to the yoke 914c by the magnetic force of the magnet 914a.

This example prevents the setting key or door key from being held in an unintended location due to the magnetic force of the magnet, and prevents the setting key or door key from being lost.

The material of the setting key 938 and the door key is not limited to non-magnetic materials. For example, they may be materials that are not attracted by the magnetic force of the magnet 914a but are attracted by the magnetic force of a strong magnet such as a neodymium magnet, or they may be paramagnetic materials with a low iron content (weak magnetic properties). In this example, as shown in FIG. 50(a), an iron screw 937 (a certain screw) removed from the slot machine 100 (game table) is attracted and held by the yoke 914c, and a non-magnetic setting key 938 is hooked (hanging) on this screw 937.

The setting key 938 is a key for rotating (turning on and off) the setting key switch provided inside the front door 102, and is configured with a grip 938a for operating it and a key mountain 938b formed on one side extending from the grip 938a as a base end, and a through hole 938c is formed in the center of the grip 938a for hanging the setting key 938 on a key hook or the like.

In this example, of the parts that make up the screw 937, only the head 937b contacts the yoke 914c, the tip 937c faces the opposite direction to the yoke 914c, and the screw 937 is held by the yoke 914c in an upright state on the bottom surface of the yoke 914c. In addition, the setting key 938 is hooked (hanging) on the threaded portion 937a of the screw 937, with the through hole 938c formed in the grip portion 938a being inserted through the threaded portion 937a of the screw 937.

In this example, the screw to which the setting key is hooked can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet, making the setting key and screw easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintainability and increasing convenience for game store staff, etc.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a certain screw (e.g., screw 937 shown in FIG. 50(a)) and a magnet (e.g., magnet 914a shown in FIG. 50(a)), and is configured to be able to hold the certain screw that has been removed from the gaming machine by the magnetic force of the magnet, and is configured not to hold a door key by the magnetic force of the magnet.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, screws removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in a specified location by the magnetic force of the magnet, making the screws easier to handle and preventing the loss of screws and other items, improving maintainability and increasing convenience for gaming store staff, etc. In addition, the magnetic force of the magnet can be prevented from holding the door key in an unintended location, preventing the door key from being lost.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a screw (e.g., screw 937 shown in FIG. 50(a)) and a magnet (e.g., magnet 914a shown in FIG. 50(a)), and is configured to be able to hold the screw that has been removed from the gaming machine by the magnetic force of the magnet, and is configured not to hold a setting key (e.g., setting key 938 shown in FIG. 50(a)) by the magnetic force of the magnet.

According to the gaming machine of this embodiment, screws removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in a specified location by the magnetic force of the magnet, making the screws easier to handle and preventing the loss of screws and other items, improving maintainability and increasing convenience for gaming store staff, etc. In addition, the magnetic force of the magnet can be prevented from holding the setting key in an unintended location, preventing the setting key from being lost.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a screw (e.g., screw 937 shown in FIG. 50(a)) and a magnet (e.g., magnet 914a shown in FIG. 50(a)), and is configured to be able to hold the certain screw that has been removed from the gaming machine by the magnetic force of the magnet, and is configured to be able to hold the certain screw to which a setting key (e.g., setting key 938 shown in FIG. 50(a)) is hooked by the magnetic force of the magnet.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the screw to which the setting key is hooked can be held in place by the magnetic force of a magnet, making the setting key and screw easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintainability and increasing convenience for gaming store staff, etc.

The device may also be configured to be capable of holding the screw that falls from a predetermined position away from the magnet by the magnetic force of the magnet.

This configuration can prevent screws from being lost by holding the screws that have slipped out of your hand during maintenance.

The magnet may also be provided on the inside of the door body (e.g., the front door 102 shown in FIG. 10).

With this configuration, the screws can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet when the door is open, improving maintainability.

The device may also include a speaker (e.g., speaker 910 shown in FIG. 50(a)), which may have the magnet.

With this configuration, the speaker can hold the screw, eliminating the need for a separate magnet and increasing convenience.

<Holding of a member by a speaker/Example 6>
Next, the holding of a member by a speaker (Example 6) will be described with reference to FIG. 50(b).

Figure 50(b) is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing several examples in which the screws 940-942 to which the setting key 938 is hooked are held by the yoke 914c of the speaker 910.

The yoke 914c of the speaker 910 is magnetized by the magnet 914a, and a portion of the yoke 914c (the bottom surface and a portion of the side surface connected to the bottom surface) is exposed to the outside through the opening 920a of the speaker cover 920, so that the magnetic force of the magnet 914a can attract and hold a magnetic material in the yoke 914c.

On the other hand, the setting key 938 and the door key (not shown) (which is inserted into the door key 140 described with reference to FIG. 1 to unlock the front door 102) are made of a non-magnetic material and are configured so as not to be attracted to the yoke 914c by the magnetic force of the magnet 914a.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 50(b), iron screws 940-942 (certain screws) removed from the slot machine 100 (game table) are attracted to and held by the yoke 914c, and non-magnetic setting keys 938 are hooked (hanging) on the screws 940-942.

For example, of the parts that make up the screw 940, only the head 940b is in contact with the yoke 914c, the tip 940c faces the opposite direction to the yoke 914c, and the screw 940 is held by the yoke 914c in an upright state on the bottom surface of the yoke 914c. Also, the setting key 938 has a through hole 938c formed in the gripping part 938a hooked (suspended) on the tip 940c of the screw 940.

In this example, the inner diameter of the through hole 938c of the setting key 938 is larger than the outer diameter of the threaded portion 940a of the screw 940, and the through hole 938c of the setting key 938 cannot be inserted into the threaded portion 940a of the screw 940. However, the through hole 938c is configured to hook onto the tip 940c of the screw 940, and even a setting key with a small through hole can be hooked onto the screw.

As for the screw 941, only the tip 941c of the screw 941 contacts the yoke 914c, and the head 941b faces the opposite direction to the yoke 914c, and the screw 941 is held by the yoke 914c in an upright state on the bottom surface of the yoke 914c. Also, the setting key 938 has a through hole 938c formed in the gripping part 938a inserted into the threaded part 941a of the screw 941, and is hooked (hanging) on the threaded part 941a. In other words, the setting key 938 is held between the yoke 914c and the head 941b of the screw 941, preventing the setting key 938 from falling off the screw 941.

Furthermore, of the parts constituting the screw 942, only the threaded portion 942a contacts the side wall portion 920b of the speaker cover 920, and the screw 942 is held on the side wall portion 920b with the head 942b facing the rear of the front door 102 and aligned with the side wall portion 920b. The setting key 938 is hooked (hanging) on the threaded portion 942a, with the through hole 938c formed in the grip portion 938a being inserted through the threaded portion 942a of the screw 942. In other words, the setting key 938 is held between the side wall portion 920b of the speaker cover 920 and the head 942b of the screw 942, preventing the setting key 938 from falling off the screw 942.

In this example, the screw to which the setting key is hooked can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet, making the setting key and screw easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintainability and increasing convenience for game store staff, etc.

On the other hand, the magnet 914a is configured so that the setting key or door key is not held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet, so the setting key or door key can be prevented from being held in an unintended location by the magnetic force of the magnet, and the setting key or door key can be prevented from being lost.

<Holding of a component by a speaker/Example 7>
Next, the holding of a member by a speaker (Example 7) will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 51 is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example of how the yoke 914c of the speaker 910 holds the screws of the circuit board.

The yoke 914c of the speaker 910 is magnetized by the magnet 914a, and a portion of the yoke 914c (the bottom surface and a portion of the side surface connected to the bottom surface) is exposed to the outside through the opening 920a of the speaker cover 920, so that the magnetic force of the magnet 914a can attract and hold a magnetic material in the yoke 914c.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 51, a connector screw 674 (a certain screw) of a sub-side power supply relay board 670 that has been removed from a slot machine 100 (gaming machine) is adsorbed and held by a yoke 914c.

As described with reference to FIG. 46 etc., the sub-side power supply relay board 670 is configured to include a base material 672 made of a rectangular plate-like body, and a resin sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 etc. mounted (disposed) on the component side of this base material 672.

Two connector screws 674 are attached to the solder surface of the base material 672 to secure the sub-side power relay board first connector SVC1 from the solder surface side. These connector screws 674 are inserted from the solder surface side through the screw holes toward the component surface side, with their tips exposed on the component surface side, and nuts (not shown) are fastened to the exposed tips.

In this example, the circuit board removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet, making the circuit board easier to handle and preventing it from being lost, improving maintainability and increasing convenience for gaming store staff, etc.

The sub-side power relay board 670 is held by the yoke 914c with one side of the longitudinal direction extending downward beyond the bottom plate 102a of the front door 102 and the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101 (see FIG. 10).

In this example, a portion of the sub-side power supply relay board 670 held by the yoke 914c is exposed to the outside beyond the lower edges of the main body 101 and the front door 102, so that the sub-side power supply relay board 670 can regulate the closure of the front door 102, and the sub-side power supply relay board 670 functions as a door stopper, improving convenience for the worker when performing maintenance with the front door 102 open.

In this example, the screw for attaching the connector to the board is attracted to the yoke 914c by the magnetic force of the magnet, but the present invention is not limited to this. A certain screw may be attracted to the yoke 914c by the magnetic force of the magnet, and a certain board may be hooked onto the certain screw to hold the certain board.

In addition, the board held by the magnetic force of the magnet is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a main control board (board constituting the main control unit 300), a sub-control board (board constituting the sub-control unit 400), a payout control board, a power supply board, a performance control board (board constituting the second sub-control unit 500), a main relay board, a sub-relay board, a lighting board, a light-emitting board, a reel relay board, a sensor board, etc.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a certain screw (e.g., connector screw 674 shown in FIG. 51) and a magnet (e.g., magnet 914a shown in FIG. 51), and is configured to be able to hold the certain screw that has been removed from the gaming machine by the magnetic force of the magnet, and is configured to be able to hold a board (e.g., sub-side power supply relay board 670 shown in FIG. 51) via the certain screw by the magnetic force of the magnet.

The gaming machine of this embodiment can hold the board in place using the magnetic force of a magnet via a certain screw, making the board easier to handle and preventing it from being lost, improving maintainability, and increasing convenience for gaming store staff, etc.

<Holding of components by speakers/Example 8>
Next, the holding of a member by a speaker (Embodiment 8) will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 52 is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which two boards connected by a connector are held by screws using the yoke 914c of the speaker 910.

The yoke 914c of the speaker 910 is magnetized by the magnet 914a, and a portion of the yoke 914c (the bottom surface and a portion of the side surface connected to the bottom surface) is exposed to the outside through the opening 920a of the speaker cover 920, so that the magnetic force of the magnet 914a can attract and hold a magnetic material in the yoke 914c.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 51, the connector screw 674 (a certain screw) of the sub-side power supply relay board 670, which has been removed from the slot machine 100 (game machine) while connected to the sub-side reel relay board unit 770 in a board-to-board manner, is adsorbed and held by the yoke 914c. Note that the sub-side power supply relay board 670 has been explained using FIG. 51, so its explanation will be omitted.

The sub-side reel relay board unit 770 has a female sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 that has a complementary shape to the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 of the sub-side power supply relay board 670, and the sub-side reel relay board unit 770 and the sub-side power supply relay board 670 are configured to enable board-to-board connection via the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 and the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1.

In this example, multiple circuit boards that are removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnets, making the multiple circuit boards easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintainability and increasing convenience for gaming store staff, etc.

In addition, the sub-side power supply relay board 670 and the sub-side reel relay board unit 770 are held by the yoke 914c in a state where they protrude below the lower plate 102a of the front door 102 and the lower plate 264 of the main body 101 (see FIG. 10) when connected board-to-board by the connector. According to this example, a part of the sub-side power supply relay board 670 and the sub-side reel relay board unit 770 held by the yoke 914c is exposed to the outside from the lower edge of the main body 101 and the front door 102, so that the sub-side power supply relay board 670 and the sub-side reel relay board unit 770 can regulate the closing of the front door 102, and the sub-side power supply relay board 670 and the sub-side reel relay board unit 770 function as a door stopper, which improves the convenience of the worker when performing maintenance with the front door 102 open.

In this example, the screw for attaching the connector to the board is attracted to the yoke 914c by the magnetic force of the magnet, but the present invention is not limited to this. A certain screw may be attracted to the yoke 914c by the magnetic force of the magnet, and a certain number of boards may be hooked onto the certain screw to hold the certain number of boards.

The second board connected by a connector to the first board held by the magnetic force of the magnet is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a main control board (board constituting the main control unit 300), a sub-control board (board constituting the sub-control unit 400), a payout control board, a power supply board, a performance control board (board constituting the second sub-control unit 500), a main relay board, a sub-relay board, a lighting board, a light-emitting board, a reel relay board, a sensor board, etc.

In addition, the first board held by the magnetic force of a magnet and the second board indirectly held by this first board are not limited to boards connected by a connector, but may be, for example, a first board and a second board housed in the same board case (whether or not they are electrically connected), or a first board and a second board connected by a cable or harness, or there may be multiple second boards indirectly held by a first board held by the magnetic force of a magnet.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a certain screw (e.g., connector screw 674 shown in FIG. 52) and a magnet (e.g., magnet 914a shown in FIG. 52), and is configured to be able to hold the certain screw that has been removed from the gaming machine by the magnetic force of the magnet, and is configured to be able to hold a board (e.g., sub-side power supply relay board 670 and sub-side reel relay board unit 770 shown in FIG. 52) via the certain screw by the magnetic force of the magnet.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment can hold multiple boards in place via a screw using the magnetic force of a magnet, making the multiple boards easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintainability, and increasing convenience for gaming store staff, etc.

<Holding of components by speakers/Example 9>
Next, the holding of a member by a speaker (Example 9) will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 53 is a side view of the speaker unit 900, showing an example in which a screw 944 that falls from a predetermined position is held by the yoke 914c of the speaker 910.

The yoke 914c of the speaker 910 is magnetized by the magnet 914a, and a portion of the yoke 914c (the bottom surface and a portion of the side surface connected to the bottom surface) is exposed to the outside through the opening 920a of the speaker cover 920, so that the magnetic force of the magnet 914a can attract and hold a magnetic material in the yoke 914c.

In this example, even if, for example, an employee of an amusement facility undergoing maintenance accidentally drops an iron screw 944 that has been removed from a slot machine 100 (game machine) from the specified position indicated by the symbol X in FIG. 53(a) and the screw 944 falls vertically without changing its position, the screw 944 is attracted by the magnetic force of the magnet 914a and the yoke 914c, and is adsorbed and held by the yoke 914c, as shown in FIG. 53(b).

Here, the "predetermined position" in this example is a position based on the position of the tip 944c of the screw 944, and is, for example, a position that is away from the magnet 914a toward the rear of the front door 102 by the length L1 of the screw 944, and a position that is away from the yoke 914c toward the top of the front door 102 by the length L2/2 of the radius of the magnet 914a (half the length of the diameter L2).

In this example, when the screw 944 is attracted by the magnetic force of the magnet 914a and the yoke 914c and is held by the yoke 914c, of the parts that make up the screw 944, only the head 944b is in contact with the yoke 914c, the tip 944c faces in the opposite direction to the yoke 914c, and the screw 944 is held by the yoke 914c in an upright position on the bottom surface of the yoke 914c.

In this example, screws that are removed and accidentally dropped during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet, making the screws easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintainability and increasing convenience for gaming store staff, etc.

The "predetermined position" in this example is not limited to the position shown in the example, and may be any position that is far enough away from the magnet 914a toward the rear of the front door 102 that the screw 944 does not come into contact with the yoke 914c when it falls. For example, the screw 944 may be located at a distance from the magnet 914a toward the rear of the front door 102 that is the length L3 of the diameter of the head 944b of the screw 944. In addition, the screw is not limited to a "screw that has fallen from a predetermined position," and may be, for example, a screw that an amusement arcade employee or the like has shot toward the yoke 914c, or a screw that has fallen onto the underside of the front door 102 or the main body 101 and bounced off.

<Holding of components by speakers/Example 10>
Next, the holding of a member by a speaker (Example 10) will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 54 (a) is a plan view of the speaker unit 950, and (b) is a side view of the speaker unit 950, showing an example in which the screws 945 to 948 are held by the yoke 914c of the speaker 910.

The speaker unit 950 in this example is composed of a speaker 910 (a certain speaker) and a speaker cover (rear cover) 970 (a resin member) that covers the rear side of the speaker 910. Note that the speaker 910 has been explained using FIG. 48(a), so its explanation is omitted.

The speaker cover 970 is a resin member that houses most of the speaker 910 inside, and as shown in FIG. 54(b), it has a cylindrical housing portion 970a that can house the magnet 914a, yoke 914c, etc. of the speaker 910, and a stepped cylindrical side wall portion 970b that widens slightly toward the front from the housing portion 970a as its base end.

As shown in FIG. 54(a), the upper surface 970a1 of the housing 970a is disposed so as to cover the yoke 914c of the speaker 910, and the upper surface 970a1 of the housing 970a has a plurality of vents 970a2 formed as circular holes.

The inner diameter of this ventilation hole 970a2 is larger than the outer diameter of the threaded portions 945a to 948a of the screws 945 to 948, and smaller than the outer diameter of the heads 945b to 948b. In other words, the ventilation hole 970a2 is configured so that the threaded portions 945a to 948a of the screws 945 to 948 can pass through it, but the heads 945b to 948b cannot.

The yoke 914c of the speaker 910 is magnetized by the magnet 914a, and the magnetic flux of the magnet 914a and the yoke 914c flows to the outside through the speaker cover 970, so that the magnetic force of the magnet 914a can attract and hold a magnetic material through the speaker cover 970.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 54(b), iron screws 945-948 (certain screws) removed from the slot machine 100 (game machine) are attracted to and held on the side of the housing 970a of the speaker cover 970 without coming into contact with the magnet 914a or yoke 914c of the speaker 910.

The screw 948 is used to attach the speaker cover 970 to the front door 102. In this example, of the parts that make up the screw 948, only the head 948b is in contact with the side of the storage section 970a of the speaker cover 970, and the tip 948c faces in the opposite direction to the side of the storage section 970a, so that the screw 948 is held in the storage section 970a in an upright position on the side of the storage section 970a.

According to this example, screws removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet, making the screws easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintainability and increasing convenience for gaming store staff. Also, the magnetic force can be weakened compared to when the speaker cover 970 (plastic member) is not present, allowing the screws to be removed with less force and improving workability.

As for the screw 945, among the parts constituting the screw 945, only the head 945b is in contact with the upper surface 970a1 of the housing portion 970a of the speaker cover 970, and the tip 945c faces in the direction opposite to the upper surface 970a1, so that the screw 945 is held in the speaker cover 970 in an upright state on the upper surface 970a1 of the housing portion 970a of the speaker cover 970.

As for the screw 946, the tip 946c and the threaded portion 946a of the screw 946 enter the interior of the accommodation portion 970a of the speaker cover 970 through the ventilation hole 970a2 of the accommodation portion 970a, and the head 946b is hooked on the upper surface 970a1 of the accommodation portion 970a, so that the screw 946 is held by the speaker cover 970. Note that in this example, the tip 946c of the screw 946 is not in contact with the yoke 914c, but it may be in contact.

Furthermore, of the parts constituting the screw 947, the head 947b and the tip 947c are in contact with the upper surface 970a1 of the housing portion 970a of the speaker cover 970, and the screw 947 is held by the speaker cover 970 in a state where it is lying sideways on the upper surface 970a1 of the housing portion 970a.

As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a certain screw (e.g., screws 945-948 shown in FIG. 54(b)) and a magnet (e.g., magnet 914a shown in FIG. 54(b)), and is configured to be able to hold the certain screw that has been removed from the gaming machine by the magnetic force of the magnet, and is configured to be able to hold the certain screw through a plastic member by the magnetic force of the magnet.

With the gaming machine of this embodiment, screws removed during maintenance of the gaming machine can be held in place by the magnetic force of the magnet, making the screws easier to handle and preventing them from being lost, improving maintainability and increasing convenience for gaming store staff. In addition, the magnetic force can be weakened compared to when there is no plastic member, allowing the screws to be removed with less force and improving workability.

<Freestanding board>
Next, the free-standing substrate will be described with reference to FIG.

<Freestanding board/Place board horizontally>
FIG. 55A is a diagram showing a state in which the power supply main board 640 is placed horizontally on the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101.

As explained with reference to Figure 46 etc., the power supply main board 640 (a certain board) is configured with a base material 642 consisting of a rectangular plate-like body, and a main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 (a certain circuit component) made of resin mounted (disposed) on the component surface 642a of this base material 642, a main side power supply relay board second connector MVC2, and a main side power supply relay board third connector MVC3.

The power supply main board 640 is electrically connected to the connector of the power supply board of the power supply device 252 described using FIG. 2 via the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 to main side power supply relay board third connector MVC3 and a harness (wiring) not shown, and is a board that relays between the main control board 210a (main board) and the power supply board.

The main power supply relay board first connector MVC1 to main power supply relay board third connector MVC3 are arranged on the component surface 642a of the substrate 642, and a resist layer, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conductive parts (vias, through holes), silk printing, etc. are also formed.

On the other hand, no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface 642b of the substrate 642, but a resist layer, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conductive parts (vias, through holes), silk printing, etc. are formed, and the tips of the lead terminals MVLD of the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 to main side power supply relay board third connector MVC3 mounted on the component surface 642a protrude, and solder (not shown) is formed to electrically connect the tips of the lead terminals MVLD to the wiring patterns, etc. on the solder surface 642b.

In addition, two connector screws 644 are attached to the solder surface 642b to secure the main power relay board first connector MVC1 from the solder surface 642b side.

The connector screw 644 is inserted from the solder surface 642b side of the base material 642 through the screw hole toward the component surface 642a side, with the tip exposed on the component surface 642a side, and a nut is fastened to the exposed tip. In this way, the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 is fixed to the base material 642 of the power supply main board 640 by two sets of connector screws 644 and nuts.

As described above, the main side power relay board first connector MVC1 to the main side power relay board third connector MVC3 are all disposed on the component surface 642a, which is one side in the thickness direction of the base material 642 of the power supply main board 640, and the maximum height h1 of the main side power relay board first connector MVC1 from the component surface 642a is higher than the maximum height h2 of the main side power relay board second connector MVC2 to the main side power relay board third connector MVC3 from the component surface 642a (h1>h2), and among the main side power relay board first connector MVC1 to the main side power relay board third connector MVC3, the main side power relay board first connector MVC1 is the connector with the highest height from the component surface 642a.

Furthermore, no components are mounted on the component surface 642a of the power supply main board 640 that are taller from the component surface 642a than the main side power relay board first connector MVC1, and of all the components mounted on the component surface 642a of the power supply main board 640, the main side power relay board first connector MVC1 is the component that is tallest from the component surface 642a.

With this configuration, as shown in FIG. 55(a), when the power supply main board 640 (certain board) removed from the slot machine 100 (game table) is placed on the bottom panel (horizontal surface) of the main body 101 of the slot machine 100 (game table) with the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 (certain circuit component) facing down, the power supply main board 640 (certain board) stands independently parallel to the bottom panel 264 (horizontal surface) of the main body 101 with the resin part of the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 (certain circuit component) in contact with the bottom panel 264 (horizontal surface) of the main body 101.

According to this example, damage due to a short circuit of a certain board temporarily placed during maintenance can be prevented, and maintainability can be improved. In addition, a certain board can be stably placed on a horizontal surface, and the efficiency of maintenance work can be improved.

The "certain board" according to the present invention is not limited to the power supply main board 640, but may be a main control board (board constituting the main control unit 300), a sub-control board (board constituting the sub-control unit 400), a payout control board, a power supply board, a performance control board (board constituting the second sub-control unit 500), a main relay board, a sub-relay board, a lighting board, a light-emitting board, a reel relay board, a sensor board, etc. It may also be the power supply sub-board 670, which will be described next.

As explained with reference to Figure 46 etc., the power supply sub-board 670 (a certain board) is composed of a base material 672 made of a rectangular plate-like body, and a resin sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 (a certain circuit component) mounted (disposed) on the component surface 672a of this base material 672, a sub-side power supply relay board second connector SVC2, a sub-side power supply relay board third connector SVC3, and a sub-side power supply relay board fourth connector SVC4.

The sub-side power supply relay board 670 is electrically connected to the connector of the power supply board of the power supply device 252 described using FIG. 2 via the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 to the sub-side power supply relay board fourth connector SVC4 and a harness (wiring) not shown, and is a board that relays between the sub-control board 220a (sub-board) and the power supply board.

As described above, the sub-side power relay board first connector SVC1 to the sub-side power relay board fourth connector SVC4 are all disposed on the component surface 672a, which is one side in the thickness direction of the base material 672 of the power supply sub-board 670. Although not shown in the figure, the maximum height of the sub-side power relay board first connector SVC1 from the component surface 672a is higher than the maximum height of the sub-side power relay board second connector SVC2 to the sub-side power relay board fourth connector SVC4 from the component surface 672a, and among the sub-side power relay board first connector SVC1 to the sub-side power relay board fourth connector SVC4, the sub-side power relay board first connector SVC1 is the connector with the highest height from the component surface 672a.

Furthermore, no components are mounted on the component surface 672a of the power supply sub-board 670 that are taller from the component surface 672a than the sub-side power relay board first connector SVC1, and of all the components mounted on the component surface 672a of the power supply sub-board 670, the sub-side power relay board first connector SVC1 is the component that is tallest from the component surface 672a.

With this configuration, when the power supply sub-board 670 (a certain board) removed from the slot machine 100 (gaming table) is placed on the bottom panel (horizontal surface) of the main body 101 of the slot machine 100 (gaming table) with the sub-side power supply relay board first connector SVC1 (a certain circuit component) facing down, the power supply sub-board 670 (a certain board) stands independently parallel to the bottom panel 264 (horizontal surface) of the main body 101 with the resin part of the sub-side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 (a certain circuit component) in contact with the bottom panel 264 (horizontal surface) of the main body 101.

According to this example, damage due to a short circuit of a certain board temporarily placed during maintenance can be prevented, and maintainability can be improved. In addition, a certain board can be stably placed on a horizontal surface, and the efficiency of maintenance work can be improved.

The "horizontal surface" according to the present invention is not limited to the bottom panel 264 of the main body 101, but may be the top panel 261 of the main body 101 (see FIG. 10), etc., or may be a workbench, etc. The member constituting the "horizontal surface" may be a member made of wood, resin, or metal, or a member made of metal and coated with a non-conductive paint, etc.

<Freestanding board/Placing board horizontally/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a certain board (e.g., the power supply main board 640 shown in FIG. 55(a)) having a certain circuit component (e.g., the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 shown in FIG. 55(a)), and is characterized in that when the certain board removed from the gaming machine is placed on a horizontal surface of the gaming machine (e.g., the bottom panel 264 of the main body 101 shown in FIG. 55(a)) with at least the certain circuit component facing down (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the certain board is configured to stand on its own with at least the resin portion of the certain circuit component in contact with the horizontal surface.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment can prevent damage caused by short circuits in a board that is temporarily placed during maintenance, improving maintainability.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a certain board (e.g., power supply main board 640 shown in FIG. 55(a)) having a certain circuit component (e.g., main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 shown in FIG. 55(a)), and when the certain board removed from the gaming machine is placed on a horizontal surface of the gaming machine (e.g., bottom panel 264 of main body 101 shown in FIG. 55(a)) with at least the certain circuit component facing down (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the certain board is configured to stand on its own with at least the resin portion of the certain circuit component in contact with the horizontal surface, and in the first case, the certain board is configured to stand on its own parallel to the horizontal surface.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment can prevent damage caused by short circuits to a certain board that is temporarily placed during maintenance, improving maintainability. In addition, a certain board can be stably placed on a horizontal surface, improving the efficiency of maintenance work.

In the first case, a certain circuit of the certain board (for example, the connector terminals of the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 to the main side power supply relay board third connector MVC3 shown in FIG. 55(a), and electronic components, wiring patterns, pads, lands, and interlayer conductive parts (vias, through holes) mounted on the component surface 642a and solder surface 642b of the base material 642 of the power supply main board 640) may be configured so as not to be conductive with the horizontal surface.

This configuration can prevent damage to certain circuits and improve maintainability.

In the first case, the certain board may be configured to be self-supporting with only the certain circuit component in contact with the horizontal surface.

This configuration can prevent wear and deterioration of components other than certain circuit components, improving maintainability.

The certain board may also be a board that is electrically connected to a main board (e.g., main control board 210a) or a sub-board (e.g., sub-control board 220a).

<Freestanding substrate/substrate placed vertically>
FIG. 55(b) is a diagram showing a state in which the reel main board 742 is placed vertically on the lower panel 264 of the main body 101.

As explained with reference to Figure 46 etc., the reel main board 742 (a certain board) is composed of a base material 748 made of a rectangular plate-like body, a resin main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 (a certain circuit component) arranged on the component surface 748a of this base material 748, and the main side reel relay board second connector MRC2 to the main side reel relay board seventh connector MRC7.

The main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 to main side reel relay board seventh connector MRC7 are arranged on the component surface 748a of the base material 748, and although not shown, various ICs, resist layers, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conductive parts (vias, through holes), silk printing, etc. are also formed.

On the other hand, no components are mounted on the solder surface 748b of the base material 748, and a solid ground pattern is formed. In addition, the tips of the lead terminals MRLD of the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 to the main side reel relay board seventh connector MRC7 mounted on the component surface 748a protrude, and solder (not shown) is formed to electrically connect the tips of the lead terminals MRLD to the wiring pattern, etc., of the solder surface 748b.

The solder surface 748b is also provided with screw holes into which screws 750 or nuts can be inserted to secure the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 to the substrate 748 from the solder surface 748b side of the substrate 748. Note that connectors other than the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 are soldered to the substrate 748, and the only component secured to the substrate 748 using screws is the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), this main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 is disposed on the component surface 748a, which is one side in the thickness direction of the base material 748 of the reel main board 742, with a portion of it protruding from one side in the plate surface direction of the base material 748, and the protruding length from the side of the base material 748 is h3.

With this configuration, when the reel main board 742 (a certain board) removed from the slot machine 100 (gaming table) is placed on the bottom panel (horizontal surface) of the main body 101 of the slot machine 100 (gaming table) with the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 (a certain circuit component) facing down, the reel main board 742 (a certain board) stands vertically on its own against the bottom panel 264 (horizontal surface) of the main body 101 with the resin part of the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 (a certain circuit component) in contact with the bottom panel 264 (horizontal surface) of the main body 101.

According to this example, damage due to a short circuit of a board temporarily placed during maintenance can be prevented, and maintainability can be improved. In addition, when placing multiple components on a horizontal surface, the area occupied on the horizontal surface can be reduced, and the efficiency of maintenance work can be improved.

The main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 of the reel main board 742 is a male connector having a complementary shape to the main side power relay board first connector MVC1 of the power main board 640, which is a female connector, and can be directly attached to and detached from the main side power relay board first connector MVC1. The reel main board 742 is electrically connected to the main control board 210a (main board) via this main side power relay board first connector MVC1, the power main board 640, and a harness (wiring) not shown.

Note that the "certain board" according to the present invention is not limited to the reel main board 742, but may also be the reel sub-board 772, which will be described next.

As explained with reference to Figure 46 etc., the reel sub-board 772 (a certain board) is composed of a base material 778 made of a rectangular plate-like body, a resin sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 (a certain circuit component) arranged on the component surface 778a of this base material 778, and the sub-side reel relay board second connector SRC2 to the sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7.

The component surface 778a of the substrate 778 is provided with the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 to the sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7, as well as various ICs, resist layers, wiring patterns, pads, lands, interlayer conductive parts (vias, through holes), silk printing, etc.

On the other hand, no components are mounted on the solder surface 778b of the base material 778, and a solid ground pattern is formed. In addition, the tips of the lead terminals SRLD of the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 to the sub-side reel relay board seventh connector SRC7 mounted on the component surface 778a protrude, and solder (not shown) is formed to electrically connect the tips of the lead terminals SRLD to the wiring pattern, etc., on the solder surface 778b.

Furthermore, the solder surface 778b is formed with screw holes 779 into which screws 780 (third screws) and nuts 785 can be inserted to secure the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 to the substrate 778 (first substrate) from the solder surface 778b side of the substrate 778. Note that connectors other than the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 are soldered to the substrate 778, and the only component secured to the substrate 778 with screws is the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1.

Although not shown in the figure, this sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 is disposed on the component surface 778a, which is one side in the thickness direction of the base material 778 of the reel sub-board 772, with a portion of it protruding from one side in the plate surface direction of the base material 778, and the protruding length from the side of the base material 778 is the same as h3 as the main-side reel relay board first connector MRC1.

With this configuration, when the reel sub-board 772 (a certain board) removed from the slot machine 100 (gaming table) is placed on the bottom panel (horizontal surface) of the main body 101 of the slot machine 100 (gaming table) with the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 (a certain circuit component) facing down, the reel sub-board 772 (a certain board) stands vertically on its own against the bottom panel 264 (horizontal surface) of the main body 101 with the resin part of the sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 (a certain circuit component) in contact with the bottom panel 264 (horizontal surface) of the main body 101.

According to this example, damage due to a short circuit of a board temporarily placed during maintenance can be prevented, and maintainability can be improved. In addition, when placing multiple components on a horizontal surface, the area occupied on the horizontal surface can be reduced, and the efficiency of maintenance work can be improved.

The sub-side reel relay board first connector SRC1 of the reel sub-board 772 is a male connector having a complementary shape to the sub-side power relay board first connector SVC1 of the power sub-board 670, which is a female connector, and can be directly attached to and detached from the sub-side power relay board first connector SVC1. The reel sub-board 772 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 220a (sub-board) via this sub-side power relay board first connector SVC1, the power sub-board 670, and a harness (wiring) not shown.

<Freestanding board/Placing board vertically/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a certain board (e.g., the reel main board 742 shown in FIG. 55(b)) having a certain circuit component (e.g., the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 shown in FIG. 55(b)), and is characterized in that when the certain board removed from the gaming machine is placed on a horizontal surface of the gaming machine (e.g., the bottom panel 264 of the main body 101 shown in FIG. 55(b)) with at least the certain circuit component facing down (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the certain board is configured to stand on its own with at least a resin portion of the certain circuit component in contact with the horizontal surface.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment can prevent damage caused by short circuits in a board that is temporarily placed during maintenance, improving maintainability.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a certain board (e.g., reel main board 742 shown in FIG. 55(b)) having a certain circuit component (e.g., main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 in FIG. 55(b)), and is characterized in that when the certain board removed from the gaming machine is placed on a horizontal surface of the gaming machine (e.g., bottom panel 264 of main body 101 shown in FIG. 55(b)) with at least the certain circuit component facing down (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"), the certain board is configured to stand on its own with at least the resin portion of the certain circuit component in contact with the horizontal surface, and in the first case, the certain board is configured to stand on its own vertically to the horizontal surface.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment can prevent damage caused by short circuits in a circuit board that is temporarily placed during maintenance, improving maintainability. In addition, when multiple parts are placed on a horizontal surface, the area they occupy on the horizontal surface can be reduced, improving the efficiency of maintenance work.

In the first case, a certain circuit of the certain board (for example, the connector terminals of the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 to the main side reel relay board seventh connector MRC7 shown in FIG. 55(b), and electronic components, wiring patterns, pads, lands, and interlayer conductive parts (vias, through holes) mounted on the component surface 748a and solder surface 748b of the base material 748 of the reel main board 742) may be configured so as not to be conductive with the horizontal surface.

This configuration can prevent damage to certain circuits and improve maintainability.

In the first case, the certain board may be configured to be self-supporting with only the certain circuit component in contact with the horizontal surface.

This configuration can prevent wear and deterioration of components other than certain circuit components, improving maintainability.

The certain board may also be a board that is electrically connected to a main board (e.g., main control board 210a) or a sub-board (e.g., sub-control board 220a).

<Freestanding Substrate/Modification 1>
Next, a first modified example of the free-standing substrate will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 56 (a) shows the power supply main board 640 placed at an angle on the bottom panel 264 of the main body 101.

In this example, the power supply main board 640 is placed at an angle on the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101 so that two points, an end of the side surface (the surface that is neither the component surface 642a nor the solder surface 642b) of the base material 642 of the power supply main board 640 and an end of the resin main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1, come into contact with the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101.

The material of the substrate 642 is glass cloth epoxy resin (glass cloth impregnated with a resin material (epoxy resin)), but it may also be glass cloth phenolic resin (glass cloth impregnated with a resin material (phenolic resin)) or paper impregnated with a resin material (epoxy resin or phenolic resin).

That is, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a certain board (for example, the power supply main board 640 shown in FIG. 56(a)) having a certain circuit component (for example, the main power supply relay board first connector MVC1 shown in FIG. 56(a)), and when the certain board removed from the gaming machine is placed on a horizontal surface (for example, the bottom panel 264 of the main body 101 shown in FIG. 56(a)) of the gaming machine with at least the certain circuit component (for example, the main power supply relay board first connector MVC1 and the base material 642 shown in FIG. 56(a)) facing down, the certain board is configured to stand on its own with at least the resin portion of the certain circuit component in contact with the horizontal surface.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment can prevent damage caused by short circuits in a board that is temporarily placed during maintenance, improving maintainability.

The "certain board" according to the present invention is not limited to the power supply main board 640, but may also be the power supply sub-board 670, a main control board (a board constituting the main control unit 300), a sub-control board (a board constituting the sub-control unit 400), a payout control board, a power supply board, a performance control board (a board constituting the second sub-control unit 500), a main relay board, a sub-relay board, a lighting board, a light-emitting board, a reel relay board, a sensor board, etc.

<Freestanding Substrate/Modification 2>
Next, a second modified example of the free-standing substrate will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 56 (b) shows the reel main board 742 placed at an angle on the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101.

In this example, the reel main board 742 is placed at an angle on the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101 so that two points, the end of the resin main side reel relay board first connector MRC1 and the end of the resin main side reel relay board sixth connector MRC6, abut against the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101.

That is, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a certain board (e.g., reel main board 742 shown in FIG. 56(b)) having a certain circuit component (e.g., main reel relay board first connector MRC1 shown in FIG. 56(b)), and is characterized in that when the certain board removed from the gaming machine is placed on a horizontal surface (e.g., bottom panel 264 of main body 101 shown in FIG. 56(b)) of the gaming machine with at least the certain circuit component (e.g., main reel relay board first connector MRC1 and main reel relay board sixth connector MRC6 shown in FIG. 56(b)) facing down, the certain board is configured to stand on its own with at least the resin portion of the certain circuit component in contact with the horizontal surface.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment can prevent damage caused by short circuits in a board that is temporarily placed during maintenance, improving maintainability.

The "certain board" according to the present invention is not limited to the reel main board 742, but may be a reel sub board 772, a main control board (a board constituting the main control unit 300), a sub control board (a board constituting the sub control unit 400), a payout control board, a power supply board, a performance control board (a board constituting the second sub control unit 500), a main relay board, a sub relay board, a lighting board, a light emitting board, a reel relay board, a sensor board, etc.

In addition, in this example, two resin members are used to make a certain substrate stand on its own, but three or more resin members may be used to make a certain substrate stand on its own.

<Freestanding Substrate/Modification 3>
Next, a third modified example of the free-standing substrate will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 57 shows the state in which the power supply main board 640 and the reel main board 742, which are connected board-to-board, are placed at an angle on the bottom panel 264 of the main body 101.

As described above, the power supply main board 640 and the reel main board 742 are connected board-to-board via the main side power supply relay board first connector MVC1 and the main side reel relay board first connector MRC1.

In this example, with the power supply main board 640 and the reel main board 742 connected board-to-board, the power supply main board 640 and the reel main board 742 are placed at an angle on the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101 so that three points abut against the bottom plate 264 of the main body 101: the end of the side (the surface that is neither the component surface 642a nor the solder surface 642b) of the base material 642 of the power supply main board 640, the end of the resin main side reel relay board first connector MRC1, and the end of the resin main side reel relay board sixth connector MRC6.

That is, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is a gaming machine equipped with a certain board (for example, the reel main board 742 shown in FIG. 57) having a certain circuit component (for example, the main reel relay board first connector MRC1 shown in FIG. 57), and is characterized in that when the certain board removed from the gaming machine is placed on a horizontal surface (for example, the bottom panel 264 of the main body 101 shown in FIG. 57) of the gaming machine with at least the certain circuit components (for example, the base material 642 of the power supply main board 640 shown in FIG. 57, the main reel relay board first connector MRC1, and the main reel relay board sixth connector MRC6) facing down, the certain board is configured to stand on its own with at least the resin portion of the certain circuit component in contact with the horizontal surface.

The gaming machine according to this embodiment can prevent damage caused by shorting of a board temporarily placed during maintenance, improving maintainability. In addition, since the board can be supported at three points, the load (reaction force) on the board can be reduced. Furthermore, since the connector used for board-to-board connection can be brought into contact with a horizontal surface, the load on the connector can be reduced, and it is possible to prevent situations in which the connection between boards connected board-to-board becomes loose.

<Light-transmitting substrate>
Next, the light-transmitting substrate will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Light-Transmitting Substrate/Substrate Configuration>
First, the configuration of the substrate according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 58(a), which is a cross-sectional view showing a part of the cross section of the substrate according to this embodiment.

The substrate (certain substrate) 980 according to this embodiment is configured to have a substrate 982 that serves as a base member, a front surface 984 (first surface) that is a wiring pattern disposed on one side of the substrate 982, and a back surface 986 (second surface) that is a wiring pattern disposed on the other side of the substrate 982.

The type of board (a certain board) 980 is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, a main control board (a board constituting the main control unit 300), a sub-control board (a board constituting the sub-control unit 400), a payout control board, a power supply board, a performance control board (a board constituting the second sub-control unit 500), a main relay board, a sub-relay board, a lighting board, a light-emitting board, a reel relay board, a sensor board, etc. Any board that has been moved from its mounting position may be used.

The substrate 982 is a transparent member that allows light to pass through. The material of the substrate 982 is not particularly limited, but examples of materials that can be used include CEM-3, FR-4, FR-5, aluminum, metal, PTFE (Teflon (registered trademark)), polyimide, glass cloth, glass cloth epoxy resin, and glass nonwoven substrate epoxy resin. In addition, the thickness of the substrate 982 is not particularly limited, but in this example, a substrate with a thickness of approximately 1.6 mm is used.

The front surface 984 is composed of copper foil 984a (third region) and resist 984b (first region) laminated on the copper foil 984a or on the base material 982, and the back surface 986 is composed of copper foil 986a (fourth region) and resist 986b (second region) laminated on the copper foil 986a or on the base material 982.

The copper foils 984a and 986a are components that make up the circuit pattern (conductor layer) of the board and are not light-transmitting. There are no particular limitations on the thickness of the copper foils 984a and 986a, but in this example, copper foils with a thickness of approximately 18 μm are used.

The resists 984b and 986b are members (protective layers) for protecting the base material 982 and the copper foils 984a and 986a, and are transparent members that can transmit light. There are no particular limitations on the thickness of the resists 984b and 986b, but in this example, a resist with a thickness of approximately 20 μm is used.

The substrate 980 can be classified into three types, region A, region B, and region C, depending on the combination of materials laminated to the base material 928. Region A is a region in which the front surface 984 is composed of copper foil 984a and resist 984b, and the back surface 986 is composed of copper foil 986a and resist 986b, and may hereinafter be referred to as "region A (with copper foil on front surface, with copper foil on back surface)."

Region B is an area where the front surface 984 is made up of only resist 984b and the back surface 986 is made up of only resist 986b, and may hereinafter be referred to as "Region B (no copper foil on front surface, no copper foil on back surface)."

Region C (a certain region) is a region in which the front surface 984 is composed only of resist 984b and the back surface 986 is composed of copper foil 986a and resist 986b, and may hereinafter be referred to as "Region C (no copper foil on front surface, copper foil on back surface)."

<Light-transmitting substrate/substrate brightness (no light source)>
Next, the brightness of the substrate when there is no light source will be described with reference to Fig. 58(b), which is a side view seen from the direction indicated by the symbol X in Fig. 58(a).

When there is no light source on the back surface 986 side of the substrate 980, the brightness of area B (no copper foil on the front surface, no copper foil on the back surface) and the brightness of area C (no copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface) are almost the same, but the brightness of area B (no copper foil on the front surface, no copper foil on the back surface) and area C (no copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface) are lower than area A (copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface) (area B ≒ area C < area A).

Here, the "light source" in this example refers to a source that emits light, and examples of this include sunlight, the light of indoor lights, the light emitted by various vending machines installed in the game store, and the light emitted by light-emitting means. The light-emitting means may be, for example, an LED light carried by a store employee or the like, or a lamp on the game machine (various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.)). In the case of a lamp on a game machine, if the lamp on the game machine is still emitting light even when a certain board is removed from the game machine, then the lamp corresponds to the light-emitting means, and the lamps on other game machines in the game store also correspond to light-emitting means.

According to this example, maintenance of the circuit board can be performed using means that can be implemented in an amusement facility, thereby improving convenience. Furthermore, if the gaming machine is equipped with a light-emitting means, maintenance of the circuit board can be performed without the need for any devices or tools other than the gaming machine, thereby improving convenience.

Maintenance of gaming machines includes checking for any fraudulent activity while shining an LED light on the machine, cleaning each part, replacing each part, and checking the operation of each part. During the maintenance process, screws, circuit boards, sheet metal parts, and plastic parts may be removed or temporarily placed.

In addition, in this example, "brightness" refers to the degree of brightness, and in this example, it indicates the brightness of each of areas A, B, and C when viewing substrate 980 from the surface 984 side of substrate 980.

In this example, the brightness of area B is lower than the brightness of area A (area B < area A), and the brightness of area A is different from the brightness of area B, so as shown in Figure 58 (b), the boundary between area A and area B can be visually confirmed, but the brightness of area B and the brightness of area C are almost the same, so the boundary between area B and area C cannot be visually confirmed.

<Light-transmitting substrate/substrate brightness (with light source of first light intensity)>
Next, the brightness of the substrate when a light source with a first light intensity is present will be described with reference to Fig. 59. Fig. 59(a) is a cross-sectional view showing a part of a cross section of the substrate according to this embodiment, and is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of a state in which light from a light source with a first light intensity is transmitted, and Fig. 59(b) is a side view seen from the direction indicated by the symbol X in Fig. 59(a).

When a light source with a first light amount (e.g., 100 lm (lumens)) is present on the back surface 986 side of the substrate 980, a portion of the light LT1 emitted from the light source cannot pass through the copper foil 986a on the back surface 986 in area A (with copper foil on the front surface, with copper foil on the back surface) or area C (without copper foil on the front surface, with copper foil on the back surface), and is blocked by the copper foil 986a on the back surface 986.

Meanwhile, a portion of the light LT2 emitted from the light source passes through the resist 986b on the back surface 986 of region B (no copper foil on the front surface, no copper foil on the back surface) and reaches the substrate 982. The light LT2 that reaches the substrate 982 travels straight through the substrate 982 and passes through the resist 984b on the front surface 984 of region B (no copper foil on the front surface, no copper foil on the back surface) and is emitted to the outside, and is refracted or reflected at the boundary between the resist 986b and the substrate 982, where the refracted or reflected light interferes with each other, weakening its intensity and making it unable to reach the surface 984.

Therefore, when a light source with a first light intensity is present on the back surface 986 side of the substrate 980, the brightness of areas A, B, and C increases in the following order: area B (no copper foil on the front surface, no copper foil on the back surface), area A (copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface), and area C (no copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface) (area B > area A > area C).

In this example, since the brightness of areas A, B, and C is different, as shown in FIG. 59(b), the boundaries between areas A, B, and C can be visually confirmed, and in addition, for area C (no copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface), the outline of the copper foil 986a on the back surface 986 can be confirmed from the front surface 984 of the substrate 980, improving maintainability.

<Light-transmitting substrate/substrate brightness (with light source of second light intensity)>
Next, the brightness of the substrate when a light source with a second light intensity is present will be described with reference to Fig. 60. Fig. 60(a) is a cross-sectional view showing a part of a cross section of the substrate according to this embodiment, and is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of a state in which light from a light source with a second light intensity is transmitted, and Fig. 60(b) is a side view seen from the direction indicated by the symbol X in Fig. 60(a).

When a light source with a second light amount (e.g., 300 lm (lumens)) greater than the first light amount is present on the back surface 986 side of the substrate 980, a portion of the light LT3 emitted from the light source cannot pass through the copper foil 986a on the back surface 986 in area A (with copper foil on the front surface, with copper foil on the back surface) or area C (without copper foil on the front surface, with copper foil on the back surface), and is blocked by the copper foil 986a on the back surface 986.

On the other hand, a portion of the light emitted from the light source, LT4, passes through the resist 986b on the back surface 986 of region B (no copper foil on the front surface, no copper foil on the back surface) and reaches the substrate 982. The light LT4 that reaches the substrate 982 travels straight through the substrate 982 and passes through the resist 984b on the front surface 984 of region B (no copper foil on the front surface, no copper foil on the back surface) and is emitted to the outside, light LT41c that is refracted or reflected at the boundary between the resist 986b and the substrate 982 and then passes through the resist 984b on the front surface 984 of region C (no copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface) and is emitted to the outside, and light LT42 that is refracted or reflected at the boundary between the resist 986b and the substrate 982, and the refracted or reflected light interferes with each other, weakening its intensity and making it unable to reach the surface 984.

Therefore, when a light source with a second light intensity greater than the first light intensity is present on the back surface 986 of the substrate 980, the brightness of areas A, B, and C increases in the following order: area B (no copper foil on the front surface, no copper foil on the back surface), area C (no copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface), and area A (copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface) (area B > area C > area A).

In this example, since the brightness of areas A, B, and C is different, as shown in FIG. 60(b), the boundaries between areas A, B, and C can be visually confirmed, and in addition, for area C (no copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface), the outline of the copper foil 986a on the back surface 986 can be confirmed from the front surface 984 of the substrate 980, improving maintainability.

<Appearance of a substrate that transmits light/substrate with dirt attached (no light source)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the appearance of a substrate when dust is attached to the substrate in the absence of a light source will be described.

Figure 61 (a) is a cross-sectional view showing a part of a cross section of a substrate according to this embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing the state in which dust adheres to the substrate when there is no light source, and (b) is a side view seen from the direction indicated by the symbol X in (a).

This example assumes that dust 988 is attached to resist 984b on the surface 984 of area B (no copper foil on the surface, no copper foil on the back), resist 986b on the back 986 of area B (no copper foil on the surface, no copper foil on the back), and resist 984b on the surface 984 of area C (no copper foil on the surface, copper foil on the back).

As explained using Figure 58 (b), if there is no light source on the back surface 986 side of the substrate 980, the brightness of area B (no copper foil on the front surface, no copper foil on the back surface) and area C (no copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface) will be lower than that of area A (copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface) (area B ≒ area C < area A).

For this reason, if there is no light source on the back surface 986 side of the substrate 980 and the brightness of the dust 988 is approximately the same as the brightness of area C when there is no light source on the back surface 986 side of the substrate 980, it is difficult to find the dust 988 attached to areas B and C, as shown in FIG. 61(b).

<Appearance of a light-transmitting substrate/substrate with dirt attached (with a light source of the first light intensity)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the appearance of the substrate when dust adheres to the substrate in the presence of a light source with a first light intensity will be described.

Figure 62(a) is a cross-sectional view showing a portion of a cross section of a substrate according to this embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing the state in which dust adheres to the substrate when a light source with a first light intensity is present, and Figure 62(b) is a side view seen from the direction indicated by the symbol X in Figure 62(a).

This example assumes that dust 988 is attached to resist 984b on the surface 984 of area B (no copper foil on the surface, no copper foil on the back), resist 986b on the back 986 of area B (no copper foil on the surface, no copper foil on the back), and resist 984b on the surface 984 of area C (no copper foil on the surface, copper foil on the back).

As explained using Figures 59(a) and (b), when a light source with a first light intensity is present on the back surface 986 side of the substrate 980, the brightness of areas A, B, and C increases in the following order: area B (no copper foil on the front surface, no copper foil on the back surface), area A (copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface), and area C (no copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface) (area B > area A > area C).

For this reason, if a light source with a first light intensity is present on the back surface 986 side of the substrate 980 and the brightness of the dust 988 is similar to the brightness of area C when there is no light source on the back surface 986 side of the substrate 980, it is difficult to find the dust 988 attached to area C. However, since the outline of the dust 988 can be clearly seen in area B, which is brighter than area C, it is possible to find the dust 988 attached to the front surface 984 or back surface 986 of area B from the front surface 984 side of the substrate 980, thereby improving maintainability.

<Appearance of a light-transmitting substrate/substrate with dirt attached (with a light source of a second light intensity)>
Next, the appearance of the substrate when dust adheres to the substrate in the presence of a light source with the second light intensity will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 63(a) is a cross-sectional view showing a portion of a cross section of a substrate according to this embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing the state in which dust adheres to the substrate when a light source with a second light intensity is present, and Figure 63(b) is a side view seen from the direction indicated by the symbol X in Figure 63(a).

This example assumes that dust 988 is attached to resist 984b on the surface 984 of area B (no copper foil on the surface, no copper foil on the back), resist 986b on the back 986 of area B (no copper foil on the surface, no copper foil on the back), and resist 984b on the surface 984 of area C (no copper foil on the surface, copper foil on the back).

As explained using Figures 60(a) and (b), when a light source with a second light intensity greater than the first light intensity is present on the back surface 986 side of the substrate 980, the brightness of areas A, B, and C increases in the following order: area B (no copper foil on the front surface, no copper foil on the back surface), area C (no copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface), and area A (copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface) (area B > area C > area A).

Therefore, if there is a light source with a second light intensity, greater than the first light intensity, on the back surface 986 side of the substrate 980, and the brightness of the dust 988 is similar to the brightness of area C when there is no light source on the back surface 986 side of the substrate 980, the outline of the dust 988 can be clearly seen from the front surface 984 side of the substrate 980 in area B due to refracted light LT41b from the back surface 986, and in area C due to refracted light LT41c from the back surface 986, so that the dust 988 attached to areas B and C can be found, improving maintainability.

<Appearance of a substrate that transmits light/a substrate with scratches (with a light source of the first light intensity)>
Next, the appearance of a scratched substrate when a light source with a first light intensity is present will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 64 (a) is a cross-sectional view showing a portion of a cross section of a substrate according to this embodiment, and is a schematic diagram showing the appearance of a scratched substrate when a light source with a first light intensity is present, and (b) is a side view of (a) as viewed from the direction indicated by the symbol X.

This example assumes that the copper foil 986a and resist 986b on the back surface 986 of area C (no copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface) are damaged by contact with a protrusion or the like.

As explained using Figures 59(a) and (b), when a light source with a first light amount is present on the back surface 986 side of the substrate 980, a portion of the light LT1 emitted from the light source cannot pass through the copper foil 986a on the back surface 986 in area A (with copper foil on the front surface, with copper foil on the back surface) or area C (without copper foil on the front surface, with copper foil on the back surface), and is blocked by the copper foil 986a on the back surface 986.

However, in this example, scratches 989 have occurred in the copper foil 986a and resist 986b on the back surface 986 of area C (no copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface), which has allowed light to pass through the copper foil 986a. As a result, a portion of the light LT5 emitted from the light source passes through the copper foil 986a and resist 986b on the back surface 986 of area C (no copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface), travels straight through the substrate 982, and passes through the resist 984b on the front surface 984 of area C (no copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface) to be emitted to the outside as direct light.

As a result, in region C, the outline of the scratch 989 can be clearly seen from the surface 984 side of the substrate 980, making it easy to discover that region C is damaged and allowing the substrate to be quickly repaired or replaced, improving maintainability.

<Light-transmitting substrate/Summary>
As described above, the gaming machine according to this embodiment (e.g., the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 ) is a gaming machine equipped with a certain substrate having a first surface (e.g., the front surface 984 shown in FIG. 60( a )) and a second surface (e.g., the back surface 986 shown in FIG. 60( a )), the second surface being the back surface of the first surface, the first surface having a first region where no wiring pattern is formed (e.g., the resist 984 b shown in FIG. 60( a )) and a third region where the first wiring pattern is formed (e.g., the copper foil 984 a shown in FIG. 60( a )), the second surface having a second region where no wiring pattern is formed (e.g., the resist 986 b shown in FIG. 60( a )) and a second region where the first wiring pattern is formed (e.g., the copper foil 984 a shown in FIG. 60( a )). This is a gaming machine having a fourth region (e.g., copper foil 986a shown in FIG. 60(a)) in which a wiring pattern is formed, the first region is capable of transmitting at least a portion of the light directed toward the second surface, the second region is capable of transmitting at least a portion of the light directed toward the second surface, the third region is not capable of transmitting light directed toward the second surface, and the fourth region is not capable of transmitting light directed toward the second surface, and in the first case, a region of the first region that overlaps with the second region (e.g., region B shown in FIG. 58(a9 (no copper foil on the front surface, no copper foil on the back surface)) is capable of transmitting at least a portion of the light directed toward the second surface).

The gaming machine according to this embodiment makes it easy to check for dirt or grime adhering to the first or second area of a certain board, improving maintainability. Furthermore, if a certain board has a third or fourth area that is not transparent to light but has an area through which light passes, the gaming store staff can recognize that some protrusion has come into contact with the certain board and damaged the wiring pattern. It is also possible to check whether a certain board is a double-sided wiring board. Furthermore, the gaming store staff may be able to notice if an unauthorized person has added unauthorized components or wiring patterns to a certain board.

The first case may also be a case where the second surface of the certain board that has been moved from its mounting position is irradiated with sunlight, light from an indoor lamp, or light from a light-emitting means (for example, an LED light carried by a game store employee, a lamp on a game machine (various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.))).

This configuration allows maintenance of the board to be performed using methods that can be implemented in game arcades, increasing convenience.

The gaming machine may also be equipped with the light emitting means.

With this configuration, maintenance of the board can be performed without any equipment or tools other than the gaming machine, improving convenience.

In the first case, a certain region of the first region that overlaps with the fourth region (for example, region C shown in FIG. 58 (a9) (no copper foil on the front surface, copper foil on the back surface)) may be capable of transmitting at least a portion of the light incident from the second region toward the second surface.

This configuration makes it easier to check for dirt or grime that has accumulated in a certain area, improving maintainability.

Below, using Figures 65 to 71, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel gaming machine such as a slot machine 100, or a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail. Note that the reference numerals shown in Figures 65 to 71 will, in principle, be used only in the explanation using Figures 65 to 71, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals shown in Figures 65 to 71 will take precedence in the explanation using Figures 65 to 71.

Figure 65 is a front view of the slot machine 10 seen from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 10 shown in FIG. 65 is a gaming machine in which a predetermined number of gaming media are inserted, and multiple reels with multiple types of symbols each start spinning when a predetermined spin start command is received, and a lottery is held to determine whether multiple types of internal winning combinations have been won based on the reception of the spin start command, and each of the multiple reels stops spinning individually when a predetermined spin stop command is received. If the conditions determined by the combination of symbols when the multiple reels stop based on the lottery results match a predetermined payout condition, gaming media is paid out and the game ends, but if they do not match, no gaming media is paid out and the game ends. The payout of gaming media is sometimes referred to as profit. Also, something that makes it easier to obtain profits is sometimes referred to as a privilege.

This slot machine 10 comprises a main body and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body and can be opened and closed relative to the main body. The front door 102 is a door member that is attached to the main body so that it can rotate freely. The front door is provided with a locking function so that it cannot be opened by anyone other than the staff of the gaming establishment.

Three reels (left reel R1, center reel R2, right reel R3) with multiple types of patterns arranged on the outer periphery are housed inside the center of the main body (not shown), and are configured to rotate inside the slot machine 10. These reels R1 to R3 are rotated by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

Each symbol is printed at equal intervals on a strip-shaped member in appropriate numbers, and this strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each of the reels R1 to R3. When viewed by the player, the symbols on the reels R1 to R3 are displayed vertically in roughly three positions from the symbol display window R0, making a total of nine symbols visible.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) that are electronically stored in the slot machine 10. In this embodiment, one medal is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two medals are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three medals are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as the MAX bet button.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot through which the player inserts medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) through the medal insertion slot 141; the term "insertion" includes both.

The slot machine 10 of this embodiment is a gaming machine that is premised on playing with three bets. However, it can also be played with two bets. For this reason, it is designed so that playing with three bets in a two-bet bonus internal win state is more advantageous for the player than playing with two bets in a three-bet bonus internal win state, and the two-bet bonus internal win state is treated as the normal play state, so that players are encouraged to play with three bets whenever possible.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 10. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (e.g., the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) in numerical form. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning some kind of winning combination. The stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are seven-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels R1 to R3. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels R1 to R3 start to rotate. The operation of the start lever 135 is called the operation to start the game.

The stop button unit is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139, which are composed of a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels R1 to R3 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each of the reels R1 to R3. More specifically, the left reel R1 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel R2 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right reel R3 can be stopped by operating the right stop button 139. Note that light-emitting bodies may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light-emitting bodies can be lit to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that can be pressed to remove medals that have been inserted and become clogged. The settlement button 134 is a button that can be used to settle medals that have been electronically stored in the slot machine 10 and medals that have been bet, and to dispense them from the medal payout outlet 155.

Below the stop buttons 137 to 139, there is a title panel 152 on which the model name is displayed and various certificate stamps are attached. This title panel 152 is illuminated from behind by a title panel lamp. Below the title panel 152, there is a medal payout opening 155 and a medal tray 151.

The top lamp unit 11 provided at the top of the front door 102, the left side lamp 144L provided on the left side of the front door 102, and the right side lamp 144R provided on the right side are decorative lamps to liven up the game. The top lamp unit 11 will be described in detail later. Speaker units 143 are provided on the left and right sides of the top lamp unit 11. Sound holes 145 are also provided on the left and right sides of the reels R1 to R3. These sound holes 145 are holes for outputting the sound of the bass speakers to the outside.

In addition, the front door 102 is provided with a performance device 16 between the top lamp unit 11 and the reels R1 to R3. The performance device 16 includes a first movable performance body 161 arranged on the left side, a second movable performance body 162 arranged on the right side, and a performance image display device 157 arranged behind these movable performance bodies. The performance image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, but it does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, and any display device capable of displaying various performance images and various game information may be used. For example, it may be a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. The display screen is rectangular, but may also be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and as a result of a part of the periphery of the display screen being hidden by the decoration, the display screen may appear irregular. Furthermore, the display screen may be flat, but may also be curved.

Figure 65 shows a background image being displayed on the performance image display device 157. The first movable performance body 161 on the left side is opening, and the first sheet member 1610 having the first light-transmitting portion 161t overlaps part of the display screen of the performance image display device 157. In the part of the display screen where the first light-transmitting portion 161t overlaps, the background image appears blurred. The first movable performance body 161 and the second movable performance body 162 will be described in more detail below.

Note that what has been referred to as a lamp up until now is an example of a light-emitting means, and in this specification, a lamp may also be used to refer to an LED light source, and any other light-emitting device, such as a fluorescent lamp or cold cathode fluorescent lamp, may also be called a lamp if it emits light, and any device that emits light is an example of a light-emitting means.

First, we will explain the top lamp unit 11 in detail.

Figure 66 is an oblique view of the top lamp unit 11 seen from diagonally above. The player's side (front side) is diagonally downward to the left in the figure.

The top lamp unit 11 has a central light-emitting portion 111, a visor portion 112 that protrudes toward the player (forward) directly above the central light-emitting portion 111, an inner left reflector portion 113 (part surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 65) provided diagonally above the central light-emitting portion 111 to the left, an inner right reflector portion 114 provided diagonally above the central light-emitting portion 111 to the right, a left light-emitting portion 115 that extends along the left edge of the central light-emitting portion 111, and a right light-emitting portion 116 (part surrounded by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 65) that extends along the right edge of the central light-emitting portion 111. As shown in FIG. 65, an outer left reflector member 12 (part surrounded by a dashed line) is provided between the left light-emitting portion 115 and the left speaker unit 143, and an outer right reflector member 13 is provided between the right light-emitting portion 116 and the right speaker unit 143. Both the outer left reflective member 12 and the outer right reflective member 13 are attached to the top lamp unit 11. Although neither the outer left reflective member 12 nor the outer right reflective member 13 are shown in FIG. 66, the top lamp unit 11 shown in FIG. 66 shows an attachment part 1101 provided on the right light emitting part 116. The outer right reflective member 13 is attached to the top lamp unit 11 by being screwed to this attachment part 1101. Hereinafter, the top lamp unit 11 with the outer left reflective member 12 and the outer right reflective member 13 attached thereto will be referred to as a lamp unit RU. Note that the top lamp unit 11, the outer left reflective member 12, and the outer right reflective member 13 may be molded as a single unit.

Figure 66 also shows a portion of the mounting portion 1101 that attaches the top lamp unit 11 to the front door 102.

The central light-emitting section 111 displays the character "頂" (top), and the entire unit can emit light in multiple colors, including red, blue, and green.

At least a portion of the eaves portion 112 is made of a resin having optical transparency, and the optically transparent portion can emit light in multiple colors. In the eaves portion 112 shown in Figures 65 and 66, part of the center portion is covered with an opaque decorative member 112p shown in gray, and the portion covered with the decorative member 112p does not transmit light and does not emit light. Note that the decorative member 112p may be omitted, allowing the entire portion to emit light.

The inner left reflector 113 and the inner right reflector 114 are three-dimensional resin structures with a portion that protrudes toward the player and also has a recessed portion on the rear side. In addition, at least a portion of the inner left reflector 113 and the inner right reflector 114 has a reflective area that can reflect light. The upper end portions of the inner left reflector 113 and the inner right reflector 114 shown in Figures 65 and 66 are covered with decorative members 113p and 114p shown in gray.

The left light-emitting unit 115 and the right light-emitting unit 116 are also three-dimensional structures made of resin with a portion that protrudes toward the player and also has a recessed portion on the rear side. In addition, the left light-emitting unit 115 and the right light-emitting unit 116 each have at least a light-transmitting portion, and this light-transmitting portion can emit light in multiple colors.

Both the outer left reflective member 12 and the outer right reflective member 13 are three-dimensional resin structures with a portion that protrudes toward the player and also has a recessed portion on the rear side. In addition, both the outer left reflective member 12 and the outer right reflective member 13 have at least a reflective portion that can reflect light.

Figure 67 is a schematic diagram explaining the structure of a lamp unit. In this Figure 67, the top of the figure is the player's side (front side). The right side of the figure is the inside, and the left side is the outside.

This Figure 67 shows the left side of the lamp unit RU, and the left light-emitting part 115, inner left reflecting part 113, and outer left reflecting member 12 are diagrammatically illustrated. The left light-emitting part 115 is sandwiched between the inner left reflecting part 113 and the outer left reflecting member 12. In other words, the left light-emitting part 115 is provided adjacent to the inner left reflecting part 113 and is also provided adjacent to the outer left reflecting member 12. Figure 67 shows a horizontal cross-section of the part that protrudes most toward the player, whether it be the left light-emitting part 115, the inner left reflecting part 113, or the outer left reflecting member 12. The right side part of the lamp unit RU (not shown) has a similar structure to the left side.

The top lamp unit 11 has a built-in light emitting substrate 110B. A plurality of surface-emitting chip LEDs 110L are arranged in a discrete manner on this light emitting substrate 110B. The chip LEDs 110L can emit light in a plurality of colors. The light emitting substrate 110B is covered from the rear side by a rear case 1103 and is attached to a substrate attachment portion 1104.

As shown in FIG. 67, the left light-emitting unit 115 has a double lens structure and has an inner lens 1151 and an outer lens 1152. The inner lens 1151 is attached so as to straddle the front case 1105 and the rear case 1104. The inner left reflecting unit 113 is attached so as to straddle the front case 1105 and the outer lens 1152. The outer left reflecting member 12 is attached to the outer lens 1152. Note that the location where the outer left reflecting member 12 is attached to the outer lens 1152 corresponds to the attachment portion 1101 shown in FIG. 66. Also, the method of attaching each optical member (113, 115, 12) is shown as an example, and other attachment methods may be used.

The light emitted from the chip LED 110L shown at the far left of Figure 67 will be used as an example for explanation. The chip LED 110L shown at the far left is the chip LED closest to the left light-emitting portion 115 and is the chip LED covered by the left light-emitting portion 115. In the figure, the solid arrows indicate the path of the light.

The inner lens 1151 is covered by the outer lens 1152 and is entirely made of a light-transmitting resin. The inner peripheral surface of this inner lens 1151 is provided with a lens cut surface RC that has a light distribution (light guiding) effect. In FIG. 67, the lens cut surface RC is represented by a jagged uneven surface, and the light just emitted from the chip LED 110L is distributed (guided) to the player side (front side) by this lens cut surface RC. At the tip of the lens cut surface RC on the player side, the light is divided into light that is distributed (guided) to the player side (straight-line direction) and light that is distributed (guided) in the horizontal direction (direction perpendicular to the straight-line direction).

Note that the path of light is not indicated by solid arrows, but it is not limited to the lens cut surface RC. For example, the tip of the outer lens 1152 on the player side can distribute light toward the player (straight ahead), horizontally (at right angles), or vertically.

The inner left reflector 113 has a reflecting portion RF1 at a portion where light traveling from the left light emitter 115 in a right direction (inward direction) is irradiated. That is, the reflecting portion RF1 is located at the tip of the outer surface. The outer left reflector 12 has a reflecting portion RF2 at a portion where light traveling from the left light emitter 115 in a left direction (outward direction) is irradiated. That is, the reflecting portion RF2 is located at the tip of the inner surface. In FIG. 67, the reflecting portions RF1 and RF2 are shown in gray. The light reflected by the reflecting portions RF1 and RF2 travels toward the player (forward). As a result, from the player H1, it appears that the left light emitter 115 is emitting light as well as the reflecting portions RF1 and RF2, and the area of the light emitting effect visible from the player side can be made wider than when the light emitting effect is performed only by the light emitting portion, and the area of the light emitting portion when viewed from the front can be made more compact than before. In addition, whether the chip LED 110L is emitting light or not, the opposing lens cut surface RC is reflected in the reflective portions RF1 and RF2, which looks like a pattern to the player H1, enhancing the decorativeness. In addition, while the chip LED 110L is emitting light, the reflective portions RF1 and RF2 look even more like they are emitting light.

If there is a lens cut surface RC between the chip LED 110L and the viewpoint, the chip LED 110L will not be visible due to the light distribution effect of the lens cut surface RC, but if there is no lens cut surface RC, the chip LED 110L will be visible due to transparency. If the chip LED 110L is visible, it is not desirable from a design perspective, whether it is turned on or off. The outer lens 1152 is made of a resin that has optical transparency as a whole, but behind the tip part on the player side of the inner peripheral surface, a concealing surface FG that has been subjected to blast processing or the like to reduce optical transparency is provided. The concealing surface FG is made of resin and not glass, but is processed to look like frosted glass or cloudy glass. In FIG. 67, the concealing surface FG is represented by a surface with continuous black triangles, and has a concealing effect that prevents the chip LED 110L from being seen from the diagonally forward (see H1') side. In addition, the portion of the outer lens 1152 where the concealing surface FG is provided is a portion where light from the chip LED 110L does not pass through and is not related to the light distribution effect, so there is no problem with providing a lens cut surface RC instead of the concealing surface FG.

Figure 68 is a schematic diagram explaining the structure of a modified lamp unit. Components with the same names as those explained in Figure 67 will be explained using the same reference numerals as those used in Figure 67. Explanations of content that overlaps with that explained using Figure 67 will be omitted. Furthermore, in Figure 68, the solid line representing the path of light emitted from the chip LED 110L shown at the far left has been omitted, but this is the same as the path of light shown in Figure 67.

In this modified example, the concealing surface FG is provided on the inner lens 1151, not on the outer lens 1152. That is, the concealing surface FG is provided on the surface of the inner lens 1151 on the light emitting substrate 110B side at a location approximately parallel to the light emitting substrate 110B. The concealing surface FG shown in FIG. 68 also has a concealing effect of preventing the chip LED 110L from being seen from the diagonally forward (see H1') side, similar to the concealing surface FG shown in FIG. 67. Note that the location where the concealing surface FG shown in FIG. 68 is provided is a location where light from the chip LED 110L hits, but is not related to the light distribution effect, so there is no problem in providing a lens cut surface RC instead of the concealing surface FG. The outer lens 1152 shown in FIG. 68 has the function of protecting the inner lens 1151.

Whether it is the concealing surface FG shown in FIG. 67 or the concealing surface FG shown in FIG. 68, it is provided at a position away from the chip LED 110L and at a position that is not exposed to the outside.

The structure of the lamp unit shown in FIG. 67 is the same, but the player-side tip of the left light-emitting unit 115 protrudes further toward the player than the player-side tip of the inner left reflector 113 and the player-side tip of the outer left reflector 12. As a result, the shortest distance from the light-emitting substrate 110B is longer for the part 115t (L1) of the inner lens 1151 that is closer to the player than the inner left reflector 113, than for the part 113t (L2) of the inner left reflector 113 that is closest to the player. Also, as shown in FIG. 67, light distributed laterally (inside and outside) from the part of the left light-emitting unit 115 that is closer to the player than the inner left reflector 113 and the outer left reflector 12 travels straight. That is, the light emitted from the chip LED 110L shown at the far left end is directed by the player-side portion 115t of the left light-emitting portion 115 in a predetermined direction (here, inward and outward) different from the player's direction, avoiding the inner left reflecting portion 113 and the outer left reflecting member 12. As a result, the light may reach a store clerk or other player H2 looking at the slot machine 10 from the side, allowing those persons H2 to recognize the light-emitting effect. In particular, the light distributed to the outside is unobstructed, making it easier for those persons H2 to recognize the light-emitting effect.

Next, we will explain another embodiment of the lamp unit RU. Here, we will provide a detailed description of the light-emitting unit that is installed in the lamp unit of this embodiment.

Figure 68-1(a) is a schematic diagram similar to Figure 67, showing part of a light-emitting unit in which one lens cut surface is reflected in multiple reflecting parts. In Figure 68-1(a), the top of the figure is also the player H3 side (front side). The right side of the figure is the inside, and the left side is the outside. These inside and outside directions correspond to the left and right directions on the gaming machine.

The light-emitting unit LU shown in FIG. 68-1(a) has a first reflecting portion α110 and a second reflecting portion α120 arranged side by side in the horizontal direction (inside and outside). A light-emitting portion α130 is arranged on the side of the first reflecting portion α110 opposite to the side on which the second reflecting portion α120 is arranged. The light-emitting unit LU also has a light-emitting board α131. A chip LED α13L for surface emission capable of emitting light in multiple colors is mounted on the light-emitting board α131 shown in FIG. 68-1(a). However, multiple chip LEDs α13L for surface emission may be mounted on the light-emitting board α131. The light-emitting portion α130 covers the chip LED α13.

Note that the first reflecting portion α110 and the second reflecting portion α120 are arranged to overlap the light emitting substrate α131, but they do not necessarily have to overlap.

As shown in FIG. 68-1(a), the light-emitting unit α130 has a double lens structure and has an inner lens α132 and an outer lens α133. The inner lens α132 is covered by the outer lens α133 and is entirely made of a resin having optical transparency. The inner peripheral surface of this inner lens α132 is provided with a lens cut surface αRC that exerts a light distribution (light guiding) effect. In FIG. 68-1(a), the lens cut surface αRC is represented by a jagged uneven surface. In addition, part of the path of the light emitted from the chip LED α13L is represented diagrammatically by an arrow. Of the light emitted from the chip LED α13L, the light traveling directly ahead (towards the player) passes through the inner lens α132 and the outer lens α133 and travels towards the player H3 side, as shown by the solid arrow. On the other hand, the light emitted from the chip LED α13L that deviates from the front and travels diagonally to the outside (left) is dispersed by the lens cut surface αRC into light traveling straight ahead (towards the player) and light traveling in the outward (left) direction, as shown by the dotted arrow. Note that light traveling in the outward (left) direction refers to light traveling in a direction that intersects with the direction heading straight ahead; Figure 68-1(a) shows light traveling in a direction perpendicular to the direction heading straight ahead as an example, and the same is true for the examples up to Figure 68-5.

Both the first reflecting portion α110 and the second reflecting portion α120 have reflecting portions α111, α121 facing the light-emitting portion α130. Furthermore, both reflecting portions α111, α121 are inclined from the front to the rear as they approach the light-emitting portion α130. Furthermore, the reflecting portion α121 of the second reflecting portion α120 is positioned further forward (towards the player) than the reflecting portion α111 of the first reflecting portion α110.

Of the light traveling outward (left) by the lens cut surface αRC, the light that reaches the reflection part α111 of the first reflection part α110 is reflected by that reflection part α111 and travels directly ahead (towards the player) as shown by the dashed arrow. Also, of the light traveling outward (left) by the lens cut surface αRC, the light that reaches the reflection part α121 of the second reflection part α120 is reflected by that reflection part α121 and travels directly ahead (towards the player) as shown by the dashed arrow. In FIG. 68-1(a), the path of the light reflected by the reflective portion α111 of the first reflecting portion α110 is shown by only one dashed arrow, and the path of the light reflected by the reflective portion α121 of the second reflecting portion α120 is also shown by only one dashed arrow, but it appears that surface emission occurs at both the reflective portion α111 of the first reflecting portion α110 and the reflective portion α121 of the second reflecting portion α120. Note that the light reflected by the reflective portions α111 and α121 may travel in a direction that is shifted from the direction directly ahead (the same applies to the following explanation). In FIG. 68-1(a), the surface emission at each of the reflective portions α111 and α121 is shown in gray.

From the player H3, it appears that the two reflecting parts α111 and α121 are also emitting light in addition to the light emitting part α130, and the area of the light emitting performance seen from the player side can be made wider than when the light emitting performance is performed only with the light emitting part α130, and the area of the light emitting part α130 when viewed from the front can be made more compact than before. Furthermore, the surface emission at the reflecting part α111 of the first reflecting part α110 and the surface emission at the reflecting part α121 of the second reflecting part α120 are light emission from different surfaces with different positions in the front-to-back direction, resulting in a novel light emission mode. In addition, whether the chip LED α13L is emitting light or is turned off, the lens cut surface αRC is reflected on the reflecting parts α111 and α121, which looks like a pattern from the player H3, and the decorativeness is enhanced. Again, the reflective area α111 of the first reflecting portion α110 and the reflective area α121 of the second reflecting portion α120 are separate surfaces, so that different areas of the lens cut surface αRC are reflected on the separate surfaces, forming a novel pattern. For example, the rear area of the lens cut surface αRC is reflected on the reflective area α111 of the first reflecting portion α110, and the front area of the lens cut surface αRC is reflected on the reflective area α121 of the second reflecting portion α120. Also, while the chip LED α13L is emitting light, the reflected lens cut surface αRC makes the reflective areas α111 and α121 appear to be emitting light even more.

In FIG. 68-1(a), the first reflecting portion α110 and the second reflecting portion α120 are arranged on the outer (left) side of the light-emitting portion α130, but a third reflecting portion that is a left-right inversion of the first reflecting portion α110 and a fourth reflecting portion that is a left-right inversion of the second reflecting portion α120 may be arranged on the inner (right) side of the light-emitting portion α130.

Alternatively, the reflective portion α111 of the first reflective portion α110 and the reflective portion α121 of the second reflective portion α120 may be continuous in the front-to-rear direction, but may be spaced apart in the front-to-rear direction.

Figure 68-1(b) is a schematic diagram similar to Figure 67, showing part of a light-emitting unit reflected in a reflecting section with lens cut surfaces arranged on both sides. Components with the same names as those explained in Figure 68-1(a) are explained using the same reference numerals as those used in Figure 68-1(a). Explanations of content that overlaps with that explained using Figure 68-1(a) may be omitted. In Figure 68-1(b), the top of the figure is also the player H3 side (front side). The right side of the figure is also the inside, and the left side is also the outside. These inside and outside directions correspond to the left and right directions on the gaming table.

In FIG. 68-1(a), the first reflecting portion α110 and the second reflecting portion α120 are arranged on the outer (left) side of the light-emitting portion α130, but in the light-emitting unit LU shown in FIG. 68-1(b), the first reflecting portion α110 is arranged on the outer side of the light-emitting portion α130, and the second reflecting portion α120 is arranged on the inner side of the light-emitting portion α130. In other words, the light-emitting portion α130 is provided between the first reflecting portion α110 and the second reflecting portion α120.

Only one surface-emitting chip LED α13L is mounted on the light-emitting substrate α131 shown in FIG. 68-1(b), but multiple chip LEDs α13L may be mounted. Also, the first reflecting portion α110 is arranged so as to overlap the outer (left) portion of the light-emitting substrate α131, and the second reflecting portion α120 is arranged so as to overlap the inner (right) portion, but neither the first reflecting portion α110 nor the second reflecting portion α120 necessarily need to overlap the light-emitting substrate α131.

In FIG. 68-1(b), the reflective portion α111 of the first reflective portion α110 and the reflective portion α121 of the second reflective portion α120 are disposed at the same position in the front-to-rear direction. Both reflective portions α111 and α121 are inclined from the front to the rear as they approach the light-emitting portion α130.

In the above description, it has been stated that the light emitting portion α130 is provided between the first reflecting portion α110 and the second reflecting portion α120, but it can also be said that the lens cut surface αRC of the light emitting portion α130 is provided between the first reflecting portion α110 and the second reflecting portion α120, and that at least a portion of the inner lens α132 is provided.

The lens cut surface αRC of the light emitting portion α130 is a single surface that is continuous with the inner peripheral surface of the inner lens α132, but can be divided into an outer lens cut surface αRCo and an inner lens cut surface αRCi by the ridge line rl that protrudes most forward. In other words, it can be seen as being composed of two lens cut surfaces, with the surface switching line (ridge line rl) where the surface angle changes as the boundary.

The outer lens cut surface αRCo broadly divides the incident light into light that travels straight ahead (towards the player) and light that travels outward (to the left) (at a right angle to the direction straight ahead), but some light deviates from these optical paths and travels at an angle (as in other examples). Similarly, the inner lens cut surface αRCi broadly divides the incident light into light that travels straight ahead (towards the player) and light that travels inward (to the right), but some light deviates from these optical paths and travels at an angle (as in other examples).

When the light traveling in the outward (left) direction by the outer lens cut surface αRCo reaches the reflection part α111 of the first reflection part α110 on the outward (left) side, it is reflected by the reflection part α111 and travels directly ahead (towards the player). Also, when the light traveling inward (right) direction by the inner lens cut surface αRCi reaches the reflection part α121 of the second reflection part α120 on the inward (right) side, it is reflected by the reflection part α121 and travels directly ahead (towards the player). In FIG. 68-1(b), the path of the light reflected by the reflection part α111 of the first reflection part α110 is shown only by a single dashed arrow, and the path of the light reflected by the reflection part α121 of the second reflection part α120 is also shown only by a single dashed arrow, but it appears that both the reflection part α111 of the first reflection part α110 and the reflection part α121 of the second reflection part α120 are surface-emitted. The light reflected by the reflection sites α111 and α121 may travel in a direction deviated from the direction directly ahead. In Figure 68-1 (b), the surface emission at each of the reflection sites α111 and α121 is shown in gray. Note that light that travels diagonally from the lens cut surface αRC, deviating from the optical path that travels in a direction perpendicular to the direction directly ahead, also hits these reflection sites α111 and α121, and reflects this light, so the surface emission area at the reflection sites α111 and α121 is shown as being wider.

In this example, the area of the light-emitting effect visible from the player's side can be made larger, and the area of the light-emitting portion α130 in front view can be made more compact than before. More specifically, the light-emitting portion α130 (inner lens α132) can be centered around the light-emitting portion α130, the first reflecting portion α110 (reflecting portion α111), and the second reflecting portion α120 (reflecting portion α121) can also be shown to the player as a region capable of emitting light. In other words, the first reflecting portion α110 (reflecting portion α111), the light-emitting portion α130, and the second reflecting portion α120 (reflecting portion α121) form a continuous region, and this continuous region can be shown to the player as a region capable of emitting light. Moreover, since the reflecting portion α111 of the first reflecting portion α110 and the reflecting portion α121 of the second reflecting portion α120 are arranged at the same position in the front-rear direction, the surface emission at each reflecting portion α121 appears neatly aligned. In addition, whether the chip LED α13L is illuminated or not, the outer lens cut surface αRCo is reflected in the reflective area α111 of the first reflecting portion α110, and the inner lens cut surface αRCi is reflected in the reflective area α121 of the second reflecting portion α120, which looks like a pattern to player H3 and enhances the decorativeness.

In FIG. 68-1(b), the up-down direction is perpendicular to the paper surface, but the first reflecting portion α110 and the second reflecting portion α120 may be arranged in the same position in the up-down direction, or may be arranged in positions offset in the up-down direction. When arranged in positions offset in the up-down direction, for example, the upper part of the lens cut surface αRC of the light emitting portion α130 (e.g., the inner lens cut surface αRCi) may be reflected in the second reflecting portion α120, and the lower part of the lens cut surface (e.g., the outer lens cut surface αRCo) may be reflected in the first reflecting portion α110.

In addition, the lens cut patterns may be different between the outer lens cut surface αRCo and the inner lens cut surface αRCi, so that the patterns projected on the reflective area α111 of the first reflecting portion α110 and the reflective area α121 of the second reflecting portion α120 are different.

Figure 68-2(a) is a schematic diagram similar to Figure 67, showing part of a light-emitting unit reflected in a reflecting portion with one lens cut surface arranged on both sides. Components with the same names as those explained in Figure 68-1 will be explained using the same reference numerals as those used in Figure 68-1. Also, explanations of content that overlaps with that explained using Figure 68-1 may be omitted. In Figure 68-2(a), the top of the figure is the player H3 side (front side). Also, the right side of the figure is the inside, and the left side is the outside. These inside and outside directions correspond to the left and right directions on the gaming table.

In the explanation of FIG. 68-1(b), the light-emitting portion α130 shown in the figure is a single lens cut surface αRC provided continuously on the inner peripheral surface of the inner lens α132, but it can also be seen as being composed of two lens cut surfaces with a surface switching line (ridge line rl) at which the surface angle changes as a boundary. The light-emitting portion α130 shown in FIG. 68-2(a) has a single lens cut surface provided continuously on the inner peripheral surface of the inner lens α132. That is, the inner peripheral surface of the inner lens α132 is composed of a curved surface, and there is no surface switching line (ridge line rl) at which the surface angle changes as shown in FIG. 68-1(b), and only one lens cut surface is provided. Hereinafter, this single lens cut surface is referred to as a single lens cut surface αRCs. The outer peripheral surface of the inner lens α132 is also composed of a curved surface like the inner peripheral surface. On the other hand, the outer lens α133 has a flat configuration, but may have a curved configuration like the inner lens α132.

The light-emitting unit LU shown in FIG. 68-2(a) has a light-emitting substrate α131 on which two chip LEDs for surface emission, the first chip LED α13L1 and the second chip LED α13L2, are mounted. The light-emitting substrate α131 may have three or more chip LEDs mounted thereon, or may have only one chip LED mounted thereon. Both the first chip LED α13L1 and the second chip LED α13L2 are LEDs capable of emitting light in multiple colors, and can emit different colors or the same color. They can also emit light in different ways or the same way. In the description here, the first chip LED α13L1 continuously lights up a first color, and the second chip LED α13L1 flashes a second color different from the first color. The light-emitting modes include modes with different lighting times and modes with different brightness (the same applies to other examples).

The first reflecting portion α110 is arranged so as to overlap the outer (left) portion of the light emitting substrate α131, and the second reflecting portion α120 is arranged so as to overlap the inner (right) portion, but neither the first reflecting portion α110 nor the second reflecting portion α120 necessarily need to overlap the light emitting substrate α131.

In the light-emitting unit LU shown in FIG. 68-2(a), the light-emitting portion α130 is provided between the first reflecting portion α110 and the second reflecting portion α120. It can also be said that the single lens cut surface αRCs of the light-emitting portion α130 is provided between the first reflecting portion α110 and the second reflecting portion α120, and that at least a portion of the inner lens α132 is provided.

Of the light emitted from the first chip LEDα13L1 on the outer (left) side, the light that deviates from straight ahead and travels diagonally to the outer (left) side is dispersed by the single lens cut surface αRCs into light that travels straight ahead (towards the player) and light that travels in the outer (left) direction. Of the light emitted from the second chip LEDα13L2 on the inner (right) side, the light that deviates from straight ahead and travels diagonally to the inner (right) side is dispersed by the single lens cut surface αRCs into light that travels straight ahead (towards the player) and light that travels in the inner (right) direction.

Of the light that travels outward (left) by the single lens cut surface αRCs, the light that reaches the reflecting portion α111 of the first reflecting portion α110 is reflected by the reflecting portion α111 and travels directly ahead (towards the player). Also, of the light that travels inward (right) by the single lens cut surface αRCs, the light that reaches the reflecting portion α121 of the second reflecting portion α120 is reflected by the reflecting portion α121 and travels directly ahead (towards the player). In FIG. 68-2, the path of the light reflected by the reflecting portion α111 of the first reflecting portion α110 is shown only by a single dashed arrow, and the path of the light reflected by the reflecting portion α121 of the second reflecting portion α120 is also shown only by a single dashed arrow, but it appears that both the reflecting portion α111 of the first reflecting portion α110 and the reflecting portion α121 of the second reflecting portion α120 are surface-emitted. The light reflected by the reflection areas α111 and α121 may travel in a direction that deviates from the direction directly ahead. In Figure 68-2(a), the surface emission from the reflection areas α111 and α121 is shown in gray.

In this example, the area of the light-emitting effect visible from the player's side can be made larger, and the area of the light-emitting portion α130 when viewed from the front can be made more compact than before. More specifically, the light-emitting portion α130 (inner lens α132) can be centered around the light-emitting portion α130, the first reflecting portion α110 (reflecting portion α111), and the second reflecting portion α120 (reflecting portion α121) can also be shown to the player as a region capable of emitting light. In other words, the first reflecting portion α110 (reflecting portion α111), the light-emitting portion α130, and the second reflecting portion α120 (reflecting portion α121) form a continuous region, and this continuous region can be shown to the player as a region capable of emitting light. Furthermore, the surface emission at the reflection portion α111 of the first reflection portion α110 and the surface emission at the reflection portion α121 of the second reflection portion α120 are not only emission at different surfaces, but also emission in different colors and different emission modes is achieved for the first chip LED α13L1 and the second chip LED α13L2, resulting in a more innovative emission mode. Moreover, whether the chip LED is emitting light or is turned off, the outer (left) portion of the single lens cut surface αRCs is reflected in the reflection portion α111 of the first reflection portion α110, and the inner (right) portion of the single lens cut surface αRCs is reflected in the reflection portion α121 of the second reflection portion α120, which looks like a pattern to the player H3, enhancing the decorativeness. In addition, while the chip LED is emitting light, the reflected pattern of the single lens cut surface αRCs makes the reflective areas α111 and α121 appear to be emitting light, so by continuously lighting the first chip LED α13L1 and blinking the second chip LED α13L2, the appearance of the light from the reflective areas α111 and α121 changes, adding to the novelty.

Even if the lens cut surface αRCs is a single one, the lens cut pattern may be different for each part, so that the patterns reflected on the reflection area α111 of the first reflection area α110 and the reflection area α121 of the second reflection area α120 are different.

In addition, in FIG. 68-2(a), the up-down direction is perpendicular to the paper, but a reflector may also be provided above or below the light-emitting unit α130 shown in FIG. 68-2(a), so that the light from the lens cut surface reaches the upper or lower reflector as well, making it appear as if the lens cut surface is being illuminated while also being reflected. This makes it possible to widen the area of the light-emitting effect visible to the player in the up-down direction as well.

Figure 68-2 (b) shows a planar inner lens α132 that can be used in place of the inner lens α132 shown in Figure 68 (a).

This planar inner lens α132 has a surface switching line αRCL where the surface angle changes, and can be seen as three lens cut surfaces αRCo, αRCm, and αRCi, but can also be seen as one continuous lens cut surface (single lens cut surface).

Figure 68-3 is a schematic diagram similar to Figure 67, showing two light-emitting units arranged at positions offset in the front-to-rear direction. Components with the same names as components explained so far may be explained using the same symbols used so far. Also, explanations of content that overlaps with what has been explained so far may be omitted. In Figure 68-3, the top of the figure is the player H3 side (front side). Moreover, the right side of the figure is the inside, and the left side is the outside. This inside and outside direction corresponds to the left and right directions on the gaming machine.

The two light-emitting units shown in FIG. 68-3 are the first light-emitting unit LU1 located on the outer (left) side and the second light-emitting unit LU2 located on the inner (right) side. In this example, the first light-emitting unit LU1 and the second light-emitting unit LU2 have the same configuration, but they may have different configurations. The first light-emitting unit LU1 has a first light-emitting portion α140, a first reflecting portion α110, and a first light-emitting substrate α141. The second light-emitting unit LU2 has a second light-emitting portion α150, a second reflecting portion α120, and a second light-emitting substrate α151. The first light-emitting portion α140 has a first inner lens α142 and a first outer lens α143 with a double lens structure. The second light-emitting portion α150 has a second inner lens α152 and a second outer lens α153 with a double lens structure. The first light emitting substrate α141 is mounted with only one first chip LEDα14L for surface emission capable of emitting light in multiple colors, but may be mounted with multiple. The second light emitting substrate α151 is mounted with only one second chip LEDα15L for surface emission capable of emitting light in multiple colors, but may be mounted with multiple. In the description here, the first chip LEDα14L and the second chip LEDα15L blink with the same color, but the blinking cycle is shifted, and when the first chip LEDα14L is turned on, the second chip LEDα15L is turned off, and when the first chip LEDα14L is turned off, the second chip LEDα15L is turned on, so that they blink alternately. The first inner lens α142 has a first lens cut surface αRC1 on the inner peripheral surface. The second inner lens α152 has a second lens cut surface αRC2 on the inner peripheral surface. The lens cut pattern on the first lens cut surface αRC1 and the lens cut pattern on the second lens cut surface αRC2 may be different or the same. In FIG. 68-3, the first lens cut surface αRC1 and the second lens cut surface αRC2 are shown as the same jagged uneven surface, but in reality, the first lens cut surface αRC1 and the second lens cut surface αRC2 have different lens cut patterns.

The first reflecting portion α110 has a reflecting portion α111 facing the first light emitting portion α140, and the second reflecting portion α120 has a reflecting portion α121 facing the second light emitting portion α150. The reflecting portion α111 of the first reflecting portion α110 is inclined from the front side to the rear side as it approaches the first light emitting portion α140. The reflecting portion α121 of the second reflecting portion α120 is inclined from the front side to the rear side as it approaches the second light emitting portion α150. Furthermore, the surface α1432 of the first outer lens α143 on the second light emitting portion α150 side and the reflecting portion α121 of the second reflecting portion α120 are adjacent to each other, and the boundary portion between the surface α1432 on the second light emitting portion α150 side and the reflecting portion α121 of the second reflecting portion α120 is smoothly connected and is on the same imaginary plane. In this case, the virtual surface is a flat surface, but it may also be a curved surface (for example, a curved surface that protrudes forward or recesses backward).

In this FIG. 68-3, a part of the path of light is also shown by an arrow. Of the light emitted from the first chip LED α14L, the light traveling directly ahead (towards the player) passes through the first inner lens α142 and the first outer lens α143 and travels towards the player H3. On the other hand, of the light emitted from the first chip LED α14L, the light traveling diagonally away from the directly ahead (to the left) is dispersed by the first lens cut surface αRC1 into light traveling directly ahead (towards the player) and light traveling in the outward (left) direction. The light traveling outward reaches the reflection portion α111 of the first reflection portion α110, is reflected by the reflection portion α111, and travels towards the directly ahead (towards the player). Of the light emitted from the second chip LED α15L, the light traveling directly ahead (towards the player) passes through the second inner lens α152 and the second outer lens α153 and travels towards the player H3. On the other hand, the light emitted from the second chip LEDα15L that is shifted from the front to the outside (left) and travels diagonally is dispersed by the second lens cut surface αRC2 into light traveling straight ahead (towards the player) and light traveling in the outward (left) direction. The light traveling in the outward direction reaches the reflection part α121 of the second reflecting part α120, is reflected by the reflection part α121, and travels straight ahead (towards the player). In FIG. 68-3, the path of the light reflected by the reflection part α111 of the first reflecting part α110 is shown only by a single dashed arrow, and the path of the light reflected by the reflection part α121 of the second reflecting part α120 is also shown only by a single dashed arrow, but it appears that both the reflection part α111 of the first reflecting part α110 and the reflection part α121 of the second reflecting part α120 are surface-emitted. The light reflected from each of the reflection areas α111 and α121 may travel in a direction that deviates from the direction directly ahead. In Figure 68-3, the surface emission from each of the reflection areas α111 and α121 is shown in gray.

As shown in FIG. 68-3, in the first light-emitting unit LU1, at least a portion of the first lens cut surface αRC1 is located forward of the front end α12t, which is the forward-most end of the second reflecting portion α120. Also, at least a portion of the reflecting portion α111 of the first reflecting portion α110 is located forward of the reflecting portion α121 of the second reflecting portion α120. As described above, the first reflecting portion α110 and the second reflecting portion α120 are provided at positions offset in the front-to-rear direction, but they may also be provided at positions offset in the up-down direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 68-3).

Furthermore, the first light-emitting substrate α141, which is the rearmost substrate of the first light-emitting unit LU1, is located forward of the second light-emitting substrate α151, which is the rearmost substrate of the second light-emitting unit LU2. In addition, the forwardmost portion of the first light-emitting unit LU1 (the front end α14t of the first outer lens α143) is located forward of the forwardmost portion of the second light-emitting unit LU2 (the front end α15t of the second outer lens α153).

In this example, the area of the light-emitting effect visible from the player side can be made larger, and the area of the light-emitting units α140 and α150 when viewed from the front can be made more compact than before. Furthermore, the surface light emission at the reflective portion α111 of the first reflective portion α110 and the surface light emission at the reflective portion α121 of the second reflective portion α120 are surface light emission at different positions in the front-to-rear direction, and the first chip LED α14L and the second chip LED α15L emit light by alternating blinking, resulting in a more innovative light-emitting mode. Furthermore, whether the chip LED is emitting light or not, the lens cut surfaces αRC1 and αRC2 are reflected on the reflective portions α111 and α121, which looks like a pattern to the player H3, and the decorativeness is enhanced. In addition, while the chip LED is emitting light, the reflected lens cut surfaces αRC1 and αRC2 make the reflective areas α111 and α121 appear to be emitting light even more, so the alternating blinking of the first chip LED α14L and the second chip LED α15L changes the way the light from the reflective areas α111 and α121 appears, adding to the novelty.

Figure 68-4 is a schematic diagram similar to Figure 67, showing a light-emitting unit composed of two reflective parts offset in the front-to-rear direction and a common light-emitting board. While the example in Figure 68-3 described above was composed of separate light-emitting boards α141 and α151, Figure 68-4 is composed of a single light-emitting board. Components with the same names as components described so far may be explained using the same symbols as used so far. Also, explanations of contents that overlap with those explained using Figure 68-3 may be omitted. In Figure 68-4, the top of the figure is the player H3 side (front side). Also, the right side of the figure is the inside, and the left side is the outside. These inside and outside directions correspond to the left and right directions on the gaming table.

In the example shown in FIG. 68-4, there is one light-emitting unit LU, and this one light-emitting unit has the first light-emitting unit α140, the first reflecting unit α110, the second light-emitting unit α150, the second reflecting unit α120, and the light-emitting board α160. The light-emitting board α160 is a flat light-emitting board on which the first chip LED α14L and the second chip LED α15L are mounted. The first chip LED α14L is the light source of the first light-emitting unit α140, and the second chip LED α15L is the light source of the second light-emitting unit α150. For this reason, the light-emitting board α160 is a light-emitting board common to the first light-emitting unit α140 and the second light-emitting unit α150. If one chip LED is damaged due to aging, there is a risk that the other chip LED will also be damaged in the same way, so it is often necessary to replace both chip LEDs together. In such a case, if the first chip LED α14L and the second chip LED α15L are mounted on one light-emitting substrate α160, the two chip LEDs can be replaced simply by replacing the light-emitting substrate α160, which improves ease of handling.

The second inner lens α152 and the second outer lens α153 of the double lens structure covering the second chip LED α15L have the same configuration as the second inner lens α152 and the second outer lens α153 shown in FIG. 68-3, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, the second reflecting portion α120 shown in FIG. 68-4 has the same configuration as the second reflecting portion α120 shown in FIG. 68-3, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, the first inner lens α142 and the first outer lens α143 of the double lens structure covering the first chip LED α14L cover the light emitting substrate α160 arranged on the rear side, so that they are configured to extend from the rear side to the front side more than the first inner lens α142 and the first outer lens α143 shown in FIG. 68-3. Also, the first reflecting portion α110 shown in FIG. 68-4 is configured to extend from the rear side to the front side more than the first reflecting portion α110 shown in FIG. 68-3, and the front-rear position of the reflecting portion α111 in the first reflecting portion α110 shown in FIG. 68-4 is the same as the front-rear position of the reflecting portion α111 in the first reflecting portion α110 shown in FIG. 68-3.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 68-4, as in the example shown in FIG. 68-3, the surface α1432 of the first outer lens α143 on the second light-emitting portion α150 side and the reflective portion α121 of the second reflecting portion α120 are adjacent to each other, and the boundary between the surface α1432 on the second light-emitting portion α150 side and the reflective portion α121 of the second reflecting portion α120 is smoothly connected and is on the same imaginary plane.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 68-4, as in the example shown in FIG. 68-3 described above, at least a part of the first lens cut surface αRC1 is located forward of the front end α12t, which is the frontmost end of the second reflecting portion α120. Also, at least a part of the reflecting portion α111 of the first reflecting portion α110 is located forward of the reflecting portion α121 of the second reflecting portion α120. Furthermore, the frontmost part of the first light-emitting portion α140 (front end α14t of the first outer lens α143) is located forward of the frontmost part of the second light-emitting portion α150 (front end α15t of the second outer lens α153). Conversely, the rear end α14e of the first outer lens α143 and the rear end α15e of the second outer lens α153 are in the same position in the front-to-rear direction.

The light emitted from the first chip LED α14L shown in FIG. 68-4 travels a longer distance to reach the first inner lens α142 than the light emitted from the first chip LED α14L shown in FIG. 68-3, so the brightness of the light traveling outward (leftward) is weakened by the first lens cut surface αRC1, and the pattern caused by the first lens cut surface αRC1 reflected on the reflective area α111 of the first reflecting portion α110 becomes fainter, giving player H3 a different impression from the pattern caused by the second lens cut surface αRC2 reflected on the reflective area α121 of the second reflecting portion α120.

The light emitting substrate α160 may be extended beyond the second light emitting portion α150 to the inner (right) side, and a third reflecting portion may be provided so as to overlap the light emitting substrate α160. This third reflecting portion has the same configuration as the second reflecting portion α120 shown in FIG. 68-1(b), and has a reflecting portion facing the second light emitting portion α150, and the reflecting portion is inclined from the front side to the rear side as it approaches the second light emitting portion α150.

Figure 68-5 (a) is a schematic diagram similar to Figure 67 showing a light-emitting unit in which two light-emitting sections and reflectors corresponding to each light-emitting section are integrally formed. Components with the same names as those components explained so far may be described using the same reference numerals as used so far. Also, explanations of contents that overlap with those explained so far may be omitted.

The light-emitting unit LU shown in FIG. 68-5(a) has a first light-emitting portion α140, a first light-emitting substrate α141, a second light-emitting portion α150, and a second light-emitting substrate α151. The first light-emitting portion α140 has the same configuration as the first light-emitting portion α140 shown in FIG. 68-3, and has a first inner lens α142 and a first outer lens α143 with a double lens structure. The first light-emitting substrate α141 has a first chip LED α14L mounted thereon, and the first chip LED α14L is covered by the first light-emitting portion α140. The second light-emitting portion α150 has the same configuration as the second light-emitting portion α150 shown in FIG. 68-3, and has a second inner lens α152 and a second outer lens α153 with a double lens structure. The second light-emitting substrate α151 has a second chip LED α15L mounted thereon, and the second chip LED α15L is covered by the second light-emitting portion α150.

In addition, the first reflecting portion α110, which reflects the first lens cut surface αRC1 provided on the inner peripheral surface of the first inner lens α142, is arranged on the inner (right) side of the first light emitting portion α140. On the other hand, the second reflecting portion α120, which reflects the second lens cut surface αRC2 provided on the inner peripheral surface of the second inner lens α152, is arranged on the outer (left) side of the second light emitting portion α150. The first reflecting portion α110 and the second reflecting portion α120 are integrally formed to constitute the reflecting member α170. That is, one surface (first surface) of the reflecting member α170 serves as the first reflecting portion α110, and another surface (second surface) of the reflecting member α170 serves as the second reflecting portion α120. Since the first reflecting portion α110 and the second reflecting portion α120 are integrally formed, when both the first reflecting portion α110 and the second reflecting portion α120 are damaged, they can be replaced together, and the handling is excellent. Furthermore, if the first reflecting portion α110 and the second reflecting portion α120 are separate, it may be necessary to adjust the angle between the first reflecting portion α110 and the second reflecting portion α120 when attaching each of them, but since the first reflecting portion α110 and the second reflecting portion α120 are integrally formed, the angle adjustment between the two is not necessary, and from this point of view, the handling is also excellent.

In FIG. 68-5(a), arrows also show parts of the light path. Of the light emitted from the first chip LED α14L, the light traveling inward (right) by the first lens cut surface αRC1 reaches the reflecting portion α111 of the first reflecting portion α110, is reflected by the reflecting portion α111, and travels directly ahead (towards the player). Of the light emitted from the second chip LED α15L, the light traveling outward (left) by the second lens cut surface αRC2 reaches the reflecting portion α121 of the second reflecting portion α120, is reflected by the reflecting portion α121, and travels directly ahead (towards the player).

The color and light emission pattern of the light emitted from the first chip LEDα14L or the lens cut pattern on the first lens cut surface αRC1 can be made different from the color and light emission pattern of the light emitted from the second chip LEDα15L or the lens cut pattern on the second lens cut surface αRC2, and the color and light emission pattern of the reflected light can be made different depending on the location of the integrally molded reflecting member α170, and the projected lens cut surface can also be made different.

Figure 68-5(b) is a schematic diagram similar to Figure 67 showing a light-emitting unit that is divided into two light-emitting parts but has a common light-emitting board and has a reflector integrally formed corresponding to each light-emitting part. While the example in Figure 68-5(a) described above was configured with separate light-emitting boards α141 and α151, Figure 68-5(b) is configured with a single light-emitting board. Components with the same names as components previously described may be described with the same reference numerals as previously used. Also, descriptions of contents that overlap with those described using Figure 68-5(a) may be omitted. In Figure 68-5(b), the top of the figure is the player H3 side (front side). Also, the right side of the figure is the inside, and the left side is the outside. The inside and outside directions correspond to the left and right directions on the gaming table.

The light-emitting unit LU shown in FIG. 68-5(b) has a first light-emitting portion α140, a first reflecting portion α110, a second light-emitting portion α150, a second reflecting portion α120, and a light-emitting substrate α160. The light-emitting substrate α160 is a single flat light-emitting substrate on which a first chip LED α14L and a second chip LED α15L are mounted. The first chip LED α14L is the light source of the first light-emitting portion α140, and the second chip LED α15L is the light source of the second light-emitting portion α150. Thus, the light-emitting substrate α160 is a light-emitting substrate shared by the first light-emitting portion α140 and the second light-emitting portion α150. The light-emitting substrate α160 also has a third chip LED α17L mounted thereon.

Also, like the light-emitting unit LU shown in FIG. 68-5(a) described above, the first reflecting portion α110 reflecting the first lens cut surface αRC1 in the first light-emitting portion α140 is disposed on the inner (right) side of the first light-emitting portion α140, and is inclined from the front side toward the rear side as it approaches the first light-emitting portion α140. Also, the second reflecting portion α120 reflecting the second lens cut surface αRC2 in the second light-emitting portion α150 is disposed on the outer (left) side of the second light-emitting portion α150, and is inclined from the front side toward the rear side as it approaches the second light-emitting portion α150. Between the first reflecting portion α110 and the second reflecting portion α120, there is a connecting portion αC connecting the first reflecting portion α110 and the second reflecting portion α120, and the first reflecting portion α110, the second reflecting portion α120, and the connecting portion αC constitute a half mirror α181 formed integrally. This half mirror α181 is provided on the outer peripheral surface of the lens member α182. In FIG. 68-5(b), the half mirror α181 is shown in gray. The lens member α182 is made of resin having optical transparency as a whole, like the outer lens. The combination of the half mirror α181 and the lens member α182 is called the semi-reflective member α180. The first light-emitting unit α140 and the second light-emitting unit α150 are provided so as to sandwich the semi-reflective member α180, and the first light-emitting unit α140, the second light-emitting unit α150 and the semi-reflective member α180 are provided so as to overlap one light-emitting board α160. The light emitted from the third chip LED α17L can pass through the semi-reflective member α180 and proceed to the player H3 side. On the other hand, the light traveling inward (right) by the first lens cut surface αRC1 is reflected by the first reflecting portion α110 of the half mirror α181 and travels directly ahead (towards the player), and the light traveling outward (left) by the second lens cut surface αRC2 is reflected by the second reflecting portion α120 of the half mirror α181 and travels directly ahead (towards the player). Also, the first lens cut surface αRC1 is reflected in the first reflecting portion α110 of the half mirror α181, and the second lens cut surface αRC2 is reflected in the second reflecting portion α120 of the half mirror α181. Therefore, the semi-reflective member α180 appears to emit three types of light: the transmitted light emitted from the third chip LED α17L, the reflected light emitted from the first chip LED α14L, and the reflected light emitted from the second chip LED α15L. The first lens cut surface αRC1 and the second lens cut surface αRC2 are reflected, making them look like patterns, and the decorativeness is extremely enhanced.

In addition, only the first reflecting portion α110 and the second reflecting portion α120 may be half mirrors, and no half mirror may be provided at the connecting portion αC, and the outer peripheral surface of the lens member α182 may be exposed. Alternatively, only the first reflecting portion α110 and the second reflecting portion α120 may have a mirror structure, and the connecting portion αC may have a half mirror structure or the outer peripheral surface of the lens member α182 may be exposed.

The reflective section described above is not limited to a mirror structure, and may be, for example, a transparent or translucent material. Furthermore, the light-emitting section may be disposed in front of the reflective section. For example, light dispersed by a lens cut disposed in front may strike a transparent or translucent reflective section disposed in the rear, and the lens cut may also be reflected in the transparent or translucent reflective section. In this case, even if it is difficult to see from directly in front, if you shift slightly to the left or right, the pattern caused by the reflected lens cut can be seen, and you can enjoy the decoration by changing the viewing angle.

Also, the light-emitting unit LU shown in FIG. 68-1(b) may be disposed to the left or right of the liquid crystal display device, the light-emitting section α130 shown in the same figure may be disposed to the further left or right of the light-emitting unit LU, and the first reflecting section α110 shown in the same figure may be disposed to the further left of the light-emitting section α130 so that the lens cut of the light-emitting section α130 is reflected on the first reflecting section α110, or the second reflecting section α120 shown in the same figure may be disposed to the further right of the light-emitting section α130 so that the lens cut of the light-emitting section α130 is reflected on the second reflecting section α120. In this case, the lens cut of the light-emitting section α130 adjacent to the light-emitting unit LU shown in FIG. 68-1(b) is not reflected on the reflecting section of the light-emitting unit LU.

As an application example of the light-emitting unit LU shown in FIG. 68-2, a first reflecting portion α110 and a second reflecting portion α120 may be provided on each side of the light-emitting portion α130 extending in the left-right direction, and reflecting portions A and B may be provided below the center portion of the light-emitting portion α130 so as to be in contact with the light-emitting portion α130 with a gap in the left-right direction, and the lens cut surface αRCs of the light-emitting portion α130 may be reflected on the first reflecting portion α110, the second reflecting portion α120, the reflecting portion A, and the reflecting portion B.

According to the above description,
"A first cover portion [for example, an inner lens α132] including at least a transparent portion having transparency;
A first reflecting portion (for example, the first reflecting portion α110 shown in FIG. 68-1(a)) including at least a reflecting portion (for example, a reflecting portion α111) capable of reflecting light;
A second reflecting portion (e.g., the second reflecting portion α120 shown in FIG. 68-1(a)) including at least a reflecting portion (e.g., a reflecting portion α121) capable of reflecting light;
A light emitting means (e.g., a chip LED α13L shown in FIG. 68-1(a)) covered by the first cover portion;
A gaming machine equipped with
The light from the light emitting means is configured to be directed toward at least the player side by the first cover part [for example, the upward dotted arrow shown in FIG. 68-1(a)],
The light from the light emitting means is configured to be directed toward at least the first reflecting portion by the first cover portion [for example, the horizontal dotted arrow shown in FIG. 68-1(a)],
The first cover portion has a lens cut portion (for example, a lens cut surface αRC shown in FIG. 68-1(a)),
At least a first portion of the lens cut portion [for example, a rear portion of the lens cut surface αRC shown in FIG. 68-1(a)] is configured to be reflected by the first reflecting portion,
At least a second portion of the lens cut portion [for example, a front portion of the lens cut surface αRC shown in FIG. 68-1(a)] is configured to be reflected by the second reflecting portion.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

With this gaming machine, different parts of the lens cut section are reflected on the two reflecting sections, allowing the player to see a larger area that can emit light.

The light from the light emitting means that reaches the first reflecting portion by the first cover portion heads in the direction reflected by the first reflecting portion. For example, it does not have to head behind the first reflecting portion, and if the front is the 12 o'clock direction and the back is the 6 o'clock direction, the light may head in the 3 o'clock direction, the 9 o'clock direction, the 2 o'clock direction, or the 10 o'clock direction (the same applies below).

The light from the light emitting means may also be directed toward the second reflecting portion by the first cover portion.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A first cover portion including at least a transparent portion having transparency [for example, the inner lens α132 shown in FIG. 68-1(b) or FIG. 68-2],
A first reflecting portion (for example, the first reflecting portion α110 shown in FIG. 68-1(b) or FIG. 68-2(a)) including at least a reflecting portion (for example, a reflecting portion α111) capable of reflecting light;
A second reflecting portion (for example, the second reflecting portion α120 shown in FIG. 68-1(b) or FIG. 68-2(a)) including at least a reflecting portion (for example, a reflecting portion α121) capable of reflecting light;
A light emitting means (for example, the chip LED α13L shown in FIG. 68-1(b) or the first chip LED α13L1 and the second chip LED α13L2 shown in FIG. 68-2(a)) covered by the first cover part;
A gaming machine equipped with
The light from the light emitting means is configured to be directed toward at least the player side by the first cover part [for example, the upward dotted arrow shown in FIG. 68-1(b) or FIG. 68-2(a)],
The light from the light emitting means is configured to be directed toward at least the first reflecting portion by the first cover portion [for example, the horizontal dotted arrow shown in FIG. 68-1(b) or FIG. 68-2(a)],
The first cover portion has a lens cut portion (for example, a lens cut surface αRC (an outer lens cut surface αRC and an inner lens cut surface αRCi) shown in FIG. 68-1(b) or a single lens cut surface αRCs shown in FIG. 68-2(a)),
At least a first portion of the lens cut portion (for example, a portion of the outer lens cut surface αRCo shown in FIG. 68-1(b) or an outer (left) portion of the single lens cut surface αRCs shown in FIG. 68-2(a)) is configured to be reflected by the first reflecting portion,
At least a second portion of the lens cut portion (for example, a portion of the inner lens cut surface αRCi shown in FIG. 68-1(b) or an inner (right) portion of the single lens cut surface αRCs shown in FIG. 68-2(a)) is configured to be reflected by the second reflecting portion,
At least a part of the first cover part is located between the first reflecting part and the second reflecting part (for example, the example shown in FIG. 68-1(b) or the example shown in FIG. 68-2(a));
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, different parts of the lens cut section are reflected on the two reflecting sections, allowing the player to see a larger light-emitting area. In addition, the first cover section, the first reflecting section, and the second reflecting section can be seen by the player as a light-emitting area with the first cover section at the center.

The light from the light emitting means may also be directed toward the second reflecting portion by the first cover portion.

Also, at least a part or all of the lens cut portion may be located between the first reflecting portion and the second reflecting portion. Alternatively, the lens cut portion may be provided at a position that is not between the first reflecting portion and the second reflecting portion.

In addition, another member may be interposed between the first reflecting portion and the first cover portion, and another member may be interposed between the second reflecting portion and the first cover portion.

Furthermore, the first reflecting portion and the second reflecting portion may be provided at positions that are offset in the vertical direction, and the lens cut portion above the first cover portion or an upper portion of the lens cut portion may be reflected in the second reflecting portion, and the lens cut portion below the first cover portion or a lower portion of the lens cut portion may be reflected in the first reflecting portion.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A first cover portion including at least a transparent portion having transparency [for example, the first inner lens α142 shown in FIG. 68-3],
A second cover portion including at least a transparent portion having transparency (for example, the second inner lens α152 shown in FIG. 68-3 );
A first reflecting portion (for example, the first reflecting portion α110 shown in FIG. 68-3) including at least a reflecting portion (for example, a reflecting portion α111) capable of reflecting light;
A second reflecting portion (e.g., the second reflecting portion α120 shown in FIG. 68-3) including at least a reflecting portion (e.g., a reflecting portion α121) capable of reflecting light;
A first light emitting means (for example, the first chip LED α14L shown in FIG. 68-3(b)) covered by the first cover portion;
A second light emitting means (e.g., the second chip LED α15L shown in FIG. 68-3(b)) covered by the second cover portion;
A gaming machine equipped with
The light from the first light-emitting means is configured to be directed toward at least the player side by the first cover part [for example, the upward dotted arrow shown on the left side of FIG. 68-3],
The light from the first light emitting means is configured to be directed toward at least the first reflecting portion by the first cover portion [for example, the horizontal dotted arrow shown on the left side of FIG. 68-3],
The first cover portion has a first lens cut portion (for example, a first lens cut surface αRC1 shown in FIG. 68-3 ),
At least a part of the first lens cut portion is configured to be reflected by the first reflecting portion,
The light from the second light emitting means is configured to be directed toward at least the player side by the second cover part [for example, the upward dotted arrow shown on the right side of FIG. 68-3],
The light from the second light emitting means is directed toward at least the second reflecting portion by the second cover portion [for example, the horizontal dotted arrow shown on the right side of FIG. 68-3],
The second cover portion has a second lens cut portion (for example, a second lens cut surface αRC2 shown in FIG. 68-3 ),
At least a part of the second lens cut portion is configured to be reflected by the second reflecting portion.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

With this gaming machine, different lens cut sections are reflected on the two reflecting sections, allowing the player to see a larger area that can emit light.

The light from the second light emitting means that reaches the second reflecting portion by the second cover portion heads in the direction reflected by the second reflecting portion. For example, it does not have to head behind the second reflecting portion, and if the front is the 12 o'clock direction and the back is the 6 o'clock direction, the light may head in the 3 o'clock direction, the 9 o'clock direction, the 2 o'clock direction, or the 10 o'clock direction (the same applies below).

Furthermore, the direction reflected by the first reflecting portion and the direction reflected by the second reflecting portion may be the same direction or different directions.

Also,
The first reflecting portion and the second reflecting portion are provided at positions offset from each other in the front-rear direction or the up-down direction.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The front side is the player's side [e.g., the upper side in Fig. 68-3], and the upper side is the head side of the player [e.g., the front side perpendicular to the paper surface of Fig. 68-3].

The "displaced position" referred to here means that the front end of the first reflecting portion and the front end of the second reflecting portion are in different positions in the front-to-back direction, and a part of the first reflecting portion and a part of the second reflecting portion may or may not overlap in the front-to-back direction. Alternatively, it means that the top end of the first reflecting portion and the top end of the second reflecting portion are in different positions in the vertical direction, and a part of the first reflecting portion and a part of the second reflecting portion may or may not overlap in the vertical direction.

In addition, according to the above description,
"A first cover portion including at least a transparent portion having transparency [for example, the first inner lens α142 shown in FIG. 68-5 (a)],
A second cover portion including at least a transparent portion having transparency (for example, the second inner lens α152 shown in FIG. 68-5(a)),
A first reflecting portion (for example, the first reflecting portion α110 shown in FIG. 68-5(a)) including at least a reflecting portion (for example, a reflecting portion α111) capable of reflecting light;
A second reflecting portion (e.g., the second reflecting portion α120 shown in FIG. 68-5(a)) including at least a reflecting portion (e.g., a reflecting portion α121) capable of reflecting light;
A first light emitting means (for example, the first chip LED α14L shown in FIG. 68-5(a)) covered by the first cover portion;
A second light emitting means (e.g., the second chip LED α15L shown in FIG. 68-5(a)) covered by the second cover portion;
A gaming machine equipped with
The light from the first light-emitting means is configured to be directed toward at least the player side by the first cover part [for example, the upward dotted arrow shown on the left side of FIG. 68-5(a)],
The light from the first light emitting means is configured to be directed toward at least the first reflecting portion by the first cover portion [for example, the horizontal dotted arrow shown on the left side of FIG. 68-5(a)],
The first cover portion has a first lens cut portion (for example, a first lens cut surface αRC1 shown in FIG. 68-5(a)),
At least a part of the first lens cut portion is configured to be reflected by the first reflecting portion,
The light from the second light-emitting means is configured to be directed toward at least the player side by the second cover part [for example, the upward dotted arrow shown on the right side of FIG. 68-5(a)],
The light from the second light emitting means is configured to be directed toward at least the second reflecting portion by the second cover portion [for example, the horizontal dotted arrow shown on the right side of FIG. 68-5(a)],
The second cover portion has a second lens cut portion (for example, a second lens cut surface αRC2 shown in FIG. 68-5(a)),
At least a part of the second lens cut portion is configured to be reflected by the second reflecting portion,
The first reflecting portion and the second reflecting portion are integrally formed (for example, the reflecting member α170 shown in FIG. 68-5(a)).
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

With this gaming machine, different lens cuts are reflected on the two reflecting parts, allowing the player to see a larger light-emitting area. In addition, because the first reflecting part and the second reflecting part are integrally formed, the two reflecting parts can be easily handled when replacing a damaged reflecting part.

Also,
"The first reflecting portion and the second reflecting portion are formed on different surfaces [for example, a certain surface (first surface) and another certain surface (second surface) of the reflecting member α170].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

For example, if the front surface facing the player, the left side slope on the left side of the front surface, the right side slope on the right side of the front surface, the top surface, and the bottom surface are integrally formed, the first reflecting portion may be provided on the left side slope, and the second reflecting portion may be provided on the right side slope.

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A first cover portion including at least a transparent portion having transparency [for example, the first inner lens α142 shown in FIG. 68-4 or FIG. 68-5 (b)],
A second cover portion including at least a transparent portion having transparency (for example, the second inner lens α152 shown in FIG. 68-4 or FIG. 68-5 (b));
A first reflecting portion (for example, the first reflecting portion α110 shown in FIG. 68-4 or FIG. 68-5(b)) including at least a reflecting portion (for example, a reflecting portion α111) capable of reflecting light;
A second reflecting portion (for example, the second reflecting portion α120 shown in FIG. 68-4 or FIG. 68-5(b)) including at least a reflecting portion (for example, a reflecting portion α121) capable of reflecting light;
A first light-emitting means (for example, the first chip LED α14L shown in FIG. 68-4 or FIG. 68-5(b)) covered by the first cover portion;
A second light emitting means (for example, the second chip LEDα15L shown in FIG. 68-4 or FIG. 68-5(b)) covered by the second cover portion;
A gaming machine equipped with
The light from the first light-emitting means is configured to be directed toward at least the player side by the first cover part [for example, the upward dotted arrow shown on the left side of FIG. 68-4 or FIG. 68-5(b)],
The light from the first light emitting means is configured to be directed toward at least the first reflecting portion by the first cover portion [for example, the horizontal dotted arrow shown on the left side of FIG. 68-4 or FIG. 68-5(b)],
The first cover portion has a first lens cut portion (for example, a first lens cut surface αRC1 shown in FIG. 68-4 or FIG. 68-5(b)),
At least a part of the first lens cut portion is configured to be reflected by the first reflecting portion,
The light from the second light-emitting means is configured to be directed toward at least the player side by the second cover part [for example, the upward dotted arrow shown on the right side of FIG. 68-4 or FIG. 68-5(b)],
The light from the second light emitting means is configured to be directed toward at least the second reflecting portion by the second cover portion [for example, the horizontal dotted arrow shown on the right side of FIG. 68-4 or FIG. 68-5(b)],
The second cover portion has a second lens cut portion (for example, the second lens cut surface αRC2 shown in FIG. 68-4 or FIG. 68-5(b)),
At least a part of the second lens cut portion is configured to be reflected by the second reflecting portion,
The first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are mounted on a certain substrate [for example, the light-emitting substrate α160 shown in FIG. 68-4 or FIG. 68-5(b)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He explained:

With this gaming machine, different lens cut sections are reflected on the two reflecting sections, allowing the player to see a larger light-emitting area. Also, if one light-emitting means is damaged due to aging, there is a risk that the other light-emitting means may also be damaged in the same way, and it is often necessary to replace both together. In this case, by mounting the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means on a certain board, it becomes easier to replace the two light-emitting means, making it easier to handle.

Also,
"A third cover portion including at least a transparent portion having transparency [for example, a semi-reflective member α180 shown in FIG. 68-5 (b)] is provided,
The third cover portion is provided with the first reflecting portion [for example, the first reflecting portion α110 by the half mirror α181 shown in FIG. 68-5(b)] and the second reflecting portion [for example, the second reflecting portion α120 by the half mirror α181 shown in FIG. 68-5(b)].
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also,
"A third light-emitting means (e.g., the third chip LED α17L shown in FIG. 68-5(b)) is provided, the third light-emitting means being covered by the third cover portion,
The light from the third light emitting means is configured to be directed toward at least the player through the third cover portion [for example, the upward solid arrow shown in the center of FIG. 68-5(b)],
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

The third light-emitting means may also be mounted on the certain substrate [for example, the light-emitting substrate α160 shown in FIG. 68-5(b)].

Furthermore, according to the above description,
"A first cover portion [e.g., an inner lens 1151] including at least a transparent portion having transparency;
A reflective portion (e.g., the inner left reflective portion 113) including at least a reflective portion (e.g., RF1) capable of reflecting light;
A light emitting means (e.g., a chip LED 110L shown at the left end of FIG. 288) covered by the first cover portion;
A gaming machine equipped with
The light from the light emitting means is configured to be directed toward at least the player side by the first cover part [for example, the upward solid arrow shown in FIG. 288],
The light from the light emitting means is configured to be directed toward at least the reflecting portion by the first cover portion [for example, the horizontal solid arrow shown in FIG. 288],
The first cover portion has a lens cut portion [e.g., a lens cut surface RC],
The reflecting portion is disposed so as to reflect at least a part of the lens cut portion.
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
He also explained:

Also, according to the above description, "a gaming machine equipped with a first cover part [e.g., inner lens 1151] including at least a transparent part having transparency, a reflecting part [e.g., inner left reflecting part 113] including at least a reflecting part capable of reflecting light [e.g., RF1], and a light emitting means [e.g., chip LED 110L shown at the leftmost end of FIG. 67] covered by the first cover part, characterized in that the light from the light emitting means is directed at least toward the player side by the first cover part [e.g., the upward solid arrow shown in FIG. 67], the light from the light emitting means is also directed at at least the reflecting part by the first cover part [e.g., the horizontal solid arrow shown in FIG. 67], and the light that reaches the reflecting part is reflected by the reflecting part and directed at least toward the player side."

With this gaming machine, the area of the light-emitting effect visible to the player can be made larger by the light reflected by the reflecting part than when the light-emitting effect is created using only the first cover part, and the area of the first cover part and the light-emitting means when viewed from the front can be made more compact than before.

Also, the gaming machine is characterized in that "the light emitting means is disposed on a light emitting board [e.g., light emitting board 110B], the reflecting section is provided at a position adjacent to the first cover section, the shortest distance [e.g., L1] of the first portion of the first cover section from the light emitting board is longer than the shortest distance [e.g., L2] of the second portion of the reflecting section from the light emitting board, the second portion is the portion of the reflecting section closest to the player [e.g., portion 113t closest to the player], the first portion is the portion of the transparent portion closer to the player than the second portion [e.g., portion 115t closest to the player], and the light from the light emitting means is directed by the first portion in a predetermined direction different from the player's direction, avoiding the reflecting section."

In other words, the player-side tip of the first cover portion protrudes further toward the player than the player-side tip of the reflecting portion.

With this gaming machine, the first cover part, which is located farther away than the reflecting part, can emit light, which may allow store staff and other players who view the gaming machine from the side to recognize the effects of the gaming machine.

The predetermined direction may be a direction in which there are no gaming machine components that block the light. The first portion may be configured to direct the light from the light emitting means toward the side of the gaming machine.

The article also explained that "the first cover portion has a lens cut surface [e.g., lens cut surface RC], and the reflecting portion is positioned so as to reflect at least a portion of the lens cut surface."

This gaming machine gives the player the illusion that the reflecting part is the first cover part.

The article also described a gaming machine that is characterized by having a second cover portion [e.g., outer lens 1152] that covers the first cover portion, and the second cover portion also includes at least a transparent portion that has transparency.

With this gaming machine, the second cover part can prevent damage to the first cover part.

The device may also include a second reflecting portion [e.g., outer left reflecting member 12] that is separate from the reflecting portion [e.g., inner left reflecting portion 113] that is provided adjacent to the first cover portion, the second reflecting portion being provided on the opposite side to the reflecting portion, and the second cover portion [e.g., outer lens 1152] being disposed between the reflecting portion and the second reflecting portion.

The article also explained that "the gaming machine is characterized by being provided with optical action means [e.g., a concealing surface FG] that prevents the light-emitting means from being seen through the transparent portion, and the optical action means is provided in a position away from the light-emitting means and not exposed to the outside."

This gaming machine prevents people from looking directly at the light emitting means.

Also, the article described a gaming machine that is characterized in that it is provided with optical action means [e.g., a concealing surface FG] that prevents the light-emitting means from being seen through the transparent portion of the first cover portion, and the optical action means is provided on the inner peripheral surface of the second cover portion [e.g., the inner peripheral surface of the outer lens 1152 shown in FIG. 67].

This gaming machine prevents the light-emitting means from being viewed directly through the second cover portion.

Next, we will provide a detailed description of the first movable performance body 161 and the second movable performance body 162.

Figure 69 is a diagram showing the entire first movable performance body 161 and second movable performance body 162 shown in Figure 65. In Figure 69, the front side of the paper is the player side (front side), and the back side of the paper is the side where the performance image display device 157 (not shown) is located.

The first movable performance body 161 on the left side has a left winding section 1611 on the left side and a left pull-out section 1612 on the opposite right side. Meanwhile, the second movable performance body 162 on the right side has a right winding section 1621 on the right side and a right pull-out section 1622 on the opposite left side. The performance device 16 also has a rack 163 common to the first movable performance body 161 and the second movable performance body 162, an upper cable storage section 164, and a lower cable storage section 165.

The left winding section 1611 has a left winding panel LP1, a left winding motor LM1, a left winding connector LL1, and a left winding gear LG1. The left drawing section 1612 has a left drawing panel LP2, a left drawing motor LM2, a left drawing connector LL2, and a left drawing gear LG2. The above-mentioned rack 163, upper cable storage section 164, lower cable storage section 165, left winding motor LM1, left winding gear LG1, left drawing motor LM2, left drawing gear LG2, left winding connector LL1, and left drawing connector LL2 are hidden by the top lamp unit 11, the outer left reflecting member 12, the outer right reflecting member 13, and the left and right speaker units 143 shown in FIG. 65. In addition, the left drawing section 1612 has a first sheet member 1610 whose one longitudinal end portion is connected to the left winding section 1611. The first sheet member 1610 is a strip-shaped member in which a first light-transmitting portion 161t is provided between a first upper edge portion 1610u and a first lower edge portion 1610b. The first light-transmitting portion 161t has a higher light transmittance than the first upper edge portion 1610u and the first lower edge portion 1610b, but the background image appears blurred in the portion of the display screen of the performance image display device 157 where the first light-transmitting portion 161t overlaps. In other words, the first light-transmitting portion 161t is translucent. The first light-transmitting portion 161t may be opaque. Alternatively, the first light-transmitting portion 161t may be transparent.

Figure 70 (A) is a view of the first sheet member 1610 shown in Figure 69 from below. In this Figure 70, the lower side of the figure is the player side (front side), and the upper side of the figure is the side where the performance image display device 157 (display screen) (not shown) is located. Also, in Figure 70 (A), the components of the left winding section 1611 are shown in gray, and the components of the left drawer section 1612 are shown with hatching. The left drawer section 1612 has a left base section LBB connected to the left drawer connector LL2. As shown in Figure 69, the left drawer connector LL2 is an L-shaped metal fitting, which is screwed to the left drawer motor LM2 (strictly speaking, the left drawer motor case) from the side, and the bottom part is screwed to the left base section LBB. Since the left drawer connector LL2 is an L-shaped metal fitting, its strength and durability are enhanced. The lower end of the left base part LBB is free, and the left base part LBB is suspended from above. The left pull-out panel LP2 is provided so as to cover the left base part LBB from the player side. The left base part LBB is provided with a grip part LFX. The left pull-out part 1612 grips one end (right side) of the belt-shaped first sheet member 1610 in the longitudinal direction with the grip part LFX. The grip part LFX is made of a transparent material, and allows the clamped end of the first sheet member 1610 to be visually observed. In addition, when the base material of the first sheet member 1610 is a transparent sheet, the one end of the longitudinal direction is colored by printing or the like, so that it is possible to visually confirm whether the assembly is performed correctly even when the first sheet member 1610 is gripped by the grip part LFX. The left winding part 1611 has a first sheet member storage part LS connected to the left winding connection part LL1. As shown in Fig. 69, the left winding connector LL1 is also an L-shaped metal fitting, which is screwed to the left winding motor LM1 (strictly speaking, the left winding motor case) from the side and the bottom part is screwed to the first sheet member storage part LS. The first sheet member storage part LS rotatably supports the upper and lower ends of the left winding shaft LAX. The left winding shaft LAX is rotatably supported at both ends by the first sheet member storage part LS and is rotatable forward and backward (see the arrows shown in Fig. 70(A)). However, although the upper end of the left winding shaft LAX is connected to the left withdrawal connector LL2 via the upper part of the first sheet member storage part LS, the lower end of the left winding shaft LAX is free, and the left winding shaft LAX has a cantilever structure. The other end (left side) of the first sheet member 1610 in the longitudinal direction is inserted into the left winding shaft LAX, and the first sheet member 1610 is connected to the left winding shaft LAX. The first sheet member 1610 is wound around the left winding shaft LAX by rotating the left winding shaft LAX forward, and is unwound from the left winding shaft LAX by rotating the left winding shaft LAX backward. FIG. 70A shows a state in which the first sheet member 1610 is completely unwound from the left winding shaft LAX. The first sheet member 1610 shown in FIG. 70A comes out of the notch LS1 of the first sheet member storage section LS, goes around the outer periphery of the first sheet member storage section LS, and extends toward the left drawer section 1612. The left winding panel LP1 covers the first sheet material storage section LS from the player side, and the part of the first sheet material 1610 that goes around the outer periphery of the first sheet material storage section LS is not visible from the player side. In this way, by providing the first sheet material storage section LS on the outside of the left winding shaft LAX and having the first sheet material 1610 go around the outer periphery of the first sheet material storage section LS, the part of the first sheet material 1610 that covers the display screen of the performance image display device 157 can be kept parallel to the display screen regardless of the amount of the first sheet material 1610 wound around the left winding shaft LAX, and the blurring of the background image is made uniform.

The right winding section 1621 shown in Fig. 69 has a right winding panel RP1, a right winding motor RM1, a right winding connection part RL1, and a right winding gear RG1. The right pull-out section 1622 has a right pull-out panel RP2, a right pull-out motor RM2, a right pull-out connection part RL2, and a right pull-out gear RG2. The right winding motor RM1, the right winding gear RG1, the right pull-out motor RM2, the right pull-out gear RG2, the right winding connection part RL1, and the right pull-out connection part RL2 are also hidden by the top lamp unit 11, the outer left reflecting member 12, the outer right reflecting member 13, and the left and right speaker units 143 shown in Fig. 65. The right pull-out section 1622 has a second sheet member 1620 whose one longitudinal end portion is connected to the right wind-up section 1621, but the right wind-up panel RP1 and the right pull-out panel RP2 shown in FIG. 69 are in contact with each other, and the second sheet member 1620 is not actually visible. The structure of this second sheet member 1620 is a strip-like structure in which a second light-transmitting portion is provided between the second upper edge and the second lower edge, similar to the structure of the first sheet member 1610 described above. The second light-transmitting portion also has a higher light transmittance than the second upper edge and the second lower edge, but the background image appears blurred in the portion of the display screen of the performance image display device 157 where the second light-transmitting portion overlaps. In other words, the second light-transmitting portion is translucent. The second light-transmitting portion may be opaque. Alternatively, the second light-transmitting portion may be transparent.

Figure 70 (B) is a view of the second sheet member 1620 shown in Figure 69 from below. In this Figure 70 (B), the components of the right winding section 1621 are shown in gray, and the components of the right drawer section 1622 are shown with hatching. The right drawer section 1622 has a right base section RBB connected to the right drawer connector RL2. As shown in Figure 69, the right drawer connector RL2 is also an L-shaped metal fitting, which is screwed to the right drawer motor RM2 (strictly speaking, the right drawer motor case) from the side, and the bottom section is screwed to the right base section RBB. Since the right drawer connector RL2 is also an L-shaped metal fitting, its strength and durability are enhanced. The lower end of the right base section RBB is free, and the right base section RBB is suspended from above. The right drawer panel RP2 is provided to cover the right base section RBB from the player side. The right base part RBB is provided with a gripping part RFX. The right pull-out part 1622 grips the one end (left side) of the belt-like second sheet member 1620 in the longitudinal direction with the gripping part RFX. The gripping part RFX is made of a transparent material, so that the clamped end of the second sheet member 1620 can be visually observed. In addition, when the base material of the second sheet member 1620 is a transparent sheet, the one end of the longitudinal direction is colored by printing or the like, so that it is possible to visually confirm whether the assembly has been performed correctly even in the state where it is gripped by the gripping part RFX. The right winding part 1621 has a second sheet member storage part RS connected to the right winding connector RL1. As shown in FIG. 69, the right winding connector RL1 is also an L-shaped metal fitting, and is screwed from the side to the right winding motor RM1 (strictly speaking, the right winding motor case), and the bottom part is screwed to the second sheet member storage part RS. The second sheet member storage section RS rotatably supports the upper and lower ends of the right winding shaft RAX. The right winding shaft RAX is rotatably supported at both ends by the second sheet member storage section RS and can rotate forward and backward. However, the upper end of the right winding shaft RAX is connected to the right pull-out connecting section RL2 via the upper part of the second sheet member storage section RS, but the lower end of the right winding shaft RAX is free, and the right winding shaft RAX has a cantilever structure. The other end side (right side) of the second sheet member 1620 in the longitudinal direction is inserted into the right winding shaft RAX, and the second sheet member 1620 is connected to the right winding shaft RAX. The second sheet member 1620 is wound around the right winding shaft RAX by the reverse rotation of the right winding shaft RAX, and is fed from the right winding shaft RAX by the forward rotation of the right winding shaft RAX. 70B shows a state in which the second sheet member 1620 is wound around the right winding shaft RAX inside the second sheet member storage section RS. That is, in FIG. 70B where the right winding panel RP1 and the right pull-out panel RP2 are in contact with each other, the second sheet member 1620 is wound around the right winding shaft RAX three times. The second sheet member 1620 comes out of the cutout RS1 of the second sheet member storage section RS, goes around the outer periphery of the second sheet member storage section RS, and extends to the right pull-out section 1622 side. The right winding panel RP1 covers the second sheet member storage section RS from the player side, and the part of the second sheet member 1620 that goes around the outer periphery of the second sheet member storage section RS is not visible from the player side. In this way, by providing a second sheet material storage section RS on the outside of the right winding shaft RAX and having the second sheet material 1620 go around the outer periphery of the second sheet material storage section RS, the portion of the second sheet material 1620 that covers the display screen of the performance image display device 157 can be kept parallel to the display screen regardless of the amount of the second sheet material 1620 wound around the right winding shaft RAX, making the blurring of the background image uniform.

As explained above, in a pair of movable bodies (1611 and 1612, 1621 and 1622), the rotation axis (LAX, RAX) is only on one of the movable bodies (1611, 1621).

In addition, in the initial position, both the first sheet member 1610 and the second sheet member 1620 are wound around the winding shaft (LAX, RAX). No adhesive is provided on both sides (front and back) of the base material (semi-transparent film, opaque film, or transparent film) of the sheet member, and a transparent layer is provided over the entire surface of each side. This transparent layer may be provided by printing. By providing a transparent layer instead of an adhesive surface, it is possible to prevent overlapping parts from sticking to each other when wound.

The left winding motor LM1 shown in FIG. 69 is driven by power supplied from the left winding flexible cable LC1 shown in black. This left winding flexible cable LC1 is stored in the upper cable storage section 164. A left winding gear LG1 is attached to the drive shaft of the left winding motor LM1, and the left winding gear LG1 meshes with the rack 163. In addition, the left winding motor LM1 is connected to the left winding connector LL1, and the left winding motor LM1 is fixed so that it cannot rotate by this left winding connector LL1. When the left winding motor LM1 rotates in one direction, the left winding section 1611 moves along the rack 163 in a direction away from the left pull-out section 1612 (leftward in FIG. 69). When the left winding motor LM1 rotates in the opposite direction, the left winding section 1611 moves along the rack 163 in a direction approaching the left pull-out section 1612 (to the right in FIG. 69).

The left withdrawal motor LM2 shown in Figure 69 is driven by power supplied from the left withdrawal flexible cable LC2 shown in black. This left withdrawal flexible cable LC2 is stored in the lower cable storage section 165. A left withdrawal gear LG2 is attached to the drive shaft of the left withdrawal motor LM2, and the left withdrawal gear LG2 meshes with the rack 163. In addition, the left withdrawal motor LM2 is connected to the left withdrawal connector LL2, and the left withdrawal motor LM2 is fixed so that it cannot rotate by this left withdrawal connector LL2. When the left withdrawal motor LM2 rotates in one direction, the left withdrawal section 1612 moves along the rack 163 in a direction approaching the left winding section 1611 (leftward in Figure 69). When the left pull-out motor LM2 rotates in the opposite direction, the left pull-out section 1612 moves along the rack 163 in a direction away from the left wind-up section 1611 (to the right in Figure 69).

The right winding motor RM1 shown in FIG. 69 is driven by power supplied from the right winding flexible cable RC1 shown in gray. This right winding flexible cable RC1 is stored in the upper cable storage section 164. A right winding gear RG1 is attached to the drive shaft of the right winding motor RM1, and the right winding gear RG1 meshes with the rack 163. In addition, the right winding motor RM1 is connected to the right winding connector RL1, and the right winding motor RM1 is fixed so that it cannot rotate by this right winding connector RL1. When the right winding motor RM1 rotates in one direction, the right winding section 1621 moves along the rack 163 in a direction approaching the right pull-out section 1622 (leftward in FIG. 69). When the right winding motor RM1 rotates in the opposite direction, the right winding section 1621 moves along the rack 163 in a direction away from the right pull-out section 1622 (to the right in Figure 69).

The right-side pull-out motor RM2 shown in FIG. 69 is driven by power supplied from the right-side pull-out flexible cable RC2 shown in gray. This right-side pull-out flexible cable RC2 is stored in the lower cable storage section 165.

The upper cable storage section 164 stores two cables, a left-winding flexible cable LC1 and a right-winding flexible cable RC1, which supply power to the drive sources of different movable bodies, and the lower cable storage section 165 stores two cables, a left-drawer flexible cable LC2 and a right-drawer flexible cable RC2, which also supply power to the drive sources of different movable bodies. This allows for more space to be saved than storing the cables one by one. In addition, not only can contact and tangle the cables be reduced compared to storing four cables together, but the way the cables are stored is also designed to further reduce contact and tangle the cables. That is, of two cables stored in the same storage section, the first is arc-shaped on one side (for example, a front horizontal arc or a left horizontal arc), and the second is arc-shaped on the other side (a rear horizontal arc or a right horizontal arc), and is stored in each storage section so that the shorter the cable protruding from the storage section, the larger the diameter of the arc (inner horizontal diameter) becomes, and the longer the cable protruding from the storage section, the smaller the diameter of the arc (inner horizontal diameter).

A right withdrawal gear RG2 is attached to the drive shaft of the right withdrawal motor RM2, and the right withdrawal gear RG2 meshes with the rack 163. The right withdrawal motor RM2 is also connected to the right withdrawal connector RL2, and the right withdrawal motor RM2 is fixed by this right withdrawal connector RL2 so that it cannot rotate. When the right withdrawal motor RM2 rotates in one direction, the right withdrawal section 1622 moves along the rack 163 in a direction away from the right winding section 1621 (leftward in FIG. 69). When the right withdrawal motor RM2 rotates in the opposite direction, the right withdrawal section 1622 moves along the rack 163 in a direction approaching the right winding section 1621 (rightward in FIG. 69).

Figure 71 shows an example of a combination of performance movements of a first movable performance body 161 on the left and a second movable performance body 162 on the right.

The state shown on the left side of Figure 71 (A) is a state in which the first movable performance body 161 on the left side and the second movable performance body 162 on the right side are each in their initial positions. That is, at the left end of the display screen of the performance image display device 157, the left winding panel LP1 and the left pull-out panel LP2 of the first movable performance body 161 are in contact, and the first sheet member 1610 is not visible. Also, at the right end of the display screen, the right winding panel RP1 and the right pull-out panel RP2 of the second movable performance body 162 are in contact, and the second sheet member 1620 is not visible. The state shown on the right side of Figure 71 (A) is a state in which the second movable performance body 162 on the right side is stopped in its initial position, and only the left pull-out section 1612 of the first movable performance body 161 on the left side has moved in a direction away from the left winding section 1611 (to the right in Figure 71). The belt-shaped first sheet member 1610 appears as if it is being pulled out from the left winding section 1611, and extends toward the right side. As a result, the area where the first light-transmitting section 161t overlaps with the display screen of the performance image display device 157 gradually becomes larger, and the area where the background image appears blurred expands. The operation of the first movable performance body 161 shown in FIG. 71 (A) corresponds to an example of a first operation in which the left pull-out panel LP2 (corresponding to the first part) and the left pull-up panel LP1 (corresponding to the second part) move in a direction away from each other. Note that while the left pull-up section 1611 moves in a direction approaching the left pull-out section 1612 (rightward in FIG. 71), the left pull-out section 1612 may move in a direction away from the left pull-up section 1611 (rightward in FIG. 71) at a speed faster than the moving speed of the left pull-up section 1611. Even in this case, the position of the left winding panel LP1 (corresponding to the second part) moves to the right, but the left pull-out panel LP2 (corresponding to the first part) and the left winding panel LP1 move in a direction away from each other. Also, if the left winding section 1611 is in a state where it can move to the left, the left winding section 1611 may move in a direction away from the left pull-out section 1612 (to the right in FIG. 71) while the left pull-out section 1612 also moves in a direction away from the left winding section 1611 (to the right in FIG. 71). Even in this case, the left pull-out panel LP2 (corresponding to the first part) and the left winding panel LP1 (corresponding to the second part) move in a direction away from each other.

The state shown on the left side of FIG. 71(B) shows the state in which the first movable performance body 161 has completed the first operation described above, and the state shown on the right side shows the state in which the left pull-out section 1612 has now moved in a direction approaching the left wind-up section 1611 (leftward in FIG. 71) and returned to its initial position. The first sheet member 1610 is pushed by the left pull-out section 1612 and wound up by the left wind-up section 1611. As a result, the area in which the first light-transmitting section 161t overlaps with the display screen of the performance image display device 157 gradually becomes smaller, and the area in which the background image appears blurred becomes narrower. The operation of the first movable performance body 161 shown in FIG. 71(B) corresponds to an example of a third operation in which the left pull-out panel LP2 (corresponding to the first part) and the left wind-up panel LP1 (corresponding to the second part) move in a direction approaching each other. If the left winding section 1611 is in a state where it can move leftward, the left drawing section 1612 may move in a direction approaching the left winding section 1611 (leftward in FIG. 71) at a speed faster than the moving speed of the left winding section 1611, while the left winding section 1611 moves in a direction away from the left drawing section 1612 (leftward in FIG. 71). Even in this case, the position of the left winding panel LP1 (corresponding to the second portion) moves to the left, but the left drawing panel LP2 (corresponding to the first portion) and the left winding panel LP1 move in a direction approaching each other. Also, while the left winding section 1611 moves in a direction approaching the left drawing section 1612 (leftward in FIG. 71), the left drawing section 1612 may also move in a direction approaching the left winding section 1611 (rightward in FIG. 71). Even in this case, the left pull-out panel LP2 (corresponding to the first part) and the left roll-up panel LP1 (corresponding to the second part) will move toward each other.

The state shown on the left side of Figure 71 (C) shows the state in which the first movable performance body 161 has completed the first operation described above, and the state shown on the right side shows the left winding section 1611 moving in a direction approaching the left pull-out section 1612 (to the right in Figure 71) and the left winding section 1611 contacting the left pull-out section 1612. The first sheet member 1610 is being wound up by the left winding section 1611. As a result, the area in which the first light-transmitting section 161t overlaps with the display screen of the performance image display device 157 gradually becomes smaller, and the area in which the background image appears blurred becomes narrower. The operation of the first movable performance body 161 shown in Figure 71 (C) corresponds to an example of the fourth operation.

The state shown on the left side of Figure 71 (D) shows the first movable performance body 161 after completing the fourth operation described above, and the state shown on the right side shows the left winding section 1611 moving in a direction away from the left pull-out section 1612 (leftward in Figure 71). The first sheet member 1610 emerges as if being sent out from the left winding section 1611, and extends toward the left side. As a result, the first light-transmitting section 161t gradually overlaps with the display screen of the performance image display device 157, and the area in which the background image appears blurred expands. The operation of the first movable performance body 161 shown in Figure 71 (D) corresponds to an example of the second operation.

The state shown on the left side of Figure 71 (E) also shows the state in which the first movable performance body 161 has completed the fourth operation described above, and the state shown on the right side shows the state in which the left winding section 1611 first moves in a direction away from the left pull-out section 1612 (leftward in Figure 71) as shown in Figure 71 (D), completing the second operation. Next, as shown in Figure 7 (B), the left pull-out section 1612 moves in a direction approaching the left winding section 1611 (leftward in Figure 71) and returning to its initial position. In other words, after the second operation, the third operation is performed, and the first movable performance body 161 returns to its initial position. During this time, the first sheet member 1610 first widens toward the left, and then narrows toward the left.

Although each panel, such as the left wind-up panel LP1, left pull-out panel LP2, right wind-up panel RP1, and right pull-out panel RP2, is a panel that covers only the player side, each panel may be cylindrical, with the front 1/2 arc portion visible to the player being opaque and the rear 1/2 arc portion invisible to the player being transparent. By leaving the rear 1/2 arc portion transparent, it is possible to check from the rear whether the assembly has been done correctly. Also, in the event of a defect, the inside can be checked without disassembly, making it possible to detect any internal problems early.

In the above description, the first movable performance body 161 and the second movable performance body 162 only move in the horizontal direction, but they may also be movable performance bodies that perform rotational movements. For example, the first rotation performance body, which is long in the horizontal direction, and the second rotation performance body, which is also long in the horizontal direction, can rotate forward and backward around the position of their respective centers of gravity as the center of rotation. The first rotation performance body has a member that is at least partially connected to the second rotation performance body (for example, a single base member that supports the rotation axes of the first rotation performance body and the second rotation performance body). The position where the first rotation performance body and the second rotation performance body are arranged in a straight line is set as the initial position, and they are arranged on the player side of the display screen of the performance image display device 157 via the above-mentioned base member. In the initial position, the above-mentioned base member overlaps the display screen, but neither the first rotation performance body nor the second rotation performance body directly overlaps. Also, in the initial position, a certain part (corresponding to the first part) at the right end of the first rotating production body and a certain part (corresponding to the second part) at the left end of the second rotating production body are close to each other. The operation of rotating the first rotating production body 90 degrees counterclockwise corresponds to an operation (first operation) in the direction in which a certain part (corresponding to the first part) at the right end of the first rotating production body moves away from a certain part (corresponding to the second part) at the left end of the second rotating production body. When the first rotating production body is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise, a certain part (corresponding to the first part) at the right end of the first rotating production body in a vertically elongated position overlaps with the display screen of the production image display device 157. In other words, when the first rotating production body rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position, the area where a certain part (corresponding to the first part) at the right end overlaps with the display screen expands. The action of the first rotating production body rotating 90 degrees clockwise and returning to the initial position after the first action corresponds to an action (third action) in the direction in which a certain part (corresponding to the first part) of the right end of the first rotating production body approaches a certain part (corresponding to the second part) of the left end of the second rotating production body. When the first rotating production body rotates 90 degrees clockwise and returns to the initial position after the first action, the area in which a certain part (corresponding to the first part) of the right end overlaps with the display screen is reduced. In addition, the action of the second rotating production body rotating 90 degrees clockwise corresponds to an action (second action) in the direction in which a certain part (corresponding to the second part) of the left end of the second rotating production body moves away from a certain part (corresponding to the first part) of the right end of the first rotating production body. When the second rotating production body is rotated 90 degrees clockwise, a certain part (corresponding to the second part) of the left end of the second rotating production body in a vertically long posture overlaps with the display screen of the production image display device 157. That is, when the second rotational performance body rotates 90 degrees clockwise from the initial position, the area where a certain part at the left end (corresponding to the second part) overlaps with the display screen expands. The action of the second rotational performance body rotating 90 degrees counterclockwise and returning to the initial position after completing the second action corresponds to an action (fourth action) in the direction in which a certain part at the left end of the second rotational performance body (corresponding to the second part) approaches a certain part at the right end of the first rotational performance body (corresponding to the first part). When the second rotational performance body rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise and returns to the initial position after completing the second action, the area where a certain part at the left end (corresponding to the second part) overlaps with the display screen shrinks.

According to the above description, a gaming machine is described that includes a first movable body [e.g., left pull-out section 1612], a second movable body [e.g., left wind-up section 1611], a first drive section [e.g., left pull-out motor LM2], and a second drive section [e.g., left wind-up motor LM1], the first movable body is configured to be movable by the drive of the first drive section, the second movable body is configured to be movable by the drive of the second drive section, and the first movable body has a member [e.g., first sheet member 1610] at least partially connected to the second movable body.

This gaming machine allows for innovative effects to be created by the movement of two movable bodies that are partially connected, increasing the interest of players.

Also, the gaming machine is characterized in that "the first movable body [e.g., the left drawer section 1612] is configured to be capable of performing a first operation [e.g., the operation shown in FIG. 71(A)] in which a first portion of the first movable body [e.g., the left drawer panel LP2] and a second portion of the second movable body [e.g., the left roll-up panel LP1] move away from each other, and the first movable body [e.g., the left drawer section 1612] is configured to be capable of performing a third operation [e.g., the operation shown in FIG. 71(B)] in which the first portion and the second portion move toward each other." was also described.

This gaming machine allows for innovative effects to be performed by changing the relative position of the first movable body with respect to the second movable body, enhancing the player's interest.

The first motion may be a motion in which the first part moves away from the second part while the second part is stationary, or a motion in which the first part moves away from the second part at a speed faster than the speed of the second part while the second part is moving toward the first part. Alternatively, the first part may move away from the second part while the second part is moving away from the first part.

The third motion may be a motion in which the first part moves toward the second part while the second part is stationary, or a motion in which the first part moves toward the second part at a speed faster than the speed of the second part while the second part is moving away from the first part. Alternatively, the third motion may be a motion in which the first part moves toward the second part while the second part is moving toward the first part.

The article also described a gaming machine that includes a display means [e.g., a performance image display device 157], and is characterized in that the first movable body is configured so that the area overlapping with the display means expands when the first action is performed, and the first movable body is configured so that the area overlapping with the display means shrinks when the third action is performed.

This gaming machine can provide a novel effect in which the size of the area of the first movable body that overlaps with the display means changes, enhancing the player's interest.

The article also described a gaming machine in which "the first movable body is configured to include a certain member [e.g., a first sheet member 1610] that has light transparency in at least a portion [e.g., a first light-transmitting portion 161t], and the certain member is configured to expand an area overlapping with the display means when the first operation is performed, and the certain member is configured to reduce an area overlapping with the display means when the third operation is performed."

This gaming machine can create a novel effect in which the size of the area that overlaps with the display means of the certain component changes, enhancing the player's interest.

Also, the gaming machine is characterized in that "the second movable body [e.g., the left winding section 1611] is configured to be capable of performing a second action [e.g., the action shown in FIG. 71(D)] in which the first portion [e.g., the left pull-out panel LP2] and the second portion [e.g., the left winding panel LP1] move away from each other, and the second movable body [e.g., the left winding section 1611] is configured to be capable of performing a fourth action [e.g., the action shown in FIG. 71(C)] in which the first portion and the second portion move closer to each other." was also described.

This gaming machine allows for innovative effects to be performed by changing the relative position of the second movable body with respect to the first movable body, enhancing the player's interest.

The second motion may be a motion in which the second part moves away from the first part while the first part is stationary, or a motion in which the second part moves away from the first part at a speed faster than the speed of the first part while the first part is moving toward the second part. Alternatively, the second part may move away from the first part while the first part is moving away from the second part.

The fourth motion may be a motion in which the second part moves toward the first part while the first part is stationary, or a motion in which the second part moves toward the first part at a speed faster than the speed of the first part while the first part is moving away from the second part. Alternatively, the fourth motion may be a motion in which the second part moves toward the first part while the first part is moving toward the second part.

The article also explained that "the first movable body is operable while the second movable body is in operation, and the second movable body is operable while the first movable body is in operation."

This gaming machine allows for a novel presentation in which the first movable body and the second movable body move simultaneously, enhancing the player's interest.

The first movable body may be configured to perform a first motion in which a first portion of the first movable body moves away from a second portion of the second movable body, and the first movable body may be configured to perform a third motion in which the first portion of the first movable body moves toward the second portion of the second movable body.

The second movable body may also be configured to be capable of performing a second motion in which the second portion of the second movable body moves in a direction away from the first portion of the first movable body, and a fourth motion in which the second portion of the second movable body moves in a direction toward the first portion of the first movable body.

Furthermore, the fourth operation may be configured to be executable during the execution of the first operation, the second operation may be configured to be executable during the execution of the third operation, the second operation may be configured to be executable during the execution of the first operation, and the fourth operation may be configured to be executable during the execution of the third operation.

<Configuration of sensor unit SU of rendering device 16>
Next, the configuration of the sensor unit SU of the rendering device 16 described in Fig. 69 will be described with reference to Figs. 72 to 76. In the following description, the same reference numerals will be used for the configurations already described in other embodiments (e.g., Figs. 17 to 32), and the description will be omitted. In addition, for configurations that contradict the following description and the previous embodiment, the words and reference numerals of this example will take precedence.

Figure 72 is an oblique view showing the rear side of the performance device 16.

As described in Figures 69 to 71, the performance device 16 is provided with a first movable performance body 161 and a second movable performance body 162. The left winding section 1611 and the left pull-out section 1612 of the first movable performance body 161 are each provided with a light-shielding piece, and a sensor unit is provided to detect whether these light-shielding pieces are in their initial positions (here, the positions where the film is stored at the left end as shown in Figure 72). In addition, the right winding section 1621 and the right pull-out section 1622 of the second movable performance body 162 are each provided with a light-shielding piece, and a sensor unit is provided to detect whether these light-shielding pieces are in their initial positions (here, the positions where the film is stored at the right end as shown in Figure 72). The sensor unit SU1 shown in Figure 72 is for detecting the initial position of the right winding section 1621.

Figure 73 shows an example of the positional relationship between sensor units SU1 and SU2 and light shielding pieces C1 and C2.

In Figure 73, some parts of the performance device 16 are hidden to make it easier to understand the parts that are difficult to see from the outside as shown in Figure 72. Figure 73 shows a state in which the sensor unit SU1 provided for the right winding section 1621 of the second movable performance body 162 detects the light blocking piece C1 of this right winding section 1621 (both in the initial position). Also, a state in which the sensor unit SU2 provided for the right drawer section 1622 of the second movable performance body 162 detects the light blocking piece C2 of this right drawer section 1622 (both in the initial position).

Figure 74 is a right side view of the performance device 16.

The performance device 16 is placed on the front door 102 of the slot machine 10, and behind it are also placed the performance image display device 157 and the circuit board that controls it. Since the space inside the slot machine 10 is limited, these parts are placed as close together as possible, as shown in Figure 74. For this reason, there is a risk that other parts will collide with the sensor unit on the back of the performance device 16 during assembly, damaging the sensor unit. Also, in the example of Figure 74, the performance image display device 157 is slightly tilted to make it easier for the player to see, but performing the assembly work while adjusting this tilt increases the risk of collision.

Figure 75 is an enlarged view showing the area around sensor unit SU1 in Figure 72 (area circled by dotted lines).

As shown in FIG. 75, in the performance device 16 of this embodiment, a rib RB is provided near the sensor unit SU1, which can prevent collision with the sensor unit SU1. The following describes this rib RB in detail.

Figure 76 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a sensor unit SU1 and a rib RB.

The sensor unit SU1 shown in Figure 76 has a light-emitting unit SUE, a light-receiving unit SUR facing it, a screw hole SUH for fixing the sensor, and a connector SUC. A connector HAC provided at the end of the harness HA is connected to the connector SUC, and the sensor is configured to output a detection signal to an external board. The sensor unit SU1 outputs a signal indicating whether or not the light-receiving unit SUR has detected light from the light-emitting unit SUE. This sensor unit SU1 is not attached to the board to which the output signal is sent, but is attached to a member different from this board.

The rib RB has a portion that exceeds the size of the sensor unit SU1 in both the front-rear direction (the direction connecting the front and back) and the up-down direction. Specifically, in the harness connection direction (front-rear direction in FIG. 76), there is a portion that exceeds the sensor tip (x1 in FIG. 76), a portion that exceeds the connector SUC of the sensor unit SU1 (x3 in FIG. 76), and a portion that exceeds the connector HAC of the harness HA connected to the sensor unit SU1 (x4 in FIG. 76). In addition, in the direction perpendicular to the harness connection direction (up-down direction in FIG. 76), there is a portion that exceeds the sensor unit SU1, the connector SUC of the sensor unit SU1, and the connector HAC connected thereto (x2, x5 in FIG. 76). Note that the side RBS of the rib RB on the side of the performance image display device 157 has a partially inclined shape (a shape inclined from the front-rear direction or the up-down direction). This inclined shape allows the force of the performance image display device 157 to be dispersed when it collides, and also allows the performance image display device 157 to be guided to its installation position by moving it along this side RBS.

In the above configuration, the rib RB provided near the sensor unit SU1 protects the sensor unit SU1 from collisions with other parts, making the sensor unit SU1 less likely to be damaged.

In the above example, the rib RB has a portion that exceeds the size of the sensor unit SU1 in two directions, the front-to-back direction and the up-to-down direction, but it may also be configured to have a portion that exceeds the size of the sensor unit SU1 in at least one direction. In this case, the sensor unit SU1 can be protected in at least this one direction. Of course, by having a portion that exceeds the size of the sensor unit SU1 in two directions as in the above example, it is possible to ensure better protection. In particular, the protective effect can be increased when these two directions are perpendicular to each other.

In the above example, the rib RB has a portion that exceeds the size of the sensor unit SU1 in both the front-to-rear and up-to-down directions, but it may have a portion that protrudes in either direction, such as a portion that protrudes beyond the sensor unit SU1 only on the rear side in the front-to-rear direction. In this case, the sensor unit SU1 can be protected on the side with the protruding portion.

In the above example, a configuration for protecting the sensor unit SU1 provided in the performance device 16 was described, but the object to be protected is not limited to the sensor unit SU1, and any circuit configuration means may be protected. For example, some circuit configuration means, such as connectors, cables, and the detection parts of sensors, are easily damaged, and this configuration can protect such circuit configuration means from damage. For example, in the case of a configuration for protecting a connector SUC, the rib RB may have a portion that exceeds the size of the connector SUC in at least one direction. Also, a combination of multiple parts and components, such as a connector SUC and a connector HAC, may be protected.

In addition, in the above example, a configuration was described in which the rib RB protects the sensor unit SU1, but the same protective effect can be achieved with any member that has a portion larger than the size of the sensor unit SU1, not limited to the rib RB.

In addition, when a sensor unit is to be protected, it may be, like sensor unit SU1, a certain board (for example, a board inside sensor unit SU1) that at least includes a certain circuit configuration means (for example, a connector SUC) and a detection unit (for example, a light-emitting unit SUE and a light-receiving unit SUR). Alternatively, the sensor unit may be a certain board (for example, a board inside sensor unit SU1) that only includes a certain circuit configuration means (for example, a connector SUC), a detection unit (for example, a light-emitting unit SUE and a light-receiving unit SUR), and a resistor.

In the above example, a configuration was described in which the sensor unit SU1 does not have a light-shielding piece C1, but the present invention can also be applied to a sensor unit that also has a light-shielding piece. In such a sensor unit, the light-shielding piece moves in response to an external force, making it possible to detect the presence or absence of an external force. In other words, the sensor unit may at least include a certain board (e.g., a board inside the sensor unit SU1), a certain circuit configuration means (e.g., a connector SUC), a detection unit (e.g., a light-emitting unit SUE and a light-receiving unit SUR), and a light-shielding piece.

In addition, when a sensor unit is to be protected, the sensor unit may have a circuit configuration means (e.g., a connector SUC) on a first surface of a certain board (e.g., a board inside the sensor unit SU1) and a detection unit (e.g., a light-emitting unit SUE and a light-receiving unit SUR) on a second surface of the certain board. Alternatively, the sensor unit may have a circuit configuration means (e.g., a connector SUC) and a detection unit (e.g., a light-emitting unit SUE and a light-receiving unit SUR) on a first surface of a certain board (e.g., a board inside the sensor unit SU1).

In addition, when the sensor unit to be protected is incorporated into other members or parts, such as the sensor unit SU1 provided in the performance device 16, a portion of the sensor unit may be exposed from these members or parts or may be visible.

The sensor unit to be protected is not limited to what it detects, and may be capable of detecting that the movable body is in the initial position as in the above example, or may be capable of detecting the position of the door body. Sensor unit SU1 may also be provided on rib RB.

In addition, a certain unit (e.g., a performance image display device 157) may be configured to be removable with the sensor unit or certain circuit configuration means to be protected installed.

In addition, the side RBS of the rib RB on the side of the performance image display device 157 has a partially inclined shape (tilted from the front-to-back or up-down direction). In this way, a certain member (e.g., rib RB) that acts as a protective member may have an edge on the side of a certain unit (e.g., performance image display device 157) that is inclined in a certain direction (e.g., the direction of the connector SUC). Depending on the mounting position of the sensor unit, the side RBS may have a partially inclined shape (tilted from the left-to-right or up-to-down direction).

The technical ideas described in the explanations of Figures 72 to 76 are described below with reference to the corresponding configurations.

The above description describes a gaming machine that is equipped with a certain circuit configuration means (e.g., a connector SUC) and a certain member (e.g., a rib RB), the certain member being located in the vicinity of the certain circuit configuration means, and the certain member having a portion that protrudes further than the certain circuit configuration means in a first direction (e.g., the rear direction in the front-to-rear direction) (see, for example, FIG. 76).

Furthermore, the gaming machine described above is characterized in that the certain member has a portion that protrudes further than the certain circuit configuration means in a second direction different from the first direction (e.g., the upward direction of the vertical direction) (e.g., see FIG. 76).

Furthermore, the gaming machine described above is characterized in that the second direction is a direction perpendicular to the first direction.

The present invention also describes a gaming machine as described above, characterized in that the circuit configuration means is a connector to which a harness can be connected.

The present invention also describes a gaming machine that is the above-mentioned gaming machine, and is characterized in that it is equipped with a sensor unit (e.g., sensor unit SU1), and the sensor unit includes the certain circuit configuration means.

The present invention also describes a gaming machine that is characterized in that the sensor unit is attached to a member different from the substrate to which the output signal of the sensor unit is sent.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention is equipped with a launching device that launches balls into a specified gaming area, a winning hole configured to allow the balls launched from the launching device to enter, a detection means that detects balls that have entered the winning hole, a payout means that pays out the ball when the detection means detects a ball, and a variable display device that variably displays a specified pattern (identification information), and is suitable for pachinko machines and the like in which, when a gaming ball enters the winning hole and wins, the variable display device changes the pattern and then displays a still image to notify the progress of the gaming state.

The gaming machine according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, an "enclosed gaming machine" is one that circulates and uses gaming balls enclosed within the gaming machine. The main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, and the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to enable two-way communication. Furthermore, while two-way communication is enabled between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit, communication from the first sub-control unit to the second sub-control unit may be one-way communication.

The actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely a list of the most favorable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. Furthermore, by applying the content described in one of the multiple configurations described in the examples to other configurations, the range of play may be expanded.

<<Embodiment B>>
<Embodiment 1>
Hereinafter, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to Figure 77. Note that this figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as seen from the front side (player side).

The external structure of the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door with a ball storage tray 108, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 at its front.

The outer frame 102 is a vertically rectangular wooden frame member for fixing to an installation location (island equipment, etc.) in an amusement machine installation store. The main body 104 is called the inner frame, and is a vertically rectangular member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and is attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be freely rotatable, forming the base body of the amusement machine. The main body 104 is also formed in a frame shape, and has a space portion 114 on the inside. It also has an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 when it is opened.

The front frame door 106 is a door member that is attached to the front of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge part 112 so that it can be opened and closed freely with a locking function, and is configured in a frame shape with an opening on the inside. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a lamp 122 for the game table frame are attached to the front side. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a game area 124. In addition, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) is provided that detects the opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened.

The ball storage tray door 108 is a door member that is attached to the underside of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and to be freely opened and closed. The ball storage tray door 108 comprises an upper tray 126 capable of storing multiple game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "balls") and having a passageway for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110, a lower tray 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 126, a ball removal button 130 for discharging the game balls stored in the upper tray 126 into the lower tray 128 by the player's operation, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower tray 128 into a game ball collection container (commonly known as a dollar box) by the player's operation, and a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation. The game machine includes a ball launch handle 134 that launches balls into the game area 124 of the game board 200, a chance button 136 that changes the presentation mode of the various presentation devices 206 when operated by the player, a chance button lamp 138 that lights up the chance button 136, a ball lending operation button 140 that issues a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game arcade, a return operation button 142 that issues an instruction to return the player's balance to the card unit, a ball lending display unit 144 that displays the player's balance and the status of the card unit, and a button unit 190. It also includes a lower tray full sensor (not shown) that detects when the lower tray 128 is full.

The launching device 110 is attached to the bottom of the main body 104 and includes a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching hammer 148 that strikes the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front and is removably attached to the main body 104 using a specified fixing member so that it faces the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed through the opening after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

Figure 78 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of Figure 77, seen from the rear side. At the upper rear of the pachinko machine 100, there is a ball tank 150 with an opening that opens upward, for temporarily storing game balls, and a tank rail 154 located below the ball tank 150, for guiding balls that fall through a communication hole formed in the bottom of the ball tank 150 to a payout device 152 located on the right side of the rear.

The payout device 152 is made of a cylindrical member, and inside it are a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown). The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and is configured to temporarily retain game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154 and flowed down into the payout device 152, and to send the temporarily retained game balls one by one downwards from the payout device 152 by driving the payout motor to rotate it by a predetermined angle.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of a gaming ball sent out by the sprocket, and outputs either a high or low signal to the payout control unit 600 when a gaming ball passes, and outputs either a high or low signal when a gaming ball does not pass. The gaming ball that passes this payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper tray 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 uses this configuration to pay out balls to the player.

On the left side of the figure of the payout device 152, there is a main control board case 158 that houses the main control board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the overall game, a first sub-control board case 162 that houses the first sub-control board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs control processing for presentation based on processing information generated by the main control unit 300 and the second sub-control board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 that performs control processing for presentation based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400, a liquid crystal control board case 682 that houses the liquid crystal control board 680 that constitutes the liquid crystal control unit 700 that performs control processing for the liquid crystal, and a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing for the payout of game balls and is operated by a gaming store clerk. A payout control board case 172 that houses a payout control board 170 equipped with an error release switch 168 that releases an error by pressing a button, a launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing related to the launch of game balls, a power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that constitutes a power supply management unit 660 that supplies power to various electric game machines and is equipped with a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated when the power is turned on, and a CR interface unit 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit are arranged. The CR interface unit 186 has a CR unit connection unit composed of, for example, a D-sub (D-subminiature) connector, and transmits and receives signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit via this.

When viewed from the rear side, the pachinko machine 100 has a relay board 196 on the right side of the ball tank 150 and above the tank rail 154. The relay board 196 is used to electrically connect the pachinko machine 100 to the hall computer. When replacing the game board 200, there is no need to change the wiring between the pachinko machine 100 and the hall computer, so the game board 200 is replaced while the main body 104 and the hall computer are connected via the relay board 196. However, depending on the model, it may be necessary to change the type of signal sent from the pachinko machine 100 to the hall computer, so the pachinko machine 100 may be configured so that the connection status of the relay board 196 can be grasped from the front (near side) of the pachinko machine 100 when removing the game board 200.

In addition, a volume adjustment switch 192 for adjusting the volume of the speaker 120, for example, is provided at the upper left of the first sub-control board case 162 in the figure. The volume adjustment switch 192 is configured, for example, as a rotary switch.

In this way, the main control board 156, the first sub-control board 160, the second sub-control board 164 and the LCD control board 680 are provided on the back of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout control board 170, the launch board 174 and the power supply board 182 are provided on the outer frame 102 because they are commonly used by multiple models.

Figure 79 is a simplified front view of the game board 200. An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200, and a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll is defined.

A presentation device 206 is provided approximately in the center of the play area 124. A decorative symbol display device 208 and a movable display device 288 are provided approximately in the center of this presentation device 206, and around them are a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol reserve lamp 216, a first special symbol reserve lamp 218, a second special symbol reserve lamp 220, and a high probability lamp 222. Note that, hereinafter, normal symbols may be referred to as "normal symbols" and special symbols as "special symbols."

The performance device 206 operates the performance movable body 224 to perform the performance, and details will be described later. The decorative pattern display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and performance, and in this embodiment is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). This decorative pattern display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left pattern display area 208a, a middle pattern display area 208b, a right pattern display area 208c, and a performance display area 208d, and the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c each display different decorative patterns, and the performance display area 208d displays an image used for the performance. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is used as the decorative pattern display device 208, other display devices may be used as long as they are configured to display various effects and various game information, including, for example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector.

The movable display device 288 is also a display device for performing various displays used in the performance, and in this embodiment is configured as a liquid crystal display device, but like the decorative pattern display device 208, other display devices may be used including, for example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector. The movable display device 288 is equipped with a motor (not shown) and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction by the motor, and when lowered, covers at least a portion of the front of the decorative pattern display device 208.

The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying general maps, and in this embodiment is configured with a 7-segment LED. The first special map display device 212 and the second special map display device 214 are display devices for displaying special maps, and in this embodiment are configured with a 7-segment LED.

The normal reserve lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of reserved normal variable games (described in detail below), and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., two) of normal variable games. The first special reserve lamp 218 and the second special reserve lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of reserved special variable games (described in detail below), and in this embodiment, it is possible to reserve up to a predetermined number (e.g., four) of special variable games. The high probability lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the game state is in a high probability state where a jackpot is likely to occur, or will become a high probability state, and is lit when the game state is changed from a low probability state where a jackpot is unlikely to occur to a high probability state, and is turned off when the game state is changed from a high probability state to a low probability state.

In addition, around the periphery of this performance device 206, there are provided predetermined ball entrances, such as a general winning entrance 226, a general starting entrance 228, a first special starting entrance 230, a second special starting entrance 232, and a variable winning entrance 234.

In this embodiment, multiple general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (when a ball enters the general winning opening 226), the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) into the upper tray 126 as prize balls. The balls discharged into the upper tray 126 can be freely removed by the player, and these configurations allow prize balls to be paid out to the player based on the winning. Note that balls that enter the general winning opening 226 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In this embodiment, balls paid out to players as compensation for winning may be referred to as "prize balls" and balls lent to players as "loan balls", and "prize balls" and "loan balls" are collectively referred to as "balls (game balls)".

The normal map start port 228 is composed of a device called a gate or through chucker, which is used to determine whether or not a ball has passed through a specified area of the play area 124, and in this embodiment, one is provided on the left side of the play board 200. Unlike balls that enter the general winning port 226, balls that pass through the normal map start port 228 are not discharged to the play island side. When a specified ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the normal map start port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a normal map variable play using the normal map display device 210.

In this embodiment, only one first special symbol start hole 230 is provided in the center of the game board 200. When a ball enters this first special symbol start hole 230, a payout device 152 (described later) is driven to discharge a predetermined number of balls (e.g., three balls) as prize balls onto the upper tray 126, and a special symbol variable game is started by the first special symbol display device 212. The ball that enters the first special symbol start hole 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged onto the game island side.

The second special chart start hole 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chute), and in this embodiment, only one is arranged directly below the first special chart start hole 230. This second special chart start hole 232 has a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible for a ball to enter the hole. When a player wins the normal chart variable game and the normal chart display device 210 displays the winning pattern, the wing member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special chart start hole 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number of balls (for example, four balls) as prize balls into the upper tray 126, and the special chart variable game by the second special chart display device 214 is started. The ball that enters the second special chart start hole 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacker, and in this embodiment, only one is arranged at the lower center of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 has a door member 234a that can be opened and closed freely. When the door member 234a is closed, balls cannot enter the opening. When the player wins the special variable game and the special display device displays the big winning pattern, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, 29 seconds for opening and 1.5 seconds for closing) and a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number of balls (for example, 15 balls) are discharged to the upper tray 126 as prize balls. The balls that enter the variable winning opening 234 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

In addition, near these winning holes and starting holes, there are a number of disk-shaped ball direction changing members 236 called windmills and game nails 238, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, there is an outlet 240 for guiding balls that do not enter any of the winning holes or starting holes to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging them to the game island side.

In this pachinko machine 100, the player supplies the balls stored in the upper tray 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength according to the amount of operation of the operating handle by the player, and shoots the balls through the outer rail 202 and inner rail 204 by the launch rod 146 and launch hammer 148 into the play area 124. Then, the balls that reach the top of the play area 124 fall downward while changing their direction of travel by the ball direction changing member 236 and play nail 238, etc., and either enter a winning hole (general winning hole 226, variable winning hole 234) or a starting hole (first special starting hole 230, second special starting hole 232), or reach the out hole 240 without entering any winning hole or starting hole, or only passing through the normal starting hole 228.

<Performance device 206>
Next, the performance device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

A warp device 242 and a stage 244 are disposed on the front side of this performance device 206 in an area where the game ball can roll, and a performance movable body 224 is disposed in an area where the game ball cannot roll. In addition, a decorative pattern display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the rear side of the performance device 206. That is, in the performance device 206, the decorative pattern display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, the performance movable body 224, and the movable display device 288.

The warp device 242 ejects game balls that enter a warp entrance 242a located at the upper left of the performance device 206 from a warp exit 242b onto a stage 244 located below the front of the performance device 206. The stage 244 allows balls ejected from the warp exit 242b and balls that have run over nails on the game board 200 to roll, and a special route 244a is provided in the center of the stage 244, making it easier for balls that pass through to enter the first special chart starting hole 230.

In this embodiment, the performance movable body 224 is composed of an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b that imitate the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and is equipped with an upper arm motor (not shown) that rotates the upper arm portion 224a to the shoulder position and a forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm portion 224b to the elbow position. The performance movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative pattern display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 is composed of a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative pattern display device 208 and the front stage 244. A belt wound around two pulleys (not shown) is fixed to the upper part of the left door 246a and the right door 246b. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move left and right with the operation of the belt driven by the motor through the pulley. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means overlaps the respective inner ends, and shields the decorative pattern display device 208 so that the player cannot easily see it. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are open, the respective inner ends slightly overlap the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, but the player can see all of the display of the decorative pattern display device 208. The left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at any position, and can, for example, cover only a part of the decorative pattern to the extent that the player can identify which decorative pattern is displayed. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may make a part of the rear decorative pattern display device 208 visible through the lattice holes, or the screen part of the lattice holes may be covered with a translucent lens body to allow the player to vaguely see the display by the rear decorative pattern display device 208, or the screen part of the lattice holes may be completely covered (shielded) to make the rear decorative pattern display device 208 completely invisible.

The movable display device 288 is what displays the effects and is movable. Therefore, in the following description, as display devices, the decorative pattern display device 208 may be referred to as the first display device (main LCD display device), and the movable display device 288 may be referred to as the second display device (sub LCD display device). Also, it may be referred to as a (effect) movable body together with the shielding device 246 and the effect movable body 224 that resembles a human arm.

<Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of this pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to Figure 80. The same figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game, a first sub-control unit 400 that controls various devices according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") transmitted by the main control unit 300, a second sub-control unit 500 that mainly controls the presentation based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, a payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls according to the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100, and a liquid crystal control unit 700.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 is equipped with a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 is equipped with a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit (random number generating circuit) 318 (which has two built-in counters) that is used as a hardware random number counter that changes the value within the range of 0 to 65535 each time it receives a clock signal output by a crystal oscillator 316a, and a sensor circuit 320 that receives signals output by various sensors 320, including predetermined ball detection sensors, such as sensors that detect game balls passing through each starting port, winning port, and variable winning port, front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, and bottom tray full sensor, and outputs the amplification results and comparison results with a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302. 2, a drive circuit 324 for controlling the display of a predetermined pattern display device, such as the first special pattern display device 212 or the second special pattern display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for controlling the display of a predetermined pattern display device, such as the normal pattern display device 210, a drive circuit 330 for controlling the display of various status display units 328 (for example, the normal pattern hold lamp 216, the first special pattern hold lamp 218, the second special pattern hold lamp 220, the high probability lamp 222, etc.), and a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that open and close predetermined movable members, such as the blade member 232a of the second special pattern start port 232 and the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, are connected.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has entered the first special pattern start hole 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that a ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. The counter circuit 318 receives this signal and latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special pattern start hole 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the first special pattern start hole 230. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has entered the second special pattern start hole 232, it latches the value of the counter corresponding to the second special pattern start hole 232 at that timing, and stores the latched value in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special pattern start hole 232.

In addition, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (e.g., game status) of the pachinko machine 100 to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336.

The main control unit 300 is also provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply control unit 660. When the voltage value of the power supply is below a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), this voltage monitoring circuit 338 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control unit 300 also includes a start-up signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when power is applied. When the CPU 304 receives a start-up signal from this start-up signal output circuit 340, it starts game control (starts the main control unit main processing described below).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for sending commands to the dispensing control unit 600, and this configuration enables communication with the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing control unit 600. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing control unit 600, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing control unit 600 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control section>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 has a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands sent by the main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various performance data, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of this basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Note that the ROM 406 may store the control program and various performance data in separate ROMs.

Also connected to the basic circuit 402 are a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (such as the chance button lamp 138 and the game frame lamp 122), a drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the chance button 136 and the movable parts of the button unit 190, a button detection sensor 426 and various sensors 430 that detect pressing of the chance button 136 and the button unit 190, and a sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from the various sensors 430 and the button detection sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 has a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on these control commands. This basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and is provided with a ROM 506 in which control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

The basic circuit 502 is also connected to a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the movable parts of the performance movable body 224, the shading device 246, and the movable display device 288, a performance movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current positions of the performance movable body 224, the shading device 246, etc., a sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the performance movable body sensor 424 to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a serial communication control circuit 520 for controlling the lighting via serial communication between the basic circuit 502 and the game board lamp drive circuit 530.

<Payout control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, a description will be given of the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on signals such as commands sent by the main control unit 300, detects whether or not the payout of prize balls or loan balls has been completed based on a control signal output by a payout sensor 604, and communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via an interface unit 606.

The launch control unit 630 controls the launch motor 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch hammer 148, and the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper tray 126 to the launch device 110, based on a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 that indicates whether to allow or stop launch, and a control signal output by a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount of operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player.

The power supply control unit 660 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into DC, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400, and each device such as the payout device 152. Furthermore, the power supply control unit 660 is equipped with a storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (e.g., the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies a predetermined voltage to the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the launch control unit 630, but the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device via another power supply path.

<Liquid crystal control unit>
Next, the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be described. The liquid crystal control unit 700 includes a CPU 704 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire liquid crystal control unit 700 based on these control commands, a RAM 708 for temporarily storing data, a ROM 506 in which control programs and data for controlling the entire liquid crystal control unit 700, data for image display, etc. are stored, and a VDP (video display processor) 710. The CPU 704 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 714A as a system clock.

The VDP 710 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 714B as a system clock, reads image data etc. stored in the CGROM 716 based on a signal from the CPU 404, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 718, and displays the image on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the movable display device 288.

<Block diagram of gaming machine>
The connection relationships of each board (control board) of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 81. The figure is a block diagram showing the connection relationships of each (control) board constituting the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, the payout control unit 600, the liquid crystal control unit 700, etc., with the display device, movable body, etc.

In the pachinko machine 100, on the game board 200 side, the board relay board 722, external terminal board 720, and first sub-control board 160 are connected to the main control board 156. The board relay board 722 is connected to various sensors 320, solenoids 332, and pattern display boards 212, 214, 210, and 328. As a result, when the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a game ball has entered the general winning hole (winning hole) 226, the general starting hole (gate) 228, the first special starting hole 230, and the second starting hole 232, the switch signal is sent to the main control unit 300. In addition, a solenoid signal for opening and closing the second special starting hole (normal electric device) 232 is sent from the drive circuit 334 of the main control unit 300 to the solenoid 332. In addition, a solenoid signal for opening and closing the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 (large winning opening) is sent from the drive circuit 334 of the main control unit 300 to the solenoid 332. In addition, a count signal for counting the number of winning balls is sent to the main control unit 300 from the first variable winning opening 234 and the second variable winning opening 235 (large winning opening).

The first sub-control board 160 is also connected to a liquid crystal control board 680, which is connected to a decorative pattern display device (main liquid crystal display device) 208 and a movable display device (sub liquid crystal display device) 288. The first sub-control board 160 is also connected to a second sub-control board 164, which is connected to movable objects M on the board side (movable part 2441 of the movable display device 288, performance movable body 244, shading device 246, etc.) and a board side lighting board 724 on which a game board lamp 532 is mounted.

As a result, the first sub-control board 160 performs control according to the command of the main control board 156, and the liquid crystal control board 680 and the second sub-control board 164 perform control according to the command of the first sub-control board 160. Specifically, the processing information (command signal) generated by the main control unit 300 is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the processing information or the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400 is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 700 and the second sub-control unit 500. For example, data for driving the performance movable body 224, data for emitting illumination for the performance movable body 224, data for driving the movable display device 288, etc. are transmitted from the first sub-control board 160 to the second sub-control board 164. In addition, data or a clock signal for emitting illumination on the game board 200 side is transmitted from the drive circuit 516 of the second sub-control unit 500 to the board side illumination board 724. In addition, each drive circuit 324, 326, 330 transmits a signal for display control of the first special pattern display device 212, the second special pattern display device 214, the general pattern display device 210, and the various status display units 328. In addition, control data of the first sub-control board 160 is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 680, and image data is transmitted to the decorative pattern display device 208 and the movable display device 288.

In addition, the pachinko machine 100 has board frame relay boards 726A, 726B, and 726C on the main body 104 side, which relay and connect the board on the game board 200 side to the board on the main body 104 side. Board frame relay board 726A connects to the main control board 156 and the payout control board 170. This allows the main control unit 300 to send command signals related to payout control (such as the number of payouts and information for communicating with the external terminal board 720) to the payout control unit 600, and the payout control unit 600 to send error information about the discharge system, etc. to the main control unit 300. In addition, the panel frame relay board 726B connects the first sub-control board 160 and the power supply board 182, and the panel frame relay board 726C connects the first sub-control board 160 and the door side lighting board 734 on which the chance button 136, button unit 190, various lamps 138, 418 for the buttons, button movable part 246, and various lamps 418 are mounted, which are provided on the front frame door 106, and the speaker 120 via the door side lighting board 734.

As a result, data and clock signals for illuminating the various lamps 418 are sent from the drive circuit 420 of the first sub-controller 400 to the door-side lighting board 734. In addition, audio data is sent from the sound source IC 416 to the speaker 120. In addition, the detection results of the button detection sensor 426 and the like resulting from the operation of the chance button 136 and the button unit 190 are sent to the first sub-controller 400.

The payout control board 170 is connected to the payout sensor 604, the payout motor 602, and the game ball etc. lending device connection board 728. The payout control board 170 is also connected to the power supply board 182, the launch board 174, and the receiving tray board 730. The launch board 174 is connected to the power supply board 182, the launch motor 632, and the ball feeding device 634. The receiving tray board 730 is connected to the launch handle board 738 and the degree display board 744 provided on the front frame door 106. The handle volume 736, the full tank switch 740, and the touch sensor 742 are connected to the launch handle board 738.

<Type of design>
Next, the types of special and ordinary symbols displayed by the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the ordinary symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to Figures 82(a) to 82(c). Figure 82(a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special symbol.

Special pattern 1 variable play starts on the condition that the first start hole sensor detects that a ball has entered the first special pattern start hole 230, and special pattern 2 variable play starts on the condition that the second start hole sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special pattern start hole 232. When special pattern 1 variable play starts, the first special pattern display device 212 performs a "special pattern 1 variable display" in which all seven segments are lit and the central segment is lit repeatedly. Also, when special pattern 2 variable play starts, the second special pattern display device 214 performs a "special pattern 2 variable display" in which all seven segments are lit and the central segment is lit repeatedly. These "special pattern 1 variable display" and "special pattern 2 variable display" correspond to examples of the pattern variable display referred to in this invention.

Then, when the change time (corresponding to the change time in the present invention) determined before the start of the change of special pattern 1 has elapsed, the first special pattern display device 212 stops and displays the stopped pattern mode of special pattern 1, and when the change time (also corresponding to the change time in the present invention) determined before the start of the change of special pattern 2 has elapsed, the second special pattern display device 214 stops and displays the stopped pattern mode of special pattern 2. Therefore, the period from the start of the "change display of special pattern 1" to the stop display of the stopped pattern mode of special pattern 1, or from the start of the "change display of special pattern 2" to the stop display of the stopped pattern mode of special pattern 2, corresponds to an example of the pattern change stop display in the present invention, and hereinafter, the series of displays from the start of the "change display of special pattern 1 or 2" to the stop display of the stopped pattern mode of special pattern 1 or 2 is referred to as the pattern change stop display. As described later, the pattern change stop display may be performed multiple times in succession. In the figure (a), ten types of special patterns are shown, from "Special Pattern A" to "Special Pattern J," as the stop pattern modes in the pattern change stop display, with the white areas in the figure indicating the locations of the segments that will be turned off and the black areas indicating the locations of the segments that will be turned on.

"Special chart A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot pattern, and "Special chart B" is a 15R jackpot pattern. In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, as described later, the decision of whether or not there is a jackpot in the special chart variable game is made by drawing a hardware random number, and the decision of whether or not there is a special jackpot is made by drawing a software random number. The difference between a jackpot and a special jackpot is whether the probability of winning a jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special chart variable game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as the special chart high probability state, and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as the special chart low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both transition to a time-saving state. The time-saving state will be described in detail later, but the state in which the time-saving state is transitioned to a time-saving state is referred to as the normal chart high probability state, and the state in which the time-saving state is not transitioned to a time-saving state is referred to as the normal chart low probability state. The 15R special jackpot symbol "Special A" is in a state of high probability of special symbol and high probability of ordinary symbol, and the 15R jackpot symbol "Special B" is in a state of low probability of special symbol and high probability of ordinary symbol. These "Special A" and "Special B" are symbols that will award a relatively large amount of profit to the player.

"Special Chart C" is a 2R jackpot pattern known as a sudden probability change, and is in a state of high probability for special charts and high probability for regular charts. In other words, compared to "Special Chart A," which is 15R, "Special Chart C" is different in that it is 2R. "Special Chart D" is a 2R jackpot pattern known as a sudden time reduction, and is in a state of low probability for special charts and high probability for regular charts. In other words, compared to "Special Chart B," which is 15R, "Special Chart D" is different in that it is 2R.

"Special E" is a 2R jackpot pattern known as a hidden probability change, and is in a state of high probability for special and low probability for normal. "Special F" is a 2R jackpot pattern known as a sudden normal, and is in a state of low probability for special and low probability for normal. Both "Special E" and "Special F" are 2R and do not transition to a time-saving state.

"Special symbol G" is the first small win symbol, and "Special symbol H" is the second small win symbol, both of which are in a special symbol low probability and normal symbol low probability state. The small win referred to here is equivalent to a 2R non-time-saving big win. In other words, "Special symbol G" and "Special symbol H" are in the same state as "Special symbol F", but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different for both, and by deliberately providing "Special symbol G", "Special symbol H" and "Special symbol F" even in the same state, the excitement of the game is heightened. Also, "Special symbol I" is the first losing symbol, and "Special symbol J" is the second losing symbol, and these are symbols that will give the player a relatively small amount of profit.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, symbols other than "Special A" are also prepared as the 15R special jackpot symbol, and the same applies to other symbols such as the 15R jackpot symbol.

Figure 82 (b) shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are ten types of decorative patterns in this embodiment, "Decoration 1" to "Decoration 10". On the condition that a ball has entered the first special pattern starting hole 230 or the second special pattern starting hole 232, that is, the first starting hole sensor detects that a ball has entered the first special pattern starting hole 230, or the second starting hole sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special pattern starting hole 232, a "decorative pattern change display" is performed in which the display is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... in each of the pattern display areas of the left pattern display area 208a, the middle pattern display area 208b, and the right pattern display area 208c of the decorative pattern display device 208. Then, when a 15R jackpot of "Special Chart B" is to be announced, a pattern combination of three of the same decorative patterns lined up corresponding to a 15R jackpot (for example, "Decoration 1-Decoration 1-Decoration 1" or "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2") is displayed in a static manner in the pattern display areas 208a-208c. When a 15R special jackpot of "Special Chart A" is to be announced, a pattern combination of three of the same odd-numbered decorative patterns lined up (for example, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" or "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7") is displayed in a static manner.

In addition, when announcing a 2R jackpot called a hidden probability change on "Special Chart E", a 2R jackpot called a sudden normal on "Special Chart F", or the first small win on "Special Chart G", or the second small win on "Special Chart H", the display will stop with "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3". Furthermore, when announcing a 2R jackpot called a sudden probability change on "Special Chart C", or a 2R jackpot called a sudden time reduction on "Special Chart D", the display will stop with "Decoration 1-Decoration 3-Decoration 5".

On the other hand, when reporting the first miss of "Special Chart I" or the second miss of "Special Chart J", a static display of a pattern combination other than the pattern combination shown in the same figure (b) is displayed in the pattern display areas 208a to 208c.

Figure 82 (c) shows an example of a stop display pattern for a normal map. In this embodiment, there are two types of stop display patterns for the normal map: "Normal Map A", which is a winning pattern, and "Normal Map B", which is a losing pattern. Based on the above-mentioned gate sensor detecting that the ball has passed through the normal map start hole 228, the normal pattern display device 210 performs a "normal map variable display" in which all seven segments are lit and the central segment is lit repeatedly. Then, when announcing a win in the normal map variable play, "Normal Map A" is displayed as a stopped pattern, and when announcing a loss in the normal map variable play, "Normal Map B" is displayed as a stopped pattern. In this figure (c), the white parts in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black parts indicate the locations of the segments that are lit.

<Main processing of main control unit>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 83. Note that Fig. 83 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit main processing.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when power is applied. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that receives this start signal is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 83 according to a control program previously stored in the ROM 306.

In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, a stack initial value is set (provisional setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of CPU 304, an interrupt mask is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in RAM 308 are initialized, and operation permission and initial values are set to WDT 314. In this embodiment, a value equivalent to 32.8 ms is set as the initial value to WDT 314. In step S103, the counter value of WDT 314 is cleared, and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

In step S105, the low voltage signal is monitored to see if it is on, i.e., if the voltage monitoring circuit 338 is outputting a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment). If the low voltage signal is on (if the CPU 304 detects that the power supply has been cut off), the process returns to step S103, and if the low voltage signal is off (if the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply has been cut off), the process proceeds to step S107. Note that if the predetermined value (9V) has not yet been reached immediately after the power supply is turned on, the process also returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches or exceeds the predetermined value.

In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a numerical value that determines the period for periodically executing the main control unit timer interrupt process described below is set in the counter timer 312, a clear signal is output from a specified port of the I/O 310 (e.g., a test output port, an output port to the first sub-control unit 400), and settings are made to allow writing to the RAM 308.

In step S109, a determination is made as to whether or not to return to the state before the power was cut off (before the power was interrupted), and if the state before the power was interrupted is not to be returned to (if the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is to be reset to its initial state), the initialization process (step S113) is performed.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is operated by a store clerk or the like is on (indicating that an operation has been performed), i.e., whether the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (if the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the basic circuit 302 to its initial state. On the other hand, if the RAM clear signal is off (if the RAM clear is not necessary), the process reads out the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308, and determines whether this power status information indicates suspend. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the basic circuit 302 to its initial state, and if the power status information is information indicating suspend, the process calculates a checksum by adding all the 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (e.g., all areas) of the RAM 308 to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and determines whether the calculated checksum result is a specific value (e.g., 0) (whether the checksum result is normal). If the checksum result is a specific value (e.g., 0) (if the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to restore the state before the power was cut off, and if the checksum result is a value other than the specific value (e.g., 0) (if the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to return the pachinko machine 100 to its initial state. Similarly, if the power status information indicates information other than "suspended," the process proceeds to step S113.

In step S111, a power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset (main setting) to the stack pointer. In addition, the values of each register stored in the register save area provided in RAM 308 at the time of power failure are read out and reset to each register, and then interrupt permission is set. After that, the CPU 304 executes the control program based on the stack pointer and registers after resetting, and the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power was lost. That is, the process is resumed from the next command after the command (predetermined in step S115) executed immediately before the power failure and before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later). In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 80. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command indicates that the state has been restored to when the power was turned off, and is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 of the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300, which will be described later.

In step S113, an initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, interrupts are prohibited, the stack pointer is set to the stack initial value (main setting), and all storage areas in RAM 308 are initialized. In addition, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process of the main control unit 300 (step S113) has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, is sent to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300.

In step S115, after the interrupt prohibition is set, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two random number counters for generating initial values for the normal winning random number counter and the special random number counter are updated, and two random number counters for generating the normal timer random number value and the special timer random number value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is obtained from the random number counter memory area for generating the normal timer random number value provided in RAM 308, 1 is added to the obtained value, and then stored in the original random number counter memory area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter memory area. The other random number counters for generating initial values and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The random number counters for generating initial values are also updated in step S207, which will be described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115, except while performing timer interrupt processing that starts at a predetermined cycle.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 84. Note that Fig. 84 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger to start main control unit timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle. In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to a stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt) to prevent the count value of WDT314 from exceeding the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and causing a WDT interrupt (to prevent the detection of a processing abnormality).

In step S205, an input port status update process is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320, including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, bottom tray full sensor, and various ball detection sensors, are input via the input port of I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of detection signals, and are stored in a signal status memory area partitioned for each of the various sensors 320 in RAM 308. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, information on the presence or absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt process two times ago (about 4 ms ago) is read from the previous detection signal memory area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and this information is stored in the previous detection signal memory area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and information on the presence or absence of detection signals of each ball detection sensor detected in the previous timer interrupt process (about 2 ms ago) is read from the current detection signal memory area partitioned for each ball detection sensor in RAM 308, and this information is stored in the above-mentioned previous detection signal memory area. In addition, the detection signals of each ball detection sensor detected this time are stored in the current detection signal storage area described above.

In addition, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor stored in each of the storage areas of the detection signal storage area before last, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and it is determined whether the information on the presence or absence of detection signals from each ball detection sensor for the past three times matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which is repeatedly started at very short intervals of about 2 ms, is started several times. Therefore, each time the main control unit timer interrupt process is started, the above-mentioned step S205 checks the detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor. As a result, the detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area before last, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. In other words, when the game ball starts to pass the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before last, there is a detection signal from the previous time, and there is a detection signal from the current time. In this embodiment, taking into consideration the erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if a detection signal is stored twice in succession after the absence of a detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 80 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before last, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In this step S205, if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before last, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time), it is determined that a ball has entered the general winning hole 226, the variable winning hole 234, the first special starting hole 230, and the second special starting hole 232, or passed through the general starting hole 228. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been won in these winning holes 226, 234 and these starting holes 230, 232, and 228. For example, if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the general winning opening sensor that detects balls entering the general winning opening 226 matches the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, it is determined that a win has occurred in the general winning opening 226, and processing associated with subsequent wins in the general winning opening 226 is performed, but if the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, the processing associated with subsequent wins in the general winning opening 226 is not performed and the processing branches to subsequent processing. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning judgment clear pattern information (information indicating that there was a detection signal two times ago, that there was no detection signal last time, and that there is no detection signal this time). After it is determined that a win has occurred once, it is not determined that a win has occurred until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the winning judgment clear pattern information, and if it matches the winning judgment clear pattern information, it is determined from the next time whether it matches the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information.

In steps S207 and S209, a basic random number initial value update process and a basic random number update process are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processes and basic random number update processes, the value of the random number counter for generating the initial value performed in step S115 is updated, and then two random number counters for generating the normal winning random number value, the special number 1 random number value, and the special number 2 random number value used by the main control unit 300 are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the normal winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is obtained from the random number counter memory area for generating the normal winning random number value provided in RAM 308, 1 is added to the obtained value, and then stored in the original random number counter memory area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter memory area. Also, if it is determined that the random number counter has gone around once as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, the value of the random number counter for generating the initial value corresponding to each random number counter is obtained and set in the memory area of the random number counter. For example, if a value is obtained from a random number counter for generating a random number value for a normal winning number, which varies in the range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7) stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in RAM 308, a value is obtained as an initial value from the random number counter for generating an initial value corresponding to the random number counter for generating a random number value for a normal winning number, and set in the random number counter for generating a random number value for a normal winning number, and the initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating a random number value for a normal winning number has completed its next round. In addition, in addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating a random number value for a normal winning number has completed its next round, an initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating a random number value for a special number has completed its round is provided in RAM 308. In this embodiment, a counter for obtaining the random number value for special number 1 and a counter for obtaining the random number value for special number 2 are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

In step S211, a random number update process is performed. In this process, the random number counter for generating random numbers for performance used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, various timers are updated, including a normal pattern display pattern update timer for timing the time for the pattern to change and stop being displayed on the normal pattern display device 210, a special pattern 1 display pattern update timer for timing the time for the pattern to change and stop being displayed on the first special pattern display device 212, a special pattern 2 display pattern update timer for timing the time for the pattern to change and stop being displayed on the second special pattern display device 214, and timers for timing a specified winning performance time, a specified opening time, a specified closing time, a specified ending performance period, etc.

In step S215, a winning slot counter update process is performed. In this winning slot counter update process, when a win occurs in winning slots 226, 234, 235 or starting slots 230, 232, 228, the value of the prize ball count memory area provided for each winning slot or starting slot in RAM 308 is read, 1 is added, and the value is set to the original prize ball count memory area.

In addition, in step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning in the first special chart start port 230, the second special chart start port 232, the normal chart start port 228, the first variable winning port 234, and the second variable winning port 235. Here, the judgment is made using the judgment result of whether or not it matches the winning judgment pattern information in step S203. If there has been a winning in the first special chart start port 230 and the corresponding reserved number memory area provided in RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained from the winning counter value memory register of the counter circuit 318 as the special chart 1 winning random number value, and a value is obtained from the random number counter for generating the special chart 1 random number value as the special chart 1 random number value and stored in the corresponding random number value memory area. If there is a win at the second special number start port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 as the special number 2 winning random number value, and a value is obtained from the random number counter for generating the special number 2 random number value as the special number 2 random number value, and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If there is a win at the regular number start port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained from the random number counter for generating the regular number winning random number value as the regular number winning random number value, and stored in the corresponding random number value storage area. If there is a win at the variable winning port 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning port 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning port.

In step S219, a payout request count transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are, for example, composed of one byte, with strobe information in bit 7 (when on, indicates that data is being set), power-on information in bit 6 (when on, indicates that this is the first command transmission since power-on), the current processing type for encryption in bits 4-5 (0-3), and the payout request count after encryption processing in bits 0-3.

In step S221, a normal map status update process is performed. This normal map status update process is one of a number of processes corresponding to the state of the normal map. For example, in the normal map status update process in the middle of the normal map change display (when the value of the normal map display pattern update timer described above is 1 or more), on/off drive control is performed to repeatedly turn on and off the 7-segment LED that constitutes the normal pattern display device 210. By performing this control, the normal pattern display device 210 performs a change display of the normal map (normal map change play).

In addition, in the normal pattern status update process at the timing when the normal pattern change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the normal pattern display pattern update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the winning flag is on, the 7-segment LED constituting the normal pattern display device 210 is controlled to turn on and off so that the display mode of the winning pattern is displayed, and if the winning flag is off, the 7-segment LED constituting the normal pattern display device 210 is controlled to turn on and off so that the display mode of the losing pattern is displayed. In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 has a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal pattern status update process but also in various processes. Here, the above-mentioned on and off drive control is performed, and a setting is made in the setting area to indicate that the normal pattern is being stopped. By performing this control, the normal pattern display device 210 performs a confirmed display of either the winning pattern (normal pattern A shown in FIG. 82(c)) or the losing pattern (normal pattern B shown in FIG. 82(c)). Furthermore, after that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of a timer for managing the normal symbol stop time provided in RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed displayed symbol is displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal symbol variable game is notified to the player.

Also, if the result of the normal map variable play is a win, the normal map win flag is turned on, as described below. When this normal map win flag is on, in the normal map status update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the timer for managing the normal map stop time changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of RAM 308 is set to normal map operation, and a signal is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the blade member 232a of the second special map start port 232 to keep the blade member 232a in an open state for a specified opening period (for example, 2 seconds), and information indicating the opening period is set in the memory area of the blade opening time management timer provided in RAM 308.

In addition, the normal state update process, which starts when the specified open period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the blade open time changes from 1 to 0), outputs a signal to the solenoid 332 for driving the opening and closing of the blade member to keep the blade member in a closed state for a specified closed period (for example, 500 ms), and sets information indicating the closed period in the memory area of the timer for managing the blade closed time provided in RAM 308.

In addition, in the normal map status update process that starts when the specified closure period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the wing closure time changes from 1 to 0), the normal map is set to not in operation in the setting area of RAM 308. Furthermore, if the result of the normal map variable game is a miss, as described below, the normal map miss flag is turned on. If this normal map miss flag is on, the normal map status update process at the end of the above-mentioned specified stop display period (when the value of the timer for managing the normal map stop time changes from 1 to 0) also sets the normal map to not in operation in the setting area of RAM 308. In the normal map status update process when the normal map is not in operation, nothing is done and the process moves to the next step S223.

In step S223, a lottery process related to the normal map is performed. In this lottery process, when the normal map variable play and the second special map start port 232 are not open/closed (the normal map state is not in operation), and the number of reserved normal map variable plays is one or more, a random number lottery based on the normal map winning random number stored in the random number storage area is used to determine whether the result of the normal map variable play is a win or a loss, and if it is a win, the win flag provided in RAM 308 is set to ON. If it is a loss, the win flag is set to OFF. In addition, regardless of the result of the win determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal map timer random number is next obtained as the normal map timer random number, and one time for displaying the normal map on the normal map display device 210 is selected from among multiple variable times based on the obtained normal map timer random number, and this variable display time is stored in the normal map variable time storage area provided in RAM 308 as the normal map variable display time. The number of reserved regular variable games is stored in a reserved regular number storage area in RAM 308, and each time a win is determined, the number of reserved regular variable games minus 1 is stored in this reserved regular number storage area. The random number value used to determine the win is also erased.

Next, the special chart status update process is performed for each of the special charts 1 and 2. First, the special chart status update process (special chart 2 status update process) is performed for the special chart 2 (step S225). This special chart 2 status update process performs one of the following eight processes depending on the state of the special chart 2. For example, in the special chart 2 status update process during the special chart 2 variable display (the value of the special chart 2 display pattern update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special pattern display device 214 is turned on and off repeatedly. By performing this control, the second special pattern display device 214 performs the variable display of the special chart 2 (special chart 2 variable play). In addition, the command setting transmission process (step S233) additionally stores predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags for a 15R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a first small jackpot flag, a second small jackpot flag, a first miss flag, a second miss flag, a special symbol probability change flag, and a regular symbol probability change flag. In the special symbol 2 state update process that starts when the special symbol 2 change display time has elapsed (when the value of the special symbol 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), if the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special symbol probability change flag is on, and the regular symbol probability change flag is also on, the special symbol A shown in FIG. 82(a) is displayed; if the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special symbol probability change flag is off, and the regular symbol probability change flag is on, the special symbol B is displayed; if the 2R jackpot flag is on, the special symbol probability change flag is on, and the regular symbol probability change flag is also on, the special symbol C is displayed; if the 2R jackpot flag is on, the special symbol probability change flag is off, and the regular symbol probability change flag is on, the special symbol D is displayed; The 7-segment LEDs that constitute the second special pattern display device 214 are controlled to be turned on and off so that, when the 2R jackpot flag is on, the special pattern probability change flag is also on, and the normal pattern probability change flag is on, the special pattern is displayed as E; when the 2R jackpot flag is on, the special pattern probability change flag is off, and the normal pattern probability change flag is also off, the special pattern is displayed as F; when the first small win flag is on, the special pattern is displayed as G; when the second small win flag is on, the special pattern is displayed as H; when the first miss flag is on, the special pattern is I; and when the second miss flag is on, the special pattern is I. A setting is made in the setting area of RAM 308 to indicate that special pattern 2 is being displayed. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs a definitive display of one of the following symbols: 15R special big win symbol (special symbol A), 15R big win symbol (special symbol B), sudden probability change symbol (special symbol C), sudden time-saving symbol (special symbol D), hidden probability change symbol (special symbol E), sudden normal symbol (special symbol F), first small win symbol (special symbol G), second small win symbol (special symbol H), first loss symbol (special symbol I), and second loss symbol (special symbol J). After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the memory area of the special symbol 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. By this setting, the definitively displayed special symbol 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special symbol 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the number of time-saving times stored in the time-saving times storage unit provided in RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time-saving times, and if the subtraction result becomes 0 from 1, the time-saving flag is turned off unless the special chart probability is fluctuating (details will be described later). Furthermore, the time-saving flag is also turned off during a jackpot game (special game state).

In addition, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and special pattern 2 identification information indicating that the pattern for which the variable display is to be stopped is special pattern 2 is additionally stored in RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

In addition, if the result of the special chart 2 variable game is a jackpot, the jackpot flag is turned on, as described below. When this jackpot flag is on, in the special chart 2 state update process at the timing when the specified stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special chart 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special chart 2 is set to be in operation in the setting area of RAM 308, and information indicating the winning performance period is set in the memory area of the special chart 2 waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 to wait for a specified winning performance period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the period during which an image notifying the player that a jackpot will begin by the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning performance setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special drawing 2 state update process that starts when the predetermined winning performance period ends (when the value of the special drawing 2 waiting time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a signal is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the door member 235a of the second variable winning opening 235 (the door member 234a of the first variable winning opening 234 in the case of special drawing 1) to keep the door member 235a (the door member 234a in the case of special drawing 1) in an open state for a predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds, or until a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are detected in the second variable winning opening 235 (the first variable winning opening 234 in the case of special drawing 1), and information indicating the opening period is set in the memory area of the door opening time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, in the special pattern 2 state update process that starts when the specified open period ends (when the value of the door open time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a signal is output to the solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the door member 235a of the second variable winning opening 235 (the door member 234a of the first variable winning opening 234 in the case of special pattern 1) to keep the door member 235a (the door member 234a in the case of special pattern 1) in a closed state for a specified closed period (for example, 1.5 seconds), and information indicating the closed period is set in the memory area of the door closed time management timer provided in RAM 308. In addition, specified transmission information indicating that the large winning opening close setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

In addition, the opening and closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment), and in the special chart 2 state update process that starts at the timing of the end, information indicating the performance waiting period is set in the memory area of the performance waiting time management timer provided in RAM 308 to set it to wait for a predetermined end performance period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed. Also, if the normal chart probability fluctuation flag is set to on, at the same time as the end of this jackpot game, the time-saving number of times is set to 100 times in the time-saving number memory section provided in RAM 308, and the time-saving flag provided in RAM 308 is turned on. Note that if the normal chart probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time-saving number is not set in the time-saving number memory section, and the time-saving flag is not turned on. The time-saving here refers to the pachinko machine being in a state advantageous to the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the jackpot in the special chart fluctuation game to the start of the next jackpot. When this time-saving flag is set to ON, it is in a high probability state. In a high probability state, the probability of hitting the jackpot in the normal variable game is higher than in a low probability state. In addition, in a high probability state, the time of fluctuation in the normal variable game and the time of fluctuation in the special variable game are shorter than in a low probability state. Furthermore, in a high probability state, the opening time of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special starting port 232 is likely to be longer than in a low probability state. In addition, in a high probability state, the pair of blade members 232a is likely to open more than in a low probability state. Also, as described above, the time-saving flag is set to OFF during a jackpot game (special game state). Therefore, during a jackpot game, the low probability state of the normal game is maintained. This is to solve the problem that when the normal probability state is reached during a jackpot game, many game balls will enter the second special game start opening 232 before a certain number of game balls enter the variable winning opening 234 during the jackpot game, increasing the number of game balls that can be won during the jackpot and increasing the risk of gambling.

Furthermore, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the end performance setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above.

In addition, in the special chart 2 state update process that starts when the specified end display period ends (when the value of the timer for managing the display waiting time changes from 1 to 0), the special chart 2 is set to not in operation in the setting area of RAM 308. Furthermore, if the result of the special chart 2 variable game is a miss, as described below, the miss flag is turned on. If this miss flag is on, the special chart 2 state update process at the time when the specified stop display period described above ends (when the value of the timer for managing the special chart 2 stop time changes from 1 to 0) also sets the special chart 2 to not in operation in the setting area of RAM 308. In the special chart 2 state update process when the special chart 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process moves to the next step S227.

Next, a special chart status update process (special chart 1 status update process) is performed for special chart 1 (step S227). In this special chart 1 status update process, the processes described in the special chart 2 status update process above are performed according to the state of special chart 1. Each process performed in this special chart 1 status update process is the same as the process described in the special chart 2 status update process above, with "special chart 2" replaced with "special chart 1", so the description is omitted. Note that the order of the special chart 2 status update process and the special chart 1 status update process may be reversed.

After the special chart status update process in steps S225 and S227 is completed, the special chart-related lottery process is performed for each of special chart 1 and special chart 2. Here too, the special chart-related lottery process for special chart 2 (special chart 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special chart-related lottery process for special chart 1 (special chart 1 related lottery process) is performed (step S231). For these special chart-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special chart 2 related lottery process before the special chart 1 related lottery process, so that even if the start conditions for the special chart 2 variable play and the start conditions for the special chart 1 variable play are met at the same time, the special chart 2 variable play will be changed first, and the special chart 1 variable play will not start changing. In addition, the notification of the results of the jackpot determination for the special chart variable game by the decorative chart display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and notification of the lottery results based on winning at the second special chart start port 232 is given priority over notification of the lottery results based on winning at the first special chart start port 230.

In step S233, a command setting and sending process is performed, and various commands are sent to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, with bit 15 being strobe information (when on, indicates that data is being set), bits 11 to 14 being command type (in this embodiment, information that can identify the type of command, such as a basic command, a pattern change start command, a pattern change stop command, a winning performance start command, an end performance start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power recovery command, and a RAM clear command), and bits 0 to 10 being command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off by the command transmission process described above. In addition, if the command type is a pattern change start command, the command data includes information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special chart probability change flag, and the timer number selected in the special chart-related lottery process, and if the command type is a pattern change stop command, the command data includes the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, and the value of the special chart probability change flag, and if the command type is a winning performance command or an end performance start command, the command data includes the value of the special chart probability change flag, and if the command type is a jackpot round number designation command, the command data includes the value of the special chart probability change flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like. If the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not a prize has been won at the first special chart start port 230, whether or not a prize has been won at the second special chart start port 232, and whether or not a prize has been won at the variable winning port 234, and the like.

In addition, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special chart probability change flag, the timer number selected in the special chart 1 related lottery process and the special chart 2 related lottery process, the number of reserved first special chart change games or second special chart change games, etc. stored in RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special chart probability change flag, etc. stored in RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned winning performance setting transmission process, information indicating the performance control information to be output to the decorative pattern display device 208, various lamps 418, and speaker 120 during the winning performance period, the value of the special chart probability change flag, the number of reserved first special chart change games or second special chart change games, etc. stored in RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data is set with information indicating the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 to be output to the decorative pattern display device 208, various lamps 418, and speaker 120 during the effect waiting period, the value of the special chart probability change flag, the number of reserved first special chart change games or second special chart change games, etc. In the above-mentioned large prize opening setting transmission process, the command data is set with information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special chart probability change flag, the number of reserved first special chart change games or second special chart change games, etc. In the above-mentioned large prize opening closing setting transmission process, the command data is set with information indicating the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special chart probability change flag, the number of reserved first special chart change games or second special chart change games, etc. In addition, in this step S233, a general command special chart reservation increase process is also performed. In this general command special chart reservation increase process, the special chart identification information (information indicating special chart 1 or special chart 2) and advance notice information (either advance notice information, false advance notice information, or no advance notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of RAM 308 are set in the command data.

The first sub-control unit 400 is able to determine the presentation control in response to changes in game control in the main control unit 300 based on the command type contained in the received output schedule information, and is also able to determine the content of the presentation control based on the command data information contained in the output schedule information.

In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to an information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237, a device monitoring process is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out to monitor the presence or absence of a predetermined error, such as the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full error, and when a front frame door open error or a lower tray full error is detected, device information indicating the presence or absence of a front frame door open error or the presence or absence of a lower tray full error is set in the transmission information to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, the various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special pattern start port 232 and the first variable winning port 234 (or the second variable winning port 235), and the display data output to the normal pattern display device 210, the first special pattern display device 212, the second special pattern display device 214, the various status display units 328, etc. via the display circuits 324, 326, and 330 is set to the output port of the I/O 310. In addition, the output schedule information set in the payout request quantity transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I/O 310).

In step S239, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is ON or not. If the low voltage signal is ON (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and if the low voltage signal is OFF (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set to the original registers, interrupt permission is set, and the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG. 82.

On the other hand, in step S243, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power outage when power is restored are saved as recovery data in a specified area of RAM 308, power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed, and then the system returns to the main processing of the main control unit described above.

<Processing of first sub-control unit 400>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using Figure 85. Note that Figure (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. Figure (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. Figure (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S301 in FIG. 2A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the input/output ports are initialized, and the memory area in RAM 408 is initialized. In step S303, it is determined whether the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable memory area is 33 (33 ms) or more, and this process is repeated until the value of the timer variable CNT becomes 33. When the value of the timer variable CNT becomes 33 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted for the timer variable CNT. Note that the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable memory area may be changed to 33, 33, 34, etc., each time the process proceeds from step S303 to step S305.

In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command from the main control unit 300, a command from the second sub-control unit 500, or a return command from the LCD control unit 700 has been received, and processes the command.

In step S309, a performance control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S307, a process such as reading out performance data corresponding to this command from ROM 406 is performed, and if the performance data needs to be updated, an update process for the performance data is performed. In addition, a performance lottery process is performed based on a command from the main control unit 300, and a setting process (described later) for LCD commands and box data that sets part data at a specified position is performed. In addition, if there is part data at a position after receiving a return command (described later), a setting process for part data to be sent to the speaker 120, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, performance movable bodies 246, 224, etc. is performed.

In step S311, if pressing of the chance button is detected, the performance data updated in step S309 is changed to performance data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button.

In step S315, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a command for the sound source IC 416, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. For example, if a notification condition is met, a command is output so that the speaker 120 issues a notification (e.g., a performance). Also, if an abnormality notification condition related to the detection of fraudulent activity or a malfunction is met, a command is output so that the speaker 120 issues a notification (e.g., a notification that an abnormality has occurred). In step S317, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a command for the various lamps 418, this command is output to the drive circuit 420. For example, if a light emission condition for the various lamps 418 is met, a command for emitting the light is output.

In step S319, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a command for the shading device 246 or the movable body (rotating body) in the chance button 136, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S321, if the performance data read in step S309 contains a control command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500 or a liquid crystal command to be sent to the liquid crystal control unit 700, settings are made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 1B. This command reception interrupt processing is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 1(c). The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once per 1 ms in this embodiment), and executes the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period in response to this timer interrupt.

In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S303 of the first sub-control unit main processing is incremented by 1 and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 33 or greater every 33 ms.

In step S503 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, the control command set in step S319 is sent to the second sub-control unit 500, and the random number value for performance is updated.

<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using Figure 86. Note that Figure (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S701 in FIG. 2A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization process, the input/output ports are initialized, and the memory area in RAM 508 is initialized. In step S703, it is determined whether the timer variable CNT is 33 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable CNT becomes 33. When the timer variable CNT becomes 33 or greater, the process proceeds to step S705. Note that the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable memory area may be changed to 33, 33, 34, etc., each time the process proceeds from step S703 to step S707.

In step S705, the timer variable CNT is set to 0.

In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S709, a performance control process is performed. For example, if a new command is received in step S707, the performance data corresponding to this command is read from ROM 506, and if the performance data needs to be updated, the performance data is updated.

In step S711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game frame lamp 122, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the movable object M on the board side (the movable part 2441 of the movable display device 288, the performance movable body 224, the shading device 246, etc.), this command is output to the drive circuit 516 and the process returns to step S703.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 1B. This command reception interrupt processing is processing that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 1(c). The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once per ms in this embodiment), and executes the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period in response to this timer interrupt.

In step S901 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 86(a) is incremented by 1 and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 33 or greater every 33 ms.

In step S903 of the second sub-controller timer interrupt process, the random number values for performance are updated, etc.

<Processing of Liquid Crystal Control Unit 700>
Next, the processing of the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be described with reference to Fig. 87. Fig. 87(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 704 of the liquid crystal control unit 700. Fig. 87(b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the liquid crystal control unit 700. Fig. 87(c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the liquid crystal control unit 700. Fig. 87(d) is a flowchart of the VDP image processing.

First, in step S1001 in FIG. 2A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S1001. In this initialization process, the input/output ports are initialized, and the memory area in RAM 708 is initialized. In step S1003, it is determined whether the timer variable CNT is 33 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable CNT becomes 33. When the timer variable CNT becomes 33 or more, the process proceeds to step S1005. Note that the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable memory area may be changed to 33, 33, 34, etc., each time the process proceeds from step S1003 to step S1005.

In step S1005, the timer variable CNT is set to 0.

In step S1007, command processing is performed. The CPU 704 of the LCD control unit 700 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S1009, a VDP command transmission process is performed. For example, if an instruction to display an image is received from the first sub-control unit 400, a command is sent to the VDP 710 to cause the VDP 710 to perform image control processing.

In step S1011, a return command sending process is performed. When the liquid crystal control unit 700 controls the decorative pattern display device 208 or the movable display device 288 to display the requested image, it sends a return command to the first sub-control unit 400 and returns to step S1003.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the LCD control unit 700 will be described using FIG. 11(b). This command reception interrupt processing is executed when the LCD control unit 700 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S1101 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in the RAM 708.

Next, the second sub-controller timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 704 of the liquid crystal control unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. 1C. The liquid crystal control unit 700 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once per ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt is used as a trigger to execute the timer interrupt process at a predetermined cycle.

In step S1201 of the LCD control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the timer variable CNT in the timer variable storage area of RAM 708 described in step S1003 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 87(a) is incremented by 1 and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S1003, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 33 or greater every 33 ms.

In step S1203 of the LCD control unit timer interrupt process, the random number values for the performance are updated, etc.

Next, the image control process of the VDP 710 that receives a command in the VDP command transmission process of step S1009 in the liquid crystal control unit main process will be described with reference to FIG. 5(d). This figure shows a flowchart illustrating the flow of the image control process.

In step S1301, an instruction to transfer image data is given. Here, the CPU 704 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 718. As a result, one frame of image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and/or the movable display device 288. Next, the CPU 704 sets the ROM coordinates (the source address of the CGROM 716), the VRAM coordinates (the destination address of the VRAM 718), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 710 based on the position information table, and then sets a command to start transferring image data from the CGROM 716 to the VRAM 7186. The VDP 710 transfers the image data from the CGROM 716 to the VRAM 718 based on the command set in the attribute register. The VDP 710 then outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 704.

In step S1303, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from the VDP 710. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S1305. If not, the process waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input. In step S1305, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, the CPU 704 instructs the VDP 718 on information about the image data constituting the display image (such as the coordinate axes of the VRAM 718, image size, and VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates)) in order to form a display image in display area A or B of the VRAM 718 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 710 in step S1301. The VDP 718 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the command stored in the attribute register.

In step S1307, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 704 instructs the VDP 710 to start drawing an image. The VDP 710 starts drawing the image in the frame buffer in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 704.

In step S1309, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal has been input from VDP 710 based on the end of image drawing. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S1311; if not, the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input. In step S1311, the scene display counter, which is set in a specified area of RAM 708 and counts how many scene images have been generated, is incremented (+1) and the process ends.

<Wiring structure>
The wiring structure of electronic components of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. Here, the wiring structure of the speaker 120 will be described. As already described, in this embodiment, the speaker 120 is connected to the board frame relay board 726C via the door side lighting board 734. In this embodiment, the board frame relay board 726C is assumed to be arranged on the lower side of the pachinko machine 100. In this configuration, if the board frame relay board 726C and the speaker 120 are directly connected by a harness or the like, the required wiring length becomes relatively long, and the wiring needs to be passed around the play area 124. In terms of playability and interest in play, it is often desirable to secure the play area 124 as wide as possible. In this embodiment, by using the door side lighting board 734, wiring for the speaker 120 can be provided even in cases where it is difficult to secure space to install a harness.

Figure 88 shows the arrangement of lighting unit A equipped with a door-side lighting board 734, and is a schematic diagram seen through the front panel of the front door frame 106. The speakers 120 are arranged in two corners at the top of the front door frame 106. The lighting units A are arranged adjacent to the play area 124 on both the left and right sides of the play area 124, and are located in the narrow area between the play area 124 and the side of the front door frame 106. Although not shown, the panel frame relay board 726C is located near the ball storage tray door 108.

Figure 89 is a cross-sectional view of lighting unit A along line a-a in Figure 88. Lighting unit A includes a door-side lighting board 734, a mounting member 1 that fixes the door-side lighting board 734 to the front door frame 106, and a cover 2 that covers the door-side lighting board 734.

The cover 2 is made of a transparent or semi-transparent material (e.g., acrylic or glass) that has transparency, and allows the door-side lighting board 734 to be seen from the outside. In this embodiment, the cover 2 is configured to cover the entire door-side lighting board 734, but it may also be configured to cover only a portion of it. In addition, all or part of the cover 2 may be lenticular.

A lamp 418 is mounted on the door-side lighting board 734 as a light-emitting element. In this embodiment, the lamp 418 is an LED. As already mentioned, the lighting unit A is arranged on both the left and right sides of the play area 124. Therefore, when looking at the play area 124 from the front, the player can see the light emitted by the lamp 418, and the light emission mode may increase the interest of the game. Note that the location of the lighting unit A (i.e., the door-side lighting board 734) is not limited to this, and it can also be arranged, for example, on the upper part of the front frame door 106 (between speakers 120 and speakers 120, etc.) depending on the positions of the wiring source and destination.

Figure 90 (a) shows an example of wiring between the panel frame relay board 726C and the speaker 120 via the door side lighting board 734. In the example shown in the figure, a relay board 3 is interposed between the door side lighting board 734 and the speaker 120, but a configuration in which the door side lighting board 734 and the speaker 120 are directly connected can also be used.

The door-side lighting board 734 is generally band-shaped (for example, with an aspect ratio in the range of 1:10 to 1:50) with a connector CN1 provided at one end and a connector CN2 provided at the other end. The door-side lighting board 734 is a rigid board, but may be a flexible board. Six lamps 418 are mounted (LED1 to 6). The symbols CN1 and CN2 indicating the connectors and the symbols LED1 to 6 indicating the lamps 418 are also indications of the board components formed by printing or the like on the door-side lighting board 734, and are displayed on the installation surface of the board components. This indication may be formed on the reverse side of the installation surface.

One end of the harness H1 is connected to the connector CN1, and the other end is connected to the panel frame relay board 726C. One end of the harness H2 is connected to the connector CN2, and the other end is connected to the relay board 3. One end of the harness H3 is connected to the relay board 3, and the other end is connected to the speaker 120.

The door-side lighting board 734 has wiring (conductor pattern) that connects some of the terminals of the connector CN1 and some of the terminals of the connector CN2. This makes it possible to transmit audio signals from the panel frame relay board 726C to the speaker 120 via the door-side lighting board 734 and relay board 3.

In this embodiment, the relay board 3 is provided with a connector and wiring for transmitting signals between the door side lighting board 734 and the speaker 120, but the relay board 3 may also be provided with light emitting elements in the same configuration as the door side lighting board 734.

In addition, in this embodiment, wiring to the speaker 120 is exemplified, but the application is not limited to the speaker 120, and may be a light-emitting element, an actuator (e.g., a motor or a solenoid), etc. An example is shown in FIG. 90(b). In the example shown in the figure, a board 4 on which LEDs 1 and 2 are mounted as a game frame lamp 122 instead of a speaker 120 is connected to a door side lighting board 734. It is possible to transmit a light on/off signal from the board frame relay board 726C to the game frame lamp 122 via the door side lighting board 734. The game frame lamp 122 can be used for presentation, and can also be used for anomaly notification, like the speaker 120.

It is also possible to combine the configurations of Figure 90(a) and Figure 90(b). In other words, the door side lighting board 734 can be used as a relay board to connect multiple electronic components such as a speaker 120 and a lamp 122 for the game table frame, or multiple boards such as relay board 3 and board 4, and transmit control signals from the board frame relay board 726C to these.

Next, the internal structure of the door-side lighting board 734 will be described. Figure 91(a) is a plan view of the door-side lighting board 734 (a view of the mounting surface of the lamp 418), and Figure 91(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line b-b in Figure 91(a).

In this embodiment, the door-side lighting board 734 is a multi-layer board that includes three plate-shaped insulator layers 5a-5c, four wiring layers LY1-LY4, and holes Ha-Hh. Figure 91(c) shows the wiring patterns of the wiring layers LY2-LY4. There are no wirings in each wiring layer other than those shown in the figure, but there may be other wirings (the same applies to another example described later).

The wiring layer LY1 is formed on the surface of the insulator 5a. The surface of the insulator 5a forms the mounting surface for the board components (connector, LED) and is covered with a resist film R. The wiring layer LY2 is formed between the insulators 5a and 5b. The wiring layer LY3 is formed between the insulators 5b and 5c. The wiring layer LY4 is formed on the back surface of the insulator 5c and is covered with a resist film R. The wiring layers LY1 and LY4 may be called outer layers, and the wiring layers LY2 and LY3 may be called inner layers. The inner layers are layers located inside the outer layers of the door-side lighting board 734. The holes Ha to Hh are through holes that penetrate all three layers of the insulators 5a to 5c.

Connector CN1 is a multi-pin connector (6 pins in this case), and connector CN2 is a multi-pin connector (2 pins in this case). Wires W1 to W6 are connected to each pin of connector CN1 in the order of the pins. Wire W6 is connected to the first pin of connector CN2, and wire W1 is connected to the second pin. Wires W1 to W6 are patterns formed from a conductive film.

Wirings W2 to W4 are signal lines and are formed in wiring layer LY1. Wiring W2 connects LED1 and LED2 in series. By transmitting a signal to wiring W2, the light emission of these can be controlled simultaneously. Wiring W3 connects LED3 and LED4 in series. By transmitting a signal to wiring W3, the light emission of these can be controlled simultaneously. Wiring W4 connects LED5 and LED6 in series. By transmitting a signal to wiring W4, the light emission of these can be controlled simultaneously.

The wiring W5 is a power line, and is connected to one end (anode side) of the LED2, LED4, and LED6. The wiring W5 has a portion in the wiring layer LY1, a portion in the wiring layer LY4, and a portion in the holes Ha-Hc and He. The wiring W5 has different specifications in the wiring layer LY1 and the wiring layer LY4. Specifically, the width, area, distance (e.g., length in the longitudinal direction of the board) are different. The majority of the wiring W5 is formed in the wiring layer LY4, and is formed in a line shape on the wiring layer LY1 and in a strip shape (solid coating) on the wiring layer LY4. By forming it in a strip shape on the wiring layer LY4, it may be possible to reduce the electrical resistance when supplying power to each part.

Wires W1 and W6 are signal lines for the speaker 120. Wire W1 has a portion on wiring layer LY1, a portion on wiring layer LY3, and a portion with holes Hf and Hg. Wire W1 has different specifications on wiring layer LY1 and wiring layer LY3. Specifically, the width, area, distance (e.g., length in the longitudinal direction of the board) and the like are different. Most of wire W1 is formed on wiring layer LY3, and is formed in a line shape on wiring layer LY1 and in a strip shape (solid coating) on wiring layer LY3. By forming it in a strip shape on wiring layer LY3, it may be possible to reduce the electrical resistance when transmitting a signal to speaker 120.

The wire W6 has a portion on the wiring layer LY1, a portion on the wiring layer LY2, and a portion on the holes Hd and Hh. The portion on the wiring layer LY1 of the wire W6 is different from the portion on the wiring layer LY2. Specifically, the width, area, distance (e.g., length in the longitudinal direction of the board) and the like are different. The majority of the wire W6 is formed on the wiring layer LY2, and is formed in a line shape on the wiring layer LY1 and in a strip shape (solid coating) on the wiring layer LY2. By forming it in a strip shape on the wiring layer LY2, it may be possible to reduce the electrical resistance when transmitting a signal to the speaker 120.

In this embodiment, the wires W1 and W6 for the speaker 120 are passed through the inner layer of the door-side lighting board 734. This may make the wires W1 and W6 less susceptible to external factors. Also, because there is a solid painted portion like the wire W5, it may be possible to reduce the effect of noise generated by the game ball even when the speaker is located adjacent to the play area 124. Also, in the past, there was a risk that the harness would be cut to prevent the speaker 120 from sounding an alarm if a cheater committed a fraudulent act. However, in this embodiment, the wiring is relayed by the door-side lighting board 734, so the harness portion is shorter, making it less likely that the wiring will be cut, and it may be possible to reliably notify the occurrence of fraudulent acts.

The wiring structure is not limited to the example in Figure 91, and various configurations can be adopted. Each will be explained in turn below.

<Other Example 1>
92 shows the wiring patterns of the wiring layers LY1 to LY4 of Alternative Example 1. In this example, the inner layers through which the wires W1 and W6 for the speaker 120 pass are the same inner layer. That is, the wiring layer LY2 is divided in half in the width direction, and the wire W1 is carried on one side, and the wire W6 is carried on the other side, each of which is formed in a strip shape. The wiring layer LY3 has no wiring, but can also be used to pass other wiring through.

<Modified Example 2>
93 shows a wiring layer LY3 of Alternative Example 1 in which a ground (GND) line GP is formed. In this example, a screw hole GH is formed. The hole GH is a through hole that penetrates all three layers of insulators 5a to 5c. For example, a screw for fixing the lighting unit A is inserted into the screw hole GH, and the ground wiring of the pachinko machine 100 is fastened together. The ground line GP is also formed in the hole GH, and is conductive with the ground wiring.

The ground line GP is formed in a strip shape (solid coating) on the wiring layer LY3. By forming it in a strip shape on the wiring layer LY3, it may be possible to suppress noise from being mixed into the signal line.

<Modified Example 3>
For wiring having an outer layer portion and an inner layer portion, the specifications of the outer layer portion and the inner layer portion may be the same in part or in whole. Figure 94 shows an example. In the example shown in Figure 91, the wiring width of the wiring layer LY1 portion of the wiring W1 is the same as that of the wiring layer LY3 portion. Similarly, the wiring width of the wiring layer LY1 portion of the wiring W6 is the same as that of the wiring layer LY2 portion. It is also possible to form a ground line or other signal lines in the empty space of the wiring layers LY2 and LY3.

<Modified Example 4>
The wiring in the inner layer can be used not only as relay wiring for an external board, but also as wiring between board components within the board. Figures 95(a) and (b) show an example, where Figure 95(a) is a plan view of the board 6 of this example, and Figure 95(b) is a cross-sectional view of the board 6 taken along line c-c in Figure 95(a). Of the components of the board 6, the same components as those of the door-side lighting board 734 are given the same reference numerals and will not be described.

Board components P1 and P2 are mounted on the insulator 5a of the board 6. Board components P1 and P2 are assumed to be something other than a connector, but they may of course be connectors (the same applies to the other examples below). Board components P1 and P2 are, for example, circuit components. More specifically, examples include resistors, capacitors, LEDs, ICs, LSIs, CPUs, ROMs, RAMs, switches, and other components that can be mounted on a printed circuit board.

In the example of Figures 95(a) and (b), holes Ha and Hb are formed as through holes. Wiring W connects components P1 and P2. Wiring W has a portion of wiring layer LY1, a portion of wiring layer LY2, and holes Ha and Hb.

<Modified Example 5>
The holes may not be through holes, but may be holes (called via holes to be distinguished from through holes) that penetrate only a portion of the insulator. Figures 95(c) and (d) show an example, which is a modification of the substrate 6 of Figures 95(a) and (b). Figure 95(c) is a plan view of the substrate 6 of this example, and Figure 95(d) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate 6 taken along line dd in Figure 95(c). The holes Ha and Hb penetrate only the insulator 5a. The wiring W has a portion of the wiring layer LY1, a portion of the wiring layer LY2, and a portion of the holes Ha and Hb.

<Modified Example 6>
Wiring may be arranged on the outer layer only at the connection parts with the board components. Figures 96(a) and (b) show an example, which is a modified example of the board 6 in Figures 95(c) and (d). Figure 96(a) is a plan view of the board 6 of this example, and Figure 96(b) is a cross-sectional view of the board 6 along the line e-e in Figure 96(a). In the example in the figure, holes Ha and Hb are formed in the mounting areas of components P1 and P2. In the wiring layer LY1, the wiring W is only the ends of holes Ha and Hb (i.e., the connection parts with the components), and there is no part that extends linearly or strip-like.

<Modified Example 7>
The wiring may be formed across multiple inner layers. Figures 96(c) and (d) show an example, which is a modified example of the substrate 6 of Figures 96(a) and (b). Figure 96(c) is a plan view of the substrate 6 of this example, and Figure 96(d) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate 6 along the line ff in Figure 96(c). In the example of the figure, holes Hc and Hd penetrating the insulator 5b are formed as via holes. The wiring W has a portion of the wiring layer LY1, a portion of the wiring layer LY2, a portion of the wiring layer LY3, and a portion of the holes Ha to Hd. The portion of the wiring layer LY1 is only a connection portion.

<Modified Example 8>
All of the wiring may be arranged on the inner layer. Figures 97(a) and (b) show an example, which is a modified example of the substrate 6 of Figures 95(a) and (b). Figure 97(a) is a plan view of the substrate 6 of this example, and Figure 97(b) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate 6 taken along line gg in Figure 97(a). In the example shown in the figure, components P1 and P2 are embedded in the insulator 5a and are not exposed to the outside. The wiring W is formed only in the wiring layer LY2, and connects the components P1 and P2.

<Modified Example 9>
A part of the component may be embedded in the insulator. Figures 97(c) and (d) show an example, which is a modified example of the substrate 6 of Figures 97(a) and (b). Figure 97(c) is a plan view of the substrate 6 of this example, and Figure 97(d) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate 6 along line h-h in Figure 97(c). In the example shown in the figure, the component P1 is mounted on the insulator 5a and exposed to the outside, while the component P2 is embedded in the insulator 5a. The hole H is formed as a via hole penetrating the insulator 5b. The wiring W has a portion of the wiring layer LY1, a portion of the wiring layer LY2, and a portion of the hole H.

<Modified Example 10>
There may be components mounted on different outer layers. FIG. 98(a) is a cross-sectional view showing an example, which is a modified example of the substrate 6 of FIG. 95(a) and (b). In the example shown in FIG. 98, the component P1 is mounted on the insulator 5a, and the component P2 is mounted on the insulator 5c (lower surface side). The hole Ha is formed as a via hole penetrating the insulator 5a, and the hole Hb is formed as a via hole penetrating the insulator 5c. The wiring W has a portion of the wiring layer LY1, a portion of the wiring layer LY2, a portion of the wiring layer LY4, and portions of the holes Ha and Hb. The portion of the wiring layer LY2 can be provided on the wiring layer LY3, or can be provided on both the wiring layers LY2 and LY3.

<Modified Example 11>
Wiring that is entirely arranged on the outer layer and wiring that is at least partially arranged on the inner layer may be mixed. This may improve the degree of freedom of wiring. Figures 98(b) and (c) show an example, which is a modification of the substrate 6 of Figures 95(a) and (b). Figure 98(b) is a plan view of the substrate 6 of this example, and Figure 98(c) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate 6 taken along line i-i of Figure 98(b).

In the example shown in the figure, wires W1 and W2 connect components P1 and P2. Holes Ha and Hb are formed as via holes that penetrate insulator 5a. Wire W1 is entirely formed in wiring layer LY1. Wire W2 has a portion in wiring layer LY1, a portion in wiring layer LY2, and holes Ha and Hb.

Wires W1 and W2 may connect different terminals of components P1 and P2, or may connect the same terminals. When connecting the same terminals, for example, even if wire W1 is connected, signal transmission is possible through wire W2. Wire W1 may also be a dummy wire that does not actually connect terminals. In either case, signal transmission may be possible even if wire W1 is cut due to fraudulent activity.

<Modified Example 12>
A wiring layer on which a signal line is formed may be disposed between a plurality of wiring layers on which a ground line is formed. This may improve resistance to noise. Figures 99(a) and (b) show an example, which is a modification of the substrate 6 of Figures 96(a) and (b). Figure 99(a) is a plan view of the substrate 6 of this example, and Figure 99(b) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate 6 taken along line j-j of Figure 99(a). In the example shown in the figure, the multilayer substrate has a five-layer structure of insulators 5a to 5e and a six-layer structure of wiring layers LY1 to LY6.

In the example shown in the figure, holes Ha and Hb penetrating the insulators 5a and 5b are formed as via holes. The wiring W has a portion in wiring layer LY1, a portion in wiring layer LY3, and a portion in holes Ha and Hb. The portion in wiring layer LY1 is only the connection portion. Ground lines are formed in wiring layers LY2 and LY4. The ground lines can be formed in a strip shape (solid coating).

Figures 99(c) and (d) also show an example of this embodiment, which is a modified example of the substrate 6 of Figures 99(a) and (b). Figure 99(c) is a plan view of the substrate 6 of this embodiment, and Figure 99(d) is a cross-sectional view of the substrate 6 taken along line k-k of Figure 99(c).

In the example shown in the figure, holes Hb and Hc that penetrate the insulators 5a and 5b are formed as via holes. Also, holes Ha and Hd that penetrate the insulators 5a to 5c are formed as via holes.

Wiring W1 and W2 connect components P1 and P2. Wiring W1 has a portion in wiring layer LY1, a portion in wiring layer LY5, and a portion in holes Ha and Hd. The portion in wiring layer LY1 is only the connection portion. Wiring W2 has a portion in wiring layer LY1, a portion in wiring layer LY3, and a portion in holes Hb and Hc. The portion in wiring layer LY1 is only the connection portion.

Ground lines are formed on wiring layers LY1, LY4, and LY6. The ground lines can be formed in a strip shape (solid coating).

<Modified Example 13>
A plurality of components may be connected to one component. In other words, components having different numbers of wiring may be connected. FIG. 100 shows an example, which is a plan view of the board 6 of this example. Although a cross-sectional view is omitted, a configuration similar to that of each board 6 described above can be adopted. In the example shown in the figure, components P1 to P3 are mounted on an insulator 5a. At least some of the components may be embedded inside.

Wire W1 connects parts P1 and P2, wire W2 branches into wire W2a and wire W2b, which connect parts P1, P2, and P3, and wire W3 connects parts P1 and P3. Part P1 has three wires, and parts P2 and P3 have two.

Wiring W1 has an outer layer portion, an inner layer portion (dashed line portion), and holes Ha and Hd. Holes Ha and Hd are through holes or via holes. Wiring W2, W2a, and W2b have an outer layer portion, an inner layer portion (dashed line portion), and holes Hb, He, and Hf. Holes Hb, He, and Hf are through holes or via holes. Wiring W3 has an outer layer portion, an inner layer portion (dashed line portion), and holes Hc and Hg. Holes Hc and Hg are through holes or via holes.

The parts of each wiring that exist in the inner layer may be in the same wiring layer or in different wiring layers. There may be no wiring that connects one component P1 to multiple components P2 and P3, such as wiring W2, or there may be wiring that connects one component to three or more components.

<Modified Example 14>
The above-mentioned examples can be appropriately combined.

<Summary of wiring structure>
A1. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a plurality of boards (e.g., 3, 4, 726C, 734) and a plurality of harnesses (e.g., H1 to H3), at least one of the plurality of boards is a first board (e.g., 726C), at least one of the plurality of boards is a second board (e.g., 3, 4), at least one of the plurality of boards is a third board (e.g., 734), at least one of the plurality of harnesses is a first harness (e.g., H1), at least one of the plurality of harnesses is a second harness (e.g., H2), the third board is provided with a plurality of connectors (e.g., CN1, CN2), at least one of the plurality of connectors is a first connector (e.g., CN1), at least one of the plurality of connectors is a second connector (e.g., CN2), and one end of the first harness is connected to the first connector. the other end of the first harness is connected to the first board, one end of the second harness is connected to the second connector, the other end of the second harness is connected to the second board, the third board is composed of a plurality of layers (e.g., LY1 to LY4), at least one of the plurality of layers is a first layer (e.g., LY1), at least one of the plurality of layers is a second layer (e.g., LY3), the second layer is located more inwardly of the third board than the first layer, the third board is provided with a plurality of wirings (e.g., W1 to W6), at least one of the plurality of wirings is a first wiring (e.g., W1), the first wiring is connected to the first connector, the first wiring is connected to the second connector, and the second layer is provided with at least a portion of the first wiring.

This configuration may reduce the impact of external factors such as noise, unauthorized radio waves, and unauthorized electromagnetic waves on the first wiring. It may also be more difficult for unauthorized persons to cut the wiring than if the wiring were a harness. In addition, because the first board and the second board are connected via a third board, it may be possible to make more effective use of the space on the gaming machine than if they were connected via a harness.

The substrate may be a flexible substrate. The substrate may be at least partially transparent. The substrate may have indications relating to the substrate constituting means (e.g., LED1, LED2, CN1, etc.) displayed on the back side of the installation surface of the substrate constituting means.

A2. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the third board is provided with light-emitting means (e.g., LED1 to LED6), at least one of the multiple wirings is a second wiring (e.g., W2 to W5), the first layer is provided with at least a portion of the second wiring, the second wiring is connected to the light-emitting means, the second wiring is connected to the first connector, and the light-emitting means is capable of emitting light when a light-emitting condition is met.

With this configuration, the third board capable of emitting light relays between the first and second boards, which may allow for more effective use of the space in the gaming machine than when connected by a harness. Also, by providing the second wiring on the first layer, it may be possible to prevent external noise from affecting the first wiring.

The light emitting means may be, for example, an LED (single color, two colors, three colors, four or more colors) or a lamp other than an LED, and may be one, two, or three or more. The light emitting conditions may include, as at least one of the requirements for establishment, at least one of the following events: when the game starts, when the patterns change, when the patterns stop, when a reach effect occurs, when a jackpot starts, when an operation is performed on the operating means, when a game medium is inserted, when a game medium is paid out, when a demo effect starts, when the power is turned on, when game settings are set, and when the volume is set.

A3. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that at least a portion of the third substrate is covered by a covering means (e.g., 2), and the covering means is made of a transparent material.

With this configuration, it may be possible to determine whether or not tampering has occurred on the third board.

A4. The gaming machine of the above embodiment (e.g., 100) is characterized in that the third board is disposed at a position (e.g., 106) where the light emitted by the light-emitting means can be visually recognized by the player.

This configuration may increase the enjoyment of the game.

A5. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that it has a gaming board (e.g., 200) that forms a gaming area (e.g., 124) in which a gaming ball can roll, and the third substrate is disposed adjacent to the gaming area.

This configuration may reduce the effect of noise generated by the rolling of the game ball on the first wiring. As an example of the third board being adjacent to the game area, there may or may not be another member between the third board and the game area. There may be one or more other members. In addition, the third board may be located at the same position in the depth direction of the game table as the game area, or it may be on the front side (front face side) or the rear side (back face side).

A6. The gaming machine of the above embodiment (e.g., 100) is characterized in that the second board is connected to an alarm means (e.g., 120), the alarm means is capable of executing a first alarm when an alarm condition is met, and the alarm means is capable of executing a second alarm when an abnormality alarm condition is met, and the second alarm is an alarm that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality.

According to this configuration, since the wiring of the notification means that notifies of an abnormality is relayed, it is possible to make it more difficult for an unauthorized person to cut the wiring than when the wiring is a harness, and it may be possible to execute an abnormality notification based on the detection of unauthorized activity. In addition, since the influence of external factors on the first wiring is reduced, it may be possible to stably issue the first and second notifications by the notification means.

The notification means may be, for example, one or more of the following: sound output means (speaker), light emitting means (LED (single color, two colors, three colors, four or more colors), lamp), display means (liquid crystal, CRT, dot matrix display, segment display), movable object, and vibration device. The number of notification means may be one, two, or three or more.

The notification conditions may include, as at least one of the following conditions to be met: when the game starts, when the pattern changes, when the pattern stops, when a reach effect occurs, when a jackpot starts, when an operation is performed on the operating means, when a gaming medium is inserted, when a gaming medium is paid out, when a demo effect starts, when the power is turned on, when game settings are set, and when the volume is set.The abnormality notification conditions may include, as at least one of the conditions to be met: when at least one of the abnormality detection means (door open detection sensor, vibration detection sensor, magnetic force detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, electromagnetic wave detection sensor, ball tray full detection sensor, abnormality detection sensor) detects the occurrence of an abnormality.

A7. The gaming machine (e.g. 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that it has a substrate (e.g. 5, 6) composed of a plurality of substrate constituent means (e.g. CN1, CN2, P1-P3), the substrate being composed of a plurality of layers (e.g. LY1-LY4, LY5, LY6), at least one of the plurality of substrate constituent means being a first substrate constituent means (e.g. CN1, P1), at least one of the plurality of substrate constituent means being a second substrate constituent means (e.g. CN2, P2), at least a portion of the first wiring (e.g. W1, W6, W) connecting the first substrate constituent means and the second substrate constituent means being arranged on an inner layer, and at least a portion of the first wiring connecting the first substrate constituent means and the second substrate constituent means being arranged on an outer layer.

This configuration may reduce the impact on the first wiring of external factors such as noise, unauthorized radio waves, and unauthorized electromagnetic waves. It may also be possible to make it more difficult for unauthorized persons to cut the wiring than if the wiring were a harness.

A8. The gaming machine (e.g. 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the first wiring (e.g. W) is arranged on the outer layer only at the connection portion with the board configuration means (e.g. Figure 96).

This configuration may further enhance the protection function against external factors affecting the first wiring or against breakage. Also, since repairs or repairs are not possible if the wiring breaks internally, it is possible to prevent players from playing the game after being roughly handled by store staff, transporters, etc. and using emergency measures, and to encourage the manufacturer to take action such as replacing parts, thereby preventing malfunctions caused by emergency measures and improving the reliability of the gaming machine for players.

A9. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the first wiring (e.g., W1, W6, W) has different specifications for the inner layer and the outer layer.

This configuration may partially improve the ease of wiring, partially improve the freedom of wiring design, partially enhance protective functions, and partially enhance conductivity.

For example, the first wiring may have a longer distance in the inner layer than the distance in the outer layer. Or, the first wiring may have a shorter distance in the inner layer than the distance in the outer layer. Or, the first wiring may have a wider width in the inner layer than the width in the outer layer. Or, the first wiring may have a narrower width in the inner layer than the width in the outer layer. Or, the first wiring may have a larger area in the inner layer than the area in the outer layer. Or, the first wiring may have a smaller area in the inner layer than the area in the outer layer.

A10. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the first wiring (e.g., W1, W6, W) has the same specifications for the inner layer and the outer layer.

This configuration may facilitate design.

For example, the first wiring may be such that the distance between the outer layer and the inner layer is the same. Alternatively, the width between the outer layer and the inner layer may be the same. Alternatively, the area between the outer layer and the inner layer may be the same.

A11. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the first wiring (e.g., W1, W6, W) is formed by connecting the inner layer portion and the outer layer portion via a hole.

This configuration may allow the inner layer portion and the outer layer portion to be connected relatively easily. For example, the first wiring may connect the outer layer and the inner layer with a through hole. Alternatively, the first wiring may connect the outer layer and the inner layer with a via hole.

A12. The gaming machine of the above embodiment (e.g., 100) is characterized in that at least one of the multiple board configuration means is a circuit component.

This configuration may improve the protection performance of the wiring of the circuit components.

For example, the first board configuration means may be at least one of a connector, a resistor, a capacitor, an LED, an IC, an LSI, a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and a switch. The second board configuration means may be at least one of a connector, a resistor, a capacitor, an LED, an IC, an LSI, a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and a switch.

A13. The gaming machine of the above embodiment (e.g., 100) is characterized in that the covering means is partially lenticular.

This configuration may further increase the enjoyment of the game and make it easier to check for fraudulent activity.

A14. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that at least one of the multiple board configuration means is a third board configuration means (e.g., P3), and a second wiring connected to the first board configuration means is connected to the third board configuration means.

This configuration may allow multiple wiring to be provided on a single board.

A15. The gaming machine of the above embodiment (e.g., 100) is characterized in that one of the plurality of layers is a first layer, one of the plurality of layers is a second layer, the first layer is provided with at least a portion of the second wiring, and the second layer is provided with at least a portion of the second wiring.

This configuration may improve the protection function for multiple wiring.

A16. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the first board configuration means (e.g., P1) has a different number of wirings from the second board configuration means (e.g., P2).

With this configuration, it may be possible to provide board configuration means with different numbers of wiring on a single board.

A17. The gaming machine of the above embodiment (e.g., 100) is characterized in that the second layer is arranged with only the first wiring.

This configuration may facilitate wiring design and improve the protection function of the first wiring.

A18. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that at least one of the multiple wirings is a third wiring (e.g., W6), the third wiring is connected to the first connector, the third wiring is connected to the second connector, and the first layer is provided with at least a portion of the third wiring.

This configuration may make it easier to secure space for installing the third wiring.

A19. The gaming machine of the above embodiment (e.g., 100) is characterized in that the second layer is where the first wiring and the third wiring are arranged.

This configuration may facilitate wiring design and increase the flexibility of other wiring.

A20. The gaming machine of the above embodiment (e.g., 100) is characterized in that the second layer is arranged with only the first wiring and the third wiring.

This configuration may facilitate wiring design and increase the flexibility of other wiring.

A21. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that at least one of the multiple layers is a third layer (e.g., LY2), the third layer is located inside the third board relative to the first layer, and the third layer is provided with at least a portion of the third wiring.

This configuration may improve short-circuit prevention performance between the first wiring and the third wiring.

A22. The gaming machine of the above embodiment (e.g., 100) is characterized in that the third layer is arranged with only the third wiring.

This configuration may facilitate wiring design and increase the flexibility of other wiring.

A23. The gaming machine of the above embodiment (e.g., 100) is characterized in that at least one of the multiple layers is arranged with one or more of a signal line, a power line, and a ground line.

This configuration may improve the protection performance of various wiring.

For example, the first layer may have one or more of a signal line, a power line, and a ground line arranged thereon. Alternatively, the second layer may have one or more of a signal line, a power line, and a ground line arranged thereon. Alternatively, the third layer may have one or more of a signal line, a power line, and a ground line arranged thereon. Alternatively, one or two layers adjacent to the second layer may have one or more of a signal line, a power line, and a ground line arranged thereon. The number of inner layers may be one, two, or three or more. The first wiring may also be arranged in multiple inner layers.

<Confirmation Promotion Structure>
A structure for encouraging staff at a game arcade to check the areas to be checked will be described below. In this embodiment, the areas to be checked are the board components on the liquid crystal control board 680, but the invention is not limited to this.

As described with reference to FIG. 2, the liquid crystal control board 680 is housed in a liquid crystal control board case 682 and is arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 100. The liquid crystal control board case 682 is surrounded on all four sides by other components (tank rail 154, payout device 152, main control board case 158, first sub-control board case 162). Therefore, while the inside of the liquid crystal control board case 682 is relatively easy to see from the back to the front direction of the pachinko machine 100, the visibility of the inside of the liquid crystal control board case 682 from the sides of the top, bottom, left, and right is not necessarily good. Therefore, in this embodiment, the visibility of the inside of the liquid crystal control board case 682 is at least partially deteriorated from the back to the front direction of the pachinko machine 100, so that the inspector can visually inspect it from multiple angles.

Figure 101 is an explanatory diagram of the liquid crystal control board 680. The liquid crystal control board 680 is composed of multiple boards. Specifically, the liquid crystal control board 680 is broadly divided into a main board 10 and a ROM board 11, which are connected to each other. Figure 102(a) is a plan view showing the surface of the main board 10, and Figure 102(b) is a plan view showing the surface of the ROM board 11. Figure 103 is a cross-sectional view taken along line l-l in Figure 102(a), but is a cross-sectional view showing the main board 10 and ROM board 11 assembled together and housed in the liquid crystal control board case 682.

The main board 10 is mounted with the CPU 704, ROM 706, VDP 710, and crystal oscillators 714A and 714B already described. RAM 708 and VRAM 718 are mounted on the back side. The main board 10 is also mounted with a connector 21 to which a harness from an external device is connected, and a connector 22 to which the ROM board 11 is connected. The connector 22 is fixed to the main board 10, and also functions as a support for the ROM board 11. The main board 10 is also mounted with resistors 25, 26, capacitors 23, 24, and light-emitting elements 31 to 34. In this case, the light-emitting elements 31 to 34 are LEDs.

Identification markings PI are formed on the main board 10 to indicate the mounting position of each component. The identification markings PI are formed, for example, by printing. The identification markings PI of the connector 21 are displayed as CN1, and the identification markings PI of the CPU 704 are displayed as IC1. By comparing the identification markings PI with the mounted components, it may be possible to confirm the consistency between the two. Note that the main board 10 and ROM board 11 may also be provided with a display indicating the board's management number, which may make it possible to confirm the consistency between the two.

Light-emitting elements 31 to 34 emit light when certain light-emitting conditions are met. Here, the following emission conditions are assumed. Light-emitting element 31 emits light each time a timer interrupt process is performed. From the outside, it appears to be constantly lit after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, light-emitting element 31 is primarily assumed to be the part to be checked.

Light-emitting element 32 lights up when a software reset is performed. Light-emitting element 33 lights up when a hardware reset is performed. It lights up when an arcade staff member performs a reset operation, etc. Light-emitting element 34 lights up during debugging. Therefore, it does not light up when the arcade is open for business. Note that here there are four light-emitting elements, but there is no limit to the number. Also, the number of light-emitting elements (here 31 to 33) that can light up during normal business hours may be more, less, or the same as the light-emitting element that does not light up (here 34).

The ROM board 11 is mounted with the CGROM 716 already described. A connector or pin that can be attached to the connector 22 is provided on the back surface of the ROM board 11, and the ROM board 11 can be separated from the main board 10.

As shown in FIG. 103, the main board 10 and the ROM board 11 are fastened to each other in parallel with bolts and nuts via a number of spacers 12. The main board 10 and the ROM board 11 are spaced apart from each other in the normal direction, which coincides with the rear to front direction of the pachinko machine 100.

When viewed in the normal direction of the main board 10 and the ROM board 11, the main board 10 partially overlaps with the ROM board 11. In this embodiment, part of the main board 10 overlaps with the ROM board 11, but the entire board may overlap. Also, when viewed from the ROM board 11, the entire ROM board 11 overlaps with the main board 10, but only part of it may overlap.

The capacitor 24, crystal oscillator 714A, resistor 26, connector 22, light-emitting elements 31-34, and their identification markings PI are located between the main board 10 and the ROM board 11. Therefore, when looking from the back to the front of the pachinko machine 100, the visibility of these components is reduced due to the ROM board 11. In other words, the ROM board 11 functions as a visibility reducing means.

Focusing on the light-emitting element 31, which is a part to be checked, its visibility will be described with reference to FIG. 103. Here, the liquid crystal control board 680 is fixed to the mounting part 682a (e.g., the back of the game board) of the pachinko machine 100 while being housed in the liquid crystal control board case 682. The liquid crystal control board case 682 houses both the main board 10 and the ROM board 11. The liquid crystal control board case 682 is constructed by fixing an upper case 6821 and a lower case 6822 to each other, and the lower part of the main board 10 is attached to the case 6822 as a board mounting part. The liquid crystal control board case 682 is made of a translucent material such as a transparent or semi-transparent material (e.g., acrylic, glass), and the inside can be seen from the outside.

Referring to FIG. 103, when the light-emitting element 31 is viewed from the normal direction (D1) of the main board 10 and the ROM board 11, the ROM board 11 gets in the way and makes it difficult to see the light-emitting element 31. Therefore, the inspector changes the viewing angle, for example, to the diagonal direction D2 or D3, to view the light-emitting element 31. In the D2 direction, the light-emitting element 31 is still difficult to see, but the light emission itself can be confirmed due to light leakage. In the D3 direction, the light-emitting element 31 itself becomes visible. As already explained, the liquid crystal control board case 682 is surrounded on all four sides by other components (tank rail 154, dispensing device 152, main control board case 158, first sub-control board case 162), so that it is structurally difficult to see the light-emitting element 31 from directly to the side, directly above, or directly below. However, a configuration that allows the light-emitting element 31 to be seen from either the directly to the side, directly above, or directly below can also be adopted.

Now, since the light-emitting element 31 has poor visibility from the D1 direction, which is a typical checking direction, the checker will naturally visually check the light-emitting element 31 from multiple directions, and for example, can be made to check more carefully whether the light-emitting element 31 is lit. Also, by having the checker visually check from multiple angles, it may be possible to discover the installation of an unauthorized device, and security can be improved.

The light-emitting element 31 is difficult to see from the D1 direction, but components that are not located between the main board 10 and the ROM board 11, such as the CPU 704, and the identification markings PI are easily visible, for example, from the D4 direction (parallel to the D1 direction but from a different viewpoint). In addition, the light emitted by the light-emitting element 31 brightens the surroundings. When checking the surroundings of the light-emitting element 31 of the pachinko machine 100 installed in a relatively dark place, the visibility may be improved if the CPU 704, VDP 710, etc. are included in the range of the light. In addition, although the area between the main board 10 and the ROM board 11 tends to be dark, the light from the light-emitting element 31 may improve the visibility of other components (such as the crystal oscillator 714A) and their identification markings PI between the main board 10 and the ROM board 11 when viewed from the D3 direction.

The confirmation prompting structure is not limited to the examples shown in Figures 101 to 103, and various configurations can be adopted. These will be explained in order below.

<Other Example 1>
There is no direction in which the light emitting element 31 itself can be seen, but the leaking light may be made visible. Figs. 104 and 105 show an example. Fig. 104 is a plan view of the main board 10 of this example, and Fig. 105 is a cross-sectional view of line mm in Fig. 104. In this example, the positions of the light emitting elements 31 to 34 are moved slightly upward from the examples of Figs. 101 to 103, and are positioned behind the center in the vertical direction of the ROM board 11. For this reason, as shown in Fig. 105, it is difficult to see the light emitting element 31 not only in the direction D2 but also in the direction D3.

However, it is possible to confirm the emission of the light-emitting element 31 from the leaking light. Also, the CPU 704 and other components are visible from the D4 direction. As already mentioned, the light from the light-emitting element 31 brightens the surroundings, improving visibility.

<Modified Example 2>
The visibility of multiple components of different types may be reduced. Figures 106 and 107 show an example. Figure 106 is a plan view of the main board 10 of this example, and Figure 107 is a cross-sectional view taken along line n-n in Figure 106. In this example, the CPU 704 is also located between the main board 10 and the ROM board 11. The visibility of the light-emitting element 31 is similar to the examples of Figures 101 to 103.

The visibility of the CPU 704 is poor in the directions D1 and D3, but the CPU 704 itself can be confirmed in the direction D2. The light from the light-emitting element 31 may be reflected by the surroundings (e.g., the back surface of the ROM board 11), brightening the area around the CPU 704 and making the CPU 704 and its identification display PI easier to see.

<Modified Example 3>
It is sufficient that at least a part of the portion requiring confirmation is located between the main board 10 and the ROM board 11. Fig. 108 shows an example. Fig. 108 is a plan view of the main board 10 of this example. When viewed in the normal direction of the main board 10 and the ROM board 11, only half of the light-emitting element 31 is located between the main board 10 and the ROM board 11. Even in the case of this configuration, it is difficult to see the entire light-emitting element 31 from the front, but it is easy to see the entire light-emitting element 31 at an angle, so that it may be possible to encourage the person checking visually from multiple angles.

It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which some of the multiple light-emitting elements 31 to 34 are located between the main substrate 10 and the ROM substrate 11, and the rest are not located between the main substrate 10 and the ROM substrate 11. The number of light-emitting elements located between the main substrate 10 and the ROM substrate 11 and the number of light-emitting elements not located between the main substrate 10 and the ROM substrate 11 may be the same or different, or one may be more than the other.

Figure 109 is a plan view of the main board 10 of this example, which is a different embodiment. When viewed in the normal direction of the main board 10 and the ROM board 11, in addition to the light-emitting element 31, only half of the CPU 704 is located between the main board 10 and the ROM board 11.

<Modified Example 4>
In the above examples, the liquid crystal control board 680 is composed of two boards, but it may be composed of three or more boards. Fig. 110 shows one example. Fig. 110 is a plan view of the main board 10 in this example. Board 13, shown by the dashed line, has been added. Board 13, like ROM board 11, is disposed parallel to main board 10 and is spaced apart from main board 10 in its normal direction. The distance between main board 10 and ROM board 11 in the normal direction and the distance between main board 10 and board 13 in the normal direction may be the same or different.

In this example, a part of the CPU 704 is located between the main board 10 and the ROM board 11, and another part of the CPU 704 is located between the main board 10 and board 13. In other words, board 13 also functions as a visibility reducing means. In this way, multiple boards may be used as a visibility reducing means.

<Modified Example 5>
A configuration other than the board may serve as the visibility reducing means. FIG. 111 is a cross-sectional view showing one example. In the example shown in the figure, the main board 10 is turned over and attached to the lower case 6822 of the liquid crystal control board case 682. Therefore, the attachment portion 682a functions as the visibility reducing means. In the example shown in the figure, it is difficult to visually recognize the light emitting element 31 and the CPU 704 themselves, but the light of the light emitting element 31 can be confirmed from the leaking light. In this example, it is also possible to configure the liquid crystal control board 680 from a single board.

Figure 112 is a cross-sectional view of this example of a different embodiment. A seal 14 is provided on the liquid crystal control board case 682 as a means for reducing visibility.

The sticker 14 is provided at a position opposite the area to be checked. In the example shown in the figure, it is placed at a position opposite the CPU 704 and the light emitting element 31. The sticker 14 may be of any type that reduces the translucency of the liquid crystal control board case 682 or makes the area to be checked difficult to see, and may be a transparent sticker, a semi-transparent sticker, or an opaque sticker.

In addition, instead of attaching sticker 14, the LCD control board case 682 itself may be made opaque or uneven at the position facing the area to be checked, making it difficult to see the area to be checked.

<Modified Example 6>
The main board 10 and the ROM board 11 may be housed in different board cases. Fig. 113 is a cross-sectional view showing one example. In the example shown in Fig. 113, the main board 10 is housed in a liquid crystal control board case 682, and the ROM board 11 is housed in a liquid crystal control board case 15. The CPU 704 and the light emitting element 31 are located between the main board 10 and the ROM board 11, and the ROM board 11 functions as a visibility reducing means.

The liquid crystal control board case 15 is formed by fixing an upper case 15a and a lower case 15b to each other. The liquid crystal control board case 15 is fixed onto the liquid crystal control board case 682, but a configuration in which it is fixed to the mounting portion 682a can also be adopted. Like the liquid crystal control board case 682, the liquid crystal control board case 15 may be made of a material that is translucent, or a material that is not translucent.

In this example as well, it may be possible to encourage the inspector to visually check from multiple angles. However, the liquid crystal control board case 15 may have a low reflectance of the light from the light-emitting element 31, and in terms of the function of illuminating the area around the light-emitting element 31, a configuration in which the ROM board 11 is also housed in the liquid crystal control board case 682, as shown in FIG. 103, etc., may be superior. Also, if the liquid crystal control board case 15 is removed from the liquid crystal control board case 682 together with the ROM board 11, visual check from multiple angles may not be possible.

<Summary of confirmation promotion structure>
B1. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a first board (e.g., 10), the first board is attached to a board attachment portion (e.g., 682), the first board has a plurality of board configuration means (e.g., 21, 710, 704, 31-34, PI), at least one of the plurality of board configuration means is a first board configuration means (e.g., 31), the gaming machine is equipped with a non-board configuration means (e.g., 11, 14, 682a) that is not included in the plurality of board configuration means, and the first board configuration means is located between the first board and the non-board configuration means.

This configuration may allow the inspector to visually inspect from multiple angles.

The first board may be, for example, at least one of a main control board, a first sub-control board, a second sub-control board, a liquid crystal control board, a ROM board, a power supply board, a dispensing board, a firing board, an LED board, a relay board, and an external terminal board.

The first board configuration means may be, for example, at least one of a connector, a resistor, a capacitor, an LED, an IC, an LSI, a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a switch, a display relating to one of a plurality of board configuration means, and a display relating to the management number of the board.

The non-substrate component means may also be a visibility reducing means.

B2. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that at least one of the plurality of boards is a second board (e.g., 11), and the non-board component means is constituted by the second board.

With this configuration, it may be possible to use the substrate to reduce the visibility of the first substrate forming means, allowing the inspector to visually inspect it from multiple angles.

The second board may be, for example, at least one of the main control board, first sub-control board, second sub-control board, LCD control board, ROM board, power supply board, payout board, launch board, LED board, relay board, and external terminal board.

The second substrate may be smaller than the first substrate, larger than the first substrate, or the same size as the first substrate. The second substrate may overlap the first substrate entirely, or may overlap only partially.

B3. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the first board configuration means is a light-emitting means (e.g., 31), and the light-emitting means is capable of emitting light when a light-emitting condition is met.

This configuration may make it easier to visually check the light-emitting means and the area around the light-emitting means. Also, a light-projecting means such as a flashlight may not be needed when the inspector visually checks. Also, the inspector's hand is not occupied by a flashlight, which may improve the efficiency of the inspection work.

The light emission condition may include, for example, at least one of the following: an interrupt occurs, a Vsync interrupt occurs, a soft reset occurs, a hard reset occurs, an error occurs, or always occurs after power is turned on.

B4. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that at least one of the plurality of board configuration means is a second board configuration means (e.g., 704), and the second board configuration means is located between the first board and the second board.

This configuration may allow the inspector to visually inspect multiple board configuration means from multiple angles.

The second board configuration means may be, for example, at least one of a connector, a resistor, a capacitor, an LED, an IC, an LSI, a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a switch, a display relating to one of a plurality of board configuration means, and a display relating to the management number of the board.

B5. The gaming machine of the above embodiment (e.g., 100) is characterized in that the position of the second board component means is a position where light from the light emitting means reaches.

This configuration may make it easier to visually check the second substrate configuration means.

B6. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the second board configuration means is an electronic circuit configuration means (e.g., 704).

This configuration may make it easier to visually check the electronic circuit configuration means.

B7. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the second board configuration means is an identification display (e.g., PI), and the identification display is a display relating to at least one of the multiple board configuration means.

This configuration may make it easier to visually confirm the identification markings.

B8. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that at least one of the multiple board configuration means is a third board configuration means (e.g., 21,710), and the third board configuration means is not located between the first board and the second board.

With this configuration, it may be possible to visually confirm the third substrate forming means from a direction perpendicular to the first substrate.

The third board configuration means may be, for example, at least one of a connector, a resistor, a capacitor, an LED, an IC, an LSI, a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a switch, a display relating to one of a plurality of board configuration means, and a display relating to the management number of the board.

B9. The gaming machine of the above embodiment (e.g., 100) is characterized in that the position of the third board component means is a position where light from the light emitting means reaches.

This configuration may make it easier to visually check the third substrate configuration means.

B10. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that it includes a board case (e.g., 682), the board case constitutes the board mounting portion, the board case houses the first board, and the board case houses the second board.

With this configuration, the relative positions of the first and second boards do not change, so it may be possible for the inspector to reliably perform visual inspection from multiple angles. In other words, if the second board is outside the board case, it may be possible to eliminate the possibility that the inspector will change the position of the second board and neglect to visually inspect it from multiple angles.

The substrate case may be made of a light-transmitting material. This may improve the visibility of the first substrate and the second substrate.

B11. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the first board configuration means is at least partially invisible from a first direction (e.g., D1).

Specifically, for example, the first substrate forming means may be invisible from the first direction, or may be partially visible from the first direction (e.g., FIG. 32).

This configuration may allow the inspector to visually inspect from multiple angles.

The first direction is, for example, the normal direction of the board. In other words, it is, for example, a direction perpendicular to the arrangement surface of the first board configuration means. The first direction may also be a direction that does not include as a component a direction from one side to the other in the left-right direction of the gaming table. The first direction may also be a direction that does not include as a component a direction from one side to the other in the up-down direction of the gaming table.

The light from the light emitting means may be invisible from the first direction or may be visible from the first direction.

B12. The gaming machine of the above embodiment (e.g., 100) is characterized in that the first board configuration means is at least partially visible from a second direction (e.g., D3).

Specifically, for example, the first substrate forming means may be entirely visible from the second direction, or only a portion of it may be visible.

This configuration may allow the inspector to visually inspect from multiple angles.

The second direction is, for example, a direction different from the first direction. For example, it is the surface direction of the board. The second direction may also be a direction that is not perpendicular to the surface of the first board on which the first board constituent means is installed. The second direction may also be a direction that includes at least a component of a direction from one side to the other in the left-right direction of the gaming table. The second direction may also be a direction that includes at least a component of a direction from one side to the other in the up-down direction of the gaming table.

The light from the light emitting means may be invisible from the second direction or may be visible from the second direction.

B13. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the first board configuration means is at least partially invisible from a third direction (e.g., D2).

Specifically, for example, the first substrate forming means may be invisible from the third direction, or may be partially visible from the third direction (e.g., FIG. 32).

This configuration may allow the inspector to visually inspect from multiple angles.

The third direction is, for example, a direction different from the first direction and the second direction. For example, the third direction may be a direction that is not perpendicular to the surface on which the first board component of the first board is installed. The third direction may also be a direction that includes at least a component of a direction from one side to the other in the left-right direction of the gaming table. The third direction may also be a direction that includes at least a component of a direction from one side to the other in the up-down direction of the gaming table.

The light from the light emitting means may be invisible from the third direction or may be visible from the third direction.

B14. The gaming machine of the above embodiment (e.g., 100) is characterized in that the second board component means is at least partially invisible from the first direction.

Specifically, for example, the second substrate forming means may be invisible from the first direction, or may be partially visible from the first direction.

This configuration may allow the inspector to visually inspect multiple board configuration means from multiple angles.

The second board configuration means may be a light emitting means or may not be capable of emitting light. If it is a light emitting means, it may be for debugging purposes.

B15. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the second board is connected to the first board by a connector (e.g., 22).

With this configuration, the second board may be removed from the first board and visually inspected. The connector may be fixed to the board to provide the connector with a support function for the second board. The second board may be attached to the first board by a fastening means. It may be possible to make it difficult to remove the second board from the first board. The fastening means may be at least one of a screw, a bolt, a nut, and a rivet.

B16. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that the base case is composed of a plurality of case configuration means (6821, 6822).

With this configuration, it may be possible to remove the first and second boards from the board case and check them.

At least one of the multiple case constituent means may be a first case constituent means (e.g., upper case 6821), and at least one of the multiple case constituent means may be a second case constituent means (e.g., lower case 6822), and the first board may be attached to at least one of the multiple case constituent means by fastening means. This may make it difficult to remove the first board. The fastening means may be at least one of a screw, a bolt, a nut, and a rivet.

The device may also be provided with an opening prevention means for preventing the first case constituent means and the second case constituent means from being opened. This may make fraudulent acts more difficult. The opening prevention means may be a sealing member. The sealing member may be attached across the first case constituent means and the second case constituent means.

The substrate case may also be installed on a substrate case installation section (e.g., 682a). The substrate case installation section may have an operation section and may be capable of changing to either a substrate case installed state or a substrate case released state by operating the operation section. The substrate case released state of the substrate case may require destruction of the operation section or a part of the substrate case.

The operating unit may be operated by a tool. The operating unit may be a fastening means. The fastening means may be at least one of a screw, a bolt, a nut, and a rivet.

The operating unit may be operable without the need for tools.

The fastening means may be capable of being changed into either a fastened state or an unclamped state by a tool. The fastening means may also be capable of being changed into either a fastened state or an unclamped state without the need for a tool.

The first substrate may also have a generally rectangular shape, with multiple corners fastened to the substrate case by fastening means.

The first substrate may also be positioned on the substrate case at one or more of the multiple corners by a positioning means.

The first substrate may also be positioned and installed in the substrate case only by the positioning means, without being fastened by the fastening means.

B17. The gaming machine (e.g., 100) of the above embodiment is characterized in that it has a first board case (e.g., 682) and a second board case (e.g., 15), the first board case stores the first board, and the second board case stores the second board.

This configuration may allow the first and second substrates to be protected individually.

The second substrate case may be composed of a plurality of case constituent means, at least one of which is a third case constituent means (e.g., upper case 15a) and at least one of which is a fourth case constituent means (e.g., lower case 15b), and the second substrate may be attached to at least one of the plurality of case constituent means by a fastening means.

The second substrate case may overlap at least partially with the first substrate case, or may overlap completely with the first substrate case.

The second substrate case may be installed on a second substrate case installation section. The second substrate case installation section may have a second operation section and may be changeable to either a substrate case installed state or a substrate case released state by operation of the second operation section. The second operation section may be operated by a tool. The second operation section may be a fastening means. The second operation section may be operated without the need for a tool. The substrate case released state of the second substrate case may require destruction of the operation section or a part of the second substrate case.

<Embodiment 2>
The present invention can be applied to various gaming machines such as slot machines in addition to the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied will be described as an example.

The slot machine 1100 shown in FIG. 114 comprises a main body 1101 and a front door 1102 attached to the front of the main body 1101 and capable of being opened and closed relative to the main body 1101. Three reels (left reel 1110, middle reel 1111, right reel 1112) with multiple types of patterns arranged on their outer periphery (not shown) are housed inside the center of the main body 1101 and are configured to rotate inside the slot machine 1100. These reels 1110 to 1112 are rotated by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, each symbol is printed on a strip-shaped member at equal intervals in an appropriate number, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 1110 to 1112. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1110 to 1112 are displayed vertically in roughly threes through the symbol display window 1113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 1110 to 1112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each reel 1110 to 1112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of multiple types of symbols. Note that, in addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal display devices can also be used as such display devices. Also, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is provided on the back of each of the reels 1110 to 1112 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 1113. It is preferable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be evenly illuminated. Inside the slot machine 1100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each of the reels 1110 to 1112, and a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1110 to 1112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 1120 is a lamp that indicates the winning lines 1114 that are valid. The winning lines that are valid are determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. There are five winning lines 1114. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid. When two medals are bet, three lines are valid, which are the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line. When three medals are bet, five lines are valid, which are the lower right winning line and the upper right winning line. Note that the number of winning lines 1114 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the five lines of the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the lower right winning line, and the upper right winning line may be set as valid winning lines, or the same number of winning lines may be set as valid winning lines regardless of the number of bets.

The notification lamp 1123 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery described below, or that a bonus game is in progress. The medal insertion possible lamp 1124 is a lamp that notifies the player that a medal can be inserted. The replay lamp 1122 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if a replay, which is one of the winning combinations, was won in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 1128 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

The bet buttons 1130 to 1132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 1100. In this embodiment, each time the bet button 1130 is pressed, one medal is inserted up to a maximum of three medals, when the bet button 1131 is pressed, two medals are inserted, and when the bet button 1132 is pressed, three medals are inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 1132 is also referred to as the MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1129 lights up the number of lamps corresponding to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp 1121 lights up to indicate that the game can be started.

The medal insertion slot 1141 is an insertion slot through which a player inserts medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 1130 to 1132, or actual medals can be inserted (inserted) from the medal insertion slot 1141, and the term "inserting" includes both. The number of medals stored display 1125 is a display for displaying the number of medals stored electronically in the slot machine 1100. The game information display 1126 is a display for displaying various internal information (e.g., the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The number of medals paid out display 1127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning some winning combination. The number of medals stored display 1125, the game information display 1126, and the number of medals paid out display 1127 are seven-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 1135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1110 to 1112. In other words, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1141 or the bet buttons 1130 to 1132 are operated and the start lever 1135 is operated, the reels 1110 to 1112 start to rotate. The operation of the start lever 1135 is called the start operation of the game.

The stop button unit 1136 is provided with stop buttons 1137 to 1139. The stop buttons 1137 to 1139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1110 to 1112 that have begun to rotate by operating the start lever 1135, and are associated with each of the reels 1110 to 1112. Hereinafter, operations on the stop buttons 1137 to 1139 will be referred to as stop operations, with the first stop operation being the first stop operation, the next stop operation being the second stop operation, and the final stop operation being the third stop operation. Note that light-emitting bodies may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1137 to 1139, and when the stop buttons 1137 to 1139 can be operated, the light-emitting bodies can be lit up to notify the player.

The medal return button 1133 is a button that can be pressed to remove medals that have been inserted and become stuck. The settlement button 1134 is a button that can be used to settle medals that have been electronically stored in the slot machine 1100 and medals that have been bet, and to dispense them from the medal payout outlet 1155. The door key hole 1140 is a hole into which a key can be inserted to unlock the front door 1102 of the slot machine 1100.

Below the stop button unit 1136 is a title panel 1162 that displays the model name and allows various certificate stamps to be attached. Below the title panel 1162 are a medal payout opening 1155 and a medal tray 1161.

The sound hole 1180 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker installed inside the slot machine 1100 to the outside. The side lamps 1144 installed on the left and right parts of the front door 1102 are decorative lamps for livening up the game. The performance device 1160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 1102, and the sound hole 1143 is provided on the upper part of the performance device 1160. This performance device 1160 is equipped with a shutter (shielding device) 1163 consisting of two right shutters 1163a and left shutters 1163b that can be opened and closed horizontally, and a liquid crystal display device 1157 (performance image display device) arranged on the back side of this shutter 1163, and when the right shutter 1163a and the left shutter 1163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 1157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1157 appears on the front (player side) of the slot machine 1100. It should be noted that the display device does not have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be any display device capable of displaying various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. The display screen is rectangular and configured so that the player can view the entire screen. In this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may also be square. It is also possible to provide decorations (not shown) around the periphery of the display screen so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decorations, making the display screen appear irregular. In this embodiment, the display screen is flat, but it may also be curved.

Figure 115 is a front view showing the slot machine 1100 with the front door 102 open. The main body 1101 is a box body surrounded by an upper panel 1261, a left side panel 1260, a right side panel 1260, a lower panel 1264, and a rear panel 1242, and opens to the front. Inside the main body 1101, a main control board storage case 1210 that stores a main control board therein is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 1249 provided at the top of the rear panel 1242, and three reels 1110 to 1112 are arranged below this main control board storage case 1210. To the side of the main control board storage case 1210 and the reels 1110 to 1112, i.e., on the left side panel 1260 as viewed from the front, a sub-control board storage case 1220 that stores a sub-control board therein is arranged. Additionally, the side panel 1260 on the right side is fitted with an external centralized terminal board 1248 that is connected to the main control board and outputs information about the slot machine 1100 to an external device.

Then, a medal payout device 1180 (a device that pays out medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the lower panel 1264, and above this medal payout device 1180, i.e., below the reels 1110 to 1112, a power supply device 1252 having a power board is disposed, and a power switch 1244 is disposed on the front side of the power supply device 1252. The power supply device 1252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 1100 into DC, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies it to each control unit and each device, such as the main control unit 1300, sub control unit 1400, 1500, etc., which will be described later. Furthermore, it is equipped with a storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined part (e.g., the RAM 1308 of the main control unit 1300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off.

The medal auxiliary storage 1240 is provided to the right of the medal payout device 1180, and an overflow terminal is provided behind it (not shown). The power supply device 1252 is provided with a power cord connection section for connecting a power cord 1265, and the power cord 1265 connected to this section extends to the outside through a power cord hole 1262 provided in the back panel 1242 of the main body 1101.

The front door 1102 is hinged to the left side panel 1260 of the main body 1101 via a hinge device 1276, and above the pattern display window 1113 are provided the performance device 1160, a performance control board (not shown) that controls this performance device 1160, and an upper speaker 1272. Below the pattern display window 1113 are provided the medal selector 1170 for selecting inserted medals, and a passage 1266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 1170 drops illegal medals, etc. into the medal tray 1161. Furthermore, a low-frequency speaker 1277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 1180.

The circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 1100 will be described in detail using Figure 116. Note that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. Note that the above-mentioned wiring structure and confirmation promotion structure can be adopted for the board that constitutes the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 1100 is broadly composed of a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game, a first sub-control unit 1400 that controls the main presentation in response to command signals (hereafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control unit 1300, and a second sub-control unit 1500 that controls various devices based on the commands sent by the first sub-control unit 1400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 1300 of the slot machine 1100 will be described. The main control unit 1300 includes a basic circuit 1302 that controls the entire main control unit 1300. The basic circuit 1302 includes a CPU 1304, a ROM 1306 for storing control program data, lottery data used during internal lottery of winning combinations, and reel stop positions, a RAM 1308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 1310 for controlling input and output of various devices, a counter timer 1312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT (watchdog timer) 1314. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 1306 and RAM 1308, and this also applies to the first sub-control unit 1400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 1304 of the basic circuit 1302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 1314 as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 1304 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 1306 to the counter timer 1312, and the counter timer 1312 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 1304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 1304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse in response to the interrupt request. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 1314 is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 1312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 1306 is set to 47, the reference time for interruption is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 1300 is equipped with a random number generating circuit 1316, which is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates between 0 and 65535, and a start-up signal output circuit 1338, which outputs a start-up signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When a start-up signal is input from this start-up signal output circuit 1338, the CPU 1304 starts game control (starts the main control unit main processing described below).

The main control unit 1300 also includes a sensor circuit 1320, and the CPU 1304 monitors the status of various sensors 1318 (bet button 1130 sensor, bet button 1131 sensor, bet button 1132 sensor, medal acceptance sensor for medals inserted from medal insertion slot 1141, start lever 1135 sensor, stop button 1137 sensor, stop button 1138 sensor, stop button 1139 sensor, settlement button 1134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 1180, reel 1110 index sensor, reel 1111 index sensor, reel 1112 index sensor, etc.) at each interrupt time.

When the sensor circuit 1320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 1316. The random number generation circuit 1316 receives this signal, latches the value at that timing, and stores it in a register that stores random numbers to be used in the lottery.

Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion port 1141, and detect whether a medal has passed through. Two start lever 1135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 1135, and detect the start operation by the player. The stop button 1137 sensor, stop button 1138 sensor, and stop button 1139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 1137 to 1139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 1130 sensor, bet button 1131 sensor, and bet button 1132 sensor are provided on each of the medal insertion buttons 1130 to 1132, and detect the insertion operation when medals electronically stored in the RAM 1308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. The settlement button 1134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 1134. When the settlement button 1134 is pressed once, the medals electronically stored are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 1180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact sensor or a contact sensor.

The index sensor of reel 1110, the index sensor of reel 1111, and the index sensor of reel 1112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 1110 to 1112, and go to L level every time a light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes by. When the CPU 1304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 1300 includes a drive circuit 1322 that drives the stepping motors provided in the reel devices 1110 to 1112, a drive circuit 1324 that drives a solenoid provided in the medal selector 1170 that selects inserted medals, a drive circuit 1326 that drives a motor provided in the medal payout device 1180, and a drive circuit 1328 that drives various lamps 1338 (winning line indicator lamp 1120, notification lamp 1123, medal insertion possible lamp 1124, replay lamp 1122, medal insertion lamp 1129, game start lamp 1121, number of stored medals indicator 1125, game information indicator 1126, payout number indicator 1127).

In addition, an information output circuit 1334 (external centralized terminal board 1248) is connected to the basic circuit 1302, and the main control unit 1300 outputs game information (e.g., game status) of the slot machine 1100 to an information input circuit 1652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 1334.

The main control unit 1300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 1330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300 from a power supply management unit (not shown), and the voltage monitoring circuit 1330 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 1302 indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power supply is below a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment).

The main control unit 1300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 1400, enabling communication with the first sub-control unit 1400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 1300 and the first sub-control unit 1400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 1300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 1400, but is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be sent from the first sub-control unit 1400 to the main control unit 1300.

<Sub-control section>
Next, the first sub-control unit 1400 of the slot machine 1100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 1400 includes a basic circuit 1402 that receives control commands sent by the main control unit 1300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 1400 based on the control commands. The basic circuit 1402 includes a CPU 1404, a RAM 1408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 1410 for controlling input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 1412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 1404 of the basic circuit 1402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 1414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 1400, data for controlling the backlight lighting pattern and various displays, etc.

The CPU 1404 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 1406 to the counter timer 1412 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 1412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 1404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 1404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The first sub-control unit 1400 is also provided with a sound source IC 1418, which is connected to speakers 1272 and 1277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 1418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and speakers 1272 and 1277 in response to commands from the CPU 1404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 1418, and sound data acquired from this ROM is amplified by the amplifier and output from the speakers 1272 and 1277.

The first sub-control unit 1400 is also provided with a drive circuit 1422, to which various lamps 1420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 1144, title panel 1162 lamp, etc.) are connected via an input/output interface.

The first sub-control unit 1400 also includes a drive circuit 1424 that drives the motor of the shutter 1163. This drive circuit 1424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 1163 in response to a command from the CPU 1404.

The first sub-control unit 1400 is also provided with a sensor circuit 1426, to which a shutter sensor 1428 is connected via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 1428 at each interrupt time.

The CPU 1404 also transmits and receives signals to the second sub-control unit 1500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 1500 performs various controls of the performance device 1160, including display control of the performance image display device 1157. The second sub-control unit 1500 may be configured with multiple control units, such as a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 1157 and a control unit that controls various performance drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 1163).

The second sub-control unit 1500 is equipped with a basic circuit 1502 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 1400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 1500 based on these control commands. This basic circuit 1502 is equipped with a CPU 1504, a RAM 1508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 1510 for controlling the input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 1512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 1504 of the basic circuit 1502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 1514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 1500, data for image display, etc.

The CPU 1504 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 1506 to the counter timer 1512 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 1512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 1404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 1504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 1500 is also provided with a VDP 1534 (video display processor), to which a ROM 1506 and a VRAM 1536 are connected via a bus. The VDP 1534 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 1506 based on a signal from the CPU 1504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 1536, and displays the image on the performance image display device 1157.

The arrangement of symbols on each of the reels 1110 to 1112 will be explained using Figure 117(a). Note that this figure shows the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 1110, center reel 1111, right reel 1112) expanded in a plane.

<Pattern arrangement>
On each of the reels 1110 to 1112, a predetermined number of frames (21 frames numbered 0 to 20 in this embodiment) of symbols of multiple types (8 types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. The numbers 0 to 20 shown on the left side of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on each of the reels 1110 to 1112. For example, in this embodiment, the "replay" symbol is arranged on the number 1 frame of the left reel 1110, the "bell" symbol is arranged on the number 0 frame of the center reel 1111, and the "watermelon" symbol is arranged on the number 2 frame of the right reel 1112.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning roles of the slot machine 1100 will be described with reference to FIG. 117(b). The figure shows the types of winning roles (including actuated roles), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning role, and the actuation or payout of each winning role. Among the winning roles in this embodiment, the big bonus (BB1, BB2) and the regular bonus (RB) are roles that shift to bonus play, and the replay is a role that allows replay without inserting new medals, and may be called "actuated roles" to be distinguished from the winning roles. However, the "winning roles" in this embodiment include the actuated roles of the big bonus, regular bonus, and replay. In addition, the "winning role" in this embodiment also includes the case where a symbol combination of an actuated role that does not involve a medal payout (does not involve a medal payout) is displayed on an active line, and includes, for example, winning the big bonus, regular bonus, and replay.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 1100 include big bonuses (BB1, BB2), regular bonuses (RB), small combinations (cherry, watermelon, bell), and replays. It goes without saying that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these and can be any combination.

"Big Bonus (BB1, BB2)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "BB") is a special role (operating role) that, when won, starts a special game, Big Bonus Game (BB Game). The corresponding symbol combinations are "White 7-White 7-White 7" for BB1 and "Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7" for BB2. In addition, flags are carried over for BB1 and BB2. That is, when BB1 and BB2 are internally won, a flag indicating this is set (stored in a specified area of RAM 1308 of main control unit 1300), but even if BB1 and BB2 are not won in that game, the flag indicating the internal win is maintained in the set state until they are won, and BB1 and BB2 remain internally won even in the next game and thereafter, and the symbol combination corresponding to BB1, "White 7-White 7-White 7," and the symbol combination corresponding to BB2, "Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7," are both in a state to win.

"Regular bonus (RB)" is a special role (operating role) that starts a regular bonus game (RB game) when it is won. The corresponding symbol combination is "bonus-bonus-bonus." Note that for RB, the flag is carried over in the same way as for BB described above. However, (details will be described later) in big bonus game (BB game), the start condition is not necessarily an internal win for regular bonus game (RB game) or a symbol combination being displayed on the winning line. Instead, regular bonus game may start after big bonus game has started, and when one regular bonus game has ended, the next regular bonus game may start immediately, so that regular bonus game starts automatically. "Small prizes (cherry, watermelon, bell)" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "cherry", "watermelon" and "bell") are winning prizes that result in a specified number of medals being paid out, and the corresponding symbol combinations are "cherry-ANY-ANY" for cherry, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" for watermelon, and "bell-bell-bell" for bell. The corresponding payout numbers are as shown in the figure. In the case of "cherry-ANY-ANY", the symbol on the left reel 1110 needs to be "cherry", and the symbols on the center reel 1111 and right reel 1112 can be any symbol.

"Replay" is a winning combination (operating combination) that allows you to play the next game without inserting medals (game media), and medals are not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination for replay is "replay-replay-replay".
<Types of game states>
Next, the types of game states of the slot machine 1100 will be described. The game states are information for identifying the type of lottery data selected in a lottery or the like. In this embodiment, the game states of the slot machine 1100 are roughly classified into a normal game, a BB game, an RB game, and an internal winning game of a big bonus (BB) and a regular bonus (RB). However, the internal winning game may be classified as being included in the normal game.
<Normal gameplay>
The winning combinations that can be internally won in normal play include a big bonus (BB), a regular bonus (RB), a replay, and small combinations (cherry, watermelon, and bell).

"Big Bonus (BB)" is a special role (operating role) that starts a special game, Big Bonus Game (BB game), when a player wins. "Regular Bonus (RB)" is a special role (operating role) that starts a regular bonus game (RB game) when a player wins. "Replay" is a winning role (operating role) that allows the player to play the next game without inserting medals, and no medals are paid out. "Small role" is a winning role that pays out a predetermined number of medals when a player wins. The internal winning probability of each role is calculated by dividing the numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each role from the lottery data prepared for normal play by the numerical data (e.g. 65535) in the range of random numbers obtained at the time of internal lottery. The lottery data prepared for normal play is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with each role and loss. The random number obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is determined to be the value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to which role, and the internal lottery role is decided. This lottery data is prepared with settings 1 to 6, each of which has a different probability of winning at least one role, and the staff of the game arcade can arbitrarily select and set any of the settings.

In the normal game, the result of the internal lottery is set to be mostly a miss (not winning the big bonus (BB), regular bonus (RB), replay, or small role), or the stop display result is set to be mostly a miss that does not correspond to any of the role pattern combinations, and the total number of medals acquired is less than the total number of medals inserted. Therefore, it is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player. However, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when a specific pattern combination is displayed), it is a game state that may be changed to increase the probability of internal winning in the replay. In this case, the consumption of medals used in the game is suppressed, and a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning the small role, resulting in a game state in which the total number of medals acquired exceeds the total number of medals inserted, which may be a game state that is profitable for the player.
<BB Play>
The BB game is set to be a game state that is profitable for the player. That is, the BB game is a game state in which the total number of medals acquired exceeds the total number of medals inserted. In this embodiment, the BB game is started by winning a big bonus (BB), and the RB game (described later) can be executed repeatedly in succession, and ends when medals exceeding a predetermined number (for example, 465 medals) are acquired during the game. However, the BB game only needs to be able to execute the RB game multiple times, and for example, a combination (for example, a replay-replay-replay combination) that starts the RB game may be set, and the RB game may be set to start when this combination is an internal win or when a prize is won. Furthermore, the BB game may be terminated when the BB general game excluding the RB game during the BB game has been executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 30 times), or when the number of RB games executed during the BB game reaches a predetermined number of times (e.g., 3 times).
<RB Play>
The RB game is set to be a game state that is profitable for the player. That is, the RB game is a game state in which the total number of medals acquired exceeds the total number of medals inserted. In this embodiment, the RB game is started by winning a regular bonus (RB), and a predetermined one role is changed to increase the probability of an internal win (for example, the internal win probability of 1/15 of "small role 1" set in "setting 1" and "normal game" is increased to the internal win probability of 1/1.2, which is a predetermined one value), and ends when a predetermined number of ones (for example, 8 times) are won. The RB game may be ended when a predetermined number of times (at least 2 times) are won (for example, 8 times), or when the number of RB games executed during the RB game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 8 times). In the above-mentioned BB game, since the RB game can be executed multiple times, when one RB game is executed, the player ends up winning fewer medals than the total number of medals obtained in the BB game.
The winning combinations that are internally won in the internal winning games of the Big Bonus (BB) and the Regular Bonus (RB) include replay and small combinations. The Big Bonus (BB) and the Regular Bonus (RB) are not internally won, and it is possible to win the symbol combination corresponding to the Big Bonus (BB) or the Regular Bonus (RB).

However, the probability of an internal win in replay may be changed from the next play after an internal win in the Big Bonus (BB) or Regular Bonus (RB). For example, the probability of an internal win in replay may be increased, and the game state may be such that the total number of medals won is approximately the same as the total number of medals inserted until the symbol combination corresponding to the Big Bonus (BB) or Regular Bonus (RB) wins, making it a game state that is more profitable for the player than normal play. Note that since both BB play and RB play are game states that are profitable for the player, they may be collectively referred to as bonus play or special play.

<Main processing of main control unit>
The main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 1304 of the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to Fig. 118. Note that Fig. 118 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit main processing.

As described above, the main control unit 1300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 1338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when power is applied. The CPU 1304 of the basic circuit 1302 that receives this start signal is reset and started by a reset interrupt, and executes the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 118 according to a control program previously stored in the ROM 1306.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step SA101. In these initial settings, the initial stack value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 1304, interrupt prohibition is set, the I/O 1310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 1308 are initialized, and operation permission and initial values are set to the WDT 1314. In step SA103, a medal insertion/start operation acceptance process is performed. Here, whether or not a medal has been inserted is checked, and the winning line indicator lamp 1120 is turned on in response to the insertion of a medal. Note that if a player wins in a replay in the previous game, a process is performed to insert the same number of medals as the number inserted in the previous game, so that the player does not need to insert medals. In addition, a check is made as to whether or not the start lever 1135 has been operated, and if the start lever 1135 has been operated, the process proceeds to step SA104.

In step SA105, the number of medals inserted is determined, and valid winning lines are determined. In step SA107, a random number generated by the random number generating circuit 1316 is obtained. In step SA109, a winning combination lottery table stored in ROM 1306 is read according to the current game state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the random number value obtained in step SA107. If any winning combination (including an activated combination) is internally won as a result of the internal lottery, the flag for that winning combination is turned ON. In step SA111, reel stop data is selected based on the result of the internal lottery.

In step SA113, all reels 1110 to 1112 start to rotate. In step SA115, the stop buttons 1137 to 1139 can be accepted, and when any of the stop buttons are pressed, any of the reels 1110 to 1112 corresponding to the pressed stop button is stopped based on the reel stop control data selected in step SA111. When all reels 1110 to 1112 stop, the process proceeds to step SA117. In step SA117, a winning determination is performed. Here, if a picture combination corresponding to a winning role is displayed on the activated winning line 1114, it is determined that the winning role has been won. For example, if "bell-bell-bell" is lined up on the activated winning line, it is determined that the bell has been won. In step SA119, if any winning role with a payout has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning role is paid out according to the number of winning lines. In step SA121, a game state control process is performed. In the game state control process, the process for transitioning between normal game, BB game, RB game, and internal winning game is carried out, and the game state is transitioned when the start and end conditions for those are met. This ends one game. After that, the process returns to step SA103 and the above-mentioned process is repeated to progress the game.

<Main control unit 1300 timer interrupt processing>
The main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 1304 of the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to Fig. 119. Note that Fig. 119 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 1300 is equipped with a counter timer 1312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger to start main control unit timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle.

In step SB101, a timer interrupt start process is performed. This timer interrupt start process includes processes such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 1304 to a stack area.

In step SB103, WDT1314 is periodically restarted (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt) to prevent the count value of WDT1314 from exceeding the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and causing a WDT interrupt (to prevent the detection of a processing abnormality).

In step SB105, an input port status update process is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 1320 of the various sensors 1318 are input via the input ports of the I/O 1310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the presence or absence of the detection signals is stored in signal status storage areas partitioned for each of the various sensors 1318 in the RAM 1308.

In step SB107, various game processes are performed. Specifically, an interrupt status is acquired (various interrupt statuses are acquired based on signals from various sensors 1318), and processing is performed according to this status (for example, stop button acceptance processing is performed based on the acquired interrupt status of each stop button 1137 to 1139).

In step SB109, the timer update process is performed. Various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step SB111, a command setting and sending process is performed, and various commands are sent to the first sub-control unit 1400. In this embodiment, the output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 1400 is composed of 16 bits, with bit 15 being strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set), bits 11 to 14 being command types (in this embodiment, basic commands, start lever acceptance commands, performance commands associated with performance lottery processing, spin start commands associated with starting the rotation of the reels 1110 to 1112, stop button acceptance commands associated with accepting the operation of the stop buttons 1137 to 1139, stop position information commands associated with the stopping process of the reels 1110 to 1112, payout number commands and payout end commands associated with the medal payout process, commands indicating the game status, etc.), and bits 0 to 10 being command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

The first sub-control unit 1400 is able to determine the presentation control in response to changes in game control in the main control unit 1300 based on the command type contained in the received output schedule information, and is also able to determine the content of the presentation control based on the command data information contained in the output schedule information.

In step SB113, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 1308 is output to an information input circuit 1652, which is separate from the slot machine 1100, via the information output circuit 1334.

In step SB109, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring processing, the signal states of the various sensors 1318 stored in the signal state storage area in step SB105 are first read out to monitor for errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc., and if an error is detected (not shown), error processing is executed. Furthermore, depending on the current game state, the medal selector 1170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 1170), various lamps 1338, and various seven-segment (SEG) displays are set.

In step SB117, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is ON or not. If the low voltage signal is ON (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step SB121, and if the low voltage signal is OFF (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step SB119.

In step SB119, various processes are performed to end the timer interrupt end process. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of each register that were temporarily saved in step SB101 are set back to the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 118.

On the other hand, in step SB121, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power outage when power is restored are saved as recovery data in a specified area of RAM 1308, power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed, and then the process returns to the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 118.

<Processing of first sub-control unit 1400>
The processing of the first sub-control unit 1400 will be explained using Figure 120. Note that Figure 120 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 1404 of the first sub-control unit 1400. Figure 120 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 1400. Figure 120 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 1400.

First, in step SC101 in FIG. 120(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step SC101. In this initialization process, the input/output ports are initialized, and the memory area in RAM 1408 is initialized.

In step SC103, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step SC105.

In step SC105, assign 0 to the timer variable.

In step SC107, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 1404 of the first sub-control unit 1400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 1300.

In step SC109, performance control processing is performed. For example, if a new command is received in step SC107, processing corresponding to this command is performed. This processing includes, for example, reading performance data from ROM 1406, and updating the performance data if the performance data needs to be updated.

In step SC111, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step C09. For example, if the performance data read in step SC109 includes a command to the sound source IC 1418, this command is output to the sound source IC 1418.

In step SC113, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step C09. For example, if the performance data read in step SC109 includes commands for the various lamps 1420, these commands are output to the drive circuit 1422.

In step SC115, an information output process is performed to set up the transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step C09. For example, if the performance data read in step SC109 contains a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 1500, the process performs a setting to output this control command and returns to step SC103.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 1400 will be described using FIG. 120(b). This command reception interrupt processing is processing that the first sub-control unit 1400 executes when it detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 1300. In step SD101 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 1300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM 1408.

Next, using FIG. 120(c), we will explain the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 1404 of the first sub-control unit 1400. The first sub-control unit 1400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and executes the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period in response to this timer interrupt.

In step SE101, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 1408 described in step SC103 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 120(a), and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step SC103, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step SE103, the control command set in step SC115 is sent to the second sub-control unit 1500, and the random number values for performance are updated.

<Processing of second sub-control unit 1500>
The processing of the second sub-control unit 1500 will be described using Figure 121. Figure 121 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 1504 of the second sub-control unit 1500. Figure 121 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 1500. Figure 121 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 1500. Figure 121 (d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-control unit 1500.

First, in step SG01 in FIG. 121(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step SF101. This initialization process includes initial settings for the input/output ports and initialization of the memory area in RAM 1508.

In step SF103, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step SF105.

In step SF105, assign 0 to the timer variable.

In step SF107, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 1504 of the second sub-control unit 1500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 1404 of the first sub-control unit 1400.

In step SF109, performance control processing is performed. For example, if a new command is received in step SF107, processing corresponding to this command is performed. This processing includes, for example, reading performance data from ROM 1506, and updating the performance data if the performance data needs to be updated.

In step SF111, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step SF109. For example, if the performance data read in step SF109 contains a shutter control command, shutter control corresponding to this command is performed.

In step SF113, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step SF109. For example, if the performance data read in step SF109 contains an image control command, image control corresponding to this command is performed (details will be described later), and the process returns to step SF103.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 1500 will be described using FIG. 121 (b). This command reception interrupt processing is processing that is executed when the second sub-control unit 1500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 1400. In step SG101 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 1400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM 1508.

Next, using FIG. 121(c), we will explain the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 1504 of the second sub-control unit 1500. The second sub-control unit 1500 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and executes the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period in response to this timer interrupt.

In step SH101, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 1508 described in step SF103 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 121(a), and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step SF103, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10). In step SH103, processing such as updating the random number value for presentation is performed.

Next, the image control processing of step SF113 in the main processing of the second sub-control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. 121(d). This figure shows a flowchart illustrating the flow of the image control processing.

In step SI101, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 1504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of display area A and display area B of the VRAM 1536. As a result, one frame of image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the performance image display device 1157. Next, the CPU 1504 sets the ROM coordinates (the source address of the ROM 1506), the VRAM coordinates (the destination address of the VRAM 1536), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 1534 based on the position information table, and then sets a command to start transferring image data from the ROM 1506 to the VRAM 1536. The VDP 1534 transfers the image data from the ROM 1506 to the VRAM 1536 based on the command set in the attribute register. The VDP 1534 then outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 1504.

In step SI103, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from VDP1534. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step SI105. If not, the process waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input. In step SI105, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, CPU1504 instructs VDP1534 on information about the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of VRAM1536, image size, VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), etc.) in order to form a display image in display area A or B of VRAM1536 based on the image data transferred to VRAM1536 in step SI101. VDP1534 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the command stored in the attribute register.

In step SI107, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, CPU 1504 instructs VDP 1534 to start drawing an image. VDP 1534 starts drawing the image in the frame buffer in accordance with the instruction from CPU 1504.

In step SI109, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal based on the end of image drawing has been input from VDP1534. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step SI111. If not, the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input. In step SI111, the scene display counter, which is set in a specified area of RAM1508 and counts how many scene images have been generated, is incremented (+1) and the process ends.

<<Embodiment C>>
An example of a circuit board applicable to various game machines will be described. Fig. 122(A) is a plan view of the circuit board 1 of this embodiment, and Fig. 122(B) is a bottom view of the circuit board 1. Fig. 122(C) is a side view of the circuit board 1, as viewed from the arrow A in Fig. 122(A). Fig. 123(A) is a side view of the circuit board 1, as viewed from the arrow B in Fig. 122(A). Fig. 123(B) is a side view of the circuit board 1, as viewed from the arrow C in Fig. 122(C). In the figures, arrows X, Y, and Z indicate the longitudinal direction, width direction, and thickness direction (height direction) of the circuit board 1, respectively.

The circuit board 1 is a lighting board that can be used, for example, as the door-side lighting board 734 (Figure 88) of embodiment B. The circuit board 1 includes a board 10, a plurality of circuit components 11, a circuit component 20, and a circuit component 30. The board 10 is a rectangular board extending in a strip shape in the X direction, and has a board surface 10a and an opposite board surface 10b. The board 10 is a rigid board, but may also be a flexible board.

In this embodiment, the circuit components 11 are chip-type LEDs (light-emitting elements). The circuit components 11 are surface-mounted on the substrate surface 10a. In this embodiment, a plurality of circuit components 11 are arranged in a single row in the X direction. However, the circuit components 11 may be arranged in two or more rows in the X direction.

Both circuit components 20 and 30 are connectors to which harnesses are connected, and are mounted on the board surface 10b. Circuit components 20 and 30 are spaced apart in the X direction, and in this embodiment, circuit component 20 is mounted on one end of board 10 in the X direction, and circuit component 30 is mounted on the other end of board 10 in the X direction.

The circuit component 20 has multiple leads 20a. Each lead 20a passes through a through hole in the board 10 and protrudes from the board surface 10a. The circuit component 30 has multiple leads 30a. Each lead 30a passes through a through hole in the board 10 and protrudes from the board surface 10a. The number of leads 30a of the circuit component 30 is greater than the number of leads 20a of the circuit component 20. The leads 20a are arranged in a line in the Y direction, and the leads 30a are also arranged in a line in the Y direction.

Electrode terminals 20b connected to leads 20a are provided within case portion 20c of circuit component 20. Case portion 20c is made of resin. Case portion 20c of circuit component 20 is disposed within the outline of substrate 10 when viewed from below circuit board 1. Electrode terminals 30b connected to leads 30a are provided within case portion 30c of circuit component 30. Case portion 30c is made of resin. Case portion 30c of circuit component 30 is disposed within the outline of substrate 10 when viewed from below circuit board 1.

The circuit component 11 is disposed in region R between lead 20a and lead 20b in the X direction. The length of region R in the X direction is, for example, within a range of 1/3 to 4/5 of the length of the substrate 10 in the X direction. The center position of region R in the X direction may coincide with the center position of substrate 10 in the X direction. The center position of region R in the X direction may be offset from the center position of substrate 10 in the X direction toward lead 20a, or conversely, it may be offset from the center position of substrate 10 in the X direction toward lead 30a.

In the illustrated example, the position of the circuit component 11 in the Y direction is the center position of the board 10 in the Y direction. However, the position of the circuit component 11 in the Y direction may be shifted from the center position of the board 10 in the Y direction.

The height from the board surface 10a to the tip of the circuit component 11 is length L1. The height from the board surface 10a to the tip of the lead 20a is length L2. The height from the board surface 10a to the tip of the lead 30a is length L3. The height from the board surface 10b to the tip of the case portion 20c of the circuit component 20 is length L4. The height from the board surface 10b to the tip of the case portion 30c of the circuit component 30 is length L5. The relationship between these lengths is L2>L1, L3>L1, L4>L2, and L5>L3. Note that L2=L3 may be satisfied, or alternatively, L2>L3 or L3>L2 may be satisfied.

The board 10 may be fixed to the installation site of the gaming machine with a screw from the board surface 10a side. In this case, the height from the board surface 10a to the screw head may be shorter than, longer than, or the same as L1, L2, or L3. The board 10 may also be fixed to the installation site with a nail or the like instead of being fixed with a screw.

In this embodiment, since L2, L3>L1, the leads 20a and 30a are also used as protective members for the circuit component 11. Figure 124 (A) shows one example. In the example shown, the circuit board 1 is provided behind the gaming table component 200, and the board surface 10a faces the gaming table component 200. The gaming table component 200 is, for example, a lens cover, which is an exterior component, and the circuit board 1 is used as a component that irradiates light onto the front of the gaming table through the lens cover 200.

When a load indicated by arrow F acts on the gaming machine component 200, the gaming machine component 200 comes into contact with the circuit board 1 and presses against it. In this case, the lead 20a or 30a comes into contact with the gaming machine component 200 before the circuit board 11 does, preventing the gaming machine component 200 from contacting the circuit board 11. This protects the circuit board 11. When the circuit board 10 is mounted on the board 10 by surface mounting, the bonding strength may be low, but even in such cases the circuit board 11 can be protected.

Next, the circuit board 1 may be temporarily placed on a flat portion (horizontal surface) of the gaming table during component assembly work or maintenance work. Figure 124 (B) shows one example of this. In the example shown, the circuit board 1 is placed on the flat surface of the bottom 210 of the gaming table, with the board surface 10a facing the bottom 210. In this example, the bottom 210 is a plate-shaped member (bottom plate). In this case, since the lead 20a or 30a abuts against the bottom 210, the circuit component 11 is spaced apart from the bottom 210, and the circuit component 11 can be prevented from contacting the bottom 210. This allows the circuit component 11 to be protected.

Figures 125 and 126 show specific examples of the bottom 210 and examples of how the circuit component 11 is temporarily placed on the bottom 210. Figure 125 shows an example in which the circuit board 1 is temporarily placed on the flat surface of the bottom 210A of the outer frame of a pachinko machine. The bottom 210A is the bottom plate of the outer frame. Figure 126 shows an example in which the circuit board 1 is temporarily placed on the flat surface of the bottom 210B of the main body of a slot machine. The bottom 210B is the bottom plate of the main body. In such a case, the lead 20a or 30a can protect the circuit component 11.

The bottom 210 on which the circuit board 1 can be temporarily placed may be at least partially made of a non-metallic material. Such a material may be made of wood, resin, or a metal material with a non-conductive paint applied to the surface. Even if the lead 20a or 30a comes into contact with the non-metallic part of the bottom 210, static electricity is not conducted, and the circuit components 20 and 30 can be prevented from being electrically damaged. The circuit board 1 may be temporarily placed on a wooden work desk outside the gaming table. If the circuit board 1 is fixed to the gaming table with a nail, the circuit board 1 without the screw is temporarily placed on the bottom 210 or the work desk, and even if it is fixed with a screw, the circuit board 1 is placed on the bottom 210 or the work desk with the screw removed with a screwdriver.

<Relationship with Handa>
Next, refer to FIG. 127. The lead 20a is joined to the substrate 10 by the solder 40. The solder 40 has a truncated cone shape with the lead 20a at the center. The height from the substrate surface 10a to the tip of the solder 40 is a length L2'. The relationship between the lengths L2', L2, and L1 may be L2>L2'>L1. In the state of FIG. 124(A) or FIG. 124(B), the lead 20a abuts on the game table component 200 or the bottom 210 before the solder 40, so that the solder 40 can be protected. Even if the tip of the lead 20a is bent or chipped, the solder 40 can be in contact with the mounting surface to prevent damage to the circuit component 11. Although not shown, the same applies to the relationship between the lead 30a and the solder.

<Example of lead on one side>
In the example of Figures 122(A) to 123(B), an example was described in which leads are provided on both sides of the board 10 in the X direction, but the circuit components 11 can also be protected even if leads are provided on one side. Figures 128(A) and 128(B) show one such example. The circuit board 1 of this example is not provided with circuit components 30. The rest of the configuration is the same as the example of Figures 122(A) to 123(B).

In the example of FIG. 128(A), the circuit board 1 is provided behind the gaming table component 200, with the board surface 10a facing the gaming table component 200. As in the example of FIG. 124(A), the gaming table component 200 is, for example, a lens cover, which is an exterior component, and the circuit board 1 is used as a component that irradiates light onto the front of the gaming table through the lens cover 200.

When a load indicated by arrow F acts on the gaming machine component 200, the gaming machine component 200 comes into contact with the circuit board 1 and presses it. In this case, the lead 20a and the end of the board 10 (the right end in the figure) come into contact with the gaming machine component 200 before the circuit board 11 does, preventing the gaming machine component 200 from contacting the circuit board 11. This protects the circuit board 11. When the circuit board 10 is mounted on the board 10 by surface mounting, the bonding strength may be low, but even in such a case, the circuit board 11 can be protected. In this way, the circuit board 11 can be protected even in a configuration in which the lead 20a is provided only on one end of the board 10.

The example in Figure 128 (B) is an example in which the circuit board 1 is placed on the bottom 210 of the gaming table, with the board surface 10a facing the bottom 210, and shows an example in which the circuit board 1 is temporarily placed on the bottom 210, similar to the example in Figure 124 (B).

In this case, because the lead 20a and the end of the substrate 10 (the end on the right side in the figure) are in contact with the bottom 210, the circuit component 11 is spaced apart from the bottom 210, and the circuit component 11 can be prevented from contacting the bottom 210. This makes it possible to protect the circuit component 11. In this way, even in a configuration in which the lead 20a is provided only on one end of the substrate 10, the circuit component 11 can be protected.

<Another example of a circuit component>
Another example of the circuit board 1 will be described. Fig. 129(A) is a plan view of the circuit board 1A of this embodiment, and Fig. 129(B) is a bottom view of the circuit board 1A. Fig. 129(C) is a side view of the circuit board 1A, as viewed from the arrow A in Fig. 129(A). Fig. 130 is a side view of the circuit board 1, as viewed from the arrow B in Fig. 129(A). The same reference numerals are used for configurations that are substantially similar to those of the circuit board 1, and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

Circuit components 12 are surface-mounted on the board surface 10a of the board 10. In this embodiment, the circuit components 12 are chip-type resistors. The circuit components 12 are disposed in the center of the board surface 10a in the X and Y directions.

Multiple circuit components 13 are mounted on the board surface 10b of the board 10. The circuit components 13 are bullet-shaped LEDs (light-emitting elements). The two circuit components 13 are spaced apart in the X direction. The circuit components 13 have leads 13a. The leads 13a pass through through holes in the board 10 and protrude from the board surface 10a. Note that the two circuit components 13 may be a light-emitting element and a light-receiving element of an optical sensor instead of bullet-shaped LEDs.

Circuit components 50 are mounted on the board surface 10b of the board 10. The circuit components 50 are connectors to which a harness is connected. The circuit components 50 are disposed at one end of the board 10. The circuit components 50 have multiple leads 50a. Each lead 50a passes through a through hole in the board 10 and protrudes from the board surface 10a. The leads 50a are arranged in a row in the Y direction.

Electrode terminals 50b connected to leads 50a are provided inside case 50c of circuit component 50. Case 50c is made of resin. Electrode terminals 50b may protrude outward from the end of substrate 10, or may be sized to fit within the end of substrate 10. Case 50c of circuit component 50 has a size that protrudes in the X and Y directions from the outline of substrate 10 when viewed from below circuit board 1A. Substrate 10 may be surrounded on at least two sides by a certain member having a claw portion that engages with circuit component 50, which is a connector that protrudes outward. Such a configuration may be applied to circuit board 1.

The height from the board surface 10a to the tip of the circuit component 12 is length L1'. The height from the board surface 10a to the tip of the lead 50a is length L2". The height from the board surface 10a to the tip of the lead 13a is length L6. The height from the board surface 10b to the tip of the case part 50c of the circuit component 50 is length L5'. The height from the board surface 10b to the tip of the circuit component 13 is length L7. The relationship between these lengths is L6>L1', L2">L1', L2">L6, and L7>L5. Note that L2"=L6 or L2"<L6 may also be satisfied.

In this embodiment, since L2", L6>L1', the leads 50a and 13a are also used as protective members for the circuit component 12. Figure 131 shows an example in which the circuit board 1A is placed on the bottom 210 of the gaming table, with the board surface 10a facing the bottom 210, and shows an example in which the circuit board 1 is temporarily placed on the bottom 210, similar to the example in Figure 124 (B).

In this case, the lead 50a and one of the two leads 13a are in contact with the bottom 210. The other of the two leads 13a is spaced apart from the bottom 210. The circuit component 12 is spaced apart from the bottom 210, and the circuit component 12 can be prevented from contacting the bottom 210. This allows the circuit component 12 to be protected.

Next, another configuration example in which a circuit component protrudes from the board 10, such as circuit component 50, will be described with reference to Figs. 132(A) to 132(C). Fig. 132(A) is a plan view of circuit board 1B of this embodiment, and Fig. 132(B) is a bottom view of circuit board 1B. Fig. 132(C) is a side view of circuit board 1B, viewed from the arrow A in Fig. 132(A). Configurations that are substantially similar to those of circuit board 1A are given the same reference numerals and descriptions are omitted.

In circuit board 1B, circuit components 50 are arranged in the center of the board 10 in the longitudinal direction (X direction) and at the end of the board 10 in the lateral direction (Y direction). Case portion 50c of circuit component 50 protrudes from the outline of board 10 in the Y direction, and circuit board 1B can stand on its own by placing board surface 10b downward and case portion 50c on the mounting surface. Circuit components 13 are mounted on board surface 10a, and their leads 13a protrude from board surface 10b.

The tips of the leads 50a and the circuit components 13 protrude further from the board surface 10a than the circuit components 12, so the circuit components 12 can be protected from game machine components such as a lens cover that covers the board surface 10a side of the circuit board 1B.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 133, the circuit board 1B can be placed on the bottom 210 with the board surface 10b facing down. In this case, the case portion 50c is grounded to the bottom 210 and the circuit board 1B stands on its own. Even if the bottom 210 is made of metal, the leads 13a do not come into contact with the bottom 210, so there is no risk of the circuit components 13 being damaged by static electricity. The same applies when the circuit board 1B is temporarily placed on a metal workbench.

<Other embodiments>
The circuit components mounted on the substrate 10 may be resistors, capacitors, LEDs, diodes, FETs, ICs, LSIs, CPUs, ROMs, RAMs, 7-segment displays, switches, sensors, connectors, and the like that can be mounted on a printed circuit board.

The board surface 10a does not need to have circuit components that are higher from the board surface 10a than the length of the leads 20a or 30a. If the circuit board 1 is temporarily placed somewhere with the board surface 10a side down, none of the circuit components on the board surface 10a will be damaged.

The imaginary line connecting any two of the multiple leads 20a and the imaginary line connecting any two of the multiple leads 30a may be parallel. In the above embodiment, these two imaginary lines are oriented in the Y direction and are parallel. This can increase the sense of stability when the circuit board 1 is temporarily placed.

The length L4 from the board surface 10b to the tip of the circuit component 20 may be longer than the length L2. When temporarily placing the circuit board 1, the worker can be guided to place it with the board surface 10a facing down.

Like circuit board 1A, when circuit board 1A is viewed from the board surface 10a side, a portion of circuit component 50 may be configured to be visible. Circuit component 50 can be confirmed from the side opposite board surface 10b, which is the mounting surface.

The substrate 10 may be surrounded on at least two sides by a certain member, and the certain member may be configured to contact a circuit component 20, 30, or 50 of the substrate 10. The certain member may be positioned by the circuit component. The certain member may have a claw portion, and the claw portion may be configured to engage with the circuit component. The certain member may be engaged with the circuit component.

Summary of embodiment C
Embodiment C discloses at least the following gaming machine.

Item 1. A game table having a certain board (10), the certain board having a first surface (10a) and a second surface (10b) opposite to the first surface, a first circuit component (11) mounted on the first surface, a second circuit component (20) mounted on the second surface, a second lead (20a) of the second circuit component protruding from the first surface, a height from the first surface to the tip of the first circuit component is a first length (L1), a height from the first surface to the tip of the second lead is a second length (L2), and the second length (L2) is longer than the first length (L1). According to this embodiment, a game table having a characteristic board can be provided. When a certain board is attached to the game table, even if an object approaches the first surface, the second lead will come into contact with the object first, thereby preventing damage to the first circuit component. In addition, when a certain board is removed from the gaming machine to check for fraud, for cleaning, for maintenance, etc., and placed on a substantially horizontal part of the gaming machine or on a desk with the first surface facing down, the second lead prevents the first circuit component from coming into contact with the desk, preventing damage to the first circuit component.

Item 2. The gaming machine according to item 1, further comprising a bottom plate (210), configured so that the first circuit component does not come into contact with the bottom plate when the certain board is removed and placed on the flat surface of the bottom plate with the first surface facing down. According to this embodiment, when checking for fraud, cleaning, maintenance, etc., the certain board can be removed from the gaming machine and placed on the bottom plate with the first surface facing down to check, and damage to the first circuit component can be prevented.

Item 3. The gaming table according to item 2, wherein at least a portion of the bottom plate is made of a non-metallic material, and the certain board is a board that can be placed on the non-metallic portion of the bottom plate with the first surface facing down. According to this embodiment, even if the second lead comes into contact with the non-metallic portion of the bottom plate, static electricity is not conducted, and electrical damage to the second circuit component can be prevented.

Item 4. A gaming table according to any one of items 1 to 3, wherein a third circuit component (30) is mounted on the second surface, a third lead (30a) of the third circuit component protrudes from the first surface, the height from the first surface to the tip of the third lead is a third length (L3), the third length (L3) is longer than the first length (L1), the third lead (30a) is spaced apart from the second lead (20a) in a certain direction (X), and the position of the first circuit component (11) in the certain direction (X) is a position between the second lead (20a) and the third lead (30a). According to this embodiment, when a certain board is attached to the gaming table, damage to the first circuit component sandwiched between the second lead and the third lead can be prevented. Furthermore, when a certain board is removed from a gaming machine and placed on a substantially horizontal portion of the gaming machine or on a desk with the first surface facing down, the second lead and the third lead make it easier for the first circuit component to be spaced apart from the portion or desk, thereby preventing damage to the first circuit component.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiments of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention, and such modifications and changes are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Furthermore, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely a list of the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention.

<<Embodiment α>>
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

The slot machine of this embodiment is a gaming machine in which a predetermined number of gaming media are inserted, and multiple reels each decorated with multiple types of symbols begin to spin when a predetermined operation to start spin is received, and a lottery is held to determine whether multiple types of internal winning combinations have been won based on the reception of the operation to start spin, and each of the multiple reels stops spinning individually when a predetermined operation to stop spin is received. If the conditions determined by the combination of symbols when the multiple reels stop based on the results of the lottery and the combination of symbols based on the results of the lottery meet the predetermined payout conditions, gaming media are paid out and the game ends, but if they do not meet the conditions, the game ends without paying out any gaming media.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figure 134. Figure 134 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 134 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and comprises a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed relative to the main body 101. Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of patterns arranged on their outer periphery (not shown) are housed inside the center of the main body 101, and are configured to rotate inside the slot machine 100. These reels 110 to 112 are rotated by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, each symbol is printed on a strip-shaped member at equal intervals in an appropriate number, and the strip-shaped member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 110-112. When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 110-112 are displayed vertically in roughly threes through the reel window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110-112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each reel 110-112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of multiple types of symbols. Note that, in addition to reels, electronic image display devices such as liquid crystal display devices can also be used as such display devices. Also, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is provided on the back of each of the reels 110-112 to illuminate the individual symbols displayed in the reel window 113. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be illuminated evenly. Inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light-emitting section and a light-receiving section is provided near each of the reels 110-112, and a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light-emitting section and the light-receiving section of this optical sensor. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined, and the reels 110-112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the winning line 114 that is active. In this embodiment, one winning line 114 is provided, which is a middle winning line consisting of the middle pattern of the left reel, the middle pattern of the middle reel, and the middle pattern of the right reel. The winning line 114 is a line that is set at the stop position of the pattern that is visible through the reel window 113, and is a line that determines whether or not a pattern combination corresponding to a winning role is displayed. The winning line that is active (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as an "active line") 114 is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium. The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a three-coin betting dedicated machine, and if the number of medals inserted is less than three, the winning line 114 is not active, and if the number of medals inserted is three, the winning line 114 is active. When the winning line 114 is active, the start lever 135 can be operated to start the game. The number of winning lines 114 is not limited to one. For example, in addition to the middle winning line, a right-down winning line consisting of the upper pattern of the left reel, the middle pattern of the middle reel, and the lower pattern of the right reel, or a right-up winning line consisting of the lower pattern of the left reel, the middle pattern of the middle reel, and the upper pattern of the right reel, for a total of three lines, may be set as valid winning lines, or a number of winning lines according to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines.

The notification lamp 123 is a lamp that notifies the player that, for example, a specific winning role (specifically, a bonus role) has been internally won in the internal winning role lottery described below, or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertion possible lamp (hereinafter also written as "insertion possible LED") 124 is a lamp that notifies the player that a game medal can be inserted. The replay lamp (hereinafter also written as "replay LED") 122 is a lamp that notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no medal insertion is required) if a replay, which is one of the winning roles, was won in the previous game. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for presentation purposes.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one medal is inserted up to a maximum of three medals, two medals are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three medals are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as the MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp (hereinafter also referred to as "inserted medal number LED") 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of medals inserted, and when the specified number of medals have been inserted, the game start lamp (hereinafter also referred to as "game start LED") 121 lights up to indicate that the game can be started.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot through which the player inserts medals when starting a game. In other words, medals can be inserted electronically (betting operation) using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) through the medal insertion slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information in numerical form. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to a player as a result of winning some winning combination. In this embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are configured as 7-segment (SEG) displays.

In this embodiment, the stored coin number indicator 125, the game information indicator 126, the payout coin number indicator 127, the setting value indicator (not shown), the replay LED 122, the insert possible LED 124, the game start LED 121, and the insert number LED 129 are collectively referred to as the status indicator 195.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. In other words, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. The operation of the start lever 135 is called the start operation of the game.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have begun to spin by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in correspondence with each of the reels 110 to 112. More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the stop button 137 (sometimes referred to as the left stop button), the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the stop button 138 (sometimes referred to as the middle stop button), and the right reel 112 can be stopped by operating the stop button 139 (sometimes referred to as the right stop button).

Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137-139 are referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation being referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation being referred to as the second stop operation, and the last stop operation being referred to as the third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the first stop operation may be referred to as the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation being referred to as the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation being referred to as the third stop reel. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137-139 are operated to stop all of the reels 110-112 that are spinning is referred to as the operation order or push order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 is referred to as the "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", the operation order in which the first stop reel is the center reel 111 is referred to as the "middle push operation order" or simply "middle push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 is referred to as the "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push". In this embodiment, the stop operation and the operation sequence of the combination of the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation may be abbreviated. For example, a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 is written as "left", and a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the center reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112 is written as "left center right". Light-emitting bodies may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light-emitting bodies may be lit to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that can be pressed to remove medals if they become clogged. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key to unlock the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is an outlet for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136 is a title panel 162 that displays the model name and allows various certificate stamps to be attached. Below the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided.

The effect button 192 is a button that can be operated to execute a specific effect. An illuminator (called an effect button lamp) is provided inside the effect button 192, and when the effect button 192 can be operated (can be accepted as a valid operation), the illuminator is lit to notify the player.

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker installed inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 installed on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for livening up the game. The performance device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and the sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the performance device 160. This performance device 160 is equipped with a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and left shutters 163b that can be opened and closed horizontally, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown, performance image display device) arranged on the back side of this shutter 163, and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 appears on the front (player side) of the slot machine 100. In addition, the liquid crystal display device 157 of this embodiment also functions as a presentation device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation sequence of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the target pattern, etc.).

It is not necessary to use a liquid crystal display device, as long as it is configured to display various performance images and various game information, it may be, for example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. The display screen is square and configured so that the player can see it in its entirety. In this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but it may also be square. It is also possible to provide decorations (not shown) around the periphery of the display screen so that part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decorations, making the display screen appear irregular. In this embodiment, the display screen is flat, but it may also be curved.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to Figure 135. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is broadly composed of a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the main presentation in response to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as "commands") sent by the main control unit 300, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control program data, lottery data used during internal lottery of winning combinations, and reel stop positions, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input and output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time and number of times, and a WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse in response to the interrupt request. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time for interruption is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a random number generating circuit 316, which is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the value within the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When a start signal is input from this start signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (starts the main control unit main processing described below).

The main control unit 300 also includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 monitors the status of various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal acceptance sensor for medals inserted from medal insertion slot 141, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, reel 110 index sensor, reel 111 index sensor, reel 112 index sensor, performance button 192 sensor, etc.) at each interrupt time.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 receives this signal, latches the value at that timing, and stores it in a register that stores random numbers to be used in the lottery.

Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion port 141, and detect whether a medal has passed through. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect the start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, and stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, and bet button 132 sensor are provided on each of the medal insertion buttons 130-132, and detect the insertion operation when medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into a game. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the medals electronically stored are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact sensor or a contact sensor.

The index sensor of reel 110, the index sensor of reel 111, and the index sensor of reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110-112, and go to L level every time a light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes by. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided on the reels 110-112, a drive circuit 324 that drives a solenoid provided on the medal selector 170 that selects inserted medals, a drive circuit 326 that drives a motor provided on the medal payout device 180, and a drive circuit 328 that drives various lamps 336 (winning line indicator lamp 120, medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, number of stored coins indicator 125, game information indicator 126, payout number indicator 127).

An information output circuit 334 is also connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 outputs game information (e.g., game status) of the slot machine 100 to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped when the voltage value of the power supply is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment).

The main control unit 300 also has an output interface for sending commands to the first sub-control unit 400, enabling communication with the first sub-control unit 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400, but the first sub-control unit 400 cannot send signals such as commands to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control section>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands sent by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control commands. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal with a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also includes a ROM 406 that stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, data for controlling the backlight lighting pattern and various displays, etc.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sound source IC 418, which is connected to the speakers 272, 277 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272, 277 in response to commands from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which sound data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and sound data acquired from this ROM is amplified by the amplifier and output from the speakers 272, 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, to which various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp 123, etc.) are connected via an input/output interface.

The first sub-controller 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a sensor circuit 426, which is connected to a shutter sensor 428 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at each interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and other components.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 has a basic circuit 502 that receives control commands sent by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on these control commands. This basic circuit 502 is equipped with a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input and output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by a crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. In addition, the second sub-control unit 500 has a ROM 506 in which control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency division data stored in a specified area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a specified timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 is also provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), which is connected to a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the liquid crystal display device 157.

<Slot Machine Processing>
Next, the processing of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using the drawings.

<Main processing of main control unit>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 136. Note that Fig. 136 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit main processing.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on, first, in step S101, various initial setting processes are performed. In these initial settings, a stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupt prohibition is set, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and operation permission and initial values are set in the WDT 314.

In step S102, a medal insertion/start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, the sensor circuit 320 detects whether an electronic medal insertion operation using the bet buttons 130-132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion slot 141 has been performed, and if an insertion operation has been performed, the winning line indicator lamp 120 is turned on according to the number of medals inserted. In addition, preparations are made to send a medal insertion command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that medals have been inserted. Note that if a replay role was won in the previous game, a process is performed to insert the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game, eliminating the need for the player to insert medals.

In addition, a check is made as to whether the start lever 135 has been operated based on detection by the sensor circuit 320, and if it is determined that the start lever has been operated, the number of medals inserted is confirmed and preparations are made to send a start lever acceptance command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, valid winning lines are determined.

In step S104, the random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is obtained.

In step S105, an internal lottery process for winning roles is performed. In the internal lottery process for winning roles, a winning role lottery table stored in ROM 306 is read according to the current game state (RT game state), and an internal lottery is performed using this and the random number value obtained in step S104. If any winning role (including an activated role) is internally won as a result of the internal lottery, the condition device (flag) of the internally won role (internal winning role) is activated (the flag of that winning role is turned ON). In addition, in this step S105, preparations are made to send an internal winning command indicating the result of the internal lottery for winning roles to the first sub-control unit 400. For example, if a watermelon is internally won, preparations are made to send an internal winning command indicating that a watermelon has been internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and if the result of the internal lottery for winning roles is a loss (non-winning of a winning role), preparations are made to send an internal winning command indicating a loss to the first sub-control unit 400.

In addition, to give an overview of the internal probability of winning a winning role, the internal probability of winning each role is calculated by dividing the numerical data corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each role by the numerical data of the range of the random number value obtained at the time of the internal lottery (65536 in this embodiment). The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each numerical range is associated with each role and loss. In the winning role internal lottery process, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery corresponds to the lottery data corresponding to any role, and the internal winning role is determined. In practice, in this winning role internal lottery process, lottery data corresponding to the current setting value is used from six lottery data prepared for each setting value. The six lottery data prepared for each setting value have different winning probabilities for at least one role.

In step S106, reel stop data is selected based on the results of the internal lottery for winning roles in step S105. Operation conditions are also set for the reel stop data of winning roles for which the stop operation order is required, and when the corresponding reel stop data is selected, the operation conditions are also set.

In step S107, a reel rotation start process is executed based on the start operation to start the rotation of all reels 110 to 112.

In step S108, a reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any of the stop buttons is pressed, the stop data of the reel stop data is referenced in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button, and one of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of pull-in frames set in the stop data. If all of the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S109. In step S108, for each stop operation, preparations are made to send to the first sub-control unit 400 a stop button acceptance command related to the stop button 137-139 that was operated to stop (more specifically, for the first stop operation, a stop button acceptance 1 command, for the second stop operation, a stop button acceptance 2 command, and for the third stop operation, a stop button acceptance 3 command), and for each reel stop, preparations are made to send to the first sub-control unit 400 a reel stop command related to the reel stop position (more specifically, for the first stopped reel, a reel stop 1 command, for the second stop operation, a reel stop 2 command, and for the third stop operation, a reel stop 3 command).

In step S109, a winning determination process is performed. In the winning determination process, a winning determination is performed for the symbols stopped by pressing the stop buttons 137 to 139, and if a symbol combination corresponding to a winning role is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning role has been won. For example, if a "watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol" is lined up on the activated winning line, it is determined that a watermelon win has occurred. Also, in this step S109, preparations are made to send a display determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, a medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, if any winning combination that results in a payout is achieved, the number of medals corresponding to that winning combination is paid out. Also, in step S110, preparations are made to send a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, a game state control process is performed. In this game state control process, control is performed to transition the game state (RT-type game state, AT-type game state). Also, in this step S111, preparations are made to send a game state command indicating the game state to the first sub-control unit 400.

This completes one game. The game then progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-mentioned process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting and transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 137) of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to Fig. 137. Note that Fig. 137 is a flow chart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

The main control unit 300 is equipped with a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and this timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger to start main control unit timer interrupt processing at the predetermined cycle.

In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. This timer interrupt start process includes processes such as temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 to a stack area.

In step S202, WDT314 is periodically restarted (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt) so that the count value of WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (so that a processing abnormality is not detected).

In step S203, an input port status update process is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input ports of the I/O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the presence or absence of the detection signals is stored in signal status storage areas partitioned for each of the various sensors 318 in the RAM 308.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processing according to the interrupt status is executed.

In step S205, a timer update process is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated according to their respective time units.

In step S206, a command setting and transmission process is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type contained in the received output schedule information makes it possible to determine presentation control in response to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and it becomes possible to determine the content of presentation control based on the command data information contained in the output schedule information.

In step S207, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to an information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring processing, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area in step S203 are first read out to monitor for errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc., and if an error is detected (not shown), error processing is executed. Furthermore, depending on the current game state, the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various seven-segment (SEG) displays are set.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is ON or not. If the low voltage signal is ON (if a power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low voltage signal is OFF (if a power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes are performed to end the timer interrupt end process. In this timer interrupt end process, the values of each register that were temporarily saved in step S201 are set back to the original registers. Then, the process returns to the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 136.

On the other hand, in step S211, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power outage when power is restored are saved as recovery data in a specified area of RAM 308, power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed, and then the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG. 136.

<Processing of first sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using Figure 138. Note that Figure 138 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. Figure 138 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. Figure 138 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, we will explain the main processing of the first sub-control unit 400 using Figure 138 (a).

When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. This initialization process involves initial settings of the input/output ports and initialization of the memory area in RAM 408. In this process, an area for storing internal win information, which is information that indicates the result of an internal win, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information that indicates the game status, are provided in RAM 408.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S303.

In step S303, the timer variable is assigned the value 0.

In step S304, command processing is performed, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300.

In step S305, a performance control process is performed. Here, preparation for the performance is performed according to the performance reservation information in the performance reservation area provided in RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing a process such as reading the performance data from ROM 406, and updating the performance data if it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if the performance data read in step S305 contains a command to the sound source IC 418, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if the performance data read in step S305 includes commands for the various lamps 420, these commands are output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if the performance data read in step S305 includes a command for the shutter 163, this command is output to the drive circuit 424.

In step S309, an information output process is performed to set up sending a command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if the performance data read in step S305 contains a command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500, settings are made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 138(b). This command reception interrupt processing is processing that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command memory area provided in RAM 408.

Next, using FIG. 138(c), we will explain the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and executes the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period in response to this timer interrupt.

In step S501, the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 138(a) is incremented by 1 and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S502, the command set in step S309 is sent to the second sub-control unit 500, and the random number values for performance are updated.

<Processing of the second sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using Figure 139. Note that Figure 139 (a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 139 (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 139 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500. Figure 139 (d) is a flowchart of the image control processing of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S601 in FIG. 139(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S601. In this initialization process, the input/output port initial settings, the memory area in the RAM 508, the memory area in the VRAM 518, etc. are initialized.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or greater, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or greater, the process proceeds to step S603.

In step S603, the timer variable is assigned the value 0.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 identifies each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S605, performance control processing is performed. Specifically, if a new command is received in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, processing is executed to read performance data for image control related to the background image from ROM 506. In addition, processing is executed to read other performance data from ROM 506, and if the performance data needs to be updated, processing to update the performance data is executed.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail below) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if the performance data read in step S605 contains an image control command, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control related to the display image (notification image, background image) is executed. When this image control processing is completed, the process returns to step S602.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 139(b). This command reception interrupt processing is processing that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in RAM 508.

Next, using FIG. 139(c), we will explain the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and executes the timer interrupt processing at a predetermined period in response to this timer interrupt.

In step S801, the value in the timer variable storage area of RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 139(a) is incremented by 1 and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, the timer variable value is determined to be 10 or greater every 20 ms (2 ms x 10).

In step S802, the random number values for the effects are updated.

Next, the image control processing of step S6006 in the main processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 139(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control processing.

In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing area of display area A and display area B of the VRAM 536. As a result, one frame of image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (the source address of the ROM 506), the VRAM coordinates (the destination address of the VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then sets a command to start transferring image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the command set in the attribute register. The VDP 516 then outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S902, it is determined whether a transfer end interrupt signal has been input from VDP516. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S903; if not, the process waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S903, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table and attribute data, etc. Here, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 on information about the image data that constitutes the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size, VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) in order to form a display image in display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the command stored in the attribute register.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing the image in the frame buffer in accordance with the instruction from the CPU 504.

In step S905, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal has been input from VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing. If a generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S906; if not, the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S906, the scene display counter, which is set in a specified area of RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated, is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Start lever operation>
Next, the operation of the start lever 135 in this embodiment (hereinafter, abbreviated as "start lever operation") will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 140. The start lever operation in this embodiment is controlled so that the operation content is different based on the lighting state of the insertion possible LED 124 and the game start LED 121. Specifically, the start lever operation is used for (1) the original start lever operation, that is, the game start operation for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 (operations other than the game start operation include, for example, a confirmation operation in a setting change operation), and (2) the same function as the operation of the MAX BET button 132 (hereinafter, abbreviated as "MAX BET operation"), that is, the medal insertion operation for inserting three medals. Here, FIG. 140(b) is a table showing the contents of the start lever operation in this embodiment. In the table shown in FIG. 140(b), ON indicates lighting and OFF indicates extinguishing.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 140(b), (1) when the insert possible LED 124 is off and the game start LED 121 is off, the start lever operation is not accepted, that is, the start lever operation is not treated as a valid operation. Then, (2) when the insert possible LED 124 is off and the game start LED 121 is on, the start lever operation is treated as a normal start lever operation, for example, a game start operation. On the other hand, (3) when the insert possible LED 124 is on and the game start LED 121 is off, the start lever operation is treated as a MAX BET operation, that is, a medal insert operation in which three medals are inserted. Also, (4) when the insert possible LED 124 is on and the game start LED 121 is on, the start lever operation is treated as a normal start lever operation, for example, a game start operation.

In this way, the start lever operation in this embodiment is assigned to either a game start operation, a medal insertion operation, or an invalid operation based on the lighting state of the insertion possible LED 124 and the game start LED 121, respectively.

In this embodiment, in the case of (1), the start lever operation is not accepted, but it may be treated as the original start lever operation, for example, as an operation to start a game.

Figure 140 (a) is a circuit block diagram of the main control unit 300 showing the signal flow related to the start lever operation and the MAX bet operation, as well as the signal flow related to the insertion possible LED 124 and the game start LED 121.

Here, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 controls (dynamically controls) which indicator of the status indicator 195 is to be lit in which state, based on a combination of the LED common signal and the LED data signal. The LED common signal and the LED data signal are transmitted to the status indicator 195 via the relay board 191, as shown in FIG. 140(a). The game start LED 121 and the slot ready LED 124 are light emitting means included in the status indicator 195.

Based on the settings of the LED common signal and the LED data signal, the CPU 304 controls the lighting of the game start LED 121 by sending a signal to the status indicator 195 to turn on the game start LED 121 (hereinafter referred to as the "game start LED control signal"), and controls the lighting of the insert ready LED 124 by sending a signal to the status indicator 195 to turn on the insert ready LED 124 (hereinafter referred to as the "insertable LED control signal").

The start lever sensor signal is a signal indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated, and the start lever sensor signal is transmitted to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via the relay board 191. The MAX bet button sensor signal is a signal indicating that the MAX bet button 132 has been operated, and the MAX bet button sensor signal is transmitted to the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 via the relay board 191.

The lighting status of the game start LED 121 and the insert possible LED 124 is constantly monitored by the relay board 191 (dynamic control monitoring), and based on the state of whether the game start LED 121 is lit or not (hereinafter referred to as the "game start LED state") and the state of whether the insert possible LED 124 is lit or not (hereinafter referred to as the "insertable LED state") (condition branching), the start lever sensor signal received by the lever switching circuit is determined to be either (1) sent to the CPU 304 as a start lever sensor signal, (2) sent to the CPU 304 as a MAX bet button sensor signal, or (3) not sent to the CPU 304, and if a signal is to be sent, the determined signal is sent to the CPU 304.

As a result, when the start lever is operated, the CPU 304 can execute processing corresponding to either a game start operation or a coin insertion operation depending on the lighting status of the game start LED 121 and the coin insertion possible LED 124.

Figure 140 (c) is an external view of the monitor LED group 210 arranged on the main control board of the slot machine 100. Here, the monitor LED group 210 is composed of multiple monitor LEDs, and the monitor LEDs are lamps that indicate, by their lighting state, whether or not the corresponding button has been operated (whether or not the corresponding sensor is ON).

For example, the monitor LED 210a corresponding to the MAX BET button 132 is configured to light up during operation (while the MAX BET button 132 is pressed) when the MAX BET button 132 is operated. In addition, in this embodiment, the monitor LED 210a also lights up during operation (while the start lever 135 is pressed) when the start lever 135 is operated to insert a coin. Note that the MAX BET button 132 being pressed means that the MAX BET button 132 sensor is in the ON state, and the start lever 135 being pressed means that the start lever 135 sensor is in the ON state.

In addition, for example, the monitor LED 210b corresponding to the start lever 135 is configured to light up during operation (while the start lever 135 is pressed down) if the start lever 135 is accepted as an operation other than inserting a coin.

The monitor LED group 210 includes a monitor LED 210a corresponding to the MAX BET button 132, a monitor LED 210b corresponding to the start lever 135, as well as monitor LEDs corresponding to the left stop button 137, the middle stop button 138, the right stop button 139, the index sensor of the left reel 110, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, the index sensor of the right reel 112, the index sensors of the bet buttons 130 and 131, the settlement button 134, the setting key switch, the setting change button, the reset button, the door key switch, the count button, the medal count clear button, etc.

Here, the monitor LED group 210 of this embodiment is configured to determine the operation (pressed or not pressed) of the target button based on the change of the sensor of the target button from OFF to ON or ON to OFF, but the determination of the operation is not limited to this, and the operation of the target button may be determined based on other methods.

In the following, in this embodiment, the monitor LEDs 210a and 210b, as well as the insert possible LED 124 and the game start LED 121 will be collectively referred to as the "related lamps."

<Start lever operation and related lamp illumination>
Next, the relationship between the start lever operation, the MAX BET operation and the lighting state of the related lamps will be specifically described with reference to Figures 141 to 146.

In the tables shown in Figures 141 to 146, the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, and the fourth aspect are specifically described as indicating "lighting", and the non-first aspect, the non-second aspect, the non-third aspect, and the non-fourth aspect are specifically described as indicating "non-lighting", but the opposite configuration may be adopted, and the first aspect, the second aspect, the third aspect, and the fourth aspect may be described as indicating "non-lighting", and the non-first aspect, the non-second aspect, the non-third aspect, and the non-fourth aspect may be described as indicating "lighting".

- Case 1 Figure 141 (a) is an example of a case where operations based on conventional game progress are performed, and shows the transition in the lighting state of the related lamps when a game is started by first performing a MAX BET operation and then operating the start lever.

In state (a), a gaming medal can be inserted, and the insertion possible LED 124 is in the fourth state (lit state).

In state (b), in state (a), a MAX BET operation has been performed (the MAX BET button 132 is pressed). In state (b), the game start operation is possible, so the slot possible LED 124 is in the non-fourth state (off), the game start LED 121 is in the third state (on), and since the MAX BET operation is being performed, the monitor LED 210a is in the first state (on).

In state (c), the MAX BET operation has ceased from state (b) (the MAX BET button 132 is not pressed). Since the game start operation is possible, the game start LED 121 remains in the third state (lit), but since the MAX BET operation has ceased, the monitor LED 210a goes to the non-first state (off).

In the (E) state, in the (U) state, the start lever has been operated (the start lever 135 is pressed down), and the reels 110 to 112 are spinning. The game start LED 121 is in the non-third state (off) because the game has started, and the monitor LED 210b is in the second state (on) because the start lever is being operated.

In the (E) state, the start lever operation has ceased from the (E) state (the start lever 135 is not pressed). The game start LED 121 remains in the non-third state (off), and the monitor LED 210b is in the non-second state (off) because the start lever operation has ceased.

In addition, in case 1, in states (i), (ii), and (iii), the turn-on LED 124 was in the non-fourth state (off), but it may be in the fourth state (on).

- Case 2 Figure 141 (b) shows the transition in the lighting state of the related lamps when the start lever is operated twice to start play with 3 or more credits, and then the MAX BET operation and the start lever operation are performed while the reels are spinning.

In state (a), a gaming medal can be inserted, and the insertion possible LED 124 is in the fourth state (lit state).

In state (b), the start lever has been operated in state (a) (start lever 135 is pressed down). This start lever operation is a coin insertion operation because it is performed while the coin insertion possible LED 124 is on and the game start LED 121 is off (see FIG. 140(b)). Therefore, in state (b), the game start operation is possible, the coin insertion possible LED 124 is in the non-fourth state (off), the game start LED 121 is in the third state (on), and because the start lever is being operated (coin insertion operation is being performed), the monitor LED 210a is in the first state (on).

In this manner, in this embodiment, when the operating means (e.g., the start lever 135) is operated in the first state (e.g., a state in which game media can be inserted), the third light-emitting means (e.g., the game start LED 121) is configured to be in a third state (e.g., lit). This makes it easy for the staff at the gaming establishment to recognize the second state (e.g., a state in which game start operation can be performed).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the operating means (e.g., the start lever 135) is operated in the first state (e.g., a state in which a gaming medium can be inserted), the fourth light-emitting means (e.g., the insertable LED 124) is configured not to go into the fourth state (e.g., turn on). This allows the staff at the gaming establishment to recognize that the first state has ended.

In state (c), the start lever is no longer operated from state (b) (the start lever 135 is not pressed). Since the game start operation is possible, the game start LED 121 remains in the third state (lit), but since the start lever operation (coin insertion operation) has ceased, the monitor LED 210a goes to the non-first state (off).

In the (E) state, in the (U) state, the start lever has been operated (the start lever 135 is pressed down), and the reels 110 to 112 are spinning. This start lever operation is a game start operation because it is performed while the slot ready LED 124 is off and the game start LED 121 is on (see FIG. 140(b)). Therefore, the game start LED 121 is in the non-third state (off), and the monitor LED 210b is in the second state (on) because the start lever is being operated (a game start operation is being performed).

In this manner, in this embodiment, when the operating means (e.g., the start lever 135) is operated in a first state (e.g., a state in which gaming media can be inserted), the first light-emitting means (e.g., the monitor LED 210a of the MAX BET button 132) may be in a first state (e.g., lit), and when the operating means (e.g., the start lever 135) is operated in a second state (e.g., a state in which a game start operation can be performed), the second light-emitting means (e.g., the monitor LED 210b of the start lever 135) may be in a second state (e.g., lit). As a result, when a store clerk checks the operation of the operating means, the store clerk can recognize the state and perform maintenance work, thereby improving work efficiency.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the operating means (e.g., the start lever 135) is operated in a first state (e.g., a state in which gaming media can be inserted) and the first light-emitting means (e.g., the monitor LED 210a of the MAX BET button 132) goes into a first mode (e.g., lights up), the first light-emitting means is configured not to go into the first mode even if the operating means is operated again. As a result, the staff at the gaming establishment can check the behavior when the operating means is operated again.

In the (E) state, the start lever operation has ceased from the (E) state (the start lever 135 is not pressed). The game start LED 121 remains in the non-third state (off), and the monitor LED 210b is in the non-second state (off) because the start lever operation (game start operation) has ceased.

The (K) state is the state in which, after the (O) state, a MAX BET operation is performed while the reels 110 to 112 are spinning (the MAX BET button 132 is pressed). Since a MAX BET operation is being performed, the monitor LED 210a is in the first state (lit).

The (ki) state is a state in which the MAX BET operation has ceased from the (ka) state (the MAX BET button 132 is not pressed). Since the MAX BET operation has ceased, the monitor LED 210a is in the non-first state (off).

In the (K) state, the reels 110 to 112 are spinning in the (K) state, and the start lever has been operated (the start lever 135 is pressed down). This start lever operation is invalid because it is performed while the slot possible LED 124 and the game start LED 121 are both off (see FIG. 140(b)). Therefore, the monitor LED 210a remains in the non-first state (off), and the monitor LED 210b remains in the non-second state (off).

In this manner, in this embodiment, when the operating means (e.g., the start lever 135) is operated in the second state (e.g., a state in which a game start operation is possible) and the second light-emitting means (e.g., the monitor LED 210b of the start lever 135) is in the second state (e.g., lit), even if the operating means is operated again, the first light-emitting means (e.g., the monitor LED 210a of the MAX BET button 132) is not configured to be in the first state (e.g., lit), and the second light-emitting means (e.g., the monitor LED 210b of the start lever 135) is not configured to be in the second state (e.g., lit).

As a result, the arcade staff can check the behavior when the operating means is operated again after the second state.

The (ke) state is a state in which a MAX bet operation has been performed (the MAX bet button 132 is pressed) in the (ku) state in which a start bet operation has been performed while the reels 110-112 are spinning (the start lever 135 is pressed). The monitor LED 210a is in the first state (lit). Start lever operation in the (ke) state is invalid, just like in the (ku) state, but since the (ke) state is a MAX bet operation, the monitor LED 210a is in the first state (lit).

In addition, in case 2, in states (i), (ii), and (iii), the turn-on LED 124 was in the non-fourth state (off), but it may be in the fourth state (on).

In addition, in state (K), the monitor LED 210b was in a non-second state (off), but it may be in a second state (on). As a result, no processing based on the start lever operation is performed, but it is possible to confirm that the start lever operation has been performed by the monitor LED 210b being lit.

- Case 3 Figure 142 (a) shows the transition in the lighting state of the related lamps when the start lever is operated twice to start play with 2 credits.

In state (a), a gaming medal can be inserted, and the insertion possible LED 124 is in the fourth state (lit state).

In state (b), the start lever has been operated in state (a) (the start lever 135 is pressed down). This start lever operation is a coin insertion operation because it is performed while the insertion possible LED 124 is on and the game start LED 121 is off (see FIG. 140(b)). Therefore, since the start lever is being operated (coin insertion operation is in progress), the monitor LED 210a is in the first state (on). However, in state (b), the number of credits is 0 and the number of inserted coins has not reached the specified number (3 coins), so a game start operation is not possible, the insertion possible LED 124 is in the non-fourth state (off), and the game start LED 121 is in the non-third state (off).

In state (c), the start lever is no longer operated from state (b) (the start lever 135 is not pressed). Since the start lever is no longer operated (the coin insertion operation), the monitor LED 210a is in the non-first state (off).

In state (E), the start lever is operated after state (U) (start lever 135 is pressed down), but the reels 110 to 112 are not spinning. This start lever operation is invalid because it is performed while the slot ready LED 124 and game start LED 121 are both off (see FIG. 140(b)). The associated lamps in state (E) are the same as in state (U), and are all off.

In addition, in case 3, in states (i), (ii), and (iii), the turn-on LED 124 was in the non-fourth state (off), but it may be in the fourth state (on).

In addition, in state (e), the monitor LED 210b was in a non-second state (off), but it may be in a second state (on). As a result, no processing based on the start lever operation is performed, but it is possible to confirm that the start lever operation has been performed by the monitor LED 210b being lit.

In addition, since the slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a machine dedicated to betting three coins, when two coins are bet, the game start LED 121 may be in the third mode (lit) in states (i) and (u), and the reels 110 to 112 may rotate and the monitor LED 210b may be in the second mode (lit) in state (e). In addition, when one to three coins are bet, the game start LED 121 may be in the third mode (lit) in states (i) and (u), and the reels 110 to 112 may rotate and the monitor LED 210b may be in the second mode (lit) in state (e).

- Case 4 Figure 142 (b) shows the transition in the lighting state of the related lamps when the start lever is operated twice to start play when there are 0 credits.

In state (a), the credits are 0 and it is not possible to insert medals, so the insertion possible LED 124 is in the non-fourth state (off). In other words, in state (a), all related lamps are off.

State (b) is the state in which, in state (a), the start lever has been operated (start lever 135 is pressed down). This start lever operation is invalid because it is performed while both the slot ready LED 124 and the game start LED 121 are off (see FIG. 140(b)). Therefore, neither of the monitor LEDs 210a nor 210b are lit. In other words, in state (b), just like state (a), all related lamps remain off.

State (c) is the state from state (b) where the start lever operation is no longer performed (the start lever 135 is not pressed). In state (c), all related lamps remain off, just like states (a) and (b).

In case 4, in state (i), the monitor LED 210b was in the non-second state (off), but it may be in the second state (on). As a result, no processing based on the start lever operation is performed, but it is possible to confirm that the start lever operation has been performed by the monitor LED 210b being lit.

- Case 5 Figure 143 (a) shows the transition in the lighting state of the related lamps when the stop button 137-139 is operated to stop while continuing the MAX BET operation while the reels 110-112 are spinning, and then the start lever is operated.

In this embodiment, it is possible to perform a MAX BET operation while the reels 110 to 112 are spinning and to perform a stopping operation (obviously, a MAX BET operation does not result in a medal insertion operation). In the following, the state in which a MAX BET operation is continuing is also referred to as the "bet operation state."

In state (a), the reels 110 to 112 are spinning and a MAX BET operation has been performed (the MAX BET button 132 is pressed). In state (a), a MAX BET operation is in progress, so the monitor LED 210a is in the first state (lit).

The state (b) is the state in which the first stop operation is performed on the left stop button 137 after the state (a), and indicates a state in which the left reel 110 has stopped. In the state (b), a bet operation is still performed, so the monitor LED 210a remains in the first state (lit).

The state (c) is the state in which a second stop operation is performed on the center stop button 138 after the state (b), and indicates a state in which the center reel 111 has stopped. Since the bet operation is still in the state (c), the monitor LED 210a remains in the first state (lit).

The (E) state is the state in which the third stop operation is performed on the right stop button 139 after the (U) state, and indicates the state in which the right reel 112 is stopped. In the (E) state, all reels 110 to 112 are stopped. In the (E) state, a bet operation is still performed, so the monitor LED 210a remains in the first state (lit).

The (E) state is a state in which, after the (E) state, the third stop operation to the right stop button 139 is no longer performed (the right stop button 139 is not pressed). Since the (E) state is also a bet operation state, the monitor LED 210a remains in the first state (lit).

In state (f), the start lever has been operated in state (e) (start lever 135 is pressed down). Since the bet operation is still in state (f), the monitor LED 210a remains in the first state (lit). Furthermore, this start lever operation is invalid because it is performed while both the slot ready LED 124 and the game start LED 121 are off (see FIG. 140(b)). Therefore, the monitor LED 210b remains in the non-second state (off).

In case 5, in state (K), the monitor LED 210b was in the non-second state (off), but it may be in the second state (on). As a result, no processing based on the start lever operation is performed, but it is possible to confirm that the start lever operation has been performed by the monitor LED 210b being lit.

- Case 6 Figure 143 (b) shows the transition in the lighting state of the related lamps when the stop button 137-139 is operated to stop while continuing to operate the start lever while the reels 110-112 are spinning, and then a MAX bet operation is performed.

In this embodiment, it is possible to operate the start lever while the reels 110 to 112 are spinning and to perform a stopping operation. In the following, the state in which the start lever operation is continued is also referred to as the "lever operation state."

In state (a), reels 110 to 112 are spinning. All related lamps are off.

In state (b), the start lever is operated in state (a) (start lever 135 is pressed down). This start lever operation is invalid because it is performed while both the slot ready LED 124 and the game start LED 121 are off (see FIG. 140(b)). Therefore, the monitor LED 210b remains in the non-second state (off).

The state (c) is the state in which the first stop operation is performed on the left stop button 137 after state (b), and indicates a state in which the left reel 110 has stopped. Although the lever is still in an operating state in state (c), the start lever operation is invalid (see FIG. 140(b)), so the monitor LED 210b remains in the non-second state (off).

The (E) state is the state in which the second stop operation is performed on the center stop button 138 after the (U) state, and indicates a state in which the center reel 111 has stopped. In the (E) state, the lever is still in operation, but since this is an invalid start lever operation (see FIG. 140(b)), the monitor LED 210b remains in the non-second state (off).

State (E) is the state in which the third stop operation has been performed on the right stop button 139 after state (E), and indicates a state in which the right reel 112 has stopped. In state (E), the lever is still in operation, but because start lever operation is invalid (see FIG. 140(b)), the monitor LED 210b remains in the non-second state (off). In state (E), all reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

The state (ka) is a state in which the third stop operation to the right stop button 139 is no longer performed after the state (o) (the right stop button 139 is not pressed). Although the lever is still in an operating state in the state (ka), the start lever operation is invalid (see FIG. 140(b)), so the monitor LED 210b remains in the non-second state (off).

In the (ki) state, in the (ka) state, the MAX BET operation has been performed (the MAX BET button 132 is pressed). In the (ki) state, the lever is still in operation, but because the start lever operation is invalid (see FIG. 140(b)), the monitor LED 210b remains in the non-second state (off). On the other hand, in the (ki) state, the MAX BET operation is in progress, so the monitor LED 210a is in the first state (on).

In case 6, in states (i) to (k), the monitor LED 210b was in the non-second state (off), but it may be in the second state (on). As a result, no processing based on the start lever operation is performed, but it is possible to confirm that the start lever has been operated by the illumination of the monitor LED 210b.

- Case 7 Figure 144 (a) shows the transition in the lighting state of the related lamps when the start lever is operated twice to start a game, the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop the game while the lever is in operation, and then a MAX BET operation is performed while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

In state (a), a gaming medal can be inserted, and the insertion possible LED 124 is in the fourth state (lit state).

In state (b), the start lever has been operated in state (a) (start lever 135 is pressed down). This start lever operation is a coin insertion operation because it is performed while the coin insertion possible LED 124 is on and the game start LED 121 is off (see FIG. 140(b)). Therefore, in state (b), the game start operation is possible, the coin insertion possible LED 124 is in the non-fourth state (off), the game start LED 121 is in the third state (on), and because the start lever is being operated (coin insertion operation is being performed), the monitor LED 21a is in the first state (on).

In state (c), the start lever is no longer operated from state (b) (the start lever 135 is not pressed). Since the game start operation is possible, the game start LED 121 remains in the third state (lit), but since the start lever operation (coin insertion operation) has ceased, the monitor LED 210a goes to the non-first state (off).

In the (E) state, in the (U) state, the start lever has been operated (the start lever 135 is pressed down), and the reels 110 to 112 are spinning. This start lever operation is a game start operation because it is performed while the slot ready LED 124 is off and the game start LED 121 is on (see FIG. 140(b)). Therefore, the game start LED 121 is in the non-third state (off), and the monitor LED 210b is in the second state (on) because the start lever is being operated (a game start operation is being performed).

The (E) state is a state in which the first stop operation is performed on the left stop button 137 while continuing the lever operation state from the (E) state, and indicates a state in which the left reel 110 has stopped. This start lever operation is a start lever operation in a state in which the slot possible LED 124 and the game start LED 121 are both off, and the start lever operation is invalid (see FIG. 140(b)). However, since the start lever sensor has remained ON since the (E) state, the monitor LED 210b remains in the second state (lit). In this embodiment, when the lever operation state is initiated together with the game start operation, the monitor LED 210b continues in the second state (lit).

The (K) state is a state in which, after the (O) state, a second stop operation is performed on the center stop button 138 while continuing the lever operation state, and indicates a state in which the center reel 111 has stopped. As in the (O) state, the monitor LED 210b remains in the second state (lit). This is for the same reason as the (O) state.

The (K) state is the state in which, after the (K) state, a third stop operation is performed on the right stop button 139 while continuing the lever operation state, and indicates a state in which the right reel 112 has stopped. In the (K) state, all reels 110 to 112 are stopped. As in the (O) state, the monitor LED 210b remains in the second state (lit). This is for the same reason as the (O) state.

The state (K) is a state in which, after the state (K), the lever operation state continues but the third stop operation to the right stop button 139 is no longer performed (the right stop button 139 is not pressed). As in the state (E), the monitor LED 210b remains in the second state (lit). This is for the same reason as the state (E).

In the (K) state, the MAX BET operation has been performed in the (K) state (the MAX BET button 132 is pressed). In the (K) state, the lever is still in operation, so the monitor LED 210b remains in the second state (lit). This is for the same reason as in the (O) state. Also, in the (K) state, the MAX BET operation is in progress, so the monitor LED 210a is in the first state (lit).

In case 7, in state (i), the monitor LED 210b was in the non-second state (off), but it may be in the second state (on). As a result, no processing based on the game start operation is performed, but it is possible to confirm that the start lever has been operated by the lighting of the monitor LED 210b.

- Case 8 Figure 144 (b) shows the transition in the lighting state of the related lamps when a pseudo game is added to Figure 144 (a), that is, when the start lever is operated twice to start the pseudo game, the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in the lever operation state based on the start lever operation after the pseudo game, and then a MAX BET operation is performed while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped. States (a) to (c) are the same as states (a) to (c) of Case 7 shown in Figure 144 (a).

In state (a), a gaming medal can be inserted, and the insertion possible LED 124 is in the fourth state (lit state).

In state (b), the start lever has been operated in state (a) (start lever 135 is pressed down). This start lever operation is a coin insertion operation because it is performed while the coin insertion possible LED 124 is on and the game start LED 121 is off (see FIG. 140(b)). Therefore, in state (b), the game start operation is possible, the coin insertion possible LED 124 is in the non-fourth state (off), the game start LED 121 is in the third state (on), and because the start lever is being operated (coin insertion operation is being performed), the monitor LED 21a is in the first state (on).

In state (c), the start lever is no longer operated from state (b) (the start lever 135 is not pressed). Since the game start operation is possible, the game start LED 121 remains in the third state (lit), but since the start lever operation (coin insertion operation) has ceased, the monitor LED 210a goes to the non-first state (off).

In the (E) state, in the (U) state, the start lever has been operated (the start lever 135 is pressed down), and the reels 110 to 112 are spinning. However, this spinning of the reels 110 to 112 is a pseudo spinning of a pseudo game. This start lever operation is a game start operation because it is performed while the slot possible LED 124 is off and the game start LED 121 is on (see FIG. 140(b)). Therefore, the game start LED 121 is in a non-third state (off), and the monitor LED 210b is in a second state (on) because the start lever is being operated (a game start operation is being performed).

The (E) state is a state in which the first stop operation is performed on the left stop button 137 after the (E) state, and indicates a state in which the left reel 110 is pseudo-stopped. In the (E) state, the start lever operation is not performed, so the monitor LED 210b is in the non-second state (off).

The (ka) state is the state in which a second stop operation is performed on the center stop button 138 after the (o) state, and indicates a pseudo-stop state of the center reel 111.

The (K) state is the state in which a third stop operation is performed on the right stop button 139 after the (K) state, and indicates a pseudo-stop state of the right reel 112. In the (K) state, all reels 110 to 112 are pseudo-stopped.

The (k) state is the state after the (ka) state in which the third stop operation to the right stop button 139 is no longer performed (the right stop button 139 is not pressed). The (k) state is the state in which the pseudo game has ended, so the game start operation is possible, and the game start possible LED 121 goes into the third mode state (lit state).

The states from (K) onwards are the same as states (E) to (K) of Case 7 shown in Figure 144 (a).

In the (ke) state, in the (ku) state, the start lever has been operated (the start lever 135 is pressed down), and the reels 110 to 112 are spinning. This start lever operation is a game start operation because it is performed while the slot ready LED 124 is off and the game start LED 121 is on (see FIG. 140(b)). Therefore, the game start LED 121 is in the non-third state (off), and the monitor LED 210b is in the second state (on) because the start lever is being operated (a game start operation is being performed).

The (ko) state is a state in which the first stop operation has been performed on the left stop button 137 while continuing the lever operation state from the (ke) state, and indicates a state in which the left reel 110 has stopped. This start lever operation is performed while the slot ready LED 124 and the game start LED 121 are both off, so the start lever operation is invalid (see FIG. 140(b)). However, since the start lever sensor has remained on since the (ke) state, the monitor LED 210b remains in the second state (lit). This is for the same reason as in Case 7.

The (sa) state is a state in which, after the (ko) state, a second stop operation is performed on the center stop button 138 while continuing the lever operation state, and indicates a state in which the center reel 111 has stopped. The monitor LED 210b remains in the second state (lit).

The (shi) state is a state in which, after the (sa) state, a third stop operation is performed on the right stop button 139 while continuing the lever operation state, and indicates a state in which the right reel 112 has stopped. In the (shi) state, all reels 110 to 112 are stopped. The monitor LED 210b remains in the second state (lit).

The (su) state is a state in which, after the (shi) state, the lever operation state continues but the third stop operation to the right stop button 139 is no longer performed (the right stop button 139 is not pressed). The monitor LED 210b remains in the second state (lit).

The (se) state is the state in which the MAX BET operation has been performed in the (su) state (the MAX BET button 132 is pressed). Even in the (se) state, the lever is in an operating state, so the monitor LED 210b remains in the second state (lit). Also, in the (se) state, the MAX BET operation is in progress, so the monitor LED 210a is in the first state (lit).

In case 8, in state (i), the monitor LED 210b was in the non-second state (off), but it may be in the second state (on). As a result, no processing based on the game start operation is performed, but it is possible to confirm that the start lever has been operated by the lighting of the monitor LED 210b.

- Case 9 Figure 145 (a) shows the transition in the lighting state of the related lamps when the lever is operated while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and power is restored after a power outage while the lever is in the operating state.

In state (a), a gaming medal can be inserted, and the insertion possible LED 124 is in the fourth state (lit state).

In state (b), the start lever has been operated in state (a) (the start lever 135 is pressed down). This start lever operation is a coin insertion operation, as it is performed while the coin insertion possible LED 124 is on and the game start LED 121 is off (see FIG. 140(b)). Therefore, in state (b), the game start operation is possible, the coin insertion possible LED 124 is in the non-fourth state (off), and the game start LED 121 is in the third state (on). In addition, since the start lever is being operated (a coin insertion operation is being performed), the monitor LED 210a is in the first state (on).

The state (c) is a state in which power is being restored after a power interruption occurs during lever operation that continues from the state (b). The state (c) is a state in which power is being restored after a power interruption occurs while all reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

State (e) is the state after power is restored after a power outage. State (e) is a return to a state where the game start operation can be continued from state (i), so the game start LED 121 is in the third state (lit). On the other hand, state (e) is in the lever operation state, but the monitor LED 210a is in a non-first state (off). The monitor LED 210a is in a non-first state (off) because the sensor of the start lever 135 did not change from OFF to ON after power was restored.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when the first operating means (e.g., the start lever 135) is operated and the first light-emitting means (e.g., the monitor LED 210a of the MAX BET button 132) is in the first state (e.g., lit), if power is interrupted and restored, the first light-emitting means is configured not to be in the first state (e.g., turned off). As a result, the staff at the gaming establishment can also check the behavior when power is interrupted and restored.

- Case 10 Figure 145 (b) shows the transition in the lighting state of the related lamps when the lever is operated while the reels 110 to 112 are spinning and the power is restored after a power outage while the lever is operated. Note that states (a) to (i) are the same as states (a) to (i) of Case 9 shown in Figure 145 (a).

In state (a), a gaming medal can be inserted, and the insertion possible LED 124 is in the fourth state (lit state).

In state (b), the start lever has been operated in state (a) (start lever 135 is pressed down). This start lever operation is a coin insertion operation because it is performed while the coin insertion possible LED 124 is on and the game start LED 121 is off (see FIG. 140(b)). Therefore, in state (b), the game start operation is possible, the coin insertion possible LED 124 is in the non-fourth state (off), the game start LED 121 is in the third state (on), and because the start lever is being operated (coin insertion operation is being performed), the monitor LED 210a is in the first state (on).

In state (c), the start lever is no longer operated from state (b) (the start lever 135 is not pressed). Since the game start operation is possible, the game start LED 121 remains in the third state (lit), but since the start lever operation (coin insertion operation) has ceased, the monitor LED 210a goes to the non-first state (off).

In the (E) state, in the (U) state, the start lever has been operated (the start lever 135 is pressed down), and the reels 110 to 112 are spinning. This start lever operation is a game start operation because it is performed while the slot ready LED 124 is off and the game start LED 121 is on (see FIG. 140(b)). Therefore, the game start LED 121 is in the non-third state (off), and the monitor LED 210b is in the second state (on) because the start lever is being operated (a game start operation is being performed).

The (E) state is a state in which power is being restored after a power interruption occurs during lever operation that continues from the (E) state. The (E) state is a state in which power is being restored after a power interruption occurs while all reels 110 to 112 are spinning.

State (K) is the state after power is restored after a power outage. In state (K), the reels 110-112 are spinning and play has begun, so the game start LED 121 is in the non-third state (off). On the other hand, state (K) is a lever operation state that continues from state (E), but the monitor LED 210b is in the non-second state (off). The monitor LED 210b is in the non-second state (off) because the sensor of the start lever 135 did not change from OFF to ON after power was restored.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when the first operating means (e.g., the start lever 135) is operated and the second light-emitting means (e.g., the monitor LED 210b of the start lever 135) is in the second state (e.g., lit), if power is restored after a power outage, the second light-emitting means is not in the second state (e.g., turned off). As a result, the staff at the gaming establishment can also check the behavior when power is restored after a power outage.

In addition, in case 10, in states (i) and (f), the monitor LED 210b was in the non-second state (off), but it may be in the second state (on). As a result, no processing based on the start lever operation is performed, but it is possible to confirm that the start lever operation has been performed by the lighting of the monitor LED 210b.

- Case 11 Figure 146 is a diagram showing the transition of the lighting state of the related lamps when the MAX BET operation and the start lever operation are performed during a setting change (also called the "setting change state"). Here, the setting change state of this embodiment is that the insertion possible LED 124 is in the fourth state (lit), and the game start LED 121 is in the third state (lit).

Here, a basic procedure for changing the settings will be explained. First, with the power switch OFF, the setting change key switch is turned ON, and then the power switch is turned ON. This triggers the setting change process to begin in the slot machine 100 (the setting change state is reached), and while operating the setting change button, the setting value displayed on the setting display is confirmed, and the start lever 135 is operated to confirm the setting value. Finally, the setting change key switch is turned OFF. In this embodiment, the setting change operation is performed by this series of operations.

The (a) state is the setting change state. Therefore, the insertion possible LED 124 is in the fourth state (lit), and the game start LED 121 is in the third state (lit).

State (b) is the state in which the MAX BET operation has been performed in state (a) (the MAX BET button 132 is pressed). State (b) is the setting change state, so the insert possible LED 124 remains in the fourth state (lit), and the game start LED 121 remains in the third state (lit). Also, because the MAX BET operation is being performed, the monitor LED 210a is in the first state (lit).

In state (c), the MAX BET operation has ceased from state (b) (the MAX BET button 132 is not pressed). In state (c), the settings are being changed, so the insert possible LED 124 remains in the fourth state (lit), and the game start LED 121 remains in the third state (lit). Meanwhile, since the MAX BET operation has ceased, the monitor LED 210a goes into the non-first state (off).

The (E) state is the state in which the start lever has been operated in the (U) state (the start lever 135 is pressed down). Since the (E) state is the setting change state, the insert possible LED 124 remains in the fourth state (lit) and the game start LED 121 remains in the third state (lit). This start lever operation is also recognized as a start lever operation in a state in which the insert possible LED 124 is lit and the game start LED 121 is lit (see FIG. 140(b)). Therefore, the monitor LED 210b is in the second state (lit). Note that the start lever operation in the (E) state is an operation to confirm the setting value.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when the operating means (e.g., the start lever 135) is operated in the setting change state, the second light-emitting means (e.g., the monitor LED 210b of the start lever 135) is configured to be in a second state (e.g., lit) in some cases. As a result, the staff of the gaming establishment can also check the behavior of the operating means in the setting change state.

<Other embodiments>
In the above embodiment, the start lever 135 is provided with two operation functions (a game start operation and a MAX bet operation), but providing one operation means with multiple functions is not limited to the start lever 135. For example, any operation means provided on the gaming machine may be used, such as the MAX bet button 132, the bet button (1 bet button) 130, the bet button (2 bet button) 131, the stop button (left stop button) 137, the stop button (middle stop button) 138, the stop button (right stop button) 139, the settlement button 134, the performance button 192, the count button, the setting change button, the reset button, the medal count clear button, or a cross key.

In the above embodiment, the monitor LED 210a corresponding to the MAX bed button 132, the monitor LED 210b corresponding to the start lever 135, the game start LED 121, and the insert possible LED 124 are used as examples of light emitting means, but are not limited to these. For example, the LED of the top lamp, the LED of the side lamp 144, the LED of the title panel 162, the LED of the reel lamp, the LED of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the navigation lamps of the reels 110 to 112, the monitor LED of the stop buttons 137 to 139, the monitor LED of the index sensor of the reels 110 to 112, and the LED of the performance button 192 may be used as light emitting means.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when the operating means (e.g., the start lever 135) is operated in a first state (e.g., a state in which a gaming medium can be inserted), the first light-emitting means (e.g., the monitor LED 210a of the MAX BET button 132) may be in a first state (e.g., lit), and when the operating means (e.g., the start lever 135) is operated in a second state (e.g., a state in which a game start operation can be performed), the second light-emitting means (e.g., the monitor LED 210b of the start lever 135) may be in a second state (e.g., lit). However, the first state is not limited to a state in which a gaming medium can be inserted, and the second state is not limited to a state in which a game start operation can be performed, and the operating means, the first light-emitting means, and the second light-emitting means are not limited to the start lever 135, the monitor LED 210a, and the monitor LED 210b.

For example, if the first state is the "reel spinning state," the second state is the "mode setting state," and the operating means is the "stop button 137," in the first state (reel spinning state), the "monitor LED of the stop button 137" will be in a first state (lit) as the first light-emitting means, and in the second state (mode setting state), the "monitor LED for mode setting operation" will be in a second state (lit) as the second light-emitting means.

For example, the first state may be "an AT state in which the operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is instructed to be left, middle, and right", the second state may be "an AT state in which the operation order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is instructed to be left, middle, and right", and the operation means may be "stop button 137". In this case, even if the operation is performed on the same operation means, the light emitting means may be different. For example, the first light emitting means may be "the lamp of the stop button 138 and the frame lamp of the reel 111", and the second light emitting means may be "the lamp of the stop button 139 and the frame lamp of the reel 112".

Furthermore, the first state and the second state need not be the one shown in the example above, but may be two different states. For example, they may be a "game state" and a "non-game state", a "penalty state" and a "non-penalty state", a "normal state" and an "AT state", etc.

The slot machine may be one that does not use medals and only exchanges electronic data, in which case the gaming medium includes electronic data corresponding to medals, and inserting the gaming medium includes inputting the electronic data from a payout control unit or a specified external device (an electronic storage device with a function capable of electronically storing the number of medals loaned and the number of medals won by winning), and paying out the gaming medium includes outputting the electronic data to the payout control unit or the specified external device (electronic storage device).

<Overview of the embodiment>
(1) As described above, according to the gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100) of the above embodiment, the gaming machine is provided with an operating means (e.g., start lever 135), a first light-emitting means (e.g., monitor LED 210a corresponding to MAX BET button 132), and a second light-emitting means (e.g., monitor LED 210b corresponding to start lever 135), and is configured such that when the operating means is operated in a first state (e.g., a state in which a gaming medium can be inserted), the first light-emitting means may be in a first mode (e.g., either turned on or off) (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") (e.g., FIG. 141(b)(i) and the like), and when the operating means is operated in a second state (e.g., a state in which a game start operation can be performed), the second light-emitting means may be in a second mode (e.g., either turned on or off) (e.g., FIG. 141(b)(e) and the like). This is the first basic configuration.

According to the first basic configuration, when an arcade staff member checks the operation of the operating means, the staff member can recognize the state based on the lighting state of the light-emitting means and perform the work, thereby improving maintainability.

Furthermore, in the first basic configuration, when the operating means that has become in a non-operated state after the first case is operated again, the first light-emitting means is configured not to be in the first mode (for example, FIG. 141 (b) (e)). This is considered to be a preferred configuration A1.

According to the preferred configuration A1, it is possible for the gaming store staff to check the behavior when the operating means is operated again.

Furthermore, in the first basic configuration, a third light-emitting means (e.g., a game start LED 121) is provided, and when the operating means is operated in the first state, the third light-emitting means may be configured to take a third form (e.g., FIG. 141(b)(u)). This is considered to be a preferred configuration A2.

According to the preferred configuration A2, the third light-emitting means is in the third mode, making it easier for the gaming store staff to recognize that the first state is being established.

In addition, in the preferred configuration A2, a fourth light-emitting means (e.g., a turn-on LED 124) is provided, and when the operating means is operated in the first state, the fourth light-emitting means is configured not to assume the fourth mode (e.g., FIG. 141 (b) (u)). This is considered to be a preferred configuration A3.

According to the preferred configuration A3, the fourth light-emitting means does not assume the fourth mode, making it easier for the gaming store staff to recognize that the first state is being established.

Furthermore, in the preferred configuration A3, a second substrate (e.g., a status indicator 195, etc.) on which the third light-emitting means and the fourth light-emitting means are provided is provided, which is preferred as a configuration A4.

According to preferred configuration 4, the third light-emitting means and the fourth light-emitting means are provided on the same substrate, making it easy for game staff to check the behavior of the light-emitting means.

Furthermore, in the first basic configuration, preferred configuration A1, preferred configuration A2, preferred configuration A3, or preferred configuration A4, a first board (e.g., main control board 190) on which the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are provided is provided, which is preferred configuration A5.

According to the preferred configuration A5, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are provided on the same substrate, making it easy for game center staff to check the behavior of the light-emitting means.

(2) According to the gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100) of the above embodiment, the gaming machine is equipped with an operating means (e.g., start lever 135), a first light-emitting means (e.g., monitor LED 210a corresponding to MAX BET button 132), and a second light-emitting means (e.g., monitor LED 210b corresponding to start lever 135), and when the operating means is operated in a first state (e.g., a state in which a gaming medium can be inserted), the first light-emitting means goes into a first state (e.g., either lit or unlit) (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"). ) (e.g., FIG. 141(b)(i) etc.), when the operation means is operated in a second state (e.g., a state in which a game start operation is possible), the second light-emitting means may be in a second mode (e.g., either on or off) (e.g., FIG. 141(b)(e) etc.), and when the power is restored while the operation means is operated and the first light-emitting means is in the first mode, the first light-emitting means is not in the first mode (e.g., FIG. 145(a)(i)-(e) etc.).

According to the second basic configuration, when a gaming store clerk checks the operation of the operating means, the clerk can recognize the state based on the lighting state of the light-emitting means and perform the work, thereby improving maintainability. In addition, the gaming store clerk can check the behavior when power is restored based on the lighting state of the first light-emitting means.

Furthermore, in the second basic configuration, when the operating means that has become in a non-operated state after the first case is operated again, the first light-emitting means is configured not to be in the first mode (for example, FIG. 141 (b) (e)). This is considered to be a preferred configuration B1.

According to the preferred configuration B1, it is possible for the gaming store staff to check the behavior when the operating means is operated again.

Furthermore, in the second basic configuration, a third light-emitting means (e.g., a game start LED 121) is provided, and when the operating means is operated in the first state, the third light-emitting means may be configured to assume a third state (e.g., FIG. 141 (b) (u)). This is considered to be a preferred configuration B2.

According to the preferred configuration B2, the third light-emitting means is in the third mode, making it easier for the gaming store staff to recognize that the first state is being established.

Furthermore, in the preferred configuration B2, a fourth light-emitting means (e.g., a turn-on LED 124) is provided, and when the operating means is operated in the first state, the fourth light-emitting means is configured not to assume the fourth mode (e.g., FIG. 141 (b) (u)). This is considered to be a preferred configuration B3.

In the preferred configuration B3, the fourth light-emitting means does not assume the fourth mode, making it easier for the gaming store staff to recognize that the first state is being established.

Furthermore, in preferred configuration B3, a second substrate (e.g., a status indicator 195, etc.) on which the third light-emitting means and the fourth light-emitting means are provided is provided, which is preferred configuration B4.

According to the preferred configuration B4, the third light-emitting means and the fourth light-emitting means are provided on the same substrate, making it easy for game staff to check the behavior of the light-emitting means.

In addition, in the second basic configuration, preferred configuration B1, preferred configuration B2, preferred configuration B3, or preferred configuration B4, a first board (e.g., main control board 190) on which the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are provided is provided, which is preferred configuration B5.

According to the preferred configuration B5, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are provided on the same substrate, making it easy for game center staff to check the behavior of the light-emitting means.

(3) According to the gaming machine of the above embodiment (e.g., slot machine 100), the gaming machine is provided with an operating means (e.g., start lever 135), a first light-emitting means (e.g., monitor LED 210a corresponding to MAX BET button 132), and a second light-emitting means (e.g., monitor LED 210b corresponding to start lever 135), and when the operating means is operated in a first state (e.g., a state in which a gaming medium can be inserted), the first light-emitting means goes into a first state (e.g., either lit or unlit) (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"). ) (e.g., FIG. 141(b)(i) etc.), when the operation means is operated in a second state (e.g., a state in which a game start operation is possible), the second light-emitting means may be in a second mode (e.g., either on or off) (e.g., FIG. 141(b)(e) etc.), and when the power is restored while the operation means is operated and the second light-emitting means is in the second mode, the second light-emitting means is not in the second mode (e.g., FIG. 145(b)(e)-(ka) etc.).

According to the third basic configuration, when a gaming store staff member checks the operation of the operating means, the staff member can recognize the state based on the lighting state of the light-emitting means and perform the work, thereby improving maintainability. In addition, the gaming store staff member can check the behavior when power is restored based on the lighting state of the second light-emitting means.

Furthermore, in the third basic configuration, when the operating means that has become in a non-operated state after the first case is operated again, the first light-emitting means is configured not to be in the first mode (for example, FIG. 141 (b) (e)). This is considered to be a preferred configuration C1.

The preferred configuration C1 allows the gaming store staff to check the behavior when the operating means is operated again.

Furthermore, in the third basic configuration, a third light-emitting means (e.g., a game start LED 121) is provided, and when the operating means is operated in the first state, the third light-emitting means may be configured to take a third form (e.g., FIG. 141(b)(u)). This is considered to be a preferred configuration C2.

According to the preferred configuration C2, the third light-emitting means is in the third mode, making it easier for the gaming store staff to recognize that the first state is being established.

Furthermore, in the preferred configuration C2, a fourth light-emitting means (e.g., a turn-on LED 124) is provided, and when the operating means is operated in the first state, the fourth light-emitting means is configured not to assume the fourth mode (e.g., FIG. 141 (b) (u)). This is considered to be a preferred configuration C3.

In the preferred configuration C3, the fourth light-emitting means does not assume the fourth mode, making it easier for game staff to recognize that the first state is being established.

Furthermore, in the preferred configuration C3, a second substrate (e.g., a status indicator 195, etc.) on which the third light-emitting means and the fourth light-emitting means are provided is provided, which is preferred as a configuration C4.

According to the preferred configuration C4, the third light-emitting means and the fourth light-emitting means are provided on the same substrate, making it easy for game staff to check the behavior of the light-emitting means.

Furthermore, in the third basic configuration, preferred configuration C1, preferred configuration C2, preferred configuration C3, or preferred configuration C4, a first board (e.g., main control board 190) on which the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are provided is provided, which is preferred configuration C5.

In the preferred configuration C5, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are provided on the same substrate, making it easy for game center staff to check the behavior of the light-emitting means.

(4) According to the gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100) of the above embodiment, the gaming machine is equipped with an operating means (e.g., start lever 135), a first light-emitting means (e.g., monitor LED 210a corresponding to MAX BET button 132), and a second light-emitting means (e.g., monitor LED 210b corresponding to start lever 135), and when the operating means is operated in a first state (e.g., a state in which a gaming medium can be inserted), the first light-emitting means becomes a first mode (e.g., either lit or unlit) (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"). The fourth basic configuration is that the first light-emitting means is configured to have a second mode (e.g., either on or off) when the operating means is operated in a second state (e.g., a state in which a game start operation is possible) (hereinafter referred to as the "second case") (e.g., FIG. 141(b)(e)), and that the first light-emitting means is not configured to have the first mode when the operating means, which has become non-operated after the second case, is operated again (e.g., FIG. 141(b)(k)).

According to the fourth basic configuration, when a gaming store clerk checks the operation of the operating means, the clerk can recognize the state based on the lighting state of the light-emitting means and perform the work, thereby improving maintainability. In addition, the gaming store clerk can check the behavior when the operating means is operated again based on the lighting state of the first light-emitting means after the second case.

Furthermore, in the fourth basic configuration, when the operating means that has become in a non-operated state after the first case is operated again, the first light-emitting means is configured not to be in the first mode (for example, FIG. 141 (b) (e)). This is considered to be a preferred configuration D1.

According to the preferred configuration D1, it is possible for the gaming store staff to check the behavior when the operating means is operated again.

Furthermore, in the fourth basic configuration, a third light-emitting means (e.g., a game start LED 121) is provided, and when the operating means is operated in the first state, the third light-emitting means may be configured to assume a third state (e.g., FIG. 141 (b) (u)). This is considered to be a preferred configuration D2.

According to the preferred configuration D2, the third light-emitting means is in the third mode, making it easier for the gaming store staff to recognize that the first state is being established.

Furthermore, in the preferred configuration D2, a fourth light-emitting means (e.g., a turn-on LED 124) is provided, and when the operating means is operated in the first state, the fourth light-emitting means is configured not to assume the fourth mode (e.g., FIG. 141 (b) (u)). This is considered to be a preferred configuration D3.

In the preferred configuration D3, the fourth light-emitting means does not assume the fourth mode, making it easier for game store staff to recognize that the first state is being established.

Furthermore, in the preferred configuration D3, a second substrate (e.g., a status indicator 195, etc.) on which the third light-emitting means and the fourth light-emitting means are provided is provided, which is a preferred configuration D4.

According to the preferred configuration D4, the third light-emitting means and the fourth light-emitting means are provided on the same substrate, making it easy for game staff to check the behavior of the light-emitting means.

Furthermore, in the fourth basic configuration, preferred configuration D1, preferred configuration D2, preferred configuration D3, or preferred configuration D4, a first board (e.g., main control board 190) on which the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are provided is provided, which is preferred configuration D5.

According to the preferred configuration D5, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are provided on the same substrate, making it easy for game center staff to check the behavior of the light-emitting means.

(5) According to the gaming machine (e.g., slot machine 100) of the above embodiment, the gaming machine is equipped with an operating means (e.g., start lever 135), a first light-emitting means (e.g., monitor LED 210a corresponding to MAX BET button 132), and a second light-emitting means (e.g., monitor LED 210b corresponding to start lever 135), and when the operating means is operated in a first state (e.g., a state in which a gaming medium can be inserted), the first light-emitting means becomes a first mode (e.g., either lit or unlit) (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"). The fifth basic configuration is that the second light-emitting means is configured to have a second mode (e.g., either on or off) when the operating means is operated in a second state (e.g., a state in which a game start operation is possible) (hereinafter referred to as the "second case") (e.g., FIG. 141(b)(e)), and that the second light-emitting means does not have the second mode when the operating means that has become non-operated after the second case is operated again (e.g., FIG. 141(b)(k)).

According to the fifth basic configuration, when a gaming store clerk checks the operation of the operating means, the clerk can recognize the state based on the lighting state of the light-emitting means and perform the work, thereby improving maintainability. In addition, the gaming store clerk can check the behavior when the operating means is operated again based on the lighting state of the second light-emitting means after the second case.

Furthermore, in the fifth basic configuration, when the operating means that has become in a non-operated state after the first case is operated again, the first light-emitting means is configured not to be in the first mode (for example, FIG. 141 (b) (e)). This is considered to be a preferred configuration E1.

The preferred configuration E1 allows the gaming store staff to check the behavior when the operating means is operated again.

Furthermore, in the fifth basic configuration, a third light-emitting means (e.g., a game start LED 121) is provided, and when the operating means is operated in the first state, the third light-emitting means may be configured to assume a third state (e.g., FIG. 141(b)(u)). This is considered to be a preferred configuration E2.

According to the preferred configuration E2, the third light-emitting means is in the third mode, making it easier for the gaming store staff to recognize that the first state is being established.

Furthermore, in the preferred configuration E2, a fourth light-emitting means (e.g., a turn-on LED 124) is provided, and when the operating means is operated in the first state, the fourth light-emitting means is configured not to assume the fourth mode (e.g., FIG. 141 (b) (u)). This is considered to be a preferred configuration E3.

In the preferred configuration E3, the fourth light-emitting means does not assume the fourth mode, making it easier for game store staff to recognize that the first state is being established.

Furthermore, in preferred configuration E3, a second substrate (e.g., a status indicator 195, etc.) on which the third light-emitting means and the fourth light-emitting means are provided is provided, which is preferred configuration E4.

According to the preferred configuration E4, the third light-emitting means and the fourth light-emitting means are provided on the same substrate, making it easy for game staff to check the behavior of the light-emitting means.

Furthermore, in the fifth basic configuration, preferred configuration E1, preferred configuration E2, preferred configuration E3, or preferred configuration E4, a first board (e.g., main control board 190) on which the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are provided is provided, which is preferred configuration E5.

According to the preferred configuration E5, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are provided on the same substrate, making it easy for game center staff to check the behavior of the light-emitting means.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiments of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention, and such modifications and changes are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Furthermore, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention are merely a list of the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention.

100 Slot machine 110, 111, 112 Reel 113 Reel window 123 Notification lamp 127 Payout number display 130, 131, 132 Coin insertion button 135 Start lever 137, 138, 139 Stop button 157 Performance image display device 192 Performance button 272, 277 Speaker 300 Main control unit 400 First sub-control unit 500 Second sub-control unit RU Lamp unit LU Light-emitting unit LU1 First light-emitting unit LU2 Second light-emitting unit α110 First reflecting portion α111, α121 Reflecting portion α120 Second reflecting portion α130, α140 Light-emitting portion α131, α141, α160 Light-emitting substrate α132 Inner lens αRC Lens cut surface αRCi Inner lens cut surface αRCo Outer lens cut surface αRCs Single lens cut surface α133 Outer lens α140 First light-emitting portion α141 First light-emitting substrate α142 First inner lens αRC1 First lens cut surface α143 First outer lens α150 Second light-emitting portion α151 Second light-emitting substrate α152 Second inner lens αRC2 Second lens cut surface α153 Second outer lens α170 Reflecting member α180 Semi-reflective member 181 Half mirror 182 Lens member

Claims (1)

A first cover portion including at least a permeable portion having permeability;
A first reflecting portion including at least a reflecting portion capable of reflecting light;
A second reflecting portion including at least a reflecting portion capable of reflecting light;
A light emitting means covered by the first cover portion;
A gaming machine equipped with
The light from the light emitting means is directed toward at least a player by the first cover portion,
The light from the light emitting means is directed toward at least the first reflecting portion by the first cover portion,
The first cover portion has a lens cut portion,
At least a first portion of the lens cut portion is configured to be reflected by the first reflecting portion,
At least a second portion of the lens cut portion is configured to be reflected by the second reflecting portion.
A gaming machine characterized by: